■:i'.,'-: 
 
 f 
 
 I V'. "' 
 
 
 '.li.'. : ■ I 
 
 
 ir..i''(i'"*;( I* '■■■'I '■ ' i; ' ■ ' ' ' 
 
 •Sana 
 
 'li'-' I'lff'' I- 't - <*- 6.-; '■ 
 
 
 »>(
 
 UNIVERSITY Of CALIFORN! 
 AT LOS ANGELES 
 
 GIFT C^ 
 
 CARNEGIE INSTITUTION 
 
 OF VMSHINGTON 
 
 ^
 
 DICTIONARY AND GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THE 
 
 LANGUAGE OF SA'A AND 
 ULAWA. SOLOMON ISLANDS 
 
 BY 
 
 WALTER G. IVENS, M. A. 
 
 WITH APPENDICES 
 
 Published by the Carnegie Institution of Washington 
 
 Washington, 1918 
 
 i7 4S
 
 DICTIONARY AND GRAMMAR 
 
 OF THL 
 
 LANGUAGE OF SA*A AND 
 ULAWA, SOLOiMON ISLANDS 
 
 BY 
 
 WALTER G. IVENS, M. A. 
 
 WITH APPENDICES 
 
 Published by the Carnegie Institution of Washington 
 
 Washington, 191 8
 
 CARNEGIE INSTITUTION OF WASHINGTON 
 Publication No. 253 
 
 • • • • .* V • *, * 
 
 » •• ••• , ••• 
 
 •• • .♦., •• •••' 
 
 • • 
 
 
 PRESS OF GIBSON BROTHERS 
 WASHINGTON
 
 X 
 
 m 
 w 
 Q 
 
 l-H 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 
 w 
 < 
 
 < 
 >— ( 
 J 
 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 o 
 
 2 
 
 Q 
 Z 
 
 < 
 
 w
 
 r 
 
 
 PREFACE. 
 
 The two languages, Sa'a and Ulawa, of which a dictionary is here 
 presented, belong to one of the Melanesian groups of the Oceanic 
 family of languages. Ulawa is the language spoken in the ten villages 
 of the small island of Ulawa, the Contrariete Island of the charts, in the 
 southeast Solomons. Sa'a is spoken in its purity in the village of the 
 same name, the last inhabited place on the southeast extremity of the 
 large island of Malaita, which lies some 30 miles west of Ulawa. 
 
 Malaita is composed of two islands, commonly called Big and Little 
 Malaita, separated by a narrow channel designated Mara Masiki Chan- 
 nel on the Admiralty chart, but called Laloi Su'u (literally **within-the- 
 inlet") by the people who use the languages presented here. Sa'a is 
 situated on the Malaita coast exactly opposite Ulawa, and there is con- 
 stant communication between the two places during the calmer weather 
 after the dropping of the southeast trade winds. The two languages 
 are evidently from a common stock and are so closely allied that it has 
 been found quite possible in the present work to adjust the various 
 details to the same scheme of treatment, both as to grammar and 
 vocabulary. 
 
 Of the two, Sa'a is far more highly specialized than Ulawa. This 
 specialization is shown: 
 
 1. In the use of nouns in the singular number, and particularly of such 
 
 as are the names of parts of the body, without the definite article 
 nga being prefixed. 
 
 2. In the very careful observance of the phonetic rule that the vowel a 
 
 changes' to e in certain words after a preceding i or u or after the 
 verbal particle ko. 
 
 3. In the very frequent use of the gerundive. 
 
 4. In the richer vocabulary and in the employment of words not used in 
 
 Ulawa in order to avoid uncertainty in meaning, e. g., Sa'a nunif 
 house, nime bowl, where Ulawa employs nima for both; Sa'a domu 
 to fall (of persons only) in addition to 'nsu, where Ulawa has only 
 'usu for both. 
 
 5. In the fuller forms of the pronoun used as subject of the verb and in 
 
 the more particular and careful use of the quasi-trinal forms end- 
 ing in -in. 
 
 6. In the dropping of an inner consonant in the reduplication of stems. 
 
 The name of Contrariete Island is Ulawa and not Ulava or Ulaua, as 
 is sometimes found; the language has no v sound, and in Lau, where 
 w changes to q (kw), the island is known as Ulaqa. The number of 
 persons who live on Ulawa and who speak Ulawa is not more than i ,200 
 at the outside; but the language has a certain and considerable extrinsic 
 importance in view of the fact that a number of villages on Ugi, the 
 island lying off the east coast of San Cristoval, have Ulawa teachers 
 and are using Ulawa books. 
 
 Ul 

 
 iv PREFACE. 
 
 The true Sa'a speech is spoken in its purity at two villages only, 
 Sa'a itself and A'ulu. But the differences between Sa'a and Qaloto 
 (Pwaloto), the language of the majority of the inhabitants of Little 
 Malaita, 4,000 or 5,000 in number, are so slight, amounting largely to 
 variety in accent and intonation, that Sa'a may be said to be the prin- 
 cipal language of Little Ahilaita. 
 
 The language of the north end of Little Malaita is called Tolo, and 
 this is also the language of the south end of Big Malaita. On the north 
 end of Big Malaita the language is known as Lau. These three lan- 
 guages, Sa'a, Tolo, and Lau are closely akin, and with Ulawa they form 
 a distinct subgroup in the linguistics of the Solomon Islands. Sa'a and 
 Ulawa on their part have distinct likenesses with the languages of San 
 Cristoval, and Lau at the other end of Malaita has several features 
 which show a grammatical connection with the language of Florida. 
 
 An important feature in both Sa'a and Ulawa is the use of shortened 
 forms of the personal pronouns in the three persons singular and of 
 additional forms in the third person plural, and the suffixing of these 
 as objects to verbs and prepositions. This is the practice of Solomon 
 Island languages generally. The presence of the third personal pos- 
 sessive has not hitherto been recognized in the languages of San Cristo- 
 val, but doubtless it exists, although not so commonly in use as in 
 Sa'a and Ulawa. Certain examples seem to show its presence in the 
 language of Florida (though Dr. Codrington has not marked it in his 
 grammar of Florida); anggu and ana certainly occur, cf. ganagana oli 
 anggu remembering me, ganagana oli ana remembering him. If these 
 are compared with Sa'a 'amasi to'o aku feeling pity for me and 'amasi 
 to'o ana feeling pity for him, it will be seen that the so-called suffix in 
 Florida is anggu, ana, and not nggu and na, cf. "Melanesian Languages," 
 page 524, nouns. 
 
 This is the first essay toward the dictionary of any Solomon Island 
 language. The compiler is fully aware of the scantiness of his work. 
 Probably not more than one-third and certainly not one-half of the 
 existing words have been collected by him. The languages are rich 
 and, with proper opportunity, many additions might easily be made to 
 the words herein set forth. 
 
 Of the linguistic importance of the Melanesian languages there can be 
 no possible doubt. Dr. Codrington in his book "The Melanesian 
 Languages" has shown how certain features in a language so far 
 removed geographically from Melanesia as Malagasy can be explained 
 by referring to Melanesian habits of speech, and also how Melanesia is 
 in many ways the linguistic key to the proper explanation of Polyne- 
 sian. Mr. A. S. Atkinson, in a paper read in 1886 before the Nelson 
 (New Zealand) Philosophical Society, said with reference to Dr. Cod- 
 rington's " Melanesian Languages "that "this work will mark an epoch 
 in Polynesian philology by showing the fundamental relation between
 
 PREFACE. V 
 
 the Polynesian and the Melanesian languages." If this opinion is cor- 
 rect, and Mr. Atkinson was an excellent judge, it is of the highest 
 importance that matter such as is contained in this dictionary, the 
 compilation of which is directly the result of the lead given by Dr. 
 Codrington, should be placed before scholars in the hope that it may be 
 of some further help in elucidating the philological problems of the 
 Oceanic family of languages. 
 
 It should be noted that it has not been thought necessary to print in 
 this work many words common to the Oceanic family whose cognates 
 are set out in full in the Mota dictionary. 
 
 The compiler of this dictionary desires to put on record his indebted- 
 ness herein to Dr. Codrington's example, and wishes to acknowledge 
 that whatever value the dictionary may be found to possess will be due 
 to his having endeavored to follow the lines laid down in two of the 
 books from Dr. Codrington's pen, "Melanesian Languages" and the 
 "Dictionary of Mota." 
 
 The thanks of the author are also due to the officials of the Carnegie 
 Institution of Washington for their readiness to print and publish the 
 present volume, and to Mr. William Churchill, Associate of the Institu- 
 tion, for assistance in arranging the matter presented in the dictionary. 
 
 W. G. IVENS. 
 
 Malvern, Victoria, June 1917. 
 
 LITERATURE. 
 
 List of hooks printed in the languages of Sa' a and of Ulazva: 
 
 1. Prayer Books containing Matins and Evensong, Litany, Selection of 
 
 Psalms containing about 60 Psalms, Holy Communion Office with 
 Collects, Occasional Services, Church Catechism. 
 
 2. Hymn Books containing 50 Hymns. 
 
 3. Complete New Testament. 
 
 4. Catechism for the Children of the Church. 
 
 Bibliography of Sa' a and Ulazva languages: 
 
 1. Small grammars in Dr. Codrington's "Melanesian Languages." 
 
 2. Separate grammars compiled by W. G. Ivens. 
 
 Other Matter: 
 
 Collection of Folk Lore Tales in Ulawa.
 
 CHECK-LIST OF LANGUAGES. 
 
 Araga. Pentecost Island, New Hebrides. 
 
 Bougain'AUe Straits, Solomon Islands between 
 BougainNalle and Choiseul Islands. 
 
 Bug., Bugotu, Ysabel, Solomon Islands. 
 
 D. Y.. Duke of York Island. Bismarck Archi- 
 pelago. 
 
 Epi, New Hebrides. 
 
 Ejp. Sto., Espiritii Santo, New Hebrides. 
 
 Fate, New Hebrides (Efat6). 
 
 Fagani, San Cristoval, Solomon Islands. 
 
 Fiji Islands. 
 
 Fl.. Florida, Solomon Islands. 
 
 Gilb., Gilbert Islands, Micronesia. 
 
 Haw., Hawaii. 
 
 Lau, Malaita, Solomon Islands. 
 
 Maisin. Colling\vood Bay, New Guinea. 
 
 Mai., Malay. 
 
 ilalag., Malagasy, Madagascar. 
 
 Malaita, Solomon Islands. 
 
 Malekula, New Hebrides. 
 
 Malo, New Hebrides. 
 
 Mao., Maori, New Zealand. 
 
 Marsh., Marshall Islands, Micronesia. 
 
 Mel., Melanesia. 
 
 Mota, Banks Islands (New Hebrides complex). 
 
 Motu, Gulf of Papua, New Guinea. 
 
 N. B., New Britain, Bismarck Archipelago. 
 
 N. G., New Guinea. 
 
 Ngiina, New Hebrides. 
 
 Niue, Savage Islands, Polynesia. 
 
 Otnha, Lepers' Island, New Hebrides. 
 
 Pol., Polynesian. 
 
 Q., Qaloto, Malaita, Solomon Islands. 
 
 S., Sa'a, Malaita, Solomon Islands (see follow- 
 ing note). 
 
 Sam., Samoa, Polynesia. 
 
 Saw Cr., San Cristoval, Solomon Islands. 
 
 Ses., Sesake, New Hebrides. 
 
 Sol., Solomon Islands. 
 
 Sta. Cr., Santa Cruz, New Hebrides. 
 
 Tah., Tahiti, southeast Polynesia. 
 
 Tanna, New Hebrides. 
 
 Tola, Malaita, Solomon Islands. 
 
 U., Ulawa, Contrariete Island, Solomon 
 Islands (see following note). 
 
 Vaturanga, Guadalcanar, Solomon Islands. 
 
 Viti, the language of the Fiji Islands. 
 
 Wango, San Cristoval, Solomon Islands. 
 
 Wedau, Bartle Bay, New Guinea. 
 
 Note. — When S. or U. is found after words it is intended to mark that 
 word as pecuhar to Sa'a or Ulawa respectively; where no such notation appears 
 it is to be understood that the word is common to both languages. 
 
 TABLE OF ABBREVIATIONS. 
 
 adj., adjective. 
 
 adv.. adverb. 
 
 art., article. 
 
 (au) marks a preposition as taking the suffixed 
 pronouns du, 'o, a. 
 
 def., definite, definitive. 
 
 demonst., demonstrative. 
 
 determ., determinative. 
 
 excl., exclusive (of personal pronouns, exclud- 
 ing the person addressed). 
 
 exclam., exclamation. 
 
 genit., genitive. 
 
 gerund., gerundive. 
 
 incl., inclusive (of personal pronouns, including 
 the person addressed). 
 
 inter j., interjection. 
 
 interr., interrogative. 
 
 (few) marks a noun as taking the suffixed pro- 
 nouns ku, mu, na. 
 
 met., metaphorical. 
 
 mflalh., metathesis. 
 
 melon., metonymy. 
 
 n., noun. 
 
 neg., negative. 
 
 neut., neuter. 
 
 (Na) or (na, ni) marks a noun as taking the 
 suffixed pronoun in the third singular and 
 in the neuter only of the third plural. 
 
 obj., object. 
 
 onomatop., onomatopoetic. 
 part., particle. 
 parlic, participle. 
 pers., person, personal. 
 pi., plural. 
 ^055., possessive. 
 pr., pronoun. 
 pref., prefix. 
 prep., preposition. 
 prov., proverbial. 
 
 redttp., reduplication, reduplicated. 
 sing., singular. 
 subj., subject. 
 stiff., suffix, suffixed. 
 term., termination. 
 tr., transitive. 
 v., verb. 
 
 V. i., verb intransitive. 
 V. p., verbal particle. 
 V. tr., verb transitive. 
 voc, vocative. 
 
 M. A., Codrington's "Melanesian Anthro- 
 pology." 
 M. L., Codrington's "Melanesian Languages." 
 T. S. E. "Torres Straits Expedition," vol. iii. 
 
 VI
 
 CONTENTS. 
 
 PAGES 
 
 Preface "»-^i 
 
 Dictionary of Sa'a and Ulavva Languages i-"5 
 
 Index to the Dictionary 1 17-136 
 
 Appendices: 
 
 A Brief Grammar of Sa'a and Ulawa .. .. I39-I54 
 
 The Lord's Prayer in Twenty Languages as used in the Diocese 
 
 of Melanesia in the Islands of the South Pacific ^SS'^S^ 
 
 Linguistics in the Western Pacific iS7-i7o 
 
 Melanesia and its People I77~i9^ 
 
 Natives of Melanesia , .• •. 192-198 
 
 Some Historical Notes concerning the Melanesian Mission. . . . 199-206 
 
 "Yachting" in Melanesia 207-216 
 
 The Queensland Labor Trade 217-232 
 
 Santa Cruz 233-^49 
 
 ILLUSTRATIONS. 
 
 Frontispiece. The Landing of John Williams at Tanna. 
 
 Text-figure (p. 208). The Undine. 
 
 Plate i. The Southern Cross at Santa Cruz. , 
 
 2. A. Recruiting Boat at a Market in Malaita. The Women m Canoes 
 
 are waiting to exchange their Fish for Garden Produce. 
 B. Women Traders, etc., Malaita. 
 
 3. A. Sea-going Canoe, Malaita. 
 
 B. Model of Canoe used for Bonito Fishing, Ulawa. 
 
 C. Matema, Reef Group. 
 
 4. A. Carved Food-bowls and Porpoise. 
 B. Food-bowls from Ulawa. 
 
 5. War-belts, Bowl, Lime-sticks, Ear-plug, Forehead Ornaments, 
 
 Water-bottle, etc. 
 
 6. A. Carvings from Ulawa: Man, Pig, and Dog. 
 
 B. Ulawa Hair-combs. 1 01 n r 
 
 C. Forehead Ornaments made of Clam and Turtle Shell, trom 
 Florida. 
 
 7. A. Clubs from Malaita, Solomon Islands. 
 
 B. Clubs, etc., from Malaita and Ulawa. . 
 
 8. A. Ornaments of Shell for Forehead, Ear, and Nose, from Malaita 
 
 and Ulawa. 
 B. Nose Pendants and Fasteners for Bandolier. 
 
 9. Belts, Bandolier, Necklaces, Armlets, etc., made of Native Money, 
 
 Shells, Dogs' Teeth, Porpoise Teeth. 
 
 10. A. Natural Flints incised, regarded as possessing Mana and 
 
 causing Yams to fructify, from Solomons. 
 B. Ghost made of Coral, from Ulawa. 
 
 11. A. Young Man of Nukapu. 
 B. Man of Qarea, Malaita. 
 
 vu
 
 DICTIONARY 
 
 OF 
 
 SA'A AND ULAWA LANGUAGES
 
 DICTIONARY OF SA'A AND ULAWA LANGUAGES. 
 
 a 1. personal article used with nouns and 
 verbs: (a) when used with a common 
 noun it indicates its use as a personal 
 name; ola, thing, a ola. So-and-so; mwae, 
 person, a mivaena. So-and-so; it is 
 applied to all personal names, both 
 native and foreign, male and female, 
 a Wale, a John; it is seen also in alei, 
 who? it is used to personify; a wawa ko 
 'unu'unue mu ola a sae e hojiu eni, the 
 mouth speaks of what the heart is full, 
 (b) when used with a verb or adjective 
 it indicates their use as a descriptive 
 name; ero, to deceive; a eroero, a de- 
 1 ceiver. In usage it corresponds to the 
 ii » of Mota and Malagasy. 
 
 a 2. termination of the verbal noun: hatale, 
 to go along the shore; hatalea, sea-coast. 
 
 a 3. adverb of assent: 'o te urine? a, did you 
 do thus? yes. 
 
 & 4. pers. pron. 3d sing, suffixed to verb (with 
 or without verbal suffix) as object, and 
 to prepositions as anticipatory object 
 and used both of persons and things, as 
 him, her, it; it does not change to e after 
 a preceding t or u before a proper name 
 owing to the presence of the personal 
 article a; li'oa e lio dhuiaa Dora, the 
 spirit protected Dora. 
 
 A 5. stem to which the pronouns ku, mu, na, 
 etc., are suffixed in forming poss. 3. 
 Polynesian ha, la. 
 
 *a 6. prefix of condition, making participles: 
 Idngu, to pluck, 'aldngu, come out of 
 socket; hdli, to break off, 'aMli, broken 
 off. Mota ga 3. 
 
 *a 7. Ulawa v. p. of present or general time, 
 joined in pronunciation to the personal 
 pronoun used as subject, na'a, 'o'a. 
 Lau ka, future particle; Fotuna, New 
 Hebrides, ka. id. 
 
 *a 'a'a 8. exclam. negative, don't. 
 
 *a 'a'a 9. adj. term, suffixed to nouns, verbs 
 and other adjectives; qiiqii, mud; 
 qiiqii'e, muddy; mwako, to pierce; 
 mwakomwako'a, prickly. Mota ga 5, 
 Bugotu ga, Motu ka, Samoa a. 
 
 *a 10. suffix, (a) to poss. 2 and 3 in sing. 1 and 
 2: ndku'd, ndkti'e, dku'd, dmu'd, ndmu'd. 
 (b) to pers. pron. dual 2 and 3: i'emeru'e, 
 kereru'e. Probably 'a 9. 
 
 *a 11. stem to which pronouns ku, mu, na. 
 etc., are suffixed, forming poss. 1 of 
 things to eat. cf. a 5. Mota ga 1, 
 Bugotu ga. 
 
 *a 12. as d 6; 'dnguru from nguru. 
 
 *a'a 1. exclam. negative, don't; 'a 8. 
 
 *a'a 2. a large green parrot with red under the 
 wings, the male of iloilo'a. New 
 Guinea electus. San Cristoval kaka, 
 Maori kaka. 
 
 'a'a 3. to run. to be abundant, of creepers; 
 hahalisi e 'a'a. the grass has spread; hule 
 e 'a'a ha'ahia laoha, convolvulus had 
 crept over the canoe house. Wango 
 laga, to be in leaf. 
 
 'a'a 4. to rise up clear, of the moon: waaro- 
 waaro e mdnu 'a'a mat iUngi, the moon 
 has floated clear up on high. 
 
 'a'a S. 5. to throw, to bowl: 'a'a lo'ohaa, to 
 contribute money. Wango gaga, to be 
 spent; Lau taga, to throw. 
 
 'a'a 6. adj. suff.; puru, frequent; purupuru'a'a, 
 frequently; wdi, water; wdiwei'a'a, 
 watery, cf. 'a 9. 
 
 'a'ada'i v. i., to importune, to vex, to beg, to 
 dun. 
 'a'ada'ini v. tr., to importune a person. 
 
 'a'ade U., to see. cf. hd'iade'i. Wango aadai, 
 to look. 
 
 'a'ae (ku) S., n., leg, foot. cf. 'ae 1. 
 
 'a'ai U. exclam. hahal 'a'ai laa, so there! 
 
 'a'aila'a adj., firm, strong, powerful; ea'a'ila'a 
 olo mae ana, he is very strong; redupli- 
 cated 'aila with 'a 9. 
 'a'ailahaana strength, its strength. 
 
 'a'ala v. i., to bite; mwaa 'a'ala, poisonous 
 snake, 'ala 3. 
 
 'a'ala'i v. i., to increase, to spread, of plants. 
 'a'a 3. 
 
 'a'ana U. v. i., to vomit, 
 'a'anata'ini v. tr. 
 
 aani U., adverb preceding verb; at all, just 
 now; e qake aani lae, he did not go at all; 
 na'asi aani lae mat, I have just come. 
 
 'a'a'o cf. 'a'o. 
 
 'a'aoleanga S., v. n., lamentation. 
 
 'a'aro v. t., to come aboard, of surf; hai naho e 
 'a'aro melu, a wave came aboard us. 
 a'aronga v. n., surf breaking on the shore. 
 
 'a'ari v. i., to be rent asunder. Wango kari, 
 Lau kakari, Florida tahari. 
 
 'a'atasi v. i., to be odd, uneven, in number; 
 nga hue e 'a'atasi, there is an odd one. 
 
 'a'ate v. i., to be dry; hero 'a' ate, dregs of grated 
 coconut after pressing out the milk. 
 
 aau the season of the southeast trades, winter, 
 the season of the ripe canarium nuts: 
 aau kosi repo, the canarium nuts are just 
 ripe; aau e repo kosi holaa, when the nuta 
 are ripe the weather is calm; aau 
 marawa, the nuts purpling before ripen- 
 ing, the month of July. cf. maraau. 
 
 'a'auhi v. tr., to help, to come to the aid of. 
 hd'i'a'auhi. Wango aauhi; Mota kakau, 
 to visit constantly. 
 
 ada 1. poss. 3, pi. 3, among them, belonging to 
 them, they (obj.). 
 
 'ada 2. poss. 1. pi. 3, for them, theirs, of things 
 to eat. 
 
 adaada S., ataata U., v. i., to progress, to move 
 on, to be in motion.
 
 ADA'ELU 
 
 ada'elu 1. poss.. 3. pi. 3. among them, for them, 
 
 them (obj.'); nda 1. 'elii. 
 'ada'elu 2. poss. 1, pi. 3, for them, theirs, of 
 
 things to eat; 'ada 2. 
 adai 1. n., a cluster; a bunch: adai niii, a bunch 
 
 of green coconuts. 
 'ada'i S. 2. v. i., to rub: nuuurcte ko 'ada'i mclii, 
 
 fearfulness has come upon us. 
 adairi S. v. i.. to despise, used with poss. 3. 
 adairinge'ini v. tr. Wango adairi, to 
 
 separate, 
 adlao n., a creeper used to make bowstrings, 
 adaoro v. i., to crouch {oro, to stoop). In this 
 
 word CO is diphthong. 
 adaru'eS., adaru'a U., 1. poss. 3, dual 3, among, 
 
 belonging to, the two of them; used also 
 
 as object when the pronoun is separated 
 
 from the verb. 
 'adaru'e S., 'adaru'a U., 'adaru'i U., 2. poss. 1, 
 
 dual 3, for the two of them, of things to 
 
 eat. 
 'ade I'., to see: e qalco la ne'e 'adea, I saw 
 
 nothing, hii'i'ade'i. 
 adi V. tr., to tabu, to set one's mark upon; n., a 
 
 tabu mark; huui edi, S., hiiu ni edi, U., 
 
 a bunch of leaves used as a tabu sign, 
 adinga U., v. n., 'alii edinga, the placing of 
 
 a tabu sign. 
 adila-(ku), gerund, 
 adiedi 1. n., yellow vascular tissue of gleichenia 
 
 fern used in ornamentation on combs, 
 
 spears, etc.: noma adiedi, a spear with 
 
 grass plaiting; arapa adiedi, a comb so 
 
 decorated. 
 adiedi 2. v. i., to have pins and needles in the 
 
 limbs: 'aekii ko ediedi, my legs tingle. 
 adine S., n., of relationship, used with ro mwa: 
 
 ro mwa adine, two cousins- german 
 
 regarded as brother and sister, ddi. 
 adio n., a creeper which grows on banyans, used 
 
 as fishing-lines or to tie together the 
 
 teeth of combs {arapa) : nga hikei adio, 
 
 a coil of adio. 
 kdiu V. i., to be out of joint, diu 1. 
 ado V. i., to share in, to participate; (a) used 
 
 with poss. 3; (b) used with suff. pron. 
 
 kn, mu, na, da, ni, to befit; adokii, my 
 
 deserts; le'ii e adoku, my share, ha'aado. 
 adonga S., v. n., used with ddu 1, hele: noko deu 
 
 adonga, I am making an attempt; tnola 
 
 adotiga, merely tentatively. 
 adoma'i, adoadoma'i U., v.i ., to think, to recol- 
 lect; adoma'i moiisi, to decide, to dare; 
 
 adoma'i sae, to give thought to; adoma'i 
 
 su'ate'e, to be anxious about, 
 adoma'inga v. n., thought, recollection, 
 adoma'ini v. tr., to think of a thing. 
 adoma'imla-(ku) gerund. Wango adomai, 
 
 Bugotu ado, to know. 
 adu, aduedu v. i., to carve, to build, to dub out 
 
 planks; ddii i'ola, to build a canoe; ddu 
 
 i'olanga, canoe building, 
 adumi v. tr., to carve, etc. 
 aduminge v. n. 
 
 adumila-(ku^ gerund. Wango adu. 
 'ae, 'ae'ae (kuj, n., leg, foot; 'aekueli'i, my legs 
 
 are out of joint; 'ae loku, maimed in the 
 
 'ac, 'ae'ae (continued). 
 
 feet, halt; 'ae pule, dropsical; 'aekti ko 
 ediedi, my foot tingles; 'aeku ko seunieu, 
 my foot hurts; 'alo 'ae, to move quickly; 
 huni lengu ha'aodohie 'aeka, to guide our 
 feet; i ngadona 'aetia, before, at the feet 
 of, him; kolune 'ae, the heel; koukouli 'ae, 
 the ankle; Idti 'ae, be quick; ni'i 'ac la'o 
 i'ola, to board a canoe; penalana 'ae, 
 the sole; poupou ni 'ae'ae, the heel; tdti 
 'ae, to hurrjs lotola i 'ae, to follow a 
 master; 7imu i 'ae, to gather round the 
 feet of. Maori wae, foot; Motu ae, foot; 
 Bugotu nae, foot. 
 
 'ae 2. n., mark, example. 
 
 'ae 3. n., source, beginning; mu 'aei wala, first 
 principles; a 'aei meurihe, the source of 
 life; 'aei henue, the land of origin; 'aei 
 hohola, the owner of the garden; 'aei 
 'inoni nemue, thy dependents; 'ac hau, 
 precipice. 
 'aena because of, the beginning of; used 
 with ana 7; 'aena ana, because of; 'aena 
 maa, threshold; 'aena papali, the jaw. 
 
 'ae 4. n., faeces, ordure; mu 'ae, faeces; hutii 'ae, 
 excrement. Polynesian tae, tutae, faeces. 
 
 'ae 5. v. i., to uncover, to bring to light, to open 
 out, to expose: walana ko 'ae ha' adai ana 
 }nu esoesohai dunge, his voice cleaveth 
 the flames of fire. 
 'aeli V. tr., used of the action of the sea, 
 rain, etc., in exposing anything. 
 
 'ae 6. specific numeral; 'aeni ue, five rolls {h.ikei 
 ue) of dyed cane for plaiting wristlets, 
 etc. 
 
 'ae 7. ha'a'ae, to be fleeting, vain. 
 
 'ae'aeniola v. i., to commit fornication, 
 'ae'aeniolanga v. n., fornication. 
 
 'aehota S. 1. v. tr., v. i., to begin. The root 
 notion is that of generation, there is also 
 inherent a notion of continuance; atei ni 
 e 'aehotaa, who began it? melu 'aehota 
 'unue, we began to say. 'ae 1. hoia 1. 
 
 'aehota 2. v. i., to conceive; v. tr., to generate, to 
 beget, tala'aehola. 
 'aehotalana S., gerund, the beginning; 'iire 
 'olo mdi i 'aehotalana, from the begin- 
 ning up to now. 
 
 'aela, 'ae'aela v. i., to be bad, no good, ill; inu 
 'aela, nasty to drink, not fresh (of 
 water); e la 'otoi 'aela, it is bad; e la 
 'otoi 'aela mwaani nonola, it is worse 
 than yesterday; laehaku e 'aela, I can not 
 walk well; e lai 'aela, it is bad; lalona e 
 'aela; loo 'aela, to be immodest, to offend 
 against propriety; in a depreciatory 
 sense e muaimwei 'aela, very small, too 
 small; e no'i 'aela 'olo, to be bad; 
 ngduhana e 'aela, he overeats himself; 
 'osi kdriheni 'aela laa, do not be such a 
 nuisance; rako 'aela, unpleasant, irksome; 
 e rako 'aela aku, it is against my grain; 
 rongo 'aela, to make a din; noko sape 
 'aela, I am ill; sapekue 'aela, I am ill; 
 siho 'aela ana, to spread evil reports of; e 
 tala'ai 'aela, e tala'aeni 'aela, it is begin-
 
 s 
 
 AHU'I 
 
 'aela, 'ae'aela (continued). 
 
 ning to spoil; e tola 'aela aku, it was bad 
 for me. 
 'aelahaana gerund, its badness; 'aelahaana 
 
 mu i'e, the bad fish. 
 'aelasi v. tr., to cause to be no good, to 
 spoil; used with ddu 1; sae 'aelasi, to 
 bear malice. N'ot connected with tata- 
 'ala. cf. M. L., p. 54; probably 'ae 1, 
 with la 3. 
 
 'aelulu V. i., to step over, to neglect; used with 
 prep, haahi; 'ae 1. 
 
 'aena cf. 'ae 3. 'aeni. cf. 'ae 6. 
 
 aha 1. n., a sparrow hawk. 
 
 aha 2. v. i., to cut, to score, to notch, to mark 
 by incising, 
 ahasi v. tr. 
 ahasila-(ku) gerund. Wango aha. 
 
 aha 3. to recede, to dry up (of water). 
 
 aha 4. v. tr., aha lahani, to warn, 
 aha tahanila-(ku), gerund. 
 
 ahaa 1. v. i., to be bitter to the taste; 'e'e ahaa, 
 wild arcca nut. 
 
 ahaa 2. n., salt water, salt; me'i ahaa, some salt 
 water. Bugotu aha. 
 
 ahala'i, ahaahala'i partic, removed, changed 
 in position; sae ahala'i, vexed at heart, 
 unsettled, provoked, 
 ahala'ini v. tr., to provoke, ha'aahala'ini. 
 
 'ahali partic, broken off (of boughs); 'a 6, 
 hiili 1. 
 
 ahare awalosi i ahare, the northeast wind. 
 
 'aharo 1. v. i., to conduct a betrothal or wed- 
 ding ceremony. 
 
 'aharo 2. n., relations by marriage; 'aharo inau, 
 my relatives by marriage. Heuru, 
 S. C, aharo. 
 
 'aharota v. n., a wedding feast; ddu 'aharola 
 ana kalena, wedding feast of his child; 
 kara ni 'aharola, a large yam pudding 
 for bridals. 
 
 'ahe 1. n., surf, currents from wind or tide, tide- 
 rip; 'ahe hiru, an eddy; hirune 'ahe, 
 troublesome waves; 'ahe hirune i 
 Nielaha'u, the tide rip at Cape Zelce; 
 'ahe ko hurosieu, the surf whirls me 
 about; 'ahe kosi tola, the current sets; 
 'ahe Iduleu, strong current; 'ahe e 
 lomosie 'tola, the surf buffeted the canoe; 
 'ahe lulu, boiling tide; 'ahe i niu tangalau, 
 a tide rip between Ulawa and Sa'a; holo 
 'ahe. to divide the waves by incantation 
 and make a way for a canoe. 
 'ahela adj., strong current; e 'ahela, there is 
 
 a strong current, 
 'ahesi v. tr., to cause to drift; e 'ahesie, it 
 
 has drifted. 
 'ahesila-(ku) gerund. Polynesian tahe, to 
 flow; \'iti ndave, Mota ave, Florida tahe. 
 
 'ahe 2. v. i., to melt away, to waste, to dis- 
 appear; wa'e 'ahe, to waste. 
 'ahela'ini v. tr., to cause to disappear. 
 
 'ahe 3. n., a crab. Mota gave. 
 
 'ahe S., 4. 'ahe tangalau, to bear bountifully (of 
 a garden) . 
 
 'ahelidu, 'ahe'ahelidu S., v. i.. to congregate, 
 'ahelidunge v. n., congregating. 
 
 aheta v. i., to stretch out the arms with weari- 
 ness, premonitory of malaria. 
 
 'aheulao v. i., to be a fornicator, fornicating; 
 ulao. 
 
 'ahewa'a v. i., to be fleeting, vanishing, melting 
 away; 'ahe 2. wa'a 4. 
 
 'ahi n., closet, chamber. 
 
 'ahinga U., v. n., chamber; muai keni ana 
 'dhinga, women fond of staying in their 
 chambers. 
 
 'Ahi'a the southernmost village on the west 
 coast of Ulawa. 
 
 'ahi'e S., 'ahi'a U., n., Malay apple (Eugenia 
 sp.); pull 'ehi'e, orange cowrie. Mota 
 gaviga, \''\t\ kavika. 
 
 'ahihi partic, crouching, groveling (of a dog); 
 hi hi. 
 
 ahimawa v. i., to \awn. 
 
 Ahina'i U., Ahina'i amau the name of a canoe 
 in a story. 
 
 'ahisu, 'ahi'ehisu partic, out of joint, fallen 
 out of place, hisuhisu. maakii ko 
 hini'i 'ehi'ehisu 'oto, my eyes nearly 
 u-U out. 
 
 aho v., to be abraded (of skin). 
 
 'aho'a partic, separate, apart from; used with 
 poss. 3; 'aho'a aku, far off me. "a 6, 
 ho'a 2. 
 
 ahoaho (na, vi) U., n., the inner shell of the 
 canarium nut, film. 
 
 'ahola partic, broad, wide, 'a 6, hola 1. 
 'aholanga v. n., breadth, width. 
 
 'aholo v. i., to fish for garfish (mwanole) with 
 a kite; sa'o ni 'aholo, the kite, 
 'aholonga v. n., fishing with a kite, 'a 6, 
 holo 2. 
 
 ahonga U., v. n.. making trial, tentative, used 
 with tdu 1; tola ahonga, to tempt; name 
 ahonga. taste and try. malaahonga. 
 
 ahowa n., open space of sea and sky. Wango 
 ahowa. 
 
 ahu lalo ahu, a war band, fighting company. 
 
 ahu, ahuahu U. 1, v. i., to be complete, perfect 
 (of numbers) ; ahu viae, to cease hostili- 
 ties; ma'uru ahu, to be sound asleep; 
 talo ahu, to amass, 
 ha'aahu v., to complete, to finish, 
 ahusi V. tr., to affect completely, to extend 
 all over, to encompass; dhusie mu le'u, 
 ever>"svhere ; e dhusie hdnue, it has 
 affected the whole place. Lau afu, 
 complete; Maori ahu, to heap up; 
 ahuatia, completed; Mota av, to pile; 
 Ambrym ahu. ten; M. L., p. 458; Motu 
 ahu, to inclose. 
 
 ahu 2. V. i., to bring forth fruit. 
 
 ahuhu v., to fade away, to droop. 
 
 ahuhu'e S., n., crumbs of food; mu ehuhu'ei 
 ngeulaa. 
 
 ahui 1. n., a dancing club; niao pe'e dhui, to 
 dance holding the dhui. M. A., p. Z3i. 
 cf. mao hidehide. 
 
 ahu'i 2. determ., from ahu 1, used as preposi- 
 tion, around, protecting; hule dhu'i. to 
 come for; lio ahu'i, to protect; para 
 dhu'i. to protect with a fence; puli ehu'i, 
 to gather in a crowd round a person; toto
 
 AHU'I 
 
 ahu'i 2 (continued). 
 
 dhu'i, to pay a fine on behalf of; * 
 sapena i Dara ahu'i niit, an apostrophe 
 addressed to Ugi, cf. ha'addhi. 
 ahu'i 3. V. tr., to wTap up; dhu'i ola, a parcel. 
 dhu 1: Wango ahui, to wrap; Lau afu, 
 Samoa 'afu; Niue aji, to wrap, 
 ahu'i 4. partic. used as adverb, altogether, 
 completely; ke dhu'i saediana lokoloko, 
 will completely rejoice together. 
 ahu'i 5. n., dhu'i menu, a lily (Crinum asiat- 
 icum) which grows on the beaches. 
 Wango hii menu. 
 ahu'i-(na) 6. n., a stump of a tree, 
 ahulili n., seeds of a tree, strung in a bunch and 
 worn on the backs of the fingers after 
 the fashion of castanets in dances, cf. 
 hidehide. 
 ahululu n., a small yam pudding used in sacri- 
 fices, dhu 1, lulu 2. 
 ahuni determ. from dhu 1, used as an adverb; 
 entirely, completely; more common in 
 Ulawa; hduni, metathetic. 
 'ahu'o n., owl; onomatop. San Cristoval 
 
 kahuko. 
 ahuora v., to be dusty, era 2. 
 ahuqa'i S., n., a dish of edible fig-leaves {'amusi) 
 and pounded new canarium nuts (jigdli) . 
 ahu'i 3. 
 ahuraa U., dhuraa d&ni, to be on the move 
 
 before daylight. 
 ahuraka U., v. i., to come forth, proceed out of. 
 ahurara v., to be abundant, to be green (of 
 
 grass), dhu 2. Wango ahura. 
 ahure v. i., to make holes with a digging-stick 
 
 ipi'e 2) for yam planting, 
 ahureha v. i., to be open, clear, of unimpeded 
 
 vision, dhu 1. 
 ahureu S., v., to do haphazard; dhureu ana 
 
 hurunge, to run uncertainly. 
 'ahuri n., the conch shell, blown as a summons; 
 lahulana 'ahuri, the blowing of a conch; 
 ngaralai 'ehuri, the sound of the conch; 
 walana 'dhuri e talalea walu tola i Tolo, 
 the sound of the conch went through all 
 the villages in Tolo; walowaloi 'ehuri, 
 the sound of the conch. Bugotu tavuU. 
 ahuta-(ku) v. n., all, completely, the whole of. 
 dhu 1. dhutamere'i mango, both of us, 
 ahulamolu mango, all of you; dhutana 
 sapeku, my whole body; dhuleni, all 
 (things) ; i'oe dhutemu, the whole of thee; 
 mdni dhutaka, U., all of us. 
 ahutata v., to be vanished, to have vanished. 
 
 dhu 1, lata 2. 
 •ai 1. n., a tree (more common in Ulawa); 'di 
 ha'angdu keni, ginger, given to women as 
 an ordeal; 'di ni haka, U., papaya; 'di 
 nehunehu, a rod, a stick; '&i ni ile,\J., 
 wood for making fire by friction; 'di repo, 
 a pestle for pounding taro to make tau- 
 manga; hai 'ei, U., alog; hite 'di,\J., to split 
 firewood; hou 'ei, U., the kidneys; huani 
 'ei, U., fruit; iduidu mesi 'ei, U., jumped 
 about on the firewood; kokopa ni 'ei, U., 
 buttress flanges of certain trees; lolo'a 
 ni 'ei, U., a thicket; maa ni 'ai, U., a 
 
 'ai 1 (continued). 
 
 stake, picket; mwa 'di, U., firewood; 
 mwai 'ei, U., trees; mwai ngangani 'ei, 
 U., chips of wood; mwai rango ni 'ei, U., 
 dead trees; pou ni 'ei, U., a log of wood; 
 qa'ahita ni 'ei, U., a slab of wood; rai 'ei, 
 U., plank; so'o 'di, U., to pick up fire- 
 wood; suli 'ei i qaoha, ridgepole; tdu 'ei, 
 U., to break firewood; uleuleni 'ei, U., 
 twigs; 'ulu'ulu ni 'ei, U., branches, twigs 
 and leaves; usu 'ei, S., firestick. Mota 
 tangae (M. L., p. 95), Florida gai, 
 Malagasy hazo. 
 'ai 2. v. i., to be stiff, numb; nimeku e 'di 'oto, 
 
 my hand is numb. 
 a'i 3. tr. suffix to verb; sdsu, sdsue'i. 
 a'i 4. participial ending used adverbially; ere 
 
 ha'ihonod'i, to speak revilingly. 
 ai 5. U., di suu, to perish, to become extinct. 
 
 suu 1. 
 ai 6. di uhi, to clean shoots off stored yams. cf. 
 
 dile'i. 
 'ai, 'ai'ai 7. exclam., mind, look outl 
 'ai'aa 1. v., to be lost, missing, wanting. 
 ha'a'di'aa. Wango aiaa. 
 'ai'aanga v. n., destruction. 
 ai'aa 2. exclam., alas, woe! 
 'ai'aana without, unless, failing; used as ad- 
 verb; 'ai'aana ineu, failing me, but for 
 me. 'ai'aa 1, ana 2. 
 aidea v., to be in pain. 
 aideri specific numeral, ten parrot-fish caught 
 
 with a dip net (kdlu). didcri ni i'e. 
 'ai'ei'aa adj., fleeting, transitory, 'di'aa. 
 'aihu v., to be uprooted, to fall, of trees in a 
 
 storm, 
 'aihuri n., lettuce tree, with yellow leaves, 
 planted to mark landing-places, 'di 1, 
 huri. 
 'alia cf. 'a'aila'a. 
 
 'ailemu S., n., the banyan tree, 'di 1. 
 'aili 'aili lado, v. tr., to graft, lado 1. 
 'aili'apaa U., n., a staff, walking-stick, 'di 1, 
 
 li 1, 'apaa. 
 ailipo'u U., n., transverse beams, a cross (late 
 
 use), 'ai 1, li 1, po'upo'u. 
 aini tr. suff. to verb, d'i 3, ni 4. 
 Aio an island off the east coast of Big Malaita. 
 a'itada S., thus, in their style, just their way. 
 
 da 2. 
 a'itana S., thus, similarly to, just that way, like 
 
 his style, na 2. cf. U. aliha 2. 
 aitana'i, aieitana'i v. tr., to beseech, to beg, to 
 entreat, 
 aitana'inge v. n., entreaty, prayer. 
 aitana'ila-(ku) gerund, 
 aite'i v. i., to clean the rootlets off taro, etc. 
 di 6. 
 aite'ini v. tr. 
 'aitepi n., a tree, Barringtonia edulis; hoi 'eitepi, 
 its nut; trunk used for ridge-poles. 
 'ai 1, tdpi. 
 'ai walo'a adj., covered with creepers, entan- 
 gled, 'di 1, walo 1. 
 aka poss. 3, pi. 1, inch, to, or on, us; used as 
 object when the pronoun is separated 
 from the verb.
 
 'ALA 
 
 •aka 1. V. i., to pull out; 'oka Idu, to pull out 
 violently, to defend, to help; 'aka niho. 
 to pull teeth. 
 'akani v. tr., noko 'akanie tnaana, I gouge 
 
 his eyes out. 
 'akanila-(ku) gerund. Lau aga, Mota Ikaka. 
 'aka 2. poss. J, pi. 1. for us, of things to eat. 
 aka'elu 1. poss. 3, pi. 1. to, or on, us; used as 
 object when the pronoun is separated 
 from the verb, 
 'aka'elu 2. poss. 1. pi. 1, for us, of things to eat. 
 'akalo 1. n., a ghost, a spirit; M. A., p. 260. cf. 
 iiraa'i. 'akalo e kdusie i'ola, a ghost 
 clutched the canoe and capsized it; 
 'akalo ni matawa, a ghost of the open sea. 
 cf. Ngorleru; hanue ni 'akalo, Malapa 
 Island, hades; ho'o 'akalo, to tie a granny 
 knot; maa ni 'akalo, eye of coconut; 
 palolana mu 'akalo, worship of the 
 ghosts; ta'e 'akalo, to raise a ghost; tola 
 'akalo, to exorcise spirits; tolo 'akalo, to 
 exorcise a ghost. M. A., p. 137; uunu 
 ola saana mu 'akalo, to offer burnt offer- 
 ings to the ghosts, wdi ni 'akalo, tears. 
 Wango alaro, Mota talaro, Gilberts 
 talaro, Viti tataro. M. L., p. 146. 
 •akalo 2, a dead person; nihoi 'akalo, dead 
 man's tooth; para ni 'akalo. cemetery 
 (late use). 
 akara'i, akaru'e S. 1., poss. 3, dual 1, to. or on, 
 us two, used as object when the pronoun 
 is separated from the verb. 
 'akara'i, 'akaru'e S. 2., poss. 1, dual 1, for us 
 
 two (of things to eat). 
 akau, akakau v., to be ready, to be lit, to be 
 burning, ddu akau, to prepare, to make 
 ready; e akau, is it alight? hele akau, to 
 prepare, to make ready, 
 akauni v. tr., ha'akauni, to cause to light. 
 Wango agau. 
 akauri v. tr., v. i.. to be possessed of, to be pro- 
 vided with. akau. melu akauri 'oto, 
 we are furnished; mere 'asi akauri ihei, 
 U., where are we likely to get anything? 
 ha'aakaurisi causative, 
 akauringe v. n., profit, possession, 
 akaurisi v. tr., to obtain possession of, to 
 
 provide, to have. 
 akaurisila-(ku) gerund. 
 ake n., string fringe, the dress of married 
 women hung suspended from the waist, 
 akeake n., strand of rope, twig, sprig; akeake 
 
 ni dili, sprig of dracaena. 
 akera'i partic, come undone. 
 
 'akera'ini v. tr., to undo, to destroy, to 
 subvert. 
 'akere 1. partic, untwisted, 
 'akere (na) 2. n., border, edge, bank, kerekere. 
 *akeu partic, on one side, overbalanced, tilting. 
 
 'a 6, kdu 1. 
 'ako 1. V. i., to catch in the arms, to grasp, to 
 wrestle. 
 'akonga v. n. 
 
 'ako'i V. tr. Wango agoi, Viti rako. 
 ako 2. honu ako, to have pulmonary disease. 
 akoako 1. v., to be out of heart, without energy; 
 hele akoako, to do listlessly. 
 
 'ako'ako 2. v., to deprecate wrath by saying 
 
 'ako'ako saemu; not used to women, 
 akohe v. i., to be listless, to neglect through 
 laziness; e akohe mwaanie, he neglected 
 it through laziness, 
 akoheta'ini v. tr. 
 
 akoheta'i partic, to neglect through lazi- 
 ness; lae akoheta'i su'a ana maemaeha, 
 run carelessly into danger, 
 'akolu partic, excited in mind, 'a 6. 
 aku 1. poss. 3, sing. 1, to, or upon, me. used as 
 object of verb when the pronoun is 
 separated from the verb; e kopi eku, 
 touch me. Rafurafu, S. C, viwane aku, 
 my husband, 
 'aku, 'aku'e 2. poss. 1, sing. 1, for me (of 
 things to eat). 
 'aku'i U., of many things for one person to 
 eat; honi weieu 'dku'i, bonito for me to 
 eat. 
 akuu exclam., pish, humph, pooh. 
 'ala, 'ala'ala 1. v. i., to answer; with poss. 3. 
 to obey, to give attention to; nou ka'a 
 'ala ana. I did not obey; 'ala qd'u. to 
 nod the head backward in assent. 
 'alami v. tr., to answer a person. 
 'alamila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 'alama'ini v. tr., to respond to, to acknowl- 
 edge, to give leave to, to consent. 
 'alama'imla-(ku) gerund, 
 'alama'i, ha'i'alama'i v. tr., to consent 
 mutually. Florida talamagini. 
 'ala 2. v. i., to be prosperous; e 'ala diana 'oto, 
 
 it is doing well, 
 'ala, 'ala'ala 3. v. i., to bite, to sting, to be sharp- 
 edged; 'ala muniu, to close in Hke jaws; 
 'ala tala, to bite at and miss; pa'ewa ko 
 'ala tala, last two days of the moon. 
 'ala'i V. tr. Motu karakara, fierce; New- 
 Britain karat, Kabadi arasia, Maisin 
 karafe; Mota gar agar a, to clench the 
 teeth. 
 'ala 4. V. tr., to break off, to lop. of branches; 
 'ala dango, to lop off limbs of a tree. 
 Mota sal 1, Wango ala, Maori here. 
 'ala 5. to cut the teeth, to get feathers; eke ko 
 'ala, the white cockatoo is growing 
 feathers; to flash as lightning; wa'ariri 
 ko 'ala hitelie salo, the lightning-flash 
 cleaves the sky; 'ala ngingita, U., to 
 frown, to clench the teeth. Florida 
 gala; Mota sar, to pierce, to shine. 
 'ala 6. to set a net, to He in wait for, to go the 
 rounds of the flying-fish floats (m'o); 
 'ala poo, to catch pigs in a net; 'ala 
 pupiilu haahi, to surround in a dense 
 body; mae ko 'ala, enemies lie in wait, 
 'alasi tr., hu'o kire 'alasie ka'u, the net that 
 
 they have laid. 
 'alaa'i v. i., 'alaa'ini tr., to plan, to lay out 
 
 the plan of, to shape, to lay in order. 
 'alaa'inila-(ku) gerund. Mota sal 2; 
 Maori Harahou, net. 
 'ala 7. U., plural article in the vocative; 'ala 
 
 mwane, you men. cf. 'alai 1. 
 'ala 8. adjective ending; sasu'ala, smoky; 
 totonga'ala, resinous, 'a 9, la 4.
 
 'ALAA 
 
 8 
 
 'alaa 1. n., a flock or covey of birds, 'alaa vi 
 menu, ala 6. Mota .^gara, spread, or 
 sara 3, to gather. 
 
 'ala 'a 2. S., adv., up, upward; noko soi 'ala' a 
 ana, I call upon him. Wango araa, 
 Florida galaga. 
 
 alaala n., croton; alaala pa'ewa, a variety with 
 red leaves shaped like a shark's fin. 
 
 alaha 1. n., a chief. In M. A., pp. 47, 51 (note), 
 maelaha appears to be the Wango word 
 maeraha. No such word occurs in Sa'a 
 or Ulawa. dili alaha, red-leaved dra- 
 caena used in incantations and in draw- 
 ing lots; horana viwa alaha, U., under 
 the power of the chiefs; htiui alaha, a 
 chiefly family; reoreo alaha, a large 
 variety of nautilus, 'king' nautilus; 
 mivei la' a alaha, dear lord; niniho alaha, 
 a large hornet; pepe alaha, a butterfly; 
 siri alaha, a parrot, Lorius chlorocercus. 
 
 alaha 2. v. i., to rule; alaha haahi, to rule over. 
 ha'aalaha. a 1, laha. 
 alahanga v. n., rule, dominion, chieftain- 
 ship, kingdom (late use). Wango araha. 
 
 \ lahuu, alaalahuu v. i., to talk in parables, to 
 compare in words, 
 alahuunge v. n., parables, metaphors, 
 alahuute'ini S., alahuunge'ini U., v. tr., to 
 use parabolic language. 
 
 'alai U. 1. plur. art., used of persons only; cf. 
 'alei; 'alai 'inoni, you people; 'alai 
 Mwado'a, Mwado'a people; 'alai ola, 
 you people. 
 
 'Alai 2. n., northeast cape of Little Malaita, 
 opposite the rock Htlu Hari at the 
 entrance of Mara Masiki Channel. 
 
 'alali U., V. tr., to apportion food, 'ala 6. 
 Wango arari, to befit. 
 
 alalu V. tr., to disobey, to mutiny against. 
 
 alanga, Alanga kaule Selwyn Bay, on Ugi, a 
 trading-station for copra. 
 
 'alanga'i S., 'alanga'i i'ola ni tola, fifth and 
 sixth days of the moon; 'alanga'i hapa, 
 first quarter of the moon; 'alanga'i roa, 
 third and fourth days of the moon. 
 'ala 6. 
 
 'alangu partic, out of its socket, 'a 6, Idngu. 
 
 'Ala Sa'a n., the northwest Alite mountain 
 above Langalanga. Big Malaita. 
 
 'alasi U., 'arasi S., v. tr., to fine down by scrap- 
 ing (of bows, spears, combs, and other 
 wooden articles); kira 'alasi pasi, they 
 scrape bows. Niue alali, to scratch. 
 cf. karasi. 
 
 'alata'ini v. tr., to bait a hook, 'ala 6. 
 
 ale, aleale v. tr., to give oneself airs. 
 
 aleale 1. n., an umbrella palm. 
 
 aleale 2. n., a frond of the umbrella palm cut 
 into strips and dyed red with the root of 
 the lettuce-leaf tree (kikiri), used for 
 decorating canoes, combs, spears, etc.; 
 pungui aleale, a bunch of dyed aleale. 
 
 'alei, 'alai U., pi. art., used of persons only; 
 'alei he'i nikana ineu, my family; 'alei 
 'inoni, you people; 'alei 'inoni ineu, my 
 relations. Florida lei used to form 
 plurals. 
 
 alele to be jubilant; alele ni (ani) kananga, to 
 
 rejoice in song. 
 'alenga adv., up; nive 'alenga, to lift up the eves. 
 'a 6. 
 'alelenga adv., up; lio 'alelenga, to look up. 
 'alelenga'a adv. 1. upward. 2. v. tr., to 
 lift up. Mota langa, to lift; Samoa 
 langa, Viti langa. 
 alepopo U., lae alepopo, to go sideways, to walk 
 
 like a crab. 
 *aleu partic, turned upward; maana e 'aleu, to 
 
 have the whites of the eyes showing. 
 'ali 1. V. i., to lie curled up as a snake or a dog; 
 mwaa ko 'eli, a snake is curled up (an 
 omen of danger, maemaeha) . Mota tal, 
 to go around. 
 all U. 2. V. tr., to cut the mortises (ra'iqe'u) on 
 a pillar; kira 'asi 'alia i one, they mor- 
 tised it down on the beach. 
 'ali 3. a cord. cf. 'i'eli. Wango ari. 
 'ali U. 4. 'ali 'ae, the first piece of ground planted 
 
 in a garden. 
 alide to travel by sea. 
 
 alidanga v. n., 1. a sea journej'. 2. a canoe- 
 load of voyagers, alidanga e htile 
 saaka'elu. 
 alidangaha U., v. n., with double n. ter- 
 mination, as 2. Wango arida, Lau alida. 
 alieli 1. n., logs in a yam garden marking the 
 
 plots of different planters. 
 alieli 2. lio alieli, to look about. 
 alielimui v., to abound. 
 aliha U. 1. n., a centipede. Bugotu lira. 
 aliha-(ku) U. 2. alihana, thus, similarly, just 
 his way; aliha7nu, just your way; 
 alihada, just what j'ou might expect 
 from them. cf. aitana, S., alilana, U. 
 aliho'i 1. V. i., to return, to go back, ali 1, 
 ho'i 3. ko tola aliho'i ana nunune, 
 recovers its soul; mangona e puuto'o 
 aliho'i, his breath returned; qi'e aliho'i, 
 to recover health; susii eliho'i, restored 
 whole. 2. adv., again, 
 aliho'isi U., v. tr., to turn over, to reverse. 
 Vaturanga hoi, again; Florida goi, again; 
 Wango 'aho'i, ha'ari, to return. 
 aliholo 1. n., a depression in a mountain ridge, 
 a pass. 2. a fosse cut on a ridge to 
 prevent access by an enemy, holo. 
 alihu'isi S., w tr., to turn over, to re\-erse. hu'i 2. 
 alihu'ite'ini Qaloto dialect, as alihu'isi. 
 alihu'ita-(na) gerund, overturning, reversal; 
 'oto esi elihu'ilana mu huuilume, then 
 shall the cities be destroyed. 
 Ali'ite Northyvfst Sister Island, 'Olu Malau. 
 'alili n., a shellfish (Turbo petholatus); 7nusi 
 ni 'elili, its operculum. Mota salili, 
 Niue alili. 
 alilo'a n., an eddy of the wind, 'ali 1. 
 'alinge (ku) 1. n., ear; 'dlinge ka'a kawa'ie. ear 
 hath not heard; 'dlingada e hi'e mwaanie 
 rongo, ears weary of hearing; hu'esi 
 'elinge, to turn the ear to; rongo ni 
 'e inge, to hear with the ear; susu 'elinge, 
 an ear-stick ornament; tiwe 'dlinge, to 
 give ear to. 2. mushroom, large fungus. 
 Polynesian talinga.
 
 ANA 
 
 'alinge v. n., vying; huruliuru ni 'elinge, to run 
 
 races, 
 alingi v. tr., dlingie ora ni uiinu, to build up the 
 
 altar of sacrifice, 
 'alingo V. i., of the tongue, to "get round" a 
 
 word; meaku ka'a ' alingi) ana, my 
 
 tongue can not pronounco it. 
 aHpono sdsu alipono, thick smoke, pono. 
 'alipuri v. i., to follow (of time), 'dli 1, puri; 
 
 est 'elipuri ana, a little while after, 
 'alisuu ma'ahii 'elisuu, to sleep sound; nia- 
 
 'ahunge 'elisuu, sound sleep, 'dli 1, 
 
 suii 1. 
 'alisuute'ini v. tr., to be forgetful of. 
 alitana U., adv., even s-o, thus, alihana. 
 'alite 1. n., a tree (Catappa terminalis); hoi 
 
 'elite, its nut; 'dlite ko mena, the 'dlile is 
 
 turning red. 2. n., a diamond-shape in 
 
 ornament. Mota salite. 
 alitehu n., rubbish heap. Lau lafu. 
 'aliu 1. partic, reversed; saena e 'dliu, he 
 
 repented, liu. 2. v. i., to turn round; 
 
 'dliu haahie tnwala, to turn round and 
 
 face the people, ha' a' dliu. 
 'aliunge v. n., 'dliunge ni sae, conversion 
 
 of mind, 
 'alo specific numeral, of taro, 100; 'alo ni hut, 
 
 100 taro. Espiritu Santo taro, 100; 
 
 Mota tar, 1,000. 
 alo'a 1. adj., suffering from yaws. 2. n., the 
 
 yaws; mu alo'a, the frambcesia. 
 'alohi V. tr., to anoint. Florida dalovi. 
 alo'i to be loose (of teeth). 
 'alopi partic, having a jagged edge. 
 Alosi the north end of San Cristoval. 
 'alo'u 1. partic, turned back upon itself, 'a 6. 
 
 2. n., a verse, 'alo'u ni wala. 
 alu 1. v., dlu ana 'ape, to fish with a seine. 
 'alu U. 2. V. tr., to put, to place. Lau alu; 
 
 Florida talu, to put. 
 'alu U. 3. V. n., to change into, to become (of 
 
 ghosts); e 'alu ana pa'ewa, he changed 
 
 into the form of a shark. 
 aluhe S. 1. a centipede. 
 
 'aluhe 2. partic, untied, loosened, 'a 6, luhe. 
 aluhi, alueluhi 1. v. t., to wrap up, to cover up. 
 
 2. n., a covering, cloak. 
 aluhite-(ku) gerund, a covering, cloak, 
 alunge'i partic, rongonga alunge'i, heedless, 
 'alusae U., v. i., to meditate, to revolve in 
 
 mind, 'alu 2. 
 'ama-(.ku) n., father, father's brother; 'amaku, 
 
 voc, father; 'amana e ngdungeu, his 
 
 father ate it, a railing exclamation; e 
 
 usulie 'amayia, he is like his father. 
 
 Polynesian tama. 
 'amaa partic, outside, at the door, 'a 6, maa. 
 'ama'ama 1. v. i., to festoon with lycopodium 
 
 fern. 2. n., a bandolier of shell money 
 
 {had) strung in a pattern with fringe of 
 
 human teeth; Hi 'ama'ama, to make such 
 
 a belt. 3. n., festive ornaments, belts, 
 
 necklaces, bracelets, etc.; 'ama'ama ni 
 
 mae, panoply, war decoration, 
 'amadi 1. v. i., to eat one thing with another as 
 
 a relish, as fish with yams. 2. n., the 
 
 thing so eaten. 
 
 amami 1. poss. 3, pi. 1, e.xcl., of us, for us, 
 belonging to us, to us, used as object; 
 'oke ha'ala'inie amami, show it to us. 
 
 'amami 2. poss. 1, pi. 1, excl., for us to eat. 
 
 amara to be barren, childless; muini e amara, 
 the childless women. Wangcj amara. 
 
 'amasi, 'ama'amasi v. tr., to feel pity for; 'amasi 
 meuri, to be sorry for oneself, to save 
 one's skin by avoidance, hd'i'amasi. 
 'amasila-(ku) gerund, 'amasileku, woe is 
 me. Wango amari. 
 
 'amasito'o 1. v. i., used with poss. 3, to hold in 
 memory. 2. to be homesick, to pine, 
 'amasito'onga v. n., remembrance, recol- 
 lection; 'amasito'onga amelu, remem- 
 brance of us. 
 
 amau U., n., a fig with edible leaves; ntwai keni 
 ana sili amaunga, women given up to 
 getting amau. Ahina'i amau, the name 
 of a canoe in an Ulawa story. 
 
 'amaurila-(ku) gerund, living, alive; 'amdurila- 
 daru'e, they two alive. 
 
 amelu 1. poss. 3, pi. 1, e.xcl., of, for, to, belong- 
 ing to us. 
 
 'amelu 2. poss. 3, pi. 1, excl., for us to cat. 
 
 amere'i, ameru'e S. 1. poss. 1, dual 2, of, for, 
 to, belonging to, us two; amere'i is 
 sometimes used for amelu 1. 
 
 'amere'i, 'ameru'e S. 2. poss. 1, dual 2, for us 
 two to eat. 
 
 'ami U., pers. pron., pi. 1, excl. 1. used as sub- 
 ject, we. 2. used following the full 
 form i'ami. 3. suffixed as object to 
 verbs and prepositions. Florida garni, 
 Malay kaini. 
 
 'amo'amo U., to commit adultery. 
 
 'amo'amonga v. n., adultery. Wango kanio- 
 kamo. 
 
 amolu 1. poss. 3, pi, 2, of, for, to, belonging to, 
 you. 
 
 'amolu 2. poss. 1, pi. 2, for you to eat. 
 
 'amu U. 1. pers. pron., pi. 2. used as subject, 
 you. 2. suffixed as object to verbs and 
 prepositions. Lau gamu, Motu atnu. 
 
 amu 3. poss. 3, sing. 2, of, for, to, belonging to, 
 you. 
 
 amu 4. V. i., to weed, to pull up weeds. San 
 Cristoval amu. 
 
 'amu'e poss. 1, sing. 2, yours to eat. 
 
 'amu'i yours to eat, of many things. Motu 
 amui, yours. 
 
 'amumu to be dumb. Lau amu, dumb. 
 
 'amuni partic, lost to sight, sunk below the 
 horizon, 'a 6, tnumuni. 
 
 amusi.amu'emusiS. 1. to eat areca nut with lime 
 and betel pepper, 
 amusinge v. n., betel-chewing. 
 
 amusi S. 2. a fig with edible leaves, placed 
 under pork in ovens: also used to make 
 dhuqa'i. cf. amau, U. 
 
 'amute to be silent, to withhold speech; 
 'amumu. Id 3. 
 
 'amwada partic, loose (of teeth). 
 
 'amwaoro partic, bent down, bowed, 'a 6, 
 miua 1. 
 
 amwoamwo U., n.. a sprat. 
 
 ana 1. poss. 3, sing. 3; a 5. (a) used as object
 
 ANA 
 
 lO 
 
 ena 1 (continued"*. 
 
 when the preposition is separated from 
 the verb, (b) to, for, concerning, of, 
 against, him, her, it; calHng on (of a 
 ghost), U.. e davm'ia meme ana Kiir- 
 amo, he chewed areca nut to Kiiramo. 
 Florida ana. cf. Preface. 
 ana 2. prep., instrumental, used only with 
 nouns to which the pron. 3 can be suf- 
 fixed, the definite article may follow 
 ana; ana specifies the instrument, ani 
 the method; ana nga noma, with a spear; 
 e saiinie ani noma, he killed him spear- 
 wise; ana maaku, with my eye; ana nga 
 taa. with what? why? ana saemami, 
 with our hearts; ere lole ana ma'unge, 
 to talk confusedly from fear. 
 ana 3. prep., belonging to, from, him, her, it; 
 'o da nga muini ana muini 'ie, take some 
 from these; noii da ana, I got it from 
 him; e mdiiri ana mwela, delivered of a 
 child. 
 ana 4. place where; e hure'ita'a ana hdu, it 
 gushed forth from the rock; le'u e lae 
 ana, the place to which he went; ana 
 mu 'inoni, among men. 
 ana 5. prep., after, by the name of; kire saaie 
 ana a ola, they named him after So-and- 
 so; poro (keni) ana a ola, the man 
 (woman) named So-and-so. 
 ana 6. adv., time when; ana aau, at the time 
 of ripe canarium nuts; ana hdlisi, at 
 harvest time. Mota ana, in anaqarig, 
 ananora; Polynesian ana, of past time. 
 ana 7. adv., if, for, because; ana e tahanie 
 maamu ne, in that he opened your eyes; 
 ana ke ola mwamwadau, if possible; ana 
 muni kire 'unua, if they say it; aiia nge 
 na ka'a diana, now herein it is not good; 
 ana uri, for if, of supposititious cases; 
 anoa ni 'ie ana 'omu lae mai, a marvel 
 it is in that ye came. Mao. and, there, 
 when. 
 ana 8. tangahulu ana, tenth in a series. Mota 
 
 anai, pasopasoanai. 
 'ana 9. poss. 1, sing. 3; for him to eat. 'a 11. 
 
 Motu ana. 
 anaanawela adj., without blemish, 
 anahi to succor. 
 
 'ana'i U., verb. part., denoting futurity of 
 action; the 'a is attracted to the pre- 
 ceding a of pronoun na 2 and to kira. 
 rta'a na'i lae 'olo, I shall be off. Oba 
 na, M. L., p. 426. Bugotu da, M. L., 
 p. 550. cf. ke'i. 
 ane S., v. tr., to wonder at, to marvel at; ane i 
 Malau, able to see 'Olu Malau; proverb 
 of clear weather. Wango ha' ane, praise, 
 'anene adv., gently; ooru 'anene, to blow gently. 
 
 Maori hanene, to blow gently. 
 ani 1. poss. 3, pi. 3; of things only; concerning, 
 for, from among, to; used as object; 
 ne'isae ani, think upon; nou da nga 
 muini eni, I took a few of them, 
 iini 2. prep., instrumental, used instead of ana 
 when no article follows, but not used of 
 persons; e sdunie ani taa? ani hakis, 
 with what did he kill him? with an axe; 
 
 ani 2 (continued).' 
 
 ani denotes the method, ana the instru- 
 ment; dni is used of general and ana of 
 particular signification; dni has an 
 adverbial force; dni noma, spearwise; 
 dni eronga, guilefully; holota'i eni to'ohaa, 
 to promise in money; honu eni to'ohaa, 
 filled with money; hute dni mesinge, born 
 in adultery; ido dni erenga, to lament 
 with crying; dni he'idinge, at some future 
 day; but when an adjective follows the 
 noun ana may be used in the place of 
 dni; ana hd'idinge tata'ala, in an evil 
 day; dni houlaa. at the feast; laelae dni 
 'uri isulie, walk in his footsteps; maa 
 dni maa, niho dni niho, eye for eye, 
 tooth for tooth; e hure'ita'a dni heu pulu, 
 gushed out of the stony rock; dni meta- 
 thetic upon nia. ni 1; a 4. Florida 
 via, instrumental; Mota nia. 
 ani S. 3. prep., of, belonging to; used in com- 
 position; dni suusuu, U., a cubit; 'apu 
 eni sheep, the blood of sheep; hole dni 
 hcnue, a native paddle; li'oa dni wala- 
 'iynolinge, the spirit of truth; mu na'ohai 
 micela dni 'inoni, the first-born children 
 of men; qooqoola dni mime, foundations 
 of the house; raaraa dni meurihe, light 
 of life; supi eni heu, a stone club. 
 *ano 1. ground; cf. i'ano. 'ano huu, the earth, 
 opposed to 'dsi, sea; 'ano mola, cultivable 
 ground, deep soil on top of the ridges of 
 the upper hills, opposed to qd'u 4, the 
 ground on the ridges immediately above 
 the beach; hai 'ano, on the ground; hoi 
 'ano, underground; odohaana me'i 'ano 
 mola, in good ground; susu 'ano, to 
 make holes for planting yams. Lau 
 gano, Mota lano. 
 'ano 2. V. i., to pass away, to disappear out of 
 sight; 'ano suu, to perish and become 
 extinct; 'ano tdlihuu, to vanish com- 
 pletely. 
 anoa n., a marvel, miracle, vision, apparition; 
 anoa e wa'araa mdi, an apparition came 
 into view, 
 'anomi v. tr., to cover with earth, to bury. 
 'ano 1. ka'a po'ote'e ada, ko anomire 
 mola, no care is taken of them, they are 
 merely buried, of the undistinguished 
 dead. M. A., p. 263. 
 anu, anuenu to be loose, unstable. 
 
 anule'i partic, loosened, waving in the 
 wind. Florida anu. 
 Anute 1. the island of Florida. 2. Anute ni 
 i'e, island at the eastern entrance to 
 Mara Masiki Channel. 3. Anute Fdine, 
 North Sister Island near Aio on the east 
 coast of Big Malaita. Java nusa, 
 island, cf. Anuda, Cherry Island. 
 'anga 1. n., large woven basket for yams. 
 
 Mota tanga. 
 'anga 2. to open; 'anga wawa, to open the 
 
 mouth to speak. Buogut hangavi. 
 anga'i v. i., to carry, to act as porter. 
 
 anga'ini v. tr. Mota anga, to shoot up; 
 Malagasy anga, lifted up.
 
 II 
 
 APE 
 
 aogi 1. V. tr., e la molai angle holaa, there was 
 
 a flat calm. 
 angi, iingiengi 2. v. i., to be loose, insecure, 
 shaky, 
 angire'ini v. tr., to move backward and 
 
 forward in order to loosen, 
 angire'i partic, loose, capable of being 
 worked out. 
 angi, angiengi 3. to jerk. 
 
 'ango 1. V. i., to creep, to crawl (of children). 
 ha'a'ango. 
 'angohi v. tr., to crawl to, to crawl over, to 
 creep over; c 'angohia liuu ni kana, he 
 crawled over to the singers. 
 'angohila-(ku) gerund. Mota kalo 3. 
 'ango 2. V. i., ango walo, to roll fiber on the 
 thigh into twine; ango ddu, to lengthen 
 out. 
 'angohi v. tr. 
 *angohila-(ku) gerund, 
 'anguru partic, fallen out (of teeth, etc.). 
 
 'a 12, ngurusi. 
 ao 1. n., a bird, egret (Demiegretta sacra); 
 onomatopoetic; ao eke, white egret; ao 
 pulu, gray egret. Mota kaova. 
 ao U. 2. qd'i ao. the hermit crab, 
 'a'o, 'a'a'o S. 3. v. i., to catch fish, to go fishing. 
 wa'owa'o, U. hinon ni 'a'a'o, hook for 
 fishing. Fagani agoago. 
 a'oho V. i., to be uprooted, to collapse (of a 
 building). 
 a'ohonga v. n., a fall, collapse. Wango 
 arobo. 
 'a'o'i U., partic, broken in two. 'a 6, 'o'i. 
 'a'ole 1. n., a flying-fish; poro 'a'ole, used in 
 addressing the fish as they fly; walopasa, 
 10 flying-fish. 
 'a'ole 2. V. i., to catch flying-fish. The bait of 
 the flesh of crabs' claws (,asusu) is 
 whipped on a gorge {maai mudi) made 
 of turtle shell or of the midrib or rachis 
 of the sago-palm leaf, the line is tied to 
 a float (h'o) which is watched {'ala 6). 
 M. A., p. 317. 
 aonga'i v. i., to look fixedly, to stare, 
 aonga'ini v. tr., to stare at. 
 aonga'inila-(ku) gerund. 
 aopa v. i., different, exceedingly, ha'iaopa'i. 
 ddu aopa, to make mistakes, to err; 
 e aopa 'oto, it has got too bad already; 
 c sa'a he'i aopa lo'ti, it will never be 
 different; kire qao aopara jnwaanikolii, 
 they treated them differently from us; 
 si'o aopa, to separate. 
 aori 1. v. tr., to expose a body for burial in a 
 canoe or tree, or to lay it into a canoe. 
 cf. sdlu. Wango aora. 
 aori 2. v. tr., to approach (of persons), 
 'apa 1. n., a part, side, half; 'apai loa, hea- 
 ven, sky; 'apai sato, afternoon; 'apai 
 hut, 100,000 taro; 'apai niu, 100,000 
 coconuts; 'apani uhi, U., 100,000 >anis; 
 'apani mae, a fighting party; 'apani mae 
 pe'i'emi, to side with us; cf. Florida 
 levu ni mate. 
 'apa U. 2. to be different. 
 'apa 3. n., a leaf; cf. 'apa'apa 1. rnu 'apai 
 
 'apa 3 (continued). 
 
 dango, leaves of trees; 'apani paale'o, 
 nautilus shell cut in triangular forms 
 for inlaying; kala 'apani paale'o. to cut 
 such pieces of shell. Florida gaba, 
 branch. 4. side (not of persons); ko 
 aweawehie ro 'apa na, walks on every 
 side; the locative t is added; 'apai haha. 
 Big Malaita, J. e., downside; 'apaihenue, 
 the west (down side) of the island; 'apai 
 loa la'au, the heavens; 'apai salo, after- 
 noon. 
 
 'apaa n., a staff. 
 
 'apa'apa (ku) 1. n., wing, shoulder, leaves; 
 'apa'apana mu menu, birds' wings; 
 i 'apa'apana mu 'itioni, on the shoulders 
 of men; » qe'une 'apa'apana, on his 
 shoulders; mu 'apa'apai dango, tree 
 leaves; tere 'apa'apa, to flap the wings; 
 tele 'apa'apa, to flutter the wings; 'apai 
 reu, a leaf; mu 'apai reu ana mu dango, 
 the leaves of the trees; mwa 'apa'apani 
 'ei, U., tree leaves, 'apa 3. Wango 
 abaaba, shoulder, leaf; Viti tamba, wing; 
 Florida gaba, branch; Samoa 'apa'apa, 
 fin of a shark; Malay sapa, wing; Maori 
 kapakapa, to flutter; Mota gava, to flap 
 the wings. 
 
 'apa'apa 2. n., a shed, hut; probably because 
 built originally of leaves. 
 
 'apa'apa 3. 'apa'apai i'i, a bird, a swift. Mota 
 gapagapa, a swallow. 
 
 'apahee n., a pig's ham. 
 
 'apakere n., a yam. 
 
 'apala U. 1. shoulder; qd'uli 'apala, the 
 shoulder. 2. a sum of money (haa) 
 reaching from finger tips to opposite 
 shoulder; ida 'apala, a yard and a 
 quarter. 3. rua 'apala, a phase of the 
 moon. 4. v. tr., to carry in the arms; 
 e 'apalara, kure ke 'apala, let me carry 
 you. Mota sapan, to lead; Samoa sapa, 
 sapai; San Cristoval abara. 
 
 'apalili to make a detour, lili 1. Florida 
 labalili, apart. 
 
 'apalolo U., n., the banyan; used in Sa'a of a 
 special variety, 'apa 3, lolo 3. 'apalolo 
 e toli, the banyan has shed its leaves. 
 Florida tabalolo. 
 
 'apani ere 'apani, to talk in a dialect; wala 
 'apani, speech, 'apa 3. 
 'apanile-(ku) gerund., brogue. 
 
 'apara'i partic, surprised, frightened, taken at 
 a disadvantage, ha'a'apara'ini. 
 
 'apasu partic, chipped, with the end broken 
 
 off. 
 apau side (not of persons); apau deni, U., 
 toward morning; apau one, the lee side 
 of an island, an inlet west of Cape Zel6e; 
 e apau 'oto, it is afternoon; salo 'oto i 
 apau, the sun declines. Wango abau, 
 beside, outside, 
 ape 1. to run aground, to prevent, to hinder, 
 to serve as a barrier, ha'aape. ape 
 hile, to curtail; ape hono, ape honosi, to 
 prevent; ape puri, to be last, in the rear, 
 to follow after.
 
 APE 
 
 12 
 
 ape 2. ape sada S., ape dao U., to be level (of 
 country). 
 
 ape 3. V. tr.. to encourage; e apea saena, he en- 
 couraged him. 
 
 'ape 4. a net, a seine; 'ape ni menu, nets set for 
 birds across the openings in a ridge of 
 hills; the place where such nets are set; 
 'ape e tdu, the net has fish inclosed in it; 
 iilu ana 'ape, to fish with a seine; sdu 
 maa ana mu 'ape, to mend the meshes 
 of the nets. "Mota. gape, Maori kupenga. 
 
 'Ape 5. the constellation of the Southern Cross; 
 ro mwane, the two pointers to that con- 
 stellation. M. A., p. 349. 
 
 api-(na) bordering on; / epina lalo, bordering 
 on the garden. 
 
 apiepi v. i., to border on, to be contiguous to. 
 Malay apil, side by side; Maori apiti, 
 to place side by side; Niue apiapi, 
 narrow. 
 
 apirawa a yam with purple flesh. 
 
 apiopio a flowering creeper (Hoya). 
 
 apite'i partic, sore, of feet; met., sore at heart. 
 
 apo 1. V. tr., to epilate. 
 
 apo 2. a bivalve shell used to pluck out hairs — 
 it is held in the fingers and worked like 
 pincers. 
 
 apo 3. V. tr., to lever, to prize; e apoa tmi lieu, 
 he prized up the rocks. 
 
 'apolo 1. a piece of shell money (haa); 'ele 
 'apolo, U., a small length of money, 
 met., of a small piece of garden planted. 
 Florida polo, up till. 
 
 'apolo 2. partic, ceased, ended; kola ni tnwane 
 e 'apolo ana ro Dora, the succession of 
 boys ceased with the two Doras; mae 
 'apolo, paralyzed. 
 
 'apoloa S., people, descendants; 'apoloa ineti, 
 my people. 
 
 apota apota ni lionii, egg of turtle. 
 
 'apu (ku) 1. blood, cf. ma'dpu'a; 'dpii e siki 
 ana, seed of copulation; 'dpu raharaha, 
 an issue of blood; kokoi 'epu, a drop of 
 blood; vie'i 'epu, S., mdsi 'epu, U., blood; 
 e ngisuhie 'dpu, to spit blood; sulu 'epu, 
 to adopt a child. 
 'apule adj., bloody; qa'u 'dpula, U., a person 
 wounded in battle; awalaa'i 'epule, 
 bloodshot; Hli 'epule, turned into blood, 
 'apunge v. n., sulu 'epunge, adoption of 
 children. 
 
 'apu 2. to be forbidden, tabu, to be final. 
 ha'a'apu. e 'dpu laa, U., why not? (is 
 it forbidden?); loli 'epu, to observe a 
 tabu, to fast. 
 
 'Apu 'Ala a district on Little Malaita over- 
 looking Mara Masiki Channel. 
 
 'iipu'i v., to flatter, to cajole, to say 'ako'ako 
 sae. hd'i'epu'i. 
 
 'apulo panic, returned, turned back on a 
 journey, 'a 6, pulo. 
 
 apune wa'i n., stinging-nettle tree, wa'i 7. 
 
 'apuru partic, crowded, 'a 6, puru. 
 
 'Apurunge the Pleiades. M. A., p. 349. 
 Maori apuru, to crowd. 
 
 'aqa 1. to squat on the heels, to cower down, 
 'aqahi tr., to crouch and await, to lie in 
 
 'aqa 1 (continued). 
 
 wait for; 'aqahi lue, shell-money orna- 
 ment in pairs and worn by the women on 
 breast and back. 
 'aqaha'i v. i., to crouch, to brood over 
 
 (of hens). 
 'aqata'ini v. tr., to beset, to lie in wait for. 
 Mota laqa, crouch; Wango 'aqa' aqa, 
 Maori ?awhi. 
 
 'aqa (ku) U. 2. n., belly, cf. 'oqa. 
 
 'aqa 3. ha'a'aqaha'ini, to measure by. 
 
 'aqa'aqa n., bay, indentation in coast, 'aqa 2. 
 'aqa'aqa'a adj., bay-shaped. San Cris- 
 toval waqa, a cave. 
 
 aqalao n., pus, matter in a sore. 
 
 'aqalulu S., 'aqarura U., n., coconut beetle. 
 
 'aqaqo 'aqaqoi sa'o 1. fronds of sago palm. 2. 
 raft made of the fronds. 
 
 'aqelu partic, ov-erturned. 'a 6, qelu. 
 
 ara 1. n., dew; hu'ori ara, to be early afoot. 
 
 ara, araara 2. v., to make an advance, to move 
 forward, to get on; ko kele araara la'ane, 
 it is moving slighth-. 
 arana tr., to move a thing on. 
 arala-(ku) gerund, aralana, its being moved 
 forward. 
 
 ara 3. v., to be lost, dispersed. 
 
 'arai v. i.. to call out, to cry aloud. Bugotu 
 tarai. 
 
 ara'idio v. i., to alight upon, to swoop, of 
 birds, dio. 
 
 arakau n., fish hawk (Haliaster girrenera). 
 kdu 1. Wango arakau. 
 
 arakoko n., taro pudding, pounded taro with 
 grated raw coconut on top, considered 
 poor cookerj'. 
 
 aramu U., v., to itch. 
 
 aranga n., a wild duck. 
 
 arapa n., a wooden hair comb; it is made of 
 separate pieces and not cut out of the 
 solid: a cross-bar is tied with fibers of 
 the creeper adio below the handle, the 
 center piece projects beyond the others, 
 which are bent and tied tightly to it. 
 the flat handle is frequently inlaid with 
 pieces of nautilus shell (reoreo), the 
 teeth of the comb are very sharp and 
 the hair is teased out with an upward 
 movement; arapa ddiedi, a comb made 
 in Big Malaita and ornamented with 
 dyed plaited cane (ue) and yellow fern 
 tissue (ddiedi) woven into a pattern on 
 the handle, the ends passing between 
 the pieces composing the comb; arapa 
 reoreo, comb inlaid with nautilus shell. 
 arapasi v. tr., to comb the hair, 
 arapuu v. i., to make land when at sea, to reach. 
 ara 2. puu 1. 
 arapuunge v. n.. a coming to land, reaching 
 a destination. 
 'arasi 1. to scrape, to fine down spears, etc., 
 by scraping, kara 2; 'arasi niu, to 
 grate coconut with a roa or sdukai; 
 'arasi noma, to scrape spears with ngddi. 
 Mota sarav, to stroke; Niue alati, to 
 scratch. 
 'arasi 2. v. i., 'arasi moo, to lead the chorus in
 
 13 
 
 'ASI 
 
 'arasi 2 (continued). 
 
 a dance; lia'a vi 'arasi, ark of the 
 
 covenant, 
 arato U., seeds worn on the ankles in a dance, 
 aratoto v. i., to get to a destination, ara 2. 
 arau 1. n., a kind of canarium nut. 2. n., the 
 
 place where such grow. 
 'arawa adj., raw, unripe, uncooked; mae 
 
 'arawa, to die suddenly- or in youth; nolo 
 
 'arawa, to die suddenly, 
 'arawanga v. n., 7ioto 'arawanga, sudden 
 
 death. 
 'arawana its greenness, unripeness; 'ara- 
 
 wana e ngdii diana. it eats well raw. 
 'ara'arawa'a adj., raw. Wango marawa. 
 arawana n.,atree on Malaita with large edible 
 
 fruit brown in color. 
 are, areare v. tr., to call upon a ghost (li'oa, 
 
 'akalo), to beg. to importune; arearedn 
 
 ana uununge, call upon me with sacrifice. 
 arenga'i v. i., arenga'i he'u, to use hot stones 
 
 in the ordeal by fire, calling on a ghost 
 
 to witness one's innocence. M..\., p. 212. 
 'arenga'ini tr., to offer prayers and invo- 
 cations to a ghost. 
 are hd'iare, U., v. tr., to proffer help, to push 
 
 oneself forward. 
 areareo'a U., adj., ulcerous, crippled with 
 
 ulcers. 
 aree interj., exclamation of grief or pain, 
 areka an acacia which grows in abandoned 
 
 gardens. 
 arenga-(ku) 1. duty, part; noko esii arengakii, I 
 
 am doing my part. Lau arcnga. 
 Arenga 2. Arenga Mann, the northwest point 
 
 of Ulawa, near Haraina. 
 arikosi U., v., to work in common, to have a 
 
 working bee. 
 arikosinga v. n., work done in common, 
 arikosilana gerund, the working of it, its 
 
 being done, 
 ariri, arieriri to tremble, to shiver from cold 
 
 or fear, 
 ariringe v. n., trembling. Bugotu ariri. 
 arisi v. tr., to attack craftily, with deceit and 
 
 guile. 
 arisila-(ku) gerund. 
 ariu n., kingfish. 
 
 aro 1. wild ginger, aro pite. 'apai aro, ginger- 
 leaf wrapping of food in the oven; tnaai 
 
 aro. stalks of ginger. 
 aro 2. v., to soar, to hover. 
 aro 3. poe aro, a nose-stick of bamboo or shell. 
 aroaro v , to shout, to exult; rike pe'i aroaro, 
 
 to rejoice and shout. 
 'aroka partic, open, wide, 'a 6, roka. 
 Arena n., the south cape of Ulawa and the 
 
 village east of it. 
 aropu U. 1. n., snail; hdnitaana ttgdii aropunga, 
 
 a snail-eating place, 
 aropu S. 2. toto aropu, to sip. 
 aroqa'i to mix liquids, qd'i 2. 
 
 aroqa'i'e adj., 'omu ke man anga aroqa'i'e 
 
 hunie, give her a double mixture, 
 'aroro 1. n., a wooden hook. 2. v. tr., to sus- 
 pend, to hang on a hook. Florida 
 
 dor aro. 
 
 Aru i sapena i Arti ni i'e, apostrophe addressed 
 to San Cristoval. cf. ha'addhi. 
 
 aruhi n., a covering. 
 
 asa V. i., to be difficult, mysterious, ha'aasa, 
 ha'aasa'i. mango asa, to gasp; tnn wet 
 e asa, deep waters; rorongo asa, U., to 
 he dull of hearing. 
 asaasa'a adj., difficult. 
 asa'i tr., to be too difficult for; e asa'ieu, it 
 is too difficult for me. Wango asa, 
 mysterious. 
 
 asii mango tree; hoi asai, mango fruit; te'ele'ei 
 asai, dry mango seed used as a cover for 
 the shell (apo) used as a razor. 
 
 asaka n., coleus. 
 
 asaunge n., sardine, caught with a shell hook 
 (looloo, toohe'o) from a stage built out 
 in the bays; asaunge e ddu, the sardines 
 have arrived. 
 
 'asi 1 . sea, salt water, salt; 'dsi dodo, deep water; 
 'dsi ko kokohu, the sea is booming; 'dsi 
 ko ulungaa hdnue, the sea under the 
 earth; 'dsi mae, lee shore; 'dsi malawa, 
 open sea; 'dsi meuri, weather side; 'dsi 
 namo, quiet water inside a harbor; 'ds 
 rodo, deep water; 'dsi rodo, a month 
 January (part); hdu ni 'esi, a wave; 
 holosie 'asi, to cross the waves; koliine 
 'dsi, the face of the sea; koukou 'esi, to 
 gargle salt water; liu i 'esi, to travel by 
 sea; mora idria para i'ola i 'esi, you 
 launch the canoe yonder into the sea; 
 mu suuleni 'esi, the paths of the sea; 
 mwai malan i 'esi, U., the islands of the 
 sea; nono 'dsi, sandfly, gnat; pine ni 
 'esi, booby; pusu 'esi, whale; te'i 'esi, to 
 dip and draw up salt water in a bamboo; 
 i lo'ulana 'dsi, on the surface of the sea. 
 Mota tas, Ceram lasi, Polynesian tai. 
 
 'asi-(ku) 2. S., man's brother, woman's sister; 
 'asiku, my brother; 'asikii ineu, my 
 brother; maeni 'esiku, my brethren; mu 
 mwa 'asine, brethren: in Sa'a a sister 
 may be spoken of by her brother as 
 'asiku; in Ulawa 'asiku means a woman's 
 brother or a sister-in-law; ro mwa 'asina, 
 U., two sisters-in-law, each calling the 
 other 'asiku (Su'uholo usage). Mota 
 tasiit, Motu iadi, Polynesian lahi, lei. 
 
 'asi 3. V. tr., to throw away; joined with certain 
 words it denotes destruction, doing away 
 with; dere 'asi, U., to throw away; ere 
 'asi, U., to reproach, to vilify; horo 'asi, 
 to decimate; hu'e 'asi, to overturn, to 
 overthrow; kae 'asi, to pluck out (thorn) ; 
 nc'isae 'asi, to forgive; oolw 'asi, to 
 break up, to destroy; sae 'asi, to forgive, 
 to neglect; susu 'asi, to prick and re- 
 move; 'usungc'i 'asi, to despatch. 
 'asila-(.ku) gerund, uunu 'asilana, destroy- 
 ing by burning. 
 'asi'a U., adj., with notion of wasted; e 
 pdina 'asi'a, needlessly big; e udiudi 
 'asi'a, rotting away; nga hudi e mala 
 'asi'a, the bananas were rotting away 
 unpicked. Florida asi. lost; Wango 
 gasi; Malo ascna, very.
 
 'ASI 
 
 14 
 
 *asi U. 4. adv., thereupon, consequently, 'a, 
 V. p., si, illative. 
 
 asihe U., to sneeze, 'asinge, S. M. A., p. 226. 
 Bugotu achihe, Maori malihe. Nine tihe, 
 Probably onomatop. 
 
 *asile adj., saltish, brackish, 'dsi 1. 
 
 'Asiloli'a U., the name of a canoe in a storj'. 
 
 'asinge S., to sneeze, dsihe, U.; considered a 
 sign that someone is calling. 
 
 asire'i v. i., to be taken unawares, to be unpre- 
 pared for. ha'adsire'i. 
 
 asoso V. i., to tremble, to shake, to be palsied. 
 
 asu, asuesu 1. S., to work; dsu hohola, to work 
 in a yam patch; dsu tnaarue, to serve 
 two masters; dsu me'i ola, to minister 
 at holy things; dsu nani 'inoni, of work 
 not faithfully done, eye service; dsu 
 ramoramo'anga, mighty work; dsu susu- 
 le'i, to work unremittingly; dsu talai 
 ngeulaa, to work for food; dsu we'u, 
 hard work, 
 asunge v. n., work, 
 asu'i tr., to work at a thing. 
 asula-(ku) gerund., the doing of. 
 
 asu, asuesu 2. v. i., to move from place to place, 
 to be loose. 
 asule'i partic, unstable. 
 
 asuata exclam. of disapproval. 
 
 asuhe n., a rat; 'asuhe e ngero'ie, rats nibbled 
 it. Mota gasuwe, Viti kudhuve, Bugotu 
 kuhi. 
 
 asu'olo'olo v. i., to be loose, shaking, to move 
 to and fro. dsu 2, 'olo'olo. 
 
 asusu coconut crab (Birgus latro), the flesh of 
 claws used as bait for flying-fish. 
 
 ata 1 S., a unit; methathetic upon ta'a 3. 'enite 
 'ala, just how many? e ro 'ata mwane, 
 only two men. 
 
 ata, ataata 2. U., to progress, to move on, to 
 be in motion, adaada, S. 
 atana tr., to move a thing slightly. 
 
 atalawa v. i., to be set wide apart. 
 
 atanau v. i., used with poss. 3; of a ghost, to 
 fasten on, to attack a person. 
 
 *ate, 'ate 'ate to be dry, to have no moisture on; 
 ngisu 'ate, to be thirsty (parched lips); 
 ngisu 'atenga, thirst. 
 
 'atea S. 1. a coconut water-bottle, hou 'atea. 
 2. a glass bottle. 
 
 atei interrog. pron., sing., who; plural, kiratei; 
 alei 'elekale, what child? atei e manala- 
 'inie, who knows? (I can't say); ola 
 alei, whose thing? the demonstrative 
 ni may be added; atei ni ngeena, who is 
 that? satana atei, what (who) is his 
 name? Mota isei, Maori wai. 
 
 ato 1. to be in motion; 'ato 'ae, to move quickly, 
 to stride; 'ato 'ae su'ahia, U., to leap and 
 encounter; 'ato hdu ilengi, to stone with 
 stones; 'ato holo, to cross over the sea; 
 'ato honosi, to oppose; 'ato huni, to lie 
 in wait for; 'ato i na'ona huni, to be in 
 worse plight, circumstances became 
 worse for one; 'ato hu'o, to set a net; 'ato 
 hu'onga, a plot; 'ato nime, to set out 
 bowls of food at a feast; 'ato puri, with 
 p ss. 3, to turn the back on. 
 
 ato 1 (continued). 
 
 'atoni tr., 'atoni lalo, to plan, to set out, a 
 garden; 'atoni hu'o, to set a net; 'atoni 
 ue, to steep and dye strips of cane; hu'eli 
 'ato'ato, to wind dyed cane, 
 'ato 2. n., rafter, generally of bamboo. Mota 
 gaso, Bugotu gaho, Borneo kasau, Niue 
 ato, Maori kaho, ato, thatch. 
 'ato'ato 1. n., hu'eli 'ato'ato, to wind rolls of 
 dyed cane. 
 
 'ato'ato 2. v. i., to take a new canoe on a tour 
 around the neighborhood and to nearby 
 islands in order to raise money; i'ola 
 'ato'ato, a canoe so taken. 
 
 'ato'ato 3. 'ato'ato hdu, to perform the ordeal 
 with hot stones. M. A., p. 212. ddu 
 he'u, id.; sulu 'ato, a song sung as an 
 ordeal; sulu 'atonga v. n. 
 
 'atohono n., a chamber, inner room, 'ato 2, 
 hono. 
 
 atowaa n., broad day, 10 a. m. to 2 p. m.; hai 
 atowaa hd'ileku, a whole day long; mu 
 hei atowaa, the days, as opposed to mu 
 hei rodo, the nights; susu'e atowaa, all 
 day long. 
 
 au l.n., a black, poisonous snake. M. A., p. 221. 
 
 au 2. pers. pron., sing., 1, sufftxed to verb and 
 to preposition as object, i-na-u, M. L., 
 p. 116. 
 
 au 3. n., the bamboo; au pungu, a large, strong 
 kind of bamboo; du qe'i, a variety of 
 bamboo with close joints, planted 
 upright to retain walls of houses, also 
 employed in making combs; du rarahi, 
 the third finger; du susu, an ear-stick 
 of reed; du wale, a flute; hai eu, a reed, 
 a length of bamboo; huui eu, a stool of 
 bamboo; qirei eu, a length of bamboo, a 
 bamboo stalk. Mota au 1. Motu bau. 
 
 'au 4. 'du ta'a, to debouch (of a path), to end 
 in, to proceed from. Mota au, to step. 
 
 'a'u U. 5. exclam. of assent, yes. 
 
 aueu 1. a short bamboo plugged at one end, 
 used as a receptacle. 2. a casket. 3. a 
 match-box, dueu ni dunge. 
 
 aueune v. i., to be discontented, upset in mind. 
 
 auhenue 1. v., to be resident in a place, to be a 
 native of a place, hdnue. 2. n., an 
 inhabitant of a place; nou euhenue 'oto, 
 I am acclimatized. 3. n., a neighbor; 
 e sa'a saronie auhenue inge'ie, he will do 
 no harm to his neighbor. 
 
 'auhora v. i., to come open, to come apart, to 
 be revealed, hd'ihora'i. salo ko euhora, 
 the sky is opened; ddngi esi euhora, 
 light has been revealed. 
 
 a'ulu 1. specific numeral, ten of coconuts. 
 d'ului niu. 
 
 A'ulu 2. village on the east coast of Little 
 Malaita next to Sa'a. 3. A'ulu Peine. 
 A'ulu Talau, northeast end of Little 
 Malaita. 
 
 aunge-(ku) dungana, his master; dungani lalo, 
 U., master of the garden. 
 
 Auqe'i a hill on the main ridge of Little Malaita 
 in the Koru district at the head of the 
 river Walo'a'a, near original home of 
 Sa'a people.
 
 DA'IDERIE 
 
 'auru to be uprooted, to fall down (of a tree). 
 
 San Cristoval auru, down; Maori auru. 
 'ausala v. i., to be a gadabout, to neglect the 
 
 home. Mota sala 1. 
 'auta'a to proceed from, to come forth, 'au 4. 
 
 ta'a 4. 
 'Mutala ere 'dtitala. to speak to the air, for 
 
 naught. 
 awa 1. to be a sojourner in a foreign place; in 
 
 proper names, VVateawa. noko awa 
 
 mdi, I am a stranger here. 
 awa 2. V. i., to roar (of flood, etc.); taa ni ko 
 
 awa mdi, what is that roaring? pine 
 
 awa, the hornbill, from the rushing noise 
 
 made by its wing. 
 awaawata-(na) gerund.; awaawalana naho, 
 
 the roaring of the surf. 
 awa 3. to be brown in color; 'usu awa, a brown 
 
 dog; hana awa, a pinkish-colored yam. 
 awa 4. the walking-fish (Periophthalmus sp.). 
 awa 5. U.. awa lahu, to slip, to come loose (of 
 
 bands) . 
 awa 6. U., lahanga awa tiiisi, a measure, just 
 
 on a fathom. 
 'awa 7. a tree (N'ephelium pinnatum). Mota 
 
 tawan, \'iti ndawa. 
 'awa 8. cf. 'awangi, 'awasi. 
 awaa to be convalescent after fever, to be over 
 
 the attack. 
 awaawahane U.. v. i., to sigh for; e'a awaa- 
 
 wahane mola amoro'i, he is forever 
 
 sighing for you two. 
 awala n., a ten. a tally, ha'aawala. nga 
 
 awala, a ten; e ro awala, two tens, 
 
 twenty; awala ha'ahuii, S., awala 'oto 
 
 huu, U., a full ten; awala da'adala, an 
 
 uneven tally; aivala mdia 'enila, awala 
 
 mwana 'enile, how many over ten; 
 
 awala mwana rue, twelve (ten complete 
 
 and two) ; kali awala, ten strings of 
 
 shell money each a fathom long. Lau 
 
 aqala. 
 awalaa'i S., partic, awalaa'i 'eptile, bloodshot, 
 
 red (of eyes). 
 awaleo creaking branches in a tree, 
 awalosi 1. the wind between west and north 
 
 blowing in the summer; awalosi i ahare, 
 
 northeast wind; awalosi liatale, north 
 
 wind; awalosi i henue, northwest wind; 
 
 awalosi i Kela, southwest wind (as Kela 
 
 is the south point of Guadalcanar this 
 
 shows that the wind notation rests 
 
 upon the rhumb toward which the wind 
 
 blows); awalosi i one, north-northeast 
 
 %vind; awalosi i su'u west wind, 
 awalosi 2. a reed (Arundo sp.) with edible 
 
 flower-heads, 
 awanganga v. i., to open the mouth, to gape. 
 
 Mota wanga, to gape; Lau faga, mouth; 
 
 Maori wangai, to feed; Niue fangai, 
 
 to feed, 
 'awangi v. tr., to expose to the air (of an ulcer 
 
 or sore place). 
 awara, awaawara to cry out, to yell, to whine; 
 
 hdu ni mwela awara, the day after full 
 
 moon. 
 awaranga v. n.. crying, yelling. 
 
 awara (continued). 
 
 awarasi tr., to cry over, to lament. 
 Wango awara. 
 'awasi to draw in the breath with a whistling 
 sound when eating areca nut. 'awasi 
 'e'e, S., 'awasi pua, U. 'awa 8. ?tawa, 
 mouth, 
 'awasirahe v. i., to groan, to mourn, to sigh. 
 n., a Kroan 'awasi, rahe. 
 'awasirahenga v. n.. groaning. 
 awata'a to be a stranger and as such in evil 
 plight, awa 1. ta'a 1. VJ zngo awala' a. 
 awe, aweawe v. i.. to walk about. 
 
 aweawehi tr.. to travel up and down a place; 
 ko aweawehie ro 'apana, walks on every 
 side. 
 
 D 
 
 Before i d is pronounced as ch in the word 
 
 church; adi a-chi, diena chi-e-na. In all other 
 
 cases in pronouncing d the tongue is pressed 
 
 against the palate and held there while the 
 
 breath is forced against it, then the tongue is 
 
 relaxed and the breath escapes, the resultant 
 
 sound being equivalent to dr. 
 
 da 1. pers. pron., pi. 3, suffixed to nouns and 
 to certain verbs and gerundives. 
 
 da 2. mwane da na kolu mae, lest we die. daa. 
 
 daa, daadaa S., v. i.. to give, to take, to do. 
 taa, U. le'iine nou daa 'oto, I did that 
 already. 
 
 dada U., to be smooth, to be flat, level. 
 ha'adada, hd'idada, hu'idada. 
 
 dadada'a U.. adj., smooth, flat, level. 
 
 dadanga'a S., burnished, shining. 
 
 da'elu pers. pron.. pi. 3. suffi.xed to nouns and 
 to certain verbs and gerundives, da 1. 
 » saada'elu. 
 
 Daha a beach in 'Olu Su'u. the landing-place 
 next north of Sa'a on the east coast. 
 
 dahe v. tr., to adze down, to chip ground with 
 the hoe. ha'adahe. 
 
 dahi 1. the golden-lip pearl shell; 'u'u. maai 
 dehi, a pearl; suu dehi, to dive for pearl 
 shell. 2. a crescentic breast ornament 
 for men cut from this shell; ddhi raha, 
 a pearl-shell gorget worn with the 
 convex side outward and the rounded 
 outer edge plastered with pulu 3. 3. U.. 
 a phase of the moon. 
 
 dahi, da'idehi 4. to be favored, to be lucky; 
 ha'addhi; to the reduplicated form the 
 possessive pronoun is suffi.xed. and in 
 Sa'a the a is replaced by e where no » or 
 M precedes; nou dehi, lucky me; de'ide- 
 hieii, de'idehire, happy me. happy they. 
 
 dahi'e, da'idehi'e S.. dahidahi'a U., adj., 
 happy, fortunate, blessed. 
 
 dahu the sheath covering the coconut flower, 
 used when dry for tinder or for fire- 
 kindling. 
 
 da'i 1. seen in compounds, dd'idiena, dii'ita'a, 
 dd'ilama'a. 
 
 Da'i 2. Gower Island, north of Big Malaita. 
 
 da'idengi adv., by daylight, dangi. 
 
 da'ideri'e n., a valley, dari.
 
 DA'IDIENA 
 
 l6 
 
 da'idiena U.. da'idiana S., to be in peace, to 
 be in safety, diana. ani dingc tii 
 de'idiana, in a day of salvation, 
 da'idiananga v. n., i'o ni de'idiananga, to 
 dwell in safety. 
 
 da'ilama U., v.. to be in peace, n., peace, 
 da'ilama'a adj., peaceful, 
 da'ilama'asi v. tr., to be at peace; e dd'ila- 
 ma'asira, they were in peace. 
 
 da'ita'a v., to be in trouble, n., trouble. 
 
 dala in the reduplicated form da'adala used 
 to denote numbers above ten, not a full 
 tally; e da'adala, it was a number over 
 ten; awala da'adala, an uneven tally; nga 
 muini da'adala, more than ten. Fagani 
 matara. 
 
 dalao to have the skin broken; 'aekti e dalao, 
 the skin of my leg is broken, abraded. 
 
 dalo 1. a littoral tree (Calophyllum inophyl- 
 lum); when growing by the landing- 
 places the dalo is the scene of taho 
 lalamoa, the payment for men killed, 
 .sMM ola, also as the place for offerings 
 to 'akalo; dalo ni me'esxi, the paule tree. 
 Viti ndilo. 
 
 dalo 2. inue dalo, to clear the throat of mucus. 
 
 daluma U., middle, danume S. 
 
 dama-(ku) U., fellow, mate. cf. satna. 
 damakii, my fellow; dama diu, of 
 unequal length. 
 
 dama 'a rank, row, of men in a dance. 
 
 damadiu to overlap, cf. dama. 
 
 damu U., v. i., to eat areca nut; demudemn 
 toloria, a phase of the moon, 
 damulaa areca nut and pepper leaf for 
 
 chewing, idemu, loo 2. sdru'e. 
 damu'i tr., e ddmit'ia hoii tneme ana Kiiramo, 
 he chewed a ball of tneme calling on 
 Kiiramo. San Cristoval lamu; Lau 
 kamu, to chew areca nut; Maori kamii, 
 eat; Samoa samusamn, to eat scraps. 
 
 damuteke an inclosure sacred to an 'akalo 
 inside a laoha or toohi round the central 
 pillar and fenced with a heap of stones, 
 or outside the door of dwelling-houses, 
 into which areca-nut skins or scraps of 
 food may be thrown without fear of an 
 enemy getting them and using them for 
 malign purposes. 
 
 dana U., a bamboo for carrying water, holes 
 being made through the joints. 
 
 dani U., to be daylight, ddngi, S. hd'idenie'i; 
 ahuraa dani, to be on the move before 
 daylight; apau deni, toward morning; 
 e dani ha'ahidee, next day; e dani 'oto, 
 it is day; marawa ni deni, daybreak, 
 da'ideni daylight, by daylight, 
 danita'i haudinga po'o ddnita'i, the follow- 
 ing day. 
 danite'ini tr., of the daylight dawning upon 
 a person. Florida dani, day; danihagi. 
 
 danu, da'udenu S., daidenu U., v. 1., to bale, 
 to draw water; danu oku, to catch the 
 palolo worm with coconut nets; danu 
 wei, to bale, to draw water; oku denii, 
 name of a month, November, when the 
 palolo worm appears, idenu. 
 
 danu (continued). 
 
 danu'i tr., to bale, to whet, to sprinkle 
 with water. 
 
 danume-(ku) middle, waist: with locative i; 
 ddnumeku, my waist; i dematie, in the 
 midst; i denumana hdnue, in the middle 
 of the island. 
 
 dangi 1. S., to be daylight, dani, U. hd'iden- 
 gie'i. VVango deni. ddngi hooiva, the 
 next day; e ddngi 'oto, it is day; e ddngi 
 paro, as soon as it was day; idengi, 
 tomorrow; susii'e ddngi, every day. 
 da'idengi by daylight; melu hide dd'idengi 
 
 ta'ane, we arrived in daylight. 
 dangite'ini tr., of the day dawning upon a 
 person; e ddngite'ini 'emclii, day dawned 
 upon us. Lau dani, 
 
 dangi 2. n., wind; ddngi ka'a oorii ike, there 
 was no wind at all; hai tnaai dengi 
 he'iliune, the four winds; qetolana ddngi, 
 qetohaana ddngi, a wind gone down. 
 qeto; ramohaana ddngi, a gale, ramo. 
 Mota lang, Florida dani, Polynesian 
 langi, Malay angin. 
 
 dango 1. S., n., a tree; dango mwamwako'a, a 
 prickly tree; dango ni haka, papaya; 
 dangona mwakana, trees of the field; 
 hai dango, a log; hoi dango, U. (Ahi'a 
 use), papaya; hoi dango, S., the kidneys; 
 hiiesi dango, S., the kidneys; imiimine 
 dango, root of a tree; inu 'apai reu ana 
 mu dango, the leaves of the trees; rai 
 dango, S., a plank; takai dango, a flower. 
 
 dango 2. S., n., firewood; roto dango, to cut 
 firewood; hite dango. to split firewood; 
 so'o dango, S., to gather firewood. 
 Malagasy irawo. 
 
 dao U., ape dao. to be level, of country. 
 
 dacha, daodaoha U., v. i., to be ill. 
 
 daohanga v. n., sickness, illness. Wango 
 daoha. 
 
 dara (ku) n., forehead; darakii, my forehead; 
 i na'ona dara, on the forehead. 
 
 daraha'ini S., v. tr., to fit a shell ring {halo) on 
 the arm, to impale. Wango darasi. 
 
 darasahu n., a bird, a tern (Sterna frontalis), 
 having a white mark above the bill. 
 dara, sahii 1. 
 
 darasi S., deresi U., to draw a thing out of its 
 covering, to unsheathe. 
 
 dari ddri mwaa, a torrent running only in the 
 rains and dry (mwaa) at other times. 
 dd'ideri'e. 
 
 dare, dadaro 1. v. i., to hit, to beat, to strike 
 with a stick. 2. v. i., to cast a fishing- 
 line for garfish (tnwanole), to whiff for 
 sardines with loohe'o. 
 daro'i tr., to hit a person with a stick. 
 daronga'ini U., tr., to strike and overthrow. 
 
 daru'e pers. pron., dual 3, suffixed to nouns 
 and to gerundives and to verbal nouns 
 used as prepositions; 'amduriladaru'e, 
 they two alive; 'amadaru'e, the father of 
 those two; 'upuderu'e, their middle. 
 
 dau 1. V. tr. and v. i., to do, to attempt, tocause, 
 to make, to take, to get, to obtain; dau 
 dunge, ordeal with hot stores. M. A.,
 
 17 
 
 DIONGA'I 
 
 dMu 1. (continued). 
 
 p. 212. rfawew, to play tunes; dax haahi, 
 to omit; ddti hahota. S., to act the hypo- 
 crite; ddu heu, ordeal with hot stones. 
 M. A., p. 210. ddu hono. S.. to hinder; 
 ddu lalo ana, S., to be plunged into the 
 midst of; ddu parasi. U., to hinder; ddu 
 ramoramo'a, to do violence; ddu sun'i, 
 to importune; ddu wala (ku), to trans- 
 gress; mu ola nou deu walaku ctii, my 
 offenses; ddu wei. to catch fish in pools 
 when the river is low; dduddu poo, U., 
 to sacrifice pigs; e ddu ni ere, he made 
 to speak; lopo'i deu, to feign; mala hire 
 manata'i deue, as they were wont; nou 
 deu Mt lae, I attempted to go; sulu 
 dduddu, to make songs on. 
 daulana gerund.; mu ola saemu eni deule^ii, 
 the things your heart is set upon doinj;. 
 Wango dau, to touch; Viti ndau, to do. 
 d&u 2. to come to rest, to be stationary (of 
 canoes), ha'addu. ddu suu weu, move 
 farther up. 
 daunge v. n., i'o ni deunge, to be a sojourner. 
 Lau dau, to reach; Samoa lau, to anchor; 
 Maori /aw. to rest. 
 daure'i U.. v. i.. to put layers of sago-palm leaf 
 sewn on reeds on a roof to thatch it. 
 daure'ini tr., to thatch a house. 
 dawa (ku) 1. n., the mouth, ngidu, lip, is 
 more commonly used in Sa'a for the 
 sake of politeness. 
 dawa 2. v.. to be toothless. 
 
 dawari U.. v. tr.. to chew with the gums 
 because toothless. 
 dede 1- v. i., to fill with fluid; dede ha'ahonu 
 ana, fill it full; kara dede, yam mash 
 run into a bamboo and cooked over a 
 fire. 
 dede'i tr., to fill with liquid. Lau dedengi, 
 Florida dode. 
 dede 2. v. tr., to drip, to protrude; ahutana 
 'oqana e dede 'oto, all his bowels gushed 
 out; 'apu e dede, the blood dripped. 
 dede 3. dede qalu, an arrow. 
 dele U.. V. tr., to wrap up a parcel. 
 deni U., as ddni: e dent 'oto; ideni. 
 dere 1. U., to throw away; with 'asi 3, dere 
 
 'asia, throw it away. 
 dere 2. deresi S., dereha'ini U.. to insert, to 
 
 sheathe. 
 dere 3. U., dere unu, to get in between; dere 
 unu ana para, between the pickets of 
 the fence; u'i dere unu, to pierce with a 
 blow. 
 deu cf. ddu. 
 
 di 1. with adv. 'oto; 'oto di, a long space of time 
 either past or to come, forever, from of 
 old; may be reduplicated, 'oto di 'oto di, 
 forever and forever. 
 Di 2. a bay in 'Olu Su'u just north of A'ulu. 
 diana S., diejia U.. adj.. good, proper, accurate. 
 beloved, ha'adiana, dd'idiena. ke haro 
 diana, when it is well; iteitana nga ola 
 sa'a diana, nothing will be good; ke'i 
 ne'i meuta'a diana, it will become quite 
 strong; koni diana, to take good care 
 
 diana (continued). 
 
 of; e la 'oto i diana, it is good; lado 
 diana, U.. to explain; loo diana. to look 
 good; maehna e ngdu diana. when ripe 
 it eats well; mwane diena inau, my dear 
 friend; ngdulana e diana, it is good to 
 eat; e rako diana, it causes a pleasant 
 sensation; sama diana, to correspond 
 exactly. 
 diananga, dienanga v. n., goodness; walu 
 
 diananga ineu. all my goods, 
 didiana'a, didiena'a adj.. exceedingly good, 
 dianaha S.. dienala U., v. n.. used with ana 
 1; dianaha ana mu i'e, the good fishes; 
 Lau diena, Tolo sietii, Malay dian, dien. 
 The addition of the noun suffix nga 
 seems to show that diana is a verb; 
 possibly the na is a verb suffix and dia 
 equates with Motawia, good, ha'adiana. 
 didi 1. to be small, undersized, dwarf, 
 didi 2. to chop with an axe. to carve, to quarry; 
 didi hato, to make a shell armlet; didi 
 opa olanga, discrimination, partiality. 
 didie'inge v. n., opposition. 
 die n., a club, long-handled and straight, used 
 mostly on Big Malaita. Lifu jia, club. 
 Die'i U., Su'u i Die'i, the landing-place at 
 
 Mwouta on the east coast of Ulawa. 
 dile S., V. i., to slip, to sUp out of place, to be 
 in vain. Florida dila. 'aeku e dile, my 
 foot slipped; noru dile, to trust in vain, 
 to be disappointed, 
 dilehi tr., 'ala dilehi, to bite at and miss. 
 dili 1. n., a dracaena; dili alaha. a dracaena 
 with bright red leaves used in incanta- 
 tions, also in drawing lots: a leaf {'apai 
 dili) is held in the fingers and pulled, 
 the test is according as the leaf breaks 
 easily or not: the process is called 
 hdhuto'o and ilala. 
 dili 2. n., mwa'a dili sato, a snake observed as 
 
 an omen. M. A., p. 221. 
 dimwe n., a tree fern. 
 
 dinge S.. dinga U., a day. ddngi, ddni, deni. 
 ana nga' eta dinge, on another day; 
 hd'idinge si'iri, to-day; nga haidinge, 
 S.. nga haudinga, U.. a day; mu dinge 
 hunge e liueu, many days passed over me. 
 Motu dina, sun. day; Viti sinaa, day. 
 dingadinga U.. to be clear (of voice); walaku 
 
 e dingadinga, my voice is clear. 
 dingale a littoral tree whose hard wood is used 
 
 in making paddles. 
 
 dio v. i.. to swoop (of pigeons), to jump from an 
 
 eminence; dio hunu, to swoop; dio hunu 
 
 ni sae, to be faint-hearted; 'oke dio hou, 
 
 leap down; urou e dio i'ano, the pigeon 
 
 swooped down. 
 
 diohi tr., to swoop down on; diohi malau, 
 
 name of a canoe in a story, literally, 
 
 swoop down on the islands. Wango dio. 
 
 diodioru to chatter lof uisi, a bird observed 
 
 as an omen. M. A., p. 221). 
 dionga'i 1. v. i.. to be squally (of wind), dio. 
 2. n.. a wind squall. 
 dionga'ini tr.. e dionga'ini 'emelti. a squall 
 descended upon us.
 
 DIU 
 
 i8 
 
 diu 1. to be uneven in length; daiiia diu, to 
 overlap; madiit, overlapping; adiii, to 
 be out of joint. Wango diu, to excel; 
 Lau niadiu, different. 
 
 diu 2. U., to carve, to chip with blows. 
 
 diuna U.. adj., out of joint; 'aekii e diuna, my 
 leg is dislocated, diu. 
 
 do \-. i., to gather, to pluck; do rou, to pluck 
 leaves for use in wrapping up kara, 
 grated yam cooked in leaves* r native 
 oven. ora. 
 
 dodo 1. to sink, to drown, to be composed, to 
 be deep, ha'adodo. 'asi dodohule i one. 
 deep water right in to shore; sae dodo, 
 dodonga ni sae. ease of mind; kara dodo, 
 grated yam run into a bamboo and 
 cooked over embers, 
 dodoa'ini tr., to be of good comfort con- 
 cerning a person; saeku e dodoa'ini 'omii, 
 my mind is easy about you. 2. to dip 
 into a liquid: to'oni kire dodoa'inie, a 
 cloth dipped, 
 dodonga'i partic. S., crouched down. 
 Wango dodo, to sink; Motu dodo, to 
 subside. 
 
 dodo 2. dodo 'iisu, the columella of a shell used 
 as a gimlet. 
 
 dodonga a piece, a bit. 
 
 dola used in the reduplicated form dodola, 
 various, mixed, of different sorts. 
 dolali tr., to commingle, to dilute, to insert; 
 ddu dolalie, put some with it; hele dolali. 
 to take some of one thing and some of 
 another, to vary; ngaini dolali'i, one 
 here and there among them. Wango 
 dorari, to mix. 
 
 dolosi S., V. tr., to question; e dolosieu, he asked 
 my name; e dolosie aku, he questioned 
 me about it; ke mdni dolosie salada, let 
 him ask all their names. 
 dolosinge v. n., questioning. 
 dolosila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 domana, domani, as if, like, just as if; e domana 
 nou ka'a lae ike, it is as if I had never 
 gone; ke 'o'o domani liune, shall be as 
 it were a net. na 5, ni 5. 
 
 domu, do'udomu S., to fall (used of persons 
 only); Domu wi mim, Fall-from-Coconut, 
 a nickname. 
 
 done S.. doni U., a prickly shrub growing in 
 old gardens. 
 
 donga 1. n., a pair, a couple: the definite article 
 nga may be prefixed; nga ro donga, two 
 pair; dongai niu, S., donga ni niii, U., a 
 couple of coconuts tied together with 
 strips of their husk; e 'asi lotola donga 
 ni mu'iii, wearing a couple of bags 
 apiece; e ro donga, two couple. 
 
 donga 2. v. tr., to lengthen, to draw out, to 
 'splice. 
 
 dongadongaai U., dongadonga'a ni qe'u, the skull. 
 
 Dora the name of families of chiefs in Little 
 Malaita. 
 
 dora'i v. tr., to withhold; hele dora'ie ha'alunge, 
 to break a promise. 
 
 doro hot; used in compounds; ha'adoro, to heat 
 up food; madoro, hot. 
 
 dudu, dududu U., v. i., to move position; dudu 
 7nei, case up; dudu weu, ease off; pua 
 dududu i Kela, the areca palm that 
 drew toward Kela; walo dududu, clastic. 
 duduhi tr., to approach. Wango duuri, 
 Florida dudu, to be near. 
 
 dududu U., large glass beads; wili dududu, to 
 string beads. 
 
 duidui yellow (vinegar) ants with painful bite. 
 
 dumuli S., hele dumuli, to repress, to hold down. 
 
 dunge S., dunga U., fire, firestick, matches: 
 tia 5 may be sufiixed; dungana e diana, 
 its fire is good, it burns well (of fire- 
 wood); dunge ko mea, the fire is fierce; 
 dunge ko qe'u, the fire smokes; dunga 
 ni heu, U., to undergo the ordeal of 
 fire; dunge ni raa, a burning-glass; ddu 
 dunge, S., to undergo the ordeal of fire; 
 esoesohana dunge, the flame of the fire; 
 He dunge, to obtain fire by friction; koru 
 dunge, to make a fire; maai, S. (maani 
 U.), dunge, a match; mwai keni ana 
 dunga rakanga, women who make too 
 big fires; mu meameahai dunge, tongues 
 of fire; mu melahai dunge, flames of 
 fire; qd'uli dunge, smoke; ruru dunge, 
 to build a fire; mu si'i dunge, sparks; 
 ■waiwei dunge, to wave a firestick. Tolo 
 suna, Efate fanga, Malay panas, hot, 
 Malagasy fana. 
 
 duru 1. V. tr., to place in a store room (of 
 yams). 2. a store chamber, cupboard, 
 generally a section of the dwelline-house; 
 laelaei duru, to go behind the partition, 
 a sign of close acquaintanceship. 
 
 du'u U., v. i., to move position, cf. dudu, 
 su'u 6; du'u met, ease up; du'u weu, ease 
 off. 
 
 du'una v. tr., to move up in position; 'o du'unaa 
 paro, move it on a little. 
 
 duuduu adv., from time to time, at intervals. 
 
 du'u'e backward, to go backward, du'u. 
 
 du'uhe'ini U., tr., to destrov. su'uhe'ini, S. 
 
 e 1. pers. pron., sing. 3; he, she, it. (a) fol- 
 lowing inge'ie or nge'ie and supplying 
 the place of a verbal particle: nge'ie e 
 lae, he went; inge'ie nge'ie e lae, it was 
 he who went. Following nouns used 
 with verb in past tense: nemo e nemo, 
 the rain it rained. With nouns having 
 a collective force: inu wei e kone, the 
 waters were out in flood ; kira maeloonga 
 hunie est masa, his enemies were put to 
 shame. With interrogative plural pro- 
 noun: kiralei, who; kiralei ni e 'untie, 
 who said so? (b) By itself as subject 
 of verbs: e 'unue ta'ane, he said so. As 
 meaning "there is": e ka'a ola, there is 
 nothing; e sato 'olo, it is fine weather. 
 
 e 2. S., contraction for ie; haahe for haahie, 
 about it; pe'e for pe'ie; nga taa ni 'oko 
 ngarase, what are you crying for? par'ie 
 here, for paro'ie. 
 
 'e 3. U., verbal particle; in pronunciation 'e 
 is joined to the governing pronoun. In
 
 19 
 
 ERE 
 
 'e 3. (continued). 
 
 the sense of, let, that it may: ne'e lae 
 ka'u, let me go. Used with a negative: 
 e qale ola v^'e loosia, there is nothing 
 that I saw, I saw nothing. With the 
 preposition muni, as subjunctive or 
 optative: nau ha'alu muni ne'e lae, I 
 promised that I would go; muni 'e 
 lae mat, let him come; 'e 'ue, how? 
 mwane 'e'ue, why not? Sa'a ke. cf. 
 qa'ike, ha'ike. 
 
 *C 4. V. p., used with numerals and with nile; 
 'e rue, two; 'e' 'olii, three; 'enile. 'enila, 
 how many, 'e 3. Florida e, Maori e, 
 ehia, how many? Epi ve vio, how many? 
 
 'e 5. suffixed to poss. 1 and 2 in sing. 1 and 2, 
 added to ru in i'emeru'e, kereru'e. 
 
 e'a U., pers. pron., sing. 3, and verbal particle 
 'a. 
 
 e'asi U., c'a, si, illative. 
 
 *e'e S. 1. areca nut (Areca catechu); hoi 'e'e, 
 the nut of the areca palm; mu 'e'e, areca- 
 palm trees; 'e'e ahaa. wild areca nut; 
 eaten only occasionally in Little Malaita, 
 but generally in Big Malaita. 
 
 *e'e S. 2. to be open, enlarged; wawaku ko 'e'e 
 haahi 'omu, my mouth is enlarged 
 against you. 
 
 'e'eli L'., v. !., to go astray, to swerve, ha'a'e'eli 
 'e'elinga v. n., a going astray. 
 
 *€'engo S., V. i., to chatter, to disturb by 
 chattering. 
 
 'ehi'e cf. 'dhi'e. 
 
 eho n., a round ear ornament of clam shell with 
 a pattern cut like the lines of a compass 
 and radiating from the center; it is hung 
 below the ear by a string through a hole 
 in the center. 
 
 ehoeho S., to prate, to be a tattler; wawa 
 choeho, to boast. 
 
 ehu native jews-harp; e sare lo'o ehii, he wants 
 a jews-harp. 
 
 'ei 1. cf, 'at 1. 
 
 e'i 2. tr. suffi.\ to verbs, participial ending. 
 cf. a'i 3. 
 
 'Ei'ei v., a water spring at Mwado'a, Ulawa. 
 
 e'ini tr. suffi.x to verbs, cf. d'ini. 
 
 eke the white cockatoo, used of other white 
 birds; ao eke, the white egret. 
 
 *ele U., kele S., adj., and adv., little, somewhat, 
 just now; 'ele poo, a little pig; a 'ele ola, 
 little So-and-so; nau si 'ele lae mai, I 
 have just come; e 'asi 'ele diena, it is a 
 little better. 
 
 eleele 1. real, proper, good; mu eleelei wala, S., 
 m'lUa eleele liuu ni wala, U., real words: 
 used also of yams (ulii) and of musical 
 instruments (du 3). 
 
 eleele (na) 2. n., top shoots of trees, etc.; lo'o 
 eleelena, its tip. 
 
 *elekale U., a child; 'elekale inau. my child; 
 'elekale werewere, an infant. 
 
 'Ele maosi, the landing-place in the reef at 
 Ngorangora. 
 
 •eli, 'eli'ell v. tr., to dig; 'eli talana. to dig his 
 grave, 
 'elinga v. n., digging, yam digging, harvest. 
 
 'eli, 'eli'eli (continued). 
 'elila-(na) gerund, 
 'elihe'ini tr., to dig post holes, foundations. 
 
 etc.; ko 'elihe'inie kokoro, dug it deep. 
 'ellhe'i v. i., noko 'elihe'i, 1 am digging post 
 holes. Mota gil, Malay gali, Borneo 
 kali, Maori keri. 
 
 'elu 1. cf. 'olu, three; suffix limiting the meaning 
 and added to (a) pers. pron., pi. 3: 
 ikira'elu, kira'elu. (b) sufT. pron., rd, 
 rd'elu. (c) in Ulawa to stem, ka form- 
 ing pers. pron., pi. 1. incl.. ka'elti we. 
 
 'elu 2. used in Tolo for melu we. 
 
 'emelu pers. pron., pi. 1. excl.; we, more limited 
 and particular in meaning than i'emi. 
 
 'emere, 'emere'i, 'emeru'e S. 1. pers. pron., 
 dual 1, excl., we two. 2. pers. pron.. 
 dual 1, suffixed to verbs and preposi- 
 tions as object. 
 
 'emi S., pers. pron., pi. 1, excl. (a) as subject, 
 we. (b) with the full form i'emi; i'emi 
 emi lae mai, we have come, (c) suffixed 
 as object to verbs and prepositions. 
 Florida garni, Malay kami. 
 
 emu cf. dmu 3. 
 
 'emu'e, 'emu'i S., cf. 'dmu'e. 
 
 ena S., demonstrative, that; possibly e i, na 4. 
 ngeena. ha'ike ena, not that, not so; 
 mango ena, finished that, that ends it; 
 nge manikulu'anga ineu ena ka'a ola 
 ike, the glory, mine I mean, is nothing. 
 
 eni cf. dni. 
 
 'enite S., 'enita U., how many, so many, a few; 
 the 'e 4 is detachable, see nile; the suff. 
 pron. na may be added, ha'anite; 
 'enite 'ata haidinge, just a few days ago; 
 'enite lusu, what size (of a canoe), lit., 
 how many ribs; 'enitana 'oto 'ie, the 
 how-manyeth is this, what number; 
 awala mdia 'enila, how many over ten; 
 mana 'enite, what unit above ten; ta'e 
 'enita He, just a few. 
 
 eno, enoeno to lie down; eno taalenga, to lie 
 on the back, 
 enonga v. n.. a lying down, reclining, 
 enohi tr., to lie in, to lie on; e enohie hulile, 
 
 he lay on a mat. 
 enohilana gerund, 
 ha'aenohi causative. Nguna one, Motu eno. 
 
 epa 1. glandular swellings in the armpits and 
 groins. 2. to have such swellings. 
 
 epa 3. v. i., toto epa hdnue, to cleanse well the 
 village by a sacrifice. M. A., p. 137. 
 epasi tr., to spread over. Mota epa, a mat. 
 
 'epu'i hd'i'epu'i, to propitiate. 
 
 'epule (■/. 'dpule. 
 
 ere, ereere 1. v. i., tospeak, to talk; with poss. 3, 
 to forbid, to bid, to order, U. ha'aere. 
 ere ana nga 'inoni, to forbid a person; 
 ere ani le'u honu. to boast; ere 'asi, U., 
 to reproach, to vilify; ere 'autala, to 
 speak in vain; ere ni ha'apu tako'ie. 
 swore by him; ere haahi, to betroth, to 
 bespeak a wife; ere hd'ihonoa'i, to curse; 
 ere hd'isuru, to have altercations; ere 
 hd'itohc, to contradict; ere ni hedi 
 olanga, to take an oath; ere laelae'i.
 
 ERE 
 
 20 
 
 ere, ereere 1 (continued). 
 
 talk by the wayside; ere lole ana 
 ma'unge, to talk confusedly from fear; 
 ere luu'i, U., to forbid; ere maahoosi, to 
 boast; ere maleledi, to rail at; ere 
 mama'Ua'a ana, to speak despisingly; 
 ere mamakinanga, to reproach; noii ere 
 ■pele, I spoke inadvertently; ere raradi'e, 
 correction; ere raraniaa, insolent speech; 
 ere ni sae, to say with the heart; ere 
 ta'anga, plain speech; ere taha'ira'a, to 
 speak plainly; ere talihe, to defend one- 
 self when accused, to deny; noii ere 
 taliheku, I made my defense; ere 
 taiaa'ini, to curse; ere loli, to revile; 
 ere to'o, to be correct in one's statement; 
 'o ere to'o, verily; ere uqe, to talk 
 enviously; ere warawara'a, clamorous; 
 lopo'i ere, to deceive with words; toli 
 ereere, to cease speaking. 
 erenga v. n., speech. 
 
 eresi U., tr., to plan in speech, to decide 
 upon; hii'o ni pesi koro eresia, the war 
 expedition over the bows which they 
 planned. Motu erena, speech. 
 
 ere, ereere 2. v. tr., to make up in a roll, to 
 
 coil. 
 
 ereereta v. n., a roll, a coil; mu ereerelai 
 
 usuusu, the roll of the book. Lau ereere. 
 
 ereerea'ile S., ereere'a U., ereereta'a U., 
 
 rolled up in a coil, round, disk-shaped. 
 
 ereha'ini S., v. tr., to set alight, to light a torch. 
 ereha'i partic, lighted. Lau ere, fire. 
 
 'erete'a adj., whitish, pale; hole sa'a kole wa 
 nga me'i ola 'erete'a ke'i i'o i sapeka, the 
 paddles must not rattle nor anything 
 of light color be about our bodies. 
 Maori kirilea, fair, tea, white; Samoa 
 tea, white. 
 
 ero, eroero S., v. tr., to deceive, to tell lies. 
 
 ha'aero. ko ero, he is lying; viwane 'o 
 
 eroau, do not deceive me; a eroero, the 
 
 deceiver. 
 
 eronga v. n., lying, deceit; ko lehie eronga, 
 
 in travail with lying. 
 erola-(ku; gerund., erolana walumalau, the 
 
 deceits of the world. 
 erota'ini tr., to deceive. 
 
 esi 1. e 1. si, illative; est kele lota, he has just 
 washed. 
 
 esi U. 2. n., a ghost, considered harmless. 
 cf. 'akalo. 
 
 eso, esoeso S., v. i., to flare up, to flame, to 
 burn, ha'aeso. sae esoeso, to have 
 indignation. 
 esoesoha v. n., flame; used with poss. 3; 
 esoesohaana dunge, the flame of the fire; 
 esoesohai dunge, flame of fire, 
 esolana gerund, its flaming. 
 
 'eta S., numeral, one; used with definite article 
 nga and denotes another, different, 'e 
 4, for ta cf. ta'a 2. nga 'eta ola; nga 
 'eta mu 'inoni, various people; 'eta 
 muini, some; maholo 'eta mwane e 
 ha'atau ue, while the other was yet far 
 off; 'eta ina'o, to be in the lead. 
 
 'eta (continued). 
 
 'etana ordinal, first, the first time; 'etana 
 ngaile, 'etana ngaini, the first one. 
 Malay sa, one; Mota tea, indefinite 
 pronoun. 
 
 ete ha'aete, S., v. tr., to importune, to be per- 
 sistent. 
 
 eu dau eu, to play tunes, du 3. 
 
 eueu pepe i euen, a butterfly. 
 
 ewa U., to brandish a spear; ewa lulu, a measure 
 of a yard and a half. 
 
 ewe, eweewe 1. v. i., to have water in; e ewe 
 ta'ane, it has water in it (said of a 
 bamboo). 2. to be in a liquid state. 
 3. n., flood; ewe e uhingaa mdiirihaaku, 
 the floods have covered over my soul; 
 ere koni, to gather together, of flood 
 water. 
 eweewe (na) n., juice; 7nii eweeivei ola. 
 liquid. 
 
 ha termination of verbal nouns: mduri, to live; 
 mdurihe, life. 
 
 haa 1. shell-money discs made from the red 
 hinge of the oyster shell {roma)\ the 
 chief places of manufacture are Langa- 
 langa in Big Malaita and Makira in 
 San Cristoval. The Malaita shells are 
 obtained in the Mara Masiki Channel. 
 The discs are always strung on string 
 and the value is proportionate to the 
 length of the string and the smallness 
 of the discs, 'eyiite haa, how many 
 moneys? to make a haa four strings 
 of shell discs are used, the strings are 
 kept together by being passed through 
 strips of tortoise shell hapa. cf. 
 huresoso; haa i mwe'i, money in the 
 bag, earnest money, security paid to 
 the parents of a girl to insure getting 
 her as a bride for some lad; haa pdine, 
 large money discs, not considered of 
 much value; haa ni siwe, blood money; 
 haa tahanga, a sum of money consisting 
 of four strings of haa tied together, each 
 string a fathom long, the strings are 
 separated by strips of tortoise shell; 
 haa ni Ulawa, small and valuable shell- 
 money discs, often strung in a kind of 
 crochet pattern with tnalo and huresoso 
 added to complete the design; haa ni 
 wili, tribute money; hdu haa. red brain 
 coral; hune haa, to display bridal 
 moneys at the bride's home; ito ni haa, 
 a bunch of money; lai loosi haa. to go and 
 inspect the money given for a bride; 
 tnwaritei haa, a strand of money; sulu 
 haa, to collect money; wili haa, to thread 
 shell money; tnaapou, a measure of shell 
 money, from finger tips to elbow; 
 to'ohaa money, both shell and teeth 
 (dogs and porpoise). Wango haa. 
 
 ha'a 2. a platform for storing yams; ha'a ni 
 'arasi, ark of the covenant; hd'u ha'a, to 
 tie the laths on a platform, to make a
 
 21 
 
 HA'AHIRU 
 
 ha'a 2 (continued). 
 
 platform; laloi ha'a, within the garner. 
 Maori whala. 
 ha'angi v. tr., to place yams, etc., on a plat- 
 form in order to store them, to put a 
 dried coconut on a platform so that it 
 may shoot. Samoa /a/a; Mao tf/>o<a. 
 
 ha'a 3. exclam., oh. 
 
 ha'a 4. causative prefi.x applied to verbs and 
 less frequently to nouns; it may be 
 duplicated for emphasis; in Ulawa when 
 ha'a is applied to a word beginning with 
 a one a is dropped. Mota vaga, 
 Maori whaka. 
 
 ha'a 5. prefi.xed to cardinals to form multipli- 
 catives; ha'arue, twice; to hunge, 
 ha'ahunge, to multiply; to nite, ha'anile, 
 how many; to tan, ha'alaii, far. 
 
 ha'aado v. tr., to apportion. 
 
 ha'a'ae v. i., to be fleeting, vain. 
 
 ha'aahala'ini v. tr., to provoke. 
 
 ha'aahu v. tr., to complete a number, to make 
 the tally, to round off; ha'aahu mae, to 
 finish fighting, to cease hostilities. 
 
 ha'a'ai'aa v. tr., to destroy, to cause to dis- 
 appear. 
 
 ha'aakaurisi v. tr., to provide a person with 
 a thing. 
 
 ha'aalaha v. tr., to exalt, to conduct the cere- 
 mony of a chief's coming of age. 
 
 ha'a'aliu v. tr., to cause to turn back, to turn 
 around, to convert in mind. 
 ha'a'aliula-(ku) gerund. 
 
 ha'a'ango v. i., to tie up creepers, yam vines, 
 to cause them to twine. 
 ha'a'angohi tr. 
 ha'a'angohila-(na, ni) gerund. 
 
 ha'a'apara'ini v. tr., to surprise, to startle. 
 
 ha'aape 1. v. tr., to make shipwreck of. 
 
 ha'aapenga'ini tr. 2. ha'aape sae, to 
 encourage. 
 
 ha'a'apu 1. v. i., to make an oath. 2. v. tr., 
 to put a person or thing under tabu. 
 3. V. tr., to forbid. 
 
 ha'a'apunge v. n., a vow to kill in revenge. 
 
 ha'aasa ere ha'aasa, to take an oath. 
 
 ha'aasa'i to stultify; ha'aasa'ie hurunge, to 
 run to no purpose. 
 
 ha'aasire'ini v. tr., to scare, to frighten. 
 
 ha'aawala v. i.. to tally, to count by tens; nou 
 ha'aawala ha'anile, how many tens have 
 I counted? 
 
 ha'adada U., v. tr., to smooth, to flatten out. 
 
 ha'adahe v. tr., to cause to be adzed down or 
 to be hoed. 
 
 ha'adahi 1. to cause a person to be fortunate, 
 to thank, to make presents to, U. 2. 
 when at sea to apostrophize the various 
 islands in sight, the phrases being, 
 Sa'a: » sapena i Sa'a ni menu, the con- 
 figuration of Sa'a ni menu; Ulawa: 
 i sapena i Ulawa e rara; Ugi: « sapena 
 i Dara ahu'iniu; San Cristoval : i sapena 
 i Aru ni i'e. 
 ha'adahinga U., v. n., blessing, happiness. 
 
 ha'ada'i S., partic, open, plain; soi ha'ada'i 
 ada, call them out, 
 
 ha'ada'inge sot ha'adainge, church (late use). 
 
 ha'adau v. tr., to bring a canoe to a standstill, 
 to cause to be stationary, to assign a 
 position to a person. 
 
 ha'adiana S., ha'adiena U., to do good to, to 
 bless. 
 
 ha'adodo v. tr., to cause to sink, to drown, 
 to dip. 
 
 ha'adoro v. tr., to heat up food. 
 
 ha'a'e'eli U., v. tr., to divert, to cause to go 
 out of the way. 
 
 ha'aenohi v. tr., to lay down a child, to cradle. 
 
 ha'aere v. tr., to scold, to wrangle, 
 ha'aereere U., to engage in talk. 
 
 ha'aero v. tr., to make jests upon, to jest, to 
 deceive, 
 ha'aeronga v. n., a jest. 
 
 ha'aeso S., v. tr., to cause to flame, to burn. 
 
 ha'aete U., v. tr., to importune, to be persist- 
 ent with. 
 
 ha'aha'alu S. 1. v. tr., to renew, to make afresh. 
 2. V. i., to make a covenant. 
 
 ha'ahai four times. 
 
 ha'ahalahala v. tr., to make firm, to confirm. 
 
 ha'ahanenga'ini 1. v. tr., to lust after. 2. 
 v. tr., to exalt. 
 
 ha'aha'olu U., v. tr., to renew, to make afresh. 
 ha'aha'alu, S. 
 
 ha'ahaora U., v. tr., to abase, to humble. 
 ha'ahaora'ala-(ku) gerund. 
 
 haahe saekii e lae haahe, I forgot It. cf. haahi. 
 
 ha'ahehe 1. v. tr., to pretend not to possess, 
 to be niggardly over. 
 
 ha'ahehe 2. v. i., to abound, to be in abun- 
 dance. ho7iu ha'ahehe. 
 
 haahi (au) prep., because of, around, for, on 
 account of: haahie contracts to haahe. 
 haahie noko lae, because of my going; 
 haahi taa, because of what, why; ddu 
 haahi, to omit; haahird diana, on the 
 good; hatonga'i wala haahi, to accuse; 
 inemauri haahi, to rule over; Idu haahi, 
 to make a defense in words; luhe haahi, 
 to be surety for; luqe'i lalawa haahi, to 
 give a feigned excuse; mwa'e haahi, of 
 those who clap their hands at dances; 
 mwana haahi, to make pretence; ni'i 
 nime haahi, to lay hands on; noko haahi, 
 to keep watch over; sae haahi, parsi- 
 monious; salo haahi, to make a sign to a 
 person; wdi e lama haahi ue kolune 
 mwakano, water covered the face of 
 the earth, 
 haahaahi v. tr., to prize; nga me'i ola saena 
 
 kr haahaahe, a thing his heart prized. 
 haahila-(ku) gerund.; mwananga haahilana, 
 a cloaking, glossing over; ani to'oni 
 haahilada, in clothing themselves. Lau 
 fafi. 
 
 ha'ahi'ito'o U., v. tr.. to cause hurt to. punish. 
 hi'ito'o. 
 
 ha'ahili, ha'ahilihili v. tr.. to abstain from 
 certain foods, to fast. 
 
 ha'ahirerue in front of them. 
 
 ha'ahiru v. i., to be slow, behindhand, 
 ha'ahirunge v. n., delay, 
 ha'ahirusi tr., to be a hindrance to.
 
 HA'AHITE 
 
 22 
 
 ha'ahite n., an ovenful of food. 
 
 ha'ahiu seven times. 
 
 ha'ahola v. tr., to create; niu ola ha'ahola. 
 created things, 
 ha'ahola'i tr., to inaugurate. Lau fafola. 
 
 ha'aholi v. i.. to expose for sale, to conduct 
 operations for barter; used with poss. 3. 
 meaning to make merchandise of. 
 ha'aholinge'ini tr., to put up for sale. 
 
 ha'aholo adv., crosswise, transverselj-, astride, 
 aslant. F"agani fagaforo. 
 
 ha'ahonu v. tr., to fill. 
 
 ha'ahou v. i.. to proclaim. 
 
 ha'ahoulana gerund., a representation of. 
 ha'ahoule'ini tr.. to proclaim. 
 
 ha'ahulee I'., n., morning; /' lia'abidee, e ddni 
 ha'ahiilee, tomorrow, in the morning; 
 hai ha'ahulee, a morning; mu?ii 'e hara 
 ha'ahulee, as soon as it is daylight; sulia 
 mwa hai ha'ahulee, every morning. 
 
 ha'ahule'ita-(ku) S., a reaching up to, attain- 
 ing, requiting. 
 
 ha'ahuni S., v. tr., to be contrary to. in 
 opposition to. 
 
 ha'ahunge S. 1. adv.. frequently. 2. v. tr., 
 to make many, to multiply. 
 ha'ahunga'a adv., frequently. 
 
 ha'ahu'o to be in good time, early afoot in the 
 morning; 'omu ke ha'ahu'o. be here 
 early in the morning. 
 
 ha'ahute to beget, of either parent. 
 
 ha'ahutanga v. n., birth, generation. 
 ha'ahutela-(ku) gerund., begetting, being 
 begotten. 
 
 ha'ahuu 1. adv., complete; aicala ha'ahuu, a 
 full ten. 2. V. tr.. to complete the tally. 
 
 ha'ahuu'e adj., faithful, tried; complete, 
 tahanga ha'ahuu'a, U., a full fathom (of 
 money); with suffixed pron. 3, sing.; 
 ha'ahuu'ana mu ola. S., tnwa ha' ahun' ana 
 ola, U., real things, the correct things; 
 e ha'ahuu'ana 'olo, it is quite the real 
 thing; with geniti\-c /, mu ha'ahuu'ei ola, 
 the real things. 
 ha'ahuu'e-fku) ha'ahiu'emu, your own self. 
 ha'ahuu'ani U., adv., altogether, com- 
 pletely. 
 
 ha'a'i'i S., v. tr., to charge unduly for, to put 
 on a big price. 
 
 ha'a'inoni v. tr., to justify oneself, to find 
 excuses. 
 
 ha'ainuhi S. 1. v. tr., to give drink to, to cause 
 to drink. 2. to drown. 
 
 ha'ai'osi v. tr. 1. to cause to sit down. 2. used 
 of ha'amalaohu, to cause to undergo the 
 novitiate. M. A., p. 234. a Wale- 
 ha'aodo ngaini ka'a ha'ai'ose i one, no 
 one caused W'ateha'aodo to be initiated 
 down at the beach. 
 
 ha'aisi ad\-., at all, precedes the verb. 
 
 ha'aisita'anga'ini S., ha'aisitahanga'ini U., 
 V. tr., to cause to emerge, to conduct out. 
 
 ha'akakahuru S., v. tr., to surprise, used with 
 poss. 3. 
 
 ha'akale v. tr., to wait for, to watch, to keep 
 an eye on. 
 
 ha'akauni U., v. tr., to cause to light (of fire, 
 pipe, etc.). 
 
 ha'akena'i U., exclam., not used before women. 
 
 cf. he'asikena'i. 
 ha'akeneta'i l^., ha'akineta'i S., to observe, 
 
 to have a care for. to keep. 
 ha'akeneta'ini U., ha'akineta'ini S., tr. 
 ha'akeni v. tr., to marry a girl off, to conduct 
 
 a betrothal. 
 ha'akolo U., v. i., to be strange, foreign; tno ola 
 
 ha'akolo. strange things. 
 ha'akoru U., v. tr., to gather people together. 
 ha'akorunga v. n., ha'akorunga ni 'inoni, a 
 
 gathering of men. 
 ha'akuku U. 1. to hang up ,to suspend. 2. to 
 
 lower. 
 ha'alaa S., adv., used of conditional affirmation, 
 
 the pronoun e coalesces; a ola, ha'alaa, 
 
 So-and-so I grant you; kire ko le urine 
 
 ha'alaa e diana, were they to do so it 
 
 would be good; ko nemo, ha'alaa, if it 
 
 rains granted; su'uri 'unuc ha'alae diana, 
 
 had you not mentioned it it were well, 
 ha'alaelae v. tr., to cause to walk, to teach to 
 
 walk. 
 ha'alanga v. tr., to expose to the air in order to 
 
 dry, to dry nets and clothes, 
 ha'alangi n., a house on piles, cf. ilengi. Lau 
 
 falangi. 
 ha'alauni v. tr., to decorate, 
 ha'alede L'., v. tr., to break in pieces, 
 ha'alete S., v. tr., to chasten, to punish, to 
 
 persecute. 
 ha'aletehi tr. 
 ha'aletehinge v. n. 
 ha'aletehila-(ku) gerund, 
 ha'ali'e v. i., to be engaged in cooking, 
 ha'ali'anga v. n., a cooking of food. 
 ha'alili v. i., to change shape, of a ghostly 
 
 apparition; e ha'alili ana pa'ewa, he 
 
 took the form of a shark, 
 ha'alime five times. 
 
 ha'alio 1. v. tr., to awaken, to cause to awake, 
 ha'ali'o 2. v. tr., to strangle, to hang by the neck. 
 
 In M. A., p. 288, the woman strangled 
 
 was named Hu'e siki ni uhi, and her 
 
 husband was Olosango. 
 ha'aloko U., v. tr., to gather people together, 
 ha'aloo'i v. tr., to instruct, to punish, to make 
 
 loo. 
 ha'alounge v. n., quarreling, bickering, 
 ha'alu, ha'aha'alu 1 . v. i., to promise, used with 
 
 ana; e ha'alu ana 'olo, he promised it; 
 
 ha'alu horana, to swear by a person or 
 
 thing. 
 ha'alunge v. n., a promise; hele dora'ie 
 
 ha'alunge, to break a promise, 
 ha'alunge'ini tr., to make a covenant. 
 ha'alunge'inila-(ku) gerund. Lau gwalu. 
 ha'alu S. 2. adj., new, fresh, recent; ha'olu, U.; 
 
 kau ha'alu, heifer; keni ha'alu, virgin; 
 
 poro ha'alu, bridegroom. 
 ha'aluha v. n., used with poss. 3; ha'aluha 
 
 ana, its newness. Nguna vau, Niue 
 fou, Malay baru. 
 ha'aluelu S., v. i., ko ere ha'aluelu, to give a 
 
 sign with a word, 'alu 2. 
 ha'amaa v. i., to dry canarium nuts (ngali) 
 
 in smoke.
 
 23 
 
 HA'AOPO 
 
 ha'amaahoosi U.. to boast, 
 ha'amaa'i v. i., to consecrate, to ordain, to 
 sL-t apart for sacred use. 
 ha'amaa'inge v. n., holiness (late use), 
 ha'amaa'ila-ikuj gerund., making holy. 
 ha'ama'ani U., v. tr., to copy, to repeat after. 
 ("/. hd'imaani. 
 ha'ama'aninge. v. n., copying, repeating 
 after. 
 ha'amaa'u U., v. i., to frighten. 
 
 ha'amaa'usi tr. 
 ha'araada v. tr., to soil. 
 ha'amae to bray nuts, yams, taro in a mortar. 
 
 ha'amaesi tr. 
 ha'amaesi 1. to kill. 
 
 ha'amaesi 2. to watch, as a cat a mouse, 
 ha'amahoro v. i., to cover up. 
 
 ha'amahorosi tr., to cause to pass in sight. 
 ha'amala v. i., to copy; ko ha'amala po'upo'ii 
 ana, to make the sign oi the cross on him. 
 ha'amalala-(ku) gerund., doing like, 
 ha'amalaohu v. tr. 1. to initiate. M. A., 
 p. 233. hola ni mwane, all the boys 
 who are eligible. 2. U., to use a thing 
 for the first time, to hansel. 3. to assist 
 a novice in catching his first bonito. 
 ha'amala v. i., to frighten fish or animals by 
 one's shadow falling upon them, 
 ha'amalusi tr. 
 ha'amamakine v. tr.. to inspire with dread. 
 ha'amamalo v. tr., to cause to rest; u.sed also 
 with poss. 3; neke ha'amamalo 'amiu, I 
 will cause you to rest, 
 ha'amamaa'u U.. v. i., to cause to fear. 
 
 ha'amamaa'usi tr. 
 ha'amamu v. i., to entice fish with scraps of 
 food, to burly; met., to entice a person 
 with suggestions. 
 ha'amamue'i U.. v. tr., to scorch, miimu 2. 
 ha'amamu'i v. tr., to char, to burn (of food). 
 
 miimu 2. 
 ha'amanata v. i.. to train, to educate, to tame. 
 
 ha'amanata'i tr. 
 ha'amanikulu'e v. tr., to give praise to, to 
 glorify, to make glorious. 
 ha'amanikulu'ela-(ku) gerund. 
 ha'amanola \. i., to give peace to, to cause 
 peace; 'oke ha'amanola honotamami, 
 give peace in our time, 
 ha'amango 1. to bring to a finish. 2. to com- 
 fort, to refresh; /jo'owawgo 5ac, to com- 
 fort the mind. 
 ha'amasa v. i., to shame, to make ashamed: 
 
 used with poss. 3. 
 ha'amataqa v. i.. to enlighten, to cast light 
 upon, to let light in. 
 ha'amataqasi S.. ha'amataqali L'., tr. 
 ha'amataqasila-(ku) gerund. 
 ha'ama'u ."-!.. \". i.. to honor, used with poss. 3. 
 ha'ama'unge v. n., respect, honor, 
 ha'ama'usi tr., to terrify, 
 ha'amau'o S., v. i., to offend, to cause to offend, 
 
 used with poss. 3. 
 ha'amauta'a v. tr., to strengthen, to make firm, 
 ha'amedo \ . tr., to steep, to wet. 
 ha'amenamena v. i., to be false, to flatter, 
 ha'amola v. tr., to cause to fail. 
 
 ha'amola f( Diuinuod). 
 
 ha'amolahi tr., to cause to fail, to cause to 
 
 miss, to make of no effect, 
 ha'amotaahi S., v. tr., to inflict agon\- on. to 
 
 [jersccute cruelly, 
 ha'amotaahila-fku) gerund, 
 ha'amousi \ . tr., to break off. 
 ha'amwadausi v. tr., to soften, to make easy, 
 ha'amwaimwei'e S., v. tr., to Ijelittle, to make 
 
 of no account, 
 ha'amwaimwei'alana gerund, 
 ha'amwamwate'a v. i., to make light of, to 
 
 belittle; ne'isae ha'amwamuale'alana, 
 
 making light of it. 
 ha'amwari v. tr.. to enfeeble, to weaken by 
 
 sickness or wounds. 
 ha'amwarila-(ku) gerund. 
 ha'amwasie'ini v. tr., to laugh at, to mock, to 
 
 jest at. 
 ha'anakusi U., v. tr.. to seat, to cause to sit. 
 ha'ananama'ini U., v. tr., to put spiritual 
 
 [)0WL'r into, 
 ha'ananau v. tr., to instruct, to practise. 
 
 ha'ananaula-(ku) gerund. \\'ango ha'ana- 
 
 nan'a. clearly. 
 ha'ananoa'i, v. tr., to exercise, to accustom 
 
 onc.-Jclf to. 
 ha'ana'o n., first fruits, early yams; mu 
 
 ha'ana'o. the first fruits, 
 ha'ana'ola'ini U., v. tr., to do a thing first, to 
 
 do before anything else, 
 ha'anemo S.. ha'animo U., v. i., to get wet 
 
 from rain, to be in the rain. 
 ha'anemosi S., ha'animoli U.. tr.. to cause 
 
 to get wet with rain, 
 ha'anine S., v. tr., to accustom oneself, to be 
 
 accustomed; wu( tolaha e ha'anine, the 
 
 wonted practices, 
 ha'anipili S., n., anguish, pili. ha'anipili 
 
 e pilingie, he travailed with anguish, 
 ha'ano n.. a scaffold, 
 ha'anga'ingedi v. tr., to strengthen, 
 ha'angau v. tr.. to feed; 'ai ha'angau keni, 
 
 ginger given to women as an ordeal, 
 ha'aoa'i 1. v. tr., to apportion, to correspond 
 
 to; 'ure'iire ha'aoa'ie hat suurei uelti- 
 
 malau. standing opposite to the four 
 
 corners of the earth. 2. v. tr., to fulfill, 
 
 to witness; 'iinti ha'aoa'i, 'unit ha'aoa- 
 
 'inge, witness, 
 ha'aodo to straighten, to put straight, to 
 
 direct; a Watc ha'aodo. a proper name, 
 ha'aodohi huni lengii ha'aodohie 'aeka. to 
 
 guide our feet. 
 ha'aodohila-(ku) gerund, 
 ha'aohu v. tr., to cause to boil, to boil vege- 
 tables, etc. 
 ha'aohusi v. tr., to distribute, to apportion, 
 ha'aola v. tr., to put to silence; ere ha'aola, to 
 
 persuade, 
 ha'a'olu three times, 
 ha'aono six times, 
 ha'a'o'oni v. tr., to cause to sink, to drown; 
 
 to subject, to bring into submission; 
 
 'akalo e ha'a'o'onie, a ghost took pos- 
 session of him. 
 ha'aopo v. tr., to heat up food already cooked.
 
 HA'AORA 
 
 24 
 
 ha'aora I"., v. tr.. to shine, of bright light, 
 ha'aorata'ini tr., to enlighten. 
 
 ha'apaine v. tr., to enlarge, to aggrandize, to 
 exalt oneself, 
 ha'apaina'ala (ku) gerund. 
 
 ha'aparasi, ha'aqarasi U., v. tr., to hinder, to 
 prevent. 
 
 ha'apasu v. i., to threaten, to threaten the life 
 of a person, 
 ha'apasuli tr. 
 ha'apasulinge v. n. 
 ha'apasulila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 ha'apiho U.. v. tr., to divide into two parts. 
 
 ha'apo'e n., yam or taro mash: the yams or 
 taro are first roasted isule) on embers, 
 then the skin is scraped (ori) with a 
 shell {le'ete'ei henu), and finally the 
 vegetable is pounded in a wooden 
 mortar (uli) with a pestle ('di repo), the 
 mess is then placed in wooden bowls 
 (nime) and heated up with hot stones 
 (pii), coconut milk ('oni wei) being 
 added; ha'apo'e uhi, yam mash; ha'apo'e 
 hut, taro mash; maladi, stale, sour. 
 
 ha'apolaha'i v. i., to cast away, to disregard, 
 used with poss. 3. 
 
 ha'apona v. i.. to interrupt with questions, 
 ha'aponanga v. n., questioning, 
 ha'apona'i tr., to question. 
 
 ha'aponosi v. tr., to overgrow and choke (of 
 creepers). 
 
 ha'apu ere ni ha'apii tako'ie, swore by him. 
 ha'apunge v. n. 
 
 ha'apuli ruru ha'apuU, to throng together. 
 
 ha'apulo v. i., to turn back before reaching 
 one's destination, 
 ha'apulonga'ini S., ha'apulosi U., tr., 1. to 
 accompany a person, to attend on the 
 way home. 2. to turn a thing over, to 
 reverse. 
 
 ha'apu'o v. i., to turn back before reaching 
 one's destination, to return, 
 ha'apu'osi S. 1. to accompany a person on 
 his return journey. 2. to return a thing. 
 
 ha'aqaali U., v. tr., to break in two pieces. 
 
 ha'aqaha'ini U., v. tr., to lay a thing along, 
 to measure by. 
 
 ha'aqala U., v. tr., to cause to be empty or 
 vacant; salo e ha'aqalaa one, the sun 
 had caused the beach to be deserted. 
 
 ha'aqasi U., v. tr., to encircle with the arms. 
 
 ha'aqe'u v. tr., to cause to be mad. 
 
 ha'aqini U., v. tr., to steep, to wet. 
 
 haara-''na; 1. n., smell: haarana ko wesu, its 
 smell smells; haarana nga trte'i ola, the 
 smell of anything; haarani, plural, of 
 many things that smell. Motu harahua, 
 to be kissed, sniffed. 
 
 ha'ara 2. a sign, mark, flag (late use). Wango 
 ha'ara. 
 
 ha'araa v. i., to sit in the sun, to bask, 
 ha'araahi tr., to expose to the sun. 
 
 ha'ara'i v. i., to summon, to call a person to 
 come and partake of food. 
 
 ha'ara'ini S., v. tr., to name, to give a person 
 a name. U., haora'ini. 
 
 ha'arako v. tr., to appease, to treat gently. 
 
 ha'arangasi v. tr., to blow out, to puff up, to 
 
 distend. 
 ha'ararada v. tr., to broil, to fry (late use). 
 
 Wango ha'aradahi. 
 ha'ararao v. tr., to cause to cling, to cause to 
 
 cleave to. 
 ha'area U., v. i., tola ha' area, to send out a 
 
 smell on all sides. 
 ha'areke 1. to land passengers or goods from 
 
 a canoe, used of labor vessels landing 
 
 returned laborers. 2. to land trade 
 
 goods which are left in charge of a 
 
 native trader, 
 ha'arekenga v. n., trade goods landed, 
 ha'arekehi v. tr., to cause to skip, to cause to 
 
 leap. 
 ha'arepi v. tr., to make a prostitute of. 
 ha'arere v. tr., to cleanse. 
 
 ha'arere'anga v. n., cleansing, purification, 
 ha'ariro v. tr., to entice with food, to offer 
 
 food to a ghostly visitor in order to 
 
 prove that he is not human. 
 ha'arodo v. i., to darken, to stand in the light. 
 ha'aro'i U., v. tr. to find, to come across; lai 
 
 ha'aro'i, go and meet; tdii ha'aro'i, to find. 
 ha'arongo v. tr., to summon, to invite; the 
 
 technical word for a summons to a 
 
 feast delivered by a herald (hurulaa). 
 
 Three days notice is gi%'en; ha'arongoa 
 
 a ola, e ro ha'idinge, 'olune ni ngeu, 
 
 summon So-and-so, there remain two 
 
 days, on the third is the feast. 
 ha'arongonga v. n., an invitation, summons, 
 
 calling. 
 ha'aroroa'i v. tr., to become indebted to, to 
 
 involve oneself with. 
 ha'aruru v. i., to conduct a marriage ceremony. 
 ha'arurunge v. n., a marriage ceremony. 
 ha'arurula-(ku) gerund., the marrying of. 
 ha'asada 1. v. tr., to flatten, to make level. 
 
 2. adj., fiat, level, 
 ha'asaediena U., v. tr., to thank, to salute in 
 
 speech. 
 ha'asaedienanga v. n., thanks. 
 ha'asaedienala-(ku) gerund, 
 ha'asaemango v. tr., to comfort, to settle the 
 
 mind. 
 ha'asaemangonga v. n., comfort, ease of 
 
 mind. 
 ha'asato v. i., to sit in the sun, to sun oneself, 
 ha'asatoa'i tr., to expose a thing to the sun 
 
 in order to dry it. 
 ha'asauni v. tr., to vex, to cause trouble to. 
 ha'asiho v. i., to land a passenger from a canoe, 
 
 also of labor vessels landing returned 
 
 laborers, 
 ha'asiholi tr., to lower, to let down. 
 ha'asihopiJu n., a stone sinker for fishing-lines, 
 
 rounded and grooved for the attachment 
 
 of the line, 
 ha'asikihi U., v. tr., to detach, 
 ha'asilitaha U., v. tr., to cause to emerge, used 
 
 with poss. 3. 
 ha'asusu S., 1. to strengthen, to make firm. 
 
 confirmation (late use) ; ha'asusu sae, 
 
 to confirm the heart. 
 ha'asusula-(ku) gerund.
 
 25 
 
 HAHA 
 
 ha'asusu 2. v. tr., to suckle, 
 ha'asusu 3. v. i., to tell tales about, to gossip, 
 ha'asusunge v. n., gossip, 
 ha'asusunge'ini tr., to spread tales about 
 
 a person, to be a subject of gossip, 
 ha'asusu 4. U., ha'asusu tthi, name of a month, 
 
 March, susu 4. 
 ha'ata'eli v. tr., to cause to embark, to take on 
 
 board, 
 ha'ata'ela'ini U., tr., to cause to arise, 
 ha'ata'i partic, made plain, open; hunie tola 
 
 i'oe ke'i ha'ata'i, that thy way may be 
 
 made plain. 
 ha'ata'ini v. tr., to show, to reveal, used 
 
 with poss. 3; ha'ala'inie 'emelu, show 
 
 it to us. Fagani fatagi. 
 ha'atakalo v. tr., to lose, to lose the run of, 
 
 to misplace, to cause to err. 
 ha'atala'i v. tr., to egg on, to incite, 
 ha'atalisi U., v. tr., to cause to awake, 
 ha'atanauhi v. tr., to decoy a ghost or an 
 
 animal by offering food. cf. ha'ariro. 
 
 Mota valanau. 
 ha'atapala'a U., v. i., to cause to abound, 
 ha'atata'ala v. tr., to harm, to cause evil to; 
 
 tun ola ni ha'alaia'ala 'emi. things that 
 
 harm us. 
 ha'atatanga'ini v. tr., to scatter. 
 ha'atataqelu v. tr., to throw a person down 
 
 headlong. 
 ha'atataro v. tr., to cause to stumble, 
 ha'atau v. i., to be far off, distant. 
 
 ha'atauli S., ha'atauri U., determ., to be 
 
 far off from. Wango ha'atau, Lau 
 
 tau, Mota sau, Florida hau, Malay jau. 
 ha'ateke v. i., to cause to fall; ngdu ha'ateke, to 
 
 drop crumbs while eating, 
 ha'atengotengo v. tr., to droop, of lip or head, 
 ha'atoha'ini v. tr., to give oneself airs, to 
 
 boast, to make much of a person. 
 ha'atoha'imla-(ku) gerund, 
 ha'atohu 1. v. i., to make request for, to ask 
 
 leave, to ask a favor: used with poss. 3. 
 
 e ha'atohu eku, he asked my leave. 2. 
 
 V. tr., to ask that a person or thing be 
 
 granted to one. e ha'atohue ana, he 
 
 asked him for it. 
 ha'atohunge v. n., a making request. 
 ha'atohula-(ku) gerund. 
 ha'atola 1. v. i., to send a message, to send a 
 
 thing. 2. U., n., a messenger: laa 
 
 ha'atola, a person sent. 
 ha'atolanga v. n., a message, command, 
 
 order, epistle (late use). 
 ha'atola'i tr., to give a message to. 
 ha'atolanga'ini tr., to give a message to. 
 ha'atonohi U., v. tr., to offer drink, to cause to 
 
 drink. 
 ha'atonohila-(ku) gerund, 
 ha'ato'o v. tr., to confirm, to accomplish; e 
 
 ha'ato'oa saeku, he carried out my 
 
 wish, 
 ha'ato'osu'a U., v. tr., to cause to stumble, 
 ha'atoretore U., v. i.; ha'atoretore maa, to act 
 
 stealthily. 
 Ha'au the landing-place at Oloha, west coast 
 
 of Little Malaita. 
 
 ha'a'uduhi v. tr., to drip on, to bespatter. 
 
 ha'a'uku v. tr., to lower, to let down. 
 
 ha'aulao v. i., to act the wanton. 
 
 ha'a'ulu v. tr., to make blind, to cause to be 
 blind, to cause the eye to close. 
 
 ha'a'ure v. i., to set up, to cause to stand. 
 ha'a'ure mauta'a. 
 ha'a'uresi tr., to make to stand, to set on 
 
 end, to build up, to edify. 
 ha'a'uresila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 ha'a'urenga'ini S., v. tr., to accompany a 
 person on a journey. 
 
 ha'a'ureruru S., v. tr., to make peace between, 
 to restore friendship between, 
 ha'a'urerurunge v. n. 
 
 ha'auri v. tr., to save, to make alive, to put 
 parrot-fish, i'a ni kalu, in a pool to keep 
 them alive, cf. mduri. lopo ni ha'auri, 
 pool of salvation, baptismal font, 
 ha'auringe v. n., safety, salvation. 
 ha'aurile-(ku) S., ha'aurita-(ku) U., gerund. 
 1. the saving of. 2. the being saved, 
 salvation; ini ni ha'atirilana 'oto, a 
 person to be saved. 3. the person who 
 saves; a ha'aurileku, my saviour. 
 
 ha'aurine S., ha'aurina U., adv., thus, just so, 
 that's the way. 
 
 ha'a'usu U., v. i., to let fall. 
 
 ha'a'usuli 1. v. tr., to let fall, to cause to drop. 
 
 'usu 11. 
 
 ha'ausuli 2. v. tr., to teach, to cause to do like. 
 
 usuli. ini qaarongoisuli e ka'a liula'ana 
 
 ini ha'ausuli, the disciple is not above 
 
 his master. 
 
 ha'ausulinge v. n., teaching, instruction. 
 
 maai ha'ausulinge, a lesson. 
 ha'ausulila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 ha'awa'a v. i., to desecrate, to defile; ere 
 ha'awa'a, to speak blasphemy. 
 ha'awaa'i U., v. tr., to dishonor. 
 
 ha'awaiteu v. i., to engender strife. 
 
 ha'awali 1. v. i., to delay, to pass, of a short 
 period of time. wali. 2. adv., a short 
 time. 3. w^ith suff. pron.: 'oke ha'aua- 
 li'eu, wait a little while for me. 
 ha'awalinge v. n., a delay. 
 
 ha'awarasikale U., a scorpion: lit., causing the 
 child to scream. 
 
 ha'awasi v. tr., to hunt, to chase wild animals. 
 
 ha'awaweta'a'i v. tr., to cause vexation to, to 
 fash, to wrangle. 
 
 ha'awe'o to cause to be weary; ko ha'awe'ora 
 mala, trouble themselves for nothing. 
 
 ha'aweweu U., v. i.. to quarrel, to bicker. 
 
 hada n.. a bird, an eagle (Haliaetus leucogaster) 
 used in Ulawa as an omen. Wango hada. 
 
 hadi V. tr.. to forbid under a curse, to prevent; 
 hddi ola. hddi olanga, v. n., cursing; 
 ere ni hedi olanga. to swear, to take an 
 oath. 
 
 hadonga U., n., a shellfish, univalve, mutton- 
 fish, hangoda. S. 
 
 haeta U., v. i., to appear, of ghostly visions. 
 
 haha S. 1. adv.. down, not used of points of 
 compass, but apai haha, the downward 
 side, ». e.. Big Malaita; mai i haha, 
 under the earth; hoi haha, under the
 
 HAHA 
 
 26 
 
 haha (continued). 
 
 earth, the downward side; hahani 
 'ono'onoma, a measure, a yard. 2. 
 prep, {kii) ; i hahamu, underneath you. 
 VVedau wava, west; Wango bahai, 
 Samoa /a/a, Vaturanga vava, Mao. haha 
 earth. 
 
 haha 3. v. tr., to carry a person on the back. 
 Samoa fafa, Xiue fafa, Viti vava. 
 
 haha 4. hahai walo, a thicket. 
 
 haha'iteli S., v. tr., to distinguish, lio 
 haha'iteli. 
 haha'itelila-(ku) gerund, 
 haha'itelinge'ini tr., to single out, to par- 
 ticularize; e ka'a haha'iielinge'inie ike 
 le'une, it was not confined to that par- 
 ticular instance. 
 
 hahale n., a cave, hale 1. 
 
 hahalisi S., n., grass, cf. hiilisi. Mota valis. 
 
 hahaore'e U., adj., very small, diminutive. 
 haora. 
 
 hahari n., a bifurcation, used with genitive i 
 S., ni U. hari 2. haharii tala, branch- 
 ing roads. 
 
 hahi v. tr., to cook in an oven with leaves and 
 hot stones: a layer of hot stones on 
 bottom, then the kara, etc., and then 
 leav-es to cover all. The floor of ov-en is 
 level with the ground, 
 hahinge v. n., a cooking in an oven. 
 hahila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 hahiteli U., v. tr., to distinguish, to separate 
 between, haha'iteli, S. 
 
 haho (ku) 1. prep., above; dinge la'i hahona, the 
 day after it; with locative i: i haho, on 
 top; ilengi i haho, in the sky above. 
 2. n., U., uplands; mwa haho i Rahumaea. 
 Fagani /a/o, Lau /a/o, Mota vawo. 
 
 haho 3. n., a reef lying off shore. 
 
 hahota S., n., used with ddu 1; ddu hahola, to 
 deceive, to act the hypocrite; dan 
 haholanga, v. n. haho 1. 
 
 hahuilala U. 1. v. i., used with poss. 3, to 
 exemplify. 2. n., a sign, an example. 
 
 hahure'i v. tr., hdhure'i maa, to lift up the 
 eyes; hdhure'i 'elinge, to incline the 
 ears. 
 
 hahuroto v. i., to be clear, of unimpeded vision; 
 esi ne'i maa hahuroto, his eye became 
 clear; lio hahuroto, to see clearly. 
 
 hahuto'o V. i., to cast lots, to test by lots: a 
 leaf of red dracaena ('apai dili) is held 
 in the fingers and pulled; the judgment 
 is given according as the leaf breaks 
 easily or with difficulty, cf. ilala. 
 hahuto'onga v. n. 
 
 hai 1. numeral, four; hai avuala, forty is used 
 as a unit in counting men. Mota vat, 
 Maori wha. 
 
 hai 2. contraction of hao i; hai 'ano, on the 
 ground; hai la'ona, within; hai le'une, 
 down there; hai nume, down in the 
 house; hai tei, down where? 
 
 hai 3. exclamation of reproof; hai raona, well 
 I never; hai mwaena, I say, j'ou! 
 
 hai 4. art., one, a; probably a contraction of 
 hdu 4 and » 2; hdidinge, a day; mu 
 
 hai 4 (continued). 
 
 heidinge, daj's; hdiu-ala, a word; hai 
 naho, a wave, a breaker; hai rodo, a 
 night; hai holaa, a calm; hdi lama, a 
 pool; hdi teqe, a bamboo; nga hdi ini, a 
 length of bamboo. 
 
 hai, haihei 5. v. tr., to scratch with the nails 
 (of birds, dogs, etc.); kokoko ko hei, the 
 brush-turkey scratches; hdi uate, to dig 
 up worms for bait for i'e ni sane. 
 
 ha'i 6. participial ending, erehd'i. Mota vag. 2. 
 
 ha'i 7. suffix to verbs, used intransitively: to 
 make it transitive ni is added, hd'ini. 
 
 ha'i 8. prefix, may be doubled hd'ihe'i. (a) 
 expresses reciprocity, (b) used w-ith 
 nouns of relationship; ro ha'i {mii he'i) 
 ma'amana, father and son; kirerue ha'i 
 maeloonga, thej^ two are at enmity, 
 (c) he'i, S., expresses repetition or con- 
 tinuance; mwaiie kire he'i 'iivue lo'u, they 
 must not ever say it again; e sa'a he'i 
 aopa lo'u, it will never be different; ko 
 he'i sapeie, adds more to it; hd'i mai, U., 
 to add to; kira'elu a ta'e hd'i 'clie'i. they 
 embark on their return journey, (d) 
 denotes relative action: hd'i 'amasi, to 
 pity. M. L., p. 531, 186. cf. Florida 
 vei arovi. Motu he. \'iti vei, Florida 
 vei, Wango ha'i. The pronunciation 
 hd'i may have been adopted in order 
 to distinguish it from hdi 4. cf. hau 1 
 (Mota vatu) and ha'u 6 (Mota vau). 
 
 ha'i S. 9. used occasionally where Ulawa uses 
 ha'a. cf. hd'imaani. 
 
 ha'i U. 10, V. i., to call attention to; used with 
 poss. 3. 
 
 haia exclam., I say. 
 
 ha'i'a'auhi v. tr., to deliver, to help. 
 
 ha'i'ade'i v. i., to make a spectacle of, to look 
 on at. 
 ha'i'ade'inge v. n., a spectacle. 
 
 ha'i'alama'i v. i., to consent mutually, to be 
 agreed upon a policy. Wango haiaramai. 
 ha'i'alama'inge v. n. 
 
 ha'i'amasi to be merciful. 
 
 ha'iaopa'i adj., different, various; mu ola 
 hd'iaopa'i, different things. 
 
 ha'iare II., v. tr., to proffer help, to push one- 
 self forward, e hd'iarea maraana, he 
 pushed himself forward: not considered 
 good form. 
 
 ha'idada U., v. i., to be level. 
 
 ha'idadanga U., v. n., used as verb or adverb: 
 used with poss. 3 equal to, agreeing with, 
 sufficient, sadanga, S. e hd'idadanga 
 maia, equal to it; e hd'idadanga ana, it 
 corresponds to it. 
 
 ha'idengie'i S., ha'idenie'i U., partic, until 
 daylight. 
 
 haidinge S., n., a day; nga hdidinge; mu 
 heidinge, days; stdi heidinge, daily; e 
 topoa hdidinge, to set a day. 
 
 ha'i'epu'i v. tr., to propitiate a person, to 
 smooth down temper. 
 
 ha'ihe'i 1. reduplication of hd'i 8. 
 
 ha'ihe'i 2. S., hd'ihe'i niii, a log of coconut 
 wood, hd'iihe'n, U.
 
 27 
 
 HA'ITALE 
 
 ha'ihe'iolinge v. n., bounty. 
 
 ha'iholota'i v. i., to promise, to have an agree- 
 ment hotwi'on. 
 hel'iholota'inge v. n., an agreement. 
 
 ha'ihonoa'i v. i., to curse; ere hd'ihonoii'i, to 
 speak revilingly. 
 ha'ihononga v. n., cursing. 
 
 ha'ihora'i L'.. partic, to be daybreak. (/. 
 'auhora. 
 
 ha'ihoro'i l'.. v. i., to l)e at strife, to fi>;ht. 
 ha'ihoronga v. n., variance, strife. 
 
 haihu n.. dugong, sea-cow. 
 
 ha'ihuni U., v. tr., to desire, to wish for. hiini. 
 ha'ihuninga v. n., desire, lust. 
 ha'ihunila-(ku) gerund. Wango haahuni. 
 
 ha'ike S. 1. negative, no: not used as negative 
 particle; demonstratixe na. ena, may 
 be added for emphasis. 2. n., nothing, 
 naught; nga ola taa'? what? ha'ike. 
 nothing; ko ha'ike, otherwise, else; ha'ike 
 na. oh no; ha'ike 'ola 'o'o, never at all; 
 ha'ike tie, not yet. 3. to be nothing, 
 not to be; ana ko ha'ike, if it is not .so; 
 maala ko ha'ike, even if not. Probably 
 ha'i and ke 1 . cf. qa'ike, qa'i, U. Wango 
 qai. 
 
 ha'ikineta'i S., v. i., to take care, to be faithful, 
 to guard against. 
 
 ha'ilakali U., v. i., to have sexual intercourse 
 with, ha'ilakali maia a ola. 
 
 ha'ileku v. i.. to be whole, entire: adv.. com- 
 pletely; hai alo'waa ha'ileku, whole day 
 long; tola ha'ileku, to carry whole, in 
 one piece. 
 
 ha'ileledi v. tr.. to mock at. to despise: v. i.. 
 to be abominable, 
 ha'ileledinge \-. n., abomination. 
 
 ha'ileu v. i., to snatch, to be violent; ko 
 he'ileuleu ana mola, merely snatched it 
 with violence. 
 
 ha'iliu adv.. reciprocally; hai maai dengi 
 he'iiiime. the four winds; he'ii to'oa'i 
 he'iliii, wandering star, planet; kira 'asi 
 lu'ua hd'iliu, \'., they ceased hostilities; 
 ko saewasu he'iliu, angry with one 
 another; mdni oaoanga hd'iliu, equality; 
 inoro ko pu'ota'iuie erenga hd'iliu, you 
 arc ignorant of one another's speech; 
 opa hd'iliu, to be at variance, 
 ha'iliunge'ini v. tr., to pass a thing from 
 person to person. 
 
 ha'ilu'u V. tr., to exhume human bones. M. A., 
 p. 262: to remove, 
 ha'ilu'unge'ini tr. 
 
 ha'ima'amana n.. used with numeral ro, two. 
 tid 7. ro hd'ima'amana, father and son. 
 ha'ima'amananga n., mu he'inia'amananga, 
 parents. 
 
 ha'ima'ani S.. v. tr.. to copy, to do like. 
 ha'amaani, U. ngara ha'ima'ani, to cry 
 in sympathy with. 
 
 ha'imalahune n.. used with ro or mu. nd 7. 
 kireru'e ro ha'imalahune. they two are 
 friends. 
 
 ha'imauana n.. used with ro: ro hd'imauaua, 
 man and wife; with ineu, etc., added, ro 
 ha'imauana ineu. my parents, nii 7. 
 
 hfl'imwa'eta'i 1. v. i.. to assent, to be willing. 
 2. V. i.. to kiss. 
 
 haine S., haina U., fourth, the fourth time. 
 nd 7. 
 
 hH'ini tr. suH'.; suu. to sink; suuhe'ini. to de- 
 stroy. Florida vagini. 
 
 ha'ioa v. i.. to agree with, to agree together. 
 
 M'ioangi v. i.. to cackle (of birds), to imitate, 
 to follow on with. 
 
 ha'iodo'i v. i., to meet one another. 
 
 ha'iohe v. [., to compete, to race. 
 
 ha'i'ohi 1 '., v. i., to query, to be doubtful about. 
 
 ha'iohonginge n.. trial, making trial of one 
 another, fighting. 
 
 ha'i'oli V. i., to turn back, to return, to take 
 turn about; kakali he'ihe'i'oli, to take 
 turns in guarding; lae hd'i'oli, to go 
 and return. 
 ha'i'oUsi antiphonally. mutually; tapa 
 hd'i'olisi, to converse. Wango heiheiori. 
 
 ha'iore 1. v. i.. to fail to return, to stay behind. 
 lae ha'iore. 
 
 ha'iore 2. v. i., to scold, to quarrel, 
 ha'iorenga v. n., bickering. 
 
 ha'ipani'i I'., v. i., to strive with, to contend, 
 to race, 
 ha'ipani'inge v. n. 
 
 ha'ipolanga v. n., insurrection, tumult. 
 
 ha'ipuri 1. V. i., tobe last. 2.adv.,latest, at last. 
 
 ha'ipurunga'i U., partic, close together, clus- 
 tered. 
 
 ha'iqa'aqana n.. grandparents and grand- 
 children, those who call one another 
 qa'aqa: used with ro, mu, mwa. 
 
 hai raona S., hai raoni U., exclamation of 
 reproof. 
 
 ha'irape'i U., \. tr., to exhort. 
 
 ha'irara \-. i.. to be zealous, diligent. 
 
 ha'irarahi U., v. tr., to persuade, importune, 
 ha'irarahinga U., v. n., persuasion. 
 
 ha'irareta'i 1. v. i.. to tend. 2. n., a servant. 
 
 ha'irienga v. n.. a contest; ani he'irienga pe'i 
 sape. in subduing the body. 
 
 hairodo n.. a night; nga hdirodo; mu heirodo, 
 nights; hdirodo si'iri, last night. 
 
 ha'iruru U., v. i., to be lumped together, to be 
 identical with. 
 
 ha'isada v. i., to be flat, even. Wango laisada, 
 agreeing with. 
 
 ha'isa'iri v. i.. to quarrel. 
 
 ha'iseuni S.. v. i., to be at strife, to be at 
 variance, to fight. M. L.. p. 186. 
 
 ha'isiho U.. v. i.. to speak against, decry, to 
 prate; used with poss. 3. 
 
 ha'isu'esu'e S., v. i.. to meet one another. 
 
 ha'isuhinga U.. v. n.. unction. 
 
 ha'isuru v. i.. ere hd'isuru, to have altercations. 
 
 ha'isusu v. i., to be continuous, sustained; 
 sae'iuasu he'isusu. continued anger. 
 
 ha'isuu V. i.. to flit from place to place; 'i'i ko 
 he'isuu, the swift flits about. 
 
 ha'itako'i U., v. i., to swear an oath. 
 
 ha'itale 1. v. tr.. to search for; ana 'olo 'emi ka'a 
 roro'a hd'italea 'amu, unless wc seek it 
 of thee; Ho ha'itale U., to look in vain 
 for. 2. V. i.. to get out of the waj'; 
 ha'itale talaku, make room for me.
 
 HA'ITALE 
 
 28 
 
 ha'itale (continued). 
 
 ha'italenga v. n., a search. 
 ha'italela-(,ku) gerund, 
 ha'italenga'ini tr., to look for. 
 ha'itatanga'i U.. partic, scattered, 
 ha'itelili S.. to be unruly. 
 
 ha'itelilinge v. n., unruliness. 
 ha'ite'e adj., with whole skin, unpeeled. c/. 
 
 hd'ileku. 
 ha'iteu v. i., to move quickly, to hasten. 
 
 ha'iteuhi tr, to deliver, to free, 
 ha'itohe v. tr., to dispute with, to refuse to 
 listen to; ere ha'itohe. to contradict, 
 ha'itohenga v. n., refusal, disobedience. 
 ha'itohela-(ku) gerund. Wango haitohe, 
 haritohe. 
 ha'itoli V. tr., to bury, to be a-burying. 
 ha'itolinge v. n., burial. 
 ha'itolila-(ku) gerund. 
 ha'itoUnge'ini tr., to bury, 
 ha'itorangi v. tr., to exhort, 
 ha'itotori U., v. i., to await, to expect; ha'ilo- 
 tori susuto'o, to hope (late use); hd'ilolo- 
 ringa susuto'o, v n., hope. 
 ha'iuqeuqeni v. tr., to complain of. 
 
 ha'iuqeuqeninge v. n., complaint, 
 ha'iusi U., v. i., to traffic, to barter, 
 ha'iusunge'i S., v. i., to send, to despatch, 
 ha'iusunge'inge v. n., a command, 
 ha'iusunge'ini tr., to give command to. 
 ha'iuwelina U., n., a man and his sister's son, 
 those who call one another uweli, used 
 with ro, miva. nd 7. 
 ha'iuwesi v. i., to use oaths, to curse. 
 ha'iwalo v. i., to be choked with vines; mae 
 
 hd'iwalo, to die prematurely. 
 haka 1. v. i., to be torn, to tear; haka lo'oni, to 
 tear clothes, 
 hakasi tr.. to tear something. 
 Haka 2. n., the Southern Cross Mission 
 schooner; palapala ni Haka, omen of 
 the Southern Cross coming, a sign of 
 rain. 
 haka 3. n., a ship; white people, foreign; haka 
 lude mwane, a vessel of the labor trade; 
 dango ni haka, papaya; hole ni haka, an 
 oar; mu haka, white people; hudi ni 
 haka, Musa cavendishii; ola ni haka, a 
 foreign thing; poro ni haka, a man of the 
 ship, white man; i haka, the white man's 
 country; noko lai haka, I am going 
 abroad. Probably Mota aka through 
 San Cristoval, where Bishop Patteson 
 first called and where the word was 
 first learned by the peoples of Sa'a and 
 Ulawa. 
 haka 4. n., a herd; haka ni poo, herd of swine. 
 hakis n., axe (English). 
 
 kilku 1. v. i., to go together, to go in a company, 
 hakusi S., hakuni U., tr., to go with, to 
 
 accompany. 
 hakusila-(^ku) gerund. Wango hagu. 
 haku 2. n., the prow of a canoe, separately 
 made and tied on with cane: poop, v., 
 to cut out the boards for the prow. 
 hala V. i., to attempt, used with ni; nou hala 
 ni lae, I attempt to go. 
 
 halahala firm, taut. 
 
 halai 1. to be bald. 2. a bald person; a halai, 
 
 the bald man. 
 halaitana the top of a hill, lit., its baldness, 
 halasi U., to be stiff, to stiffen, halahala. 
 halata a wound, scar. 
 hale 1. a shed, a yam-shed in a garden, nga hale. 
 
 Florida vale, house; Maori whare. 
 hale (ku) 2. the gums, palate; idetnu ke siiu i 
 
 halena, the lime spatula shall pierce 
 
 his gums. 
 hale'ite U., adv., entirely, only, hdli'ite, S. 
 
 Lau fala'ete. 
 Halele'i the island forming Port Adam, Little 
 
 Malaita. 
 hali, haliheli 1. v. tr., to break off branches; 
 
 hdli 'e'e, to break areca branches, 
 •ahali partic, broken off. 
 halila-(ku) gerund. 
 haliheli'e adj., broken off; ko hile hdliheli'e, 
 
 breaks in pieces. Wango maharihari, 
 
 ruined, 
 hali 2. v. i., to strive; hdli wala, to dispute; hdli 
 
 walanga, S., v. n., disputation; wala 
 
 hdlinge, v. n., strife; hdli ana hurunge, 
 
 foot racing. 
 halinge v. n., strife, bad feeling. 
 halila-(,ku) gerund. Mota vahi, match; 
 
 Viti valu, fight; Malagasy valy. 
 hali 3. stingray. Mota tar, Viti roj, Maori u'/iai. 
 halidu'u'a U., v. i., to stumble. 
 hali'ite S., adv., entirely, only, hdle'ile, U. 
 haliono U., v. i., to close the eyes. 
 halisi 1. harvest, crop, time of ripening; dango 
 
 ni helisi, fruit (nut) tree; mar a hdlisi, 
 
 northeast wind; mar a hdlisi i matawa, 
 
 north-by-east wind. 2. yam season, 
 
 year (late use); hdlisi hire 'elie 'oto, last 
 
 yam-digging; hdlisi kire ke'i 'elie, the 
 
 coming yam-digging season; hdlisi mei, 
 
 next yam-digging; nga hdu ni helisi, a 
 
 year. 3. U., grass, onion (late use). 
 
 Mota valis, grass. 4. hdlisi pena, U., 
 
 Coix lachryma. Job's tears, 
 halo 1. v. tr., to bore, to drill. 2. n., a drill; 
 
 halo mao, a pump drill: the sections of 
 
 shell for money {haa) are all bored. 
 
 Mota war, to twist. 
 halo 3. v. tr., to helve an axe. 
 halolo V. i.. to come forcibly into contact with, 
 
 used with poss. 3; e halolo ana nume 
 
 ngeena, beat on that house. 
 halu 1. n., some; used in Sa'a with genitive t, 
 
 also with suffixed pronoun na; mu helui 
 
 'inoni, mwa hdlu 'inoni, certain persons; 
 
 hdluna ngaini, hdliina ngaile, U., one 
 
 here and there. Florida balu, Niue 
 falu. 
 halu 2. S., rdui helu, 10,000 coconuts, 
 halute'i v. tr., to paddle and overtake, hdlute'i 
 
 haka. 
 halute'inge'inl tr. Ulawa hdluta, in proper 
 
 names. Wango haruta, to paddle; 
 
 Fate balusa, paddle; Mota alo 3, to 
 
 steer; Samoa alo, to paddle; Motu kalo. 
 
 New Britain walu, Lifu galu. 
 hama hatchet, tomahawk (English hammer)
 
 29 
 
 HARO 
 
 hana 1. n., a yam with prickly vines, twining 
 to the left on its pole, whereas uhi twine 
 to the right; it is planted whole; hana 
 ni Kcla, a hana planted head down- 
 ward: other varieties are hana sa'o. hana 
 tapole, hana wai; hdu hana, coral lime- 
 stone; nini hana. U.. a yam; sikei hana, 
 a thorn on top of the tuber. 
 hana 2. v. i., to shoot, with arrow or gun; hane 
 takarurume'inire, to shoot several at 
 one shot. 
 
 hananga v. n. 
 
 hanasi determ., to shoot anyone. 
 
 hanasila-(ku) gerund. Florida vanahi, to 
 shoot; \''iti vana, Samoa fana, Xiue 
 fana, Malay panah, arrow. 
 
 hanali determ., to covet; sae hanalinge, 
 covetousness. 
 
 hanalila-(ku) gerund. 
 hane 1. v. n., to climb; hane poi ile'u. come up 
 here to me. 2. used of the bridegroom's 
 party visiting the bride's party at a 
 wedding feast; mwala ko holi kcni ko 
 hane. ko lai hiine ola. the people who are 
 buying the bride go up and display the 
 bridal moneys. 3. to rise, to ferment 
 (of ha'apo'e that has stood in bowls). 
 4. to leave the land and put out to sea 
 when crossing to another island, to aim 
 at a point of land, hdulihane. 
 
 hanenga v. n., climbing. 
 
 hanenga'ini ti ., determ., to climb and carry. 
 
 haneta'a S.. hanetaha U., v. i., to clim'o up. 
 
 baneta'anga S., hanetahanga U., a slope, 
 a steep place, a declivitj-. Fagani/ane. 
 
 hane'i tr., to covet, to desire. 
 
 hanenga v. n., hanenga ni sae, saehancnga, 
 covetousness. 
 
 ha'ahanenga'ini to lust after, to exalt. 
 hanue S., hanua U., land, country, village; in 
 Sa'a the final e changes to a before the 
 personal article a. resulting in a long 
 vowel, hanuaa ola. the land of So-and-so. 
 hanue huu. solid land, dry land, heri- 
 tage; hdnue mdine, the place here, this 
 land; hdnue e niule, a place abounding 
 in coconuts; hdnue e gala, the village is 
 empty; hdnue sala. desert; mwa hdnua, 
 U., villagers, people; mwa hdnua hunga, 
 everybody; apai henue. the west side of 
 an island; awalosi i henue, the north- 
 west wind; » denumana hdnue, in the 
 middle of the island; e kuluhie hdnue, 
 upholds the earth; lai henue. to go on 
 a journey; ngorana hdnue. point of land, 
 cape; qd'usi henue. he whose duty it is 
 to approach the ancestor ghosts; sato 
 e qa'alie hdnue, the sun has risen on the 
 earth; td'i henue. S., in the uplands; 
 td'ilcUhana hdnue. boundary of land; 
 mu toloi henue. the hills; lolona hdnue, 
 the hill country; 'usu henue. the first 
 finger; wai henue. up in the village. 
 Hanua 'Asi U., Lark Shoal south of Ulawa, 
 
 figures in folklore. 
 hfinuelama S., to be at peace, cf. lama 4. 
 
 hanuelamanga v. n., peace. 
 
 hMnuelama (continued). 
 
 hanuelamasi tr.. to have peace among men; 
 e hdnuelamasire, they were at f)eace. 
 
 hanga v. i., to be jammed, to be too tight. 
 
 hangoda S., hadonga U., a haliotis or sea-ear, 
 strung and used as a bait for crayfish; 
 hinui hangoda, its shell. 
 
 hao S., adv., of direction, down, west; with 
 locative j contracts to hai, hai one, hat 
 'ano, hai la'ona; na'o hao, to go toward, 
 to go west; po'o hao, S., farther west; 
 poo hao likiteniu, on beyond thee; qdu 
 hao, to be going north or west. 
 
 ha'olu U., ha'alu S., adj., new, fresh. 
 ha'aha'olu. Xguna vau, Wango ha'oru, 
 Bougainville Straits faolu, Malay vau, 
 Malagasy vao, Maori hou. 
 
 haora, hahaore'e U., small. 
 
 haoraha v. n., used with poss 3: boyhood, 
 smallness; haoraha ana, the small size. 
 haorasi tr., to be too small for. 
 
 haora'ini U., v. tr., to name, to give a name to. 
 
 hapa 1. a plank, thwart of a canoe, rdi (rdu i) 
 hapa. 2. plates of turtle shell, hapa ni 
 honu; lolo hapa, to bend the shell. 
 3. a phase of the moon; hapa ni na'o, 
 'alanga'i hapa, U., first quarter. 
 
 hara U., haro S. 1. adv., of time, used of con- 
 secutive time, of unfinished action, pre- 
 cedes verb, Ahi'a use. muni 'e hara 
 ha'ahulee, as soon as it is daylight; muni 
 'e hara lae, begin to go gently. 
 
 hara S. 2. hara pole, a phase of the moon, first 
 quarter, day before full. 
 
 hara 3. v. i., to be firm; puu hara, to get a firm 
 footing; susu hara, to lean firmly, to 
 rest upon. 
 
 Haraina a village on the northwest corner of 
 Ulawa. 
 
 harasi v. tr., to chafe, to scratch. 
 
 harehare U., v. i., to cram; susu harehare, to 
 cram full. 
 
 Hari Hdu Hart, a rock at the east entrance to 
 Mara Masiki Channel. 
 
 hari, hariheri 1. v. tr.. to ask about; soi heri, to 
 question, to ask questions, U. 
 harite'inga v. n., questioning, suka hdrite- 
 'inga. Wango hari haate, Florida 
 varigohi. 
 
 hari 2. n., used with genitive i or ni; hdrii tola, 
 S., hdri ni tola, U., side track, bifur- 
 cation of roads, hahari. 
 
 hariheri S., n., a scorpion. Lau farifari, San 
 Cristoval susu heri, Maori weri. hdli 3. 
 
 harihuni, hariherihuni S. 1. v. tr.. to desire, to 
 wish for. hdri 1, huni. 
 harihuninge v. n., desire, 
 harihunila-iku) gerund. 
 
 harihuni, hariherihuni 2. adv., at all, precedes 
 verb. 
 
 harikokosi U., v. i., to be straitened, confined. 
 koko 2. 
 
 haro S., hara U., adv., of time, of consecutive 
 or of unfinished action or of future time. 
 cf. saro. ke haro diana. when it is well; 
 ke haro hoou-a ka'u. let it be first light, as 
 soon as it is light; 'oke haro lae. go gently.
 
 HARO'A 
 
 haro'a U. (Su'uholo use), as hara 1. 
 
 harua U., cxclam. of assent, yes. 
 
 hasi, ha'ihesi S., hasihasi U. 1. v. tr., to plant. 
 cf. 'ii'iihesi. 
 hasinge v. n., a planting. 
 hasila-(ku) gerund. Wango hasi, Lau/asj. 
 
 hasi U. 2. maana e'a hasi i saroha, his eyes roll 
 up to the ceiling. 
 
 hasi'ei'ei S., twist tobacco in sticks. Wango 
 hasi'ei, a tree; the first tobacco came to 
 Sa'a from Wango. 
 
 hasikokosi U., v. tr., to cause distress to. 
 koko 2. 
 
 hasile'ioi U., v. tr., to set, place. 
 
 Hasimo a baj' on the west side of Ulawa 
 between Lenga and Ripoo, the site of 
 an old village. 
 
 hasi'o (ku) n., flesh of body; me'i hesi'o i'e, this 
 flesh. 
 hasi'onga v. n., ngau hesi'onga, cannibalism; 
 to'oni e mada'a am hesi'onga ani, gar- 
 ments defiled w-ith the flesh, cf. 
 hinesii. Wango hasi'o, Mota visogoi, 
 Maisin visoa, Wedau vioa. 
 hasi'ola adj., fleshy, with plenty of flesh on. 
 
 hasipe'iile S., adj., hard, close in grain. 
 
 bata, hatahata 1. v. i., to go together, to accom- 
 pany one another, tola halahata, to act 
 in harmony. 2. v. i., to .set well, to be 
 easy, comfortable; tori ineu e hala, my 
 yoke is easy. 3. v. i., to be gentle (of 
 wind); mawa halahata viola, a gentle 
 breeze. 4. suli hata, 40 dogs' teeth, a 
 unit in reckoning money. M. A., pp. 
 238, 325. 5. maraau wei hata, south- 
 southeast wind, strong but with no rain, 
 cloudy skies. 6. a tree of hard wood 
 used to make drums; pig-proof fences 
 are made of it in Guadalcanar. San 
 Cristoval hata. 7. hata koiila'a, to be 
 noisy, chattering. 
 hatanga v. n., fellowship, communion, 
 
 palea tahanga, to keep fellowship. 
 hataa'i v. i., to arrange, to place one along- 
 side the other; hataa'i diena ana mwa 
 ola, to put things in due order; hataa'i 
 sae talani, to be careful to; le'u hire 
 hataa'i heu ana, a pavement. 
 hataa'ini tr. to cleave to, to accompany, 
 to arrange. 
 
 hatale, hatahatale v. i., to go along the beach 
 as opposed to liu i henue, take the 
 upper road; awalosi i hatale, the north 
 wind. 
 hatalea v. n., shore, coast. 
 
 hatara v. i., to rest upon, to lean, to press 
 against, 
 hataranga'ini tr., to cause to lean upon. 
 San Cristoval hatara, to reach. 
 
 hatare on the side of. toward, used with suff. 
 pron. a. hatarea i ola. 
 
 hato 1. a large armlet made of clam-shell; 
 daraha'ini hato, to fit the shell ring on 
 the arm; didi hato, to make the shell 
 ring: a hole is made by tapping with a 
 piece of flint tied to a handle, then a 
 stick studded with flints is inserted and 
 
 hato 1 (continued). 
 
 the hole made larger, the outside is 
 rounded on coral rock and a groove is 
 made; the old men, and often the blind, 
 make the hato. 2. U., hika hato, the 
 moon on the fifth day. 
 
 hato 3 (ku) U., knee-cap. 
 
 hatonga S. 1. suited to, used with poss. 3. 
 (' hatonga akti. 
 hatonga'i v. i., to explain, to set out in 
 words; hatonga'i wala haahi, to accuse, 
 hatonga'ini tr., to cite an example, to illus- 
 trate, to give instructions about. 
 
 hatonga U. 2. to be small. 
 
 hau 1. rock, stone; hoi heu, a rock. cf. liliheu, 
 snluheu. hau haa, red madrepore coral; 
 hau hana, coral limestone; Hau Hari, 
 a rock at the east entrance of Mara 
 Masiki Channel; hau ni iu, twin rocks; 
 Hau ni Kent, rock at Ali'ite where 
 female ghosts congregate; hau ni lilie'i, 
 a rock from which men cast for gar- 
 fish; Hau Loho, a boat harbor south of 
 Port Adam; Hau Maelo, a rock near 
 Ngorangora on the east coast of Ulawa: 
 prov. raa hitelia Hau Maelo. dry 
 weather enough to crack Hau Maelo; 
 hail menu, pumice; hau ynou, an isolated 
 rock; hau ngedi, flint; hau 'ono'ono, to 
 swallow stones in an ordeal; hau pawa, 
 soapstone; hau pie, a precipitous wall 
 of rock; hau pulu, hard volcanic rock; 
 hau pu'opu'o, a grindstone; hau susu, 
 an immovable rock; hiiu siiusuui karo, 
 cornerstone; 'ato'ato hau, to perform the 
 hot-stone ordeal; ddu heu, the hot-stone 
 ordeal. M. A., p. 210; ddu dunge, 
 dunga ni heu, to undergo the ordeal; 
 i'e hd'u, a stone fish; ipelu eni heu, to 
 fight with stones; kakatai heu, iron rod; 
 ki'iki'i heu, a rod of iron; lengine hau, 
 above the rock; leu kire hataa'i heu ana, 
 a pavement; nga odoni heu, a row of 
 stones; qd'une hau, rocks on shore seen 
 from the sea; rele hau, to grind the 
 teeth; sae hau, hard heart (late use); 
 e 'u'ile'inie nga hoi heu, a stone's throw. 
 Mota vatu, stone; New Guinea vau: 
 possibly pronounced hau and not ha'u 
 in order to distinguish it from ha'u 
 (Mota vau). 
 
 hau 2. axe, stone axe, iron (late use); hdukile- 
 kile, a long-handled tomahawk with 
 iron blade; hau roroho, a stone axe; rere 
 hau, to sharpen an axe; rere hdunge. 
 V. n., a.xe sharpening; warei heu, ware 
 ni hau, a short club with a stone head 
 made at Waisisi, Big Malaita. 
 haule adj., stony. 
 
 ha'u 3. n., a log of wood; hau i contracts to hat, 
 hai dango, S., hai 'ei, U., a log; hau lilt 
 qana, a boom; nga hduheui niu, U.. nga 
 hdihei, S., a log of coconut wood. Mota 
 vat 3, Batak hau, tree; Malay kayu. M. 
 L., p. 95. 
 
 hau 4. n., (a) denotes a period of time; ngahau- 
 dinga, U., a day; nga hau ni hdlisi, a
 
 31 
 
 HELEHELE 
 
 hSu 4 (continutd). 
 
 period of a year, (b) with numeral 
 ta'a, S., ta'e, U., one. it makes hduta'a'i, 
 haula'e, once: with geniti%e t, hdu i 
 contracts to hdi, hdidinge, S., a day. 
 hdirodo, a night, (c) a row of teeth: 
 rete hdu, to grind the teeth; rele hdunga, 
 V. n., talai heune, a row of teeth; kulaa 
 talai heune, to loosen teeth; used of 
 things that are in succession with 
 genitive i. It, ni; hdu ni 'est, a wave; 
 hduliahe, tide-rips; hduliqottgi, one day 
 of a series, cf. au in Motu and Hula. 
 Keapara hau prefixed to names of 
 things of length. T.S.E. iii, p. 475. 
 hiu 5. U.. used of phases of the moon; hdu ni 
 lemi, full moon; hdu ni mwela awara, day 
 after full moon; ruana hdu, second day 
 after full moon. 
 hSu 6. a pandanus with broad leaves used to 
 
 make umbrellas. 
 hau 7. an umbrella of pandanus leaf sewn in 
 strips, carried on journeys and used as a 
 sleeping-mat, also to protect children 
 when they are carried by the mother; 
 mwela ko kerukeru la'o hdu. the child's 
 ghost scratches inside the umbrella. 
 hau 8. U.. hau ni tarelare. outrigger. 
 ha'u9. to plait; hd'u ha'a, to tie laths in a plat- 
 form; hd'u mwe'i, to plait a native bag; 
 hd'u ni'e, to plait a coconut mat; hd'u 
 qaso, to plait a grass armlet; hd'u tahe, 
 to make a platform. 
 ha'usi tr. 
 
 ha'usila-(ku) gerund. Mota lau. Florida 
 vau, Samoa fatu. 
 haudinga U.. n.. a day; siili hdudinga, daily, 
 hauheu'e adj.. used as n.. a precipice, rocky 
 
 place, 
 hiiuho eel, used in divination; hduho ni wei, 
 fresh- water eel; hduho i dunga e 'ura 
 ilengi, the eel in the fire stood erect; 
 hduho ni 'est. conger eel. 
 haukama v. i.. to be in opposition to. to oppose, 
 to revolt: followed by prep, honosi, 
 against, with suft". pron. as object. 
 haukamanga v. n. 
 haukari U., starfish. 
 
 haule 1. V. tr., to nurse, to mind a child, to mind 
 
 a house; noko haule. I am minding the 
 
 house; noko haulaa mwela, I am minding 
 
 the children. 
 
 haule 2. adj., stony, rocky, rough. 
 
 haulihane a rock from which a voyage starts, 
 
 as at \\'aingile, Ulawa. 
 ha'ulioku the end purlins of a house. 
 hauliu (ku) n., the throat, 
 hauni U., adv., altogether; precedes the verb; 
 
 metathetic upon ahuni. 
 hauta'a'i S., hauta'e I'., once: the final 'i may 
 be the verb suffix, in which case the 
 composite may be regarded as a par- 
 ticiple, cf. pcle, pele'i. San Cristoval, 
 ta'a'i, one. 
 he 1. exclamation of encouragement; he i'oe, 
 
 he'o. bravo. 2. v. tr., to urge, to bid. 
 he*a, he'ahe'a 1. to defecate. 2. to rust. 
 
 he'a, he'ahe'a (continued). 
 
 he'asi tr., to defecate upon, to dirt upon. 
 Possibly metathetic upon Mota tae, 
 Motu lage. Polynesian lae, kae. 
 he'a 3. exclamation, with demonstrative na 
 or Ml added; he'a na, S., he'a ni, U., there 
 you are. 
 he'asikena'i U., cxclam., not used before 
 
 women, cf. ha'akena'i. 
 hehe 1. U., hoi hehe ani dunga, tinder, the accu- 
 mulation at the outer end of the groove 
 caused by rubbing two sticks together. 
 He dunge. 
 hehe 2. cf. ha'ahehe. 
 heheoku U., n., a dove. cf. hiroiku. 
 hehesi U.. v. tr., to be obstinate, to dispute. 
 
 hehesinga v. n.. obstinacy. 
 heheunge S.. v. n., mentioning, speaking, 
 heho V. i., to accuse a person of causing death 
 
 by magic. 
 hei 1. U., preceded by locative i, ihei, U.. itei, 
 S.. where; e kei hei, from whence; nga laa 
 ni hei, who is this person. 
 he'i 2. cf. hd'i 8: he'i is often used in Sa'a when 
 
 the preceding vowel is neither i nor u. 
 heko v. i., to be palsied, withered, of limbs, 
 hele 1. V. i.. to hold, to catch hold of. to work 
 at, to do; hele dora'i, to withhold; hele 
 dora'ie ha'alunge, to break a promise; 
 hele dumuli, to repress, to hold down; 
 hele hu'ihu'inge, unprofitableness; hele 
 hu'isie nga le'u, to err in anything; hele 
 huu, to inherit; hele istili, to do accord- 
 ing to; hele lakoma'inie, hold it together; 
 hele langa'a, to hold up conspicuously; 
 hele lolotni, to keep for oneself; hele 
 manekosi, to handle gently; hele manire'i, 
 to live orderlj" hele vidnu sada, to hold 
 level, upright; hele marangana, to take 
 from amongst; hele marara, to act with 
 diffidence; hele mduli, to do awkwardly; 
 hele ngd'ingedi, hold fast; hele 'o'i'o'i, to 
 break; hele ola, to act; hele 'onime'i, to 
 do cleverly; hele ni oraha'a, to do too 
 much; hele pd'ipesi, to grasp firmly; hele 
 ponosie waiuana, keep his mouth shut; 
 hele po'opo'oli'ili'i, to do perversely; 
 hele pupupu'e, to keep intact; hele rodi, 
 to grip, to hold tight; hele rorodo, to 
 grant fair weather, to hold off squalls: 
 a phrase used in incantations; hele 
 saedamt, U.. with poss. 3 ana, to have 
 enough; hele susuli, to inherit; hele 
 suusuu ana, to do in succession, con- 
 tinuously; hele tararuru, take hold all 
 together; hele temweri, to touch; hele 
 lolinge, to hold in subjection; hele lolo, 
 to get for nothing; hele wa'ini'ini, to do 
 diligently; hele ualamango, to perfect; 
 'osi hele hinoli'a laha ine, how well you 
 have done it. 
 helenga v. n., action, acts. 
 helela-(ku) gerund., the doing of. 
 helesi tr.. to hold, to do, to work at. 
 helesila-(ku) gerund. Wango heresi. 
 hele 2. Florida vele, magic. M. A., p. 207. 
 helehele 1. containing no coconut milk (of
 
 HELEHELE 
 
 32 
 
 helehele 1 (continued). 
 
 yam puddings), unleavened. Wango 
 herehere. 
 
 helehele S. 2. of phases of the moon: helehdc 
 mu'dimwei, seventh and eighth days; 
 helehele pdine, ninth and tenth days. 
 
 helo a small fresh-water fish. 
 
 helu cf. hdlu. 
 
 hena S. 1. lime, iitinn hena, to burn lime. 2. a 
 lime box for use in chewing betel; hoi 
 hena holo, a gourd used for holding lime. 
 Lau fena. 
 
 henu a fresh-water cockle found in swamps, 
 shell blue inside, used to scrape the 
 charred part off sulanga and to kara 
 with. 
 
 heota'i v. i., to slander, to be jealous of, to 
 accuse of infidelity; heota'inge, v. n., 
 accusation of infidelity; heola'ini, tr.; 
 heota'inie pe'ia ola, to accuse of infidelity 
 with So-and-so. 
 
 hera a courtyard; hera honn, a congregation; 
 herai usinge, a market-place. Lau fera, 
 village; \'aturanga, S. I., vera, Wango 
 herahora. 
 
 hereho S., a hereho. So-and-so: a Wango word 
 meaning thing. 
 
 hero scraped coconut, mu hero; hero 'a'ate, 
 dregs of scraped coconut after straining 
 the milk. 
 
 herohero v. i., to be mad, out of one's mind. 
 
 hete'i hete'i maa, to fix the eyes upon; hete'i 
 maanga, v. n., a fixing of the eyes. 
 
 hetela sasa hetela, thin, lean. 
 
 he'u 1. star, hoi he' u; he' u to' oa'i he' iliu, planet; 
 mu he'u sisine, shining stars; mu he'une 
 salo, the stars of heaven; 'u'ui he'u, a 
 star. cf. 'u'u 2. he'u saisasu, U., 
 comet. Mota vilu, Maori whetii, Bou- 
 gainville Straits bito. 
 
 he'u 2 cf. hd'u. 
 
 He'u'e the hills at the head of the river 
 Walo'a'a. Little Malaita. 
 
 heulao v. i., to act the wanton, cf. ulao. 
 
 heune cf. hdu 4. 
 
 heutaa U., mara'i heulaa, to droop (of flowers). 
 
 hi tr. sufif.. lae, laehi. 
 
 hi'a U., cf. hi'e. S. 
 
 hide, hidehide v. i., to clap the hands; mao 
 hidehide, to dance to the clapping of 
 hands, not holding the dhui but with 
 dhulili on the fingers, 
 hideli tr., to hit with the hand; hideli to'oni, 
 to wash clothes by hitting them on a 
 stone. 
 
 hi'e S., hi'a U., v. i., 1. to be weary; alingada 
 e hi'e mwaanie rongo; tola hi'e, to be 
 heavy laden. 2. redup. hi'ehi'e, to be 
 pregnant; e hi'ehi'e ana a ola, con- 
 ceived by So-and-so; nikeku e hi'ehi'e 
 aku, my mother conceived me. 
 hi'e'i tr., to weigh heavily upon. Wango 
 hi'a, Niue fita, wearied; Maori hia, 
 difficulty. 
 
 hihi V. i., to crouch (of dogs), hihi lo'uloku. 
 cf. 'dhihi. 
 
 hii, hiihii v. tr., to be in a state of perception; 
 
 hil, hiihii (continued). 
 
 jwko hiie sapcku, I feel my body, I am 
 
 well. 
 hiinge'ini tr., to perceive, to apprehend, 
 
 to suspect. 
 hiinge'inila-(ku) gerund. Lau Jii; Maori 
 
 hia, wish; Niue fia, Viti via. 
 hi'ito'o U. 1. V. i., to be in pain. cf. sapehi'ito'o. 
 
 hi'ito'onga v. n., pain. 
 hi'ito'o S., adv., to excess; e pdine 'oto hi'ito'o. 
 
 it is far too big. Mota vivtig. 
 hiiwala'imoli v. i., to believe, used with poss. 3. 
 
 hii. 
 hiiwala'imolinge v. n., belief, faith. 
 hiiwala'imolila-(ku) gerund. 
 hika U., hika halo, last stage of the moon. 
 hikana cf. hike 2. 
 hike 1. a roll of cane dyed red (hikei ue), used 
 
 to make bracelets and anklets or collars, 
 
 used also to ornament spears (noma 
 
 ddiedi); nga hikei adio, a coil of banyan 
 
 creeper, 
 hike (ku) 2. prep., of, among; ngaini hikemiu, 
 
 one of you; nou ka'a Ho hikena nga ola, 
 
 I saw nothing; ngdu hikeni, to eat of it. 
 hike 3. ten, of garfish (mwanole) , hike ni i'e. 
 hiku, hikuhiku v. i., to be entangled, cf. 
 
 td'ihikiihikti. 
 hikusi tr., to wind around a thing (of 
 
 creepers); nga u-alo e hikusie, tangiad 
 
 up by a creeper. 
 hikute'ini tr., to wind around, to whip with 
 
 string; e hikute'inia i denumana, he tied 
 
 it round his waist. 
 hilehile v. i., to be wounded. 
 hili V. tr., to choose for one's own, to desire 
 
 and take; to'o hili, with poss. 2. to'o hili 
 
 nada, they alone. 
 hilisi tr., to pick, to choose, ha'ahili; lio 
 
 hilisi, to choose; lio hilisie huni hu'e i'oe, 
 
 choose her for your wife. 
 hilisila-(ku) gerund. Lau ta'ijili as to'o 
 
 hili; Florida vili, to choose; Samoa fili; 
 
 Isiiue fifili; Alotu hidi. 
 hilolo U., v., to be warped by the sun. 
 hiluhilue'i S., partic, i'o hiluhilue'i, to be 
 
 estranged. 
 hinanga U., kara ni mwane, yam pudding used 
 
 in sacrifices. 
 hinesu (ku) S., flesh, meat. Fl. vinahi. 
 hini'i adv., nearly, almost; precedes the verb. 
 
 cf. hiri'i. 
 hinoli'a U., adj., beautiful; 'osi hele hinoli'a 
 
 taha ine, how well you have done it. 
 hinou a fish-hook made of turtle shell, not 
 
 barbed: a steel hook; hinou ni 'a'ao, 
 
 hook for fishing; hinou ni semu, a hook 
 
 for deep-sea fish; hinou ni tali, hook for 
 
 deep-sea fishing; wanawana hinou, to 
 
 make turtle-shell hooks. Lau finau. 
 hinu 1. shell of shellfish; hinui hangoda, shell 
 
 of haliotis. 2. bark: hinui ue, bark of 
 
 cane. Mota vinui, skin. 3. v. tr., to 
 
 pull up the eyelid; 'o hinua maamu, 
 
 peel your eye! 
 hinuhinu eyelid, hinuhinui ma'a. cf. hiruhiru. 
 biohio U. 1. tnwahiohio, swayed, bent; tata-
 
 33 
 
 HO'ITE'I 
 
 hiohio (continued). 
 
 hiohio, to stagger. 2. twist trade 
 tobacco. 
 
 hi'olo, hi'ohi'olo v. i., to be hungry; olo aua 
 hi'olo, to be faint from fasting. 
 hi'olonga v. n., hunger, famine; hi'olonga e 
 tola, there was a famine; hi'olonga e 
 tolea hdnue, hunger was upon the land. 
 Florida vilolo, Motu hitolo. 
 
 hi'ona U. ghost, spirit. Wango hi'ona, 
 Florida vigona. M. A., p. 124. 
 
 hiri, hirihiri 1. v. tr., to lap with a string, to 
 bind. Mota lir, \'iti wiri, Samoa fili. 
 
 hiri 2. v. tr., to pay a fine for, to make atone- 
 ment for a death by violence, 
 hiritaa v. n., a fine paid; soi hiriiaa, to 
 demand a fine; hiritaaua a ola, atone- 
 ment for So-and-so. Motu liili. 
 
 hiri'i adv., nearly, almost: precedes the verb. 
 cf. hini'i. 
 
 hiro V. i., to revolve. 
 
 hirosi tr. Wango laihiro. 
 
 hiroiku n., a dove. cf. heheoku. 
 
 hirori 1. v. i., to be kinked. 2. v. i., to chatter 
 indistinctly, cf. rori 4, 'irori, kirori. 
 
 hiru 1. v. i., to be busy, engaged, to have a 
 press of work, ha'ahiru; 'ake hirti, 
 hirune 'ahe, troublesome waves, boiling 
 tide- rip; luqe'i hiru, to pretend to be 
 busy, 
 birunga'a adj., used as n, hindrance, 
 hirue'i partic, hindered; nofeo hirue'i lae, 
 
 I am hindered from going. 
 hiru'e S., hiru'a U., adj.; sae hirii'a, a mind 
 
 engaged; 'dsi ponhiru'e, raging sea. 
 hirusi tr., to get in the way of; okii e 
 hirnsia maana, the okii has got in its 
 eye: said of the migratory plover 
 (kdrikeri'ala) which arrives in November 
 at time of palolo and is found exhausted 
 in the gardens and open spaces. 
 
 hiru 2. v., to be curly, of hair. 
 
 hiruhiru U. cf. kinnhinu; hiruhiru ana maana, 
 his eyelid. 
 
 hisi U., rdi hist, a stake. 
 
 hisu 1. v. tr., to pluck leaves, to pull fruit. 
 2. U., to wean; hisu susu mwaani, to 
 pluck the breast from. 
 
 hisuhisu v. i., to be out of joint. 
 
 hite S., hita U. 1. v. i., to spHt. cf. ha'ahite, 
 •wa'ahite; hite dango, S., h.ila 'ai, U.. to 
 split firewood; hile pewa'ali, to cleave; 
 ape hile, to curtail; kala hite, to cut 
 nautilus in rectangles with notched 
 ends; 'ini hite, the thumb, used to split 
 leaves. 
 hiteli tr., opa hitcli, to cut up an animal; 
 po'o hileli, to cause to burst; tohu hiteli, 
 to cleave asunder; raa hitelia Hdu 
 Maelo. Wango hita. 
 
 hite 2. V. i., to hit, to strike: used with poss. 3, 
 e hita ana; hite tekala'ini, to strike and 
 disperse; hile meenasi, to strike and 
 break to pieces; ddu hite, to score a hit. 
 Wango hila. 
 
 hiu 1. numeral, seven; ha'ahiu. seven times. 
 Motu hilu, K'mejitu, Maori whitu. 
 
 hi'u, hi'uhi'u 2. v. i., to turn from side to side; 
 hi'uhi'u pole, S., hi'uhi'u kape, U., a 
 bird, wagtail, fly-catcher, 
 hi'une tr., to alter the position of. 
 hi'usi U.. tr., to turn, to alter the nature of, 
 
 to change, 
 hi'utana tr., to change the nature of. 
 hi'ute'ini tr., to wag. 
 
 hi'ute'i U., partic, changed, altered in 
 position, moved. Mota vusiag. 
 hi'uhi'ule adj., lo'o hi'uhi'ule, spotted, 
 hiune the seventh time, 
 ho e.xclam., used in chorus, 
 hoa, hoahoa 1. v. i., to make an incision in. 
 hoa'i tr., to cut by making an incision in. 
 hoasi tr., to cut marks upon, to carve, 
 ho'a 2. v. tr., to take aside, to separate, cf. hoka. 
 ho'ala'i partic, used as v. i., to depart, to 
 leave, cf. 'aho'a. Florida voka, sepa- 
 rate, open; Sesake qoka. 
 ho'asi v. i., to use oaths, to swear by, to curse; 
 Iw'asi sisinge'i, to clear with an oath, 
 to adjure; ho'asi sisingana li'oa, to 
 swear by a spirit. 
 ho'asinge v. n. Wango hoasi, Fagani 
 fogasi. 
 hoda, hohoda v. i., to lave the hands or face; 
 hoda maa, to wash the face; hoda 
 maanga, v. n. 
 hodali tr. 
 
 hodalila-(ku) gerund, 
 hoe exclam. 1. used to sum up a statement or 
 argument. 2. expresses disapproba- 
 tion. 3. calls the attention, 
 hoho V. i., to cut undergrowth. 
 
 hohola S., dsu hohola, to prepare a yam 
 garden, 
 hohoro V. i., to barter, to buy, to sell. cf. holi, 
 holoholo. 
 hohoronga v. n. 
 hohoto n., long wooden mortar used for pound- 
 ing yams, etc. 
 hoi 1. art. a, one, used of things spherical in 
 shape, fruit, eggs, shells; in the plural mu, 
 mwa precede hoi; probably derives from 
 hoa with genitive ». hoi dango, mu 
 hoi dango, fruit, kidneys; hoi huu. fruit 
 of the Barringtonia; hoi i'a, lioi i'e, fish; 
 hoi hue, a hen's egg; hoi knru. a ripe 
 areca nut; hoi Hie, a seed; hoi madeli, a 
 fully ripe coconut; hoi menu, an egg; 
 Iwi sehu, U., a gourd. Mota wo, Mala- 
 gasy voa, fruit. 
 hoi 2. contraction of hou 2 and locative «. hoi 
 haha, the downward side, under the 
 earth; hoi sacka. in our hearts. 
 ho'i 3. V. i., to wind. cf. 'aliho'i; ho'i ue, to 
 roll dyed cane to make hikei ue. \'atur- 
 anga hoi, to return; Florida goi, again; 
 Wango ahoi, return, 
 ho'i 4. U., V. i., to gather, collect; nnianc nga 
 rurukonilcni esi ho'i ha'aro'iau, that no 
 collection be made in my presence, 
 hoiliwo S.. houliwo U., a hill, 
 ho'itana v. tr., to alter the nature of. cf. 
 
 hu'itana. 
 ho'ite'i partic, changed, altered, cf. hu'iU'i.
 
 HOKA 
 
 34 
 
 hoka 1. to come apart. 2. to have a hole in 
 the bottom, 
 hokasi tr., to burst, to split. Florida voka, 
 to come open; Lau foga, to burst open; 
 Maori hokai, to spread out; Niue hoka, 
 to pierce. 
 
 hola 1. V. i., to spread. 
 
 holasi tr. Maori hora, mahora, spread out. 
 
 hola 2. %•. i., to spring forth in a jet. Florida 
 vora. 
 
 hola 3. V. i., to begin, ha'ahola; holai na'o, in 
 former times. 
 hola'i tr., atei ni e hola'ie, who began it. 
 hola'i partic, used as adv., precedes the 
 verb: formed j', at first, e hola'i na'o 
 'oto wau, he first led the way; noii hola'i 
 'unue, I first said it. 
 
 holaa 1. V. i., to be calm (of the sea) ; aau e repo 
 kosi holaa, when the nuts are ripe it is 
 calm weather. 2. n., a calm, hdi'holaa; 
 holaa loloweru'e, a flat calm. E Holaa, 
 a rock on the west coast of Ulawa near 
 the south cape, 
 holaasi tr., to be in calm weather, e hola- 
 asirc; Met. to be in peace. 
 
 holi, hoUholi v. tr., to barter, to buy. ha'aholi; 
 kire to'oana keni rnwala ko holie, they 
 own the girl who is being bought, 
 holinge v. n., a sale, 
 holiholinga U., n., a bought dependent. 
 honte-(ku), holiholite v. n., price, payment, 
 holilana, the price of it, its being sold. 
 Mota wol, IVIalay heli, Malagasy vily, 
 Bugotu voli. 
 
 holo V. i., to divide, ha'aholo. cf. maholo, 
 maaliholo, mouholo. holo 'ahe, to divide 
 the waves by incantation and make a 
 way for a canoe; holo onu, to divide and 
 cut short; 'ato holo, to cross over the 
 sea; Idngii holo, to break in two; 'o holo 
 onu'e qongikii hao, thou hast shortened 
 my days. 
 holosi tr. 1. to cut a piece off. 2. to cross 
 
 over; holosie 'asi, to cross the sea. 
 holosila (ku) gerund. Wango horo, to 
 cross; Mota wolos, to cut across; Lau 
 folo, Makula foro: Florida polo, when. 
 
 holosi V. tr., to appoint, to assign. 
 
 holota'ini detcrm., to make an appoint- 
 ment, to agree upon, to arrange, cf. 
 hd'iholota'i. 
 
 holoholo 1. n., interval, part, portion, thing, U. ; 
 holoholo i sapeku, S., my duty; ngaite 
 holoholo, U., a different thing. 2. 
 irregular, intermittent; mala'i holoholo, 
 intermittent fever. 3. U., v., to barter. 
 
 honi U., contraction for hoii ni, a, one, used of 
 fish; honi weieii, a bonito; honi mehu, a 
 mehu fish. 
 
 bono, hohono v. i., to shut, to shut a door. cf. 
 hd'ihonoa'i; hono sikihi, to shut off by 
 itself; hono sisinge'i, to shut out; e hono 
 sisingana, shut him in; ape hono, to 
 prevent; ddu hono, S., to hinder; noru 
 hono, to be windbound; susu hono, to 
 heal over (of a sore). 
 honosi v. tr., used as prep., to meet, opposed 
 to, over against; 'ato honosi, to oppose; 
 
 hono, hohono (continued). 
 
 hulo honosi, to close up an aperture; 
 lae honosi, to go and meet; si'o honosi, to 
 interrupt with questions; susu honosi, 
 to close in on; 'tire honosi, to oppose. 
 honota-(ku) gerund., protecting, guarding; 
 e palo honotaka, our mediator; para 
 honotaka, defend us. 
 honohonota v. n., a shutter, an obstacle. 
 Mota wono, Lau fono, Florida vongo, 
 Malagasy /owo. 
 
 honu 1. n., a turtle; honu i'e, green turtle; honu 
 hapa, hawksbill turtle; ha pa ni honu, 
 plates of turtle shell; tarihoa honu, to 
 watch for turtles on the sands, cf. 
 karenga. popo ni honu, tailpiece of 
 turtle shell used for nose-rings at Santa 
 Cruz; sii'ai honu, a summerset. Nifilole 
 fonu, Malagasy /a wo. 
 
 honu 2. v. i., to be full, ha'ahonu; honu 
 makealo, full to overflowing; ere ani 
 le'u honu, to boast; hera honu, a con- 
 gregation; i'e honu, a hundred fish- 
 teeth; honu, honu leu'ae, poro ni tolo 
 e hide 'oto pe'i oqai poo, a catch said 
 when filling a bamboo rata at a spring, 
 fill, fill quickly, a hill man has arrived 
 bearing a pig's entrails. 
 honulaa v. n., a crowd, a company, 
 honule'i partic, filled, full. Wango hoyiu, 
 honurai, Florida vonu, Motu honu. 
 
 honu 3. honu ako, to have pulmonary disease. 
 
 hoc 1. exclam., of contempt, of disbelief. 
 
 ho'o, ho'oho'o 2. v. tr., to bind, 
 ho'onga v. n., a binding, 
 ho'osi tr. 
 
 ho'osila-(ku) gerund. 
 iho'o n., a bundle. Wango hoo. 
 
 ho'oho'odara n., a wreath, a crown, cf. dara. 
 
 hoowa S., n., morning, between 8 and 10. cf. 
 hu'o 2; ddngi hoowa, the next day; ke 
 haro hoowa kd'u, as soon as it is light. 
 
 hora (ku) 1. prep., over against, in order to 
 get, for; horana i ola, over against such- 
 and-such a place; horana nga laa, what 
 for? 2. U., ha'alu horana, to swear by 
 a thing or person; 3. U., concerning. 
 Fagani fora, subject to, under the rule 
 of; horana mwa alalia, under the power 
 of the chiefs. 
 
 horaa'i v. tr., to turn round (of objects). 
 horaa'ini tr. 
 
 horahora'apu'i S., n., first fruits of nuts and 
 yams. cf. 'apu 2. 
 
 hora'i hd'ihora'i, partic, to be daybreak, cf. 
 'auhora. 
 
 horo, horohoro v. i., to beat, to strike, to kill; 
 horo 'asi, to destroy utterly; horo ni 
 loloto i purine maeta, to kill a man in 
 order that men may bathe after cele- 
 brating a death feast; horo mwamwaki, 
 to kill wantonly; horo suuhe'ini, to kill 
 out, to destroy; horo suulana, to kill 
 in revenge; horo i tala, to kill to avenge; 
 horo tata'alasi, to kill without mercy; 
 kire lahoa nana mwala e holo. 
 koronga v. n. murder, killing; koronga
 
 35 
 
 HUHUDARO 
 
 horo horohoro (continued). 
 
 maapala, murder; horonga i lalada, 
 revenge for them; horonga talaraaraa, 
 indiscriminate slaughter. 
 horotaa v. n., murder, killing. 
 horo'i tr., hii'ihoro'i. 
 
 hota 1. 'aehoia, lalaa'ehola. to begin. Mota 
 wot a. 
 
 hota 2. hota ni viwane, all the boys who are 
 eligible for ha' amalaohu; e tnou ue ena 
 ngaini ka'a hota ni mwane lo'u, e tnou 
 ana Wateha'aodo, it is still in desuetude, 
 no boys are initiated into bonito catch- 
 ing, it ceased with Wateha'aodo. M. A., 
 p. 234. 
 
 hote 1. V. i., to paddle, to row a boat (late use). 
 2. n., a paddle, an oar; hote ani henue, a 
 paddle; hole ni haka, an oar; hote 7ii 
 monaki, bone of the cuttlefish; pdlupelu 
 ni hote, handle of the paddle; tarasie 'dsi 
 ana hote, to feather the oar. 
 hotenga v. n., paddling, rowing; ani 
 
 hoteuga, by paddling. 
 hotela'ini tr., to propel by paddling, by 
 
 rowing. 
 hotela-(ku) gerund. Mota wose, Motu 
 hode, Maori hoe. 
 
 hoto n., a gourd used to hold lime for betel 
 chewing; hoi hena hoto, a lime gourd. 
 
 hotohoto 1. to shake (of gourd or bottle). 2. to 
 rattle the spatula in the lime gourd; 
 e hotohoto ana lo'u hoi sehu. 
 hoto'i, hotohoto'i tr. 
 hotohoto'i U. V. i., to swing. 
 
 hotohotomolita'a U., round in shape, cf. molt. 
 
 hoto'i to bore (of beetles or worms in wood) ; 
 hou e holo'ie, it is wormeaten. 
 
 hou 1. article, a; more frequently used in 
 Ulawa; with genitive tii contracted to 
 honi, U-; probably connected with hoi 1. 
 hou aiea, a coconut water-bottle; liou 
 kao, a bottom plank in a canoe; honi 
 mehu, a mehu fish; hoti mei, an ebb tide; 
 hou ola, a thing of a round shape; hou 
 pua, an areca nut; 7nai 7iga hou pua, give 
 an areca nut; hoiihi, a yam; hou wei, a 
 bamboo for carrying water; honi weieu, 
 a bonito. 
 
 hou 2. S., adv., down; not used of direction; 
 with locative i contracts to hoi. siho 
 hou, lae hou, to descend; hoi sac, in the 
 heart; hoi 'ana, underground. 
 
 hou 3. dry rot, worm in wood, hou e hoto'ie. 
 
 hou 4. V. i., to proclaim, to be proclaimed; 
 e hou lilikeli, hou keli, proclaimed 
 abroad, 
 houle'i partic, proclaimed, made public, 
 houle'ini tr., to proclaim, to tell out. 
 hoixle'inila-(ku) gerund. Fagani fou. 
 
 hou 5. U., dem. pron., this, these, cf. nihou. 
 laa hou, vocative jou! 
 
 houhou n., a bier. 
 
 houlaa v. n., a feast; dihi houlaa, to have a 
 feast, hou A. 
 
 houlana n., fame, kingdom; a VVango word 
 hourana. 
 
 Houlanga a proper name. 
 
 houliwo U., hoiliwo S., n., a hill. 
 
 huasa n., a crocodile. Mota vua, crocodile, 
 puasa lizard; Malagasy buaya, crocodile. 
 
 Hu'atea a rock off Cape Arona, Ulawa. 
 
 hudi 1. n., banana; hoi hudi, a banana fruit; 
 hudi lolaka, a variety with erect bunch, 
 plantain; hudi ni haka, introduced 
 banana (Musa cavendishii); hungui 
 hudi, a bunch of bananas; langisi hudi, 
 a hand of bananas; pi'e ni hudi, pi'ei 
 hudi, banana sucker; yiga hudi e mala 
 'asi'a, the bananas are rotting away 
 unpicked. Florida vudi, Viti vundi. 
 Niue fuli, Motu dui, Malagasy ontsy. 
 
 hudi 2. S., first and second days of the moon. 
 
 hudihudi n., a stripe, bruise, weal. 
 
 hudihudi'e adj., bruised (of the body). 
 
 hue S., hua U. (na) 1. article, a, one, used of 
 fruits only; huatta i'ada, the fruit of 
 their womb; huani 'ei, U., fruit; huesi 
 dango, kidney {si genitive) ; kau mei nga 
 hue, give me one. Wango hua, Mota 
 Ti'oat, fruit; Motu huahua, fruit; Maori 
 hua, Malay buwah. cf. pue. See M. L., 
 p. 71. 
 
 hu'e S., hu'a U. 2. a married woman, wife; 
 women in general in distinction from 
 mwane, male; the demonstrative na, 
 S., ni, U., may be added, a hu'ena, 
 the woman, lo'o hu'e, to be married; 
 to'o hu'anga, v. n., the being married; 
 sike hu'e, to divorce a woman; sike 
 hu'anga, v. n., divorce; e lio hunie hunt 
 hu'e nana, he chooses her for his wife; 
 lio hilisie huni hu'e i'oe, choose her for 
 your wife; hu'e kire konie mola, a con- 
 cubine; la'e hu'a saena e diena, there's a 
 good-hearted woman. 
 
 hu'e 3. V. tr., to carry suspended from the head 
 as native women do. Niue fua, to 
 carry on the shoulder; Motu huai, to 
 carry from the shoulder. 
 
 hu'e 4. V. i., to reverse; hu'e asi, to overturn, 
 
 to overthrow; hu'e hau, to dig up stones 
 
 suitable for use in cooking hdhi; hu'e 
 
 tekela'ini, to uproot and destroy. 
 
 hu'eli tr., hu'eli 'alo'ato, to wind rolls of 
 
 dyed cane, 
 hu'esi tr. 1. to reverse; hu'esi 'elinge, to 
 turn the ear to. 2. to open a native 
 oven. 
 hu'esila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 hu'eta'ini U., tr., to reverse. Niue veu, to 
 uncover; Mota sug. to dig up, uqa. to 
 lever, vul-uqa-uqa, to dig; Wango huke. 
 reverse; Florida vuka; Maori hua, lever, 
 overturn; huke, dig up; Malay bukai, 
 open; Sulu ukai; Viti tevuka, open, 
 huehue (na) fruit, mu huehuei ola, fruits; 
 
 huchuana, its fruit, 
 huhu 1. V. i., to leak, to drip, to spill out. 
 
 huhusi tr., to pour upon. Wango huhu, 
 spill; Lau fufusi, to sow broadcast. 
 huhu 2. V. i., huliu la'ola'o ana wa'i, to be in 
 
 contortions with tetanus. 
 huhu 3. V. i., to pluck, to pick off. 
 huhudaro U., v. i., to smite, strike, daro.
 
 HUHUNU 
 
 36 
 
 huhunu 1. V. tr., to poison fish with pounded 
 leaves of Barringtonia. 2. n., dynamite 
 used to shoot fish with. Mota vuu, 
 to poison fish; Efate bttnu, death; 
 Florida hunii, leaven. 
 
 huhurere'a adj., dazzling white, cf. rere'a. 
 
 hui 1. n., taro (Caladium esculentum); hid 
 kerekere, a taro shot with veins; htii ni 
 malaiva, giant caladium, the only kind 
 grown on Ulawa; nisi hui, to pull taro 
 for eating; poe hui, to pull wild taro; 
 tapali hui, to cut off the leaves of taro; 
 to'oni hui, to plant taro; 'usu hui, to 
 grate taro. 
 
 hu'i 2. S., adj., troublous, hi'u 2. U.; mu ola 
 hu'ihu'i, dangers, difficulties, hard cir- 
 cumstances, 
 hu'ihu'inge v. n., hele hu'ihu'inge, unprofit- 
 ableness. 
 hu'isi tr., to turn over, to reverse, to turn 
 toward, to change the nature of, to 
 harm; ddu hu'isi, to overthrow, to put 
 to wTong use, to bring to naught; hele 
 hu'isie nga le'ii, to err in anything. 
 hu'isila-(ku) gerund. 
 hu'itana tr., to change, to alter the nature 
 
 of. cf. h.o'ilana. 
 hu'ite'i, hu'ihu'ite'i partic, upset, undone, 
 altered, cf. ho'ile'i; e ka'a me'i ola ke 
 hu'ihu'ite'i, unchangeable; saeku e hu'i- 
 te'i, my heart is undone. Mota vusiag. 
 
 hu'i 3. v. tr., to pour water on. Mota vuvui. 
 
 hu'idada U., v. i., to be level, smooth, cf. dada. 
 
 hu'ihu'ite S., a marvel, a wonder, a miracle. 
 
 hu'ine'i S., v. tr., to warp, to wrest aside. 
 
 hulaa S., hulahula U., a spring, fountain, hulaa 
 ni wei, ivai hulahula. cf. hulehule, 
 hure'i. Florida vuravura, Mota vura, 
 Viti vure, Niue, Mao. puna. 
 
 hulaaholaa v. i., to be full (of the moon). Mota 
 vitla, moon; Malagasy volana. 
 
 hule S., hula U., v. i. 1. to arrive; hule ahu'i, to 
 come for; htde odo'i, to arrive and find; 
 hula talahi, to fail to find a person at 
 home; 'asi dodo hule i one, deep water 
 right up to shore; lai hule, to reach; 7iga 
 hale € koru hula i sinaha, the shed was 
 full right up to the door; lai hulaana, 
 till, until. 
 hule'ita-(ku) gerund., up to, reaching to. 
 ha'ahule'ita. sa'a hule'ilana ike saena- 
 naunge, never coming to wisdom, 
 huleta'ini tr., to come and seek for. 
 
 hule U. 2. to be in danger, distress; maenga 
 hulahula, U., danger, 
 hulesi tr., to be dangerously ill; e hulcsie, 
 he has a bad attack. 
 
 hule 3. a convolvulus growing on the beaches; 
 hule e 'a'a haahia taoha, the convolvulus 
 had climbed over the canoe house. 
 
 hulehule (na, ni) 1. n., husks, chaff; hulehuleni, 
 the chaff. 
 
 hulehule S., hulahula U. 2. n., water springs, 
 mu hulehule. cf. hulaa, hure'i. Florida 
 vure, Viti vure, Mota vura, Dyak pura. 
 
 hulemotaa S. v. i., to be in agony, cf. motaa. 
 
 hull 1. v. tr., to overtake, to overcome. 
 
 hull (ku) 2. S., a bed, a mat. hulite, S. 
 
 huli 3. hnli nume, S., the site of a house, house 
 plat, cf.talahuli. 'Lau fulifera, a village. 
 
 hxilihuli n., a black biting ant. 
 
 hulite (ku) S., a bed, a mat. huli 2. U. 
 
 hulo 1. n., a sponge, a towel (late use). 
 
 hulosi tr., to wipe. Samoa solo, Maori horoi, 
 Viti vulo, to strain. 
 
 hulo 2. V. i., hulo honosi, to close up an aperture. 
 
 huluhilu S., V. i., to make a sacrificial oft'ering. 
 
 hulumota'a S., adj., hairy. Mota nlui, hair, 
 Maori huru. 
 
 huna U., hjine, S. 
 
 hunata v. n., stakes driven to moor a canoe, 
 an anchor (late use). 
 
 hune S., huna U. 1. to anchor; liki hnne, S., 
 riki huna, U., to loosen mooring-stakes, 
 to get up anchor. 2. to hang up, to 
 display; hune haa, to hang up and dis- 
 play the bridal moneys at the home of 
 the bride, to conduct the initial cere- 
 mony of a wedding, 
 hunesi tr. 1. to anchor. 2. to display 
 wedding moneys. Wango huna, Maori 
 punga, anchor. 
 
 hune S. 3. a snare, a gin. lolohuna, U. lolosi 
 hune, to set a trap; toli hune, to lay a 
 snare. Wango huna. 
 
 huni (au) S. 1. dative preposition, for, to; huni 
 lu'ue mo ola ineu, to remove my goods; 
 huni lengu ha'aodohie 'aeka, to guide 
 our feet; dau toli huni, to submit to, to 
 be subject to; e hai lalamoa e mae hunia 
 Qai, four dead men for Qai to pay a fine 
 for; e ka'a hunie ike maenga, not unto 
 death; hire husingi'i hunieti, I have 
 become accustomed to it; lae huni'i, go 
 to fetch them; le'u noko lae hunie, the 
 place whither I go; lio hilisie huni hue 
 i'oe, choose her for your wife; lio huni, 
 to choose; e lio hunie huni hu'e nana, he 
 chose her for his wife; lio huni maa, to 
 exercise partiality; masi huni, to commit 
 adultery with; qdlu huni, to conceive 
 by a person; ke sdune huni ke mae, to be 
 well mashed. Mota mun, Ulawa muni. 
 2. adv., in order that, muni, U.: also as 
 an optative; huni ke lae mai, that he 
 may come, 
 hunie adv., in order that; hunie esi hule 
 'ulu 'ie, that he should be born blind 
 thus. Wango htini. ha'ihuni. 
 
 huni (ku) 3. U., skin disease, ringworm; huniku, 
 my ringworm, 
 hunila, adj., suffering from ringworm. 
 Niue matafune. 
 
 huni 4. ha'ihuni, U., hdrihuni, S., v. tr., to 
 desire, to wish for. 
 
 hunu 1. v. tr., to cut up an animal; hunu poo, 
 to butcher a pig; kira hunu poo mala 
 ideni, tomorrow they kill the pigs. 
 Malagasy vono, to kill; Borneo bunoh. 
 
 hunu 2. S., n., a mast. 
 
 hunu, huhunu 3. v. i., to poison fish with 
 Barringtonia leaves. 
 
 hunu 4. dio hunu, to swoop (of pigeons); dio 
 hunu ni sae, to be faint-hearted, to faint.
 
 37 
 
 HU UTALA 
 
 hungao-(ku) n.. brother-in-law, sister-in-law. 
 mwane or keni added for distinction; 
 hungaona, used with ro ha'i or ro ma: 
 ro ha'i hungaona, U., ro ma hungaona, S., 
 brothers-in-law, sisters-in-law. Wango 
 hungo, Lau fungo, Maori htinaonga. 
 hunge S., hunga U., many, enough, too much, 
 to abound, ha'ahunge. mu dinge hunge, 
 many da>-s. 
 hungehunga'a adv., frequently. Wango 
 hunga, Maori hunga, a company, 
 hungehunga'a S., adj., used as noun, hillock. 
 
 \\'ang() hungahunga. 
 hungu, hunguhungu 1. to bear fruit. 2. n., a 
 bunch of fruit; hnngui hudi, a bunch of 
 bananas. 
 hunguha U., v. n., a fruiting, 
 hungunge S., v. n., a fruiting; kire ko 
 m'ci'amwasu'i eni hungunge, become 
 unfruitful. 
 hunguta U., v. n., a bunch; hungulani pua, 
 a. bunch of areca nuts. Viti bunua, a 
 bunch of nuts; Florida vungu, Mota 
 rung, Samoa putiupunu, a cluster of 
 parasitical plants; Borneo biinga, flower, 
 hu'o 1. n., fishing-net, seine; hu'o ni moke, a 
 casting net; 'ato hu'o, to set a net; 'alo 
 hu'onga, a plot; e soda ana hu'o, he fell 
 into the net; tola hu'o, to set a snare for; 
 wd'i haahie ana hu'o, to draw a net 
 about. Florida vugo, Motu huo, kan- 
 garoo net. 
 n'o 2. ha'chu'o, to come early in the morning. 
 niahu'ohu'o, dawn, early morning. 
 hu'ori//jt'or/aro, a proper name, Early-afoot. 
 hure S., v. i., mwaa e hure ana, he was eaten of 
 
 «■>■ worms. 
 hure'i, hure'ihure'i 1. v. i., to gush out. cf. 
 hulaa, hulehide 2. e hure'i ta'a ana hdu, 
 to gush forth from the rock. Mota vura. 
 hiire'i 2. hure'i lade, name of a month, July, 
 huresoso n., white shell discs used in ornamen- 
 tation with haa and malo, used also to 
 finish off the ends of strings of money. 
 huri V. tr., to cut in sections; malo huri, black 
 bugles cut from a creeper and used in 
 ornament. Florida vuri. 
 hurihuri U., to wallow, of a pig. 
 huro, mahuro adj., disturbed, upset in mind, 
 hurosi tr., to upset the mind, to disturb, to 
 whirl about as surf; 'ahe ko hurosieu, the 
 stream whirls me about. 
 hiirosila-(ku) gerund, 
 huru, huruhuru v. i., to run; huru ni 'elinge, to 
 race; huruhuru mcumcuri'e, to be living, 
 hurunge v. n., running; halt ana hurunge, 
 
 foot racing; ohoa hurunge, to race, 
 hurunge'ini tr., to run and carry, 
 hurulaa v. n., a messenger, 
 huruhuru a bridge, a tree fallen over a stream, 
 
 ladder. 
 husingi v. tr., to make accustomed; kire hu- 
 singi'i hunieu, I have become accus- 
 tomed to it. 
 
 hute, hutehute S. huta U., to be born, ha'ahute. 
 e hute talaliie qongine, born out of due 
 time; hunie esi hute 'ulu' ie, that he 
 should be born blind thus, 
 hutanga v. n., birth. 
 hutaa, hutelaa v. n., generation, birth. 
 hutela-(ku) gerund , being born, birth. 
 Mota wota; Nine mafuta, emerge, 
 huto 1. cuscus, phalanger. M. A., p. 17. 
 
 Wango huto. 
 huto 2. v. i., to swarm (of ants, etc.). 
 hutohuto (na) 1. froth, foam. Wango huto- 
 
 huto, Viti vuto. 
 hutohuto 2. name of a month, June, 
 huu 1. n., a group, a bunch, with genitive t; 
 huui 'ae, excrement; huui alaha, a chiefly 
 family; huui edi, a bunch of leaves used 
 as a tabu sign; huui eu, a stool of bam- 
 boos; huu ni kana, a group of singers; 
 huui ken, branching coral; huui liie, 
 shoulder of pork; huui lume, huu lume. 
 collection of houses, village; huui sata, 
 the heel; hinii tomwaso, a thicket of 
 tomwaso bushes. V'iti vutu, plenty of; 
 Maori pu, tribe, bunch. 
 huu 2. adj., real, permanent, ha'ahuu'e. 
 awala 'oto huu, U., awala ha'ahuu, S., a 
 full ten; hdnue huu, solid land, dry land, 
 heritage; hele huu, to inherit; i'o huu, to 
 abide forever; mwado huu, the earth; 
 'oni huu 'oto ana, to be settled therein; 
 'oto huu, U., forever; te'ete'e huu, forever, 
 abiding, for good, finally. Wango 
 hnuna, real; Samoa futu, to be a long 
 time; Mota tur, real; Viti vu, bottom, 
 root; Niue fu, trunk, cause; Florida 
 puku, real, 
 huu 3. v. i., to be sad; sae huu, to grieve; sae 
 huungc, grief. Viti ku, to be angry; 
 Motu hu, to look angry. 
 huu 4. n., a littoral tree (Barringtonia speciosa) ; 
 hoi huu, its fruit; huhunu, roma, to 
 stupefy fish therewith. Mota vut, 
 Viti vutu. 
 hu'u 5. a cough, to cough. Mota vur, Viti vu, 
 
 Motu hua. 
 huuhuu to gush forth in a jet; wdi e huuhuu 
 'oto, the water spurted out; huuna wdi, 
 U., fountain head. Bugotu fuufutu, a 
 spring, 
 huuilume, huulume S., a village, cf. nume. 
 iiuuH tara'a huuilume, bum up the 
 village. 
 huule'ini v. tr., to chop down, to fell a tree; 
 
 'aihu, U., uprooted, 
 huuraro n., rainbow: if pointed at {usu'i) bad 
 
 luck results. 
 
 hu'usi, hu'uhu'usi v. tr., to detach 'oha from 
 a tree, to pluck leaves, cf. 'u'usi. 
 Wango huusi. 
 hu'utala U. v. i., to miss the mark, to fail, to 
 be in vain. lala. 
 
 209220
 
 38 
 
 i 1. prep., locative; always used before names 
 of places, also with adverbs of time and 
 direction; itei, where; i Sa'a, i hoowa, 
 in the morning; i nganile, when, with a 
 preceding c or o there is a contraction 
 to i: noko lai haka, I go abroad; lai Sa'a, 
 up at Sa'a; hai Malaii, down at Malau; 
 laelae i rodo, go until nightfall. Forms 
 the compound prepositions ilengi on; 
 isuli, according to. Used in phrases, 
 i ladoihaana, in a line with; i ladohaana, 
 thereby; * noornhaana, relying on, 
 because of. Florida i, Viti i. 
 
 i 2. prep., genitive, a variant of ni; joined in 
 pronunciation to the preceding word: 
 poloi haa, a strand of shell money; 
 qirei eu, a stalk of bamboo. Used to 
 express purpose: jioko lai leesie, I go to 
 see it. Expresses condition' e lai 'aela, 
 it is bad; e la 'oto i diana, it is good. 
 Used of continued action: hoi i'a e lae 
 mat i rarada i saint one, the fish came 
 and grounded on the beach. Used 
 after tala'ae, to begin: e tala'ai 'aela, 
 it is beginning to spoil. Follows ore, 
 to fail: melu orei lae, we almost went. 
 Bugotu i, Lau i. 
 
 i 3. instrumental prefix forming noun from 
 verb: ikeu, a crook; idenu, a baler; 
 idemu, a lime spatula, from kdu, ddnu, 
 damu. Mota i, 4; Viti i; Motu i, in 
 igui, a bundle; guia, to WTap; ikoko, a 
 nail; kokoa, to nail. 
 
 i 4. prefix to personal and demonstrative pro- 
 nouns: ineu, i'oe, inge'ie, inihou. Mota 
 i in inau; Maori i in ikoe. 
 
 i 5. U., euphonic: sdisemu, reduplicated from 
 samu, saisesu from sdsu, daidenu from 
 ddnu. 
 
 *i 6. verbal suffix, horo horo'i: forms a parti- 
 ciple, pele pele'i. Viti », Maori i {pao, 
 paoi), Florida gi. 
 
 1 7. suffixed to poss., 1. sing. 1 and 2 and dual, 
 used of many things for one person to 
 eat, moola dku'i; suffixed to poss. 2 and 
 used of many things designed for one 
 person; ndku'i, for me. Florida gi, Lau 
 gi, plural sign. 
 
 'i 8. a suffix denoting plurality, used of things 
 only; lae huni'i, go fetch them; dolali'i, 
 among them, 'i 7. 
 
 'i 9. suffixed to pers. pron., dual 1 and 2 excl. 
 iemere'i, ikara'i, U., hunireru'i. 
 
 i'a U. cf. i'e, S. 
 
 'i'aa V. i., to be lost, missing, 'ai'aa. 
 
 i'ami U., pers. pron., plur. 1 excl.: we, ours; 
 when used as subject is followed by 'ami. 
 Lau igami, Mota ikamam. 
 
 i'amu U. pers. pron., plur. 2: you, yours; more 
 general in application than i'emelu; 
 when used as subject is followed by 'amu. 
 
 i'ano adv., on the ground, down; mai i'ano, on 
 the earth; with demonstrative na added, 
 i'anona, in that soil; of direction, west; 
 haka e lai qdi 'ano, the ship went west. 
 
 I'au S., exclam. of assent. 
 
 ida U. ida 'apala, a length of money from the 
 finger tips to the opposite shoulder, a 
 yard and a quarter. 
 
 idemu n., a lime spatula, damn, idemu ni 
 loo, a lime spatula used as a dagger on 
 a person who is scared {loo) and hard 
 to get near but who is enticed by the 
 off^er of areca nut; idemu ke suu i halena, 
 the spatula shall pierce his gums. 
 
 ideni U. tomorrow; klra hiinu poo mala ideni, 
 tomorrow they kill the pigs. 
 
 idenu n., a canoe baler, ddnu. 
 
 idengi S., tomorrow, ddngi 1. 
 
 idu, idtxidu 1. v. i., to count; iduidu nume, to 
 
 gad about (Florida idu vale) ; iduidu mesi 
 
 'ei, U., jumped about on the firewood. 
 
 idumi tr., idumia one, countless (count 
 
 the sand). 
 iduniila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 iduidunge v. n., numbering, number. 
 Florida idu. 
 
 idu, iduidu 2. to be weary of a thing, to be ill 
 at ease. Florida idu. 
 
 idu 3. n., a drill. 
 
 idule'ini v. tr., to move the position of a thing, 
 to ease a burden. 
 
 'ie 1. S., demonstrative pron., this, these; fol- 
 lows the noun; adverbially used as here, 
 now, thus; hunie esi hute 'ulu 'ie, that 
 he should be born blind thus; inge'ie 
 'ie, this is he; maholo 'ie, now; ola'ie, 
 this thing; 'oto 'ie, now; 'oto mola 'ie, 
 just now. Mota ia, Bintulu ia. 
 
 i'e S. i'a U. 2. a fish, a fish (porpoise) tooth; hoi 
 i'e, a fish: mu i'e, mwa i'a, plural; used 
 metaphorically in Ulawa as an excla- 
 mation of astonishment at size, a big 
 thing, a whopper! nga i'e, 100 por- 
 poise teeth on a cord forming a unit 
 of money; hoi i'a e lae mai i rarada i 
 saini one, the fish came and grounded 
 on the beach; i'e hdu, a stone fish; i'e 
 honu, 100 fish teeth; i'e 'inoni, a fish 
 caught with a scoop net; i'e ni sane, 
 sea-bream (note); i'e ni ioli, deep-sea 
 fish; Aru ni i'e, honorific phrase of San 
 Cristoval. cf. ha'addhi. honu i'e, a 
 green turtle; nihoi i'e, porpoise teeth; 
 palapala 7ii i'a, a nose ornament of 
 shell cut in the form of a frigate-bird; 
 qd'tii i'e 4 porpoise teeth; to'o, io'oani 
 i'e, 1,000 fish teeth; waawaatani i'a, 
 pieces of fish. Mota iga, Maori ika. 
 
 'ie S. 'ia U. (ku) 3. belly, womb, 'iana, S., 'iena, 
 U., 'iana e maelo, pregnant; 'ieku e too, 
 I am sick at the stomach. Mota tiana, 
 pregnant; Bugotu tia, Maori tia, Malay 
 tia. 
 
 ie'iola v. i., to have the head thrown back. 
 
 'i'eli 1. V. tr., to plait. 2. n., a rope; radu 
 moumousie mu 'i'eli, to break the rope in 
 pieces. Lau inali, Mota tali, Maori tari. 
 
 i'emelu pers. pron., plur. 1, excl.; we, our; more 
 restricted in meaning than i'emi. 
 
 i'emere, i'emere'i pers. pron., dual 2. excl.; 
 we two, our; when used as subject is 
 followed by tnere or mere'i respectively; 
 ola i'emere'i, a thing belonging to us two.
 
 39 
 
 IKDRE 
 
 i'emeru, i'emeru'e S., same as i'emere. 
 
 i«emi pers. pron., plur. 1. excl.; we, our; more 
 
 general in meaning than i'emelu; when 
 
 used as subject is followed by 'emi. 
 i'emiu U., Mwado'a dialect for i'amti. 
 i'emu U., Mwado'a dialect for i'amu. 
 'ienini demonstrative pron., this; poro 'ienini, 
 
 this man; adverb now, 'olo niola 'ienini, 
 
 just now. 
 i epi (na) beside (of things only); i epine or a, 
 
 i epine lalo, i epiepi ana, contiguous to. 
 
 Maori apili, Malay apil, to place side 
 
 by side. 
 ihaha 1. adv., below, underneath; mai ihaha, 
 
 on earth. 2. prep, with suffixed pro- 
 noun (ku); ihahamu, underneath you; 
 
 ihahana salo, under the sky. Lau 
 
 fafa. haha. 
 ihaho 1. adv., over, above; ilengi ihaho, in the 
 
 sky above. 2. prep., with suffixed 
 
 pronoun (ku); ihaJiomu, above you, 
 
 over your head. haho. 
 ihe-(ku) brother-in-law, sister-in-law; in Ulawa 
 
 the personal article coalesces, aiheku. 
 ihana ro mwaihana, S., ro aihana, U., two 
 
 brothers-in-law or sisters-in-law. Motu 
 
 ihana, brother-in-law. 
 ihei 1. interrog. adv., where, ilei, S. 2. 
 
 interrog. pron., which, what, whether, 
 
 of two; 'o'a sare ngdu ihei, what will 
 
 you eat; with article ngaihei, viwaihei, 
 
 who. Mota a-vea. 
 ihei 3. S., the monitor lizard (Varanus indicus). 
 iho'o n., a bundle; with genitive i, iho'oi ola, a 
 
 bundle of goods, ho'o. 
 ihu (ku) 1. n., hair, feather; with genitive i. 
 
 waraihu, U. ihui menu, birds' feathers; 
 
 ihui qe'u, hair of the head; 'olo koii'e 
 
 ihune, shave his head close. Vatur- 
 
 anga ivu, Motu hui. 
 ihu 2. v. i., to cut, to chop down; ihu uweha, to 
 
 cut bamboos for fishing-poles. 
 'i*i 1. V. tr., to judge. 
 'i'inge v. n., judgment. 
 •i*ila-(ku) gerund. 
 'i'i 2. a bird, a swift; 'i'i ko he'isu'u, the swift 
 
 flits from tree to tree; qaateru a 'i'i, a 
 
 large snail. 
 •i'i 3. ha'a'i'i, to set a high price. 
 'i'ile'i partic, loud, resounding; ngara 'i'ile'i, to 
 
 cry aloud. 
 'i'iloha U., to hesitate, 
 'i'ite 1. n., a round basket plaited of a coconut 
 
 leaf and used for holding yams. 
 'i'ite 2. V. tr., to find fault with, to censure, 
 'i'ite'i tr., 'i'ile'i wala, to strive about 
 
 words; v. n., 'i'ile'i walanga. strife 
 
 about words. 
 'i'ite'ini tr. 
 
 'i'ite'imla-(ku) gerund. 
 ika'elu U., pers. pron., plural 1. incl.: we, ours; 
 
 more restricted in meaning than iki'a; 
 
 when used as subject is followed by 
 
 ka'elu. Wango igau. 
 ikao 1. the bottom, at the bottom, kao. 2. 
 
 with suflixed pronoun (few), under a 
 
 person, U., under a thing. 
 
 ikara, ikara'i U., pers. pron., dual l.incl.: we 
 two, ours; when used as subject is fol- 
 lowed by kara or kara'i. Mota ikara 
 excl. 
 
 ike S., negative particle following closely the 
 negatives ka'a and sa'a; when preceding 
 word ends in a, ike is joined in pro- 
 nunciation, e ka'a olaike, there is 
 nothing at all; e ka'a hunie ike 
 maenga, not unto death; e ka'a wala- 
 'anga ike nga 'inoni, it is not the voice 
 of a man; nou ka'a manala'ie ike, I do 
 not know; sa'a hide'itana ike saena- 
 naunge, never coming to wisdom. 
 
 ikeke 1. Ulawa, Qaloto, adv., beside, outside, 
 used of persons and things; kira konia 
 ikeke, they excommunicated him; paro 
 i keke, alongside. 2. with suffixed pro- 
 noun (^m), prep., beside, alongside, of 
 motion toward, to; i kekemu, U.. » siemu, 
 S., to you; i kekena lala, beside the path. 
 3. adv., behind; lio ikeke, look behind. 
 Lau gege. 
 
 ikereru'e S., ikireru'i U., pers. pron., dual 3, 
 they two, their; when used as subject 
 is followed by kereru'e or kireru'i. 
 
 ikeu S., ikau U., n., a stick with a hook, a crook 
 with which to twitch off fruit and leaves. 
 kau 1. 
 
 'iki, 'iki'iki 1. to knock with the knuckles. 2. to 
 beat a wooden drum with a spathe of 
 sago palm. 
 'ikinge v. n. 
 'ikingi tr. 
 
 'ikila-(ku) gerund. Florida gidigidi, Mota 
 ni^tgi. 
 
 iki'e S., iki'a U., pers. pron., plural 1. incl.: we, 
 ours; more general in meaning than 
 ikolu, etc.; when used as subject is 
 followed by ki'e or ki'a. Florida igita. 
 
 ikira'elu pers. pron. plureil 3, they, theirs; more 
 restricted in meaning than ikire; when 
 used as subject is followed by kira'elti. 
 
 ikire S., ikira U., pers. pron., plural 3: they, 
 theirs; used also as meaning "and the"; 
 hahira diana ikire nga muini lo'ii ka'a 
 diana, on the good and the bad. Araga 
 ikera. 
 
 ikire'i U., as ikira, but not used of persons; 
 ikire' ini, those are they. 
 
 ikireni U., as ikira, but not used of persons. 
 
 ikireru'e S., pers. pron., dual 3, they two, 
 theirs; when used as subject is followed 
 by kireru'e. 
 
 ikolu S., pers. pron., plural 1, incl.: we, ours; 
 when used as subject is followed by kolu. 
 
 ikoro, ikoro'i U., pers. pron., dual 3, they two, 
 theirs; when used as subject is followed 
 by koro, koro'i. 
 
 ikule 1. ashore; ta'i ktile, on tlie shore; lai kule, 
 to go up ashore. 
 
 ikule 2. V. i., to hiccough. 
 
 ikule'i partic, disturbed in mind; sacna e 
 ikule'i, his mind was upset. 
 
 ikure S., pers. pron., dual 1, incl.: we two, ours; 
 when used as subject is followed by 
 kure.
 
 I LADOHAANA 
 
 40 
 
 i ladohaana S., thereby, cf. lado. 
 
 i lado'ihaana S., joining onto it, in a line with. 
 
 cf. lado. 
 ilala v. i., to take an augurj-, to test a path by 
 using dracaena leaf {'apai dili) in 
 hdhuio'o. Lau inala, Wango irara, to 
 perceive. 
 ilalo adv., within, inside; in Uiawa ku is suf- 
 fixed, but for reasons of delicacy Sa'a 
 prefers the poss. 3, ilalo aku. paro ilalo, 
 on the inside; ilalo aita ynu 'inoni, in 
 man. 
 ila'o adv., in, inside; used also with suffixed 
 pronoun na, ni; ila'o i'ola, in the canoe; 
 paro i la'ona, U., on the inside; ila'oni, 
 plural, used of things only; ila'ona 
 ma'usu, within the forest, la'o 3. 
 lie 1. V. i., to produce fire by rubbing a stick 
 in a groove; He dunge, a stick of hard- 
 wood is rubbed quickly to and fro in a 
 groove made in a piece of soft wood, 
 dust accumulates at the outer end of 
 the groove and soon begins to smoulder, 
 the dust is transferred to a piece of 
 coconut husk which serves as tinder 
 {hehe) . 
 ile 2. U., n., one, thing or person; the articles 
 nga and mwa are prefixed and coalesce, 
 ngaile, nga tnwaile; He inau, my one, 
 mine; ile keni, female; ile mwane, male; 
 ile uritaha, what one; mwanganga ni ile, 
 a few persons; ta'e 'enita ile, just a few. 
 ile 3. n., Pandanus odoratissimus: hoi 'He, its 
 
 fruit. Mota gire. 
 'lie 4. stone axe. Lau kila, Florida kila, Motu 
 Ha, Alu, Shortland Islands, kilifela, flint. 
 ilehu U., adv., here; paro ilehu, over here; 
 with demonstrative na, ni, added; ile- 
 huna, ilehuni, there, in that place. 
 Idhii 4. 
 ile e ilele malo, to gasp, to pant. 
 ileli U., v. tr., to distinguish. 
 ilenimwa'e, ileilenimwa'e v. i., to rejoice. 
 
 ilenimwa'enga v. n., joy. mwa'e 1. 
 ilengi 1. adv., above, on top, sky, heaven, 
 ashore, inland; ilengi ihaho, in the sky 
 above. 2. prep, with suffixed pronoun 
 (ku)\ ilengiku, on me; e loho ilengine, 
 he swooped down on it; ta'e ilengine, 
 mount up on it. 
 ile'u S. adv., here; with demonstrative na 
 added: mai ile'u, this way; ko nisi 'olo 
 ile'u, this is the boundary; He'une, there; 
 hd'i le'une, down there, le'u. 
 ili 1. adv., precedes verb; merely, only, barely: 
 uri 'o ka'a 'am'amasie kalemu ana 'o 
 ili ta'e, are you not sorry for your son 
 in that you alone are mounted? 
 ili 2. V. tr., ili mango, to draw in the breath. 
 ili 3. n., swordfish: an imitation is made of wood 
 and is used as a receptacle for dead 
 bodies. M. A., p. 261. 
 ilisi S., V. tr., to choose. Wango irisi. 
 'ilisi'e S., adj., separated; 'ilisi'e 'omu, ye by 
 
 yourselves. 
 iloilo'a n., a large red parrot, the female of 'a'a. 
 New Guinea electus. 
 
 ilolo 1. n., a bowstring, ilolo ni pesi. 2. U., 
 
 v. tr., to string a bow, kira ilolo past. 
 ilu U., v. i., to sup; ilu, piinga, to sup yam soup. 
 cf. inu. 
 iluhi tr. 
 imaa n., turtle-shell barb tied on the bonito 
 
 hook {pasa). maa. 
 i maana prep., on account of; i maana nga ta'a, 
 
 wherefore, fnaa. 
 'ime n., the bears-paw clam (Chamasp.); la'o, 
 a frontlet carved therefrom; 'ima awa, 
 U., yellow in color; 'ima erete'a, U., 
 white clam; 'ima piilu, U., dark in 
 color; 'ima susu, U., a clam difficult to 
 detach; 'iina sustdu, U., a clam easily 
 detached. Mota gima, Maori kima. 
 imiimi n., a root; with suffixed pronoun na, ni, 
 
 imiitnine dango, root of a tree, 
 ina'o adv., before, formerly; 'eta itia'o, to be 
 in the lead: with 'oto 1., 'oto ina'o, for- 
 merly; with suffixed pronoun, ina'oku, 
 before me; ina'ona mu maholo, in former 
 times, na'o. 
 ine 1. V. i., to take root (of yams, etc.); esi kele 
 
 ine, it has just taken root. 
 ine 2. U., demonstrative pronoun, that; mwai 
 lehu ine, those places; 'osi hele hinoli'a 
 taha ine, how well you have done it. 
 Bintulu ina. 
 inehu'i v. tr., to wrap up a parcel in leaves, to 
 
 wrap up food in leaves for the oven, 
 inemae 1. v. i., to be an orphan, to be bereft 
 of parents. 2. n., an orphan. Lau 
 inemae. ine 1. 
 inemauri 1. v. i., to rule, to govern. 2. n., a 
 
 ruler, ine 1. 
 ineu S., inau U., pers. pron., sing. 1, 1: used as 
 subject only and followed by fiou, S., 
 and nau, U.; ile inau, my one, mine; 
 Mota inau, Florida inau. 
 ini 1. S., n., a person, one (thing); nga and mu 
 may be prefixed: ngaini, muini; ini ineu, 
 my one; ini mwane, male; ini keni, 
 female; iyii itei, what one; ini ni Sa'a, 
 the Sa'a man; e ro ini, two things; ini 
 qaarongoisuli e ka'a liuta'ana ini ha'au- 
 suli, the disciple is not above his master; 
 nga hai ini, a length of bamboo; ngaini 
 ta'ane, yes, there is one; muini ineu, my 
 ones; mwamwangaini, some odd ones, 
 one here and there, 
 ini 2. n., a sore under the foot, pitted, with hard 
 
 coating, 
 ini 3. U. (Su'uholo dialect), demonstrative 
 pron. follows noun, that. Plorida ini, 
 Malay ini. 
 ini 4. U., prefix to pronouns, inihou, iniparo, 
 
 iniwau. cf. ni 4. 
 'ini 5. V. tr., to pinch, to pluck leaves, to crop 
 with the fingers; 'ini reko, to pluck 
 hibiscus; 'ini kite, thumb, used for 
 pinching off leaves, etc. Mota gin; 
 Mao. kini, pinch; Motu gini, thorn. 
 inie-(ku) U., sister, brother; the personal 
 article coalesces, ainieku. Florida Una, 
 mother, 
 inihou U-, demonstrative pron. this, these;
 
 41 
 
 IPE 
 
 inihou (continued). 
 
 adv., here; 'oto inihou, now; 'oto mola 
 inihou, just now. 
 'ini'iniqaa U., adj.. that has not had young 
 
 (of animals), 
 iniparo U., demonstrative pron., that, those; 
 
 adv., there. 
 'Inoni n., man, human being, ha'a'inoni. 
 ro 'inoni, voc. you two (of husband 
 and wife); ro 'inoni ineu, my parents; 
 dsu nani 'ittoni, of work not faithfully 
 done; i'e 'inoni, a fish caught with kdlu; 
 i'emi mil me'i 'inoni, we humble people; 
 Halo ana inu 'inoni, in man; e ka'a 
 •walana ike nga 'inoni, it is not the 
 voice of a man; ki'iki'i ni 'inoni. a 
 dwarf; Iduleunilana vga 'inoni, orna- 
 ments of men; manalana viu 'inoni, mu 
 rnanata'i 'inoni. the nature of men; 
 i viatolai 'inoni, among men; ngeitei 
 'inoni, what man? o/ju 'inoni ohu sae, 
 many men, many minds; qd'uli 'inoni, 
 the name of a certain spear, man's head; 
 a qd'uqcsu 'inoni, a policeman; qera- 
 qeraha ana niu 'inoni, exceeding many 
 people; ride ni 'inoni, a dwarf; ri'iri'i ni 
 'inoni, a dwarf, a great number of men; 
 ia'ena nga 'inoni, every man; ta'ewau 
 inu 'inoni, the common people. Wango 
 noni, Florida linoni. 
 'inoninga U., v. n., to'o 'inoninga, possessing 
 friends. 
 iniwau U., demonstrative pron., that; adv., 
 
 there. 
 inu, inuinu 1. to drink; inu 'aela, not potable; 
 tale'i inu mola'a, just drink without 
 price. 2. to be drowned, 
 inunge v. n., drinking. 
 inuhi tr., ha'iniihi, to give to drink. 
 inuhila-(ku) gerund. Mota un, Motu inua, 
 Maori inu, Malay minum. 
 i noruhaana S., trusting in, relying on, through. 
 i nunuhaana S., through, by, because of. 
 i nganite S., i ngenita U., adv., when; 'olo i 
 
 nganile, when. Mota a ngaisa. 
 inge'ie, inge'i S., inge'ia U., pers. pron., sing. 3; 
 he, she, it, his, her, its; used as subject 
 only and followed by e. Mota ineia, 
 Florida anggaia. 
 inge'ieni U., as inge'ia. 
 
 'i'o, 'i'o'i'o 1. v. i., to sit, to live, to dwell, to 
 be; 'i'o hiluhilue'i, estranged; 'i'o huu, 
 abide forever; 'i'o kd'u, wait, to stay a 
 while; 'i'o konilo'o, rest assured; 'i'o 
 loosi, to await; 'oke 'i'o kd'u loosieu, 
 wait a while for me; niwala ko 'i'o loosi 
 kire lo'oana keni nnvala ko holie, the 
 party waiting, they own the girl who 
 is being bought in marriage; 'i'o mama- 
 nuto'o, to be at peace; 'i'o viatnaicare, to 
 be in safety; 'i'o vianire'i, to live 
 orderly; 'i'o pe'i rae, the mourning before 
 burial; 'i'o pe'i siike, sat and begged; 
 'i'o rd'irehi, stay under the lee; 'i'o 
 raqasi, to sojourn; 'i'o rarao, to be stuck 
 tight; 'i'o rditle'i, humble; e 'i'o sis- 
 ingeku, stood in front of me; hai dango 
 
 To, 'i'o'i'o 1 (continued). 
 
 e 'i'o sisinge'i, the tree stood over 
 against; 'i'o susu, to continue in one 
 stay; 'i'o suu'i, to be present with; e 'i'o 
 lohune, he was his own master; 'i'o loli, 
 to be quiescent; 'i'o to'o, to be fixed, 
 'i'onga v. n., way or manner of life; rara- 
 tnaanga ana 'i'onga tata'ala, rebuking be- 
 cause of evil ways. 
 'i'ola-(ku) gerund., behavior, 
 'i'osi tr., to dwell in (country), ha'a'i'osi. 
 'i'ota'i V. i., to set about a thing; 'i'ota'i 
 rongo keninga, to set about inquiring 
 for girls as wives, 
 'i'ota'ini tr., to set about doing. Viti tiko. 
 'i'o 2. U., exclam., who can say, I don't know, 
 i'oe pers. pron., sing. 2. thou, thine; when used 
 as subject is followed by 'o. Florida 
 igoe, Maori ikoe. 
 'i'oha, 'i'o'i'oha v. n., station, place; with 
 suffixed pronoun (ku), 'i'ohana. his 
 place. 
 'iola 1. canoe, 'iola 'ato'ato, a new canoe on a 
 money-seeking voyage; 'iola e qa'a 'oto, 
 the canoe is cracked; 'iola la'o, canoe 
 inlaid with la'o; 'iola raku, canoe seating 
 four; 'iola sarasara, bonito canoe, inlaid 
 with reoreo; ddu 'iola, to build a canoe; 
 ddu 'iolanga, v. n., canoe building: the 
 canoes are all plank built and have no 
 outriggers; 'ahe e lomosie 'iola, the surf 
 buffeted the canoe; ana rao 'iola i qalo- 
 qalo, on the right side of the ship; ila'o 
 'iola, in the canoe; tna'ahu mala 'iola, 
 to fast, lit., to sleep canoe fashion; tnoro 
 tdria paro 'iola i 'esi, you have launched 
 the canoe yonder into the sea; ni'i 'ae 
 la'o 'iola, to board a canoe; ro 'iola ko 
 sama, the two canoes keep abreast; toli 
 'iola, to steer for, to lay a canoe on her 
 course. 2. metaphorically, a village; 
 'tola 'i'emelu, our village, cf. na'oni'ola, 
 purini'ola. 3. a tree used to make 
 planks for canoes. Lau ola, Florida 
 tiola, Wango ora. 
 iolaha v. i., to be disturbed in mind, excited, 
 i'omolu pers. pron., plural 2, you, yours; more 
 restricted in meaning than i'omu; when 
 used as subject is followed by molu. 
 i'omoro, i'omoro'i pers. pron., dual 2, you two, 
 yours; when used as subject is followed 
 by moro, moro'i. 
 i'omoru'e S., pers. pron., dual 2, you two, 
 yours; when used as subject is followed 
 by 'omoru'e. 
 i'omu pers. pron., plural 2, you, yours: more 
 general in meaning than i'omolu; when 
 used as subject is followed by 'ointi. 
 i'amu, U. Lau igamu. 
 ioo V. i., to curdle, of coconut milk brought to 
 the boil; the milk is boiled in the half 
 shell (teu) placed on embers. 
 ioqo V. i., to be dense (of smoke). 
 ioroha U., prep., underneath; tnai iorohana, on 
 
 the earth. 
 ipata S., hole where pigs wallow, upela, U. 
 ipe V. i., to wallow (of pigs), lataipeipe.
 
 IPEIPA 
 
 42 
 
 ipeipa U., pipe (English). 
 ipelu S., ipalu U., ipeipelu v. i., to fight, to 
 make war; ipelu eni heu, to fight with 
 stones. 
 ipelunga v. n., fighting, 
 ipoipo'ala U., adj., muddy, 'ala S. 
 ipu n., a pool of water in a hole in a tree, 
 ipuri adv., behind; prep., with suffixed pron. 
 {ku) after; / purine maholo, after the 
 time, ptiri. 
 iqe 1. a lake. 2. calm water inside a reef. 
 nerevere ni iqe kittiwake of the lagoon. 
 ireki n. 1. tongs of bamboo for removing hot 
 stones from the fire in cooking. 2. a 
 constellation, the Southern Triangle. 
 rdki. 
 ireune S., prep., beside, used of things; ireune 
 
 wai, beside the water. 
 'iri'o n., porpoise; porpoises are hunted and 
 the teeth (nihoi i'e) form one of the 
 currencies of the Solomons. Lau kiri'o, 
 Mota ririgo. 
 'iro, 'iro'iro 1. to look at, to look for, to see; 'iro 
 
 keni, to look for a wife. Mota tiro. 
 'iro 2. 'iro ni sato, drought. 
 'Iro 3. the district on the hills on the west side 
 
 of Mara Masiki Channel. 
 'iro'iro 1. a pool among rocks used as a mirror. 
 
 2. a glass (late use). Mota tironin. 
 'iro'iroa'i'e S., adj., reflecting like a mirror, 
 
 glassy. 
 *irori n., a parrot (Lorius cardinalis). cf. 
 hirori, kirori. taka 'irori, proverbiallj', 
 of confusion of voices, 
 'iru, 'iru'iru 1. v. i., to blow (of wind). 2. n., 
 wind. 
 'iruhi V. tr., to blow on (of wind). Florida 
 guri. 
 i saa-(ku) S., not used in sing. 1 and 2, where 
 the form i sie is used instead; at the 
 house of, with, to; i saada'elu, at their 
 house, at home, 
 isi, isiisi 1. to curse, to use defiling words about. 
 isiisinge v. n., cursing. 
 isila-(ku) gerund. 
 isi 2. isi ta'a, S., isi taha, U., to come out, to 
 emerge. 
 isita'anga, isitahanga v. n., ha'aisita- 
 'anga'ini. 
 isi 3. ha'aisi, adv., at all. 
 i 8ie-(ku) at the house of, with, to. cf. i saa. 
 noil lae mai i siemu, I have come to you. 
 i sinaha, i sihana, S., adv., outside the house, 
 isipuri v. i., to be last, 
 isuisu 1., V. i., to run along on top of a wave 
 
 (of a canoe), cf. tataisuisu. 
 isuisu 2. v. i., to play at cat's cradle. 
 
 isuisunge v. n., cat's cradle, 
 isuisu 3. U., isuisu ni 'ei, a splinter, 
 i su'e adv., exterior to, on the outside, 
 isule'i, isuisule'i partic, unstable, moving, 
 isuli 1. adv., accordingly, after, alongside, by. 
 cf. luluisuli. hele isuli, do according to; 
 lio isuli, watch; rongo isuli, to be 
 obedient to; si'o isuli, to follow the 
 footsteps of; sulu isuli, to obey. 2. 
 prep., with suff. pron. {au), after, 
 
 isuli (continued). 
 
 according to; hele isulieu, copy me. 
 3. U., prep., of motion toward. 4. nono 
 isuli, a strong-smelling herb. 
 
 ite 1. U., one, another: nga is always prefixed, 
 the plural article mwa is used of persons 
 only, ngaile ola, another thing, some- 
 thing else; ngaite laa, another person; 
 7iga m'ivaile 'inoni, certain persons. 
 
 ite 2. a round basket made of plaited coconut 
 leaves for holding yams. 
 
 'ite 3. V. tr., to find fault with, to reject. 
 Wango ila, to reject. 
 
 itehula- S., with poss. 3: because of, through 
 the agency of. itehulaana a ola, because 
 of So-and-so; itehulaamu, through thine 
 agency. 
 
 itei 1. S., interrog. adv.: where. U., ihei. 
 2. interrog. pron., which, what, whether 
 of two; itii itei, which one; 'oko sare 
 ngdu itei, which will you eat. 3. in 
 phrase nge itei ue ena, that is just it. 
 Mota vea. Nine fe. 
 
 iteitana S., one, any: used with negative verbal 
 particle ka'a, sa'a. e ka'a iteitana 
 ngaini, there is not any one; iteitana nga 
 ola sa'a diana, nothing will be good. 
 Mota isei. 
 
 ito 1. orchid. 2. bunch of money, ito ni haa. 
 
 ito 3. v. tr., to offer, to make an offering to 
 ghosts. 
 
 itoli n., a shell ornament stuck in the tip of the 
 nose, the man-o'-war hawk is carved on 
 the projecting end, which is turned up 
 to represent the neck and breast of a 
 sea-bird, i 3. 
 
 iwe'ite S., adv., the day before yesterday; 
 i we' ite wau, three days ago. i 1. 
 
 i welita U., adv., the day after tomorrow, cf. 
 wait, i welita poo wau, three days hence. 
 
 ka pron., plural 1. inch: suffixed to nouns and 
 denoting possession; nitnaka, our hands. 
 
 ka'a S., negativ^e verbal particle, used of both 
 present and past time; ka'a balanced 
 by wa with ke is used as the negative 
 correlatives neither, nor. 'omu ka'a 
 manata'inie wa 'omu ke leesie, ye 
 neither know him nor have seen him; 
 nou ka'a manata'ie ike, I don't know; 
 e ka'a lae, he did not go; e ka'a ola, there 
 is nothing; nou ka'a ola, I have nothing; 
 melu ka'a ola ni ngaa, we have no food; 
 ka'a equates with kaka. cf. Mota te, 
 tele. Maori ka, Mota ga 4; Lau ka, 
 future particle; Tolo ke, negative 
 particle. 
 
 kaakae U., child, baby. Wango kaakae. 
 
 ka'alawa v. i., to be listless, inert, cf. lalawa; 
 sapeku e ka'alawa, my body is listless. 
 
 kaata cart (English). 
 
 kae 1. V. i., to pluck; kae 'asi, to pluck out. 
 
 kae, kaekae 2. U., v. tr., to deceive; lopo'i kae, 
 to deceive. 
 kaenga v. n., deceit.
 
 43 
 
 KAO 
 
 kae, kaekae 2 (continued). 
 
 kaengaha v. n. (double noun ending), deceit. 
 
 kaesi tr. 
 
 kaeta'ini tr. (Qaloto dialect). 
 
 ka'elu 1. U., pers. pron., plural 1, incl.: we, 
 more restricted than ki'a in meaning; 
 with future particle 'e, ka'elu, contracts 
 to ka'el'e. ka'eka'elu, come on, let us 
 be off; ka'el'e lae, let us go. 2. pers. 
 pron., plural 1, incl., suffixed to nouns; 
 'amaka'elti, our father. 3. U., pers. 
 pron., plural 1, incl., suffixed to verbs 
 and prepositions; e sdunika'elu, he 
 beat us. 
 
 kahite S., uwerikahite, rags. 
 
 kahu cf. vtakahu. 
 
 ka'i contraction of kd'u i; 'o lae ka'i lei, where 
 did you go to. 
 
 kaka v. i., to be torn, to be split, makaka. 
 kakasi tr., to split. 
 
 kakahite v. i., to gape open, to split, kahite. 
 
 kakahu U., exclam. of astonishment at some- 
 thing of great size; kakahu ni ola, a 
 monster! 
 
 kakahuru S., v. i., to be taken by surprise. 
 ha'akakahunc. 
 
 kakalihe n., a guarding, a guard, kali 1. 
 
 kakalo v. i., to grope with the hands; kakalo 
 'ulu'ulu, to grope blindly. 
 
 kakalu S., n., a well of water, kilu, U. 
 
 kakamo U., v., to be stringy, of hana. 
 
 kakamu 1. v. i., to itch. 
 
 kakamu 2. n., with genitive ni; fringe, skirt. 
 
 kakamiml n., an armlet of shell. 
 
 kakapoo n., a strong-smelling herb. 
 
 kakata n., a handle; kakatai hen, an iron rod; 
 with suff. pron., kakatana, its handle. 
 Mota kaka, to stretch out the hand 
 and catch hold. 
 
 kakau S., v. i., to shout, to cry aloud. 
 
 kakau'e adj., prickly, kdu 1. 
 
 kakawe (na) n., tentacles of octopus, cf. 'ahe 3. 
 Mota gave, a crab, so named from its 
 claws; Motu gave, tentacles of octopus. 
 
 kala v. tr., to cut pieces of nautilus shell 
 (reoreo) for purposes of inlaying; kala 
 'apani paale'o, to cut nautilus shell in 
 triangular patterns; kala hile, to cut it 
 in rectangular pieces and to split the 
 ends in V-shape; kala loohe'o, to cut 
 shell hooks. 
 
 kalani a fish, i'e ni kalani. 
 
 kale 1. (ku) n., a child, a son, a daughter; with 
 personal article a kale, the son; kalena 
 a ola, son of So-and-so; kale madii ineu, 
 my beloved cliild; kale ni ulao, a bastard; 
 fndsi kaleku, my child; keni kalei Sion, 
 daughter of Sion; nga kcni mala a 
 kalemu, a girl a mate for your son. Lau 
 gale, Florida dale, VVango gare. New 
 Hebrides gari. New Britain garra. 
 cf. kele. 
 
 kale 2. ha'akale, to wait for, to watch, to keep 
 an eye on. cf. kali. 
 
 kale'a adj., heavy with child, to be in childbirth. 
 
 Ealenipa'ewa the name of a canoe in a story. 
 Little Shark. 
 
 k'ili, kakali, kakakali 1. v. tr., to watch, to 
 surround, to double a point of land in a 
 canoe, lilikeli. kali pele, to be cap- 
 sized in rounding a cape at sea; kali la'a, 
 to emerge; ddu keli, to surround; 
 kakdli he'ihe'i'oli, to take turns in 
 guarding; lili keli, to encircle; e piru keli 
 eku, surrounded me; si'o kali, to spy; 
 e kali i 'clingeku, it sounded in my ears, 
 kakalinge v. n., watching, guarding. 
 kalila-(ku) gerund. 
 kalite'i partic, ko kelite'i honotamu, round 
 
 about thee, 
 kalite'ini tr., to keep watch over, to guard. 
 Florida tali, Omba dali, round; Wango 
 gari, Mota kal, to stir, tal, to go around. 
 
 kali 2. kdli awala, a sum of money ihaa) made 
 up of ten strings {kawe) each a fathom 
 long. 
 
 kalikeli 1. adv., around. 2. prep., with sufif. 
 pron. (om), around. 
 
 kalinga (na) U., a hole; kdlingana, its hole. 
 
 kalinge S., n., a well of water. 
 
 Kalitaalu one of the legendary persons of 'Olu 
 Alalau; his drinking-place {tonohaandy 
 is at Lenga in Ulawa where he is reputed 
 to have thrust his fishing-rod into the 
 stream as it poured over the rock into 
 the sea and to have drunk the drippings. 
 
 kalite'i'a U., adj., used as noun, a strand of 
 rope; ro kalite'i'a, double thickness. 
 
 kalona U., n., garden ground on the second 
 range of hills above the beach, t kalona; 
 uhi ni kalona, yams from this region, 
 firm and hard as opposed to uhi ni qe'u, 
 which are more mealy. 
 
 kalu 1. n., a hand net tied to the four comers 
 of two bent sticks laid at right angles 
 to one another, a third stick serving 
 as a handle. 2. v. tr., to use such a 
 net in fishing from a canoe for parrot- 
 fish {i'e ni kelu), a live fish tied by the 
 gills to a stick is used as a decoy, where- 
 upon fish of the same sort come out 
 to the decoy and are caught in the net. 
 The decoy fish when not in use is kept 
 in an artificial pond {lopo). 
 kalu'i tr., to catch fish with such a net. 
 
 kalu 3. V. tr., to bend a bow. 
 
 kana, kanakana 1. v. i., to sing. 2. n., a song. 
 huu ni kana, a company of singers at a 
 dance; nga odoni kana. a song sung 
 straight through; supu kana, to com- 
 pose songs. 
 kananga v. n., a song; sulu kananga, a sing- 
 ing of songs; supu kananga, v. n., com- 
 posing songs. 
 kanali tr. Wango gana. 
 
 kao 1. n., the bottom planks of a canoe, the 
 keel. ikao. 2. with sufT. pron. 3 pers. 
 na, kaona, the under part, the hold, of 
 canoe or ship. 3. U., i kaomu, under- 
 neath you; mwalo sithu kao, a rock that 
 pierces the bottom, sunken rock; Pali 
 kao, a drop left in the bottom, dregs; 
 e ka'a lo'o kaona, bottomless. VVango 
 kao.
 
 KAOKAO 
 
 44 
 
 kaokao n., a half coconut shell used for drink- 
 ing-cup (late use). Wango kaokao. 
 
 kape hi'uhi'u kape, U., hi'uhi'n pole, S., to wag 
 the tail feathers, a bird (the wagtail). 
 Maori kapekapeta, to flutter; San Cris- 
 toval, rurukape. 
 
 kara, kara'i U. 1. pers. pron., dual 1, incl.: we 
 two. 2. sufnxed to noun or verb or 
 preposition as object. 3. sufibced to 
 noun, of us two. Wango kara. 
 
 kara 4. v. i., to scrape, to grate; kara uhi, kara 
 uhinge, yam grating; 'usu kara, to grate 
 yams for yam pudding. 5. grated-yam 
 pudding tied up in leaves; kara ni 
 'aharota, large puddings for a wedding 
 feast; kara dodo, yam pudding put into 
 bamboos and cooked over the embers; 
 kara lalemo, yam pudding without 
 coconut milk; kara ni mwane Qiinanga), 
 j-am pudding used in sacrifices. Mota 
 gar, cockle; Viti kari, to scrape; Maisin 
 kari, Niue alali. 
 
 kara'i adv., preceding the verb; nearly, almost; 
 nou kara'i lae, I almost went. 
 
 kara'ini 1. adv., as kara'i. 2. prep., with suff. 
 pron. (azt). near, close to. Lau garangi, 
 Wango garangi. 
 
 kar'e U.. contraction of kara'e, let us two; 
 kar'e lae, let us be off! 
 
 Kareimenu a fabulous person, half boy and 
 half shark, changed by his mother, who 
 cursed him because he frightened his 
 younger brother by swimming with one 
 arm bent and held at his side so as to 
 resemble a shark's fin. 
 
 karekare U., osani karekare, a cliff. 
 
 karenga v. tr., to watch for turtles coming up 
 to lay. 
 
 kari n., srjuid; used largely for fish bait; lala'i 
 keri, to entice squid with a white cowrie 
 shell ipuli) and red streamers {aleale). 
 Mota wirila, octopus, Motu urila, 
 Malagasy hurita. 
 
 Karieu a ghost. M. A., p. 261. 
 
 karikeri n., a piece, a bit. 
 
 kariheni, karihani U., adv.; 'osi keriheni 'aela 
 laa, do not be such a nuisance. 
 
 kariwaaro v. i., to take a circuitous route. 
 waaro. 
 
 karikeri'ara S., karikeri'ala U., a bird, the 
 migratory plover, arriving in November 
 at the time of the palolo worm and 
 found exhausted in the gardens and 
 open spaces, whence it is said oku e 
 hirusia tnaana, the palolo has got into 
 its eye. 
 
 karo S. 1. the side walls of a house; hdu suusuui 
 karo, cornerstone. 
 
 karo 2. v. tr., to pick canarium nuts, karoa 
 ngdli; karo siriunga, picking up cockles. 
 
 karohure S., karohure e sasa'ae i kaona 'asi, the 
 depths were troubled. 
 
 karokaro (ku) side, ribs, of persons. Florida 
 nggaro. 
 
 karu 1. V. i., used with poss. 3; to clutch, to 
 hold; kdru ana, take hold of it; more 
 common in Ulawa. 
 
 karu, karukeru 2. v. i., to scratch v/ith the 
 finger nails; mwela ko keriikeru la'o hd'u, 
 the child scratches in the umbrella: 
 when a child is sick a wizard is called in 
 and he declares that its soul has been 
 stolen away; he takes leaves of dra- 
 caena {dili) and collects the child's soul 
 with the leaves and places it in the 
 umbrella (hd'u) where it is heard 
 scratching; he shakes the umbrella 
 over the child's body, the child is con- 
 vulsed, the soul returns and the child 
 recovers, 
 karumi tr., to scratch the body when suffer- 
 ing from skin disease or itching. Mota 
 karu, Maori raku, Malay garut, Samoa 
 la'u, Giib, kori. 
 
 karu 3. v. i., to suffer from skin disease. 
 
 karu 4. v. i., to hollow out a log for a drum, 
 kdru 'o'o. 
 karu'i v. tr. 
 karu'ila-(na, ni) gerund. 
 
 karu oe U., to be foolish, to talk foolishly. 
 
 karu mehu S., to endure hardness. 
 
 kasu, ka'ukesu S., v. i., to be rotten, corrupt, 
 kasunge v. n., corruption. 
 
 kata n., a mortar for pounding areca nut, used 
 by those who are toothless {dawa). 
 
 kau, kaukeu 1. v. i., to clutch hold of (of thorny 
 creepers), to catch hold of with ikeu. 
 kdu lomolomo, the fourth finger; walo 
 kaukeu, a thorny creeper, 
 kausi tr., walo e kdusie, the thorn caught 
 him 'akalo e kdusie i'ola, a ghost clutched 
 and capsized the canoe; ikeu, a crook; 
 for twitching off fruit and leaves. 
 malakeu. Maori kakau, stalk; Lau 
 kakau, fingers; Mota kau, Malay kauit; 
 Niue keu, crooked. 
 
 kau 2. n., branching coral, mu keu; huui keu, a 
 spray of coral; uunu keu, to burn coral 
 for lime used in areca chewing. 
 
 kau 3. cow (English). 
 
 ka'u 4. adv., follows verb, (a) forms a pre- 
 terite, nou lae kd'u, I went, (b) at the 
 beginning of a sentence it directs 
 attention, and generally it makes speech 
 less abrupt; kd'u, neke leesie, please let 
 me see it; i'o kd'u, stay a while, wait; 
 ka'u mei nga hue, give me one (fruit) 
 please; kolu ke'u, let us be off; konia 
 kd'u, wait, tarry a while; 'oke lae kd'u, 
 you had better go; 'omu ke mala rnwela 
 kd'u, just become as little children; lio 
 kd'u, behold; loo kd'u, look; neku kd'u, 
 be seated; nge ke 'ue kd'une, how then 
 will it be; 'oke i'o kd'u loosieu, wait a 
 while for me; no'i kd'u, stay, wait a 
 while; lae kd'u 'ohi'i, go fetch it; taa 
 kd'u, let me see; tdhi ke'u, be off, get 
 out of the road. Wango gau. 
 
 kaule S., kaula U., frigate-bird, man-o'-war 
 hawk, nests on Bio by Ugi; on account 
 of its size and voracity and of its asso- 
 ciation with the bonito the frigate-bird 
 figures largely in the art of the southern 
 Solomons, poro kdule, mwane kdule,
 
 45 
 
 KI'E 
 
 kSule (continiud). 
 
 the male bird: term used generally in 
 speaking of the kdule; rdpu keule, to 
 tattoo the frigate-bird on the cheek: the 
 tattoo takes the form of an inverted W 
 where the two points represent the 
 curve in the wing of the bird. A 
 similar W pattern also called kd'ule i 
 found on the flat blades of clubs 
 (Guppy, "Solomon Islands," p. 74), and 
 it may be that a further explanation of 
 the device is that it is the conventional 
 representation of the kdule. Florida 
 daula. M. A., p. 126. 
 
 kaumota n., adze; in old days made of a stone 
 attached to V-shapcd handle composed 
 of a branch and part of the stem of a tree. 
 
 kauwa'a S., n., must, mildew, rust. 
 
 kawa'i S., v. tr., to hear; 'alinge ka'a kawa'ie, 
 ear hath not heard. 
 
 kawe n., a string of shell money (haa), nga 
 ka'ii'c. Wango gawe. 
 
 ke 1. S., verbal particle used of future time; 
 saline htini ke mae, pound it so that it 
 will be well mashed; ana ke ola tnivam- 
 'ivadau, if possible; ke mdni dolosie 
 satada, let him ask all their names. 
 With the negative particle ka'a: c ka'a 
 ola ke Idku, there is nothing whole; 
 e ka'a ola neke leesie, I saw nothing. 
 Used with negatives ka'a and sa'a cor- 
 related with wa in the sense of neither, 
 nor: 'omu ka'a manata'inie wa 'oniu ke 
 leesie, ye neither know him nor saw him, 
 Florida te, of present time. Lo le ke. 
 Mota le 1; Ulawa 'e. cf. ha'ike, qa'ike. 
 
 ke 2. exclam., used when one has made a wrong 
 statement. 
 
 kei 1. n., a female (of persons only), cf. mwei; 
 the personal article a precedes and de- 
 monstrative wc is suffixed; a keine, the 
 woman; mu keine, the women; keine, 
 vocative, woman; the addition of taa 
 expresses commiseration; kei la a, poor 
 dear; pdine, big. is added in the case of 
 important persons, kei taa pdine, dear 
 lady. Gilbert Islands nci, Lau ni, per- 
 sonal article preceding the name of a 
 woman; Trobriand na, Efate lei, Tangoa 
 ve. cf. mwae. 
 kei, keikei 2. U., adv., of motion from, out of; 
 e kei hei, whence; nau keikei ana, I am 
 from thence. 
 ke'i 3. S., verbal particle used of definite future. 
 cf. ke 1. ke'i lae la'ane, he will go cer- 
 tainly; ke'i 'ue 'olo, how shall it be done; 
 kire ke'i ne'i manala'a diana, they shall 
 become well trained; nielii ke'i tola 'olo, 
 are we to begin to carry? Fagani », 
 Omba, Maewo i. 
 keke 1. U., with locative i; i keke, beside, out- 
 side; koni i keke, to excommunicate. 
 2. with suf?. pron. {kn), to (of persons 
 only), Qaloto use. i kekemu, as « siemu, 
 in your house; » kekena wdi, beside the 
 stream. 3. adv., behind; lie keke, look 
 behind. 
 
 keke (continu'-ii). 
 
 kekea'i S.. kekeni U., partic. lio i kekea'i 
 
 maanga, to bear ill will, to have a spite 
 
 against, inalakeke. Wango gege, Lau 
 
 ge^e, behind; Motu kekena, by the side of. 
 
 Kela the southern end of Guadalcanar. awalosi 
 
 i Kela, the southwest wind; hana ni 
 
 Kela, a yam planted head downward; 
 
 qaso ni Kela, armlet of dyed grass. 
 
 kele, 'ele U. 1. adv., somewhat, a httle, just 
 
 now: precedes the verb, esi kele ine, it 
 
 has just rooted; esi kele loto, just washed; 
 
 kele tne'i langa, it lets up a little. 2. 
 
 adj., small, httle: precedes the noun; 
 
 kele mwau ineu, ray little boy; kele 
 
 mwela, little child; kele me'i ola, a little 
 
 thing; kele poo, a little pig; a kele ola. 
 
 young So-and-so. (Trobably connected 
 
 with kale.) Wango gere. 
 
 keli cf. kdli. 
 
 kelu U., contraction of kira'elu, used as subject 
 
 onlj-. 
 kemo U., v., to be straight, of hair, 
 kena'i ha'akena'i, he'asikena'i, interjections, 
 not to be used in the presence of women, 
 keneta'ini U., v. tr., to safeguard, to observe 
 and do. kinela'ini, S. 
 keneta'inila-(ku) gerund, 
 ha'akeneta'ini causative. 
 keni n., woman, wife, female: added to proper 
 names to show sex. ha'akeni. keni, mu 
 keni, vocative; keni ana a ola, such-and- 
 such a woman; nga keni mala a kaleynu, 
 a girl, a mate for your son; fc^nt ha'alu,S., 
 keni ha'olti, U., a maiden; keni ineu, my 
 dear; keni raori'i, a. virgin; keni toro. 
 the lady; keni ulao, a harlot; 'at ha'an- 
 gdic keni, ginger given to women as an 
 ordeal; hdu ni keni, a rock at Ali'ite 
 where female ghosts congregate; He keni, 
 female; ini keni, female; i'ola'i rongo 
 keninga, to set about a betrothal; me'i 
 keni reu, a lowly woman; tola keni, to 
 take a wife. Motu kekeni, Doura, N. 
 G., eneni; Rotuma heyi. 
 kere, kerekere v. tr., to incise, to draw, to 
 outline, to cut lateral marks on nautilus 
 plates. makere. Florida 7iggerc, to 
 write; Wedau teretcre. 
 kerehi, kerekerehi v. tr., to look at, to stare at. 
 kerekere 1. hui kerekere, a taro shot with veins. 
 kerekere-(na) 2. U.. used with locative ». of 
 things only; beside, by the side of. 
 i kerekerena tala, beside the path, 
 kereru'e S., pers. pron., dual 3: they two; used 
 
 only as subject. 
 kesi verbal particle: ke and si illative; nge 
 lacnga kesi lae, then the journey will 
 take place. 
 keta, ketaketa v. tr., to annoy, to provoke, 
 ketanga v. n., uproar, upset. 
 ketala-(,ku) gerund, 
 ki'e S., ki'a U., pers. pron., plural 1 incl.: we; 
 more general in meaning than kolu or 
 ka'elu; used as subject, or suffixed as 
 object to verbs and prepositions. 
 Florida gita, Malay kit
 
 lEKIE 
 
 46 
 
 kiekie S., kiakia U., a club of crescent-shape 
 
 with a point on the back. Guppy, 
 
 "Solomon Islands," p. 74. 
 ki'i, ki'iki'i (ku) 1. U., n., hand, finger, rod, 
 
 stem ; susue'i ki'i, to stretch out the hand; 
 
 ki'iki'i ni he'u, a rod of iron. 2. a 
 
 dwarf, ki'iki'i ni 'iyioni. Makura wiri- 
 
 kikin, Tavara nima-kiki. 
 kiito n., a bird, gray fish-hawk (Baza gurneyi). 
 
 Guadalcanar kiso. 
 MMri 1. n., a lettuce-leaf tree with large edible 
 
 fruits considered a cure for coughs; the 
 
 root affords the red dye used on strips 
 
 of cane (ue, aleale). 
 kikiri 2., kikiri qe'ii, a ghost. M. A., p. 261. 
 kikoa n., a bird, the black mynah. sikoa. 
 kilekile 1. n., a small parrot (Trichoglossus 
 
 massena) . 
 kilekile 2. n., a long-handled tomahawk used 
 
 for fighting, with an iron head; a Florida 
 
 word, 
 kiliqe'u 1. n., a depression in the ground, a 
 
 grave. 2. n., a pass in the hills above 
 
 Su'uholo, Ulawa. 
 kilokilo V. i., to beat the water with the hands 
 
 in sport while bathing, making thereby 
 
 a booming noise. 
 kilu U. 1. a well of water, a hole in the ground; 
 
 kilu ni wei, a water hole; kilu ni ngedi, 
 
 a pit where flints are found. Florida 
 
 gilu, grave; Lau kilugwou, grave; Wango 
 
 girii, ditch; Viti kikilo, hole. 
 kilu U. 2. contraction of kira'elu. cf. kelu. 
 kineta'ini, kinekineta'ini S., to safeguard, to 
 
 preserve, to observe and do. keneta'ini.U. 
 kineta*imla-(ku) gerund. 
 ki'oki'o n., a bird, the large kingfisher. Santa 
 
 Cruz kio, Mota sigo, Samoa ti'o. 
 kiraa for kire a, used of a company; kiraa ola, 
 
 whom do you mean, lit., they the person; 
 
 kiraa Wale, Wate and his companions, 
 kiratei interrog. pron., plural 3: who; followed 
 
 by e or kire; kiratei e lae mai, kiratei kire 
 
 lae, who went? 
 kire S., kira U., pers. pron., plural 3; used as 
 
 subject only. 
 kireru'e S., pers. pron., dual 3: they two; used 
 
 as subject only. 
 kirori n., a parrot (Lorius cardinalis), found on 
 
 the blossoms of the Barringtonia and 
 
 coconut, tamed as a pet. cf. hirori, 
 
 'irori. Cruise of the Curacoa, p. 380. 
 
 Motu kiloki. 
 kiru U., rai kiru, a yam with reddish flesh, 
 kiukiu rape n., a bird, wagtail, cf. hi'uhi'u 
 
 rape. 
 ko S., verbal particle used of general time; 
 
 si illative may be added, kosi; in cases 
 
 where a changes to e after a preceding 
 
 i or u the same change takes place after 
 
 ko. e 'ure'ure ko rarangi, he stood 
 
 warming himself; 'oto kire kosi 'unue, 
 
 thereupon they began to say it; ko 
 
 ha' ike, otherwise, else; ko urine, that 
 
 being so. Sesake ko. future particle. 
 koe, koekoe U., v. i., to make fun of; with poss. 
 
 3, to jest. 
 
 koe, koskoe (continut>d). 
 
 koenga, v. n., koengaha v. n. (double noun 
 
 ending). Wango koe, Florida koehoru. 
 koetana'a to scatter (of a flock of birds), 
 kohe, ko'ekohe as koe, in Qaloto dialect, 
 kohi adj., beautiful; e lio kohi, itlooks beautiful, 
 kohikohila U., adj., beautiful, 
 koho 1. snags, logs or branches in a stream. 
 koho, kokoho 2. v. i., to be deceitful, to deceive; 
 
 ko kokoho haahi wala, deceitful in speech, 
 kohonga v. n. 
 kohu 1. v. i., to be half grown, unripe, green 
 
 (of fruit). 
 kohu 2. U., V. i., to cut, to chop, 
 kohukohu U., kohukohu laona salo, far-off clouds, 
 koikoi U., V. i., to chew with toothless gums, 
 ko'ikori a pudding of pounded taro and cana- 
 
 rium nuts; kori. 
 koine v. tr., to adopt. 
 
 koinala-(ku) gerund, 
 koke V. tr., to hasten unduly. 
 
 kokela'i partic, flurried, hastily; nou lae 
 
 kokela'i, I came away without making 
 
 due preparations. 
 kokela'ini tr. 
 koko 1. kokoi epu, a drop of blood. Wango 
 
 kokoru. 
 koko 2. V. i., to be narrow, confined, hariko' 
 
 kosi. Mota koko, Malagasy hohota. 
 koko 3. kokoi sa'o, a frond of sago palm; kokoi 
 
 selu, needles of casuarina. 
 kokoho'a a hill, 
 kokohisi v. i., to be narrow, strait, confined. 
 
 koko 2. 
 kokohono v. i., to be black and lowering, koko 2. 
 
 salo ko kokohono, the sky is lowering, 
 koko'ie'i partic, narrow, confined, kokoi. 
 kokolo n., a large hermit crab, (Coenobita). 
 kokolu U., a coconut with hard flesh, fully 
 
 grown; hoi niu kokolu, hoi kokolu. kolu 4. 
 
 Espiritii Santo kolo, coconut. 
 kokoluta'a adj., with corners, kolu 2. 
 kokome n., round white shell armlet made of 
 
 trochus (la'o). 
 kokopa U., kokopa ni 'ei, a thin buttress on 
 
 certain trees, such as the canarium and 
 
 liki. 
 kokorako v. i., to crow (of fowls). Mota 
 
 kokorako. 
 kokoro V. i., to sink deep into, to be deep. 
 
 Mota koro, deep. 
 kokosi U., hasi kokosi, to be in distress, koko 2. 
 kole, kolekole v. i., to rattle, to rustle; hote sa'a 
 
 kole wa nga me'i ola 'erele'a ke'i i'o i 
 
 sapeka, the paddles must not rattle nor 
 
 anything of light color be about our 
 
 bodies. 
 kolokolo 1. U. v. tr., to forget, to fail to recol- 
 lect, ha'akolo. 
 kolokolo 2. n., a bird (Turacaena crassirostris), 
 
 a pigeon with a long tail and a crest, 
 
 cries at evening and morning, 
 kolu S. 1. pers. pron., plural 1 inch: we, us; more 
 
 restricted in meaning than ki'e; used as 
 
 subject, also suffixed to verbs and prep- 
 ositions as object, kolu mone, let us be 
 
 gone. Mukawa kola.
 
 47 
 
 KUI 
 
 kolu-(ku) 2. the back (of persons), the outside 
 (of things); kolune 'asi, the face of the 
 sea; wdi e lama liaahi tie kolune mwakano, 
 water covered the face of the earth; 
 kolune nime, the outside of a bowl. 
 3. the heel, kolune 'ae. Motu dolu. 
 
 kolu, kokolu 4. to gnaw, to champ with the 
 teeth. 
 
 koluhe V. n., the roof of a house, used with 
 poss. 3 ayta, koluhaana nutne. kolu 2. 
 
 koma V. i., to kick; used with poss. 3 as 
 object. 
 
 komu family, clan, sort, tribe (late use) ; in Sa'a 
 pers. pron. sing 3 ne is sufifixed; komu 
 i'emelu, our family; komuna a ola, So- 
 and-sos family. Florida komu, village; 
 San Cristoval kumu. 
 
 Komukomu n., the artificial islets of? north 
 Malaita. Florida kokomu, islet. 
 
 kone V. i., to set (of current), to carry along in 
 flow, to be in flood; kone e qera, much 
 flood- waters; ewe kone, to gather to- 
 gether (of flood-waters); wdi ko kone, 
 the river is in spate. Ambrym kone, 
 to carry. 
 
 koni, konikoni v. tr., to put, to place, to set, 
 to keep, to adopt, to endow, to receive, 
 to entertain, to nourish, koni diana, 
 to take good care of; konia kdu, U., 
 wait a while; koni i keke, to excommuni- 
 cate; indnu koni, a tame bird; hu'e kire 
 konie mola, a concubine, lit., wife enter- 
 tained merel\-; ne'i koni, to lay up in 
 store, to make provision; noko koni'o ana 
 to'olaku, I endow thee with my property; 
 'onime'i koni, to store up; si'o koni, to 
 collect together; tola koni, to receive, 
 konihe, konikonihe v. n., a servant, depend- 
 ant. 
 koiiila-(ku) gerund. Florida nggoni. Wan- 
 go goni. 
 
 konito'o adj., assured, in safety; i'o konito'o, 
 rest in safety, koni. 
 
 konokono (ku) n., throat, gullet, cf. 'ono'otio, 
 to swallow. Florida sonosono, Wango 
 gono, Ulawa tono, to drink; Mota gom, 
 to hold liquid in the mouth, gonogono, 
 hollow, with a mouth. 
 
 koo V. i., to cause to boil by placing hot stones 
 in. stone-boiling, 
 koongi tr. 
 
 kookoo a word used to deter children, probably 
 connected with Lau koo a grandfather, 
 and having to do with religious rites. 
 
 kopi S., v. i., to touch, to flick with the finger; 
 used with poss. 3 as object, e kopi eku, 
 he touched me. 
 kopi U., V. tr. 
 
 korasi 1. v. tr., to scatter, to put to flight; 
 e korasie mu tta'ona'oi mae, he put to 
 flight the ranks of the foe. 2. v. tr., to 
 pour out upon. Mota gora, to push 
 away. 
 
 kore, korekore U. 1. v. tr.. to sweep. 2. a 
 besom made of midribs of sago frond- 
 lets. 
 
 kore 3. ruru kore. a landslip, avalanche. 
 
 Korea Lama i Korea, a lake on Little Malaita 
 
 above Su'u Peine. 
 kori 1. a yam pudding, ko'ikori. 2. plug 
 
 tobacco (late usej. 
 koro, koro'i U., pers. pron., dual 3; they two; 
 
 used both as subject and as object; 
 
 koro 'a mono 'oto i Kalona, they two 
 
 live apart in Kalona. 
 koru 1. V. tr., to heap up, to be heaped up; 
 
 ha'akoru. koru dunge, to make a fire; 
 
 nga hale e korti hula i sinaha, the shed 
 
 was full right to the door. 
 korute S., koruha, koruta U., a company, a 
 
 collection. 
 koruhe'ini tr., to heap up. 
 Koru 2. a district on the hills of Little MalaiU 
 
 near Au Qe'i. 
 korukoru 1. v. i., to water (of the mouth), 
 korukoru 2. n., a piece, a morsel; nga koru- 
 
 korui niu, a piece of coconut, 
 kosi \-erbal particle of general time: ko and si 
 
 illative; 'oto kire kosi 'unue, thereupon 
 
 they began to say it; kosi mei, it has 
 
 just begun to ebb. 
 koso V. i., to drift (of a canoe). 
 
 kosola'ini tr., to be driven by a storm, to 
 
 be drifted. 
 kosu v. i., to be humpbacked, 
 kotaa V. i., to chatter. 
 
 kotaaha v. n., confusion, ve.xation. 
 kotaahi tr., to chatter and vex, to annoy. 
 
 Mota kota. 
 kou 1. clean-shaven head. cf. torokou'e. suhi 
 
 kou, to shave the head clean, 
 kou'e clean shaven; 'olo kou'e ihune, shave 
 
 his head close, torokou'e. 
 ko*u 2. adj., maimed in foot or hand, 
 ko'ukohu S., kohukohu U., with genitive t, 
 
 a piece, cf. ko'uko'u. ko'ukohui poo, 
 
 a piece of pork, 
 koukou 1. V. i., to gargle; koukou wei, koukou 
 
 'est, to gargle with sweet water, with 
 
 salt water, 
 koukou 2. with genitive li, ni. cf. poupou 2; 
 
 koukouli 'ae, S., koukou ni 'ae, U., 
 
 ankle, 
 koukou (na, ni) 3. n., kernel of canarium. 
 ko'uko'u 4 as ko'ukohu. 
 ko'uko'u 5 loud noise, bang, kokohu. rongo; 
 
 ko'uko'u ana, to hear a loud report, 
 ko'uko'uhe v. n., report, loud noise; 
 
 ko'uko'uha ana siute, report of the gun. 
 koukoule S.. adj., short, stumpy, 
 koulaa S., hata koulaa, noisy chattering, 
 ku 1. pron., sing. 1, suffixed to nouns and to 
 
 stem a forming poss. 3. Mota k, Poly- 
 nesian ku. 
 ku 2. exclam. of contempt. 
 ku 3. V. tr., to mock at. 
 ku 4. V. tr., to bark at; 'usu e kueu, the dog 
 
 barked at me. 
 kue S., kua U. 1. n., a domestic fowl; /;o» kue. hoi 
 
 mu-aopu ni kue, a fowl's egg. Wango kua. 
 ku'e S., ku'a U. 2. pron.. sing. 1. suffixed to 
 
 stems 'a and na forming poss. 1 and 2. 
 ku'i V. tr., to mock at. ku 3; tmcala ko ku'ie, 
 
 men mock him.
 
 KUKA 
 
 48 
 
 kuka U., 'u'e S., a mud crab, kuka fiilii. 
 
 kukao'e U.. a cry to call distant attention. 
 
 kuku U., 'u'u S. 1. V. i., to hang down, to 
 depend, ha'akuku, mwakuku. 
 
 kuku U. 2. to be bent; Jordan e kuku eliho'i, 
 Jordan was turned back. Motu 
 magugu, to crinkle; Maori kuku, pin- 
 cers; Salakau, Borneo, kuku, a claw. 
 
 kukulu U., V. i., to swing. 
 
 kule 1. n., the shore, the beach, dry land; td'i 
 kule, on the beach; lai kule, to go up 
 on to the beach. 
 
 kule, kulekule 2. v. tr., to loosen, to be loose; 
 kulaa talai heune, to loosen the teeth. 
 Viti kurekure, to wag the head. 
 
 kulu V. i., to burj' at sea, kulu rae, IM. A., p. 
 262; two canoes take the body out for 
 burial, the body is weighted with stones 
 and the knees hunched up and tied; 
 after the committal one canoe paddles 
 several times at a fast pace around the 
 spot, the other paddles out to sea taking 
 a mangite, q. v. 
 kulu'i tr. 
 kulu'ila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 kuluhi V. tr., to sustain, cf. manikulu'e; 
 e kiduliie hdnue, he sustains the land. 
 
 kumara sv.eet potato (Polynesian), called 
 occasionally uhi ni haka, the imported 
 yam; susu kumara, to plant the vines. 
 
 kumu, kumukumu 1. v. i., to punch, to beat 
 with the fist. 
 kumu'i tr. 
 kumu'ila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 kumu 2. V. i., to be blunt, dull of edge. 
 
 kumuri v. tr., to quench. 
 
 kumwe S., kumwa U., v. i., to ebb, to go down, 
 to abate, to slacken, to diminish, to wane. 
 kumwesi 1. to shorten. 2. kumivesie tele, 
 to take a stone wall to pieces. 
 
 kure, kurekure 1. v. tr., to heal sickness; 
 mivane kurekure, a witch doctor, 
 kuranga v. n., healing, curing. 
 
 kure S. 2. pers. pron., dual 1, incL: we two, us 
 two; used as subject and also suffixed to 
 verbs and prepositions as object. 
 
 kure 3. exclam., often reduplicated; kurekure, 
 come on with you, let us (two) be off. 
 
 kuru n., a ripe areca nut. cf. pue. hoi kuru; 
 metaph. a full-grown person. 
 
 kurukuru 1. U., a wood-pigeon, generic term. 
 2. S., a pigeon without wattles on the 
 beak, kurukuru ni Malau. 
 
 kururaqa U., adj., deceitful (derived from the 
 name of a person). 
 
 kusi cat (English pussy). Samoa ngose. 
 
 kute, kutekute v. tr., to shake, to move 
 violently. 
 
 la 1. v. i., to be, to go; e la 'otoi 'aela, it goes 
 (is) bad; e la 'otoi 'aela mwaani nonola, 
 it is worse than yesterday; e la 'oto i 
 diana, it is good; saeku e la 'otoi wana, 
 my heart was hot; e lai 'aela, it is bad. 
 Tolo ra, to go; Mota al; Keapara laa, 
 walk; Maisin ra», come; Trobriand la, go. 
 
 la 2. verbal suffix; apa, apala. 
 
 la 3. noun ending added to verbs, viae, inaeld. 
 
 la 4. adjective ending added to verbs and 
 participles. 7iaho, nahold, ereerea'ile. 
 
 la 5. gerundive ending, to which pronoun iku) 
 is always suffixed, sau, saunildna, 
 saunileku. 
 
 la 6. root of langa, to lift; Idngi, sky. 
 
 laa 1. noun ending, added to verbs, hou, Iioulaa, 
 honu, honulaa. 
 
 laa 2. U., a person; nga laa ni hei, who is this 
 person? vgaile laa, a different person; 
 laa hou, vocative, you; 'o si ta'ata'a, 
 laa, don't, I say; 'oto ihei, laa, where to, 
 boy. 
 
 la'a 3. adjective ending, mamaela'a. 
 
 la'a 4. U., adv. up; sulu la'a ana, lift it up. 
 
 la'alapa v. i., to complain, to moan, lapata'i. 
 
 La*alanga Alite Harbor, Langalanga, Big 
 Malaita. 
 
 la'alapasi cf. lapasi. 
 
 lada 1. V. i., to pierce, to thrust through, 
 ladami tr. 
 ladamila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 lada 2. ladaa'iiii, to bow, to bend down; e 
 ladaa'inie maana, he fell on his face, 
 ladama'i partic, headlong, prostrate. 
 Florida lada, to bend, to worship. 
 
 lade 1. lade viae, deep sea. 2. deep-water 
 anchorage at the end of a harbor, i Lade, 
 e. g., at Tawaniahia. 3. S., name of 
 certain months; hure'i lade, August; 
 okii lade, September. 
 
 lado 1. V. tr., to knot, to join, to graft. 
 
 ladoha na v. n., a joint; i lado'ihaana, in a line 
 with, joining onto; i ladohaana, thereby, 
 ladoha'ini tr., to join on. 
 ladola-(ku) gerund. 
 
 lado, lalado 2. v. tr., to recount, to tell, to 
 recite a tale; lado diena, U., to explain; 
 lado Idliheku, to make my defense. 
 laladonga v. n., story, tale, folk lore, 
 ladoha'ini tr. Florida lada. 
 
 lae, laelae v. i., to go, to come, lae mai, lae "wau; 
 to be, e lae urilaa, how is it; with loca- 
 tive i, lae i contracts to lai; kiraiei e lae 
 mai, who are coming; kiratei kire lae, 
 who went? lae hd'i'oli, to go and return; 
 lae hd'iore, to stay behind; noko lai haka, 
 I am going abroad; lai henue, to go a 
 journey; lae honosi, to go and meet; lae 
 hou, to descend; lai hule, to reach; lai 
 hulaana, till, until; lae huni'i, go to 
 fetch them; 'akc lae kd'u, you had better 
 go; nou lae kd'u, I went; lae kd'u 'ohi'i, 
 go fetch it; lae kd'u poi, come up here; 
 710U lae kokela'i, I came away in a hurry; 
 'oko lae mai 'ure itei, where are you from? 
 lae 7ndlumu, go quietly ; MgeMj nou lae mai, 
 that's why I came; lae molai rako, go 
 gently; lae mone, let us be gone; kira 'a 
 mune'i lae, were they to go; muni 'e lae, 
 go gently; muni 'e lae mai, let him come; 
 7)iuni nge'ia e lae mai, if he comes; lae 
 ohonga, to go tentatively; lae ni oraha'a, 
 to go very fast; na'a lae 'oto, I am going; 
 e lae 'oto ni mae, he went like every-
 
 49 
 
 LAMA 
 
 lae, laelae (continued). 
 
 thing; lae po'opo'oli'ili'i, to go way- 
 wardly; lae mola qalaqala, to go for 
 naught; ko lae ni ramo, he goes in his 
 might; laelae i rodo, to go till nightfall; 
 lae rorora, to go in a hurry; nge'i kc'i lac 
 ta'ane, he will surely go; nou lae takalo. 
 I am lost; lae lara'asi, to go straight c^n; 
 lai toli, to be going to fish out at sea; 
 v.uni'e hara lae, begin to go gently; 'oke 
 haro lae, go gently; v.oko hirue'i lae, I 
 am hindered from going; ka'el'e laelae, 
 let us go; le'u noko lae ana, le'u voko lae 
 hunie, whither I go; voko loona'i lac. I 
 intend going; liiqe'i lae, to pretend to 
 go; mdni vi'ilana sakanga e indni lae 
 hunieu, all power is given unto me; 
 inelii orei lae, we almost went; e tau vi 
 lae, he made to go. 
 laeha v. n., a company traveling, 
 laenga v. n. 1. a journey; maai lacnga, ?., 
 maani laenga, U., a journey; nge laenga 
 kesi lae, then the journey will take place. 
 2. laenga (kii), U., laeha (kit), S., a going; 
 laengana, his going; laehaku e 'aela, I 
 can not walk well. 
 laehi tr.. to travel through a place. 
 laeli, laelaeli tr. 1. to cause the bowels to be 
 open. 2. laeli wala, to make an oration; 
 laeli 'uialanga, oratory, address, speech- 
 ifying. 
 laelae'i partic, ere ZaeZae't, talk by the way 
 
 side. 
 laela-(ku) gerund., laelaku, my going. Lau 
 lea, to go; Mailu laea, path, 
 laha adj., big (not in common use); Su'u Laha, 
 a boat harbor south of Su'u Peine; 
 Pululaha, a harbor south of the west 
 entrance to Mara Masiki Channel, cf. 
 alaha, a chief. Mota lava, Florida haha, 
 Maori raha. 
 lahe V. tr., to praise, to extol, -paalahe. 
 lahe'a adj., praised, blessed. 
 lahela-(ku) gerund, 
 lahi, la'ilehi 1. to lay eggs. 2. v. tr., to be in 
 travail with; ko lehie eronga, in travail 
 ' with deceit, 
 laho'a adj., foggy, cloudy, 
 lahu 1. to be worn out. 2. worn out thing?, 
 mu lehui ola; mil lehuni to'oni, ragged 
 clothes. Lau lafu, Wango rahu, old; 
 Florida ravu. 
 IShu 3. V. i., to blow a conch shell. 
 
 lahula-(ku) gerund., Idhulana 'ahuri, the 
 sound of the conch. 
 lahu U. 4. n., place; ildhuna, ilehuna, there; 
 mwai lehu ine, those places. Sa'a le'u, 
 Florida lexu. 
 lahute'i U., panic, prostrate. 
 lai 1. contraction of lae i: e lae Id'i Sa'a. he 
 went to Sa'a; noko lai haka, I am going 
 abroad; noko lai leesie, I go to see it; lai 
 loosi haa, to go and inspect the money 
 given for a bride; noko lai Ion. I go 
 bonito fishing; 2. e lai'acla; cf. la 1. 
 la'i 3. participial ending, honu honule'i. 
 
 Ift'i 4. suffix to verb, used intransitively; to 
 
 make it transitive ni is added, Id'ini. 
 lil'lni tr., suffix, ta'e, la'eld'ini. 
 laka to play (of shoals of bonito); mu sen ko 
 
 laka, the bonito play in schools. 
 lakali U. , to have sexual intercourse, ha'ilakali. 
 lakata'ini U., v. tr., to open the eye. 
 lakelake U., tdu lakelake, used with poss. 3. to 
 
 give oneself airs, 
 lakoma'ini S., v. tr., to be parallel to, to lay 
 on longitudinally, rakoma'ini. U. hele 
 lakoma'inie, hold it to, together with, 
 on it. 
 lakoma'i partic, laid out along, longitudi- 
 nally; rdpu lakoma'i Pe'i po'upo'u, to 
 crucify; 'itri lakoma'i, to tread in the 
 steps of. 
 laku, la'uleku v. i., to be whole, entire, safe. 
 hd'ileku, sapeldku; e ka'a ola ke Idku, 
 there is nothing whole. Lau lau. 
 lalahu'e adj., worn out, old. lahu. 
 Jala'ini v. tr., to stretch out. Wango rarasi. 
 lala'i partic, outstretched. 
 lala'inila-(ku) gerund. 
 lalako U., nanako S., v. i., to be sticky, to stick, 
 lalamoa n., a person killed by violence, a 
 victim; momo lalam.oa, armlet, cf. 
 momo; lalamoa mduri, a captive; poo ke 
 ne'i lalamoa ko 'olisie 'oto a mwaena, a 
 pig is the victim in place of the man; 
 e hai lalamoa e mae hunia Qai, four dead 
 men for Qai to pay a fine for; taho 
 lalamoa, to pay for a man killed by 
 violence. 
 lalani U., lalani uala, to make an oration, to 
 
 speechify, 
 lalaunge'i S., 'unu lalaunge'i, to tell beforehand, 
 lalawa 1. v. i., to be lazy, ka'alawa. 2. U., to 
 be unwilling; luqe'i lalawa haahi, to give 
 a feigned excuse, 
 lalawanga v. n., laziness. 
 lalawasi U., v. tr., to reject, to neglect 
 through laziness. 
 lalawa 3. n., the marrow; inu lalawai ola ana 
 
 suli, the marrow of the bones. 
 lalemo 1. without coconut milk; kara lalemo, 
 yam pudding without the milk. 2. 
 unfermented. 
 lalo (ku) 1. n., inside, within; 'oto wdi lalo, 
 inside; lalona e 'aela, it is bad inside; 
 lalona e u-aawaa, nothing inside it; 
 laloi ha'a, within the garner; laloi suli, 
 within the bones. 2. U.. laloku, my 
 stomach, my insides. 3. ddu lalo ana, 
 to be immersed in, to be plunged into. 
 Mota lolo, Motu lalo, Wedau ano, pith; 
 Wango raro, Gilberts nano. 
 lalo 4. U., n., a garden; lalo indu, my garden; 
 «■ epina lalo, bordering on the garden; 
 'atoni lalo, to lay out a garden, 
 lalo'a adj., roomy, spacious. 
 Laloi Su'u (ht., in the Su'u) Mara Masiki 
 
 Channel, which divides Malaita. 
 lama 1. v. tr., to cut up trees, to cut felled trees 
 into billets convenient for burning; lama 
 tali, to free a tree of creepers; met., to 
 free persons.
 
 LAMA 
 
 50 
 
 lama 1 (continued). 
 lamasi tr. 
 lamata'ini U., tr. 
 
 lama 2. n., a lake, hdi lama; lama i Korea, Lake 
 Korea, Little Malaita. Mota lama, 
 open sea; Borneo lama, lake. 
 
 lama 3. v. i., to spread over, to cover; wai e 
 lama haahi ue kolune mwakana, the 
 water still covered the face of the earth. 
 
 lama '-. hanuelama, S., da'ilama'a, U., peace. 
 
 lami n., a phase of the moon; hdu ni lemi, full 
 moon; lo'ohunga lemi, S., full moon; 
 lemi mwaa, U., full moon. 
 
 langa 1. v. i., to moderate temporarily (of rain) ; 
 n., a spell between the showers, ha'a- 
 langa; U. la'a up. n., kele me'ilanga, it 
 lets up a little. Lau lalanga, dry; 
 Mota langa, to lift; Viti langa, Samoa 
 langa, Niue langa, Mao. ranga, lift. 
 
 langa 2. /la'a^awga, to expose to the air in order 
 to dry. 
 
 langa'a, langalanga'a adj., up, on high, clear; 
 hele langa'a, hele langalanga'a, to hold 
 up conspicuously. Mao. rangai, raised. 
 
 Langalanga a village on Big Malaita where 
 shell money is made. 
 
 langi ha'aldngi, a house on piles; ilengi, sky, 
 heaven. Mota lang, wind; Maori rangi, 
 sky; Salakau, Borneo, angin, wind. 
 
 langilengi'e adj., aloft, lifted up. langi. Fate 
 langilangi, proud. 
 
 lango n., a fly; lango rae, bluebottle fly. Mota 
 lango, Maori rango, Gilbert Islands 
 nango. 
 
 langu. V. i, to pluck up; huni lengu ha'aodohie 
 'aeka, to guide our feet; langu Iwlo, to 
 break in two. 
 langu'i tr. Wango rangui. 
 
 la'o 1. nunula'o, stinging-nettle tree, ntmu 4. 
 
 la'o 2. in, inside; with suffixed pronoun na\ 
 locative i may be prefixed, cf. lalo \. 
 la'o i'ola, in the canoe; la'ona nime, in 
 the bowl; hai la'ona, wai la'ona, within, 
 inside; ni'i 'ae la'o i'ola, to board a 
 canoe; kohukohu la'ona salo, far-off 
 clouds. 
 
 la'o 3. cone shell, trochus; a forehead ornament 
 of trochus or tridachna shell, it is cir- 
 cular or oval and incised with the device 
 of a frigate-bird, the hair is threaded 
 through a small hole in the la'o, which 
 then hangs on the side of the forehead; 
 semicircular pieces of trochus shell 
 inlaid upon the sides of large canoes; 
 i'ola la'o, a canoe thus inlaid; armlets 
 (kokome) are cut from the trochus. 
 Florida lago. 
 
 la'ola'o liuhu la'ola'o ana wd'i, to be contorted 
 with spasms of tetanus. 
 
 la'ongi S., la'oni U., v. tr., to step over, to 
 cross over. 
 la'ongila-(ku) gerund. Mota lago, Viti 
 lako, Motu lao. 
 
 lapasi, la'alapasi v. tr., to attempt a thing. 
 Wango raba. 
 
 lapata'i \. v. i., to complain, to moan; noko 
 lapata'i ulo 'olo, I complain in mourning. 
 
 lapata'i, la'alapata'i 2. v. i., to be concerned 
 
 about, to endeavor, la'alapa. 
 lapi v. i., to change shape, to change appearance 
 
 (of ghosts); e lapi ana pa'ewa, he 
 
 changed into a shark. 
 laqa 1. bracken. 2. I Laqa, a district on the 
 
 hills above Sa'a on the ridges below 
 
 'ano mola. 
 laqi ointment, coconut oil for anointing, laqi 
 
 ni su. 
 laqitaa U., an oven of food, 
 lasu 1. to be aged, pdipeilesu'a. 2. used a3 
 
 an endearing term to a young boy, 
 
 anglice "old man." 
 lau, lauleu 1. v. i., to snatch; Idu 'ae, be quick, 
 
 quickly; 'aka Idu, to pull out violently. 
 
 2. to defend, to help; lau haahi, to make 
 
 a defense in words. Mao. rau, catch, 
 lauhi tr., to defend, to succor; Iduhi ola, to 
 
 help; Iduhi olanga, v. n., succor. 
 lauliila-(ku) gerund. Wango rau. 
 lau 3. V. tr., to weed. 
 liiuhi green snail shell (Turbo petholatus); suu 
 
 leuhi, to dive for the shell, 
 lauleu 1. to be quick. Idul. 2. quickly. Lau 
 
 loulou, Wango raurau. 
 lauleu'a U., adj., quick, fast. 
 launa U., v. i., to be speechless, to lose one's 
 
 voice in sickness. 
 launa'o v. i., to go before, 
 launi, lauleuni 1. v. tr., to adorn. 2. bodily 
 
 ornaments, mu leuni. 
 launihe (ku) bodily ornaments. Iduniheku. 
 lauleunita-(ku) U., v. n., ornaments. 
 
 Idideunilana nga 'inoni, ornaments of 
 
 men. 
 launga'i U., to occupy first, to be the first 
 
 to live in. 
 lauwanga S., the firmament, open space of 
 
 heaven, maalau. 
 lawa 1. spider's web; used as bait and made to 
 
 skip on the surface of the sea (lilie'i) at 
 
 the tail of a fish kite (sa'o) to catch 
 
 garfish (m-dianole). 2. a spider. Mota 
 
 marawa, Viti lawa, net; viritalawalawa, 
 
 cobweb; Visaya lawa, cobweb, 
 lede U. 1. V. tr., to break, ha'alede, malelede; 
 
 lede ola, to be mischievous; lede 
 
 olanga, mischief. 
 ledela-(ku) gerund. 
 Lede 2. a boat harbor on Little Malaita north 
 
 of Roasi Bay. 
 ledi, leledi 1. v. tr., to refuse, to examine and 
 
 reject, maleledi, hd'ileledi. 
 ledila-(ku) gerund. 
 ledi U. 2. V. i., to ask, to question; soe ledi, to 
 
 question. Lau ledi. 
 leesi, leeleesi S., v. tr., to see; noko lai leesie, 
 
 go to see it; kdu neke leesie, please let 
 
 me see it; nou ka'a to'ohuunge'i leesie, 
 
 I surely did not see it; na ni leesie palonga 
 
 aku, and saw my works; e ka'a ola neke 
 
 leesie, I saw nothing; 'omu ka'a mana- 
 
 ta'inie iva 'omu ke leesie, ye neither 
 
 know him nor have seen him. 
 leesila-(ku) gerund, 
 lehu, lahu U., le'u S. 1. place; 2. thing: the
 
 51 
 
 LILIKI 
 
 lehu, lahu 1 (continued). 
 
 tlemonstrative ni may be added; lehuna 
 qa'ike, not that; mwai lehu raro, open 
 plains, glades. Florida levu, portion, 
 side. 
 
 lehu 2. sun lehu, a kind of arrow. 
 
 lei, leilei S., v. tr., to judge, 
 leinge v. n., judgment. 
 leila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 lekoleko v. i., to hang down, to trail on the 
 ground. 
 
 leko'i U., to bark (of a dog). 
 
 leku cf. Idku. 
 
 lele V. i., to squint; maana e lele, he squints. 
 
 leledi cf. ledi. 
 
 lelenga-(na) clear, unimpeded (of speech or 
 hearing); ka'a rongo lelengani, not to 
 hear plainly; 'unu lelengana, to speak 
 clearly. 
 
 lelengana U., drowsy; to'o lelengana, not 
 aroused from sleep. 
 
 Lenga a village on the west coast of Ulawa, 
 i Lenga. 
 
 leleu V. tr., to carry off, to abduct. 
 
 lemi cf. Idrni. 
 
 lengi, iangi (ku) top, above, on; with locative t. 
 lii 6. lengine hd'u, on the top of the 
 rock; ilengi, heaven, sky; ilengiku, above 
 me; po'oilengi, U., south; qd'i lengi, 
 east or south. 
 
 lengu cf. Idngu. 
 
 leo a tree (Hibiscus tiliaceus, Pariti tihaceum) 
 with yellow flowers, the bast is used as 
 cord; uhi leoleo, a variety of yam. 
 
 lete 1. V. i., to be firm in opinion or in state- 
 ment; 'unu lete, to affirm; ne'isae lete, 
 to be set in intention, 
 letehi tr., to affirm. 
 letehila-(na, ni) gerund. 
 
 lete 2. V. i., to be scared, wild, to scent danger. 
 ha'alele. 
 letehi tr., to punish, to castigate, ha'alelehi. 
 
 le'u S. 1. place. 2. thing. 3. piece, part. 
 4. with t sape, 'olo may be added: le'u 
 i sapeku 'olo, my duty; le'u noko lae ana, 
 le'u noko lae hunie, whither I go; le'u 
 nou saaie nou saaie, what I know I 
 know; le'iine nou daa 'olo, I did that 
 already; ere ni le'u honu, to boast; hele 
 hu'isie nga le'u, to err in anything; mii 
 le'u e niwadau, places easy to traverse; 
 le'une e na'onga 'olo, the place is quite 
 abandoned; po'o ni le'u, partly; nga 
 po'o ni le'u, a piece; le'u talaku, my 
 place; wit le'u talahuliana, his wonted 
 place. U., Idhu, Florida levu. 
 
 leu hd'ileu, to snatch, to be violent, leleu. 
 
 leuni cf. Iduni. 
 
 le'uqala S., a deserted place, qala. i'o ni 
 le'uqala, to be deserted, alone. 
 
 11 1. genitive particle, a variant of "» used in 
 certain compounds, hd'ulihanc, Qd'nli- 
 mwaa, maalinnualo, 'dili'apaa, koukou- 
 li'ae. Epi ri, Alite Malaita, It. 
 
 11 2. verbal suffix, lae laeli. 
 
 lidu, lllldu V. i., to crawl, to get along on all 
 fours. 
 
 li'e 1. n., ginger, given to women in ordeals 
 
 ('ai ha'angdu keni). Florida ria. 
 li'e 2. V. i., to change shape, to throw back, of 
 
 trees, e. g., oranges. V'iti lia, to trans- 
 form, 
 li'e 3. ha'ali'e, to cook, to get a meal ready, 
 li'eli'a'a adj., indistinctly, confusedly, li'e 2. 
 
 ngara li'eli'a'a, to give out an uncertain 
 
 note. 
 lihu, lihulihu v. i., to travel along the coast in 
 
 a canoe, to go by sea as opposed to liu 
 
 i henue, go by land, 
 lihunge v. n., a going by sea. 
 lihue'ini tr., to convey a person in a canoe. 
 
 Florida lilihi. 
 lihue'ini v. tr., to borrow or lend possessions, 
 lii 1. V. tr., to make qaso, threading the money 
 
 {wili haa), and making the ornaments; 
 
 to lace. 
 li'i 2. V. i., to be out of joint (of limbs), 'aeku 
 
 e li'i. 
 li'ite'i partic twisted (of ankle), 
 li'isi beyond, likisi. lae li'isi, to go beyond, 
 
 to exceed, to outstrip; talo lili'isi, at 
 
 irregular intervals. 
 li'ite- cf. likile-. beyond, on the far side of; 
 
 po'o wan li'itetmi,on the other side of thee, 
 liki, liliki, likiliki 1. v. i., to leap, pola likiliki. 
 
 2. to be nervous; saeku e liki, I was 
 
 nervous. 
 liki 3. riki U., liki hune, to pull up the mooring- 
 
 stakes of a canoe, to get up the anchor 
 
 (late use), 
 liki 4. a tree, rosewood, the branches live when 
 
 planted, the trunk has buttress flanges 
 
 ikokopa) . 
 likisi v. tr., to go beyond, to cross, to outdo, 
 
 to transgress; likisi to'i, a mouse. 
 
 Florida lilinggi, to border on, to pass 
 
 by; Nguna lingiraki, to leave, to 
 
 abandon. 
 likimaa-(na) adv., certainly, undoubtedly. 
 
 likimaana 'olo; lisimaana, U. 
 likitaa glandular swelling in the armpit and 
 
 groin; to have such swellings. 
 likite-(ku) beyond, on the far side of; po'o hao 
 
 likitemu, on the other side of thee. 
 lili 1. V. i., to change, to move about, ha'alili. 
 
 lili 'epule, to be changed into blood; lili 
 
 keli, to encircle; lili qana, to jibe a sail, 
 
 to tack (of a canoe); hdu lili qana, the 
 
 boom of a sail. 
 mi 2 (ku) back teeth. 
 lili 3. liliheu, lilikeli. 
 
 lili'a'a adj., racked with rheumatic pains. 
 Uli'e rheumatic pains, lili. 
 lilie'i V. i., to cast for garfish (mwanole) with 
 
 a rod and line, using spider web (lawa) 
 
 as bait, the teeth of the fish becoming 
 
 fast in the web; hdu ni lilie'i, a rock 
 
 from which men cast for garfish, 
 liliheu stone walls of taoha or of toohi. si'o 
 
 liliheu, to collect stones for a wall, 
 lilikeli v. tr., to encircle; adv., encircling, kali, 
 liliki a mousetrap made of a hollow bamboo 
 
 and a noose hung in front of it, a spring 
 
 trap, liki 1.
 
 LILISI 
 
 52 
 
 lilisi 1. talo lilisi, to offer a certain proportion 
 as a sacrifice, lilisi 2. tola lilisi, to walk 
 about, lili 1. 
 
 lime S., lima U., five: in pronunciation lima, 
 U., tends to approach nima, hand. 
 limana fifth. 
 
 ha'alime five times. Mota limwa, five; 
 Maori rivia, hand. 
 
 lingi, lingilingi v. i., to pour, maliyigilingi. 
 lingisi tr. 
 
 lingisila-(na, ni) gerund. ^Mota ling, Maori 
 ringi. 
 
 lio 1. V. i., to look to see, to be awake, to be 
 careful, ha' alio, lio dhu'i, to protect; 
 lio dlieli, to look about one; lio haha- 
 'itelili, to distinguish; lio hahuroto, to 
 gaze, to see clearly; lio ha'itale, U., to 
 look for in vain; nou ka'a lio hikcna nga 
 ola, I saw nothing; lio liilisi, to choose; 
 lio hilisie himi hu'e i'oe, choose her for 
 your wife; lio kuni, to choose: e lio 
 hunie huni hu'e vana; lio huni maa, S., 
 to exercise partiality; lio isuU, to watch, 
 to take care of (late use); lio kd'u, 
 behold; lio keke, to look behind; lio 
 i kekea'i maanga, to bear ill will, to have 
 a spite against; e lio kohi, it looks beau- 
 tiful; lio maai, U., to permit; lio maaila- 
 'ini, to view with favor; hire ka'a lio 
 mdngitii, they saw none of it; lio i 
 ngaei maa, lio i ngaena maa, to look 
 askance at, to envy, to be jealous of; 
 lio i ngae maanga, jealousy; lio odo'i, to 
 find; lio qd'tdunge'ini, to see indis- 
 tinctly; lio qeru ngudu, lio qeru 'upu, 
 to grudge, to hate; lio saai, S., lio sae, 
 U , to perceive, to recognize; lio sae 
 to'o, to favor; lio tala, to take care, to 
 beware; lio talahi, to look for in vain; 
 lio tale, to fail to see; lio tataileii, to 
 appear beautiful; lio to'o, with poss. 3, 
 to find; lio wasawasa, to see indistinctly. 
 lioha-(na) S., liota-(na) U., v. n., looks, 
 appearance. Mota ilo, to see. 
 
 li'o 2. v. i., to hang oneself, ha'ali'o. Mota 
 ligo, Motu rio, Maori niko, to form into 
 a bight. 
 
 li'oa S., n., spirit, ghost. M. A., pp. 136, 260: 
 the word is li'oa and not lio'a; the mean- 
 ing is rather spirit than ghost, though 
 undoubtedly both meanings appear; 
 there may be a connection with U. 
 hi'ona. ho'asi sisingana li'oa, to swear 
 by a spirit; ngeitei li'oa, what spirit? 
 ngoria Li'oa, to quench the Spirit; 
 nanamanga Para'itana mu li'oa, power 
 over the spirits; iiraa'i, to make an 
 offering to the spirits. 
 
 lisi U., nisi, S., v. tr., to cut off a piece or sec- 
 tion. Wango risi, to shave the head. 
 
 lisimaa-i'na) U., as rikimaa. 
 
 lite (na) n., seed, kernel, hoi lite. 
 
 liu, liuliu v. i., to come, to go, to pass by, to 
 ply about, to become general, hd'iliu, 
 liuta'a. liu i 'est, travel by sea; liu i 
 henue, travel by land, take the upper 
 road, ant. hatale; liu hono, to intervene 
 
 liu, liuliu (continued). 
 
 (of time); ngaini sa'a liu ha'ahireru'e, 
 none shall pass in front of them (and 
 overcome them) ; jnu dinge hunge e liueu, 
 many days passed over me; liu takalo, 
 to take a wrong path; liu tarau, to con- 
 tinue; tala ni liu, path to travel by. 
 Wango rill, Samoa liu, to turn; Florida 
 mill, to change; Mota riu, to move feet 
 or legs; Nguna liu, excessive; Viti liu, 
 to exceed; Mao. riu, to pass b^-. 
 
 liuliu adv., about, to and fro; e tola liuliu, it 
 has become general. 
 
 liuliune v. tr., to turn over, to reverse, nd 4. 
 
 liunge V. n., a common complaint, a plague. 
 liunge ni maelaa. 
 
 liuta'a S., liutaha U. 1. v. i., to be beyond, to 
 be excessive, used with poss. 3. muini 
 liuta'ana a mwane 'ie e qao'i ne, more 
 than those which this man has done; 
 ini qaarongoisuli e ka'a liuta'ana ini 
 ha'ausuli, the disciple is not above his 
 master. 2. adv., excessively, exceed- 
 ingly. 
 
 liwe S., liwa U., a cave. Lau liqa. 
 
 liwo hoiliwo, S., houliwo, U., a hill. 
 
 loa 1. S., V. i., to be big, to be too big. 
 
 loa 2. the heavens; apai loa ta'au, the heavens 
 above. Bugotu tnaaloa. 
 
 lo'a 3. adj., cracked. 
 
 lo'a 4. S., the name of several months; lo'a 
 madala, May; lo'a mali'e, April; lo'a 
 maraniarawdi, lo'a wdi mweiniwei, 
 February; lo'a wdi peine, March. 
 
 loamena S., v. tr., to patch, to mend, to darn; 
 a patch. 
 
 lodo 1. to conceive a child: of the child, to be 
 conceived, nga mwela e lodo, the child 
 is conceived. 
 lodo'i tr., to imagine, to conceive a thought. 
 
 lodo 2. v. tr., to carve, to construct. 
 
 lodosae v. i., to ponder, to conceive in mind. 
 lodo'i. 
 lodosaenga v. n., plan, meditation. 
 
 loha'ini, loloha'ini v. tr., to lay up in store, to 
 put by. 
 loha'inge v. n., something put by, stored, 
 
 cold food. 
 loha'i v. i. 
 
 lohe 1. v. i., to sail. Wango rohe. 
 
 lohe 2. to fit a bowstring to a bow. 
 
 lohe 3. to mark out a yam garden; lohea hohola, 
 he marked out a garden. 
 
 loho, loholoho 1. to fly, to swoop; met. of 
 words, to reach; e loho ilengine, he 
 swooped down upon it; walaku e loho 
 i saena, my words reached his heart. 
 hdu loho, a boat harbor south of Port 
 Adam; mwakana loho, dust. 
 lohosi tr., to cause to fly. Wango roho, 
 Florida lovo, Mota rowo, Bougainville 
 Straits, lofu; Motu roho. 
 
 loho 2. (ku) ke sulu i lohona, i lohomu, be pleas- 
 ing in his sight, thy sight. 
 
 lo'ilohi n., charcoal. 
 
 lo'ilohi'e adj., black with charcoal, soiled. 
 
 lo'ilosi n., a sponge, lost. Florida loilosi.
 
 53 
 
 LO'U 
 
 loka n., gall, figures in folk lore, the hero throws 
 gall in the eyes of his enemies. 
 
 loke n., the lamprey, found under rocks near 
 the shore. 
 
 loko 1. V. tr., to gather together, ha'aloko. 
 2. to agree, loko pe'i, to agree with. 
 lokongT V. n., friendship. 
 lokota V. n., a bundle; lokotai sa'o, a bundle 
 of sago leaves. 
 
 lokoloko adv., altogether. 
 
 lokoqaio n., a belt. 
 
 loku, lo'uloku V. i.. to be bent, bowed, doubled 
 up; 'ae loku, halt, maimed in the feet; 
 hihi lo'uloku, to crouch (dogs). 
 lokune tr., to bend, to double back; 
 e lokunaa nime, he clenched the fist. 
 Niue loku, Mota lokua, to fold up. 
 
 lola V. i., to be great, mighty; walana e lolo, his 
 word is mighty. 
 
 lolata n., courtyard; rara haahie lolala inge'ie, 
 guards his house. 
 
 lole V. i., to be confused, dazed; ere lole ana 
 ma'unge, to talk confusedly from fear. 
 Maori rore, intoxicated. 
 
 lolo 1. V. i., to bend; lolo hapa, to bend turtle- 
 shell, 
 lolosi tr., lolosi hune, to set a trap, lolosi hapa. 
 lolota'i partic, bent down, bowed. 
 lolosila-(ku) gerund. Wango rosi. 
 
 lolo 2. n., red ants, sugar ants, lolo polali. 
 Viti lolo. 
 
 lolo 3. V. i., to be abundant (of herbage), to 
 cover over (of creepers). 
 lolo 4. luhe lolo, to clear away creepers. 
 
 lolo'a U., n., a thicket; lolo'a ni 'ei, a dump of 
 trees. 
 
 loloha'ini cf. loha'ini. 
 
 lolohuna U., n., a snare, a gin. lolo 1, hune 3. 
 
 lololo n., a swamp in which sago grows, lololo 
 ni sa'o. 
 
 loloma'ini v. tr., to dip; loloma'inie nime, to 
 dip the hand. 
 
 lolomi V. tr., to grudge, to withhold; hele 
 lolomi, to keep for oneself. 
 
 lolongo n., mud, swamp, lololo. 
 
 lolou V. i., to resound. 
 
 lomolomo kdu lomolomo, the fourth finger. 
 
 lomosi V. tr., to buffet; 'ahe e lomosie i'ola, the 
 surf buffeted the canoe. 
 
 loo 1. V. i., a shortened form of Ho to look, loo 
 'aela, to be immodest; loo diana. to look 
 good; loo kd'u, look! loo la' a, to be 
 immodest, to offend against propriety. 
 
 loo 2. V. i., to be frightened, to be on one's 
 guard, to be suspicious; idemu ni loo, a 
 line spatula for one who is scared: when 
 a man is on his guard (loo) and can not 
 be ambushed and killed he is won over 
 by false protestations of friendship and 
 offers of areca (damulaa), then as he sits 
 chewing the quid (dmusi) he is stabbed 
 with a large spatula (idemti). 
 loo'i tr., to take counsel, to consider. 
 
 ha'aloo'i. 
 loo'inge v. n., plan, intention, 
 loona'ini tr., to deliberate about, to intend, 
 to plan. 
 
 loo 2 (continued). 
 
 loona'i v. i., to plan; noko loona'i lae, I 
 
 intend going, 
 loona'inge v. n., plan, meditation, mae- 
 loonga. Wango ro. 
 looloo'a adj.. scared, 
 loohi, looloohi v. tr., to see, to look for. 
 
 loohinge v. n., a searching. 
 loosi U. 1. to see; nan qa'ike loosia, I saw it not. 
 muni ne'e loosia, ta'ane na'a 'tinua, if I 
 see him I shall tell it. 2. lai loosi haa. 
 to go and inspect the money given for 
 a bride; i'o loosi, to await; mwala ko 
 i'o loosi, kire too'ana keni mwala ko 
 holie, the party awaiting, they own the 
 girl who is being bought {sc, in mar- 
 riage). 3. prep., with suffixed pronoun 
 {du), awaiting; in M. L., p. 155, loosi 
 is incorrectly assigned to the preposi- 
 tional sense of motion to; 'oke i'o kd'u 
 loosieu, wait a while for me. 
 loosi 4. toll loosi, a charm set in the path, 
 lopalopa V. i., to flap (of wings). 
 lopo 1. n., a pool: an artificial pool used to keep 
 alive i'e ni kelu: lopo ni ha'auri, bap- 
 tismal font, lit., pool of salvation. San 
 Cristoval robo. 
 lopo 2. U., 'alo i lopo muni {parasi), to oppose. 
 Lopo a boat harbor on the east coast of Ulawa. 
 Lopo Su'u Heu a gorge above Su'uholo, Ulawa: 
 
 figures in folklore, 
 lopo'i V. i., to be specious, to pretend, to 
 deceive, lopo'i ere, S., to deceive with 
 words; lopo'i kae, U., to deceive; lopo'i 
 wala, U., lopo'i deu, S., to feign, 
 losi, lo'ilosi V. tr., to squeeze; ni'i losi, to 
 squeeze, to wring out water; n., a 
 sponge, mei lo'ilosi. Viti losi, a sponge. 
 loto, loloto V. i., to bathe; esi kele lolo, just 
 washed, i. e., convalescent after illness; 
 horo ni loloto i purine maela, to kill a 
 man after celebrating a death feast in 
 order that people may bathe (bathing 
 being prohibited until some one was 
 killed) ; lolo maai, to baptize (late use) ; 
 loto maainge, v. n., baptism, 
 lotonga v. n., bathing, 
 lotohi tr., to bathe a person'', 'oke lolohi'o, 
 
 bathe yourself. 
 lotohila-(ku) gerund. 
 lou 1. V. i., to fish for bonito; noko lai lou, I go 
 
 bonito fishing. 
 lou 2. V. i., to emerge; lou ta'a, to come forth, 
 lo'u 3. V. i., to contract ceremonial defilement 
 by walking under women, by eating 
 with women in the case of boys who 
 ha'amalaohu. (f. M. A., p. 233. 
 Polynesian lota. 
 lo'u 4. V. tr., to bend, to double back, malo'u. 
 
 lo'une tr. 
 lo'u 5. adv. again, anew, also; hahira diana 
 ikire nga viuini lo'u ka'a diana, on the 
 good and the bad; 'omu sa'a lio odo'ieu 
 'oto lo'u, ye shall not see me again. 
 Samoa lolou, to bend; Wango rou, 
 Lau lau, Motu lou, again.
 
 LO'U'E 
 
 54 
 
 lo'u'e adj., used as n.; a bend, a verse; ta'ataa 
 
 me'i lo'ii'e, one verse, 
 lo'uhanga'a v. i., to be defiled ceremonially. 
 
 lo'u 3. 
 lo'uloku cf. loku. 
 loulou S., 'u'ulou U., V. i., to thunder; ngara 
 
 lotdou, to resound, 
 lounge ha'alounge, quarreling, bickering, 
 lousuu a short string of money made of a 
 whitish shell. Big Malaita currency. 
 Lau loiisuxi. 
 lu ending of certain forms of pronouns in the 
 plural, kolu, ynelii, vwlu; an abbreviation 
 of 'olu, three, 
 lua U., V. i., to grant. Florida lua. 
 luana suli lolai luana, his shoulder blade. 
 ludaa V. n., cargo. 
 
 lude S., luda U., v. i., to carry cargo, to be 
 heavily laden; lude olanga, v. n., carrj'- 
 ing cargo; lude peli, to "blackbird," to 
 recruit men without giving a payment 
 {holitc) to their relations; haka lude 
 mwane, a labor vessel recruiting men. 
 ludanga v. n., U., cargo, 
 ludengi tr., to carry as cargo, to recruit 
 men. Wango rula, Florida luda, luluda. 
 lue-(ku) S., lua-(ku) U. 1. neck; lue susu. sore 
 throat, voice gone; ngora Hue, to growl; 
 huiti lue, a shoulder of pork given to 
 chiefs as their portion at a feast; 'aqahi 
 lue, paired back and breast ornament 
 of shell money for women. Florida 
 lua, Bougainville Straits, lualua. 
 lue S., lua U. 2. n., the rising tide; lue qera, 
 high spring tide; nisilana lue, high- 
 water mark; salohi lue, a fiddler crab; 
 'upui lue, high tide. 
 lu'e, lu'elu'e S., lu'alu'a U. 3. a coconut-leaf 
 
 basket for holding yams. 
 lueli S., luengi U., to lessen a fire by removing 
 
 some sticks. Mao. ruke, to remove, 
 luelu ha'aluelu, S., v. i., to give a sign, 
 luelue S., lualua U., n., a flood; luelue e lake, 
 the flood came. Wango ruarua, Florida 
 lualua. 
 luhe to remove, to free, to loosen, lakaluhe. 
 luhe haahi. to be surety for: to take of? 
 clothing, to become a heathen again 
 (late use); luhe lolo, to clear away 
 creepers. Florida luba, Viti luva, Wango 
 ruha, Motu ruhaia, Mota luka, in tawa- 
 luka, to peel off. 
 luhesi tr., to loosen, to free, to let go. 
 luhesila-(ku) gerund, 
 luhu V. i., to cut off branches from a tree. 
 
 luhusi tr. 
 lula U., n., a spear; generic term, 
 lulu 1. V. i., to follow: used with isuli, luluisuli. 
 luluisulinge v. n. 
 luluisulila-(ku) gerund, 
 lulu 2. v. i., to fold; a Lulu-reu, a proper name, 
 lit. folder of leaves, 
 lulungi tr. 
 
 lulungila-(na, ni) gerund, 
 lulu 3. qd'ilulu, v. i., to be dismayed, qa'i 2. 
 lulu 4. V. i., to back water with paddles or oars; 
 'ahe lulu, boiling tide. 
 
 lulu 5. or a lulu, to belch; po'o lulu, to fill the 
 
 mouth wth food. 
 luluhu n., a coconut frond, luhihui niu. 
 lulusane n., a gecko lizard with projecting 
 
 eyes, the children catch them with a 
 
 grass noose or a coconut leaflet midrib, 
 lume S., a variant of nume, house; huuilume, 
 
 a village, 
 lumu, lumute S., moss. Mota lumula, Malay 
 
 lumut. Macassar lumu, malumii, soft. 
 lumu'e adj., moss-covered, 
 lumwe S., lumwalumwa U., to be long and 
 
 matted (of hair) ; qd'une e lufiiwe, long- 
 haired. 
 lupu, lupulupu U., V. i., to strike; lupu ra- 
 
 koma'ini, to nail upon, to crucify, 
 lupu'i tr. 
 lupunge'ini tr., to bump; maelupu'e, 
 
 bruised. 
 luqe'i V. i., to pretend; luqe'i laelae, to pretend 
 
 to go; luqeH hiru, to pretend to be busy; 
 
 luqe'i lalawa haahi, to give a feigned 
 
 excuse, 
 lusu n., the ribs in a canoe tied on to cleats 
 
 left on the planks forming the hull. 
 
 M. A., p. 295; 'enite lusu, what size 
 
 canoe, lit. how many ribs, 
 lusuinume S., lusuinima U., a large seagoing 
 
 canoe, lit. ribbed like a house, 
 lu'u V. tr., to move one's habitation, hd'ilu'u. 
 
 huni lu'iie mo ola ineu, to remove my 
 
 goods; kira 'asi lu'ua ha'iliu, they 
 
 ceased hostilities. Viti hiku, to remove, 
 luu'i V. tr., to forbid, ere luu'i. 
 luuluu si'.nge luubiu, elkhorn fern. 
 
 M 
 
 ma 1. adjectival prefix of condition: lingi 
 malingi, niena mamcnamena. Mota ma, 
 Maori ma. 
 
 ma 2. S., a prefix used with nouns which express 
 relationship; mwa. ro ma kungaona, 
 two brothers-in-law; ro ma uwelim, two 
 maternal uncles. 
 
 ma 3. as ma 1 : mdliimu. 
 
 ma 4. a noun ending: 'oyio 'ono'onomd, ndku 
 nd'unekume. 
 
 maa 1. the eye: maaria e lele, he squints; ynaa 
 noro, to be angry-eyed; maa ngangua, 
 blear-eyed from smoke; maa rodo, blind, 
 to forget; maaku e Id'iere, I am dizzy; 
 maana e ivaaro, goggle-eyed; hete'i maa, 
 to fix the eyes upon; 'o hinua maamu, peel 
 your eye; hinuhinu (hiruhiru) maa, eye- 
 lid; lio i ngaei maa, to look askance at, 
 to envy; maranga i maa, eyebrow; 
 ma'arusi maa, to wink the eye; mimisi 
 maa, the mantis, lit. squirt in the eye; 
 nokomi maa, to turn the eyes away; 
 para'imaa, eyeshade; rumu nue maa, 
 eye ointment; sikili maa, excoecaria 
 tree, lit. stings the eye; ana e tahanie 
 maamu ne, in that he opened your 
 eyes; e taiteia maana, he closed his eyes; 
 'oke 'ulue viaamu, you close your eyes;
 
 55 
 
 MADALI 
 
 maa 1 (continued). 
 
 'u'ui maa, the eyeball; 'u'u tnaai dehi, 
 a pearl. 
 
 maa 2. the face; 'alo maa, to turn the face; 
 lioda maa, to wash the face; e ladaa'inie 
 maana, he fell on his face; lio hunt maa, 
 to exercise partiality; nunuku maa, to 
 wrinkle the face; e palingitaa maana, he 
 set his face; riiima'a, to cut and dis- 
 figure the face; 'usii maa, to accuse, lit. 
 to point at his face. 
 
 maa 3. witli gonitive i in Sa'a, ni in Ulawa; hole, 
 mesh, opening, outlet, door, gate, maai 
 nume, S., maani nima, U., door; maai 
 Para, S., maatii para, U., gate; qd'ulimaa, 
 door lintel; sdii maa ana mu 'ape, to mend 
 the meshes of the nets; taha maa, to 
 open the door; to'oni pono maa, patched 
 clothes; maa ni qelusti, nostril. 
 
 maa 4. edge, point, blade, brim; maai mudi, a 
 
 * gorge for flying-fish; maana nahi, the 
 
 edge of the sword; pulu maai seu, a 
 circular piece used in inlaying, a dot. 
 
 maa 5. front of the house; i maa. outside; 
 odona maa, a gate opening directly in 
 front of one; oku i maa, wall in front. 
 
 maa 6. a stick, a match; maai aro, a stalk of 
 ginger; maai {maani) dunge, a match. 
 
 maa 7. one, a, also in plural, maai laenga, S., 
 maani laenga, U., a journey; maai sola, 
 U., a piece of bast cloth; hai maai dengi 
 he'iliiine, the four winds; kii'u mei nga 
 maa, give me one; la'ata'a maai ngeu, 
 one meal. 
 maai S., maani U. v. tr., to eye, to watch; 
 maai ngeu, S., maani ngeu, U., the 
 evening star, so called because it shines 
 at the time of the evening meal which 
 it watches; 7naa shows no sign of a break 
 in pronunciation. 
 maani, maamaani tr., to copy, to do like, 
 to watch. Mota malai, Polynesian 
 7nata. 
 
 maa 8. dried caneirium nuts, ngdli maa, put 
 into a cane basket (tangi) and kept 
 above the fire, ha'amaa. 
 
 ma'a 9. father, vocative: ma'a ineu, my dear 
 father! mama'a. 
 
 maadi U., v. tr., to reject. 
 maadila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 Maadi'a the landing-place for Ripoo, Ulawa. 
 
 ma'ae n., a strong-smelling fish, caught with 
 a bait of red clay in which crabs' claws 
 have been set. 
 
 maahoo v. i., to be new to, to be a novice at. 
 
 maahoosi v. i., to boast: ere maahoosi. 
 
 ma'ahu, ma'ama'ahu v. i., to sleep; ma'ahu 
 mala i'ola, to fast; ma'ahu pole, to 
 dream; nau ma'ahu qolea, I dreamt it; 
 ma'ahu suu'i, to guard at night, 
 ma'ahunge v. n., sleep, elo'oni ma'ahuuge, 
 it is time for sleep. Motu mafiila. 
 
 maai, maaimaai 1. v. tr., to permit, to allow; 
 Ho maai, toll maai, to allow. 
 maaila'ini U., tr., lio maaila'ini, to view 
 with favor. 
 
 maa'i 2. adj., holy, sacred: ha'amaa'i. loto 
 
 maa'i 2 (continued). 
 
 maa'i, to baptize; lolo maa'inge, bap- 
 tism; ngdu maa'i, ngdu maa'inge, 
 
 sacrificial eating. .Mota tnalai, good; 
 
 Tahiti maitai. Mao. mailai. 
 maa'i 3. beloved; mwane maa'i ineu, my dear 
 
 fellow, 
 maakahi v. i., to peek, to pff-p, to peer, 
 maakali v. tr., to visit, 
 maala adv., even if, granted that, supposing. 
 
 mala. 
 maalau air, firmament, lauwanga. 
 maaliholo the main doorway of a house, 
 maalimae hostile bands: mu maalimae. Lau 
 
 7naalimaea, enemy, 
 maalimwalo a staging for thatching {lahera'i) 
 
 erected inside the house, 
 maalitawa an opening in the shore reef, a 
 
 landing-place. 
 maamaa a fastening, a button, 
 ma'amana ro hd'ima'amana, mu he'ima'aman- 
 
 anga. 
 ma'amasa'a adj., ashamed, reverential. 
 Maana Odo Port Adam, Malaita. 
 maana'o U., v. i., to be deserted (of a place); 
 
 a desert place, na'onga. 
 maani, maamaani v. tr., to copy, to do hke, to 
 
 repeat: ha'amaani, S., hd'imaani, U. 
 
 maani mao, to watch the dance; si'o 
 
 maani, to collect, 
 maapala S., adj., unprovoked, malicious; 
 
 horonga maapala, murder. 
 maapou n. 1. a measure of shell money, from 
 
 the fingertips to the elbow, a cubit. 
 
 2. a piece, a bit. 
 ma'apu'a U., adj., bloody; n., stripes, bruises. 
 ma'arara'i v. tr., to provoke. 
 ma'aru U., v. i., to sleep, to twinkle; ma'aru 
 
 lalahi, to go like winking, 
 ma'arunga v. n., sleep. 
 maarue S., dsu jnaarue, to serve two masters. 
 maarusi v. tr., to wink; maarusi maa, in a 
 
 twinkling. 
 maasilima U., rira maasilima, the second day 
 
 of the moon. 
 maatala U. 1. as maapala. S., unprovoked. 
 
 2. in vain. Lau maabala. 
 maatoli v. i., to visit, 
 maatoto v. tr., to expect, to await; maalolo 
 
 muni, U., to await, 
 maa'u U., ma'u S., v. i.. to fear, to be afraid. 
 
 ha'amaa'u. 
 maa'uni tr. 
 mada 1. n., dirt, tnu mada. ha'amada. 
 mada 2. n., a fresh-water shell-fish (Nerita sp."). 
 mada'a adj., dirty, soiled; to'oni e mada'a ani 
 
 hesi'onga. garments defiled by the flesh, 
 mada'anga n., filth, 
 madala 1. the morning star; madala c qa'a. the 
 
 day star is rising; nga madala jnere 'ana'i 
 
 qaroa adaru'a, when the day star rises 
 
 we shall hitch it up for them. 2. lo'a 
 
 madala, the name of a month, May. 
 
 Viti mataka. morning; Bougainville 
 
 Straits matatala, Orion's Belt, 
 madali, mamadali adj., greasy, slippery; 
 
 macnga {maemaeha) mamadali, fever.
 
 MADALI 
 
 56 
 
 madali, mamadali (continued). 
 
 Viti dadala, Samoa malali, Lau afedali, 
 Florida rnadali. 
 
 madamada 1. v. i., to be dirty. 2. U., mada- 
 mada sulu, a month, October. 
 
 madara'a adj., sweating, perspiring; noko 
 madara'a, I sweat. 
 madara'anga n., sweat. 
 
 madeli U., a full grown coconut, hoi madeli. 
 
 madiu U., adj., overlapping; v., to overlap. 
 
 madoo S., adj., cooked. 
 
 madoro adj., hot; ha'adoro. 
 
 madoronga n., heat, fever. Malay darah, 
 hot. 
 
 madou U. 1. tnadou ni wala, a phrase. 2. 
 adj., broken clean off. 3. cinnamon. 
 
 madu S., adj., beloved, dear; kale madu ineu, 
 my beloved child. 
 
 mae, maemae 1. v. i., to die, to be ill, to be 
 numb, to be eclipsed, of moon; mae 
 'apolo, paralyzed; a olako mae. So-and- 
 so is sick; a ola e mae 'oto. So-and-so is 
 dead; e hat lalatnoa e mae hunia Qai, 
 Qai had the death of four men to account 
 for; m.wane da na kolu mae, lest we die; 
 mae su'esu'ela'i, to die of hunger; roro 
 mae, to strangle; uhu mae, a wig; e mae 
 'o'o, quite dead. 
 maenga v. n., sickness, death; maenga hula- 
 hula, danger; maenga mamadali, fever; 
 e ka'a hunie ike maenga, not unto death; 
 mwaanie maenga, from death; e qa'ike 
 munia nga maenga, not unto death, 
 maeta (ku) v. n., death feast, death, U.; kire 
 ngaii maetana a ola, they eat the death 
 feast of So-and-so; horo ni loloto i purine 
 maeta, to kill a man after the death 
 feast in order that persons may bathe, 
 maeha U., maemaeha S., v. n., sickness; 
 
 inaemaeha mamadali, fever, 
 maela (ku) v. n., danger, death; si'ohaa'i 
 
 maela, to be in danger, 
 maelaa v. n., danger, sickness; liunge ni 
 maelaa, a plague, epidemic; maelaa ni 
 qe'u, meningitis. 
 
 mae 2. used to denote excess, with poss. 3. 
 e 'a'aila'a 'oto mae ana, he is very strong; 
 e lae 'oto ni mae, he went like anything; 
 'u'u ni mae, heavy rain. 
 
 mae 3. the lee shore, 'asi mae; lade mae, deep 
 water. 
 
 mae 4. to be well mashed (of areca nut); 
 sdune ke mae, pound it to a pulp. 
 
 maesi tr., to be ill of, to die of. Mota mate, 
 Polynesian mate. 
 
 mae 5. n., a fighting column, nga mae; mu 
 na'ona'oi mae, armies, ma'alimae. 
 
 mae 6. n., war; ddu mae huni, to make war on; 
 ahu mae, to cease hostilities; ko apani 
 mae pe'ikie, sides with us; li'oa ni mae, 
 M. A., p. 260, a ghost associated with 
 war. 
 
 mae 7. weapons; tapo mae, to seize weapons. 
 
 ma*e 8. a pronged spear used for fishing; uwa 
 ma'e, a measure. If yards. 
 
 maea U., adj., holy, sacred, having to do with 
 the ancestor ghosts. 
 
 maea (continued). 
 
 maeanga v. n., holiness (late use). Wango 
 ?naea. 
 
 maelo adj., ripe (of fruits); the suffixed pro- 
 nouns na, ni may be added, 'iana ko 
 maelo, pregnant, lit., her belly is ripe; 
 hdii maelo, a rock near Ngorangora; 
 raa hitelia hdu maelo, prov., dry enough 
 to split hdu maelo: maelona, its ripeness, 
 when it is ripe; maelona e ngdu diana, 
 when ripe it is good eating; ngdli maelo, 
 ripe canarium nuts, the name of a 
 month, August. 
 
 maeloonga n., enemy, a maeloonga, mu 
 maeloonga. Wango maeronga. 
 
 maelupu'e S., adj., bruised, lupu. 
 
 maemaea S., adj., used with the personal 
 article; a maemaea, the sick man; mu 
 maemaea, the sick. 
 
 raaemaeko'a adj., gentle, mamaeko'a. 
 
 ma'emahe v. i., to decorate the person with 
 mahe. 
 
 maeni S., article plural vocative, maeni 'inoni, 
 maeni mwane, maeni keni; used also in 
 plain statement maeni 'inoni ineu, my 
 own people. 
 
 maenoto v. i., to be grave, sober, quiet. 
 
 maha v. tr., to profane holy things, to use 
 sacrilegiously. 
 mahanga v. n., profanation. 
 
 mahe a strong-smelling herb (Evodia hortensis) 
 used to decorate the body, stuck in 
 armlets, 
 ma'emahe v. i., to decorate with mahe, to 
 festoon in general; a garland. 
 
 mahiri, ma'imehiri v. i., to be intoxicated from 
 eating areca fruit, 
 mahiringe v. n., intoxication. 
 
 maholo 1. n., space, interval of time or distance; 
 nga maholo, what a length of time! nga 
 maholo e liu, time went on; maholo ni 
 lae inge'ie, his time for going; maholo 
 nou lae, at the time when I went; 
 maholo 'eta mwane e ha'atau ue, while 
 the other was yet far off; maholo 'ie, 
 now; ina'ona mu maholo, in former 
 times; i purine maholo, after the time; 
 ngoongoodo ana maholo, end of the time; 
 maholo ni raori'i, time of virginity; to'o 
 ta'e maholo, sometimes; maholo e toto, a 
 proper time. Florida polo, when. holo. 
 
 maholo 2. U., a thing, a piece, a part. 
 
 maholo 3. v. i., to be parted; sae sa'a maholo 
 wa ke mou, thoughts shall not be parted 
 and shall not cease, 
 maholota U., n., a piece; maholota ni pua, 
 piece of areca nut. 
 
 mahono U., tapa mahono, to interfere, to be a 
 busybody, hono. 
 
 mahoro v. i., to appear in view, to pass in view. 
 ha'amahoro. 
 
 mahu rdu mehu, to abide; kdru mehu, to endure 
 hardness. 
 
 mahungaona n., ro mahungaona, father-in-law 
 and son-in-law, mother-in-law and 
 daughter-in-law; mwane male and keni 
 female are added to distinguish the pairs.
 
 57 
 
 MALAOHU 
 
 mahu'ohu'o n., early morning, dawn; used with 
 
 locative i. hu'o. 
 mMhuro adj., disturbed, muddy (of water); 
 
 da mdhuro ana, disturbed it. md 3. 
 mahuru adj., gentle, tractable. 
 mai 1. adv., hither, here, this way; the demon- 
 strative nd may be added; mdi ana 
 waliimalau, in the world; mdi i 'ano, on 
 the earth; mdi i haha, on the earth; mdi 
 haha, under the earth; mdi iorohana, on 
 the earth; 'ure 'oto mdi i 'aehotalana, 
 from the beginning up till now; 'oko lae 
 mdi 'ure itei, where are you from; nou 
 'ure mdi i ola, I am from such-and-such 
 a place; mdi nga hou pua, give me an 
 areca nut; hdnue mdine, the place here; 
 mdi ileu, this way; mdi i ntime, into the 
 house; po'o mdi, hither, this side; qd'u 
 mdi, hither. Mota ma, Polynesian mai. 
 mai 2. ebb, low tide, hou mei, U. kosi mei, 
 it is low tide; mdi rara, dead low water 
 at spring tides; mdi ana waarowaaro e 
 qaa, ebb when the moon rises; mdi ana 
 waarowaaro e suu, ebb when the moon 
 sets; hdnua e la iii tola kdu ana mdi rara, 
 the people have gone gathering coral at 
 dead low water. Mota meat, Viti mali. 
 mai, maimei 3., U., v. tr., to help, to be on the 
 side of: used with numerals more than 
 ten as an alternative to mana in the sense 
 of and, with; awala mdia 'enita, how 
 many over ten. cf. M. L., pp. 151-153. 
 Used as prep, meaning 'with'; the pron. 
 du, 'o, a, etc., are suffixed; wala'a mdia, 
 speak with him. 
 maila-(ku) gerund.; a mdilaku. my helper. 
 maila'ini U., v. tr.. Ho mdila'ini. to approve 
 of. 
 ma'i 4. participial ending, oro oromd'i. Mota 
 
 mag. 
 ma'i 5. suffix to verb used intransitively. 
 
 cf. md'ini. 
 maimepusu U.. n., memepusu S., a tree 
 (Ficus sp.) with bunches of flowers on 
 the stem as well as on the branches; 
 taka mala maimepusu, to flower like 
 this tree, 
 ma'ini verbal suffix, 'ono 'onomd'ini. 
 maipo U., v. i., to be dirty, unclean, 
 maitale v. i., to be poor, possessing nothing. 
 tale 2. tilolada mditalc, the cry of the 
 poor. 
 maitalenga v. n., poverty, 
 makahu adj., soft, mealy (of yams when 
 
 cooked), 
 makaka adj., broken into pieces, asunder, kaka. 
 makaka'a adj., as makaka. 
 makasi v. tr., to break into pieces, 
 makeato to overflow; lionu makealo, full and 
 
 running over, 
 makekesi U., v. tr., to disown, to put aside. 
 
 keke. 
 makemaketa (ku) n., wiles, devices. 
 makere adj., gapped, with a broken edge. kere. 
 makina'a U., adj., wet. damp. 
 makulu adj., resounding, with a loud noise. 
 Maori iakuru, thud. 
 
 mala 1 . adv., as, like, according to, as one might 
 say, as it might be. mala kire manata'i 
 deue, as they were wont to do; mala 'oto 
 nou ka'a helesie ike, as though I had 
 never done it; mala nga ta'a, like I don't 
 know what; mala pdine, to give oneself 
 airs; mala e 'u'ile'inie nga hoi heu, about 
 a stone's throw; maahu mala i'ola, to 
 fast, lit. to sleep canoe fashion; kira hunu 
 poo mala ideni, they kill pigs (presum- 
 ably) tomorrow; nga keni mala a kalemu, 
 a girl a mate for your son; taka mala 
 maimepusu, to flower like the maime- 
 pusu tree. 
 mala 2. U-, maala S., granted that, supposing. 
 3. to act like, to become like, to speak 
 the language of. ha'amala. 'omu ke 
 mala mwela kdu, become like children; 
 a porona ko malamala Sa'a, So-and-so 
 speaks the language of Sa'a. San 
 Cristoval mara, Fagani mwara, Omba 
 mwere. 
 mala 4. prefix of condition, malakeu. Mota 
 
 mala 2. 
 malaahonga S., v. i., to make trial of, to tempt: 
 used with poss. 3. cf. m.ala, ahonga, 
 malaohonga. 
 malaahonganga v. n., trial, temptation. 
 malaahongala-(ku) gerund. 
 Mala 5. Florida name for Mwala. 
 Malade a village at the northwest end of Port 
 
 Adam, Malaita. 
 maladi adj., stale, sour (of yam and tare mash, 
 
 ha'apo'e). 
 mala halisi U., same as mara hdlisi, northeast 
 
 wind. 
 malahu-(ku) n., friend, namesake; a malahaku, 
 my friend; malahuku, vocative, friend; 
 used with hd'i 7, ro hd'i malahune, mu 
 he'i malahune, friends. Wango marahu. 
 Malaita cf. mara 3. ita may possibly be a con- 
 tracted form of Lau baila, big. 
 malaka a wound. Lau maala, VVango maara. 
 
 malaka'a adj., wounded, 
 malakeke U., adj., unstable, keke. 
 
 malakekesi v. tr., to cause to spill, to 
 overturn. 
 malalahu'e S., adj., covetous, 
 malamala 1. v. i., to act wantonly, to behave 
 badly, 
 malamalanga v. n., wantonness, mischief, 
 
 ill. 
 malamala'anga n., evil. harm. Mota 
 mala, bad. 
 malamala 2. to talk the language of. mala 3. 
 malamalaohe U., light in weight, 
 malamalau a pot hole in the ground, 
 malamasi v. i., to destroy, used with poss. 3. 
 
 malamala 1. 
 malaohu (the ao is a diphthong) v. i., to be 
 separated for initiation, of boys who 
 live in the taoha on the beach with the 
 men preparatory to catching their first 
 bonito (sdu) . lahe ni malaohu. cf. tahe. 
 ha'amalaohu v. tr., to initiate, to assist a 
 novice in catching his first bonito: the 
 man in the front of the canoe hooked
 
 MALAOHU 
 
 58 
 
 malaohu (continued). 
 
 the fish and the boy sitting behind 
 him grasped the rod as the man swung 
 the fish into the canoe. jM. A., p. 233. 
 San Cristoval maraohu. 
 malaohonga U.. v. i., to make trial of. to tempt. 
 malaahonga. 
 malaohonganga v. n., triai, temptation. 
 malaohongala-(ku) gerund. 
 RIa.apa an island in Marau Sound, Guadal- 
 canar; the hades of the Solomon Islands. 
 M. A., p. 260. 
 malapau'a'a U., adj., strong: papau, paula'a. 
 malau 1. an island; ttialau mote, an islet. 
 Malau 2. a bay west of Cape Zelee, Malaita. 
 3. Port Adam. 4. 'Olu Malau, Three 
 Sisters Islets, south of Ulawa, called 
 also Malau ni I'e, the home of the 
 ghosts and uninhabited; the names of 
 the three islets are, West Sister Ali'ite, 
 Middle Sister Malau Lalo, East Sister 
 Malau Peine; on the side of AU'ite 
 facing Ulawa is the rock called Hau ni 
 Keni, the women's rock, where the 
 female ghosts emerge from the sea as 
 they cross on their last journey. M. A., p. 
 257 ; maraaui Malau, the southeast wind, 
 malau 5. the fangs of dogs, 
 malelede adj., broken in pieces, lede. 
 maleledi v. tr., to rail at, to rebuke, ledi 1. 
 fnaleledi oraha'a mwaanie ngaini, to 
 rebuke a man for sin; ere maleledi, to 
 rail at; sae maleledi, rage, 
 maleledinge v. n., abuse, 
 malengolengo adj., reclining, falling to one 
 
 side, not upright. 
 maleqeleqe U., weak. 
 
 maleqeleqenga v. n., weakness, 
 maleu U., uhi maleu, a month, April, 
 mali U., to be roasted; a Poro Wakio Mali, a 
 legendary person. 
 maU'a adj., cooked, roasted. Padas, Bor- 
 neo, 7nalia, red. 
 maU'e S., lo'a mali'e, a month, April, 
 malikiliki U., adj., leaping; 'lira malikiliki, to 
 
 leap, 
 raalimeli adj., sweet. Nine lango meli, bee; 
 
 humelie. sweet; Borneo manis. 
 malingi.mamalingi adj., spilt, litigi. v. tr.,lo 
 overbalance, to lean; honu ffialitigi, full 
 to the brim, 
 malingisi tr., to cause to spill, 
 malisi i ku) to be fitting, becoming; e malisiku, 
 it becomes me; nou ka'a malisi 'unite, 
 I am not worthy to tell it. 
 malo 1. black beads or bugles, sections of a 
 creeper, used with haa and htiresoso in 
 the making of 'uri mwado, etc.: dark 
 glass beads introduced in trade are also 
 called malo; malo huri, beads cut off in 
 sections; malo ule, beads rubbed down 
 to size, 
 malo 2. asthma, to suffer from asthma; tlele 
 
 malo, to gasp for breath. 
 malopi adj., with jagged edges, 
 malo'uadj., bent, crooked, lo'u. Su'uMalou, 
 a bay on Big Malaita opposite Aio, a 
 bay at the north end of San Cristoval. 
 
 malu, malumalu, mamalu 1. v. i., to shade, to 
 o'. trshadow. ha'amdlu. e main haahe, 
 IX if in shadow; saulehi melumelu, dusk, 
 m; lute (ku) shade, i Mclutei Kara, under 
 the shade of the coral tree, a village on 
 Ugi; i melntana, under the rule of, used 
 of the overshadowing power of chiefs. 
 malu (ku) 2. n., i melune, under the rule of, seen 
 
 in proper names 'ou'ou i Melune. 
 maluha U-, v. n., shade, used with poss. 3. 
 
 Mota malu, Maori maru. 
 malumu adj., soft, gentle; lae m'dliimu, go 
 quietly; sae jndltummge, v. n., long- 
 suffering. Mota malumlum, Viti 
 7nalumu. 
 mama'a vocative, father; a mama'a, of a par- 
 ticular person; a ynama'a e 'unue, father 
 said so. 2. used as an affectionate 
 address by the father to the male child. 
 cf. Polynesian tamaili (little father). 
 7na'amana, n., ro hd'i ma'amana, ro 
 ma'amana, U., vocative, father and son. 
 mamadali adj., running with sweat, madali. 
 
 ma'ema'eha mamadali, S., fever, 
 mamadu adj., gentle, harmless, madu. 
 mamae adj., fine, well ground; one mamae, fine 
 sand; sae mamae, meek. Wango 
 matnae, soft. 
 mamaeko'a adj., gingerly, gently, subdued, 
 
 meek, tnaetnaeko'a. 
 mamaela'a adj., weak, prone to sickness. 
 
 mamaela'anga v. n., sickness. 
 mamahu'e n., a tree, used for house posts. 
 mama'ila'a adj., despisingly, used with poss. 3. 
 la'a 3. ere mama'ila'a, to speak de- 
 spisingly of. 
 mama'ingi U., v. i., to despise, to reject; to 
 attack, to be fierce (of a dog or a pig), 
 used with poss. 3; mama'ingi 'asi, to 
 reject. 
 mama'ingi'a U.. adj., disparagingly. 
 mama'ingi'ala-(ku) gerund. 
 mama'iraa v. i., to work at, to labor earnestly 
 
 over. 
 mamakare v. i., a children's game of hide and 
 
 seek with an object held in the hands, 
 mamakine adj., abashed, ashamed, with poss. 3. 
 ha'amamakine. ddu mamakine ada, put 
 them to shame. 
 mamakinanga n., ere mamakinanga, to 
 reproach. Gilbert Islands makina, to 
 fear, 
 mamakola v. i., to reject, to handle shamefully, 
 to be fierce, savage (of dogs and pigs), 
 used with poss. 3. 
 mamakolasi tr. 
 mamala n., wild taro. 
 Mamala Wai n., the Milky Way. 
 mamalidu'a U., adj., quiet, peaceable, doing 
 
 no harm, 
 mamalo, mamamalo v. i., to rest, ha'amamalo. 
 mamalonga v. n., rest, a resting-place. 
 raamaloha v. n., a resting-place. Wango 
 mamaro, Bugotu mamatho. 
 maraalute-(ku) v. n., shade, shadow, veranda. 
 i mamalutana mime, on the veranda. 
 malu.
 
 59 
 
 MANGO 
 
 mamanuto'o v. i., to be at peace, free from 
 
 strife, i'o mamanuto'o. manii 2, to'o. 
 mamango (ku) breath, mango 2. niamango 
 
 i sae. mctaph., heart, 
 mamataku adj., fearful, dreadful, viaa'ii. 
 
 Polynesian nialaku, fear, 
 mama'u adj., causing fear, fearful, via'u. 
 lio mama'u, to look ugly; mama'u ni 
 mwane, a fearful lot of men, beyond 
 count. 
 mamau'a'a S., adj., smooth, with smooth 
 
 surface. 
 mama'udi v. i., to be cold (of the bodj). 
 
 mama'udinge v. n., cold. Borneo madud. 
 
 mamaurita'a adj., living, alive, mduri, ta'a 5. 
 
 mama'uru'e S., ma'uma'uru'a U., adj., sleepy. 
 
 yna'iiru. 
 
 mama'uru'anga v. n., sleepiness. 
 
 mamaware adj., freed from, safe, in safety; i'o 
 
 mamaware, to be in safety. 
 mamenamena adj., broken to bits, menasi. 
 mami .s. 1. v. i., to taste; mdmi ohonga ana, 
 
 taste and try it. Motu mami. 
 mami 2. pron. plural 1 excl. suffixed to noun; 
 
 nimemdmi, our hands. 
 mamu 1. v. i., to entice animals with scraps of 
 food, ha'amdmu. 
 mamu'i tr., to throw scraps of food to entice 
 animals, 
 mamu 2. to be burnt in cooking (of food). 
 
 ha'amdtnu'i. 
 mana U., used of numerals over ten; awala 
 mana hai, fourteen; 7nana 'enile, what 
 unit over ten. Probably wa, n., na, 
 suffixed pronoun, cf. Arag ve, Espiritii 
 Santo va, Santa Cruz wa. M. L., 
 p. 232. Viti mani. 
 manata 1. v. i., to be taught, quiet (of animals), 
 broken in, tamed, harmless. 
 manatanga v. n., wisdom, nature, knowl- 
 edge. Motu manada, gentle; Wango 
 manata. 
 manata (ku) 2. v. n., nature, custom; tolai 
 sulie manatana, according to his nature; 
 manalana mu 'inoni, mu manalai 'inoni, 
 the nature of men. manatana e rako. 
 Florida manaha. 
 manata'a adj., tame, kind, ha'amanatn'a. 
 ke'i ne'i manata'a diana, they shall 
 become well tamed. 
 manata*i, manate'i (Qaloto) v. tr., to know, to 
 be accustomed; noti ka'a manata' ic ike, 
 I do not know; ynala kire manata'i deuc, 
 as they were wont, 
 manata 'ini, manate'ini tr., to know, to 
 have; 'omii ka'a inanata'inie wa 'omii ke 
 leesie, ye neither know him nor have seen 
 him; atei e manata' inic, who knows, as 
 Spanish t quien sabe? I don't know; 
 'o manata inie hoi niu? nou pit'o. have 
 you a coconut? I have not. Samoa 
 manatu, to think; Lau manata, Florida 
 »ianaha. 
 manawa v. i., to proclaim oneself the cause of 
 the death of another by magic. San 
 Cristoval manawa, to breathe. 
 
 maneko, manemaneko v. i., to be gentle, harni- 
 ir-ss. 
 manekonga v. n., gentleness. 
 manekosi U., tr., hele manekosi, to handle 
 gently. Wango manigo. 
 mani adv., entirely, altogether: precedes verb; 
 mdni ni'ilana sakanga e muni lae. the 
 complete giving of power is completely 
 given; ke mdni dolosie satada, let him 
 ask all their names; mdni wala, S., to 
 take counsel; mdni dkutaka, U., all of us; 
 mdni oaoanga hd'iliu, equality. W'anirj 
 mwani, article; Lau qaimani, altogether, 
 manikulu'e adj., glorious, resplendent, re- 
 nowned, ha'amdnikulu'e, kitluhi. 
 manikuluha n., glory, renown, used with 
 
 poss. 3. 
 manikulu'anga n., glory, praise, 
 manini olo manini, to be of orderly behavior, 
 manire'i 1. v. tr., to clean up, to put in order. 
 2. partic, skilfully; hele mdnire'i; i'o 
 man ire' i. to live orderlj-. 
 manire'ini U., tr. 
 manire'i iila-(ku) gerund, 
 manire'inge'ini tr., to work skilfully at. 
 manola atlj., clear, pure, clean, ha'amanola. 
 manomanola'a, manomanoleta adj., unsul- 
 lied, refmed. 
 manolanga v. n. Wango manora. 
 manu 1. a bird, insect, mdnu poo, the pig- 
 bird, with a cry like the grunt of a hog, 
 a bird of ill omen; hoi menu, an egg; 
 pipisi ana mdnu, tail feathers; ihui 
 menu, feather; mdnu koni, a tame bird. 
 Sa'a ni menu, cf. ha'addhi. Mota 
 manu, Polynesian manu. 
 manu 2. v. i., to float; hdu menu, pumice stone; 
 hele mdnu sada, to hold level, upright; 
 mdnu odo, to be upright, level; waaro- 
 waaro e mdnu 'a'a mdi ilengi, the moon 
 floated clear in the sky. 
 manule'i U.. partic, raised up on high. 
 Samoa, Maori manu, to float. 
 mangi-(na, ni) 'unu mengini, to tell everything 
 out; kire ka'a lio mdngini, they saw 
 none of it. Wango mangina, at all. 
 mangite (ku) a relic of the dead, an amulet, 
 hair, bone, etc. cf. kulu. 
 mangitana the dead body, 
 mango 1. v. i., to be finished, completed; the 
 adverb 'olo may be added : with dhuta has 
 the sense of all. ha'amango. e mango 
 'oto, quite finished; mango 'oto, that fin- 
 ished, thereupon; w^/m mango 'oto mdi, we 
 are all here; sae mango, sae mangonga. 
 ha'asaemango. mental satisfaction; dhu- 
 tamere'i mango, both of us; ahutamolu 
 mango, all of you; mango te'ete'e, finished 
 for good and all. 
 mangomango adv.. completely, follows 
 verb. 
 mango, mamango S., mangomango U. 2. to 
 breathe; mango asa, to gasp; mango 
 pdine, to sigh; mango toli, to faint, be 
 insensible; Hi mango, to draw in the
 
 MANGO 
 
 60 
 
 mango, mamango 2 (continued). 
 
 breath; lole mango, to hold the breath; 
 to'o mango, to have breath, 
 mango (ku) 3. breath, chest; mangoku, my 
 life; mangoi ola, breath; mangona e suu, 
 his breath has gone, he is dead; mangona 
 lie ana. he is still alive; mangona e 
 puuto'o dlilio'i, his breath returned, 
 mangoa'ini v. tr., to be satisfied with; 
 
 mango 1. 
 mangomango (ku) n., breath, chest. 
 mangoni adv., rich, fat; wdsu mangoni, to emit 
 
 a rich savor, 
 mangulungulu adj., resounding, 
 mao, maomao 1. v. i., to dance; mao hidehide. 
 to dance to the clapping of hands; mao 
 pe'e ahni, to dance holding a dancing- 
 club; 'arasi mao, to lead the chorus in a 
 dance; maani mao, to watch the dance; 
 ohoa mao, to practise the dance; siilu 
 mao, to sing dancing-songs. 
 maonga v. n., dancing; puulie maonga, to 
 
 tread the dance. 
 maoli tr.. maoli mao, to join in the dance. 
 maolila-(ku) gerund. Lau mao, Wango 
 mao. 
 mao 2. halo mao, a pump drill; a piece of hard 
 palm wood is tipped with a flake of 
 flint which is bound tightly on, two 
 strings hang from the other end and are 
 made fast to a short stick; these strings 
 are then twisted around the palm wood 
 and the drill revolves as the strings 
 unwind and rewind by pushing down 
 the short stick. 
 ma'ohi, mama'ohi S., v. tr., to await, to expect, 
 ohi 1. ma'ohi raqasi, to await. 
 ma'ohinge v. n., expectation; ma'ohinge 
 
 siisuto'o, hope (late use). 
 ma'ohila-(ku) gerund. 
 ma'o'i 1. adj., broken in two. 2. n., a landslip. 
 'o'i'o'i. 
 ma'o'i'o'i altogether broken. Florida 
 magoti. 
 maomaopu'e S., adj., well grown, fatted; pdsu 
 
 maomaopu'e, in full leaf. 
 maoneone U., adj., sore smitten. 
 maopaopa adj., distinct, showing up sepa- 
 rately (of trees in a landscape), opa. 
 mapipi adj., receding (of water); wdi e mapipi 
 'ohe 'olo ta'inie kolune mwakana, whether 
 the water had receded off the face of 
 the earth, 
 mapo 1. n., a locust. 
 Mapo 2. Roasi Bay, Malaita. 
 mapusu U., adj., stinking, rotten, 
 maputaputa U., adj., bruised, 
 maqe n., Tahiti chestnut (Bocoa, Inocarpus 
 
 edulis). Mota mwake, Tahiti mape. 
 mara 1. i mar a mime, the front of the house, 
 
 platform at front door, courtyard. 
 mara S., mala U. 2. mara hdlisi, the northeast 
 
 wind. Possibly Mota jnaran, light. 
 Mara 3. (Tolo) the island of Malaita. Sa'a 
 
 Mwala; Mara masiki; Florida Mala. 
 maraa-(ku) 1. n., lone, unaided; ineu maraaku. 
 
 maraa-(ku) (continued). 
 
 I by myself; ola maraana, nothing like 
 it, supere.xcellent. 2. U., of one's own 
 accord; e hd'iarea maraana, he pushed 
 himself forward, 
 maraa'imuni v. i., to do a thing secretly. 
 
 7nicm2i7ii. 
 maraau the southeast trade wind blowing from 
 south-southeast to east-northeast during 
 the months from May to November. 
 aau. maraau wet hata, south-southeast 
 wind, a strong wind with cloudy days 
 but no rain; maraau i Malau, southeast 
 wind, from the direction of 'Olu Malau; 
 rnaraau i qaro, south-by-east wind; 
 maraau 'upu'upu, east wind, blows over 
 the middle {'upu'upu) of Ulawa; 
 maraau wei qini, east-by-north wind, 
 brings rain; maraau ro one, east-north- 
 east wind. Maori marangai, east wind. 
 mara halisi northeast wind, fine weather with 
 masses of cumulus clouds; mara hdlisi 
 i matawa, north-by-east wind, 
 mara'i heutaa U., v. i., to droop (of flowers). 
 Maramara 'O'orou U., the name of a canoe 
 
 in a story. 
 maramarape'a adj., secure, serene, prosperous, 
 maramarawai lo'a tnaramarawdi, name of a 
 
 month. 
 maranga 1. maranga i maa, eyebrow. 
 maranga-(na, ni) 2. hele marangana, take from 
 
 amongst. 
 maraohu (ao diphthong) a large food-bowl, 
 maraohu'e S., maraohu'a U., adj., stale, not 
 fresh, brackish, water which tastes of the 
 bamboo water-carrier. Wango mara- 
 ohua. 
 marapute'i adj.. fallen headlong, rdpu. 
 marara v. i., to be diffident, hesitating, to 
 flinch; hele marara, to act with diffi- 
 dence. Mota maragai, to tremble; 
 Motu hemarai, to be coy. 
 marare'a adj., white and glistening, re'a. 
 
 Mota mar an, light {lux). 
 marariro'a adj., sumptuous, bright. 
 marawa U., to be blackish, purplish, in color; 
 marawani deni, daybreak; aau marawa, 
 the nuts getting purple in color before 
 ripening; a month, July. Mota maras. 
 marea n., a small fresh-water fish. 
 mareho S. (a Wango word), a mareho, So-and 
 
 so. hereho. 
 mari'iri'i adj., broken into slivers. Niue 
 
 malipilipi. 
 marou v. n., to be thirsty. Mota marou, 
 
 Marshall Islands maru. 
 maruda U., adj., tender, of flesh meat, 
 masa to be shy, ashamed, respectful: used with 
 poss. 3. ma'aviasa'a, ha'amasa. emasa 
 akii, he was shy of me; masa mwaani, to 
 be shy of doing; masa suke, to be 
 ashamed to beg. 
 masanga v. n., shame, confusion, 
 masi, ma'imesi S. 1. to commit adultery; mdsi 
 hunt, to commit adultery with; hdnua 
 ni mdsi, U., an adulterous place. 
 mSsinge v. n., adultery.
 
 6i 
 
 MAWA 
 
 m'Asi, ma'imesi 1 (continued). 
 
 m^silana gerund., her fornication. 
 masi 2. U., article, a. a piece: used al?o in 
 diminutive and depreciatory sense; 
 nga and mwai may precede, indsi 
 kaleku, my child; nga mdsi laha, what 
 (thing); mwai mesi sae, hearts; iduidii 
 mesi 'ei, jumped about on the firewood. 
 Wango: cf. si in hasi; hasi ei, a tree; 
 hasi noni, a man; Lau si a. 
 mfisi 3. dwarfs, pygmies: probably the auto:h- 
 thons, credited with being stupid. 
 San Cristoval masi. 
 masiki (Tolo word). Mara Masiki, Little 
 Malaita. Mota rig, small; Motu 
 maragi. 
 mata 1. U., club (generic term); tahola'i mala, 
 S., to wave the club in the air. Wango 
 mala, Viti manda, Wedau mada. 
 mata 2. U., to be rotting away; nga hudi e mala 
 'asi'a, the bananas were rotting un- 
 picked. 
 mata'i to have an attack of malarial fever; 
 nokomala'i, I have malaria; mala'i holo- 
 holo, intermittent fever. Mota viasag. 
 mataka Qaloto form for malaqa, clear, 
 matakara adj., unraveled, come undone. 
 takara. 
 matakarasi tr., to unravel. 
 matamata soot. 
 matanga adj., forked, branched, langa. Lau 
 
 malanga, between, in the midst of. 
 mataqa adj., clear, open, plain, malaka, 
 ha'amalaqasi. 
 mataqanga v. n., clear light, open space, 
 mataqasi S., mataqali U., v. tr., to enlighten. 
 Samoa malala, Maori malara. 
 mataraha flotsam, drift coconuts, tara 1. 
 matasi 1. adj., with the point broken oft'. 
 matasi 2. n., a small fish. 
 
 matawa n., the open sea. tawa. i mataiva, 
 the east; mara hdlisi i ynalawa, north-by- 
 east wind; hui ni matawa, the giant taro; 
 mwai malawa qaroqaro, U., natives of 
 Santa Cruz; »«u malawa 'uhi'uhi, S., 
 foreigners with guns. San Cristoval 
 malawa; Maori tawha, open; Omba 
 wawa, the open sea; Niue lawana, open; 
 Araga wawana, open sea; Mota wawana, 
 wide and flat; Malagasy fafana. 
 iiiatola-(ku) the midst of, between, midway; 
 i malolana i Uki na i Ulawa, half way 
 between Ugi and Ulawa; i matolai 'iuoni, 
 among men. Wango madora. 
 Matou a Poro Malou ni Wala, a ghost in I'lawa 
 
 folklore. 
 mau 1. to emerge, to debouch, to lead (of a 
 path) ; ko mau i ola, leads to such-and- 
 such a place. 
 m&'a, ma'ume'u S. 2. v. i., to fear, to be afraid. 
 maa'u, ha'atnd'u. 
 m^'unge v. n.. fear; ere lole ana ma'unge, to 
 talk confusedly from fear; saeda e 
 qd'ilulu eni me'unge, their hearts were 
 dismayed through fear, 
 ma'ute'ini tr. 
 ma'ute'i v. i., to fear; noko md'utc'i rara- 
 
 mau, ma'ume'u (continued). 
 
 ngana, I am afraid of it. Wango 
 
 mamau, Malay mataul, Maori malaku. 
 
 maua U. 1. v. i., to dye, to stain. 2. n., a dye: 
 
 the dyes in use are obtained from the 
 
 bark of the casuarina {sdlu) and the o'a 
 
 (?BischofTia javanica) and kikiri. 
 
 mauana n., man and wife, parents: used with 
 
 ro, ro hd'i, ro mauana, U., ro ha'i 
 
 mauana, S., man and wife; ro hd'i 
 
 mauana ineu, S., my parents. 
 
 mauli, maumeuli left-handed, awkward; a 
 
 Mduli, a proper name; hele mdtili, to 
 
 do awkwardly. Florida mauli, Maori 
 
 maui, \'iti mawi, Motu lauri, Xguna 
 
 matiri. 
 
 maumau'a'a, maumau'ala U., mamau'a'a S., 
 
 adj., smooth. 
 maumauri'a U., adj., alive, mduri. 
 ma'uma'uru'a U., adj., sleepy, ma'uru. 
 ma'ume'ule S., frightened, fearful, mau. 
 maumeuli (ku) left, lefthanded, awkward. 
 mduli. i meumeuli, on the left; yiinie 
 i yneumeuliku, my left hand, 
 maumeuli'e adj., awkward, 
 maumeuri'e adj., Hving, alive, mduri. hiiru- 
 
 huru maumeuri'e to be living. 
 ma'ume'uta-(ku) terrible, to'o md'ume'ulana, 
 
 terrifying, md'xi. 
 mau'o S., to be offended, ha'amdu'o. 
 mauri, maumeuri 1. to live, to be alive, to 
 recover health, ha'auri. 'asi meuri, 
 weather side of an island; lalamoa mduri, 
 a captive; tola 7nduri, to capture, used 
 with poss. 3. 
 maiirihe v. n., life, soul: used with poss. 3. 
 mdurihaaku, my soul, my life; a aei 
 meurihe, source of life; raaraa ani 
 meurihe, the light of life, 
 mauringe v. n., life (abstract). 
 maurisi tr., to survive, to escape from, 
 mauri 2. v. i., to be delivered of a child; e mduri 
 ana mwela, she was delivered of a child. 
 Java urip, life; Mota maur, Malay 
 murip, Ponape maur. Lau mori, to live 
 may be connected with Sa'a moli true 
 (wala'imoli) and with Maioriori, Chat- 
 ham Islanders, Maori, New Zealander, 
 rather than with mduri. cf. moli. 
 maurihaa'i S., life, soul. Florida mdurihali. 
 ma*uru U. (dialectic), to sleep; ma'uru dhu, 
 sound asleep, Fagani mauru, Mota 
 maturu. 
 ma'usu U., bush, forest; i la'ona ma'usu. in the 
 bush; e ma'usu 'olo, it is all overgrown, 
 mauta'a adj., firm, hard, exclam., hold tight. 
 ha'amauta'a. hoi meuta'a. a ripe areca 
 nut, hard; 'usu meuta'a, to affirm, 
 mauweline n., with ro: ro mauweline, uncle and 
 
 nephew, uweli. 
 mawa, mamawa 1. to blow strong, to be a gale; 
 mawa ta'a, to be exposed to the air (of 
 a sore). 
 mawaha C v. n., tempest, gale. Wango 
 mawa, wind. 
 mawa 2. a tree, strong smelling when chopped 
 and causing vomiting.
 
 MAWA 
 
 62 
 
 mawa 3. v. i., to shout. 
 
 mawataa, mawaha S., mawanga U., a 
 
 shout, a loud cry; siaigie mawataa, to 
 
 lift up a shout. 
 mawasidengi S., mawasideni U., a storm of 
 
 wind; mawasidengi e taharara'a, a storm 
 
 swept down. 
 mea(ku) 1. n., a tongue, the blade of a paddle; 
 
 meaka'elu to'ola ka'elu, our tongues are 
 
 our own; e rara mea, it burnt the tongue, 
 
 hot (of a rebuke). 
 meameaha S., meameata U., used with 
 
 genitive i, ni; mii meameahai diinge, 
 
 tongues of fire; meameatani ola, U., a 
 
 huge thing, 
 meali v. tr., to lick. 
 mealila-(ku) gerund. 2. v. i., to be fierce 
 
 (of fire) ; dunge ko mea, the fire is fervent. 
 
 Mota gara-mweai, tongue; Maisin me. 
 medo to be damp, wet. ha'amedo. Motu 
 
 medu, rain. 
 me'esu, me'eme'esu S., bush, forest, ma'usti, 
 
 U. dalo ni me'esu, the paule tree; ola 
 
 ni me'esu, an uncultivated thing. 
 mehu n., a fish caught near the rocks; honi 
 
 jnehu, U., one such fish. 
 me'i S., article, a, one: nga and mu may be 
 
 prefixed; also used in a diminutive or 
 
 depreciatory sense, masi, U. nga me'i 
 
 ola, a thing; me'i wala, a word; mu me'i 
 
 wala; a me'i wala, the Word; kele me'i 
 
 ola, a little thing; me'i mwakana, dust; 
 
 me'i keni reu, a handmaid; i'emi mu 
 
 me'i 'inoni, we humble folk. 
 meimeile'ini v. tr., e tale'i meimeile'ini, he was 
 
 in destitution. 
 melaha, melamelaha n., fierce flame; mu 
 
 melahai dunge, flames of fire. Mota 
 
 mera, red glow; Maori niiramira, red 
 
 heat. 
 melu 1. pers. pron., plural 2, excl., we: more 
 
 restricted in meaning than ki'e. 2. pers. 
 
 pron., plural 2, excl.: suffixed to nouns, 
 
 our: suffixed to verbs and prepositions 
 
 as object, us. lu. 
 melu 3. n., a tree, the quandong (Eleocarpus 
 
 sp.). 
 melumelu sdulehi melumelu, dusk. 
 melumelu'a'a adj., bluish, blackish, purplish; 
 
 mdlu, shade. Sesake meluna last, 
 
 depths of the sea. 
 melumelu'e S.. adj., glorious. 
 meme n., a ball of masticated food; hou meme, 
 
 chewed areca nut with betel leaf and 
 
 lime, 
 memela'ini v. tr., to masticate. Gilbert 
 
 Islands mama, to masticate a ball of 
 
 food for an infant; Viti mama, to chew; 
 
 Niue mama, a mouthful, 
 memelu'a'a as melumelu'a'a. 
 memepusu S., a tree (Ficus sp.). mdimepusu. 
 memeso v. tr., to break into powder, pili 
 
 metnesoa. 
 mena to turn color (of leaves of deciduous 
 
 trees); 'alite ko mena, the 'alite is 
 
 turning red. Mota mena, ripe, 
 menanga'ini v. tr., to do a thing perfectly. 
 
 menasl v. tr., to break into pieces, ddu menasi, 
 hile menasi, tnamenamena, ha'amena- 
 mena. 
 
 mengo a shellfish (Oliva sp.). 
 
 mere, mere'l pers. pron., dual 1, excl., we two: 
 used as subject or as object of verbs 
 and prepositions; jnere'i is used also (a) 
 following 'emere'i or i'emere'i as subject, 
 and (b) suffixed to nouns, dhulamere'i. 
 
 mero to be white in color; uhune e lai mero, his 
 hair is white. 
 
 meru'e S. as were, used as subject of verb. 
 
 mi 1. ('Ahi'a, U.), as 'ami 1. 
 
 mi 2. article, used only in the phrase mi sola, 
 a piece of any cloth. 
 
 mi 3. verb suffix, inu intimi. 
 
 mimi 1. to make water, urine. 2. the bladder. 
 Mota meme, to urinate; Polynesian 
 jnimi. 
 
 mimisi v. tr., to spurtle on (of juice, etc.); 
 e mimisie maaku, it squirted in my face. 
 
 mimisi maa 1. a tree (Excoecaria sp.). 2. the 
 mantis, walking-stick insect, which 
 spurts out a liquid when touched. Viti 
 mimi mala, Mota ynemes mala. 
 
 minga-(na, nl) S., as hikana; '0 ngdu mingana, 
 did you eat of it? 
 
 miu pron., plural 2, sulHxed to noun. 
 
 mo plural article used with nouns beginning 
 with the letter o: mo ola, mo one, also 
 colloquially mo 'inoni; huni lu'ue mo 
 ola ineii, to remove my goods. 
 
 moa S., V. i., to vomit. 
 moana v. n., its vomit, 
 moata'lnl tr. 
 
 mode to be listless, to faint; saeku e mode, I 
 am listless. 
 
 moka to wax old, to be fusty (of bags, etc.). 
 
 moke, momoke 1. a hand net used in openings 
 (la'ataha) of the shore reef. 2. to use a 
 hand net; moke ana pusu 'esi, to net 
 whales; i sarona moke dmu, in your 
 sight, lit., opposite your net; uselie 
 moke, to make a net; hu'o ni moke, a 
 casting net. 
 
 mola 1. V. i., to heal (of a wound or sore). 
 
 mola 2. V. 1., to fail, to miss; used with poss. 3. 
 ha'amola. 
 molahi tr., e molahie 'oto, it failed. 
 
 mola 3. a numeral, 10,000, used properly of 
 yams, molai uhi; followed by genitive 
 i, S., ni, U.; denotes also a countless 
 number; may be used for counting men. 
 hu'e kire konie mola, a concubine; walu 
 mola ni ola, all things. 
 molata-(na) n., molatana nga ola, innumer- 
 able things. Florida mola, a great 
 number. 
 
 mola 4. adv., merely, only; followed by genitive 
 i. lae molai rako, go gently; nga 
 ta'ata'a ini mola, only one person; 
 e ta'ewau mola, e ta'e mola wau, it makes 
 no difference; 'oto mola, 'oto molana, S., 
 'oto molani, U., 'oto mola 'ie, S., 'oto 
 mola iniltou, U., all mean just now. 
 
 mola 5. 'ano mola, good ground.
 
 63 
 
 MUNI 
 
 mola'a adj., free, without price; tale'i inn 
 mola'a, just drink without price. 
 
 mole V. tr., to stain, to daub with pigments; n., 
 pigments, paint; salo molernole.red clouds. 
 
 moli 1. n., wild orange, holoholomolita'a. 
 Mota mwol, Viti moli. 
 
 moli 2. Su'ti Moli, a boat harbor at the north- 
 west corner of Ulawa. 
 
 moli 3. ivala'imoli, true, i. c, to speak true. 
 Niue moli, true. 
 
 molu pers. pron., plural 2, you; used as subject 
 or as object of verb or preposition; more 
 restricted in meaning than 'omu; molu 
 is also used (a) following 'omolu or 
 i'omolu as subject, (b) suffixed to a 
 noun. dhiUamoln. 
 
 momo V. i., to squeeze, to press on each side; 
 momo lalamoa, a flat armlet of tridacna 
 shell, so called from its being used to 
 squeeze men to death. 
 momo'i tr., to bring side by side. 
 
 momo 2. rubbish, sweepings. Motu momo. 
 
 momoke moke. 
 
 momoru adj., small, little. 
 
 monaki cuttlefish; bote ni vionaki, the bone 
 of the cuttlefish. 
 
 mono adv., follows the verb, «a may be added; 
 gives clearness, explains lae mone, go! 
 kolu mone, let us be gone; qongiku e lo'o 
 mone 'olo, my time is even now come; 
 i'oe ni monena, it is you indeed. 
 
 mono U.. to live apart; koro 'a mono 'oto 
 i Kalana, they two live apart in Kalona. 
 
 moro, moro'i 1. pers. pron., dual 2, you two: 
 used as subject or as object of verb or 
 preposition: used in addressing a mar- 
 ried woman, or a woman with a child, 
 or a chief, or even a party: moro is also 
 used (a) following i'omoro as subject, 
 (b) suffixed to a noun; rnoro tdria paro 
 i'ola i 'est ka'el'e laelae, j-ou launch 
 away the canoe into the sea, let us go. 
 
 moro-(ku) 2. n., buttock. 
 
 moru'e S., pers. pron., dual 2, yon two; used 
 as subject or following 'omoru'e. 
 
 morumoru 1. IJ., small, little, momoru. 2. 
 broken in pieces, qa'a morumoru. Lau 
 ynorumoru. 
 
 mota n., a mortar for pounding areca nut; used 
 by toothless persons. 
 
 motaa, motaahi S., v. tr., to cause agony to. 
 ha'amolaahi, hulemolaa. 
 motaahinge v. n., agony. 
 motaahila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 mou, moumou 1. v. i., to be broken, rara 
 moumoH. hdu moumou, an isolated 
 rock; e to'o mou, it has ceased; sae sa'a 
 maholo wa ke mou, thought shall not 
 be parted and shall not cease; malau 
 mou, an islet; e mou ue ana, still in 
 desuetude. 
 mousi, moute'ini tr., to break (of a rope, 
 etc.V ha'amousi. radu moumousie mu 
 'i'eli, they broke the rope; adoma'i mousi, 
 U., to decide, to dare. 
 mouta-(na, ni) e to'o moulana, it has ceased. 
 mousila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 mou, moumou 1 (continued). 
 
 moute'i, moumoute'i partic, one, only. 
 mwela mouti'i, only child; ta'ala'a ola 
 moumouU'i, one thing only; ne'isae 
 7noule'i, S., to determine, to dare. Mota 
 mot, Polynesian molu. 
 
 mou 2. U. (dialectic), forest, bush. » mou, oha 
 ni mou. ma'usu. Mota mwol. 
 
 mouholo V. i., to break across, holo. saeku 
 e mouholo, I have no spirit left. 
 
 mouqeli S., to get ready, to prepare, to be 
 ready; used with suffixed pronouns ku, 
 mu, na, dii instead of du, etc.; e mouqe- 
 line, it is prepared. 
 
 moutoli v. i., to cease, to be ended. 
 
 mu 1. pron., sing. 1, suffixed to noun: thine; 
 nimemu, thy hand. 
 
 mu 2. plural article, the: mui is used with nga 
 in nga mui ta'a, what things; nga mui 
 tola, paths. 
 
 mudi 1. midrib of leaf of coconut, etc.; the 
 suffixed pronoun nd may be added. 
 mudine; inudii niu, mudii sa'o, midrib 
 of coconut, of sago; ynaai mudi, a gorge 
 made of sago midrib or of tortoise shell 
 for catching flying-fish, the bait being 
 the flesh of the claws of the coconut 
 crab (Birgus latro, dsusu). 
 
 mudi 2. shear legs, maai mudi S., luyii mudi U. 
 
 mudimudi 1. U., a bird, yellow honey-sucker. 
 
 mudimudi 2. U., mwimwidi S., to drip; 
 mudimudi lira, to drip. 
 
 muini eta muini, some; hahira diana ikire 7iga 
 muini lo'u ka'a diana, on the good and 
 the bad; muini e mwd'i, the rich people; 
 muini e i'o mwakule, those who have 
 no ties; muitii liuta'ana a mwane 'ie e 
 qao'i ne, more than those which this 
 man has done, ini 1. 
 
 mumu 1. U., mumua qangoqango, to decorate a 
 nose ornament with porpoise teeth. 
 
 mumu 2. to close in on; 'ala mumu, to close in 
 like jaws. 
 mumu'i tr., to place adjoining, close 
 together. 
 
 mumu 3. mumulou, wild men, traditional. 
 M. A., p. 355. 
 
 mumuni 1. v. tr., to hide, to conceal. 2. to be 
 hidden. Motntahuni, Mota tavun, San 
 Cristoval ahuni, Mao. nunumi. dmuni. 
 
 muna'i, mune'i U., adv., used in conditional 
 sentences: subjunctive; kira 'a mune'i 
 lae, were they to go. 
 
 muni U. 1. {du) prep, dative, for, to; e qa'ike 
 munia nga tnaenga, not unto death; 
 munia nga taha, what for. 
 
 muni U. 2. adv., in order that: used as optative 
 with verbal particle 'e: used with ana, if. 
 muni 'e lae mai, let him come; muni 'e 
 {mun'e) lae, gently; muni ne'e loosia, 
 ta'ane na'a 'unua, if I see him I shall 
 tell it; muni nge'ia 'c lae mai. if he come; 
 ana muni kir'c 'unua, if they say it; 
 muni 'ua. why, what for; nau 'unua uri 
 muni ne'e mae 'olo, I thought I was done 
 for; tdu muni, to endeavor. Mota 
 mun, Sa'a huni.
 
 MUNO 
 
 64 
 
 muno n., caterpillar, chrysalis. 
 
 musi-(,ku) 1. U., finger or toe nail, mwisi, vS. 
 2. operculum, met., a piece; mtisii elili, 
 operculum of Turbo petholatus. 
 
 MW 
 
 mwa, mwamwa 1. prefix of condition as ma 1. 
 nnuamwanolo, mwahiohio. 
 
 mwa 2. U., plural article, used before words 
 beginning with a vowel or with h; 
 ni'ivai. 
 
 mwa 3. prefix to nouns expressing relationship, 
 mil viwa'asine, ro mwa'adine. 
 
 mwa 4. U., exclamation of surprise. 
 
 mwaa 1. n., a snake; mivaa dili salo, a snake 
 observed as an omen; saro ni mwaa, 
 zigzag pattern in inlaying; 7nwaa 
 nuenuala, glistening, brilliant, snake. 
 Mota mwata. In M. A., p. 221, mali e 
 sato should be mwaa dili salo. 
 
 mwaa 2. n., a disease, lupus, mwaa e hare 
 ana, he was eaten of worms. 
 
 mwaa 3. lemi mwaa, U., full moon; oku mwaa, 
 October. 
 
 mwa'a 4. v. i., to be extinct (of fire or lamp). 
 mwa'asi tr., to extinguish. 
 
 mwaadalo to be innocent, meek. 
 
 mwa'adine n., with ro, ro mwa'adine, two first 
 cousins, 'adi. 
 
 mwaadule earthworm. 
 
 mwaamwaa w-orm, maggot; mwaamwaa puri, 
 trepang, beche-de-mer; mwaamwaa ni 
 ngali, U., woodlouse. VVango mwaa- 
 mwaa. 
 
 mwaamwaala adj., infested with worms. 
 
 mwaani (au) prep., from, out of, since: the 
 pron. sing. 3 is suffixed as anticipatory 
 object; used in comparison of the 
 adjective, mwaani ta'a, from what; 
 'ulu mwaani, to overlook; dau toli 
 mwaani, to submit to, to be subject to; 
 ■pola mwaani, to desert a ship; e la 'oloi 
 'aela mwaani nonola, it is worse than 
 yesterday; mwaanie mu lata'alanga, 
 from evils; mwaanie maenga, from 
 death; e pdine mwaanie, bigger than he; 
 maleledi oraha'a mwaanie ngaini, to 
 rebuke a man for sin; ore mwaani, to be 
 left out. Wango bani, Epi deni. 
 
 mwa'asine n., brethren; a mwa'asine, the 
 brother; mu mwa'asine, the brethren; ro 
 mwa'asina, U., two sisters-in-law. 'asi 2. 
 
 mwada, mwa'amwada S.. mwadamwada U. 1. 
 to beat out seeds, to thresh; 'uri mwada, 
 to tramp out seeds, 
 mwadamwada'i U., tr. 
 
 mwada 2. U., to lift. 
 
 mwadamwadamu v. i., to masticate, to grind 
 the teeth (of pig). 
 
 mwadau, mwamwadau to be easy, possible, 
 soft, pliable; ana ke ola mwamwadau. if 
 possible; mu le'u e mwadau, places easy 
 to traverse, 
 mwadausi tr., to be easy for any one. 
 ha'amwadausi. e ka'a mwadausieu ni lae, 
 not easy for me to go. Wango mwadau. 
 
 mwadi (na) the old yam from which the new 
 has grown; mwadi ni uhi. m^uadine, its 
 old yam. 
 
 mwado U., ground, soil, 'u'umwado. i mwado, 
 on the ground; mwado huu, the earth; 
 urtiuru mwado, anklet of shell money, 
 lit., gather dirt; mwado mwakita'a, mud; 
 wahawaha ni mwado, dust; mwado waru, 
 red earth. Florida 7neto; Espiritu 
 Santo metu, dirty; Mota maeto; San 
 Cristoval inato, ground. M. L., p. 57. 
 
 mwadola adj., covered with earth, dirty. 
 
 Mwado 'a a village on the west side of Ulawa; 
 Su'u i Teluhia, its boat harbor; 'Ei'ei, its 
 spring. 
 
 mwae 1. S., n., person, fellow, man; demon- 
 strative na may be added; ta'a 6 may be 
 used in conjunction; mwaena, hey, youl 
 mu mwaena, you men! a mwaena. So- 
 and-so, such a one; me'i mwae, tnwei 
 tnwaena, mwaena, mu mwae, all used in 
 exclamations; mwae ta'a, poor fellow; 
 mil mwae ta'a, poor chaps; poo ke ne'i 
 lalamoa ko 'olisic 'oto a tnwaena, the pig 
 is the victim in place of the man. 
 Nggao, Ysabel mae; Bugotu tnae, mas- 
 culine article. 
 
 mw'ae, mwa'emwa'e 2. to be willing, to be 
 diligent, to assent, to rejoice, ha'imwa- 
 'eta'i, ilenimwa'e. mwa'e haahi, said 
 of those who clap their hands as an 
 accompaniment to dances; kire mwa'e 
 tolea, they consented to carry it. 
 mwa'emwa'enga v. n., willingness. 
 mwa'esi tr., to assent to. 
 mwa'esilana gerund. Wango mwae. 
 
 mwaelo used with numeral ro; ro mwaelo ana, 
 his two wives. 
 
 mwa'elu adj., crooked, bent. Wango niwaeru. 
 
 mwa'emwa'eta (na, ni) n., rejoicing; ke sulu 
 i mwa'emwa'ctani, sing for joy over. 
 
 mwaera adj., prolific, abundant, increasing. 
 
 mwaero, mwaeroero adj., soft, pliable. 
 
 mwahi to be crooked, bent. 
 
 mwahiohio adj., swayed, bent by the wind. 
 hiohio. 
 
 mwai 1. U., plural article: when used before a 
 vowel or h, mwa is used; in certain words 
 the vowels coalesce, e. g., mwauhi, yams. 
 Used of reciprocal relationship; Wango 
 mwani; Lau mwai. 
 
 mwai 2. U., mwei S., used with adj. lata'ala 
 or ta'a to express an endearing or com- 
 miserative sense. 
 
 mwa'i 3. n., a hand-bag, a bag slung over the 
 shoulder, haa i mwe'i, earnest money, 
 money given as earnest for the buying 
 of a wife; mwela ni mwe'i, a bought 
 child; hd'u mwe'i, to plait a bag. 4. the 
 fiber used in weaving a mwd'i. 5. v. i., 
 to be rich, to have bags of money; 
 muini e mwd'i, the rich. 
 
 mwaidi n., cockroach; the small indigenous 
 variety, the larger imported one. 
 
 mwaihana n., used with numeral ro; ro mwai- 
 hana, two brothers-in-law.
 
 65 
 
 MV/ANE 
 
 mwaihei U., interrogative plural, who, what 
 
 people, 
 mwaiki v. n., to stand on tiptoe, to reach out to. 
 mwa'ile cycas (Cycas circinalis). Mota mwele. 
 mwaimwei S., to be small, ha'amwdimwei'e. 
 
 e mwaimwei 'aela, it is very small; 
 
 helehele mwdiniwei, seventh and eij^hth 
 
 days of the moon; lo'a wdi mweimwei, 
 
 February. 
 mwaimweiha v. n., used with poss. 3; 
 
 mwdimweihaana, when small, a small 
 
 size. 
 mwaimv/eisi tr., to be too small for. Tolo 
 
 niaimai. 
 mwaka 1. v. i., to despise; used with poss. 3. 
 mwakata'ini tr., to despise, to make naught 
 
 of. 
 mwakata'inila-(ku) gerund. Wango. 
 
 mwagilaini. 
 mwaka 2. green, unripe, not full grown; tihi 
 
 mwaka, January. 
 mwakana S., n., ground, earth, me'i mwakana. 
 
 mivakana loho, dust; mwakana wdi, 
 
 moist ground; vgangai mwakana, dust; 
 
 dangona mwakana, trees of the field; 
 
 pmdie mwakana, to tread the earth. 
 mwakano S., n., ground; » mwakano, on the 
 
 ground; kolune mwakano, the surface of 
 
 the earth; wdi e lama liaahi ue kolune 
 
 mwakano, the water covered still the 
 
 face of the earth; wdi e vtapipi 'ohe 'oto 
 
 tainie koltcne mwakano, whether the 
 
 water had receded off the face of the 
 
 earth, 
 mwakano'a covered with earth, dirty. 
 
 Probably connected with 'ano, earth. 
 
 Lau gano, Mota tano, earth, 
 mwakatereha'ini tr., to flout, to put to scorn. 
 
 mwakitereha'inila-(ku) gerund, 
 mwaketo U., adj., crooked, bent, 
 mwakita'a U., adj., clayey; mwado vnvakila'a, 
 
 mud. 
 mwako 1. v. i., to pierce, to prick. 
 
 mwakoli tr.; ona e mwakolie 'aeku, the spike 
 
 of the ona has got into my foot. 
 mwakolila-(ku) gerund. 
 mwako 2. v. tr., to set open; nou mwakoa maa, 
 
 I set a door open, 
 mwakomwako'a U., adj., prickly. 
 mwakule S., adj., with no ties, unattached, 
 
 bare; follows the verb; muini e i'o 
 
 mwakule, they have no ties, 
 mwakuku adj., loose, slack. 
 mwala 1. n., people; nga mwala, a people, nation; 
 
 mwala ineu, my people; mwala 'urei 
 
 tei ni 'ie; mwala ko ku'ie, people mocked 
 
 him. 
 Mwala 2. Malaita; called also in Lau Mala and 
 
 in Tolo Mara, 
 mwalamwala'a adj., ashamed. 
 mwali to foregather at a harbor waiting to 
 
 embark. Viti melo. 
 mwalo 1. n., a sunken rock, a reef; mwalo 
 
 suhu kao, a rock that pierces the bottom. 
 
 Mota mwalo. 
 mwalo 2. maalimwalo, a platform, a staging, 
 mwamwadilita U., adj., without blemish. 
 
 mwamwadoltta i'o mwamwadolela. patient. 
 
 mwamwakaula'a adj., of medium lightness 
 cf. mwamwate. 
 
 mwamwaki S., wantonly; horo mwaimvaki, to 
 kill wantonly, 
 mwamwakinge v. n., wantonness. 
 
 mwamwako'a S., adj., prickly, dango mwa- 
 mwako'a. 
 
 mwamwanoto adj., quiet. 
 
 mwamwanga S., a few; used with ini 2. 
 
 mwamwangaini odd ones, some here and 
 there. 
 
 mwamwasu U., wala'anga mwamwasu, up- 
 braiding words. 
 
 mwamwasu'i S., partic, of none effect, in vain; 
 kire ko mwamwasu'i eni htingunge, they 
 become unfruitful. 
 
 mwamwate S., to be of light weight, ha'amwa- 
 mwalc'a. Viti mamada, Hght; Niuc 
 tnama. 
 
 mwamwatekola n., dust, flue, rubbish. 
 
 mwana 1. v. i., to cover, to feign, to pretend. 
 mwana haalii, to make pretence, 
 mwananga v. n., mwananga haahilana, a 
 
 cloaking, 
 mwanamwana n., a covering, hatchway 
 closure, deck. 
 
 mwana 2. S., used to express the numerals 
 above ten {pe'i 2); used also with units 
 to express the tens, mana U., awala 
 mwana 'enite 'olo, how many more than 
 ten; awala mwana rue, ten and two, 
 twelve; lolola mwana hai, 440. Viti 
 jnani. 
 
 mwanamwana'a adj., decorated. 
 
 mwane 1. n., a male, man, boy; added to proper 
 names and to certain other words to 
 denote sex distinction, nga mwane, a 
 man; mu mwane, the males; mwane, mu 
 mwane, ro mwane, all used as exclama- 
 tions; mwane poo, mwane 'usu, bcirrow 
 pig, dog; a mwane kenlurion, the cen- 
 turion; mwane ineu, my dear fellow; 
 mwane ana a ola. such-and-sucii a fellow; 
 mwane ana a Uqe, the man called Uqe; 
 mama'u ni mwane, a fearful lot of men, 
 beyond count; hola ni mwane, all the 
 boys who are eligible for ha'amalaohu; 
 tie mwane, ini mwane, male; mwane 
 kurekure, a witch doctor; haka lade 
 mwane, a vessel in the labor trade; 
 mwane maa'i ineu, my dear fellow; uri 
 qa'une nge mwane, I mean thut the head 
 is the male; sdu mwane, to commit 
 murder; sdu mwanenga, nuirder. 2. 
 used to denote sex. ola mu'anc, male; 
 mwane kdule, male frigate-bird; e lai 
 mwane diana, fine, beautiful. 3. belong- 
 ing to males, holy, ola ni mwane; name 
 ni mwane, church; kara r.i mwane. 
 yam pudding {hinanga) used in sacri- 
 fices. Gilbert Islands /):ane, Florida 
 mane, Malay mon, omani, vianesh. 
 
 mwane 4. adv., lest, mwane da wa kolu 
 mac, lest we die; mwane e 'ue, win- 
 not; mwane 'o ro'urohute'inie ngaralakn, 
 hold not thy peace at my tears; mwane
 
 MWANE 
 
 66 
 
 mwane 4 (continued). 
 
 'o opaopaa Li'oa mwaani'emi, take not 
 
 the Spirit from u=. 
 mwanemwane 1. male (of trees), not producing 
 
 fruit; dango mwanemwane, a staminate 
 
 tree. 2. {kii) n., testicles. 
 Mwanipue a village at Sa'a, site of the present 
 
 mission school. 
 mwanole garfish, caught by trolling from a 
 
 rock or by means of a line at the tail of 
 
 a kite {sa'o ni 'aholo) flown from a canoe, 
 
 the bait is spiderweb {lawa) or a piece 
 
 of tow. lilie'i, to cast for garfish; hike, 
 
 ten garfish. Fagani mwarore. 
 mwanganga U., a few. mwamwanga, S. 
 
 mwanganga ni He, a few persons, 
 mwaohe adj., pliable. 
 mwaolaola adj., shaky, rickety, not firm. 
 
 mwaolaolanga n., sedition, 
 mwaopu n., egg; hoi mwaopii ni kue, the egg 
 
 of a fowl, 
 mwaora to run (of vines). 
 mwaoroha'i partic, bent, bowed, stooping. 
 
 San Cristoval mwaoro. 
 Mwarada a village on the west coast of Ulawa; 
 
 Waingile, a rocky promontory there, 
 mwaramwara (na) n., a stalk, a twig, 
 mwarau adj., thin, 
 mware'a U. 1. adj., in good health; sapeku e 
 
 qd'i mware'a, I am not feeling well. 
 
 2. lively, animated (of speech); mivai 
 
 keni e'asi qale wala'awala'a mware'a, 
 
 what drawling women, 
 mwarete U., hou mwaretei qd'u, skull, 
 mwari to be ailing, noko mweri. ha'amwdri. 
 
 ynwdri taha, U., to recover from wounds, 
 mwarita'a U., a wounded person. Wango 
 
 marl, a wound, 
 mwarite coir, fiber of coconut; mwaritei niu, 
 
 sennit; mwaritei haa, a strand of shell 
 
 money, 
 mwarohi U., adj., easy, possible; 'ura mwarohi, 
 
 to be possible, 
 mwasi, mwa'imwesi S., mwasimwasi U., to 
 
 laugh; mwdsi mwaani, to laugh at a 
 
 person, 
 mwasinge v. n. laughter. 
 mwasie'ini to laugh at, to laugh to scorn. 
 
 ha'amwdsie'ini. 
 mwasuhurete U., a chink, a crack, mwa 1. 
 
 siihu. 
 mwau S., n., a boy, lad, nga mwau; kele mwau 
 
 ineu, my little boy; mwaune, vocative, 
 
 boy. 
 mwaumwe S., to be naked, 
 mwaumweule adj., foolish. 
 mwa'uu adj., disorderljs ^fl^ mwa'uu, mutiny, 
 
 rebellion. 
 mwei S., mwai U., used with tata'ala or ta'a in 
 
 commiseration, of males, as kei is of 
 
 women; mwei ta'a alaha, dear lord (of 
 
 persons in authority). 
 mwela n., child, nga w.wela, mu mwela; ta'ata'a 
 
 mwela moute'i, an only child; mwela ni 
 
 mwe'i, a bought child; mwela ni nume, 
 
 a son of the house; hda ni mwela awara, 
 day after full moon; kele mwela, little 
 
 mwela (continued). 
 
 child; nga mwela e lodo, a child is con- 
 ceived, 'omu ke mala mwela kdu, become 
 as children; e mduri ana mwela, to be 
 delivered of a child; tangoni mwela, all 
 the children, 
 mwemwela plural. Motu mero, memero. 
 
 mweta foliage plant (Coleus sp.). 
 
 mwidimwidi S., mudimudi U., to drip. 
 
 mwine to be thin (of liquids). 
 
 mwirimwiri skirts, fringes. 
 
 mwisi (ku) U., must S., finger-nail, toe-nail. 
 Savo karakara bisi, Mota pisui, fingers; 
 Nifilole bisi nime. 
 
 mwomwona to be rich, fat (of viands). Samoa 
 momona. 
 
 Mwouta a village on the east coast of Ulawa; 
 its landing-place is Su'u i Die'i. 
 
 N 
 
 In certain words there is a change of n to I; 
 
 Sa'a ddnume middle, Ulawa daluma. cf. also 
 
 ni and li genitives. M. L., p. 212. 
 
 na 1. copulative, and; with uri thus, na uri I 
 mean, that is, used in explanations. 
 na taa, U., but. 
 
 na 2. U., pers. pron., used with the verbal 
 particles 'a, 'anai. na'a lae 'oto. I am 
 going; na'a nai lae, I shall go; nge na'asi 
 tduri, then said I. 
 
 na 3. used in numeration, mii poo na, mu menu 
 na, pigs, birds, e hane niu na, he 
 climbed for coconuts and — ; e hali pua 
 na, he broke off areca nuts and — . Used 
 in phrases: ha'ike na, oh no; su'uri na, 
 not so; ko urine ta'ane na, even suppos- 
 ing it were so. 
 
 na 4. verbal suffix; ara arand, qao qaond, hi'u 
 hi'une, lo'u lo'une. 
 
 na 5. demonstrative suffix, follows noun and 
 adverb, that, there, these, those; may 
 be joined to preceding word; mwaend, 
 you fellow; a porond, the person; urine, 
 urinena, thus; ile'une, there, that place; 
 viiiini liuta'ana a mwane 'ie e qao'i ne, 
 more than those which this man has 
 done; ana e tahanie maamu ne, in that 
 he opened your eyes; nge ke 'ue kd'u ne, 
 how then will it be. At times equiva- 
 lent to the and that, me'i oland, the 
 thing; hdnne mdine, this land; talai 
 hetine, row of teeth. Malay ne. 
 
 na 6. pron., sing. 3 suffixed to noun, equivalent 
 of genitive, nitne, hand; nimand, his 
 hand; i reune wdi, by the side of the 
 water; he'une salo, stars of heaven; 
 dangond mwakana, trees of the field; 
 hirune 'ahe, troublesome waves. Mela- 
 nesia na passim, Malay nga, Malagasy 
 ny. 
 
 na 7. noun ending, used with nouns which 
 express relationship; ro hd'i malahune, 
 ro hd'i nikana, mu he'i maamana. Maori 
 na (laina), Niue na {hoana), Viti na 
 (lamana). 
 
 na 8. stem of nakue, nana, etc., with a general
 
 67 
 
 HE 
 
 nM 8 (continued). 
 
 notion of appertaining, possessing. Mota 
 
 no 1, Florida ni. 
 na'a, na'asi U., pers. pron., and verbal particle 
 
 with illative; I. I am, I thereupon. 
 
 muni ne'e loosia, la'ane na'a 'unua, if I 
 
 see him I shall tell it; nge na'asi liiiiri, 
 
 then said I. 
 naanaa for ngaangaa, eat, used to children, 
 nada, nada'elu poss. 2, plural 3; for them. 
 
 nd 8. 
 nahi U., knife (English). 
 naho surf, wave; hat naho, a wave; e ro hdi naho, 
 
 two waves; mu he'i naho, waves; awaa- 
 
 watana naho, roar of surf; papa naho, a 
 
 breaching fish; qa'awa'ali naho, a 
 
 breaker, 
 naho'a S., nahola U., rough sea on the coast; 
 
 e nahola, it is rough. Mota nawo, sa 
 
 water, 
 nahunehu U., 'at nehunehu, a rod, a stick. 
 na'i verbal suffix used intransitively, loo 
 
 loona'i. Mota nag. 
 naihi S., nahi U., knife (English). 
 na'ioi transitive suffix, loo loona'ini. 
 naka, naka'elu poss. 2, dual 1, incl.: for us 
 
 two. ni 8. 
 nakara'i poss. 2, dual 1, incl.: for us two. nd 8. 
 nako V. i., to strengthen; nakolana mu suuraa'i, 
 
 strengthening the corners, 
 naku, nakuneku U., to sit; the form neku is 
 
 employed without a preceding * or ti. 
 
 neku kd'u, be seated. Used in Sa'a to 
 
 signify session at a feast; mwala ko neku, 
 
 the people seat themselves. 
 nakuma v. n., U., na'unekume S., a seat. 
 nakusi determ., to occupy a place. 
 
 ha'andkusi. Wango nagu. 
 naku'e S., naku'a U., poss. 2, sing. 1, for me. 
 naku'i poss. 2, sing. 1, for me (of many things), 
 nala'i, nanala'i U., to rub in the hands, as 
 
 leaves. Wango nora. 
 namami poss. 2, plural 1, excl.: for us. 
 name U., v. i., to taste; name ahonga, to taste 
 
 and try. 
 nameli tr. Mota nam, Wango name, 
 
 Florida nami, Sulu anam, Malay nanam- 
 
 iwei, Maori taiiii, to smack lips, 
 namelu poss. 2, plural 1, excl.: for us. 
 namere'i poss. 2, dual 1, excl.: for us two. 
 namo 1. a landlocked harbor; i Qd'una Namo, 
 
 North Cape, Ulawa. 
 Namo 2. an inlet of Port Adam, Malaita. 
 
 Samoa nawo, a place in the lagoon 
 
 abounding in fish; Gilbert Islands namo, 
 
 a harbor; Mota namwo, lagoon in reef. 
 Namona i Su'u Namona, i Natnona. the open- 
 ing in the reef at Sa'a. 
 namu'e S., namu'a U.. poss. 2, sing. 2: for thee, 
 namu'i as ndmu'e, but used of many things 
 
 for one person, 
 nana poss. 2, sing. 3: for him, her, it; e lio hunie 
 
 huni hu'e nana, he chose her for his wife, 
 nanako S., to be sticky, to stick, lalako, U. 
 nanakumae to be gentle, harmless, ndku, 
 
 maenoto. 
 nanama to be powerful. 
 
 nanama (continued). 
 
 nanamanga v. n., power; nanamanga 
 para'itana mu li'oa, power over the 
 spirits. 
 nanama'ini tr., to put power into, ha'ana- 
 nama'ini. Mota mana, an invisible 
 spiritual force or influence; Polynesian 
 mana id. (metathetic). 
 
 nanamu to travel fast, to be swift. 
 
 nanau to be taught, to be wise, ka'ananau. 
 sue nanau, S., to be wise of heart; sae 
 nanaunge, wisdom. Florida naunau, 
 Wango ha'ananaua, Mota vatanau, to 
 learn, to teach, 
 nanauhi v. tr., to approach, draw up to, 
 draw near, go up to. Wango nanau. 
 
 nani poss. 2, plural 3, neuter: for them (things); 
 nani rato, for the elders; dsu nani 
 'inoni, of work not faithfully done. 
 
 nanoa'i U., to accustom; ha'ananoa'i. 
 
 nano'i U., to produce pain (of an arrow, omo). 
 
 nanga 1. the barb of an arrow. 2. the fin of a 
 fish, hoi nanga. 
 
 nangaii'a U., flashing (of lightning). 
 
 nangaliro'a U., flashing (of lightning), cf. 
 rangariro'a, S. 
 
 nao 1. numeral, a hundred (of yams), nga nao 
 ni lihi. 
 
 na'o, na'ona'o (ku) 2. front, before; i na'oku 
 (face, time) before me; na'ona dara, 
 forehead; na'ona i'ola, the bow of a 
 canoe; hapa ni na'o, first quarter of the 
 moon; holai na'o, in former times; lo'o 
 na'o, front teeth; mu na'ona'o i mae, 
 armies; e korasie mu na'ona'o i mae, he 
 put to flight the ranks of the enemy. 
 
 na'o 3. v. i., to precede, to guide, to lead. 
 e hola'i na'o 'olo wau, he went away 
 first; a ola e na'oku 'olo. So-and-so 
 preceded me; 'o na'o ndka'elu, lead us 
 on; na'o talana, lead the way for him. 
 
 na'o 4. with locative i; ina'o of old, 'oto ina'o, 
 holai na'o, formerly'. 
 
 na'o 5. to approach, to steer, to go toward. 
 na'o susuhire, draw toward them; na'o 
 susu ana, to make straight on toward; 
 na'o uri, steer this way; na'o hao, keep 
 her away, 
 na'ohi tr., to steer. 
 na'ohila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 na'ola'ini tr., to do first, ha'ana'ola'ini. 
 Mota nagoi, face; Santa Cruz nao, 
 mouth. 
 
 na'o (ku) 6. a widow, na'ona a ola. So-and- 
 so's widow. Mota naro. 
 
 na'onga a deserted place, i na'onga, at the 
 old garden or deserted village; le'unge 
 e na'onga 'oto, the place is quite deserted. 
 
 nate a worm found in the beach sand and used 
 as bait for sea bream (»'e ni sane); 
 hdi nate, to scratch up sand looking for 
 the worms. 
 
 nau 1. U., pers. pron., sing. 1. I. 
 
 nau 2. a fruit tree. Mota nalu. 
 
 na'unekume S., n., a seat. ndku. 
 
 ne 1. pers. pron., sing. 1. I. used with verbal 
 particles ke, ke'i, S., and 'e, U., with ail
 
 NE 
 
 68 
 
 ne 1 (continued). 
 
 of which it coalesces as with illative si. 
 kau, neke leesie, please let me see it; 
 nekesi lae si'iri, I shall go to-day; nge 
 nesi teuri, thereupon I said; ne'e lae 
 ka'u, let me go; nau 'unua uri muni 
 ne'e mae 'olo, I thought I was done for; 
 na nesi ne'i 'amanui 'oto, and I shall be 
 your father; noko he'i lae lo'u mei na 
 nesi leesi'o lo'u, I shall come back and 
 shall see thee again. 
 
 ne 2. demonstrative, cf. na 4. 
 
 ne'e 1. S., contraction for ne'ie; ne'e ka'u, wait 
 a bit, stay. 
 
 ne'e 2. U., pers. pron., sing 1, ne and verbal 
 particle 'e. e qale ola ne'e adea, I saw 
 nothing; mtmi ne'e loosia, ta'ane 7ia'a 
 'unua, if I see him I shall tell it. 
 
 ne'ene'e U.. v., to whine. 
 
 ne'i, ne'ine'i S. 1. v. tr., to place, to put, to 
 appoint, ne'i koni, to lay up in store, 
 to make provision; ne'i siwe, to appoint 
 a sum as blood money. 2. to become, 
 to turn into, to be: ko ne'ie 'oto i'oe, if 
 it be thou; foo ko ne'i lalamoa ko 'olisie 
 'oto a mwaena, the pig becomes the 
 victim instead of the person; na nesi ne'i 
 'amamu 'oto, and I shall be your father. 
 
 ne'isae S., v. i., to think, to call to remem- 
 brance; ne'isae, exclamation, like any- 
 thing! ne'isae 'asi, to forgive; ne'isae 
 lete, to be set in intention; ne'isae 
 moute'i, to determine, to dare; ne'isae 
 su'ete'e, to be anxious about; ne'isae 
 tdlihe, to reach in thought; ne'isae 
 to'ole'e, to be anxious, 
 ne'isaenga v. n., thought, remembrance. 
 
 nekesi cf. ne 1. 
 
 nemo S., nimo U. 1. n., rain, ha'anemo. hoi 
 nemo, a rain squall; nemo raaraa, S. 
 nimo raaraa, U., drizzling rain, sun and 
 rain. 2. v. i., to rain, nenemo. 
 nemosi tr., to rain upon. 
 
 nena S., demonstrative; a ola nena, that thing. 
 
 nengenenge'a adj., glistening white. 
 
 nerenere n., a sea-bird, the kittiwake; nerenere 
 ni iqe, kittiwake of the lagoon. 
 
 nesi pers. pron, sing. 1 ; ne with illative si. 
 
 ni 1. genitive, of; sape ni 'inotii, men's bodies; 
 rato ni mwane, elderly male. (a) 
 expressive of purpose: ini ni ha' aurilana 
 'oto, a person to be saved ; kire hala ni lae, 
 they attempted to go; e dau ni ere, he 
 made to speak; e ka'a mwadausieu ni 
 lae, not easy for me to go; tala ni liu, 
 path to travel; hinou ni 'a'a'o, hook for 
 fishing; walo ni pa'asahu, a hook for 
 pa'asahu. (b) expressive of condition, 
 lae ni ramo, go in might; ngau ni pole, 
 eat to satiety; lae ni oraha'a, to go very 
 fast; lae 'oto ni mae, go like everything. 
 May be rendered by with or in: roytgo 
 ni 'elinge, to hear with the ear; ere ni sae, 
 to say with the heart; na ni leesie 
 palonga aku, and saw (in seeing) my 
 works, (c) used after tala'ae, U., 
 tala'ae ni lae, begin to go. (d) added 
 
 ni 1 (continued). 
 
 to verbal sufifix, a'ini, ha'ini, etc., transi- 
 tive force. Mota nia, with; Florida ni; 
 Fate ni. cf. genitive li 1. 
 
 ni 2. interrogative, (a) used to call attention, 
 ni mwaena? I say, you. (b) in the 
 sense of is that so. (c) added for 
 emphasis to atei, itei, S., ihei, U., nga 
 taa, S., nga taha, U.: nga taa ni 'oka 
 ngarase, what are you crying for; 
 mwala 'urei tei ni 'ie, whence are these 
 people? Viti li. 
 
 ni 3. demonstrative attached for emphasis to 
 nouns in Ulawa, to pronouns, adverbs 
 to si'iri and uri 2; may be reduplicated. 
 ngeni nou lac, and so I went; ngaini ni 
 eni usie, ngaini ni eni hohoro, one to his 
 merchandise, another to his trading; 
 a poroni. So-and-so; a laani. So-and-so; 
 ingc'i ni e qaoa, he it is who did it;^ 
 ienini, this. Wango ni. 
 
 ni 4. a detachable prefix to pronouns, nihou, 
 niparo, niivau, U. mu 'inoni mangoi 
 ola mola ni kire, S., men are but breath; 
 'oto to'ohuu ni ngeena, it is so in truth; 
 'omu ka'a to'olo'olamiu ike ni 'omu, ye 
 are not your own. Santa Cruz ni (in 
 7iinge); Florida ni. 
 
 ni 5. suff. pron., plural 3, neut. i talani. 
 
 ni 6. verbal suffix, sdii sduni. 
 
 ni'e n., a sleeping-mat made of coconut leaf; 
 hd'ii ni'e, to plait a coconut leaf into a 
 sleeping-mat. 
 
 Nielaha'u Cape Zelee, the southeast cape of 
 Malaita; 'ahe hirune i Nielaha'u, its 
 tide-rip. 
 
 nihisi v. tr., to refrain; noko nihisie nimeku, I 
 refrain my hand. 
 nihisila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 niho (ku) n., tooth, cf. alo'i, 'a)nwada, 
 'anguru. nihoi i'e, porpoise-teeth cur- 
 rency; ngdngadi niho, to gnash the 
 teeth; e rdpu ngurusie nihona, knocked 
 his teeth out; e sisie nihona, he bared 
 his teeth in a grin. 
 
 nihou U., demonstrative pron., this, here: 
 pronounced sometimes niheu. 
 
 ni'i, ni'ini'i 1. v. tr., to give, to present, with 
 poss. 1, to feed ni'i ana. ni'i ninte 
 haahi, to lay hands on; ni'i 'ae la'o i'ola, 
 to board a canoe; ni'i suu, ni'i toto, to 
 make a free gift. 
 ni'inge v. n., a gift, a giving, grace (late 
 
 use); e honu eni ni'inge, full of grace. 
 ni'ila-(ku) gerund, mdni ni'ilana sakanga 
 e mdni lae, the complete giving of power 
 is completely given, 
 
 ni'i 2. ni'i losi, to squeeze, to wring out water. 
 
 nike (ku) mother, aunt; for the vocative teitei 
 is generally used; with the personal 
 article a nike mother, i. e., our mother 
 in speaking of a particular person. 
 nikei ola, S., nikeni ola, U., a big thing, 
 lit., a mother thing; nikand, S., nikena, 
 U., ro hd'i nikand, ro hd'i nikena, wife 
 and child, mother and child; ro hd'i 
 nikand ineu, my wife and child.
 
 69 
 
 NORU 
 
 nima U., nume S., house; nima indu, my house; 
 maana nima, U., door; outeni nima, a 
 row of houses; sa'osa'oha'i'a ani nima, 
 an upper story in a house, a doubled 
 house. 
 
 nime, ninime S., nima, nimanima U. (ku), 1. 
 hand, arm, foreleg of animals, nimana 
 mu 'inoni, men's hands (collective 
 sense), nimanimada nga mwa 'inoni, U.; 
 talarta mu ninimei 'inoni. talana nimana 
 mu 'inoni, men's handiwork; to'o ro 
 nime, with just one's two hands, i. e., 
 unarmed; e lokunaa nime, he clenched 
 the fist; loloma'ini nime, to dip the 
 hands; nime i metimeuliku, my left hand; 
 nihisie nimeku, refrain my hand; ni'i 
 nime haahi, to lay hands on; ngdungeii 
 nime. armlet; penatana nime. the palm; 
 suiisuune nime, elbow; laalengasie nime- 
 mu, open your hand out flat; ngdu i 
 nimana nga keni, to live with a woman, 
 lit., to eat from the hand of a woman. 
 
 nime S., nima U. 2. food bowl; nime sarasara. 
 a large bowl for feasts; 'alo nime, to set 
 out bowls of food at a feast; kolune nime, 
 the outside of a bowl; la' ana nime, in the 
 bowl. 
 
 nimo U., nemo S., rain, /»o» nimo. ha'animo, 
 nimonimo. 
 nimoli tr., to rain on. 
 
 nine ha'anine, S., to accustom oneself, to be 
 accustomed to. 
 
 nini-(na, ni) U., n., kernel; ninina, its kernel, 
 its seed; nini kakis. an axe; nini uhi. a 
 yam; nini nana, a hana tuber. 
 
 niniho n.. a hornet; niniho alalia, a large kind 
 of hornet. 
 
 niniko'a adj., trembling, wincing, shivering 
 from cold or fright. 
 
 ninginingi a small bat. 
 
 niparo U., demonstrative pron., that, these, 
 there; follows the noun. 
 
 nifii, ninisi v. tr., to divide, to be the boundary; 
 ko nisi 'oto ile'u, this is the boundary; 
 nisi hue, to pull taro for eating, 
 nisite (na) v. n., boundary, limit; nisitana 
 
 hie, high-water mark. 
 nisila-(ku) gerund. Florida ngiti. 
 
 nite S., ruta U., ha'anite, ha'anila how often; 
 'enite, 'enilana, how many. Mota visa, 
 Motu yiida, Florida ngiha, Niue fiha. 
 
 niu the coconut palm (Cocos nucifera), its nut 
 ftga hoi niu; nga niu, mu niu, coconut 
 trees; niu tangalau, a heavily laden 
 coconut tree; 'ahe i niu tangalau, a tide- 
 rip between Ulawa and Sa'a; niu test, 
 a variety of nut with thin skin; niu 
 weru, a short-stemmed coconut with 
 yellowish fronds and reddish-skinned 
 fruit; hduheui i niu, U., nga hdihei niu, 
 S., a log of coconut wood; nga koru- 
 korui niu, a chip of coconut meat; niu 
 kokolu, a hard-fleshed coconut; luluhui 
 niu, a coconut frond; mudii niu, midrib 
 of the leaflet; mwaritei niu, sennit; pola 
 niu. to crack a nut; qela ni niu, 1,000 
 nuts; sdukai niu, to grate coconut; udi 
 
 niu (continued). 
 
 ni niu. 100,000 nuts; niu madeli, a fully 
 
 ripe nut; 'oni, coconut milk; teu, half 
 
 coconut shell; opu, the early stage of the 
 
 nut when the shell has not hardened; 
 
 poupou, a green nut; hoi qilo, a sprouting 
 
 nut; Tdui helu, 10,000 nuts; suhuli, to 
 
 make an opening in a green nut; taho 
 
 ta'a. to put a nut with the corpse in a 
 
 canoe; uhu, to husk nuts; 'ulu'ulu, a 
 
 dry nut; 'unu, the flower spathe. Poly- 
 
 ne.sian niu. 
 niu ni taoha a palm (Nipa fruticans). 
 niu'e, niuniu'e adj., tasting of coconuts (as 
 
 swine flesh) . 
 niule adj., possessing coconuts; hdnue e niule, 
 
 a place abounding in coconuts. 
 niui (ku) n., a nest. Florida 7iiku, Mota nigiu. 
 niweu U., demonstrative pron., that, those, 
 
 there; follows the noun, 
 no S., pers. pron., sing. 1, used with verbal 
 
 particle ko. noko I. 
 no'i, no'ino'i U., v. tr., to put, to place; no'i 
 
 kd'u, wait a while, stay. 2. to become, 
 
 to be; e no'i 'aela 'oto, it has become no 
 
 good. 
 no'ila-(ku) gerund. Viti noi, to dwell in. 
 no'iteu U., v. i., to delay, cf. ddu 2. 
 noko 1. V. i., to guard, to keep watch over, 
 
 noko haahi. 
 nokomi tr. 1. to guard. 2. U., to turn away, 
 
 to avert; ttokomi maa, to turn the eyes 
 
 away, 
 noko 2. cf. no. 
 noma S., n., a spear, generic term; noma adiedi, 
 
 a spear with grass plaiting on it. 
 nono V. i., to place the face against, to kiss, to 
 
 sniff; nono wdsu, to smell, 
 nononga v. n. 
 nono'i S., nonohi U., tr. 
 nono'ila- S., nonohila- U. (ku) gerund. 
 
 Florida nonginongi. 
 nono 'asi n., gnat, sandfly. 
 nono isuli n., a strong-smelling herb, 
 nonola yesterday, the locative t may precede. 
 
 nonola nga rodo, the night before last; 
 
 nonola wau, the day before yesterday; 
 
 nonola 'oto wau, three days ago; e la 
 
 'otoi 'aela mwaani nonola, it is worse 
 
 than yesterday. Mota nora, Florida 
 
 nola- 
 nonoro'a S., adj . red. noro. 
 nonowasu v. i., to snitT at, to smell; used with 
 
 suffixed pronouns ku, mu, nd; e nono- 
 
 u'dsune, he smelled him. 
 nonowasuli tr., to track by smelling, to get 
 
 the scent of. 
 nonganonga U., n., nonganonga lano, a ripple, 
 no'one adv., even, also: follows the word 
 
 qualified; to'olamu no'one ada, thine 
 
 they are. 
 noonoo (na, ni) n., tips of shoots of creeoers. 
 nooruhaana i nooruhaana, relying on, because 
 
 of. cf. noru. 
 noro, nonoro'a to be red. 
 noru, no'unoru S., norunoru U., v. i., to trust. 
 
 to rely; noru dile, S., to be disappointed
 
 NORU 
 
 70 
 
 noni, no'unoru (continued). 
 
 of one's hope; noru hono, to be wind- 
 bound (of a sailing party), 
 noruhe'ini tr. 
 noruhe'i v. i., nou sa'a noruhe'i pele, I shall 
 
 not be confounded. 
 i noruha v. n., used with poss. 3; relying on, 
 because of. Florida noru. 
 
 noruto'o used with poss. 3; to trust, to rely 
 on. to'o. 
 noruto'onga trust. 
 
 noto V. i., to cease, to desist, to be quiet. 
 mwamwanoto, maenoto. nolo vgtiti, to 
 cease speaking; noto 'arawa, to die 
 suddenly; noto 'arawanga, sudden death. 
 Wango ngoto. 
 
 nou S., pers. pron., sing. 1; used as subject of 
 verb. 
 
 nue, nunue v. i., to anoint; rumu nue maa, eye 
 ointment. 
 
 nuenuala adj., glistening, brilliant; mwaa 
 nuenuala, a glistening snake. 
 
 nuku, nunuku v. i., to kink, to have corruga- 
 tions in, to shrivel, wrinkle; miku dara, 
 to wrinkle the forehead; nuku maa, to 
 wrinkle, to screw up, the face, 
 nukumi tr., to crease, to fold. 
 
 nukunukula U., adj., shriveled up. 
 
 nume S., nima U., n., a house; nume ineu, my 
 house; nume ni mwane, church; » numaa 
 ola, at So-and-so's house; nume qala, 
 name of a cicada (empty house), its 
 presence taken as a sign of death, a bad 
 omen; hat nume, in the house; hull 
 nume, house site, plat; huui lume, a 
 collection of houses, village; iduidu 
 nume, to go from house to house, to 
 gad about; koluhaana nume, roof of a 
 house; maai nume, door; mara nume, in 
 front of the house, courtyard; mai i 
 nume, within the house; i mamalutana 
 nume, on the veranda; mwela ni nume, 
 child of the house; pipisine nume, eaves 
 of the house; mu poopootana nume, 
 foundations of the house; pungui nume, 
 a group of houses; riridine nume, eaves 
 of the house; ko ru'u i nume, goes back 
 into the house; ko sisilihie mu nume, 
 goes into houses; talaa nume, a besom; 
 to'utohu nume, to build a house; poo ni 
 nume, domesticated pig; wai nume, in 
 the house. Mota imwa, San Cristoval 
 rumwa, Wedau numa, Malay luma. 
 nunu 1. V. i., to quake (of ground), to be 
 unstable, loose (of a post). 2. v., and 
 n., earthquake, nga nunu e nunu, there 
 was an earthquake. Wango nunu, 
 Maori ruru. 
 nunu 3. (ku) n., shadow (of persons), reflection, 
 likeness, life, soul. M. A., p. 252; ko 
 tola 'aliho'i ana nunune, recovers its 
 soul; talo nunu, to photograph; nunu 
 e tola, there was an earthquake, 
 i nunuha used with poss. 3; because of, 
 owing to. Florida nunu, Malo nunu, 
 Bougainville Straits nono, Wango nunu. 
 
 nunu 4. nunuli, to sting (of the stinging trees) 
 
 nunula'o and apune wa'i. 
 nunu'e pulu nunu'e, to'o nunu'e, spotted, 
 
 specked. Wango nmui, dust. 
 nunuhe'i S., v. i., nunuhe'i qe'u, to enter, to 
 
 be entangled in. 
 nunula'o n., stinging-nettle tree, with large 
 
 leaves, often planted as a fence, nunu 4. 
 nunuli to sting, nunu 4. 
 nunulu V. i., to wither (of trees, etc.). Mota 
 
 nun, to shed leaves. 
 nunurete 1. v. i., to be feeble, to tremble from 
 
 weakness, nunu 1, rete. 2. n., trem- 
 bling, fear, 
 nusi U.. tahanga awa nusi, a measure, just on 
 
 a fathom, 
 nuto 1. n., a squid, caught by spearing with 
 
 a hair comb (arapa) fastened on a rod. 
 nuto, nutonuto 2. 'o'o nuto, to bow the head. 
 
 KG 
 
 The palatal nasal and has the sound of ng 
 
 in singer. 
 
 nga 1. article, demonstrative, a, the; used in 
 the singular number only; in Sa'a as a 
 rule nga is not used of parts of the body, 
 but in Ulawa it is freely used; nouns in 
 the singular may be used without nga 
 except when there is a sense of any or a. 
 nga taa, S., nga taha, U., what; ngaini, 
 S., ngaile, U., some one; nga'eta, S., 
 ngaite, U., another, a certain; ngaihei, 
 U., who. 
 
 nga 2. noun ending, added to verbs, adjectives 
 and other nouns: mae, to die; maenga, 
 death; mamaela'a, weak; mamaela' anga, 
 weakness; ngdngadi niho, to gnash the 
 teeth; ngdngadi nihonga, gnashing of 
 the teeth. Maori nga. 
 
 ngaa, ngaangaa v. tr., to eat; naanaa, used to 
 children; e ngaa 'oto, did he eat it; melu 
 ka'a ola ni ngaa, we have no food, lit., 
 thing of eating. 
 
 ngaangaa 1. v. i., to spread (of ulcers). 2. v. i., 
 to crack with a loud noise (of trees about 
 to fall). 
 
 ngadi 1. n., flint; me'i ngedi, S., masingedi, U.. 
 a flint; hdu ngedi, flint rock; kilu ni 
 ngedi, a hole in which flints are found. 
 2. an axe; ngddi weuwe, a stone axe 
 (grandfather's axe). Motu nadi, stone; 
 Florida nagi. Guppy "Solomon Is- 
 lands," p. 77. 
 
 ngadi, nga'ingedi 3. v. i., to be firm; suesuelaa 
 e ngddi, the foimdation is firm; hele 
 nga'ingedi, to hold fast. Wango nasi. 
 
 ngado (na, ni) i ngadona 'aena, before him, at 
 his feet. 
 
 ngae (ku) 1. suli qeri ngae, suli qeri i ngaena, 
 backbone. 2. lio i ngaei maa, S., lio 
 i ngaena maa, U., to look askance at, 
 to envy; lio i ngae maanga, n., envy, 
 nga'eta S., ngaite U., some, one, another, a; 
 'eta. He. nga'eta po'o ni nime, the other 
 hand; ana nga'eta dinge, on another day. 
 nga'l verb suffix used intransitively: usu usu- 
 nge'i. ngd'ini.
 
 71 
 
 NGE 
 
 ngaihei U., interrog. pron., who: plural 
 mwaihei. ngaihei e lae mdi, who came 
 here; kira mwaihei, who are they. 
 
 ngaile U., article, one, a: tie. ta'ana ngaile, 
 every one; 'eiana ngaile, the first; wala'a 
 wa'ewa'e ana ngaile, to speak excessively 
 to one. 
 
 ngaini 1. S.. article, one, a. ta'eta'ena ngaini, 
 every one; iteilana ngaini ka'a lae mdi. 
 no one came; 'etana ngaini, the first 
 one; e ka'a iteilana ngaini, there is not 
 any one; ngaini sa'a liti ha'ahireru'e, 
 none shall pass in front of them (and 
 overcome them); maleledi oraha'a 
 mwaanie ngaini, to rebuke a man for sin. 
 
 nga'ini 2. verb suffix of transitive force, hii 
 hiinge'ini. Mota ngai. 
 
 ngi'ingedi to be strong, to be firm, ng&di, 
 ha'angd'ingedi. 
 
 ngaite U., article; ngaile holoholo, a different 
 thing; ngaile laa, another person. 
 
 ngali 1. n., canarium nut; ngdli maa, smoked 
 nuts stowed in a tangi. cf. repo. ngdli 
 maelo, the month of August, the time 
 of ripe nuts; karoa ngdli, to pick the 
 nuts; kokopa, buttress flanges on the 
 lower trunk of the tree; koukou, kernel 
 of the nut; qa'akora, the outer skin of 
 the nut. Mota ngai, Solomons ngali. 
 
 ngali, ngalingeli U. 2. v. tr., to shake, to dis- 
 turb, to move about restlessly, to move 
 one's position. 
 
 ng&lute S., mu ngelulei ola, all and sundry 
 things. 
 
 nganite S., ngenita U., time when, with loca- 
 tive », inganite, when, at what time; 
 used of future or past time. Florida 
 ngiha, Mota ngaisa, Lau angila. 
 
 nganga a crumb, used with genitive », S., ni, 
 U.; crumbs, shavings, dust, small pieces. 
 mu ngangai ngeulaa, crumbs of food; 
 ngangai mwakana, dust of the earth; 
 mwai ngangani 'ei, chips of wood. 
 
 ngangadi, ngangangadi v. tr., to creak, to 
 grate, to grind the teeth; ngangadi niho, 
 to grind the teeth, ngangadi nihonga, 
 V. n. 
 
 ngangau to spread (of ulcers), to blaze (of fire); 
 maa ngangau, blear-eyed from smoke of 
 cooking fires. 
 
 ngara, ngarangara v. i., to cry, to buzz, of 
 mosquito; ngara 'i'iU'i, to cry aloud; 
 ngara li'eli'a'a, to give an uncertain 
 note; ngara loulou, to resound; ngara 
 mango ta'a, U., to sob; ngara tahela'i 
 ana, to call upon him with weeping; 
 ngara uloulo, to weep bitterly; ngara 
 welewele'a, to have a solid sound, 
 ngaraha U., v. n., cry. 
 ngaranga v. n., weeping. 
 ngarata v. n., sound; ngaralai 'ehuri, sound 
 
 of the conch. 
 ngarasi tr., to cry for, to cry on account of. 
 ngarala-(ku) gerund, mwane 'o ro'uro- 
 bule'inie ngara'aku, hold not thy peace 
 
 ngarala (continued). 
 
 at my tears. Florida ngaraha; to cry 
 out. 
 ngasi 1. V. i.. to be tough (of food). Lau 
 
 ngasi, hard, 
 ngasi, nga'ingesi S., ngasingasi U. 2. to chew, 
 to roll about in the mouth. Wango 
 ngasi. 
 ng^u, ngaungeu 1. v. tr., to eat; with poss. 3, 
 ngdu ana, to eat of; ngdu hikena, ngdu 
 hikeni, to partake of; ngdu i nimana 
 nga keni, to live with a woman, lit., to 
 eat from the hand of a woman; ngdu 
 tapaika, to smoke tobacco; ngdu maa'i, 
 a sacrificial feast, ngdu maa'inge; ngdu 
 'inoninge, cannibalism; ngdu ni pole, 
 to eat to satiety; ngdu qe'u suu, to gorge, 
 lit., to eat till the head drops; ngdu 
 saedami, to eat to repletion; ngdu 
 teketeke, nga mala eke, to drop crumbs 
 while eating; 'o'a sare ngdu ihei, what 
 will you eat; ta'ata'a maai ngeu, one 
 meal; maai, S. {maani, U.), ngeu, the 
 evening star, lit., meal watcher; kire 
 ngdu maelana a ola, they eat the death 
 feast of So-and-so; maelona e ngau 
 diana, when ripe it eats well; 'o ngdu 
 mingana, did you eat of it; olo ngdu, to 
 fast, to abstain from food, 
 ngauhe S., v. n., a feast; ngduha, U., a feast, 
 
 food. 
 ngjluhe-(ku) gerund.; ngduhana e pdipeine , 
 he is a great eater; ngduhana e 'aela, he 
 overeats; suPungie ngduhana, to offer 
 food to. 
 ngaolaa v. n., food, things to eat, tnc'i 
 ngeulaa, mu ngeulaa; mu ngangai 
 ngeulaa, crumbs of food, 
 ngaunge v. n., an eating, a meal; taataa 
 
 maai ngeunge, one meal. 
 
 ngaula-(ku) gerund.; ngdulana e diana, it 
 
 is good to eat. Wango ngau; Mota 
 
 ngau, to chew; Motu gauai, Maori ngau. 
 
 ngau 2. vocative, used of children of each sex: 
 
 ngdu, lad! 'alai ngeu, U., you boys; ro 
 
 ngdu, you two children. 
 
 ngaungeu nime armlet made of haa, huresoso, 
 
 malo. 
 nge pers. pron., sing. 3, he, that; 1. used before 
 proper names: ngea Awao, that man 
 Awao. 'olo ngea Dora esi teuri, then said 
 Dora. 2. a shortened form of inge'ie: 
 'amamu nge ilei, where is that father of 
 yours; ngeatei, ngea ola, whom do you 
 mean? 3. added for explanation: uri 
 qa'une nge mwane, I mean that the male 
 is the head; so nge, well then; nge, nga 
 laa ni, heyl what's that? ngcni 'olo 
 ngeena, yes, that's it; ngeni nou lae. 
 that is why, thereupon, I went; mwai 
 keni ana wala'anga ngcni, what women 
 for talking; ohe nge e urine, possibly 
 that is so; nge laenga kesi lae, then the 
 journey will take place; nge ke 'ue ka'a 
 nc, how then will it be?
 
 NGEENA 
 
 72 
 
 ngeeaa demonstrative pron., that: follows noun 
 or pronoun; itige'i ngeena, that is he; vga 
 ola taa ngeena, what is that thing? 7igc. 
 nge'i pers. pron., sing. 3, he. she, it: a shortened 
 form of nge'ie; used as subject followed 
 by e. nge'i 'oto e 'iinue, it was he who 
 said it; 7ige'i nou ka'a lae, that is why 
 I did not go. 
 nge'ie S., nge'ia U., pers. pron., sing. 3, he, she. 
 it: used as subject followed by e; three 
 forms of the pronoun may be used 
 together for emphasis: inge'ie nge'i 
 e 'iinue, it was he who said it; in Sa'a 
 the final e becomes a before the personal 
 article a and a long vowel results, nge'ie 
 ni, that is it; nge'ia i Arona, nge'ia 
 'ulehu, it is at Arona, the 'ulehu, I mean; 
 nge'ia a ola e 'untia, he, So-and-so, said 
 it. Mota neia. 
 ngeitei S. 1. interrog. pron., what: used pre- 
 ceding noun, ngeitei 'inoni, what man? 
 ngeitei li'oa, what spirit? 2. ngeitei iic 
 ena, that is just it, just so. 
 ngengede-(na,ni) ngengedena, its end. Wango 
 
 ngengede. 
 ngeni cf. nge. 
 ngenita U., used with locative i as nganite, 
 
 q. v. 
 ngerengereta adj., of a checked pattern. 
 ngero v. i., to chew, to nibble (of rats. etc.). 
 ngero'i tr.. 'asiihe e ngero'ie, the rat gnawed 
 it. 
 ngeu cf. ngau. 
 
 ngi>-erb sufifb: of transitive force, raa raangi. 
 ngidu (ku) U. 1. the lip (of persons); by 
 metonymy in Sa'a the mouth, tero 
 ngidu, to pout the lip. 2. ngidu 'upu, 
 ngingidu 'upu, to hate; ngidu 'upunge, 
 hatred. Mota ngusui, Florida gidu, 
 \'iti ngnsH, Motu udu, Sa'a ngudu. 
 ngingidu'e the native bee. honey. Florida 
 
 midiia. 
 ngingite 'ala ngingite, to clench the teeth. 
 ngisu, ngingisu S.. ngisungisu U.,_to spit; hoi 
 ngisu, spittle, lungs; 'otio ngisu, to water 
 at the mouth; sae ngisu, the lungs, 
 ngisunge v. n., spitting, 
 ngisuhi tr., to spit, to spit on; e ngisuhie 
 
 'apu. he spat blood, 
 ngisuhe'ini tr., to spit on. M. L., p. 91, 
 Maisin kasufe. 
 ngisu 'ate U- to be thirsty; ngisu 'atenga, n., 
 
 thirst, 
 ngo'a adj., blunt, with the point broken off; 
 nga ngoongoo ni salo e ngo'a, the tip of 
 the cloud was broken off. 
 ngoli v. tr., to destroy a man's property after 
 his death, huni ngolie to'oto'olana. 
 M. A., p. 263. su'e ngoli, to fall back- 
 ward and break the neck, 
 ngolite V. n., a destruction of property: 
 
 wrongly spelt in M. L., p. 263. 
 ngolila-Cku) gerund. Florida boli. 
 ngoongoo (na, ni) U.. end: with locative j,- 
 ngocmgoona, its end. skirts; paro i 
 ngoongoo, at the edge; i ngoongoo ana 
 
 ngoongoo (continued). 
 
 walumalau, S., at the world's end; 
 i ngoongoo ana Kahua, Cape Keibeck, 
 San Cristoval. Fagani ngo, lip; Santa 
 Cruz ngo, nose. cf. M. L., p. 84. 
 ngoongoodo S.. end; ngoongoodo ana maholo, 
 
 end of the time. 
 ngora (na, ni) 1. a point of land, a cape, ngo- 
 rana hanue. Mota ngaregi, point of 
 land. 2. Up. cf. ngidu; ddu (tdu, U.) 
 ngora 'upu, to hate, lit., swollen lip; 
 ngora 'upunge, n., hatred. 
 ngora, ngongora 3. to snore, to grunt, snort; 
 ngora i lue (ku), to growl. Mota 
 ngora, Maori ngorongoro. 
 ngorangora 1. an isthmus, a cape. 
 Ngorangora 2. the village at the northeast end 
 of Ulawa; Wdi ni Tehulu, its lagoon; 
 'Ele Maosi, its landing place, 
 ngori V. tr.. to quench; ngoria Li'oa, to quench 
 
 the Spirit. 
 Ngorieru an 'akalo ni matawa armed with gar- 
 fish, seen off Qa'ulo. M. A., p. 259. 
 ngudu S., lip. cf. ngidu, U. Ho qeru ngudu, 
 to grudge, to hate; qa'u ngudu, the 
 blackfish. Mota ngusui, lip; Poly- 
 nesian ihu. M. L., p. 85. 
 ngulu to resound; mwangulungulu, resounding, 
 nguru, ngunguru, ngungunguru S., nguru- 
 nguru U. , 1 . to growl or roar (of animals) , 
 to mumble or groan (of persons), 
 nguruhi tr., to growl at (of dogs). Maori 
 nguru, to grunt; Bugotu nguunguru, to 
 growl; Niue ngungulu. 
 nguru 2. pola nguru, U., name of a month, 
 September. 
 ngurusi v. tr., to knock out some (of things 
 in a row), 'anguru. e rdpu ngurusie 
 nihona, knocked his teeth out. said of 
 a young child when the teeth of his 
 elder brother fall out. 
 nguu V. i., to answer, to make response, 
 nguuhi tr. 
 
 nguuhila-(ku) gerund. Wango nguuhi; 
 Samoa ngu, to growl. 
 
 '0 1 . exclamation of dissent. 
 
 'o 2. pers. pron., sing. 2, thou; used as subject 
 of verb either by itself or following i'oe; 
 suffixed to verbs and prepositions as 
 object. Florida o. 
 
 oa 1. V. i., to share in, to be fulfilled, to come 
 to pass, to be fitting, to suit, to be 
 suited to, to permeate, ha'aoa'i, hd'ioa. 
 melu oa 'oto ana, we share in it; mu 
 maholo e oa 'oto, the time is fulfilled; 
 e oa ana, it is suited to it; tolo oaoa, to 
 permeate. 
 oala-(ku) opposite to, over against, corre- 
 sponding to, concerning; papanguru- 
 nguru oalana, mutterings concerning, 
 oaoanga v. n., a sharing in; mdni oaoanga 
 
 hd'iliu. equality, 
 oangi tr., to follow suit, hd'ioangi.
 
 73 
 
 OKU 
 
 oa (ku) 2. a pair, fellow; oaku, my fellow, my 
 mate; oa ni ola, a pair of things; oa ni 
 puli, two cowries. Samoa oa. a pair. 
 
 Oa 3. the two islands at the south end of San 
 Cristoval; Oa Raha. Santa Anna, Oa 
 Riki, Santa Catalina. Spelt wrongly 
 as Owa. 
 
 o'a 4. a tree, the bark used for purposes of 
 staining; the red juice is extracted by 
 pounding and squeezing and is mixed 
 with charcoal. 
 o'a'i V. tr.. to stain with o'a. Samoa 'o'a, 
 Bischoffia javanica; 'o'a'i, to dye with 
 its stain. 
 
 *o'a 5. to settle (of birds), to squat on tlie 
 haunches. Samoa lo'a, to settle; Mota 
 toga, Niue tokai. 
 
 *o'a 6. U., 'o 2, thou, 'a 7, verbal particle. 
 
 'O'au an island in the Mara Masiki Channel. 
 
 oda'i u'ii'i oda'i, to quarrel. 
 
 odo, odoodo 1. to be straight, to go forward. 
 ha'aodo, hd'iodo'i, tamwaodo. e odo 'olo 
 ta'au, he went straight on; rnanu odo, 
 to be level, upright; e odo, that's right 
 (Mwouta, U., use); sulu odoodo, to go 
 straight. 
 odoodonga v. n., straightness, uprightness. 
 odoha V. n., used with poss. 3. odohaana 
 me'i 'ano mala, in good ground; tnu 
 odohaana wala, words to the point; 
 odohaana mu ola, correct, exact things; 
 odohaana i ola, opposite to, off, such- 
 and-such a place; 'iiri odohaana tala, 
 walk straight along the path. 
 
 odo (na, ni) 2. odona maa, a gate opening 
 directly opposite a person; nga odoni 
 kana. a song sung straight through; nga 
 odoni heu, a row of stones; odoni sae, 
 moral uprightness. 
 
 odo'i V. tr., to meet, to come across, lio odo'i, 
 to find; hulc odo'i, to arrive and find; 
 taha odo'i, to come upon. 
 
 odonga U., ddti odonga, to make trial of. 
 
 odota'i partic, just, fair, righteous; sulu 
 odola'i, to act righteously, 
 odota'inge v. n., justice, righteousness. 
 
 o'e, o'eo'e U., to be crazy, delirious. 
 
 'oha betel leaf (Piper betle), both leaves and 
 catkins are eaten, 'oha ni me'esti 
 (ma'usu, moti, U.), a wild variety; pule 
 ni 'oha, a packet of betel leaf; sili 'oha. 
 to get betel from the bush; hu'usi, to 
 pluck leaves of betel. 
 
 oha'i to be capsized; mclu oha'i 'oto, we are 
 capsized. 
 oha'ini tr., to cause to capsize. 
 
 ohe 1. V. tr., to drive away. 
 
 'ohe 2. adv., perhaps, possibly, most likely; 
 or it may be used at the beginning of a 
 sentence, of supposititious cases, wa 
 'ohe, unless; so 'ohe, perhaps; wdi e 
 mapipi 'ohe 'oto ta'inie kolune mwakano, 
 whether the water had receded otif the 
 face of the earth. 
 
 ohera v. i., to race, to compete, hd'iohe. 
 
 'ohi 1. (au) v., after, for, to fetch; lae kd'u 
 'ohi'i, please go bring it;tdu 'ohi, U., to 
 
 'ohi 1 (continued). 
 
 seek; tola 'ohi, to search for. Florida 
 
 gohi, varigohi; Maori ohia, to long after. 
 
 'ohi 2. U., hd'i'ohi, to be doubtful about, to ask 
 
 questions. 
 'ohi'a U., adv., perhaps, most likely, 
 ohisi perineal bandage, T bandage of pandanus 
 
 leaf worn by men. 
 oho v. i., to fight, to strive with, to attempt. 
 ohoa hiirunge, to race; oJtoa mao, to 
 practice the dance. 
 ohotaa v. n., a battle. 
 
 ohongi tr., to make trial of, to practice. 
 hd'iolionginge. VVango ohongi; Niue 
 oho, to rush at. 
 ohonga U., n., lae ohonga, to go tentatively; 
 mala ohonga, to tempt; mala ohonganga 
 (double n. ending), temptation, trial; 
 mdtni ohonga ana, taste and try it. 
 ohu 1. V. i., to be boiling, to boil (of water). 
 
 ha'aohu. 
 ohu 2. various, different; e ohu 'oto adaru'i, U., 
 there is a difference between the two; 
 ohu 'inoni ohu sae, many men of many 
 minds. 
 ohusi V. tr., to differentiate, to distribute. 
 ha'aohtisi. Florida ova ni tinoni, a 
 crowd of men. 
 'ohu 3. n., sugar cane; 'ohu nunit. M. A., p. 
 21. Mota tou, Motu tohu, Florida tovu. 
 oi 1. exclamation, aha. 
 
 'o'i 2. V. tr., to break, ma'o'i. 'o'i ri'iri'i, to 
 
 break in pieces; hele 'o'i'o'i, to break; 
 
 tale'i 'o'i'o'i, to trouble oneself. 
 
 •o'i'o'i n., mu 'o'i'o'i, sections of roof for 
 
 thatching. Florida goti. 
 
 oka 1. U., to eat areca nut along with betel 
 
 leaves and lime. 
 oka 2. to eat food raw. Viti ndroka, Niue ota, 
 
 Maori ota. 
 oka, okaoka 3. v. i., to destroy gardens (of 
 
 pigs); poo okaoka, a mischievous pig. 
 oke, okeoke 1. v. tr., to draw, to drag, 
 okenga v. n. 
 okeni tr. Wango oge. 
 'oke 2. 'o, thou; fee, verbal particle, cf. 'o'a 6. 
 oko 1. a band, a creeper used in tying, 
 oko 2. a tree (Acacia sp.) ; tarasi oko, a cuckoo, 
 oko, okooko 3. black (earth) pigment used for 
 the teeth, the idea being that the gums 
 are hardened thereby, 
 'oko 4. 'o, thou : ko, verbal particle, cf. 'oke, 'o'a 6. 
 okooko a basket, a receptacle; okooko ni pasa, 
 
 basket containing bonito hooks, 
 okolu okolu tewa, eleventh and twelfth day of 
 
 the moon, 
 oku 1. n., a marine annelid, palolo (Eunice 
 viridis, the epitokal segments), oku e 
 hirusia maana, said of the migratorj' 
 plover, cf. kdrikeri'ala. 2. names of 
 certain months: oku lade. September; 
 oku mwaa, October; oku denu, Novem- 
 ber; oku peine. December. 3. summer 
 time, as distinguished from aau, winter. 
 4. names of certain days of the month: 
 qd'i oku, toohuungei oku. S., second and 
 third days after full moon.
 
 OKU 
 
 74 
 
 oku 5. the end-walls of the house; oku i maa, 
 wall in front; oku i puri, wall behind; 
 kdulioku, end purlins of the house. 
 oku 6. swollen stomach. 
 
 ola n., thing; the noun ending may be added; 
 with the personal article a ola, the person 
 So-and-so, such a one; ro ola, man and 
 wife, and as vocative, you two married 
 folk; in phrase ko ola, if it be so. a ola ko 
 mae. So-and-so is sick; a ola ko mae 'oto. 
 So-and-so is dead; a kele ola, young So- 
 and-so; komuna a ola. So-and-so's fam- 
 ily; keni ana a ola, such-and-such a 
 woman; kira a ola, whom do you mean; 
 saai ola, to know things, to be wise; ola a 
 Elija e na'o 'oto mat, how that verily 
 Elijah came before; kele me'i ola, a little 
 thing; e ka'a olaike, there is nothing at 
 all; hele ola, to act; hoii ola, a thing of a 
 round shape; mu ola Jm'ihti'i, dangers, 
 difficulties; iho'oi ola, a bundle; tmm 
 lehui ola, worn-out things; lede ola, 
 mischievous; noic 'ure mdi i ola, I am 
 from such-and-such a place; mangoi ola, 
 breath; vieatneatani ola, a huge thing; 
 molatana nga ola, innumerable things; 
 ana ke ola mwamwadau, if possible; 
 ola ni tnwane, a sacred thing; me'i olana, 
 the thing; nikei (nikcni) ola, a big thing; 
 oa ni ola, a pair; odohaana mu ola, cor- 
 rect, exact things; odohaana i ola, oppo- 
 site to, off, such-and-such a place; mu 
 qa'atai ola, shreds; si'ohaa'i ola, to be in 
 a poor way; ta'ela'i i ola, beginning from ; 
 mu le'itesi ola, flesh; m.u tale'i ola mola, 
 inferior things, nga ola, pooh ! absurd ! nga 
 ola iaa, what? noii ka'a to'oana nga ola, I 
 have nothing. 
 
 olanga, ere ni hedi olanga, to take an oath; 
 lauhi olanga, succor; lede olanga, mis- 
 chief; hide olanga, carrying cargo; saai 
 olanga, wisdom, knowledge; tdri olanga, 
 riches. 
 ole v. tr., to scrape with a shell, to get the skin 
 
 off yams, etc. 
 'oli V. i., to return, to relapse, ha'i'oli. melu 
 'oli 'oto, we have returned; mu ola 
 'oli'oli, changes; 'oli ana, to succeed to 
 a thing, to inherit. 
 
 'olinge V. n., return, ha'ihe'i'olinge, v. n., 
 bounty. 
 
 'olisi tr. to change, to alter; 'olisi lo'ohaa, 
 to exchange money, to buy; poo ke ne'i 
 lalamoa ko 'olisie 'oto a mwaena, the pig 
 is the victim in place of the man. 
 
 'olisila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 'olite-(ku) n., used as preposition, in place 
 of. noko lae 'olitana, I come in his 
 place. 
 
 •oli'olite v. n., heir; a 'oli'olile, the heir. 
 Wango ori, Mota kel. 
 'olie'i V. i., to return, to turn back, to go home; 
 kira'elu 'a ta'e hd'i 'olie'i, they embark 
 on their return journey. 
 
 'olie'inga U-, v. n., return. 
 olo, oloolo 1. V. i., to swim. 
 
 oloolonga v. n., swimming. 
 
 olo, oloolo 1 (continued). 
 
 olohi tr., to swim for and get. 
 oloha'ini to swim with, holding. Florida 
 olo, Wango oro. 
 
 olo 2. V. i., olo ngdu, to abstain from food; olo 
 ngdunge, fasting; olo ana hi' olo, to be 
 faint from fasting; olo manini, to be of 
 orderly behavior. 
 
 *olo, 'olo'olo 3. V. tr., to cut the ends ofT; 'olo 
 qd'u, to cut hair; 'olo kou'e ihune, to cut 
 the hair off the whole head. 
 'olo'i tr., to sever the shoots of; nga 'oha 
 na kira 'olo'ia 'oto, the betel plants from 
 which they cut off the shoots. Mota 
 goro 2. 
 
 Oloha a village on the west coast of Little 
 Malaita, its landing-place Ha'au; the 
 language of Oloha is Tolo, the speech 
 of the people of the Mara Masiki Chan- 
 nel; it was known to Bishop Patteson, 
 who made a small sketch of its grammar. 
 
 'olo'olo v. i., to reel, to stagger; dsu 'olo'olo, to 
 be loose, unstable. 
 'olo'oloa'i V. i., to stagger about. Mota 
 gologolo, Malagasy horohoro. 
 
 oloolonga U., n., a company, a party. 
 
 olopa'i U., n., a yam with fruit on the vine. 
 
 'olu 1. numeral, three; 'olune, third, third time; 
 ha'a'olu, three times. Mota tol, Poly- 
 nesian tolu. 
 
 'olu 2. S., dialectic for molu. 
 
 omi V. tr., to suck, to smoke tobacco. 
 
 ominge v. n., sucking, smoking. Maori 
 momi. 
 
 omo n., arrow; nanga, the barb of an arrow; 
 to'onga'i omo, to draw an arrow. 
 
 'omolu pers. pron., plural 2: you; used as sub- 
 ject, or attached to verb or preposition 
 as object; more restricted in meaning 
 than 'ofnu. 
 
 'omu pers. pron., plural 2: you; used as sub- 
 ject, or attached to verb or preposition 
 as object; used following the longer 
 form i'omu, 
 
 'omoro, 'omoro'i, 'omoru'e S., pers. pron.. 
 dual 2; used as subject, or attached to 
 verb or preposition as object. 
 
 ona 1. fresh-water limpets with poisonous 
 spines; ona e mwakolieu, the shellfish 
 spiked my foot. 
 
 ona 2. a deep-sea fish. 
 
 onanala adj., lumpy (of tdumanga, tare pud- 
 ding), rough (of a road). 
 
 one n., sand, beach; one mamae, fine sand; one 
 piruu, S., one qiriiu, U., black sand, such 
 as is found on the beaches at San Cris- 
 toval; apau one, the lee side of an island; 
 'asi dodo hule i one, deep water right 
 in to shore; awalosi i one, the north- 
 northeast wind; idu7nia one, U., count- 
 less; maraau ro one, the east-northeast 
 wind; kira 'asi usuli one, they went 
 then along the beach; e urihana nga 
 one, like the sands, of countless num- 
 bers; 'u'ui one, a grain of sand. 
 one'a S., onela U., adj., sandy. Mota one, 
 Maori one.
 
 75 
 
 ORE 
 
 *onl 1. to remain, to be settled; 'oni hiiu 'olo 
 ana, dwell therein forever. 
 
 •oni 2. V. i., to repeat, to go over again (of 
 words); ko 'oni ana ta'ala'a me'i wala 
 ngeena, repeated the same words. San 
 Cristoval onioni, a tale. 
 
 'oni 3. coconut milk strained from the scraped 
 flesh of the nut mixed with a little water, 
 extracted by squeezing and used in the 
 cooking of various vegetables; when 
 without coconut milk the yam mash is 
 known as hdehele. tola, to curdle, pii 
 'oni, to make coconut milk; 'oni wet 
 
 (a) coconut milk boiled thin into oil; 
 
 (b) a dish of pounded yam mash with 
 coconut oil. 
 
 'onime'i 1. v. i., to pack, to stow; 'onime'i koni, 
 to store up. 2. partic, well, cleverly; 
 hele 'onime'i, to do cleverly. 
 'onime'ini tr., hele 'onime'inie, to do it 
 well; to stow. Wango orimaini. 
 'oni'oni adv., always. 
 
 'onioninge v. n., a tale oft repeated, folklore. 
 'onisae S., v. i., to change the mind, to repent. 
 
 'onisaenga v. n., repentance. 
 'oniteu v. i., to delay, 
 ono 1. numeral, six; onona, sixth, the sixth 
 
 time; ha'aono, six times, 
 'ono, 'ono'ono 2. v. i., to swallow, konokono. 
 'ono ngisu, to water at the mouth; 'ono 
 pola, to swallow whole; hoi 'ono'ono, a 
 pill; hdu 'ono'ono, stones to swallow in 
 ordeal. M. A., p. 212. 
 'onomi tr. 
 
 •onomila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 'onoma'ini tr. Florida sonomi, Mota nolo, 
 to swallow; Maori korokoro, throat; 
 Motu hadonoa. 
 'ono'onoma n., gullet, hahani 'ono'onoma, a 
 
 measure, a yard. 
 onu holo onu, to divide and cut short. 
 
 onu'e adj., S., cut off short; 'o holo onii'e 
 qongikii hao. 
 •ongo n., mangrove. Florida tongo, \'iti 
 
 ndongo. 
 'o'o 1. exclamation, of dissent. 
 'o'o 2. n., a wooden drum; the inside is hol- 
 lowed out (kdrii) through a narrow slit 
 on the side, the drum when played is set 
 upon the stem of a tree fern as a pedes- 
 tal, the drumstick is a piece of sago- 
 palm frond, the part of the drum hit is 
 the center portion just above the open- 
 ing. When a feast {houla) is being pre- 
 pared the drums are kept in a house 
 made for the purpose. Drumming is 
 kept up constantly till the feast is over. 
 Drums are beaten after a murder, kirc 
 horo. para ni 'o'o, a set of drums; ri'i, 
 small, treble: taha 'o'o, tenor or middle 
 size; loli, bass; ikiikingi 'o'o, sulii 'o'o, to 
 beat the drums. Wango oo, Bugotu koko. 
 'o'o, 'o'o'o 3. to stay, to remain behind, to be; 
 'o'o ni tehinge, to be in flight. Lau loo, 
 Nguna toko. 
 'o'o 4. adv., utterly, quite, e mae 'o'o, he is 
 quite dead; ha'ike 'olo 'o'o, never at all. 
 
 'o'oha'ini, 'o'ohi v. tr., to draw near to. 
 ooho 1. V. i., to take down; ooho 'asi, to destroy, 
 to break up (of a house); ooho toli, to 
 descend, to fall headlong. 
 ooho'i tr.. to take to pieces (of a house), 
 oohosi tr., to take down, to detach. Wango 
 ohosi. 
 ooho 2. V. i., to desist from, to cease. 
 'O'olo'u an island in Mara Masiki Channel, 
 'o'omae U., to'oni 'o'omae, mourning attire. 
 'o'oni U., V. i., to sink, ha'a'o'oni. 
 'o'onuto, 'o'onutonuto to incline the head, to 
 
 bow. nuto 2. 
 'o'orou U.. Maramara 'O'orou, the name of a 
 
 canoe in a story. 
 ooru 1. to blow (of winds). 2. n., the wind. 
 ooru ko ooru, the wind blows; ooru 
 pe'ipesi, to blow strong. 
 ooruhi tr., to blow on (of the wind), 
 'o'oru'e S., adj., short. U., poru. 
 opa, opaopa 1. to divide, to separate, to dis- 
 tinguish, to take away from, maopaopa. 
 susu opa, ornamental ridge covering; 
 mwane 'o opaopaa Li'oa mwaani'emi, 
 take not the Spirit from us; opa ha'iliu, 
 to be at variance; opa hiteli, to cut up 
 an animal; opa sae, to be at variance; 
 didi opa olanga, discrimination, par- 
 tiality, 
 opasaelaku gerund., my transgression, 
 opanga v. n., division. 
 opa 2. V. tr., to adopt children. 
 'opa U., 3. for 'oqa, stomach. 
 opo, to heat up food once cooked, ha'aopo. 
 opu 1. green coconut in its early stage with 
 little flesh and with the shell still soft. 
 2. the heart. 
 opuopu tihi opuopu, U-, the name of a month, 
 
 February. 
 'oqa (ku) belly, bowels, stomach, 'aqa. M. L.. 
 
 p. 55. Florida toba, Mota toqai. 
 'oqa'oqa U., a bay, indentation of the coast, 
 ora 1. oven, altar; ora ni uunti, the altar of 
 burnt offering; i epine ora, beside the 
 altar. 
 ora 2. U., ashes; dhnora, dusty. 
 ora 3. U., to flame, to burn brightly, ha'aora. 
 
 Wango ora. 
 ora 4. a boar pig. 
 ora 5. ora lulu, to belch, 
 oraa v. i., to flow. 
 
 oraha'a 1. adj., excessive, hele ni oraha'a, to 
 
 do too much; lae ni oraha'a, to go very 
 
 fast. 2. v. i., to sin, to contravene the 
 
 public standards of morality. 3. n., 
 
 sin, 7nu oraha'a, ddu oraha'a; maleledi 
 
 oraha'a mwaanie ngaini, to rebuke a man 
 
 for sin; sae 'asilana oraha'a, forgiveness 
 
 of sins. 
 
 oraha'ala adj., sinful; aoraha'ala, the sinner. 
 
 oraha'anga n., sin. Wango oraoraa. 
 
 oraora 1 . a holy person, one in touch with the 
 
 ghosts. 
 oraora 2. refuse, dung. cf. ora 2. 
 ore 1. v. i.. to remain behind, to be omitted; 
 V. tr., to leave, hd'iore. ore mwaani, 
 to be left out; ruana ke'i area, the other.
 
 ORE 
 
 76 
 
 ore 1 (continued.) 
 
 shall b-" left; klre ngdu area, they did 
 not eat it all. 
 creore n. with genitive i, ni, oreorei ola, an 
 
 empty case, a shell. 
 oreta (ku) v. n., an end. e 'unit oreta ana 
 nm ivala, he spoke and finished the 
 words; kesi oreta ana utinu 'asilana, 
 whose end is burning; orelana mu 'inoni, 
 the rest of the men. 
 oretalana ana i oretalana, finallj'. 
 oretanga v. n., the finish, final end. Motu 
 ore, orena, remnant. 
 
 ore 2. used with genitive i, ni; almost, nearly, 
 just failing to. melu orei lae, we nearly 
 went. 
 
 ore S., ura U., 3. fresh-water prawn, ore ni wei. 
 
 ore S., 4. crayfish, ore ni 'esi. Mota ura, Maori 
 koura. 
 
 ore 5. ha'iore, to scold, to quarrel. 
 
 orea to chatter (of thi bird wisi), wist ko orea. 
 M. A., p. 220. 
 
 ori, oriori v. tr., to peel; ori uhi, to peel yams; 
 yams are peeled with a shell held 
 between the thumb and index finger, 
 the motion being away from the body 
 and not toward it as with Europeans. 
 Viti ori, to cut; Fate ori, Motu oria. 
 
 oro, orooro v. i., to bend down, to stoop, to 
 lean over; oro i 'ano, to stoop to the 
 ground. 
 oroha'i, oroma'i v. i., to bend down, to 
 stoop, to slant. 7nwaoroha'i. 
 
 oropa (ku) U., ulcer; oropaku, the ulcer on my 
 body. 
 
 orooro n., the beetle that bores the yams. 
 orooro'a adj., eaten by yam beetles. 
 
 oru n., grasshopper, locust. 
 
 osa S. 1. (ku) ulcer; 7iweli osa, cerumen, wax 
 in the ear. 2. to be rotten, 
 osanga v. n., corruption. 
 
 osani karekare U., clifif. 
 
 osi 1. to cut, to score. 
 
 osi 2. nimekii e osi, my arm has gone to sleep, 
 pins-and-needles feeling. 
 
 'osi 3. 'o, thou; si, illative. 
 
 osiosi to be lukewarm, wawdi osiosi. 
 
 osiosita'a adj., striped, streaked. 
 
 '0 si'u'e exclamation of assent, yes; used in 
 response to a negative question where 
 English calls for no. 'tiri ngaini ka'a 
 'unue? 'o si'u'e, did no one speak? yes 
 (scilicet, no one did speak). 
 
 ote n., open bush-land just above the beach. 
 
 'oto 1. adv., follows the verb; is used to denote 
 the preterite; expresses finality; ex- 
 presses emphasis; the demonstrative 
 na or «?' may be added; used to connect 
 the narrative and to show consecutive 
 action, then, thereupon; marks cessa- 
 tion of action; used to denote a few, of 
 things just beginning or a few things 
 left, kire lae mango 'oto, they all went; 
 melu ke'i tola 'oto, are we to begin to 
 carry? ineu 'oto, it is I; inge'ie 'oto itei, 
 where is he? nou sa'a lae 'oto, I shall not 
 go; ngaini 'oto ka'a qaoa nga le'u, no 
 
 'oto 1 (continued). 
 
 one at all did anything; 'omu sa'a Ho 
 odo'ieu 'oto lo'u, ye shall not see me 
 again; 'oto 'ure mdi, up till now; ngaini 
 'oto amehi, one of us; wa 'oto amolu, or 
 one of you; miuaanie 'oto me'i olana, 
 from that very thing; e honu eni ni'inge 
 na 'oto ani wala'imolinge, full of grace 
 and truth; to'olaka'elu 'oto, our own 
 property; mala 'oto nou ka'a helesie ike, 
 as though I had never done it; 'oto 
 inganite, when? 'oto wdi na'ona. right 
 before his face; 'olo i qe'une, right on his 
 head; 'oto ina'o, formerly; 'oto qdni, of 
 old; 'oto di, S., 'olo huu, U., forever; 'oto 
 waite, long ago; 'olo ihei, laa, where to, 
 lad? 'oto mola, 'oto molana. at this 
 present, now; nga liwe 'otona, it was a 
 cave; 'oto nou si teuri, then said I; kire 
 si rohu, ka'a sdunie 'oto, they then ceased 
 and left off beating him; kire ka'a hata- 
 hata'inie 'olo, they no longer accom- 
 panied him; e ro 'ala ini 'oto, just a few 
 as yet; e la' a kele le'u 'oto, only a little 
 piece left; ko nisi 'oto ile'u, this is the 
 boundary; e no'i 'aela 'oto, it has become 
 bad; nonola 'oto wau, three days ago; 
 e ngaa 'oto, did he eat it? 'oni hiiu 'olo 
 ana, to be settled; ha' ike 'olo 'o'o, never 
 at all; e pele 'oto, it is of no avail; ini ni 
 ha'aurilana 'oto, a person to be saved; 
 ko ne'ie 'oto i'oe, if it be thou; na nesi 
 ne'i 'amamu 'oto, and I shall be your 
 father; e holai na'o 'oto wau, he led 
 the way first; a ola e na'oku 'oto. So- 
 and-so preceded me; na'a lae 'oto, I am 
 going; e la 'otoi 'aela mwaani nonola, it 
 is worse than yesterday; koro 'a mono 
 'oto i Kalona, they two live apart in 
 Kalona; e molahie 'oto, it failed; e 
 ma'usu 'olo, it is all overgrown; wdi e 
 mapipi 'ohe 'oto ta'inie kolune mwakano, 
 whether the water had receded off the 
 face of the earth; e mango 'oto, it is 
 quite finished; mango 'olo, thereupon; 
 melu mango 'oto mdi, we are all here; 
 'ure 'oto mdi i 'aehotalana, from the 
 beginning up to now; e lae 'oto ni mae, 
 he went like everything; e 'a'aila'a 'oto 
 mae ana, he is very strong; 'oto 'ie, now; 
 'oto mola 'ienini, just now; 'oto inihou. 
 just now; ke'i 'ue 'oto, how shall it be 
 done? 'oto kire kosi 'unue, then they 
 said it; poo kc ne'i lalamoa ko 'olisie 'oto 
 a mwaena, the pig is the victim in 
 place of the man; awala 'olo huu, U., a 
 full ten; wdi e huuhuu 'oto, water gushed 
 forth; 'olo wdi lalo, in the inside; noko 
 lapata'i ulo 'oto, I lament with crying; 
 le'une nou daa 'olo, I did that already; 
 likimaana 'olo, certainly. Wango oto, 
 olo hu, forever; Vaturanga noho; Maori 
 noho, to sit. 
 
 oto 2. (ku) cooked food taken on a journey. 
 mu oto. otona laeha, food for a journey. 
 Lau oso, Samoa 050, Viti odho, Maori o, 
 
 'oto di used of indefinite space of time, past or
 
 11 
 
 PAPA 
 
 'oto di (continuc-d). 
 
 future, forever, from of old. 'oio di 'oto 
 
 di, forever and ever. 
 'oto 'ie S., 'oto inihou U.. adv., now, 'oto mola 
 
 'ie {'ieniiii). just now, this minute, 
 'otomi V. tr., to spear, to pierce with a spear, 
 'oto 'o'o adv., for all time, ta'ata'a ola 'oto 'o'o, 
 
 one and only one. 
 ou 1 . pine ni ou, Nicobar pigeon; ground-pigeon. 
 'o'u 2. the sandy land just above the beach. 
 'O'u 3. the site of a former village south of 
 
 Su'uholo, U!awa. Wango gohti. 
 'ou'ou n., champion, chief, great person. In 
 
 M. A., p. 49, Ro ule'i seu 'ou'ou, are 
 
 said to be brothers of Qa'ulo painc, 
 
 whereas they were only two warriors, ro 
 
 ramo mola. Mota wowut. 
 oute U., oiUeni nima, a group of houses. 
 
 paa ?., n., bait, me'i paa. 
 
 paalahe v. tr., to praise, to bless, to apostro- 
 phize an island as in ha'addhi; paalabe'o, 
 lucky you, blessed are you. 
 paalahenga v. n., praise, blessing. 
 paalahela-(ku) gerund. 
 
 paalahea with personal article, a paalahea, 
 So-and-so. 
 
 paale'o n., breadfruit, 'apani paale'o, nauti- 
 lus shell cut in triangular pieces for 
 inlaying. San Cristoval qareo. 
 
 pa'asahu n., a small fish caught among the 
 shore rocks; hinou ni pa'asahu. a hook 
 for pa'asahu. 
 
 pa'e n., yam poles; v. tr., to pole yams. 
 
 pa'elana gerund.; pa'dana hohola, poling 
 up a yam garden. 
 
 pa'ewa 1. n., a shark, e lapi ana pa'ewa, 
 changed into a shark. 2. alaala pa'ewa, 
 a croton with leaves like a shark's fin. 
 3. pa'ewa ko 'ala tala, S., the last two 
 days of the moon. Mota pagoa, shark; 
 New Guinea paowa, Mailu baca, Florida 
 ha^ea, Gilbert Islands bakoa. 
 
 pai, paipei U., v. tr., to drive, to chase. Wango 
 bat. 
 
 painaa U., dialectic for qiiinaa. 
 
 paine S., paina U., big, loud, to grow big. 
 ha'apaine. e paina 'asi'a, needlessly 
 big; helehele pdine, ninth and tenth days 
 of the moon; kei ta'a pdine, poor lady; 
 lo'a ivdi peine, March; mala pdine, to 
 give oneself airs; mango pdine, to sigh; 
 e pdine viwaanie, bigger; ngduhana t 
 pdipeine, he is a great eater, lit., his 
 eating is big; 
 painanga v. n., bigness, size, 
 painesi v. tr., to be too big for. 
 painaha used with poss. 3; pdinahaana. its 
 full size, adolescence. The root appears 
 to be pai on comparison with pdipei- 
 lesu'a, \J; big; and na is probably a 
 verbal suffix. Alite baila, Lau baita, 
 Ccram maina. M. L., p. 80. 
 
 paipeilesu'a I'., very large, pdina, Idsu. 
 
 pSipeina'a adj., very big. 
 
 pa'ipesi S., pMsipesi U., strong, firm; hele 
 pd'ipesi, to grasp firmly; ooru pe'ipesi, 
 to blow strong. 
 
 pala to be light in color; niu pala, a coconut 
 with light-colored leaves; poo pala. a 
 white pig. 
 
 palapala 1. an omen, sign; palapala ana haka, 
 a sign of the ship (Southern Cross) 
 coming, the particular palapala in this 
 case is a shower of rain. 
 
 palapala 2. U., palapala ni i'e, a nose-ornament 
 of shell cut to represent the frigate-bird 
 (Cruise of the Curagoa, p. 254). 
 
 palapala 3. to be gray in color, whitish; qduku 
 e palapala, my hair is gray. 
 
 Palaule an inlet west of Cape Z61ee in the bay 
 known as 'Olu Su'u, the other two inden- 
 tations being Apauone and Hulihuli. 
 
 pale 1. V. tr., to preserve, to keep, to main- 
 tain; palea katanga, to keep fellowship. 
 
 pale 2. U., Ngorangora dialect for qale, nega- 
 tive particle. 
 
 pale ^. U., v., to chirp, of crickets. 
 
 pali S., pali kao, a drop left in the bottom, 
 dregs. Florida bali, part; Lau bali, 
 side. 
 
 palili V. i., to turn aside. Lau/ai». 
 
 palingite v. tr.. to set; e palingitaa maana, he 
 set his face. 
 
 palo, palopalo v. tr., to do, to act officially, to 
 worship; e palo honolaka, our mediator, 
 palonga v. n., act, worship; o palonga, the 
 officiant; na ni leesie palonga aku, and 
 saw my works; mu palonga rorodo'a. 
 works of darkness. 
 palola-(ku) gerund, palolana mu 'akalo, 
 worship of the ghosts. 
 
 palopalo'a n., time, season. 
 
 palupelu 1. the handle of a paddle, pdlupel-i 
 ni hote. 2. U-, the buttress flange of a 
 tree. 
 
 palupelu 3. sae ni pelupelu, red hot. 
 
 pani 1. U., V. tr., to drive away, hd'ipdni. 
 panile'ini tr., to drag, to draw aside, to 
 
 cause to drift out of the course. 
 panile'inila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 pani 2. U., n., the side walls of a house; qd'uli 
 peni, purlin. 
 
 panitora v. tr., to eject, to drive out. 
 
 panga v. i., to wonder; used with poss. 3. huui 
 'omu kesi panga ani. that ye may marvel 
 thereat, 
 pangara'ini U., pangata'ini S., tr. 
 pangara'inila-(ku), pangata'inila-(ku> 
 gerund. 
 
 pangupangu raha U., big, huge. 
 
 panguu to be dumb. nguu. Mao. hangu, ngu. 
 
 pao V. tr., to make plaited armlets of haa, etc. 
 
 paonga S., battlefield. U., qaonga. 
 
 papa V. i., to break by a sharp blow; papa hdu, 
 to break stones by dashing one against 
 the other; papa naho. a fish that leaps 
 into the air dashing apart the water. 
 papali tr., to break by dashing down, 
 papata'ini tr.. to break in pieces. 
 papata'imla-(ku) gerund. Maori papa, 
 Motu papa, to burst.
 
 l^APAKU'A 
 
 78 
 
 papaku'a U., adj., foolish, demented. 
 
 papali (ku) n., cheek; 'aena papali, jaw. Lau 
 bait, side (of position); Viti vihalu, 
 cheek; Maori paparinga, Wango baba, 
 Bougainville Straits papala. 
 
 papangurunguru to murmur, to grumble, 
 mutter; papangurunguru oalana, mut- 
 terings concerning, nguru. 
 
 papau U., to be farm, hard, malapau'a'a. 
 
 para, parapara v. i., to fence, to guard; noko 
 para, I am making a fence; para hono- 
 taka. defend us; para dhu'i, to protect 
 with a fence; dere iinu ana para, between 
 the pickets of the fence; jnaai para, S., 
 niaana para, U.. a gate. 
 para'i tr., to defend, to protect. 
 para'ila-(ku) gerund, ko 'are para'ilana 
 ti'alumalau, defends the earth. Wango 
 bara; Mota pala, set across; Espiritu 
 Santo pala, fence. 
 
 para n., para ni 'o'o, a set of drums. 
 
 para'i ki'iki'i U., paw, of dog. 
 
 para'imaa hat, sunshade of plaited coconut 
 leaf worn when fishing. 
 
 para'i nima U., knuckle. 
 
 para'ita 1. U., the inclosure outside the men's 
 house (toohi) planted with dili and make; 
 areca skins are thrown into it for safety 
 to insure their not being used in witch- 
 craft. 
 
 para'ita-(ku) 2. n., a para'iteku, my defender. 
 nanamanga para'ilana 7tm li'oa, power 
 over the spirits. 
 
 parakoko U-, suit parakoko, rib of the body. 
 
 parangasi v. tr., to maintain one's innocence 
 when accused, to make pretence, to 
 bluff, to defy, ngdsi. 
 
 parapara S., n., side, loins; used with poss. 3; 
 parapara aku, my loins. Mota para- 
 Para, beside, sidewise. 
 
 parasi (au) U. 1. prep., against, around, in the 
 way of. ha'aparasi. ddu parasi, U.. 
 to hinder. 2. v. tr., to protect, to 
 fence, to inclose. Wango parasi. 
 
 par'ie cf. paro 'ie, this side. 
 
 parikota U., to bs separated, divided, disturbed 
 in mind. Florida bali, side. 
 
 paro adv., be^'ond ; paro 'ie (contracts to par'ie) , 
 this side; paro i la'ona, on the inside, 
 paro uri, over there; niparo, iniparo, 
 U., that; e ddngi paro, as soon as it was 
 day; '0 du'una paro, move it on a little; 
 moro tdria paro i'ola i 'esi, you launch 
 the canoe into the sea; po'o paro, 
 beyond; qd'u paro, beyond. Florida 
 pari, Sesake pala, Mota kalo, San 
 Cristoval baro. 
 
 pasa U., 1. paa S., n., bait for fish, mdsi pasa. 
 M. A., p. 316. 
 
 pasa 2. bonito hook for trolling, usually made 
 of the clam {'ime) with a tortoise-shell 
 barb {imaa). okooko ni pasa, basket 
 containing pasa. 
 
 pasi n., a bow. cf. kdlu, lohe. ilolo ni pesi, a 
 bowstring, to string a bow; tdku ana 
 pasi, to grasp a bow. Gilolo pusi, 
 Amboyna husul, apusa, Mota us. 
 
 pasie'ili to be stiff (of the body). 
 
 pasihi n., a small fish. 
 
 pasipesi U., pa'ipesi S., strong, firm. 
 
 pasu 1. ha'apasu, v. i., to threaten the life of. 
 
 pasu 2. to sprout; pdsu maomaopu'e, in full 
 leaf. San Cristoval basu. 
 
 pau 1. to jam, to be stuck, papau. 
 
 pau 2. pdusi, S., pdungi, U., to be master over. 
 rakapau. 
 
 pa'u 3. a corpse inclosed in the image of a 
 swordfish {Hi) carved in wood and kept 
 in the house. M. A., p. 261. 
 
 paula'a U., adj., firm, hard, papau. 
 
 paule n., a tree which grows on the hills, also 
 known as dalo ni me'esu, dalo of the 
 forest, makes good masts for boats. 
 
 pa'uwa'ata n., a two-handed crescentic club 
 from San Cristoval, "head-sphtter." 
 Guppy, "Solomon Islands," p. 74. 
 
 pawa hdu pawa, soapstone. 
 
 peapea (ku) n., footmark, sole of foot, U., 
 example. Ta'a Pea, a female ghost who 
 causes yams to fructify. M alay pea , foot. 
 
 pee, peepee 1. v. i., to drive away; pee poo, to 
 drive swine out of gardens. 
 peesi tr. Wango beesi, Maori pei. 
 
 pe'e 2. contraction of pe'ie with him, with it, 
 withal, and. 
 
 pei 1. U., n., a mortar for braying areca nut. 
 
 pe'i 2., S., V. tr., to assist, to help; used in the 
 sense of and; the equivalent of mwana of 
 units above ten; pe'ie often contracts 
 to pe'e; not a preposition of relationship 
 as stated in M. L., p. 151. e i'o pe'i 
 suke, he sat and begged; rdpu lakoma'i 
 pe'i po'upo'u, to crucify; i'o pe'i rae, 
 the mourning before burial; saeda ka'a 
 tararuru pe'ie, their hearts were not 
 whole with him. 
 pe'ini tr., to be associated with; pe'inie, 
 moreover, and; ta'e pe'inie, but, never- 
 theless. Wango bet, Fagani fagi, fagini, 
 Qaloto ha'ini, Lau /a?, faini, Mota vag 2. 
 
 peinuhi U., to go secretly. Wango binihu, 
 secret. 
 
 pele V. i., by mischance, by mistake, in error, 
 of no avail; e pele 'oto, it is of no avail, 
 it is all up; noic deu pele, I did wrong; 
 nou ere pele, I spoke inadvertently; 
 kali pele, to capsize in rounding a cape; 
 nou sa'a noruhe'i pele, I shall not be 
 confounded. 
 pelenga v. n., ddu pelenga, error, mistake. 
 pelenga'ini tr., ddu pelenga'inie nga le'u, to 
 do a thing in error. 
 
 pele'i adv., precedes verb: by mischance; ko 
 pele'i tarohia governor, if it come by 
 chance to the governor's ears. 
 
 peli, pelipeli v. tr., to steal, to rob, to steal 
 from a person, to kidnap, to recruit 
 labor without paying a commission 
 (holile) to the relatives of the person 
 recruited; e pelieu, he stole from me; 
 lude peli, to steal labor recruits. 
 pelinge S., v. n., theft. 
 peliha U., v. n., theft. 
 pelila-(ku) gerund. Mota palu.
 
 79 
 
 PONGAPONGA 
 
 penapena n., a roller; v. i., to roll out taro 
 puddings. 
 penasi v. tr., to roll out, to flatten out. 
 
 penata (ku) n., sole of foot, palm of hand, 
 penalana 'ae, penatana nime. Florida 
 pera ni lima, Mota tawerai, Ambrym 
 vera, Malekula feran, hand; Malagasy 
 tanana, hand. M. L. p. 75. 
 
 pepe n., butterfly, moth; pepe alaha, a large 
 butterfly; pepe ni weieu, a butterfly 
 (Ornithoptera cassandra); pepe i eueii, 
 a butterfly. Solomon Islands bebe, 
 Polynesian pepe. 
 
 pepela'ini U., v. tr., to cause to drift. 
 
 peta U., n., house post. Mota pete. 
 
 peto U., qeto S.. to be feeble, weak, cowardly. 
 
 pe'u n., tarantula, miisi pe'it, U. ; called ramo 
 champion from its watchfulness and 
 from the difinculty of hitting or spearing 
 it. 
 
 pe'ule n.. a bird, the curlew. 
 
 pewa'ali v. tr., to rend. u<a'a. hite pewa'ali, 
 to cleave. 
 
 pie 1. hdu pie, a precipitous wall of rock, a 
 cascade. 
 
 pi'e 2. a palm whose laths are used as cross- 
 pieces for platforms. 3. a digging-stick 
 made of pi'e. 
 
 pi'e (na, ni) 3. a sucker of a tree; pi'ei hudi, 
 banana sucker. 
 
 piho ha'apiho, I'., v. tr., to divide into two 
 parts. 
 
 pii 1. to cook with hot stones, stone boiling. 
 M. A., p. 316. pi'i 'oni, to make coco- 
 nut oil in a wooden bowl (nime). 
 piinge v. n., yam soup; ilu piinga, U., to 
 
 sup yam soup. 
 piingi tr. 
 
 pii 2. V. i., to strain the milk from scraped 
 coconut (hero) with the net (nnti) of the 
 coconut leaf. 
 
 pii 3. tUe pii, torrential rain. 
 
 pile 1. the young areca nut in its earliest edible 
 stage. 
 
 pile (na) 2. the roe of fish. Motu bela, spawn. 
 
 pili, pilipili v. i., to press, ha'anipili, S. pili 
 memeso, to break into powder; piliroro'i, 
 to prets down tight; />;7t /t'^t;, to oppress, 
 to tread down. 
 piliha U., V. n., distress. 
 pilingi tr. 
 pilila-(ku) gerund. Wango biringi. 
 
 pilomo to be dented, to have a gapped edge, 
 to be pitted. 
 
 pine S., pina U., the name of several large birds; 
 pine awa, the hornbill, so called from 
 the rushing sound (au'a) of its wings 
 in flight; pine ni 'esi, the booby; pine 
 ni oil, the Nicobar pigeon (Geophilus 
 nicobaricus). Florida bina. 
 
 piola adj., thick. 
 
 pipisi 1 (na, ni). the eaves of a house, pipisine 
 nume. 2. pipisi ana indnit, tail feathers 
 of a bird. 
 
 pipisu n., a bird, the shiny starling (Callornis 
 metallica), building in colonies. 
 
 piru 1. v. i., to close upon; e pirn keli eku, sur- 
 
 piru (continued). 
 
 rounds me. 2. n., an ornamental collar 
 made of dogs' teeth strung on cords 
 with intervening sections of shell 
 money (haa). 3. v. tr., to make such 
 a collar; e pirue mu 'usu ineu, he made 
 my dogs' teeth into a collar. 
 
 pirupiru U-, a sacred grove, altar. San Cris- 
 toval birubiru. 
 
 piruu S., qiruu U., black, grey, of sand as on 
 San Cristoval, one piruu. 
 
 pito S., qito U., v. i., to grow. 
 
 poe 1. poe rare, to plait a mat out of green 
 coconut leaves (rare). 
 
 poe 2. U., poe hui, to pull wild taro, hui ni 
 matawa. Mota koe. 
 
 poe 3. to cram. 
 
 poe 4. poe aro, a nose-stick of bamboo or shell. 
 
 poe 5. U., poe i'a, a poisonous fish. 
 
 po'e 6. to sprout. 
 
 po'e 7. ha'apo'e, n., yam or taro mash. 
 
 poepoe to sigh, to heave a sigh, to gasp. 
 
 poi 1. S., adv., up, hither; lae ka'u poi, come 
 up here; liane poi ile'ti, climb up, come 
 up, here to me; 'omii ke ha'ahu'o poi, 
 be here early in the morning; po'o poi, 
 up here. Wango poi, hither. 
 
 poi 2. to be concerned about; used with poss. 3. 
 
 pola, polapola v. i., to jump, to assault, to 
 attack; pola likiliki, to leap; pola 
 mwaani, to desert a ship; pola nguru, a 
 month, September; pola tola, U.. to 
 fail; 'ono pola, to gulp, to swallow whole, 
 polahi tr., to leap on, pounce on, to assault. 
 
 ha'apolahi, hii'ipolanga. 
 polahila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 polaha'i ha'apolaha'i, v. tr., to cast away, to 
 disregard. 
 
 polahiroa to meddle in. 
 
 polahiwasa to gad about, to be a busybody. 
 
 polale n., a bird, swamp-hen (Porphyrio sp.). 
 destructive to gardens. 
 
 polali lolo polali, red ant, sugar ant. 
 
 pole S., qole U., via'ahu pole, v. i., to dream, 
 V. tr., to dream of; ma'ahii polenga, n., 
 a dream, dreaming. 
 
 pole, polepole 2. U., polepolei sesu, smoke. 
 
 polo poloi haa, a strand of shell money, 'apolo. 
 
 polopolo U., wart. 
 
 pona 1 . a fountain, spring of water. Niue puna, 
 
 pona 2. ha'apona. to interrupt with questions. 
 
 pono, ponopono, popono v. i., to close, to mend, 
 to be closed, stufted up; simouke ineu 
 e popono, my pipe is stuffed up; sisi 
 pono. to be closed over (of a sore); 
 to'oni pono viaa. patched clothes; 
 e popono papau i purida, closed up 
 tightly behind them. 
 ponosi tr., to stop up. to close, to dam; 
 ddu ponosi, to put the lid on; kele 
 ponosie wau-ana, keep his mouth shut. 
 ponosila-(ku) gerund, ha'aponosi. Mota 
 
 u-ono. Florida pono. 
 ponopono n., lid, stopper, cork of bottle 
 (.late use), 
 pongaponga to be loose, to fit badly.
 
 PONGI 
 
 So 
 
 pongi, pongipongi, qongi U-, 1. v. tr., to promise; 
 n., a promise, 
 ponginge S., pongipongite S., pongiha U., 
 
 V. n., a promise. 
 pongila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 pongi (ku), qongi U. 2., n., a time, season; 
 Pongiku, my appointed time; i ponginc, 
 in its day. Mota qong. 
 
 poo 1. n., a pig, boar, barrow: any kind of 
 quadruped; poo ha'aholo, a sheeted pig; 
 poo viae, a dead pig, given as the people's 
 portion (tolinge) at a feast; poo mdiiri, 
 a Hve pig; poo noro, the planet Mars. 
 M. A., p. 349. poo pala, a white pig; 
 poo pulu, a black pig; poo okaoka, a mis- 
 chievous pig; poo e sude, the pig rooted; 
 poo tori, an ear-marked pig; dduddii 
 poo, U1171U poo saana mu'akalo to sacrifice 
 pigs to the ghosts; haka ni poo, herd 
 of swine; hunu poo, to cut up a pig; 
 kele poo, a little pig, shoat; ko'u- 
 kohtii poo, a piece of pork; kakdli munia 
 nga poo, met., for a human victim; 
 manii poo, a bird observed as an omen, 
 called pig-bird from its note; poo he 
 ne'i lalamoa ho 'olisie 'oto a mwaena, 
 the pig is the victim in place of the man; 
 wdsi ni poo, a wild pig; iipeta, a hog- 
 wallow-. Mota qoe. 
 
 poo (ku) 2. n., navel. 
 
 poo 3. to prop; hdu ni poo, a prop, a log to 
 prop with. 
 poota, poopoota (na) v. n., a foundation, 
 
 inii poopoolana nume. 
 poongi tr., to prop up, to support with 
 props; poongiei kao, prop it underneath. 
 poongila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 po'o 4. side (of position) po'o hao, S., farther 
 west; po'oi lengi, U., south; po'o mdi, 
 S., po'o me'i, U., hither, on this side; 
 po'o paro, beyond; po'o poi, S., up here; 
 po'o puri, at the rear, after, during one's 
 absence; po'o i sinaha, outside; po'o 
 wau, on the far side; i welila po'o wau, 
 three days hence. 
 
 po'o 5. n., a part, piece; po'o ni le'u, partly; 
 nga po'o ni le'u, a piece; nga'ela po'o ni 
 ninime, ni papali, the other hand, the 
 other cheek. Wango bo. 
 
 po'o, po'opo'o 6. to care, to be concerned about; 
 used with poss. 3. 
 
 po'o 7. po'o hiteli, to cause to burst. 
 
 po'o 8. po'o lulu, to fill the mouth with food. 
 
 poola adj., possessing pigs, hdnue e poola. 
 
 poona a village, a section of a village gathered 
 around a chief's house, Ulawa, Qaloto. 
 
 poonga'ini U., v. tr., to carry, to act as porter, 
 poonga'i v. i. 
 poonga'inila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 poopoo n., a shrine. 
 
 po'opo'oli'ili'i to be wayward, perverse; lae 
 po'opo'oli'ili'i, kele po'opo'oli'ili'i, to 
 act perversely, li'i 2. 
 
 poopoota (na, ni) n., foundation. poo3. qooqoota. 
 
 po'osu'a'a concerned about, po'o 5. non 
 ka'a po'osu'a'a ike ana, I am not con- 
 cerned about it. 
 
 po'ote'e to concern oneself about; used with 
 poss. 3. ka'a po'ote'e ada, ko 'anomire 
 mola, cared not for them, just buried 
 them, of the undistinguished dead. 
 M. A., p. 263. 
 
 popo, poponga 1. to be tight, close-fitting; 
 iolanga e poponga, a burden awkward 
 to carrJ^ 
 
 popo (ku) 2. buttock; popo ni honu, the tail- 
 piece of shell on the back of the hawk- 
 bill turtle, much prized at Santa Cruz 
 and used to make nose-rings. 
 
 popo 3. popo ana, the white (of egg). 
 
 popo 4. v. tr., to carve; kira 'asi 'unua 'e popoa 
 hoi i'a hdu, they said he was to carve 
 a fish in stone. 
 
 popolo'u, popopolo'u V. i., to be afraid, 
 popolo'unge v. n., fear, fright. 
 
 popopo'a adj., square-shaped. 
 
 poposane'a adj., riddled v/ith borings of the 
 white ants {sane). 
 
 pore n., an armlet plaited of grass. 
 
 poro 1. male, husband, person; a porona, S., 
 a poroni, U., the person So-and-so; in 
 the folklore the men's names generally 
 begin with poro, a Poro hdnua raha, a 
 ghost, Mr. Big-land; a Poro jnatou ni 
 wala, a ghost; Poro waiiru i 'esi, a 
 legendary person, Mr. Fall-into-the-sea. 
 a porona ko malamala Sa'a, So-and-so 
 speaks Sa'a; poro ni haka, white man, 
 lit., man of the ship; poro ha'alu, a 
 bridegroom; poro repo, poro pdine, used 
 of important persons; poro kdiile, male 
 frigate-bird; lo'o poro, to have a hus- 
 band, to be married; to'o poronga. 
 marriage. 
 
 poro 2. poroi rare, a small mat plaited from 
 green coconut leaves used as a dustpan 
 or for holding rubbish. 
 
 poru U., to be short, little in stature, 'o'oru'e. 
 
 poso to be matted, tangled (of hair), curly. 
 qd'une e poso. 
 
 posiki to rebound, to ricochet. 
 
 pota, potapota v. i., to break by knocking one 
 thing against another; pota niu, to 
 crack a coconut. 
 potali tr. 
 
 potalila-(na, ni) gerund. Mota wota 3, 
 Florida pota, Mao. pota. 
 
 potaa U., rubbish heap, refuse, dung. 
 
 pote 1. v. i., to be replete with food, to have 
 had sufificient to eat; ngdii ni pole, to 
 eat to satiety. 
 potenga v. n., repletion; potenga ni sape, 
 bodily repletion; potenga haahi, plenty 
 to eat. 
 
 pote 2. used of phases of the moon; hara pote, 
 S., saro pote, U., the day before full 
 moon. 
 
 pote 3. n., a louse; urnuru pote, uruurii qe'u, to 
 clean the hair of lice. Wango bote, 
 Nengone ole. 
 
 pote S., (ku) qote U., 4. buttock; hi'uki'u pole, 
 a bird, wagtail. 
 
 potepote U.. a pimple. 
 
 potoi U., a firestick, 7nasi potoi.
 
 8i 
 
 PURA 
 
 pou 1. a block of wood, a log, hdi pou. pou 
 ni 'ei. U. Maori pou, Samoa pou, post. 
 pou 2. V. i.. to become hard, firm in consist- 
 ency, to set, to congeal (of liquids), to 
 heal over (of sores), to be solid (of 
 waves); susii pou. to run high without 
 breaking (of waves), 
 pouhiru'e adj., raging sea; sasa'ae e pouhiru'e, 
 
 a raging sea is stirred up. 
 poulolo U., n., the cross-beams of a house, 
 poupou 1. a green coconut. Wango poupou, 
 
 fruit, poupou kua, hen's egg. 
 poupou (ku) 2. U., poupou vi 'ae'ae, poupou 
 
 ni uli, heel. Wango poupou. 
 po'upo'u 3. crossed sticks, a cross; rdpu 
 
 lakoma'i pe'i po'upo'u, to crucify. 
 po'uru'uru S., qo'uru'uru U., v. i., to kneel 
 down, to stoop, to bend down, 'uru'uru. 
 po'uru'urunge v. n. Wango bouru. 
 pue S.. pua U., areca nut, hoi puc, hou pua; 
 hungulani pua, a bunch of nuts; 
 maholola ni pua, a piece of areca; wiihiri, 
 to be intoxicated from eating areca; 
 hou vieme, the quid of areca, betel and 
 lime; hoi meuta'a, a hard ripe areca nut; 
 inola, S., pei, U., a mortar for pounding 
 areca nut; oka. damn, to chew areca; 
 pile, a young nut just edible. Borneo 
 hua, fruit; pue is probably connected 
 with hue 1. M. L., p. 71. 
 pule 1. n., a young girl; a pulena, the girl; 
 ptilena, vocative, you girl; kele Pule ineu, 
 my little girl, 
 pule 2. to be dropsical; 'ae pule, dropsical 
 
 swelling of the leg. Mota pura. 
 puli 1. a cowrie shell; pull 'ehi'e, orange cowTie; 
 oa ni puli, a pair of cowries; talai puli, a 
 string of cowries for the forehead. 
 Samoa, Niue pule, Viti mbuli. 
 puli 2. V. i., to crowd, to throng. ha'apuU- 
 puli iihu'i, to throng round; ruru puli, 
 U., to gather in a crowd. 
 pulitaa U., v. n., a crowd, a throng, a mob, 
 a company, 
 pulo 1. V. i., to turn back, to return, ha'apulo. 
 melu pulo i ola, we only reached such- 
 and-such a place; pulo sa'asala ana, 
 came short of it, failed to reach; 
 td'ipulopulo, to come short of. 
 pulosi tr., to turn about, to turn over, to 
 twist. Wango buro, Florida pulo. 
 pulo 2. n., a bowstring, pulo ni pesi. 
 puloki (English bullock) susu ni puloki, cow's 
 
 milk. 
 pulongo S.. V. i., to forget, to be forgetful, 
 pulongosi tr. 
 
 pulongota'ini tr., Qaloto. Wango buron- 
 gosi. 
 pulopulo to'o pulopulo, specked, 
 pulu 1. to be black; pulu nunu'e. stained; hiiu 
 pulu, volcanic rock; kuka pulu, a mud 
 crab; poo pulu, a black pig; rodohono 
 pupulu. pitch dark. 
 pulu 2. gall, used in witchcraft to cause sleep 
 to enemies; dere pulu haahi, to throw 
 gall over them. 
 
 pulu 3. pitch, gum. native cement; a nut, sate 
 (Farinarium laurinum) is scraped on 
 rough coral rock and darkened in color 
 by a mixture of charcoal (lo'ilohi) and 
 the juice of o'a, the cement hardens 
 almost immediately; pulu maai seu, 
 circular pieces of shell used in inlaying; 
 soo pulu, to gather cement nuts, 
 pulu'i v. tr., to calk with native cement. 
 Mota pulu, Polynesian pulu. 
 Pululaha a district on Little Malaita at the 
 west entrance to Mara Masiki Channel, 
 pulupulu n., a firefly; it is regarded as the soul 
 of a dead person and is killed when it 
 comes into a house, maaku e lakara 
 pulupulu, my eyes saw stars. Wango 
 Ijuruburu. 
 pulupulu'e adj., black; natives as distinguished 
 from white people. ni7vala pulupulu'e. 
 punipuni v. i., to smear the face with juice of 
 areca nut when chewing, to smear the 
 body with lime, to decorate the body 
 with strong-smelling herbs. San Cris- 
 toval buni, Maori pani, to paint, 
 pungu 1. to be deaf; a pungu, the deaf person. 
 
 Wango bungu. 
 pungu 2. a bunch; pungui aleale. a bunch of 
 dyed aleale tied on a comb for decora- 
 tion or hung on the bows of a canoe; 
 pungui nume, a cluster of houses; aw 
 pungu, a large strong bamboo, 
 pupungu V. i., to cluster in a bunch, cf. 
 hungu. Florida punguti, to cluster 
 round, 
 pu'o 1. to be ignorant, to be heathen (late use), 
 to have none; 'o manata'inie hoi niu? 
 nou pu'o. have j-ou a coconut? I have 
 not; tola mala pu'o. to behave like a 
 heathen, 
 pu'onga V. n., ignorance, heathenism, 
 pu'ota'i v. i., to forget; noko pu'ota'i ulo 
 
 'olo. I forget to cry. 
 pu'ota'ini tr., to be ignorant of. not to have; 
 moro ko pu'ota'inie erenga hailiu, you 
 do not know one another's speech. 
 pu'o 2. V. i., to return, to come back, ha'apu'o. 
 pu'o, pu'opu'o 3. V. i., to revolve, to turn round; 
 hdu pu'opu'o. a grindstone, 
 pu'osi, pu'opu'osi tr. 
 pupu 1. to rest assured; sacku e pupu 'olo ana, 
 I rest assured of it; pupu to'o, to rely; 
 used with poss. 3, to rely on. 
 pupu 2. ta'ipupu'e, tangled, 
 pupu 3. U., hoi pupu, the Southern Cross con- 
 stellation. 
 pupulu pulu 1; rodohono pupulu, pitch dark; 
 'ala pupulu haahi, to surround in a 
 dense body, 
 pupulue'i v. tr.. to darken the mind, to 
 vex; e pupulue'if saena, his mind was 
 disturbed, 
 pupungula U., adj., marked with a rash, 
 pupupu to be whole, intact, safe, i'o pupupu. 
 Wango bubu, Florida mabuhu. 
 pupupu'e adj., whole, entire; hele pupupu'c, 
 keep intact. 
 pupute S., puputa U., a bundle, a sheaf, 
 pura U., pule S., to be dropsical.
 
 PURAPDRA 
 
 82 
 
 purapiira U., si'o purapura, irregularly. 
 
 puri (ku) back of, behind the back, the stern. 
 ha'ipuri. e ro ini est Puri met, at the 
 last came two persons; ape puri, to be 
 last, in the rear; 'ato puri, to turn the 
 back on; mwaamwaa puri, trepang, 
 beche-de-mer; oku i puri, back wall of 
 house; po'o puri, in the rear, after; su'e 
 Puri, to fall backward and break the 
 neck; susu puri, last born, youngest 
 child; loli puri, to turn the back on, to 
 leave; purine, after that: used with 
 locative i, behind, at the back of, after, 
 at last; purina lua, U., nape of neck; 
 t purine tnaholo, after the time when; 
 i piirimu, in your absence; i purine 
 niaeta, after the death feast; qa'i purina. 
 behind, in the rear; ini (laa) i puri, the 
 youngest; isipuri, to be last. Motu 
 tnuri, Maori tniiri. 
 
 Purihaha a village on the hill at Sa'a. 
 
 purimv/ane n., the last born, youngest son. 
 
 puri ni 'iola 1. the lee side of an island, lit., the 
 stern of a canoe. 
 
 Puri ni 'Iola 2. a district on the west side of 
 Little Malaita. 
 
 puru to be close, thick, frequent, hd'ipurunga, 
 'apurunge. inaenga kosi puru, deaths 
 are frequent; puru hero, a dish of 
 pounded taro with grated coconut 
 {hero) on top, a Qaloto dish esteemed 
 poor cooker J'. Florida buric, the Plei- 
 ades; burungi, to crowd. 
 
 purupuru'a'a adj., frequent; lae purupuru'a'a, 
 to go frequently. 
 
 pusu 1. V. i., to spurt out, to squirt; pusu 'esi, 
 a whale, 
 pusue'ini, pusule'ini, pusuli tr., to splash 
 a person, to spurtle on. Florida puhu, 
 Mota pupus. 
 
 pusu 2. n., a latrine, mapusu. 
 
 puta niapulapula, U., bruised. 
 
 pute S., puta U., a bundle, a sheaf; pute ni 'oha, 
 a packet of betel leaf. 
 
 puu 1. V. i., to tread, to stamp, to rest, to stand 
 firm, to rely on. 
 puuli tr., to pounce on, of birds, to strike 
 with the talons; puulie rnaonga, to tread 
 the dance; puuli' mwakana, to tread 
 the earth. Wango buuri. 
 
 puu 2. n., mason bee, wasp. 
 
 pu'u 3. mangrove borer. 
 
 puuhara to ptard firm, to get a footing, hala- 
 hala. 
 
 puuUsi 'nri puulisi, to tread under foot. 
 
 puupuulisi poo a prickly shrub. 
 
 puuto'o, puupuuto'o to rely; used with poss. 3, 
 to rely on. mangova e puuto'o aliho'i, 
 his breath returned. 
 
 The sound represented by Q is that of pw; 
 there is an interchange of q and p in certain 
 words, which, however, is not critical of 
 dialectic difference between Sa'a and Ulawa, 
 qelo, S., pelo, U., pongi, S., qongi, U., qale, U., 
 pale, Ulawa-Ngorangora. 
 
 qa'a, qa'aqa'a I. v. i., to break, to crack, to 
 
 be cracked; 'iola e qa'a 'olo, the canoe 
 
 is wrecked; qa'a morumoru, broken to 
 
 pieces. 
 qa'asi tr., S., ddu may be prefixed, ddu 
 
 qa'asi, to break; lere qa'asi, to peck and 
 
 break. 
 qa'asilana gerund., the breaking of it. 
 qa'ali tr., U., tau may be prefixed. 
 
 ha'aqa'ali. 
 qa'ata'ini tr., to break to one's detriment; 
 
 e 'olii 'iola e qa'ala'inieu, three times I 
 
 suffered shipwreck. 
 qa'ata v. n., with genitive i; mu qa'atai ola, 
 
 shreds. 
 qa'a 2. to rise (of the heavenly bodies); waaro- 
 
 waaro e qa'a 'oto, the moon has risen; 
 
 mdi ana waarowaaro e qa'a, ebb tide 
 
 at moonrise; madala e qa'a, the day star 
 
 is risen; qa'aqa'a uweha, U., a phase of 
 
 the moon, 
 qa'ali tr., sato e qa'alie hdnue, the sun has 
 
 risen on the earth. 
 qa'ala-(na) gerund; qa'alana sato, east, 
 qa'ahita U., n., a slab; qa'ahila ni 'ei, a slab of 
 
 wood. 
 qa'ahulu'e adj., ruffled (of the surface of the 
 
 sea), having goose flesh. Mota ultii, 
 
 hair; Maori hum. 
 qa'akora (na) the outer skin of the canarium nut. 
 qa'alinge n., echo, 'alinge. 
 qa'aqa (ku) n., grandmother or grandchild; 
 
 the personal article a may be employed, 
 
 a qa'aqa; ro hd'i qa'aqana, grandmother 
 
 and grandchild, the two between whom 
 
 subsists the relation qa'aqa. 
 qa'aqa'a with genitive li; qa'aqa'ali naho, a 
 
 wave, a breaker, 
 qaaqi'a U., adj., stale or brackish (of water); 
 
 tono qaaqi'a, to taste brackish. 
 qaaqi'a'a U., adj., mawkish, 
 qa'aqito v. i., to sprout, to spring up (of plants). 
 
 pito. 
 qa'arakau U-, v. i., to break with a loud noise, 
 
 as a bamboo bursting or a gun firing, 
 qa'arete n., a blister, hou qa' arete, U. 
 qa'arongo, qa'aqa'arongo v. i., to hearken, to 
 
 listen, to pay attention. 
 qa'arongonga v. n., listening. 
 qa'arongoisuli 1. v. tr., to listen to, to pay 
 
 attention to. 2. n., a listener, a dis- 
 ciple; ini qa'arongoisuli e ka'a liuta'ana 
 
 ini ha'ausuli, the disciple is not above 
 
 hip master, 
 qa'asuulana n., the brink, cliff, 
 qa'ateru n., a snail; qa'ateru a 'i'i, a very large 
 
 snail. 
 qaeqae (ku) n., armpit. San Cristoval qaeqae. 
 qa'i 1. V. tr., to lever, to prize. 2. to stir round, 
 qa'i 3. U., negative particle used of indefinite 
 
 time, a short form of qa'ike. sapeku 
 
 e qa'i ynware'a, I am not in good health; 
 
 nou qe'i sare, I am unwilling. Wango 
 
 qai, Florida bei. 
 qa'i 4. U., to be club-footed. 
 qa'i 5. sane qa'i, a termite of a brownish color 
 
 used as burly for the sea-bream.
 
 83 
 
 qAri 
 
 qJl'l ao U., a large hermit crab, ao 2. 
 
 qa'i oku second day after full moon. 
 
 qa'ike U., negative adverb, used also as nega- 
 tive particle; probably composed of 
 qd'i 3 and ke 1. wa qa'ike, or else, 
 otherwise; lehuna qa'ike, not that; nau 
 qa'ike loosia, I did not see it; e qa'ike 
 munia nga maenga, not unto death. 
 
 qa'ileni S., the seventeenth day of the moon. 
 cf. qd'i oku, the sixteenth. 
 
 qa'ilulu v. i., to be dismayed, qa'i 2. saeda 
 e qa'ilulu eni me'unge, their hearts were 
 dismayed through fear. 
 
 qainaa garden ground near the beach, used for 
 planting hana. pdinaa. 
 
 qaito (na) n., a twist made out of a leaf, gener- 
 ally a leaf of wild ginger (aro), used as 
 a stopper for bamboo water-carriers, a 
 cork. 
 
 qake U., negative particle, used of present or 
 past time, qa'ike. 
 
 qala v. i., to be empty, to be void of people. 
 ha'aqala. hdnue e qala, there is no one 
 in the village; nume qala, a cicada which 
 presages death, lit., empty house. 
 qalasi tr., to be left without friends, to be 
 alone; e qalasire, there is no one with 
 them. Nguna ynaso qalo, wilderness; 
 VVango qara, empty. 
 
 qalaqala mere, empty; for naught. U. lae mola 
 qalaqala, to go tor nothing, ineffectually; 
 moola qalaqala, things empty, valueless. 
 
 qale (Ulawa, Su'uholo dialect) negative par- 
 ticle, pale, qake. e qale ola ne'e adea, 
 I saw nothing; micai keni e'asi qale 
 wala'awala'a mware'a, what drawling 
 women. 
 
 qali, qaliqeli 1. to deceive, to be mistaken; nou 
 qeliqelieu, I was mistaken. 
 
 qali 2. U., qali ka'o, a drop left in the bottom. 
 pali. 
 
 qali 3. qali toutou, canoe-shaped drawings used 
 in ornamenting la'o, etc. toutou. 
 
 qaloqalo (ku) the right hand; with locative t", 
 » qaloqalo, on the right hand (late use) ; 
 position is shewn by hao, ta'au, paro, 
 lengi, 'ano, etc. ana rao 'iola i qaloqalo, 
 on the right side of the ship. 
 
 Qaloto the hill district above Sa'a. M. A., 
 p. 50. 
 
 qalu dede qalu, an arrow. 
 
 qalu V. i., to be with child; qalu hum, to conceive 
 by a person. 
 
 qalusu (ku) nose, beak of a bird; qdlusu 'upu'e, 
 S., a wood-pigeon with large wattles on 
 the beak (Carpophaga rufigula); du susu 
 qclusu, a bamboo nose-stick. Fagani 
 burnsu, Wango qarisu, Mota ?ngusui, 
 lip. M. L. p. 85. 
 
 qana 1. n., a pandanus with large leaves which 
 are split down to make mats. 2. n., a 
 sail; lili qana, to jibe; hdu lilt qana, a 
 boom. VVango qana. 
 
 qani adv., long ago; precedes the verb; 'oto 
 qdni, formerly; melu qeni lae 'oto mdi, 
 we came here a long time ago. Fagani 
 qani, already; Florida dania. 
 
 q'anio, qaniqenio U., v. i., to play, to have a 
 game, 
 qanionga v. n., a game, play, 
 qanu n., a snare, gin; v. tr., to snare, 
 qango 1. n., mucus, 'uru qango, S., 'usu qango, 
 
 U., to wipe the nose. 
 qango (na, ni) 2. tops of taro used for planting, 
 
 qangoi Iiui. 
 qango 3. U., qangoi sa'o, a measure, from finger 
 tips to wrist. 
 
 qango 4. marrow, qango laloi suli. 
 
 qangoqango n., a nose-stick, an ornament of 
 clam shell stuck in the nostril, bored at 
 the outer end and decorated with por- 
 poise teeth. (One is shown in The 
 Cruise of the Curacoa, p. 246.) niumua 
 qangoqango, U., to apply the teeth 
 decoration. 
 
 qao, qaoqao S., 1. v. tr., to do, to do to a person; 
 to lay hands on a person, to appoint, to 
 ordain (late use); to worship, to prac- 
 tice religion, ynii ola kire ko qao 'emi 
 eni, the things they do to us; muini 
 liuta'ana a mwane 'ie e qao'i ne, more 
 than those which this man has done; 
 qao olanga, n., worship, prayers. 
 
 qao, qaohi 2. tr., to cover, to overlay. 
 
 qaoha n., ridgepole; suli 'ei i qaoha, a ridge- 
 pole; susu qaoha, to sew sago leaves for 
 a ridge covering. 
 
 qaoha'i v. i., to be capsized, to capsize; melu 
 qaoha'i 'oto, we are capsized, 
 qaoha'ini tr., to overturn, to overlay, to 
 lay on top; qaoha'inie kd'u haahie, lay 
 it over it. 
 
 qaohi n., a bird, the white-breasted fish-hawk. 
 
 qaola'i S., qaola'i walanga, v. n., deceit, lying. 
 
 qaona v. tr., to lay hands on officially, to 
 appoint, to ordain (late use), 
 qaonanga v. n., qaonanga ani nimc. the 
 laying on of hands, qao. 
 
 qaonga U., battlefield, cf. paonga. 
 
 qao ola v. i., to do officially, to do sacrifice, to 
 worship, to pray; a qaoqao ola, the 
 officer, the officiant; qao olanga, v. n., 
 worship, prayer. 
 
 qaqa 1. v. i., to lay eggs. 2. female (of animals), 
 used to show sex as opposed to mwane, 
 male; 'usu qaqa, a bitch, slut; poo qaqa, 
 a sow. 
 
 qaqahe U., v. i., to walk about; keni qaqahe, S., 
 a harlot. Wango qaqahe uwa, sole of 
 the foot. 
 
 qaqahinu U., to have glandular swellings under 
 the arms. 
 
 qaqaitengili U., v. i., to be abandoned, left 
 desolate of inhabitants. 
 
 Qaqalaha the middle boat-harbor of the three 
 between Roasi Bay and Port Adam. 
 Little Malaita. 
 
 qaqasu (na) knot on a tree, knot in bamboo. 
 
 qara v. i., to be old, to be past child-bearing 
 (of women). 
 
 qarero S., to play, to have games, 
 qareronga v. n., play, sport. 
 
 qari 1. u., a small frog. 
 
 qari 2. suli qrri i ngaena, backbone.
 
 QARO 
 
 84 
 
 qaro 1. v. tr., to catch in a noose, to lasso, to 
 hitch; met., to kill, qaro haahi, to put 
 a hitch on; qaro pa'cu-a mala mu-ai 
 matawa. to catch sharks in a noose like 
 the Santa Cruz people, M. A., p. 294. 
 nga madala tucre 'ana'i qaroa adaru'a, 
 when the day star rises we shall hitch it 
 up for them. i. e., to kill. 2. n., a noose, 
 a hitch, maai qaro. maraaii i qaro, 
 south-by-east wind. Maori koro. 3. 
 qaro haa, an armlet made of haa, hiirc- 
 soso and malo strung in a pattern. 
 qaroqaro m-wai matawa qaroqaro, the Ulawa 
 
 name for Santa Cruz men. 
 qasaora S., n., dust, ashes, era U. 
 qasile S., to run (of mucus in the nose, of water 
 
 in the eyes). 
 qaso armlet plaited of dyed cane or grass; qaso 
 71 i Kela, an armlet of dyed grass from 
 the western Solomons received through 
 Guadalcanar (Kela) ; ha'u qaso, to weave 
 an armlet; use qaso, to plait an armlet; 
 lii qaso, to make an armlet of shell 
 money. 
 qasu, qa'uqesu v. tr., to tie up, to bind, a 
 
 qd'uqesu 'inoni, a policeman. 
 qate n., a large frog. 
 
 qa'u (ku) 1. the head, top, chief; hoii qd'u, U.. 
 skull; qd'ji 'apula, U., a wounded person, 
 lit., bloody head; qd'une hdu, the rocks 
 on shore as seen from sea; qd'usi henue, 
 the head of the community, the person 
 whose duty it is to approach the ances- 
 tral ghosts; qd'iii i'e, four porpoise 
 teeth; qd'iili 'inoni, the name of a cer- 
 tain spear; qd'une e Itimwe, with long 
 hair; qd'ulimaa, door lintel; i Qd'una 
 Namo, the north cape of Ulawa; qd'u 
 ngudu, blackfish; qd'uku e palapala. my 
 hair is gray; qd'u ni saivalo, four flying- 
 fox teeth; qd'u teroliu, the second finger; 
 qd'u ni lolinge, the chief portion at a 
 feast; qd'uni urn, a phase of the moon; 
 qd'ui 'usu, four dogs' teeth, a unit in 
 counting; qd'u ni mala pe'i, to consult 
 with; ihui qe'u, hair of the head; 
 Kikiri qe'u, a ghost; maelaa ni qe'u, 
 meningitis; 'olo i qe'une, right on the 
 head; rd'iqe'u, the top of a house post; 
 ruuqe'u, a stump; e leile'inie qd'une, he 
 moves his head from side to side; to'o 
 qd'u, to carry on the head; uwe qd'u, to 
 lift the head; hou mwarelei qd'u, the 
 skull; i qe'una 'apa'apana, on his 
 shoulder. 
 qa'u 2. used as adverb of direction; qd'u mei, 
 hither; qd'u wau, U., qd'u paro, qd'u 
 niparo, U., over there, beyond; qd'u 
 hao, S., qd'u toli, S., going north or west; 
 qd'u ta'au, S., qd'i (qd'u i) lengi, U., 
 going south or east; qd'i 'ano, U., west; 
 qd'i Purina, U., behind him; qd'i puri, 
 U., in the rear; to'oha'i qe'u ana, to be 
 entangled in. Mota qatui, Niue patu, 
 chief. 
 
 qa'u 3. v. i., to smoke (of fire); diinge ko qe'u, 
 
 the fire smokes; qd'uli dunge, smoke; 
 
 qd'nli dunge ana. its smoke. 
 
 qa'ula-(na, ni), gerund., ga'z</awa,^its smoke. 
 
 qa'u 4. garden ground on the hills immediately 
 
 above the beach, the yams grown there 
 
 are tough and are mainly scraped to 
 
 make kara. 
 
 Qa'uli 'Inoni a village of Little Malaita at the 
 
 head of the Walo'a'a River. 
 Qa'ulimwaa the west entrance into Mara 
 
 IMasiki Channel. 
 qa'ulipeni U., the top of the side-wall of a 
 
 house, purUn. 
 Qaulipesi, Qa'ulipoo names of two sections of 
 
 the village (poona) at Mv.'ado'a. 
 Qa'ulo Bauro, name of the east end of San 
 
 Cristoval, Alosi the west. 
 Qa'ulopaine (in M. A., p. 48, wrongly spelled 
 Pau-ulo) the ancestor eleven generations 
 back of Sinehanue-'ou'ou of Sa'a, who 
 died in 1900 and whose son Halutala is 
 now chief at Sa'a. The genealogy is 
 as follows: Qa'ulopaine begat Taheri- 
 'usu-'ou'ou, who begat 'Ou'ou i Kela, 
 who begat Sinehanue paine, who begat 
 Dorahanue paine, who begat VVate- 
 herohero. Wateherohero had only 
 daughters and bought (adopted) Dora 
 maesingedi, who begat Wate'ou'ou. 
 who begat Sinehanue-'ou'ou, who begat 
 Dora hoeniseu, who was the father of 
 Sinehanue-'ou'ou. Wate'ou'ou also 
 begat Halumwane, who begat Wate- 
 'ou'ou, who begat Halukeni (female), 
 who is now living. Wate'ou'ou also 
 adopted Irokalani, who in recent times 
 was the head of the heathen party. 
 Wateherohero had a daughter Halutoro, 
 whose son was Walakulu, who begat 
 Soiolo, who begat Halutoro (female), 
 who married Taheri'usu; their adopted 
 daughter was Uqeho'i, whose daughter 
 Halutoro is living. Dora maesingedi 
 also begat Lapaite'e, who begat Dora- 
 wewe, who begat a daughter Wate- 
 'ou'ou keni, now married to P. Marita- 
 lalo of Ulawa. For Dorawewe see 
 M. A., p. 50; the young chief referred 
 to in the note is Sinehanue-'ou'ou. 
 qa'ulunge'ini S., v. tr., lio qd'ulunge'ini, to see 
 indistinctly. 
 qa'ulunge'i partic, indistinct, of irregular 
 outline, 
 qa'unge n.. a generation. Lau gwounge. 
 qa'ungudu blackfish. 
 qa'uqe'ute fierce black smoke, qd'u 3. 
 qa'uroro a knot in a line or rope, hou qa'uroro, 
 
 U. Motu qatua, a knot, 
 qa'u suu ngdu qd'u suu, to gorge, to eat till 
 the head drops. 
 ngdu qe'u suunge n., gluttony, 
 qa'uto'u V. i., to incline the head, to bow, to 
 
 duck the head. Wango qoutou. 
 qa'uulunge 1. v. i., to pillow; used with poss. 3; 
 qd'uulunge ana, to make a pillow of.
 
 8s 
 
 RAATA'I 
 
 qM'uulunge (continued). 
 
 2. n., a pillow, usually a piece of wood. 
 
 3. n.. a headland in a yam garden, 
 qa'ulunge'ini v. tr., to support as a pillow. 
 qe'i du qe'i, a bamboo with close joints. 
 qela 1. a thousand, of coconuts, qela ni niu. 
 qela 2. v. i., to place alongside, to lay parallel. 
 
 U.. V. tr., to place upon, 
 qelaa'ini tr. 
 qeli 1. to be raveled. 
 
 qeli qeliqeli 2. v. tr., to deceive, cheat; kie ko 
 tale'i qeliqeliki'e mola, we merely deceive 
 ourselves, qiili 1. 
 qelo, qeloqelo v. tr., to betray. 
 
 qelola-(ku) gerund. Florida pero. 
 qelu, qeluqelu 1. to roll, to cause to turn over. 
 lalaqeluqelu. 2. to accuse, to put the 
 blame on, to charge with immorality; 
 qelu wala ilengine ngaini, to accuse 
 anyone; qelu ola, to accuse; qelu olanga, 
 accusation, 
 qelusi tr. 
 
 qelusila-(ku) gerund. Mota wil, Malay, 
 Dyak, Tagalog giling, V'iti wiri. 
 qera to be in flood, to be in abundance, gener- 
 ally of flood waters; kone e qera, much 
 flood waters; lue qera, spring tide. 
 qeraqeraha v. n., used with poss. 3; qera- 
 qeraha ana mu 'inoni, exceeding many 
 people. 
 qeru U., n., lip; qerii 'upu, to hate, lit., swollen 
 lip, stuck out lip; lio qeru 'upu, Ho qeru 
 n^udu, to grudge, to hate, 
 qeruqeru U., n., lip. 
 qesa'a S., adj., wet. damp. 
 qeto to be feeble, weak, cowardly. 
 
 qetola-(na, ni) U., gerund.; qelolana ddngi, a 
 
 wind decreased in force, gone down, 
 qetoha S., v. n., used with poss. 3; qelo- 
 haana ddngi, a wind decreased in force. 
 qetonga v. n., weakness, cowardice, 
 qetosi tr., to be unable to do through weak- 
 ness. Florida beto, still, calm. 
 qe'u 1. to be foolish, ha'aqe'u. 
 
 qe'unge v. n., foolishness; wdi ni qe'unge, 
 strong drink (late use). Wango qeu, 
 Mota qure. 
 qe'u 2. to be deaf and dumb; a qe'u, the deaf 
 
 mute; qe'u ereere, dumb. 
 qe'u 3. nunuhe'i qe'u. to enter, to be entangled 
 
 in. qd'u 1. 
 qe'uqe'u'a'a adj., foolish, silly. 
 
 qe'uqe'u'a'anga v. n., foolishness; wai ni 
 qe'uqe'u'a'anga, strong drink. 
 qi'e S., qi'a U.. to be in good health, to be fat, 
 chubby; qi'e dliho'i, to recover soundness 
 of health. Nguna qia, well, good; 
 Mota wia, good; New Guinea, bie. 
 qi'eqi'ala adj., fat, whole, healthy. 
 qiiqii S., n., mud, slush. 
 
 qiiqii'e adj., muddy, slushy. 
 qilo'a adj.. springy, pliable. 
 qini'a U., adj., wet, damp, ha'aqini. maraau 
 wet qini, east-by-north wind (brings 
 rain). Lau gwini. 
 qire n., a stalk of bamboo, nga qire, qirei eu. 
 qiruu U., piruu, S., one qiruu, black sand. 
 
 qisi v. i.. to spurt, to splash. 
 
 qisihi L'., qisih S., tr., to splash a person. 
 SatiKja pisi. Motu pisili. 
 
 qito S., pito U.. to sprout, to shoot, to begin to 
 grow; hohola e qito, the yams have 
 sprouted. 2. n., a growing coconut, 
 hoi qito. 3. n., a sprout; qitona, it3 
 sprout. Wango 91/0. 
 
 qole U., pole .S., to dream, ma'ahu qole. nau 
 ma'ahu qolea, I dreamed it; ma'ahu 
 qolenga, v. n., a dream. Mota qore, 
 Florida maturu bole, to dream. 
 
 qongi, qongiqongi U., pongi S. 1. v. tr.. to 
 promise, rodi qongi. to plight troth. 
 
 qongi (ku) S. 2. n., a season, time, t qongina 
 a ola, in So-and-so's day; ana qongine, 
 in its season; hduliqongi, one day of a 
 series; 'o holo onu'e qongiku hao, thou 
 hast cut short my time; qongi ko sisiho 
 'oto, the time is at hand; e hule lalahie 
 qongine, born out of due time, pongi 2. 
 
 qooqoota S., foundation, poopoota. qooqoota 
 ani nume, foundations of the house. 
 
 qote (ku; U.. pote S., n.. buttock. 
 
 qo'uru'uru U., po'uru'uru S., to kneel, 
 qo'uru'urunga v. n., kneeling. 
 
 ra 1. sufftxed pron., plural 3, used of person? 
 
 only; attached as object to verbs and 
 
 prepositions; in Sa'a when ra is used of 
 
 a body of people or a company, and » or 
 
 u precedes, the d of rd does not change 
 
 into e, hahira diana, on the good. 
 
 Mota ra 2. 
 ra 2. forms part of rdru'e. rdru'i. rd'elu, etc. 
 raa, raaraa 1. v. i., to shine brightly, ha'araa. 
 
 nemo raaraa, S., sun and rain, a sun 
 
 shower. 
 raahi tr., to scorch (of the sun). 
 raangi tr., to shine on, to give light to, to 
 
 enlighten. 2. n., the sun's light, 
 
 radiance, bright light; dunge ni raa, a 
 
 burning-glass; suuhai raa, drought. 
 
 Wango raraha. Florida raraha, Maori ra, 
 
 the sun. 
 raa 3. the name of a month, January-. 
 Raa 4. a rock near Arona. southeast cape of 
 
 Ulawa. cf. hdu tnaelo. 
 raapea a needle made of the midrib of the sago 
 
 leaf (mudi sa'o). 
 raaraa n.. sunlight, radiance, brilliancy; raaraa 
 
 ani meurihe. the light of life. 
 ra'aranga-(ku) n., 1. the light of the sun, light; 
 
 ra'arangaku, my light, met., glory; 
 
 ra'arangana sato, light of the sun. 
 
 2. md'ule'i ra'arangana, to be in awe of 
 
 it. ranga, cf. rara. 
 ra'aranga 3. because of, on account of; used 
 
 with poss. 3. 
 ra'aranga'a adj., lightened by the rays of the 
 
 sun; used of dazzling light. 
 ra'arara U., adj., nimo ra'arara, sun and rain. 
 
 rara. 
 raata'i partic, regularly, frequently; 'emi ka'a 
 
 are'o raata'i. we do not call upon thee 
 
 regularly.
 
 RADE 
 
 86 
 
 rade n., a reed, tnaai radf. Florida ade. 
 radu 1. V. i., to break up; radu mo'umo'usie mu 
 
 'i'eli, break the ropes in pieces, 
 radu 2. U., v. tr., hum raduau, to run stretching 
 
 out the body. 
 rae 1. n., a corpse; used in Sa'a with poss. 3; 
 rae ana a ola, the corpse of So-and-so; 
 in Ula\va with suffixed pronoun na, 
 raena, his corpse. In M. A., p. 260, the 
 spelling is wronglj' given as ra'e. kiilu 
 rae, to bury at sea; lango rae, a blue- 
 bottle fiy; i'o pe'i rae, S., the mourning 
 before burial. M. A., pp. 261, 262. 
 ra'e 2. n., a palm used for making spears; ra'e 
 ni tolo, a spear with grass plaiting, made 
 on Big Malaita near Waisisi. 
 ra'elu suff. pron., plural 3; attached to verbs 
 
 and prepositions as object, 
 ra'era'e carefully, thoroughly. 
 raha adj., big; not in common use. laha. 
 Oa Raha, Santa Anna Island at south 
 end of San Cristoval; pan giipangu raha, 
 U., big, huge; a Poro Hdnua Raha, U., 
 name of a ghost, Mr. Big-land. Florida 
 haba, Borneo raya. 
 raharaha 'apii raharaha, an issue of blood. 
 rahe v. i., to be weary from work, to work hard, 
 to work to no effect. 
 rahenga v. n., hard work, weariness of body. 
 San Cristoval rafe. 
 rahito'u v. i., to be downcast (of eyes), to'u. 
 raho n., layers of thatch made of sago leaf 
 sewn on bamboo laths with walewale; 
 siki raho, a beetle, held upside down 
 against a strip of sa'o leaf. 
 rahoraho (ku) U., and Qaloto, n., sides, ribs 
 
 (of persons). Wango ragaraga. 
 rai 1. contraction of ran i. 
 
 rai 2. to clear undergrowth with intent to make 
 a garden, 
 raingi tr. 
 
 raite'ini tr., to clear the undergrowth away 
 from a thing, 
 ra'i 3. v. tr., to adopt a child, to keep a tame 
 animal, to keep a turtle in a bowl, to 
 nourish; honii kira rd'ia, the turtle they 
 kept; a Warahuniika rd'i i'a, a legendary 
 person. 
 ra'inge v. n., an orphan, an adopted child. 
 ra'ila-(ku) gerund, 
 ra'i 4. rd'i sen, a platform on the beach used in 
 
 connection with bonito (sdu). 
 ra'i 5. verbal suffix used intransitively. 
 
 taherd'i, taraure'i. 
 ra'iqe'u n., the top of a pillar or house post 
 cut into a hollow to hold the ridgepole. 
 raimaa to cut and disfigure the face in 
 
 mourning, 
 ra'ini verbal suffix used transitively, larau- 
 
 re'ini. 
 ra'irehi to be under the lee, sheltered; i'o 
 rd'irehi, to stay sheltered. Florida 
 rahi, hidden, 
 ra'irehi'e adj., sheltered, 
 ra'isinge n. weapons, tackle, mu re'isinge. 
 raka U., v. i., excessive, dunga e raka, too 
 big a fire; tnwai keni ana dunga rakanga. 
 
 raka (continued). 
 
 women who make too big fires; e pdina 
 raka, excessively big; iiwe raka, to break 
 with a loud noise. Wango rakahi, 
 excessive. 
 rakahi v. tr., to cause to melt (of fire), to heat 
 
 and soften. 
 rakapau v. i., to defend, to protect; used with 
 poss. 3 and with preposition haahi. 
 pan 2. 
 rakerake U., n., a rib of the body, 
 raki v. i., to catch with tongs. 
 rakisi tr. 
 ireki n., tongs. 
 rako 1. V. i., to give a sensation to; used with 
 poss. 3. e rako diana, it causes a 
 pleasant sensation, it is pleasant; rako 
 'aela, rako ta'a, to be unpleasant, irk- 
 some; e rako 'aela akii, it goes against 
 my grain; rako 'aelanga, n., trouble, 
 feeling of unpleasantness. 
 rako 2. v. i., to be quiet, gentle, docile, easily 
 entreated, ha'arako. manatanaerako, 
 he is gentle in disposition; ddu rako, to 
 keep quiet; loli rako, to be patient, 
 enduring. 
 rakonga v. n., gentleness; sae rakonga, 
 gentleness, docility of temper; toli 
 rakonga, patience. 
 rako 3. adv., gently, lae molai rako, go gently, 
 rakoma'i S., partic, longitudinally. 
 rakoma'ini S., lakoma'ini U., to place longi- 
 tudinally upon, to affix; lupii rako- 
 ma'ini, to nail upon, to crucify. 
 rakoma'i U., v. tr., wala'a rakoma'ia ta'ane 
 tolaha, to make advances in word. 
 raku n., a canoe holding four men, 'iola raku, 
 rakuhe (na) n., fat, caul fat; rakuhana poo, lard, 
 rama, ramarama n., flotsam, floating matter 
 
 collected in a tide-rip. 
 Ramarama the village in the south end of Port 
 
 Adam, Malaita. 
 rame n., the edible catkins of the male su'e tree, 
 ramo 1. v. i., to be strong, to be renowned in 
 fighting, to be a champion; ramo suusuu, 
 to be strong forever. 2. n., a champion, 
 a fighting man; ko lae ni ramo, goes in 
 his might. 
 ramonga v. n., strength of body, prowess; 
 dau ramonga ana ngaini, to treat any 
 one with violence. 
 ramoha S., v. n., strength; used with poss. 3 
 
 ana. rarnohaana ddngi, a gale. 
 ramola-(na) gerund., used in Ulawa as 
 
 rajuoha. 
 ramo'i tr., to force, to apply violence to. 
 ramoramo'a adj., mightily; ddu ramo- 
 ramo'a, to force, to compel, to do 
 violence; used with poss. 3. 
 ramoramo'anga n., dsu ramoramo'anga, 
 mighty work. 
 ranga v. i., to rise (of the moon), ra'aranga 1. 
 ranga'a adj., risen; waarowaaro e ranga'a, 
 the moon is up. 
 rangariro'a S., adj., sparkUng. cf. nangaliro'a. 
 rangasi ha'arangasi, v. tr., to blow out, to 
 distend.
 
 87 
 
 RARATA 
 
 rango 1. v. i., to be withered, dry. ripe (of 
 yams when the vine withers). 2. n., 
 mwai rango ni 'ei. dead trees; the mark 
 of a garden, the larger trees were not 
 felled but were killed by fire, 
 rarango n., S., a dead bough, a spike, a 
 
 horn (late use). 
 rangorango U., as rarango. Wango rango- 
 rango. 
 
 rao 1. (na, ni) n., side (of things); ana rao 'iola 
 i qaloqalo, on the right side of the ship; 
 »■ raona wdi, U., by the side of the stream. 
 
 rao, rarao 2. v. i., to be stuck, to cling to; used 
 
 withposs3. ha'ararao. nimekue rarao 
 
 'oto ana, my hand clung fast to it. i'o 
 
 rarao, to be fast, stuck tight, firm. 
 
 raohi tr., to cling to, to adhere. 
 
 raoha'ini tr., to place in conjunction with, 
 
 to attach, 
 raoha'ipartic.in conjunction with, joined to. 
 
 rao 3. exclam., 'olie rao, used of matters of 
 uncertainty when unwilling to commit 
 oneself to a positive statement; rao kire 
 sa'a silt 'oto, they certainly shall not 
 enter. The demonstrative na is added 
 in questioning, raona, is it not so? 
 hdi raona, S., hai raoni, U., expresses 
 disapprobation; well I never. 
 
 raomae, raraomae S., to act craftily. 
 raomaenga v. n., craftiness, wiles. 
 
 raori'i n., a virgin, male or female; keni raori'i, 
 a virgin; maholo ni raori'i, time of 
 virginity. 
 
 rape kiukiu rape, a wagtail, hi'uhi'u kape. 
 
 rape'i, raperape'i U., to stake, to prop, to 
 strengthen. 
 rape'ita (ku) n., a prop, a being strength- 
 ened; rape'itana, to strengthen it. 
 cf. sape'i. 
 
 raporapo n., cross sticks, generally of waowao 
 on a platform {lake). 
 
 rapu, ra'urepu S., rapurapu U., v. i., to strike, 
 to hit, to tattoo, riipu kdtde, to tattoo 
 the frigate-bird on the cheek; rdpii 
 lakoma'i pe'i po'upo'u, to crucify; e rdpu 
 ngiirusie nihona, knocked his teeth out. 
 rapusi tr. 
 rapute'ini tr., to collide with; c rdpule'inic 
 
 tolohota, he laid the measure along, 
 rapute'i partic. qa'une e rdpulc'i i 'ano, 
 his head bumped on the ground; 
 e rdpitte'i salo molemole, a red sky. 
 rapusila-(ku) gerund. Florida labii, Bou- 
 gainville Straits lapu. 
 
 Rapuanate a legendary hero of the Three 
 Sisters Islands; his thigh bone is cur- 
 rently reported to be in some place on 
 Malau Piiina. 
 
 raqa U., v. i., to be deceitful, kururaqa. 
 siho raqa ana, to exaggerate, 
 raqatanga v. n. (double noun ending), 
 deceit. 
 
 raqasi S., temporarily; i'o raqasi, to sojourn; 
 ma'ohi raqasi, to await. 
 
 raqaraqa'a U., temporarily. 
 
 rara, ra'arara 1. v. i., to be hot, pungent (of 
 condiments); with preposition haahi, to 
 
 rara 1 (continued). 
 
 be zealous, to guard, to exercise super- 
 vision over, to be jealous; used with 
 poss. 3, to be greedy, to look after one's 
 own ends, hd'irara. e rara mea, it 
 burnt the tongue, met., it was unpleas- 
 ant, it was hot (of words of rebuke); 
 salo e rara mea, the sun shone with 
 scorching heat; meaku e rara, my tongue 
 is parched; me'i sae e rara, earnestness; 
 rara haahie lolala inge'ie, guards his 
 house; e rara ana, he looks after his 
 own; i sapcna i Ulawa e rara, apos- 
 trophe addressed to Ulawa. cf. ha'addhi. 
 Wango rara, Viti rara, powerful. 
 
 rara 2. v. i., to be shriveled up, withered, ripe, 
 parched (of trees and gardens); rara 
 moumou, ripe and falling to pieces; 
 mdi rara, dead low water at spring tides. 
 
 rara 3. of days of the moon; rara lalau, S., 
 twenty-first and twenty-second days. 
 
 rata 4. the coral tree (Ery thrina indica) ; winter, 
 the time of flowering of this tree; » 
 Melutei Rara, name of a village on 
 Ugi (lit., in the shade of the coral tree). 
 
 rara 5. takarara, come undone. 
 
 rarada U. 1. v. i., to come to land, to ground; 
 hoi i'a e lae mdi i rarada i saini one, the 
 fish came and grounded on the beach. 
 
 rarada 2. sae rarada, indignation. 
 
 rarada 3. ha'ararada, v. tr., to broil, to iry 
 (late use). 
 
 raradi'e S., ere raradi'e, correction. 
 
 raradu v. i., to stretch the arms. 
 
 rarahi 1. v. tr., to importune, to urge, with 
 ddii, S., Idu, U., e Idii rarahira. 
 
 rarahi 2. du rarahi, the third finger. 
 
 rara'i 1. U., %., to be rippled, of the surface of 
 the sea. 
 
 rara'i 2. U., to be beautiful. 
 
 raramaa v. i., to reprove openly, to be insolent, 
 wilful, barefaced; ere raramaa, insolent 
 speech, 
 raramaanga v. n., open rebuke, insolence; 
 raramaanga ana i'onga tala'ala, rebuke 
 for lasciviousness; i'o raramaanga, las- 
 civiousness. Wango raramaa. 
 
 raramea v. i., to be hot, scorching; salo e rara- 
 mea, the sun is burning hot. 
 
 raranga n., the spine of the sea-urchin. 
 
 raranga'a adj., open, exposed to the sun, of 
 situation. 
 
 rarangana noko me'nte'i rarangana, I am afraid 
 of it. 
 
 rarango cf. rango. 
 
 rarangi, rararangi 1. v. i., to warm oneself at a 
 fire; e 'urc'ure ko rarangi, he stood 
 warming himself. Mola rara 2, Polj- 
 nesian rara. 
 
 rarangi 2. v. tr., to be close to, to surround. 
 
 rarapuupuu frequently, often. 
 
 Rararo Cape Hartig, Little Malaita, w^est of 
 Cape Zelec. 
 
 rarasi 1. v. i., to be shriveled, withering, 
 palsied. 2. U., a phase of the moon, the 
 last quarter. 
 
 rarata n., a skull.
 
 RARE 
 
 88 
 
 rare 1. a sleeping-mat plaited of coconut leaves; 
 ha'u rare, poe rare, to plait such a mat. 
 2. V. tr., to singe a pig with dry coconut 
 leaves; an ordeal wherein the accused 
 standing on a platform is singed with 
 dry coconut leaf. M. A., p. 212. 
 
 rareta'ini, ra'erareta'ini v. tr., to tend, to care 
 for, to do chores, 
 rareta'i v. tr. hd'irareta'i. 
 rareta'inila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 raro 1. S., adv., precedes the verb, used of con- 
 secutive action; then, consequent upon, 
 constantly, ko raro ma'ohie kd'u, they 
 are still awaiting it. 
 
 raro 2. U., mwai lehu raro, open places, glades. 
 
 raro 3. raro suue'i, to turn a bag inside out. 
 
 raroni v. tr., to hurt, to do harm to; e sa'a 
 raronie auhenue inge'ie, he will do no 
 evil to his neighbor. 
 
 raru'e S., raru'i U., pers. pron., dual. 3, suffixed 
 to verbs and prepositions as object. 
 
 rata a bamboo water-carrier; te'i rata, to fill a 
 bamboo with water. San Cristoval 
 rata. 
 
 ratawaari U., half and half, neither one thing 
 nor the other. 
 
 rate ta'atakai rate, lakalakai rate, down (of 
 nestlings). 
 
 rato 1. V. i., to be full grown, of full age. 2. n., 
 a full-grown person, an elder; nrn rato 
 ni mwane, old men; mu rato ni keni, old 
 women; nani rato, for the elders. 
 ratonga v. n., full growth. 
 
 rau 1. n., a leaf used as a wrapper for food to 
 be cooked; mwaran, thin; 'apai reu, a 
 leaf; mu 'apai reu ana mu dango. the 
 leaves of the trees; a Lulu reu, a proper 
 name (lit., folder of leaves). Mota 
 MOM, Polynesian rau. 
 
 rau 2. S. (na, ni), bank, side, of things; with 
 locative i beside, ro rdui wei, the two 
 banks of the stream; i reune wai. beside 
 the stream. Wango rau, Florida lau. 
 
 rau 3. n., a plank; used with genitive i. rdureu. 
 rdi hapa, a thwart; rdi dango, S., rdi 'ei, 
 U., a plank; rdi hist, a stake. 
 
 rau 4. V. tr., to scrape up, to gather up with 
 the hand. Mota rau. 
 
 rau 5. V. i., to heal over (of a wound). 6. n., a 
 scab over a wound, a scar. 
 
 rau 7. V. i., to adhere, to abide; rau mehu, to 
 abide, 
 raungi tr., to adhere to, to abide in. 
 rauhe'ini tr., to be constantly in a place, 
 rausi tr., to adhere to and spoil; e ka'a me'i 
 
 ola ke rdusie, pure, undefiled. 
 rauhe'i v. i., to frequent; e tale'i reuhe'i 'oto 
 ana, he frequented it. 
 
 rau 8. V. i., to be humble, lowly; me'i keni reu 
 a lowly woman, 
 raute'i partic, humble, i'o rdute'i. 
 
 rJlu 9. rdui helu, 10,000 coconuts, cf. 'apai niu. 
 
 RSuehu the pinnacle rock at the east entrance 
 
 to Mara Masiki Channel. 
 rauka n., trigger of a gun (English lock). 
 ra'urepu 1. jellyfish, Portuguese man-o'-war. 
 rdpu. 2. a whip. 
 
 raururu to abide constantly, rdu 7. Wedau 
 rau numa, to cohabit. 
 
 re cf. rd 1. 
 
 re'a adj., white, rere'a. marare'a, rere, 
 huhurere'a. Viti rea, albino. 
 
 reke v. i., to jump, to leap, ha'areke, ha'arekehi. 
 
 reko esculent hibiscus. 
 
 renga'a adj., glistening. 
 
 reoreo the chambered nautilus, hoi reoreo; 
 pieces of the shell cut in various patterns 
 are used for inlaying, reoreo alaha, a 
 large variety of nautilus; kala reoreo, 
 kala kite, kala 'apani pa'aleo, to cut 
 nautilus shell for inlaying; toli reoreo, to 
 inlay with nautilus. 
 
 repa, rerepa v. i., to be elliptical in shape, said 
 of the shinbone, which is often distorted, 
 owing to rheumatism. 
 reparepata'a U., rounded in shape. 
 
 repi n., a harlot, ha'arepi. Florida rebi. 
 
 repo 1. V. i., to be ripe, full grown; aau kosi 
 repo, the nuts are just ripening; aau e 
 repo kosi holaa, when the nuts are ripe 
 the weather is calm. 2. a fully grown 
 person, repo ni mwane, an adult man; 
 repo ni keni, an adult woman; poro repo, 
 used of a person in authority. 
 reponga v. n., full age. 
 repoha v. n., used with poss. 3: repohaana, 
 
 ripeness, old age. 
 'ai repo a tree used to make pestles for 
 pounding yams and taro. 
 
 repo 3. V. tr., to suspend, to hang up (of things). 
 
 rere 1. v. tr., to sharpen by rubbing, ha'arere. 
 rere hdu, to sharpen an axe; rere hdunge, 
 axe-sharpening. 
 rere'a adj., white, clean, sharpened; prob- 
 ably connected with rere. cf. re'a, 
 M. L., p. 97, re'are'a does not appear; 
 in Viti rea albino the final a is probably 
 adjectival. 
 
 rere 2. quicksands; i rere, the beach at A'ulu. 
 saisai rere, a shoal, bank, at sea. 
 
 rere'a adj., clean, white, ha'arere' a. 
 
 rerede 1. v. tr., to slip, to slide. 2. U., a land- 
 slip. 
 
 rereha (na) U., rerehana wdieu, a school of 
 bonito. 
 
 rerepata'a S., adj., rounded in shape. 
 
 rerepono v. i., to be thick, closely matted, of 
 bush. pono. 
 
 rereqeluqelu U., v. i., to be laid low, recum- 
 bent, qelu. 
 
 rete rete hdu, to gnash, to grind the teeth; rete 
 hdunge, gnashing of teeth, nunurete. 
 
 reu cf. rdu. 
 
 ri U., li S., verbal suffix, ha'atauri. 
 
 ride U., ride ni 'inoni, a dwarf. 
 
 rienga hd'irienga, v. n., a contest. 
 
 rihu'e n., a cliff. Wango rihua. 
 
 rihunge'ini v. tr., to pray to (a Wango word 
 introduced in early days). 
 rihunge'inge v. n., prayer. Florida liu- 
 livuti. 
 
 ri'i the treble drum in the para ni 'o'o. 
 
 rilrii 1. n., locust, cicada, its shrilling is taken 
 as a bad omen.
 
 89 
 
 RORO'A 
 
 ri'iri'i (ku) 2. S., n., finger. 3. ri'iri'i ni 'inoni 
 (a) a dwarf, (b) a great number of men. 
 4. 'o'i ri'iri'i, v. tr., to break in pieces; 
 'oke 'o'i ri'iri'ire, thou shalt break them 
 in pieces. V'aturanga ririki, Florida 
 nggiringgiri. Makura wiri-kikin, hand. 
 
 rike, rikerike S., v. i., to rejoice, riike U. 
 rikanga v. n., sae rikanga. rejoicings of 
 heart. \'iti rika, to jump. 
 
 riki 1. adj., small; Oa Riki, Little Oa Island. 
 
 riki U. 2. liki S., riki huna, to loosen the bands 
 holding a canoe, to take up anchor. 
 
 Ripoo, Ripu, Rupoo S., a village on the west 
 coast of Ulawa: Maadi'a. its landing- 
 place. 
 
 riridi (na) eaves of house; riridine nume, i riri- 
 dine, under the eaves. 
 
 ririholo U., a gap in the hills, a pass. 
 
 riro ha'ariro, v. tr., to entice with food. 
 
 ro numeral, two; used only in composition; 
 used also in exclamation of a large num- 
 ber; forms part of the pers. pron. mora, 
 koro. e ro ola, two things; e ro 'ata, 
 only two things; e ro ini, two things; ro 
 ola, vocati\e, you two, of husband and 
 wife; ro mwane, you two. exclamation of 
 surprise or vocative; ro mwane. the two 
 pointers of the Southern Cross, M. A., 
 p. 349; ro 'inoni, you two, of husband 
 and wife; ro 'inoni ineu, my parents; ro 
 hd'i ma'amana, ro ma'amana, father and 
 son; maraaii ro one, east-northeast wind. 
 
 roa n., black-lip pearl shell used as a coconut 
 scraper; it forms part of a man's ordi- 
 nary baggage. 
 
 roaroa windmill made of coconut leaf, a child's 
 plaything. Hedley, Funafuti Exiied., p. 
 3o4. 
 
 rodi v. tr., to confirm, to make firm, to grip; 
 hele rodi, to grip, to hold tight; rodi 
 qongi, to plight troth. 
 
 rodo 1. n., night, ha'arodo. hd'irodo. i rodo, 
 
 at night, by night; laelae i rodo, to go 
 
 till nightfall; nga rodo, last night; si'iri 
 
 i rodo, tonight. 2. v., redup., rorodo; 
 
 e rodo 'olo, it is night; nga rodo e rodo, 
 
 the night fell; ha'irodo e rodo, last night; 
 
 maa rodo, to be blind. 3. to forget; 
 
 sae rorodo, U., v. tr., to forget. 
 
 rodosi v. tr., to be benighted, e rodosi' emelu . 
 
 rodoma'ini S.. rodoha'ini tr., to be benighted. 
 
 rodoma'i, rodoha'i partic, till nightfall; lae 
 
 rodoma'i, go till nightfall. Florida 
 
 rorodo, blind; Omba dodo, cloud; mata- 
 
 dodo, blind; Malo, N. H., bong dodo, 
 
 night; Wango rodo, night. 
 
 rodo 4. S., the name of a month, 'dsi rodo, 
 February. 
 
 rodohono 1. v. i., to become dark, to be pitch 
 dark. }tono. e rodohono pupulti, miii- 
 night, pitch dark; saeku e rodohono, I 
 lost consciousness. 2. n.. darkness, of 
 day or night; ine'i rodohono. 
 rohu, ro'urohu v. i.. to be silent, to cease 
 speaking; toli rohu, to cease speaking. 
 rohute'ini tr., to ignore, to hold one's 
 peace at; tnwane 'o ro'urohute'inie ngar- 
 alaku, hold not thy peace at my tears. 
 
 roka, 'aroka adj., open, set open wide. 
 
 rokasi v. tr., to open, to open out, to unfold. 
 rokasila-(na) gerund, 
 rokata'i partic, open, unfolded. 
 roma 1. an oyster shell found in Mara Masiki 
 Channel, the red part at the base is 
 employed in the making of shell money 
 (haa). 
 roma 2. v. i., to poison fish with Barringtonia, 
 
 etc. 
 rongo, rorongo S., rongorongo U., v. tr., to 
 hear, to listen, to hear tidings of. 
 ha'arongo, qa'arongo. ka'a rongo lele- 
 ngani, not hearing clearly; e rongo 'oto 
 tnola ana walana, listened to his word; 
 nou rongoa, I heard it; rongo 'aela, U., to 
 make a din, to chatter and disturb; 
 rongo keni, to inquire about a girl as a 
 wife for a boy, to betroth; rongo 
 keninge, v. n. i'ola'i rongo keninga, to 
 set about a betrothal; rongo ni 'elinge, 
 to hear with the ear; rongo odoodo, U.. 
 with poss. 3., to hear tidings of; rongo 
 isuli, to be obedient to; qa'arongoisuli. 
 rongonga v. n., hearing. 
 rongola-(ku) gerund. Mota rongo, to 
 apprehend; Maori rongo, to hear; Lau 
 ro, to hear, 
 rongorongo U. 1. n.. a measure, from the finger- 
 tips to the right ear. U. 2. n., nga rongo- 
 rongo ni ola, a multitude of things. 
 ro'o U., ro'o rua, to wind a fishing-line on a 
 
 board. 
 rorahi v. tr., to hasten a person unduly, to be 
 too soon for. r or or a. 
 rorahila-(ku) gerund. 
 rori 1. V. tr., to ram, to load a gun. 2. n., a 
 
 ramrod. 
 rori 3. v. tr.. to take the pith from laths of 
 
 palm wood, rori pi'e. 
 rori, ro'irori 4. v. i., to babble, to prattle. 
 
 kirori, hirori, 'irori. 
 roro 1. V. i., to be tied tightly, to incur a debt, 
 to render oneself liable; roro mae. to 
 strangle; roro to'oni, a belt to hold up 
 clothes, 
 roro'i tr., to tie tightly, to draw tight, to 
 brace, to hold tight; pili roro'i, to press 
 down tight. 
 roroa'i tr., to have incurred a debt, to 
 involve oneself, to be placed in invid- 
 ious case, ha'aroroa'i. 
 roro (ku) 2. bosom, the belly of a snake; i rorona 
 Abraham, on Abraham's bosom, 
 roroma'i roroma'i sae, used with poss. 3 and 
 locative »; t roroma'i sae ana, on his 
 bosom. Mota rorot, to carry on the 
 bosom. 
 roro 3. roro waaro. to be diffused (of coloring 
 
 matter in water), waaro. 
 roro 'a 1. adj., set on edge (of teeth), 
 roro'a 2. adj.. liable, at fault, ha'aroro'a'i. 
 e sa'a roro'a, there will be no fault; all 
 right; muel roro'a, we implicated our- 
 selves, 
 roro'anga n., debt, fault, 
 roro'a 3. adv.. precedes verb, nou sa'a roroa'
 
 RORO'A 
 
 90 
 
 roro'a 3 (continued). 
 
 lae, I shall certainly not go; ana 'oto 'emi 
 ka'a roro'a hd'iialea 'amu, unless we 
 seek it of thee. 
 
 rorodara n., a fillet, band around the head, 
 crown (late use), dara. 
 
 rorodo 1. to be lowering (of clouds). 2. n., a 
 black cloud; helc rorodo, to keep off the 
 clouds by magic, to provide fine weather. 
 3. U., sae rorodo, to forget. 
 
 rorodo'a 1. belonging to darkness, cloudy; wm 
 palonga rorodo'a, deeds of darkness. 
 2. U., a dark cloud, mast rorodo'a. 
 
 roroho h'dii roroho, a stone axe. Wango roroho. 
 
 rorora hastily, in a hurry, rorahi. lae rorora, 
 to go in a hurry; kire tola rorora ana 
 tahinge, they fled precipitately. 
 
 rotani U., v. tr., to rub in the hands. 
 rotaiula-(na) gerund. 
 
 rotarota'i U., v., to shufHe the feet. 
 
 roto 1. to cut into lengths (of wood) ; roro dango, 
 to cut up firewood. 2. n., a piece, a 
 part; nga roto, a part, partly. 
 roto'i tr. 
 
 roto 3. walo roto, the match-box bean, Queens- 
 land bean. 
 
 rotoa'ini tr., to rub out seed with the hands. 
 Wango roto. 
 
 rou 1. V. i., to hum native songs, singing in a 
 monotone. Mota raw. 
 
 rou 2. a large leaf (Heliconium sp.), used to 
 wrap up for food for cooking; do rou, to 
 gather leaves for use in cooking. Viti 
 rourou, taro leaves cooked. 
 
 ru variant of ro, tw-o; cf. proper names, Rupoo, 
 Ru'apu; added to personal pronouns, 
 dual, kireru'e, 'omoru'e, raru'i. lu; ru 
 poo 'emi ngeu, we had two pigs to eat. 
 
 ruana second, the second time, anew; 'oto 
 ruana 'est teuri, then the second time 
 he said; ruana ke'i area, the other shall 
 be left. 
 
 rue S., ruaU., numeral, two; used with V, 'erue; 
 reduplicated ruertie. 'ala ruerue, two- 
 edged. Mota nirua, Motu rua, Poly- 
 nesian rua. 
 
 ruerua'a adj., doubting, sae ruerua'a, doubt- 
 ful mind; sae ruerua'anga, doubt, 
 double-mindedness; saeku e ruerua'a 
 suu'i'omu, I am in doubt concerning you. 
 
 Tuke, rukeruke v. i., to be joyful; more com- 
 mon in Ulawa. rike, 
 rukenga U., rukanga S., v. n., joy, glee. 
 
 rumu (na, ni) n., oil, grease; rumu ni su, oint- 
 ment; riitnii nue maa, eye salve. Wango 
 rumu, Viti lumu, oil. 
 
 rumu'e S., rumu'a U., adj., oily, greasy. 
 
 ruru, rururu to gather together, to collect, to 
 enroll, ha'aruru, hd'iruru. ruru dunge, 
 to build a fire, to gather the sticks 
 together; ruru puli, ruru ha'apuli, U., to 
 throng; ruru wala, to make an agreement, 
 rurunge v. n., a gathering together, 
 ruruhi tr., to throng, to press upon, 
 ruruhe'ini tr., to gather together, 
 rurute'i partic, gathered together. Wango 
 ruru, Maori rtiru, to draw together. 
 
 ruru 2. U., ruru kore, landslip, avalanche. 
 
 ruru'e S., ruru'e hule, a phase of the moon. 
 
 ruruha U., n., a company, ruru. Wango 
 ruruha. 
 
 ru'u v. i., to draw back, to retire; ko ru'u i 
 niime, retires into the house. 
 ru'usi V. i., to shrink, to shrivel, to con- 
 tract, to slough. Lau ruu, enter; 
 Wedau ruui, enter; Florida rugu, Mota 
 luk, to bend; Viti luku, to clench the 
 hand. 
 
 ruuqe'u U., uruqe'u S., a stump, ruuqe'u ni 'ei. 
 
 saa- (ku) 1. S., noun used as preposition; at the 
 house of, with, to (of motion to), to 
 (of offering or sacrifice to) ; in the singu- 
 lar used in third person only, in other 
 persons singular sie- is used; the locative 
 i may be prefixed, lae kd'u saatra, go 
 to him, go to his house; inge'ie saada'elu, 
 he is at home; uunu ola saana mu 'akalo, 
 offer burnt offerings to the ghosts; loho 
 i saana, flew to him; mdurihe e rati 
 saana nume 'ie, salvation has come to 
 this house. 
 
 sa'a 2. S., negative particle used of future time, 
 also as dehortative; sa'a balanced by 
 wa is used as the negative correlatives 
 neither-nor; probably sa'a is compound- 
 ed of sa and 'a 4. cf. ka'a. nou sa'a 
 lae, I shall not go; 'o sa'a lae, you shall 
 not go; hole sa'a kole wa nga me'i ola 
 'erete'a ke'i i'o i sapeka, the paddles 
 must not rattle nor anything of light 
 color be about our bodies; ngaini sa'a 
 till ha'ahireru'e, none shall pass in front 
 of them; sae sa'a maholo wa he mou, 
 thoughts shall not be parted and shall 
 not cease. Espiritu Santo sa, negative 
 particle; Bugotu sa; Viti sa, future 
 particle. 
 
 Sa'a 3. the last village on the southeast coast 
 of Little Malaita three miles from Cape, 
 Zelee. i Sa'a ni menu, cf. ha'addhi. 
 M. A., p. 48. 
 
 saai, saasaai S., v. tr., to know, to read, saai 
 bukanga, reading; saai ola, to know 
 things, to be wise; saai olanga, wisdom; 
 saai 'ulu, to repeat by heart; atei ke saai 
 suuheni, who can enumerate? le'u note 
 saaie nou saaie, what I know I know; 
 lio saai, to perceive; 'oke saaiaa mwane 
 ■waune, say that person's name. 
 
 saanau n., a young unmarried man, a youth, a 
 widower, 
 saanauha (ku) youth; in sing. 3 the poss 3 
 ana is used: saanauhaana, its youth, his 
 youth, youthfulness. 
 
 sa'asala to be clear, without support, not 
 touching the ground, sala 3. pulo 
 sa'asala, to turn back before reaching. 
 
 sada S. 1. v. i., to be fitting, proportionate to; 
 used with poss. 3. U., dada, ha'asada, 
 hd'isada. e sada amelu, fit for them; 
 sada pe'ini, equal, equivalent to. 2. level.
 
 9i 
 
 SAISESU 
 
 sada (continued). 
 
 flat, mu le'u e lai sada, flat places; ape 
 sada, to be level; hcle mdnu sada, to hold 
 level, uprinlit. Wango laisada. 
 sadanga S., v. n., fitting, proportionate, e 
 
 sadanga ana. 
 Bae (ku) 1. n., heart, mind, chest, liver: viwai 
 mesi sae, hearts, cf. lodosae, ne'isae, 
 'onisae. sae esoeso, to have indigna- 
 tion; sae hanalinge, covetousness; sae 
 hdu, hard heart (late use); sae hiru'a, a 
 mind engaged; sae htiti, sae huuttgc, 
 grief; sae maleledi, rage; sae mdlumunge, 
 long suffering; sae mamae, meek; sae 
 mango, mental satisfaction; sae mwa'uu, 
 mutiny, rebellion; sae nanau, wise of 
 heart; sae nanaunge, wisdom; sae ngisu, 
 lungs; ohu 'inoni ohu sae, many men, 
 many minds; sae ni pelupelu, red hot; 
 sae rakonga, gentleness; tne'i sae e rara, 
 earnestness; sae rarada, indignation; 
 sae rikanga, rejoicing of heart; sae rorodo, 
 to forget; sae ruerua'a, doubt; sae susu, 
 confident; sae taha, happy; sae tala'ala 
 htini, to be evilly disposed toward; sae 
 to'o, to desire; saeku e hu'ile'i, my heart 
 is undone; saeku e lae haahe, I over- 
 looked it; saeku e liki, I am nervous; 
 saeku e mode, I am listless; saeku e 
 mo'uholo, I have no spirit left; saeku 
 'olo ana, 1 love it; saeku e rodohono, I 
 lost consciousness; saeku e ta'ela'i, I am 
 excited; saeku e lotongo, I have heart- 
 burn; mu ola saemu eni deuleni, thy 
 will; 'unu tahanie saemu, lay bare your 
 mind; ta'e hu'a saena e diana, there's a 
 goodhearted woman; hoi saeka, in our 
 hearts; haia'ai sae talani, to be careful 
 to; mamango i sae, metaph., the heart; 
 odoni sae, moral righteousness; opa sae, 
 to be at variance; t roroma'i sae ana, 
 on his bosom. 
 
 sae 2. S., v. tr., to talk about, kire saea wala. 
 
 sae 3. U., v. tr., to know, to read, as saai. Ho 
 sae, to perceive; lio sae lo'o, to favor. 
 
 sae 'aela to begrudge, to bear malice, 
 sae 'aelasi tr. 
 sae 'aelanga v. n., malice, spite. 
 
 sae 'asi v. tr., to put out of one's mind, to 
 forgive, to neglect, 
 sae 'asilana oraha'a forgiveness of sins. 
 
 saedami U., satisfied, enough, to repletion; 
 hele saedami, to have enough; vgdu 
 saedami, to gorge, to eat to repletion. 
 
 saediana S., saediena U. 1. to rejoice, to be of 
 good mind toward, ha'asaediena. 2. 
 to love, used with poss. 3. 
 saediananga n., goodness, 
 saedienanga n., love. 
 
 sae haahi S., to be sparing, parsimonious, to 
 grudge. 
 
 sae hanali, saesaehanali v. tr., to covet, 
 saehanalinge v. n., covetousness. 
 saehanalila-(na) gerund. 
 
 saehanenga n., covetousness, hanenga ni sac. 
 
 saehuu to grieve, to be sad. 
 saehuunge n., grief. 
 
 saemango ha'asaemango, v. tr., to comfort, to 
 settle the mind. 
 
 saenanau S., to be well instructed, wise. 
 
 saenanaunge n., wisdom; sa'a hule'itana ike 
 sacnanaurtge, never coming to wisdom. 
 
 saeni 1. v. tr., to grudge, to keep back, to 
 withhold, to spare. 2. U., to prize, to 
 think much of. 
 
 sa'esape'a adj., in peace, in safety, sape. 
 
 saetaha to have a clear mind about, at ease in 
 mind; saeku e taha, my mind is clear 
 about it. 
 
 saeto'o to wish, to want, to like; used with 
 poss. 3. 
 saeto'oa'i v. tr., to want, to covet, 
 saeto'oa'ilana coveting it. 
 
 sae unuhi v. tr., to bear a grudge against, to 
 be spiteful to. 
 sae unuhinge v. n., grudge, spite. 
 
 saewasu, saesaewasu v. i., to be angry, to sulk; 
 ko saewasu he'iliu, angry with one 
 another; saewasu hd'isusu, continued 
 anger, grudge, 
 saewasunge v. n., anger, 
 saewasuli tr., to be angry- with a person, 
 saewasulana his wrath. 
 
 sahali 1. v. tr., to put layers of leaves under 
 anything for its protection, as at the 
 bottom of an oven. 2. to hire, as a 
 canoe; metaphor, of lining it with 
 money. Fagani tafari. 
 
 saho n., native-grown tobacco. 
 
 sahu 1. U-, Ume. a hme gourd; hoi sehu, U., a 
 lime gourd; hoi sehu holo. lime gourd; 
 e hotoholo ana lo'u hoi sehu, to rattle the 
 spatula in the gourd; uunu sdhu, to 
 burn lime. 2. a death charm (toli 
 loosi) prepared with lime and placed 
 in a path. Motu ahu, lime; Wango ahu. 
 
 sahuru to be mildewed, mouldy. 
 
 safe S.. a tree (Parinarium laurinum); the nut 
 {hoi seie) is used for cementing canoes, 
 etc.. the kernel is grated on coral stone 
 and plastered on the joint of the wood, 
 a stain composed of the bark of o'a and 
 charcoal {lo'ilohi) is then spread over 
 the sdie. 
 
 sailo n., a crab. 
 
 saini 1. U.. v. tr.. to put on. to draw down, as a 
 shell ring on the arm; saini mwado, to 
 throw dust over anyone. 
 
 saini 2. saini one, with locative i, on the beacli; 
 hoi i'a e lae mdi i rarada i saini one, the 
 fish came and grounded upon the beach. 
 
 sa'iri hd'isa'iri, v. tr., to quarrel, 
 saisai rere a bank, a shoal, at sea. 
 saisemu U., a creeper cut into lengths and the 
 bark peeled off and dried; when dry it 
 is cut into strips and twisted into 
 fishing-lines, the twisting is done on 
 the thigh with a to-and-fro movement 
 of the hands, beginning with the palm 
 flat and ending with the palm turned 
 toward the body; the » is inserted for 
 euphony, cf. i 5, sdmu. 
 saisesu U. 1. n., a waterspout. 2. n., a gale of 
 wind, a squall.
 
 SAISESU 
 
 92 
 
 saisesu U. 3. v. i., to smoke (of fire), redup. of 
 sdsu, i 5. dunga e saisesu, the fire smokes. 
 
 saka 1. V. i-. to be strong, to be powerful. 
 M. A., p. 192. 2. V. i.. to be hot (of 
 condiments). 
 sakanga v. n., strength, power; ddu sakanga 
 ana, to pin one's faith to, to make a lot 
 of; mdni ni'ilana sakanga, the complete 
 giving of power, 
 sakahi v. tr., to strengthen, to enable. 
 Aneityum cap. hot. fire; Motu kakakaka, 
 red; Maori kaka. red hot. 
 
 sakasaka'a adj., firmly, vigorously, success- 
 fully; ddu sakasaka'a, to do actively; 
 hcle sakasaka'a ana, do it with vigor. 
 
 sala 1. the paper mulberry tree (Broussonetia 
 papyrifera). 2. cloth made from the 
 bast of that tree. 3. European cloth. 
 maai sala. a piece of bast cloth; mi sala. 
 a piece of any cloth. Viti sala, a 
 wrapper. 
 
 sala, sa'asala S., sasala U., 4. desolate, unin- 
 habited, wilderness; hdnue sala, desert. 
 
 sale V. tr., to clear ground for a yam garden, 
 salenga v. n., a clearing for a garden. Mota 
 sara, open space, court. 
 
 salema'i, sasalema'i U.. v. i., to be wise. 
 salema'inga v. n.. wisdom. 
 
 salinga'ini U., sangile'i S., to unload a canoe. 
 
 salo 1. n.. sky, heavens, clouds, charcoal draw- 
 ings on canoes at bow and stern repre- 
 senting clouds; mu salo, the heavens; 
 i salo, in the clouds, salo ko kokohono, 
 the sky is lowering; salo molemole, red 
 clouds; t hahana salo, under the sky; 
 mu he'une salo, the stars of heaven; 
 kohukohu la'ona salo, far-off clouds; 
 nga ngoongoo ni salo e ngo'a, the tip of 
 the cloud was broken off; e rdpute'i 
 salo molemole. a red sky; tane ta'i salo, 
 up in the sky. Wango aro. 
 
 salo 2. v. i., to beckon, to invite with signs; 
 salo haahi, to make a sign to a person: 
 in beckoning with the hand the palm is 
 held down. 
 salohi tr., salohi hie, a crab, lit., beckon 
 the tide (Gelasimus sp.). Mota alovag, 
 Gilbert Islands alofi, Wango arohi, 
 Samoa talo, Motu he-kalo. 
 
 salu, sa'uselu 1. S., v. i.. to be painful, to hurt. 
 sapesdlu. 'aeku ko selu, my leg hurts me. 
 salunge v. n.. pain. 
 
 salu 2. the ironwood (Casuarina equisetifolia). 
 kokoi selu, casuarina needles; bodies 
 when exposed for burial (aori) are 
 covered with these needles; from the 
 scraped bark of the tree a stain is made, 
 this is the coloring matter seen on 
 fishing-lines from Santa Cruz. 
 sama v. i., to correspond to, to come in proper 
 order, to be abreast of; sama diana, to 
 correspond exactly, to be in keeping 
 with; ro 'tola ko sama, the two canoss 
 keep abreast of one another, 
 samanga'ini tr., to lay in order, to arrange. 
 cf. dama. 
 samo to stutter. Viti sami. to liso- 
 
 samu 1. n.. a creeper, the bark is used for 
 fishing-lines, sd'isemu. 2. v. i.. to 
 fish for deep-sea fish; hinou ni semii, 
 the hook. 
 sane the white ant; koi sane, its nest; sane 'ala, 
 the destructive white ant, capable of 
 giving a sharp bite ('ala); sane qa'i, an 
 ant of a brownish color used as burly 
 for sea-bream (i'e ni sane). Samoa 
 ane, Mota gan. 
 sane'a adj., eaten by white ants. Samoa 
 anea. 
 sangile'ini S.. salinga'ini U., to unload a canoe, 
 sangoni v. tr., to nourish, to adopt a child. 
 
 Lau sango. 
 sa*o n., the sago palm (Sagus sp.); sa'o ni 
 'aholo, a kite made of sago-palm leaves 
 for fishing for mwanole with a cobweb 
 lure (lawa). M. A., p. 318. ddu sa'o, 
 to get sago leaves for thatching; kokoi 
 sa'o, a frond of the sago palm; lokotai 
 sa'o, a bundle of sago leaves; lololo ni 
 sa'o, swamp in which sago grows; mudii 
 sa'o, midrib of the leaf; qangoi sa'o, a 
 measure, a hand's breadth; Idhi sa'o, to 
 cut sago leaves; tdri sa'o, to split the 
 sides of leaves to make arrows (lopa) ; 
 use sa'o, to stitch leaves for thatch; 
 raapea, the midrib used as a needle; 
 wede, to take out the midrib before 
 sewing thatch. Borneo sago. 
 sa'oni v. tr., to catch mwanole with the kite; 
 'oto e sa'onia mwanole, then he caught 
 garfish. Mota sao 2, Polynesian hao. 
 sa'oha'ini v. tr., to double, to place in tiers, to 
 fit a thing on. 
 sa'oha'i partic, sa'oha'i ro ola, double, in 
 two tiers. 
 sa'olu egg of bird, hoi sa'olu ni menu. Mota 
 
 toliu, Florida tolu. 
 sa'osa'oha'i'a U., adj., double, in tiers; sa'osa- 
 'oha'i'a ani nima, an upper story in a 
 house, a doubled house. 
 saosaola 1. adj., yellow, turmeric. 2. n., a 
 tree with yellow pods which curve in a 
 circle and are worn as ornaments in 
 the ear. 
 sape (ku) 1. n., the body, trunk, mass, figure, 
 color, appearance; sape ni 'inoni, men's 
 bodies; sape we'o, to be bodily tired; 
 sapeku e ka'alawa, I am listless; sapekii 
 e qd'i mware'a, I am not in good health; 
 noko hiie sapeku, I am well, lit., I per- 
 ceive my body; polenga ni sape, bodily 
 repletion; e to'o sape, to have the shape, 
 the appearance, of. 2. used in apos- 
 trophizing the various islands with the 
 locative i: i sapena i Sa'a ni menu, cf. 
 ha'addhi. Wango abe. 3. n., duty, 
 belonging to, part: le'u i sapeku, S., my 
 duty; holoholo i sapeku, U., my duty. 
 Florida sape, place, bed. 
 sape 4. sapeldku. sa'esape'a. 
 sape'i, sasape'i S., v. tr., to add to, to increase 
 in number, cf. rape'i. 
 sape'ita-(na) v. n., sape'itana, the increase 
 of it, its being increased.
 
 93 
 
 SAD 
 
 sapelaku to be safe, unharmed, liiku. 
 
 sapelakunge n.. safety, being unharmed, 
 uncircumcision (late use). 
 sapemawa to be free from harm, unhurt, mawa. 
 
 sapemawanga n. 
 sapesalu S., to be in pain, sape hi'ilo'o, U. 
 
 sapesalunge n., pain, 
 sapo, sasapo v. i., to chew. 
 sapoli tr. 
 
 sapolila-(ku) gerund. 
 sara U., nima sara, a large food-bowl used at 
 feasts, the contents of which are assigned 
 as the portion of particular persons. 
 sarasara 'iola sarasara, a canoe kept for bonito 
 fishing, adorned with inlay of nautilus 
 shell. 
 sare v. i., to wish, to want; nou qc'i sarc, I'., 
 I am unwilling; nou sare lae, I wish to 
 go; 'o'a sare ngdii ihei, what will you eat? 
 sare'i S., v. i., to be unwilling; nou scrc'i, I 
 won't. 
 sare'ini tr., to reject. 
 sare to'o to wish, to desire; may be used with 
 poss. 3. e sare to'o ana, he wants it; 
 e sare to'o ehu, he wants a jews-harp; 
 e sare to'o eku, he wants me for his wife. 
 saro 1. V. i., to face, to turn oneself; sara mat, 
 turn this way; e saro wau, he faced 
 about. Mao. aro, front. 
 saro (ku) 2. over against, reposing on: with 
 locative i. i sarona Abraham, on 
 Abraham's bosom; i sarona moke dmu, 
 in your sight, lit., opposite your net. 
 saroha v. n., used with poss. 3, ana. i 
 sarohaana, over against, opposite to; 
 t sarohaana wdi, on the face of the 
 waters; sarohaana li'oa, under the care 
 of the spirit. Mota sarova, meeting. 
 saro 3. saro ni mwaa, zigzag pattern in inlaying 
 made by putting triangular pieces of 
 nautilus shell face to face, the end of 
 each piece in the center of the one 
 opposite, cf. first and second patterns 
 in Guppy "Solomon Islands," p. 138. 
 saro 4. S., adv., used of consecutive motion, 
 precedes the verb; thereupon, ko ngeu 
 mango kesi saro 'unur, when he has 
 eaten he will say it; kire sa'a ngdu wa 
 ke inu na kire ka'a saro sdunie 'olo, they 
 will not cat or drink till they have killed 
 him. 
 saro pote U.. a phase of the moon, day before 
 
 full moon. 
 Saroha with locative /.• i saroha, in the roof 
 
 between the layers of thatch, 
 saru'e adj., used as noun, a charm, incantation, 
 mu seru'e. M. A., p. 192. c walangia 
 ani seru'a, he muttered magic over it. 
 saru'i v. tr., to use a charm on, to make 
 magic; ddmulaa kire saru'e, areca nut 
 which they had used magic on. 
 sasa 1. V. i., to fence with logs against pigs, 
 sasa 2. sasa helela, thin, lean. 
 sasa'ae to be disturbed, stirred up; karohure 
 e sasa'ae i ka'ona 'asi, the depths were 
 troubled; sasa'ae e pouhiru'e, a raging 
 sea is stirred up. 
 
 sasaha i ku) n., thigh, lap. Borneo paha, thigh. 
 
 sasa hetela U., to subside (of swellings on the 
 body). 
 
 sasala U., for sa'asala and sala 4. 
 
 sasali IJ., v. tr., to strain with the net (tinu) of 
 thf coconut leaf. 
 
 sasangota'a adj., light colored, fair, light 
 hair. 
 
 sasapou a log placed on top of the fence in front 
 of the canoe house (taoha), a common 
 place for sitting. 
 
 sasara (ku) a limb, member of the body, branch 
 of a tree; mu sasarai sape, the limbs of 
 the body. San Cristoval rara, branch; 
 Malay dahan. 
 
 sasate (ku) jaw. chin, beard. \NdLngo lalele. 
 
 sasu, sa'usesu S., saisesu U., 1. v. i., to smoke 
 (of fire). 2. n., smoke; sdsu ana wdi, 
 steam; sdsu alipono, dense smoke. 
 Mota asu, Xiue ahu. 
 
 sasu 3. toli sesu, to cast unripe fruit (of trees). 
 
 sasu'ala adj., smoky; e sdsu'ala. it is smok- 
 ing. 
 
 sasue'i v. tr., said of smoke impeding one's 
 vision; dunge e sdsue'ieu, the smoke of 
 the fire got into my eyes; e sdsue'ie 
 maaku, the smoke got into my eyes. 
 
 sata (,ku) 1. n., a name; satana atei, what (who) 
 is his name; ke mdni dolosie satada, let 
 him ask all their names; lo'ohuunge'i 
 satana, his real name. 
 
 sata 2. huui sala, the heel. 
 
 sataa'i v. tr., to chafe, to rub. 
 
 sate sate unu, to overlap, sasate. 
 
 sato sun, sunshine, fine weather, ha'asato. 
 e sato 'oto, it is fine weather; sato 'oto i 
 apau, the sun declines; sato e qa'alie 
 hdnue, the sun has risen on the earth; 
 sato e rara tnea, the sun was scorching; 
 apai sato, afternoon; 'iro ni sato. 
 drought; viwaa dili sato, a snake ob- 
 served as an omen; qa'alana sato, the 
 east; ra'arangana sato, the light of the 
 sun; suulana sato. the going down of the 
 sun. Florida aho, Lau saso, Maori 
 aho, Mota loa. M. L., p. 93. 
 
 satoa'i v. tr., to expose to the sun's rays, to 
 dry in the sun, to air, to be exposed to 
 the sun. 
 
 sau, sauseu 1. v. i., to kill, to pound taro, to 
 ram, to blow strong (of wind); sdu 
 mwane, to commit murder, sdu mua- 
 ncnga, n., murder. 
 sauni tr.. to kill, to beat, to thrash, to hurt, 
 to punish, ha'asduni, hd'iseuni. sdune 
 hunt ke mae, pound it so that it be well 
 mashed; 'aeku ko seunieu, my foot hurts 
 me. 
 saunila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 sau 2. S., n., a bonito, hoi seu. Ro ute'i seu, 
 a proper name. M. A., p. 49; mu seu 
 ko laka, the bonito play in schools; rd'i 
 seu, a platform on the beach used in 
 connection with bonito fishing; Pulu 
 maai seu, circular shell inlaid. 
 
 sau 3. V. i., to darn, to mend holes in; sdu maa 
 ana mu 'ape, to mend the meshes of the 
 nets.
 
 SAUKAI 
 
 94 
 
 saukai i. v. i.. to grate coconut on a scraper, 
 sdukai nin. 2. n., a coconut scraper, 
 made of a tree trunk with two branches 
 for legs and the butt resting on the 
 ground; a piece of clam shell with ser- 
 rated edge is lashed to the upper end 
 of the trunk; a man sits astride the 
 saukai holding a half coconut {ten), rubs 
 the meat over the clam shell, and the 
 grated nut falls into a bowl (nime) 
 placed below. M. A., p. 338. Florida 
 taiikai. 
 
 saulehi n., evening, dusk, from about 4 o'clock 
 on; e saulehi 'oto, it is dusk; i seulehi, in 
 the evening; saulehi melumelu, dusk. 
 Florida nulavi, Mota rairav, Motu 
 adorahi, Wango suurahi. 
 
 saumaata-(na, da) U., n., used as verb, to know; 
 7iau qa'ike saumaalana, I don't know it. 
 
 Sau mwa'elu the landing-place in the rocks 
 opposite Mwado'a, Ulawa. 
 
 saunge'ini v. tr., to put the handle on an axe. 
 
 sa'usemu S. cf. sdmu. 
 
 sa'usesu S., n., a whirlwind, waterspout, a 
 squall of wind. sdsu. 
 
 sawa n., a fish, mullet, found in the lake at 
 Korea and in the lagoon at 'Olu Malau. 
 7ttelu lai tola sawa i Malau, we went to 
 get mullet at the Three Sisters. 
 
 sawalo n., the flying fox, a tooth of the flying 
 fox used as money, qd'u ni sawalo, 
 four flying-fox teeth, a unit in counting. 
 
 sawaoli'e S., adj., darkened, black with clouds. 
 
 sawaru, sasawaru v. i., to whisper. 
 
 sawarunge v. n., a whisper, whispering, 
 sawarunge'ini tr., to whisper anything. 
 sawarunge'inila-(na) gerund. 
 
 sese V. i., to fence, to protect; used with prep. 
 ahu'i. 
 
 seu cf. sdu. 
 
 si 1. illative; then, thereupon; used with the 
 verbal particle ko as kosi, or without it. 
 'oto kire kosi teuri, thereupon they said; 
 'oke lae mdi 'osi teuri, when j'ou come 
 here say this; nge nesi 'unue, then said 
 I; mu rato e ngdu na kire si mae, the 
 fathers ate and are dead. 2. adv., first, 
 first time, just, only; noko si lae mdi 'ie, 
 this is my first time here; nou si kele 
 hele mola, I only just touched it; tnaholo 
 nou si lae wan, when I first went. 
 
 si 3. U. dehortative; don't, 'o si ta'ata'a, laa, 
 don't. I say. Lau si, negative particle. 
 
 si 4. genitive; in certain phrases, tawa- 
 sipua. tangisi hudi, a hand of bananas; 
 qd'usi henue, the head of the community. 
 
 si 5. verbal suffix; tnae, to die; maesi, to die of. 
 
 sie-(ku) 1. n., used as preposition; at the house 
 of, with, to (motion toward), to (offering 
 or sacrifice to); used in Sa'a only in the 
 first and second singular, for the rest 
 saa is used; in Ulawa used in all persons; 
 the locative i may be prefixed, ro 'u'u 
 maana siena a Ta'a Pea, his two eye- 
 balls to Ta'a Pea (a curse) ; i siedaelu, in 
 their house, at their home. Nengone 
 se, with; Sesake se, si, here; there. 
 
 si'e U. 2. negative particle, used of future time, 
 
 also dehortative. 'o si'e lae, do not go. 
 
 Savo sika, sia, prohibitive; Vaturanga 
 
 jika. 
 sihana S., with locative i, out of doors, oustide. 
 
 sinaha. 
 siho, sisiho 1. v. i., to descend, to disembark, 
 
 to land, ha'asiho. siho hou, to de- 
 scend; siho i one, to land on the beach. 
 
 siho toli. 
 siho 2. to be at hand, to befall, to happen; 
 
 qongi ko sisiho 'oto, the time is at hand, 
 siholi tr., to course through (of disease), 
 
 to assault; e siholie sapeku, it went all 
 
 through my body. 
 sihola'i partic, passed through. Mota siwo. 
 siho 3. V. i., to relate, to tell a tale; used with 
 
 po3s. 3. siho 'aela ana, to spread evil 
 
 reports of; siho 'aelalamami, gerund., 
 
 our evil report; siho raqa ana, U., to 
 
 exaggerate. 
 sihosihonga v. n., a tale, gossip, 
 sihoa'i partic, mu sihoa'i wala, mere words, 
 
 just a tale. 
 siholi siholi wei, south wind, gentle breeze with 
 
 fair weather. 
 sihopulu ha'asihopulu, a stone sinker for a fish- 
 line, 
 sii 1. V. i., to break wind. Viti dhi. 2. to fiy 
 
 (of sparks), to flare (of fire); mu sii 
 
 dunge, sparks. 
 si'iri to-day, now; ni demonstrative may be 
 
 suffixed and locative i prefixed, i si'iri, 
 
 i si'irini, to-day; si'iri 'ie, in this day; 
 
 haidinge si'iri, today; nekesi lae si'iri, 
 
 let me go to-day; si'iri i rodo, to-night, 
 sikare n., a variety of yam. 
 sike 1. V. tr., to reject; 'asi 3 may be added. 
 
 sike hii'e to divorce a woman; sike 
 
 hu'anga, n., divorce; sika 'asi, to reject. 
 
 Florida sika. 
 sike 2. n., a thorn; sikei kana, thorn on top of 
 
 the tuber of the spiny yam. Viti sika, 
 
 needle, 
 sikera'ini v. tr., to reject, to condemn, 
 sikeri 1. v. tr., to plait. 2. n., a rope plaited 
 
 fiat, a wick (late use). 
 siki 1. V. i., to come loose, to become detached; 
 
 fnei 'epu e siki ana, his seed. 
 sikihi tr., to undo, to untie, to detach, to 
 
 take off. ha'asikihi. e'a sikihia qd'una 
 
 tihi, she takes off the heads of yams; 
 
 hono sikihi, to shut off by itself; susu 
 
 sikihi, to cast off, to reject, 
 sikite V. n., mu sikitei ola, fiakes, chips. 
 
 Wango sigi, Florida siki, Viti singi, to 
 
 move, 
 sikile'ini tr., to detach, to set free, to loose, 
 sikile'i partic, detached; v. i., to rebound, 
 sikite 'ini tr., to detach, 
 siki 2. V. i., to tap, to touch with the fingers. 
 
 siki raho, a beetle which is caught and 
 
 held upside down on a piece of thatch 
 
 (raho) which it raps (siki). 
 sikihi tr., to infect, to carry contagion to 
 
 person after person, 
 sildli tr., to twang with the fingers; to
 
 95 
 
 SO'O 
 
 clki 2 (continued). I 
 
 spurtle on; sikili ntaa, a tree (Excoe- 
 caria sp.) found in estuaries, which 
 when cut squirts out a juice dangerous 
 to the eyes, 
 sikoa a bird, the black mynah. kikoa. 
 sUi, sisili 1. v. i., to enter; rao kire sa'a silt 'oto, 
 they certainly shall not enter. 2. to 
 go into the bush after; sili 'oha, to get 
 betel from the bush, 
 silinge v. n., an entry. 
 silihi tr.. to enter, to go into; ko sisilihie mu 
 
 nume, enters into houses. 
 silihe'ini tr., to sheathe, to insert. Samoa 
 st7i. to lodge in; Wango siri, to enter; 
 Nguna sili, to be under; Mota sir, to 
 draw along; Florida sili; Fate sili. 
 siliihi V. i., to patch a thatched roof with sago 
 
 leaves, 
 silitaha U., v^ i., to emerge, ha'asilitaha. 
 sime U., sume S., sandfly. 
 simouke S., pipe (English smoke), 
 simwe v. tr., to fiay, to skin. 
 sina U., sea-urchin. 
 
 sinaa v. i., sinaa iihi, to clean the roots off 
 newly dug yams. 
 inaha used with locative »; i sinaha, out of 
 doors, sihana. nga hale e koru hula 
 i sinaha, the shed was full right to the 
 door; po'o i sinaha, outside, 
 sinata U., n., a tabu mark. 
 sinei rara, dusk. 
 
 sineli, sisineli 1. v. tr., to lighten, to give light 
 to; V. i., to shine, hoi he'ii e sisineli 
 viei, the star has shone out. 2. moon- 
 light; i sineli, by moonlight. 
 sineliha v. n., used with poss. 3, ana; sine- 
 lihaana, its light. Lau sinali, moon; 
 Florida hinari. 
 sinola specific numeral, 1,000 (of yams). 
 
 inolai uhi. 
 singo n., a littoral tree (Tournefortia argen- 
 tifolia) much frequented by a butterfly 
 (Euploea sp.) v.hich becomes intoxi- 
 cated and falls to the ground, 
 si'o 1. V. i., to collect, to gather, si'o aopa, to 
 separate, to refine; si'o honosi, to inter- 
 rupt with questions; si'o koni, to col- 
 lect; si'o liliheii, to collect stones for a 
 wall; si'o maani, to gather together, 
 si'ohi tr. 
 
 si'ohila-(ku) gerund. Wango sio. 
 si'o 2. V. i., to track; si'o isuli, to follow the 
 footsteps of, to require reparation for, 
 si'o kali, to spy; si'o ptirapura, U., 
 irregularly. 
 si'o 3. V. i., to practice magic; si'o ku'isi, to do 
 harm to. 
 si'onga v. n., magic. 
 
 si'ohi tr., to bewitch. San Cristoval siofi. 
 si'ohaa 1. v. i., to be in evil plight, to be desti- 
 tute. 2. n. (ku), si'ohaaku e tata'ala. I 
 am in evil plight. 
 si'ohaanga v. n., destitution. 
 si'ohaa'i tr. si'ohaa'i maela, to be in 
 danger; si'ohaa'i ola, to be in a poor waj'. 
 Lau sikofa. 
 
 si'okoni v. tr., to collect, to harvest. 
 
 si'okoninge v. n., harvest. 
 si'ola exclamation of assent, cf. si'u'e. 
 sipe V. i., to prick, to let pus out of a sore, 
 sipengi tr. 
 
 sipengila-(^na) gerund. Mota sipe, to take 
 out; Florida 5j7»o. 
 siri n., a parrot, siri alaha, Lorius chloro- 
 cercus; siri 'u'u, a lory that hangs head 
 downward. 
 siriu U., n., a cockle, cf. henu. mwai keni 
 ana karo siriunga, what women for 
 collecting cockles, 
 sisi 1. V. tr., to grin like a dog, to bare the 
 teeth; e sisie nihona, he bared his teeth 
 in a grin, 
 sisi 2. sisi pono, to be closed over (of a sore), 
 sisile n., a shellfish. 
 sisimidi S., mudimudi U., a bird, the yellow 
 
 honey eater. 
 sisinge-(ku) S., noun used as preposition; in 
 the way of, preventing, e hono sisi- 
 ngana, shut him in; e i'o sisingeku, 
 stood in front of me; ho'asi sisingana 
 li'oa, to swear by a spirit; e ho'asi sisi- 
 ngemu, bound you with an oath, 
 sisinge'i partic, used as adverb; over against, 
 in front of. hdi dango e i'o sisinge'i, a 
 tree stood in the way; ho'asi sisinge'i, 
 to clear with an oath; hono sisinge'i, to 
 shut out. 
 sisiri sisiri hapa, a bird, swallow. 
 si'u'e S., si'u'a U., exclamation of assent. 
 si'u'e 'oto, 'o si'u'e, ta'ane si'u'e, cer- 
 tainly, verily, 
 siute gun. rifle (English shoot), ko'uko'uha 
 
 ana siute, report of a gun. 
 siwe 1. numeral, nine. 
 
 siwana ninth, for the ninth time. Lau 
 siqa, Florida hiua, Viti dhiva, Tonga 
 hiva, Indonesia sio. 
 siwe 2. blood-money, haa ni siwe. ne'i siwe, 
 to put out a sum as blood-money; tola 
 siwe, to kill and earn the blood-money, 
 so exclamation, to call attention; so nge, well 
 
 then; so 'ohe, perhaps. 
 soasoa native arrowroot, grows on the beaches, 
 soda v. i., to encounter, to fall into danger; 
 used with poss. 3. e soda ana hu'o. he 
 fell into the net. Florida sodo. to meet; 
 Viti sota, to meet, 
 soe U.. soe ledi, to question, 
 soi, soisoi 1. V. tr., to call, to summon, soi 
 ha'ada'inge, S., soi ha'ata'inge, U., 
 church, ecclesia. 
 soinge v. n., a calling; tde soinge, to raise 
 a cry. 
 soi 2. U., V. tr., to ask, to question; soi heri, to 
 question; e soia ada, he asked them 
 about it. 
 soi 3. V. i., to demand; soi totonga, soi hirita'a. 
 to demand a fine. 
 soinga'ini tr., to call, to summon, 
 songo n., white shell discs tied as ornament on 
 
 the knee or round the wrist, 
 so'o V. i., to find, to pick up, to collect; so'o
 
 SO'O 
 
 96 
 
 so'o (continued). 
 
 dango, S., so'o 'ai, U., to pick up fire- 
 wood ; so'o tete, to build a stone fence, 
 so'ohi tr. 
 
 so'ohila-(.ku) gerund. Fl. sodo, collect. 
 su V. tr., to anoint; laqi ni sti, coconut-oil 
 ointment; riimii ni su, ointment, salve. 
 suhi tr., to plaster the hair with lime, 
 suhinge v. n., anointing. 
 suhila-(ku) gerund. 
 su'a U. 1. V. i., to move backward, to retire, 
 
 to retreat. Wango sua. 
 su'a U. 2. su'ai honu, a summerset. 
 Eualaa U., a foundation, suesuelaa. a Poro 
 Sualaa Hd-nua, a legendary person, 
 Mr. Foundation-of-the-Earth. 
 sude V. tr., to root up the earth (of pigs), poo 
 
 e sude. Mota sula, Wango sua. 
 su*e S., su'a U. 1. a tree planted in the villages, 
 the leaves and the catkins (rame) and 
 berries are edible, the bark is used in 
 Santa Cruz for making fish-lines. 
 su'e, su'esu'e 2. v. i., to encounter, to meet; 
 used with poss. 3. kire su'a ana, they 
 met him. 
 su'ehi tr., to encounter difficulty, to have 
 hard work, to paddle against wind or 
 tide, 'ato 'ae su'ahia, to leap and 
 encounter; kire ko su'ehire, they lord 
 it over them. 
 su'ela'i partic, ke'i su'ela'i mola haahie 
 qd'une, will recoil on his own head. 
 ha'isu'esu'e, po'osu'a'a. Xguna sua, 
 Wango sua, Lau suasua, encounter, 
 su'e 3. S., used with locative i; i su'e, out of 
 
 doors, outside, external. 
 su'e 4. S., n., a spear. 
 
 su'e S., su'a U. 5. v. i., to move backward, to 
 
 retreat, to retire; su'e puri, to go back; 
 
 su'e ngoli, to fall backward and break 
 
 one's neck. 
 
 su'esu'e S., su'a U., su'esu'e ni honu, a 
 
 summerset. 
 suesuelaa S., sualaa U., n., a foundation, 
 su'esu'ela'i partic, mae su'esu'ela'i, to die of 
 
 hunger, to starve. 
 su'ete'e S., su'ate'e U., ne'isae su'ete'e, 
 
 adoma'i su'ate'e, to be anxious about, 
 suhi, su'isuhi S., suhisuhi U.. v. tr., to shave 
 the head or face; suhi kou, to shave the 
 head clean, 
 suhinge v. n., shaving. 
 suhila-Cku) gerund. 
 suhu 1. a bung, plug, bung-hole. 2. v. i., to 
 fall through a thing; e 'uri suhu. his 
 foot went through; mwalo suhu kao, a 
 rock that pierces the bottom. 
 suhuli tr., to make an opening in a green 
 coconut, to take the plug out of a ca- 
 noe, 
 su'isuli (ku) S.. n., a bone. suli. 
 su'isungi v. tr., to broil on a fire. Mota lun. 
 Bu'isungi'e S., n., a hill. 
 
 suke, susuke S., suka, sukasuka IT., to ask 
 for, to beg, to borrow, to ask permis- 
 sion; suka hdrite'i, U., to question; suka 
 hdrite'inga, questioning; suke talana. 
 
 suke (continued). 
 
 to ask on his behalf; masa suke, to be 
 ashamed to beg; e i'o pe'i suke, sat and 
 begged, 
 sukanga v. n. 
 suku (na) the vent of a fish. Viti bnku, tail, 
 sulaapoe U., v. tr., to cause to lodge. 
 sulahita U., to be firm, rigid. 
 sule S., sula U.. v. tr., to roast on the embers. 
 ko sulaa inu uhi, roasts yams. 
 sulanga v. n., a roasting, yams roasted in 
 the coals, ngiiu sulanga, the food eaten 
 at a betrothal consisting of roasted yams. 
 suli (au) 1. prep., after, according to; not used 
 as dative as stated in M. L., p. 151. 
 suli heidinge, daily; lae mat sulieu, come 
 after me; tolai suli -wala, to obey com- 
 mands. Mota sur. 
 suli, su'isuli S.. susuli U. 2. n., a bone; suli 
 qeri ngae, suli qeri i ngaena, the back- 
 bone; suli tolai luana, his shoulder-blade; 
 laloi suli, within the bones; mu lalaivai', 
 ola ana suli, the marrow of the bonesa 
 qango laloi suli, the marrow. Motg, 
 suriu, Florida hull, Borneo iidan 
 Nine hui. 
 suli 3. suli 'ei, wall-plate of a house; suli 'ei i 
 
 qaoha, ridgepole. 
 suli 4. suli hala, forty dogs' teeth, a sum of 
 money considered equivalent to ten 
 fathom strings of shell money {haa 
 tahanga) . 
 suliteru a bone needle. 
 
 sulu 1. v. i., to lift, to carry up canoes to land, 
 to start on a sea journey, to launch a 
 canoe; sulu haa, to collect money; sulu 
 la'a ana, to hft it up; sulu 'epu, to adopt 
 a child; sulu 'epunge, n., adoption; sulu 
 walanga, gossip; 7nu lale'i sulu walanga, 
 mere gossip: sulu walanga ia' elate, bab- 
 bling words. 
 suluha U., V. n., a landing. 
 sulu'i tr. 
 
 sulu'ila-(ku) gerund. Wango suru. 
 sulu, susulu 2. to sing, to make music; sulu 'ato, 
 a song sung as an ordeal; sulu 'atonga, 
 ordeal singing; sulu dduddu, U., to 
 make songs on; sulu kananga, singing 
 of songs; sulu tnao, to sing in company 
 with men dancing; sulu 'o'o, to beat 
 drums. Mota sur, to sing. 
 suluhe (ku) n.. song; suluheku, my song. 
 sulu'i tr., to sing a song. 
 sulula-(ku) gerund.; sululana, its being 
 sung. 
 sulu, sustilu 3. V. tr., to follow, to do according 
 to; sulu isuli, to obey, to walk according 
 to; sulu odoodo, to go straight; sulu 
 odota'i, to act righteously. 
 sulu 4. with poss. 3 ana, to please, sulu i 
 lohona, lohomu, pleasing in his sight, 
 thy sight. 
 sulu (na, ni) 5. liquid, water, madamada sulu, 
 October. Nguna sulu, Mota sur mala, 
 tears. 
 sulu'e adj., with liquid, watery, containing 
 too much water.
 
 97 
 
 suu 
 
 Buluheu 1. the stone walls of taoka. 
 
 Suluheu 2. the artificial islets off the coast of 
 Malaita. Lau sulufou. 
 
 suluta'e I .. \ . i., to rise up, arise. 
 
 suluta'enga v. n., a rising up. resurrection. 
 VVango siiriUae. 
 
 sume S., sime U., n., a sandfly. Alite sumi, 
 mosquito; New Guinea kimu, simunika, 
 siimoniku. 
 
 sunge sunge Itiuluu, elkhorn fern. 
 
 sungi S., v. tr., siingie maivalaa, lift up a shout. 
 Florida sungi. 
 
 supi n., a short club, diamond-shaped, with a 
 broad face and a rib down the center. 
 Wango siibi, Bugotu supa. 
 
 supu V. tr., to compose (of songs), supu kana. 
 
 supungi S., V. tr., to offer, to intreat; stipnngie 
 ngduhana, to offer food to. 
 
 supu'upu (na) S.. v. tr., to build. 
 
 suraa'i, susuraa'i S., v. tr., to revenge, to 
 retaliate, to repay injuries; mwane 'o 
 susuraa'ie mil oraha'a i'emi huni'emi, 
 deal not with us after our sins. 
 
 suru 1. V. tr., to suspect, to have suspicions 
 about. 
 
 suru, susuru 2. v. i., to plane, to scrape with 
 a flint or shell or glass. 
 surumi tr. 
 
 susu (ku) 1. n., breast, paps, dugs of animals, 
 milk; susu ni puloki, susu ni keu, cow's 
 milk; tori susu, to wear over the left 
 shoulder as a bandolier. Mota sus, 
 Wedau susu, Maori u. 
 
 susu, sususu 2. V. i., to suck the breast, to 
 have children at the breast, ha'asusu. 
 susu puri, to be the last born; a susu 
 puri. the youngest child. 
 
 susu 3. V. i., to prick, to pierce, to impale, to 
 sew. susu 'asi, to take out (of a thorn) ; 
 susu 'elinge. an ear-stick; susu hara, to 
 lean firmly on a staff; susu kumani, to 
 plant sweet-potato vines; susu opa, 
 ornamental ridge covering; susu qaoha, 
 to sew sago leaves for a ridge covering; 
 au susu qelusu, a nose-stick; susu sikihi, 
 v., to cast out, to reject, 
 susu'i tr. 
 
 susu'ite V. n., a seam, sewing, an awl; 
 ta'ala'a tnaai su'isu'ite, one seam. 
 Mota sis, sus, to pierce: susur, to sew; 
 Samoa Ini, \'iti tului, Niue tui, Motu 
 turi. 
 
 susu 4. V. i., to be solid, whole, unbroken, to 
 heal up, to close over. ha'asusu, 
 hd'isusu. susu eliho'i, to be filled up 
 (of rounded shape), restored whole; 
 susu harehare, to cram; susu liono. to 
 heal over (of an ulcer); susu houosi, to 
 close in on; susu pou, to rear up without 
 breaking (of waves); 'ae susu, swollen 
 leg; hdu susu, an immovable rock; 
 i'o susu, to continue in one stay; lue 
 susu. throat stuffed up, voice gone; jae 
 susu. to be confident; sae susuiige, n., 
 confidence, to be of firm mind toward, 
 to reject; saemu e ^vatta kc susu ha'ahire, 
 be stern towards them in thy wrath. 
 
 susu 5. V. i., to approach; yta'o susu ana, to 
 make straight on toward, 
 susuhi tr., to approach; na'o susuhire. draw 
 toward them. 
 
 susu 6. ha'asusu, to gossip, to tell tales about. 
 
 susu 7. susu 'ano, to choose ground for a yam 
 garden. 
 
 susua'ili S., susua'ili huni, to suggest to a 
 person, to urge. 
 
 susu'e adj., throughout; susu'e alowaa, all the 
 day long; susu'e ddngi, every day, in 
 the daytime. 
 
 susue'ini tr., to stretch out, to hold out in the 
 hand. 
 susue'i partic, stretched out; susue'i ki'i, 
 U., to stretch out the hand. Mota 5t5, 
 to point. 
 
 susuhaa'i v. tr., to plant a yam garden. 
 
 susuhara to lean firmly, to rest upon. 
 
 susuhono V. i., 'ulu susuhono. stone blind. 
 
 susuimi v. i., to have roots, to be rooted, imi imi. 
 
 susu'ite n., a seam, an awl, a pricker. 
 
 susule'ini v. tr., to affirm, to maintain. 
 
 susule'i partic, firmly, fixedly, forever. 
 dsu susule'i, to work unremittingly; 
 toll susule'i, to endure firmly, to be 
 steadfast. 
 
 susuli (au) 1. prep., in succession to. suli 1. 
 hele susuli, to inherit. 2. v. i., to follow 
 along; 7nelu susuli uwo, we kept along 
 the ridge; a Poro Susuli Uwo, a legend- 
 ary person, Mr. Kollow-the-Ridge. 
 
 susuli 3. U., n., a bone. 
 
 susumaa a projection from the ridge of a 
 house, a pinnacle. 
 
 susungi 1. v. tr., to approach, to draw near to. 
 
 susungi 2. U., v. tr., to cook on embers, to 
 broil, su'isungi. Wango susungi. 
 
 susuru'u a pent-house, a lean-to. 
 
 sususu 1. Idutnanga sususu, taro pudding not 
 cut up into squares but left whole. 
 susu 4. 
 
 sususu 2. a disease of the lower limbs accom- 
 panied by swelling. 
 
 susuto'o V. i., to be firm, assured in mind, i'o 
 susuto'o. ttia'ahi susuto'o, hd'ilotori 
 susuto'o, to hope (late use). 
 
 suu 1. V. i., to sink, to go down, to dive, to 
 dip (of the sun), to die out, to become 
 extinct; suu dehi. to dive for pearl shell; 
 suu Icuhi, to dive for turbo shell; 
 di suu, U., to die out, to perish, to 
 cease; hdnuc e suu, the village is unin- 
 habited; mdi ana waaro^uaaro e suu, ebb 
 when the moon sets; mangona e suu, 
 his breath has gone, he is dead; ngdu 
 qe'u suu, to gorge, lit., to eat until the 
 head drops; uununge suu, burnt offering, 
 suuhi tr., to dive for. 
 suuhilana gerund, 
 suulana sato the going down of the sun; 
 
 with locative i. the West, 
 suue'ini tr., to go down and leave (of the 
 
 sun), 
 suuhe (ni) v. n., atei ke saai suuheni. who 
 can enumerate. Wango suu, Florida 
 hu, Mota sus.
 
 suu 
 
 98 
 
 suu 2. suu taa, to appear above the horizon; 
 svu tai lengi, to rise up; idemu ke suu 
 i halena, the lime spatula shall pierce 
 his gums. 
 suu 3. to revenge, to repay; suu olanga, n., 
 revenge; ni'i suu, to make a free gift 
 expecting no return; ni'i suunge, v. n. 
 suula-(ku) gerund., horo suulana, to kill 
 in revenge for: e sa'a hiirihunie lo'u 
 suulana. Wango suu. 
 suu 4. stiu leh.u, a certain kind of arrow, 
 s uu 5. harbor, bay. landing-place, awalosi 
 i su'u, the west wind; i su'u namona, 
 the opening in the reef at Sa'a; i Laloi 
 Su'u, Mara Masiki Channel; 'Olu Su'u, 
 the three inlets, a name for a number of 
 inlets. 
 su'ule-(ni) mu su'uleni 'est, the paths of 
 the sea. San Cristoval sugu. 
 su'u 6. S., v. i., to move position; su'u weu, 
 su'u met, i'o su'u wen, dan su'u weu. 
 dudu. ha'isu'u. 
 suue'i v. tr., raro suue'i, to turn inside out 
 
 (of a bag). 
 suuha U., suuhai raa, drought. 
 suuhe'ini v. tr., to destroy, to kill out. horo 
 
 suuhe'ini. 
 Su'uheu Lopo Suuheu, a gorge above 
 
 Su'uholo. 
 Su'uholo a village on the east coast of Ulawa; 
 
 its landing-place is i Su'u maea. 
 su'ule'i U., to bulge, to project, 
 suu'i (au), suusuu'i (au) prep., around, about. 
 ddu suu'i, to intreat, to importune, to 
 compel; i'o suu'i, to be present with; 
 maaJni suu'i, to guard at night; tola suu'i, 
 to importune; 'ure suu'i, to attend on, 
 to serve; saeku e ruerua'a suu'iomu, I 
 am in doubt concerning you. Wango 
 suusuui. 
 Su'u Moli a boat harbor at the northwest 
 
 corner of Ulawa. 
 Su'u Peine a harbor on the west coast of Little 
 Malaita; su'u peina, U., a boat harbor 
 at Su'uholo. 
 suuraa'i, suure, suurei, suusuure (na) S., 
 
 foundation, corner. 
 su'uri dehortative; don't; used also in sup- 
 posititious cases, su'uri na, not so; 
 'oke su'uri lae, do not go; huni 'oke 
 su'uri 'unue ha'alae diana, had you not 
 mentioned it it were well; ta'e walo 'ie 
 ke su'uri, save for these bonds; ke su'uri 
 urine, God forbid. 
 Su'urodo the Mara Masiki Channel, cf. 
 
 Laloi Su'u 
 suusuu (ku) 1. elbow, corner, angle; hiiu suusuui 
 karo, corner stone; suusuu nime, elbow; 
 ani suusuu, 15., a cubit. Mota susiu. 
 suusuu 2. hele suusuu ana, to do in succession, 
 continuously; ramo suusuu, to be strong 
 forever, 
 suute 1. v. tr.. to wind a fishing-line. 2. (nd, 
 ni) n., a place on a fishing-rod for wind- 
 ing the line. 
 suwa U., V. i., to back, retire, to draw back. 
 
 ta 1. 
 
 ta'a 
 
 U., to speak; tduri, tduritaha, of reported 
 speech, to speak thus. 
 
 fa 2. noun suffix; inae, maeld; waa'i, waa'ite. 
 
 ta 3. adj., prefix of condition; tahiruhriu, 
 tahisnhisu. lata 1. Mota <a, Maori /a. 
 
 taa 1. noun suffix; horo, horoiaa; puli, pulitaa. 
 
 taa, taataa 2. U.. daa S., to give, to take; to 
 receive, to do. laa kd'u, let me see, 
 wait a bit. Wango haa, Niue ta. 
 
 taa 2. S.. interrogative pron.; a shortened form 
 of taha; what? why? nga miii taa, what 
 things? horana nga taa, what for? mala 
 nga taa, like I don't know what; nga taa, 
 what? nga taa ni 'o ere urini, why did 
 you say this? 
 
 ta'a, ta'ata'a 3 S., n., numeral, one; ta'a ta'e, 
 a one-man canoe; ta'ata'a mwane, one 
 person; 'enite ola? ta'ata'a, how many 
 things? only one; ta'ata'a ola 'oto 'o'o, 
 one and only one; nga ta'ata'a ini mola, 
 only one person; e ta'ata'a mwane, one 
 and the same person; ta'ata'a ini, one 
 person at a time, hduta'a'i, once. 
 Niue taha, Bugotu sa, San Cristoval 
 ta'a'i, Polynesian tahi. 
 
 4. S., contraction of taha, adj., out. isi 
 ta'a, to come out; du ta'a, to debouch; 
 ulu ta'a, to emerge; ere ta'anga, plain 
 speech; kali ta'a, to emerge; lou ta'a, 
 to come forth; suu ta'a, to appear above 
 the horizon; e hure'i ta'a ana hdu, to 
 gush forth from the rock; mawa ta'a, to be 
 exposed to the air (of a sore.) Lau tafa. 
 
 5. adj., suffix; rerepata'a, osiosita'a. 
 6. adj., bad; used in commiserating. 
 
 tata'ala. niwae ta'a, poor fellow; mu 
 mwae ta'a, poor fellows; rako ta'a, 
 unpleasant, irksome; kei ta'a, poor 
 dear (of women); kei ta'a pdine, dear 
 lady; loo ta'a, to be immodest, to offend 
 against propriety; mwei ta'a alaha, dear 
 lord. Lau /aa, Mota tatas, Wango ta'a, 
 Malaj' jahat. 
 ta'a 7. U., adversative, but; commonly na ta'a; 
 
 probably ta'a 3. 
 ta'ahu U., v. i., to pull up weeds in a garden. 
 
 Wango tagu. 
 taalenga face upward; eno taalenga, to lie on 
 one's back. 
 taalengasi v. tr., to lay flat, to lay face 
 upward; taalengasie nimemu, open your 
 hand out flat. 
 taalengasila-(ku) gerund. Samoa talianga, 
 to lie on one's back, 
 taalu n., shoal water, a coral patch; i Taalu, a 
 patch of shoal water off the east coast 
 of Ulawa. Kalitaalu, a proper name; 
 tonohaana a Kalitaalu, his drinking- 
 place at Lenga, Ulawa: he was one of 
 the legendary people of 'Olu Malau. 
 ta'ana, ta'ata'ana U., pron.. every, each; ta'ana 
 nga 'inoni, each man; ta'ana ngaile, 
 every one. Florida talana. 
 ta'ane 1. adv., certainly, indeed; follows the 
 verb, ineu ta'ane, yes, me: I am here 
 
 ta'a 
 ta'a
 
 99 
 
 TAHALAA 
 
 ta'ane 1 (continued). 
 
 indeed; ta'ane si'u'e, certainly; neke'i 
 lae ta'ane. I am surely going. 2. in 
 Ulavva used in conditional affirmation, 
 as ha'alaa, S. muni ne'e loosia, ta'ane 
 na'a 'unua, if I see him I shall tell it; 
 ko urine ta'ane na, S., even supposing 
 it were so. 
 Ta'a Pea a female ghost who makes yams 
 fruitful; her name was given in Ripoo, 
 Ulawa, to a natural formation in Hint. 
 This was placed in the yam gardens. 
 ta'asi, taata'asi v. tr., to throw away, to 
 i. remove, taa 1; asi 3. Wango taari. 
 
 taataa 1. v. i., to defecate. Samoa lata, to 
 ^•,; have the bowels relaxed, 
 ta'ata'a 2. S., numeral, one, a. ta'ata'a me'i 
 lo'u'e, one verse; ta'ata'a maai ngeu, one 
 meal; ta'ata'a mwela inoiUe'i, only child; 
 ta'ata'a ola moumoule'i, one thing only. 
 ta'ataha n., an opening in the shore reef, a 
 chasm, taha 1. ukiii ta'ataha, a break 
 in the reef, a canoe passage. Maori 
 tawha, chasm, 
 ta'ataka ta'atakai rate, takatakai rate, U., the 
 
 down of nestlings, 
 ta'atala n., a line, a row; la'alalai niu, a row 
 of coconut trees; uku ni ta'atala, a row, 
 a line, 
 ta'atara 1. successive; ntti wala ta'atara, tradi- 
 tion; 'unu ta'atara, to relate in order, 
 ta'atara 2. ta'atara wdi, the dragon-fly (Libel- 
 
 lulasp.). tarasi. 
 ta'atarau mu wala ta'atarau, gossip, tarau. 
 taate'i S., v. i., to be at a loss, to be ignorant, 
 to be unwise, 
 taate'inge v. n., fault, ignorance, 
 taate'inge'mi v. tr., to deny, to repudiate. 
 taate'inge'inila-(ku) gerund. Florida tate. 
 taatewe S., to be at fault. 
 
 taatewenga v. n., a fault. 
 ta'au S., adv., of place, demonstrative ne may 
 be added; onward, further, east, south. 
 apai loa ta'au, the heavens above; e odo 
 'oto ta'au, he went right on; po'o ta'au, 
 farther east; qd'u ta'au, go east or south, 
 ta'e 1. U.. numeral, one; Sa'a prefers ta'a but 
 has to'ola'e. ta'a ta'e, one-man canoe; 
 ta'e hu'a saena e diena, there's a good- 
 hearted woman; to'ota'e ola, to'ota'e int. 
 one here and there; e ta'e ro ola, only 
 two; tiga ta'e, exclamation. Probably 
 metathetic upon 'eta. 
 ta'e 2. adv. of direction, up, inland; when used 
 with locative i contracts from ta'e i to 
 ta'i. ta'i Sa'a, up at Sa'a; ta'i lengi, up 
 above, in the sky; 'ure ta'i tolona hdnue, 
 from out of the hills. Mota sage, 
 Motu dae, Maori ake. 
 ta'e 3. v. i., to rise up, to stand. 
 ta'e 4. V. tr., to raise up. ta'e 'akalo, to raise 
 a ghost. M. A., p. 219. Lau take, to 
 stand. 
 ta'e 5. V. i., to embark; kiraelu 'a ta'e ha'i 
 'olie'i, they embark on their return 
 journey; ta'e ilengine horse, to ride; ta'e 
 ha'aholo, to be astride; ta'a ta'e, one- 
 
 ta'e 5 (continued). 
 
 man canoe; ta'e hat, four-man canoe; 
 ta'e 'olu, three-man canoe. Ta'e 'Olu, 
 
 Belt of Orion. 
 
 ta'eli tr.. to embark, to get into a canoe. 
 
 ha'ata'eli. 
 ta<elila-(na, ni) gerund, 
 ta'e 6. S., adversative, but, probably ta'e 1. 
 ta'e walo 'ie ke su'uri, save for these 
 bonds; ta'e pe'inie, nevertheless. Araga 
 take. 
 ta'ela'i 1. v. i., to set out, to arise, to start. 
 ta'e 2. ta'ela'i i ola, beginning from. 
 2. to be e.xcited; saeku e ta'ela'i, I am 
 excited, 
 ta'ela'ini tr., to cause to arise, 
 ta'ena, ta'eta'ena S., pron., each, every, ta'e 1. 
 ta'ena nga 'inoni, every man. Motu 
 taina. some, 
 ta'ero v. i.. to dribble (of spittle) ; wawe ko ia'ero 
 
 ana, he dribbled at the mouth, 
 ta'etate v. i., to chatter; sulu walanga ta'etate, 
 
 'tis naught but idle chatter, 
 ta'ewau wantonly, carelessly, any how. e 
 la'ewau mola, e ta'e mola wan, it's all 
 one, it makes no difference; ta'ewau mu 
 'ino7ii, S., the common people, 
 taha, ta'ataha 1. to be open, to have a channel, 
 to emerge; taha maa, to open the door; 
 kire taha maa 'oto nge mclu lae, we left 
 as they were opening their doors (at 
 daylight); taha ana nga 'inoni, to pay 
 a visit to a person; taha odo'i, to come 
 upon, to find; taha 'o'o, the tenor drum 
 in the para ni 'o'o, the first notes are 
 struck on it; mwdritaha, to recover from 
 wounds; sae taha, happy; sae tahanga, 
 happiness; saeku e taha, my mind is 
 clear about it; 'unu ta'ataha, to pro- 
 nounce aloud; wdi e taha, the river 
 mouth is open, navigable, 
 tahani S.. tr., to open, to be a pioneer; ana 
 e tahanie maamu ne, in that he opened 
 your eyes; 'unu tahanie saemu, lay bare 
 your mind, (b) to emerge, to go 
 through; tahanie 'asi, get through the 
 surf, (c) aha tahani, tola tahani, to 
 warn. 
 tahangi U., tr., tahangia hdlisi, to eat the 
 first fruits of the harvest; tahangia wdpu. 
 to be the first to clear a piece of thick 
 bush and thereby acquire a right over 
 the land: prov.. to be a pioneer. 
 ha'aisita'anga'ini, ha'aisitahanga'ini. 
 San Cristoval tafa, Lau tafa, Tamna 
 tafa, outside; Maori tawha. 
 taha 2. interrogative pron.. what, more com- 
 mon in Ulawa; nga taha. what? inge'ia 
 taha 'oto. U-, that is it. just so; nga mdsi 
 taha. what thing? mtinia nga taha. what 
 for? 'osi hele hinoli'a taha ine, how well 
 you have done it. Mota sava, Maori 
 aha. M. L.. p. 133. 
 taha'ira'a adv., clearly, plainly; ere taha'ira'a, 
 
 to speak distinctly, 
 tahalaa n.. an opening in a reef, a way out.
 
 TAHANGA 
 
 lOO 
 
 tahanga n., a fathom; v. tr., to measure a 
 fathom, tahanga aua nusi, U., a meas- 
 ure, just a fathom long; haa tahanga, 
 a sum of monej', ten strings each a 
 fathom long, the sum equivalent to 
 40 dogs' teeth {sjili hala). 
 
 tahanga'ini v. tr., to set wide open. ha'aisUa- 
 hanga'ini, ha'aisita'anga'ini. 
 
 taharara'a mawasidengi e taharara'a, a storm 
 SAvept down. 
 
 tahaunutara through, from one side to the 
 other; used with poss. 3. tinu 3. 
 
 tahe 1. n., a platform; hd'u tahe, to make a 
 platform; tahe ni malaoliu, a platform 
 on which ceremonies are conducted in 
 connection with malaohn, a boy's catch- 
 ing his first bonito. 
 
 tahe 2. v. i., to be abundant; hohola e tahe, the 
 garden produced abundantly. 
 
 tahe 3. to flow, to be in motion (of water) . 'ahe. 
 luelue e tahe, the flood came. Poly- 
 nesian lake, to flow. 
 
 tahe 4. tahe 'upu'npu, to be halfway in a 
 journey. 
 
 tahe I". 5. lake tongo, to sip. 
 
 tahela'ini, ta'etahela'ini v. tr., to Hft up to 
 view, to exalt, to mount, to ascend. 
 tahela'i partic, up, upward; ngara tahela'i 
 ana. to call upon him with weeping. 
 
 tahera'i v. i., to thatch with layers of sago- 
 palm leaf (raho). 
 tahera'inge v. n., thatching, 
 tahera'ini tr. 
 
 taheri v. tr., to wear across the shoulder as a 
 bandolier, a Taheri 'Usu, a proper 
 name. 
 
 tahi, ta'itehi v. i., to flee; tdhi ke'ii, be off, get 
 out of the way. 
 tahinge v. n., flight; 'o'o ni tehinge, to be in 
 flight; kire tola rorora ana tahinge, they 
 fled precipitately, 
 tahisi tr., to escape from; tapo tdhisi, to 
 grab and miss. Lau tafi. 
 
 tahi 2. to rend; tahi sa'o, to cut sago leaves. 
 
 tahikuhiku U., adj., tangled, raveled, hikti- 
 
 labile 'ini v. tr., to flee away and carry with one. 
 
 tahirchiro n., a large fish that swims round in 
 circles, hiro. 
 
 tahisuhisu, tatahisuhisu said of a canoe, to 
 run along on the top of a wave. 
 
 taho 1. to purchase a man, to buy a dependent. 
 2. to pay money to one who avenges a 
 death; ke'i taho nana mwala e horo'ia 
 mwaena, will make payments to the 
 people who killed So-and-so, M. A., 
 p. 243. kire tahoa nana mwala e horn, 
 they paid up to the people who had 
 killed; tahoa lalamoa, to pay for a man 
 killed by violence, cf. dalo. 3. taho 
 ta'a, the ritual placing of a coconut in 
 a canoe containing a dead body, M. A., 
 p. 136: taha, there should be taho. 
 
 taho 4. taho ta'a, used with poss. 3, to arrive at. 
 tahola'i v. i., to wave in the air as a sign of 
 triumph; tahola'i mata, to wave the club. 
 tahola'inl tr. 
 
 tahu awa tahu, U., to slip, to come loose (of 
 
 bands) . 
 tahu'i V. tr., to take to pieces. Florida tavuli, 
 
 to remove, 
 tahule S., n., a mosquito. 
 
 tahulu the black mussel employed in the manu- 
 facture of bonito hooks {te'i). Wdi ni 
 Tehiilu, the lagoon at Ngorangora, 
 Ulawa. 
 
 ta 'if 1. prefix of condition, td'iere. 2. contrac- 
 tion of ta'e i, up at; noko lai td'i Sa'a, I 
 am going up to Sa'a; td'i kule, shore, 
 beach, dry land, dinge ta'i hahona, the 
 day after. 3. participial ending: rdpii, 
 rdpiite'i. 4. verb suffix used intransi- 
 tively: aile'i, md'ute'i. Mota tag. 
 
 ta'iere adj., dizzy, faint; tnaaku e td'iere, I am 
 giddy. 
 
 tai'esi neap tide. Maori tai, laia. 
 
 ta'ihikuhiku S., tangled, raveled. 
 
 ta'ini verbal suffix, used transitively, rdpit, 
 rdpide'ini; wdi e mapipi 'ohe 'oto td'inie 
 kolune mwakano, whether the water has 
 receded off the face of the earth. 
 
 ta'ingelu S., ta'ingalu U., adv., all together, 
 ta'ingelute n., used as adv., all together. 
 
 ta'ipulo adj., reversed. 
 
 ta'ipulosi V. tr., to reverse. 
 
 ta'ipulopulo U., adj., to come short of. 
 
 ta'irara adj., to be earnest over, to use per- 
 suasion. 
 ta'iraranga n. 
 
 taitei 1. U., v. tr., to close the eyes, e tditeia 
 maana. 
 
 ta'itei 2. v. i., to deny; used with poss. 3. 
 
 ta'iteli n., flowering hibiscus of many varieties. 
 
 ta'itelihe-(na) n., a border, tali 1. td'iteli- 
 hana hdnue, boundary of land. 
 
 ta'itelihite to be split, to have cracks in. tali 1. 
 
 ta'itesi S., n., flesh meat; mu te'ilesi ola, flesh. 
 
 taka, ta'ataka 1. v., to come into flower; taka 
 fnala mdimeptisu, to flower like the 
 ?ndimepusu. n., takai dango, a flower; 
 ta'atakana, its flower. Wango taga, to 
 be in leaf. 
 
 taka 2. prefix of spontaneity, takaluhe. Mota 
 tava, Maori taka, takahe; Malagasy tafa. 
 
 taka 3. taka 'irori, proverb of confusion of 
 voices. 
 
 takalo, ta'atakalo S.. takatakalo U., to be lost, 
 astray, to go astray, ha'atakalo. nou 
 lae takalo, I am lost; liu takalo, to take 
 a wTong road. 
 takalonga v. n., an error, 
 takaloha'ini tr., to mislay. Maori ngaro. 
 Niue ngalo, lost. 
 
 takaluhe to be loosened, to come loose. 
 
 takara 1. to come unraveled, matakara. 2. 
 to abound, to prosper. 3. maaku e 
 takara pulupulu, I saw stars, 
 takarasi tr., to unravel, to unwind, to 
 
 unlace. 
 takarara to come undone. 
 
 takararuru in a bunch, together, hele takaruru, 
 hold in a bunch; taka 2. 
 
 takarurume'ini tr.; hane takarurume'inire, to
 
 lOI 
 
 TALO 
 
 takarurume'ini (continued). 
 
 shoot a number at one shot. Mota 
 lakar, to take between the fingers. 
 
 takihe-(ku) a relative, a member of the same 
 family; a tdkiheku, a kinsman of mine. 
 
 tako, tatako to bewail, to lament, hii'ilako'i. 
 takonga U., takola S., v. n., lamentation. 
 takosi tr. 
 
 tako'i-(au) prep., toward (of pennons and 
 things), of swearing by. ere ni ha'apu 
 lako'ie, swore by him. 
 tatako'i v. tr., to approach a person. 
 inelu talako'ie paro. 
 
 taku, ta'uteku v. i., to receive, to entertain; 
 used with poss. 3. tdku ana pdsi, 
 grasp a bow. 
 takuhi S., takusi U., tr. 
 takuhila-(ku) gerund. 
 takume'ini U., tr., to dun. 
 
 takume S., n., a yam with fruit on the \ine. 
 
 takuruhi S., v. tr., to crowd. 
 
 tala 1. n., path, road, way; tala ineu. my path; 
 tala ni liu, path to travel; Tala Odo, the 
 main ridge of Little Malaita; hdrii tala, 
 S.. hdri ni tala, U., forks of the road; 
 i kerekerena tala, beside the path; maai 
 tala rue, street corner; nga miii tala, 
 paths; 'wrt odohaana tala, walk straight 
 along the path; walu tala ni Tolo, all 
 the villages of Tolo. Mota sala, 
 Florida hala, Maori ara. 
 
 tala 2. (ku) n., place, room, dsu lalai nge'ulaa, 
 work for food; 'eli talayia, dig his grave; 
 hd'ilale talakti, make room for me; horo 
 i tala, to kill in revenge; horonga i talada, 
 revenge for them; hoU lalakii, buy my 
 footing; le'u talaku, my place; lio tala, 
 beware; na'o talana, lead the way for 
 him; e lo'o talaku, room for me. Florida 
 talana, put it. 
 
 tala, ta'atala 3. n., a row, a string; lalai heune, 
 a row of teeth; talai puli, a string of 
 white cowries; kulaa talai heune, to 
 loosen the teeth. 
 
 tala 4. to miss, to fail, ddu laid, hu'utala. 
 pa'ewa ko 'ala tala, the shark bites at 
 and misses (the last two days of the 
 moon); Pola tala, U., to fail. Mao. hara. 
 talahi tr., e hute talaliie qongine, born out 
 of due time. Wango tara, Viti dhala. 
 
 tala 5. v. tr., to sweep; talaa nume, a besom. 
 
 talaa a littoral tree of hard wood. 
 
 tala'ae v. i., to begin; used with genitive i, ni. 
 
 e tala'ai 'aela. e lala'aeni 'aela, it is 
 
 beginning to spoil; tala'ae ni lae, begin 
 
 to go. 
 
 tala'aeha-(na) U., n., the beginning of, 
 
 because of. 
 tala'ae (na) S., beginning from. 
 
 tala'aehota S., v. i., to begin, 'aehota. 
 
 talaahu'e v. tr., to guard, to protect, to catch 
 a ball. dhu. 
 
 tala'aela'a v. i., to frolic, to play. 
 
 talahi U., v. tr., to miss, hula talahi, U., to fail 
 to find a person at home; lio talahi, U.. 
 to look for in vain; ma'am talahi, to go 
 like winking. 
 
 talahuli the place of; with poss. 3. tala 2. 
 i talahuli emu, in your right place; mu 
 le'u talahuliana, his wonted place. 
 
 tala'i V. tr., to entice, ha'atala'i. lala'i keri, 
 to catch octopus. 
 
 tala'ilisi continuously; huni palo lala'ilisi 
 huni'o, to worship Thee continuously. 
 
 talama'i v. i., to prepare for a feast, to collect 
 materials, talama'i wala, U., to act as 
 mediator, 
 talama'inge v. n. 
 talama'ini tr. 
 
 talani hataa'i sae talani, to be careful to. tala 2. 
 
 talau 1. U., to be alight (of fire), to blaze, to 
 spread (of ulcer), rara talau. twenty- 
 first and twenty-.second days of the 
 moon. Florida talau, continually. 
 
 talau, tatalau 2. v. i., to walk along a log. 
 tatalauhe. San Cristoval tatarau. 
 
 tale (au) 1. U., prep., to, toward (of persons 
 and things); lae talea, go to him; tale i 
 ola, on the side of what you may call it. 
 Malo tele. 
 
 tale 2. V. i., to lack; melu tale ola, we lack 
 things, 
 talenga .S.. talengaha U. (double noun 
 ending), v. n., a shortage, famine. 
 
 tale 3. to miss, to look in vain for. hd'itale. 
 lio talea, S., to fail to see. 
 
 tale'i mere, inferior; mu tale'i ola, interior 
 things, merely, wantonly; nou tale'i 
 lae mola, I just went for no reason; tale'i 
 teu. to act wantonly; tale'i teunge, wan- 
 ton mischief; tale'i 'o'i'o'i, to trouble 
 oneself; e tale'i meimeile'ini, he was in 
 destitution; tale'i i7iu mola'a, just drink 
 without price. 
 
 tali 1. V. i., to be bounded by, to end, to begin. 
 td'itelihe. lai leli, up to, until. San 
 Cristoval tari, to reach; Florida taligu, 
 back, again; Xiue tali, until, since. 
 
 tali 2. lama tali, to free a tree of creepers; tali 
 wale, to strip the skin of cane (wale). 
 
 talihe (ku) n., ere tdlihe, to defend oneself in 
 speech, to deny, ere (lado) tdliheku, make 
 my defence; ne'isae tdlihe, to reach in 
 thought. 
 
 talihite cf. td'itelihite. 
 
 talihuu 'ano tdlihiiu, to sink out of sight, to 
 go down for good. 
 
 talili v. tr., to transgress, to work wickedness. 
 hd'ilelili. 
 talilinge v. n. Wango tariri. 
 
 talimaa v. i., to start, to come to an end; 
 talimaa ana maholo 'ie, S., from now on; 
 talimaa 'oio nihou, U., up till now. 
 
 talis! U., V. i., to be awake, to wake up. 
 ha'atdlisi. 
 
 talo 1. a shield made of wood. 
 
 talo 2. a tree whose beirk is used for cerements. 
 
 talo 3. V. tr., to tithe; talo dhu, to amass; 
 e taloa huehuana dangona muakana, he 
 gives tithes of the trees of the field; talo 
 lilisi, to ofier a certain portion as a 
 sacrifice. 
 
 talo 4. U.. talo 'wau i 'esi, to follow the coats 
 by sea.
 
 TALO 
 
 I02 
 
 talo 5. talo nunu, to photograph, 
 talo 6. U., V. i.. to spread (of news). S., taro. 
 taloha (na), tataloha (na) v. n., news, 
 taloha'ini tr., to spread news, to proclaim, 
 taloha'i v. i. and partic. Wango taro, 
 Samoa lala. 
 talo 7. talo li'isi, at irregular intervals, 
 talo 8. talo ahu, a fighting company, a war 
 
 band, talo 1. 
 talohi V. tr., to guard against a blow, to ward 
 
 off, to shield. 
 talo 'ill U., taro'iri S., a paddle-shaped club 
 with a long handle, used also as a shield. 
 Guppy, "Solomon Islands" p. 74. 
 tSluhi 1. to draw out water, to draw at a well. 
 cf. ddnu. 2. U., Su'u i Teluhi'a, the 
 boat harbor at Mwado'a, Ulawa. 
 tamwa prefix of condition. Mota lama. 
 tamwaodo v. i., to be clear, straightforward, 
 tanauhi ha'atanauhi, v. tr., to decoy a ghost or 
 
 animal by food, 
 tane S., adv., of place; tane mat, here; tane wau, 
 
 there; tane ta'i salo, up in the sky. 
 tanga (ku) n., the crotch of the legs, matanga. 
 Mota sanga, Sulu sanga, branch; Viti 
 sanga. 
 tangaa n., a span; v., to span with the hand. 
 
 Viti dhanga. 
 tangahulu numeral, ten: used only in counting; 
 tangakulii ana, tenth. Mota sangavul, 
 Florida hangavulu, Maori ngahuru, 
 Niue hongofulu. 
 tangalau 1. numeral, one hundred: used with 
 genitive i, ni. tangalai mwane, an 
 hundred men. San Cristoval tangarau. 
 tangalau 2. niu tangalau, a heavily laden coco- 
 nut. 'Ahe i Niu Tangalau, a tide-rip 
 between Ulawa and Sa'a. 
 tangatanga n., a forked stick, tanga. 
 tangi 1. a basket made of split cane to hold 
 canarium nuts for drying in the smoke 
 (ngdli maa). 
 tangi 2. a hand of bananas, used with genitive 
 
 si, tangisi hudi. Mota tingiu. 
 tangi 3. to cleave, to rive, to split a log in two. 
 tango S., used with genitive ni; tangoni mwela, 
 
 all the children. 
 tao V. i., to be upset (of the stomach); 'ieku 
 
 e tao, I am sick at the stomach, 
 taoha n., men's club-house on the beach used 
 for stowing canoes. Wrongly spelt oha 
 in M. A., p. 174. hule e 'a' a haahia 
 taoha, the creeper had climbed all over 
 the club-house; niu ni taoha, a palm 
 (Nipa fruticans). Wango oha. 
 taotaoro n., a tree from San Cristoval planted 
 
 in the villages for shade. 
 tapa, ta'atapa 1. v. i., to cut with a blow, to 
 reap; tapa tekela'ini, to cut off and 
 destroy; nahi ta'atapa korn, a sickle. 
 tapali tr., tapali hui, to cut off the stems 
 of taro. San Cristoval taba, Maori 
 tapa, tapahi. 
 tapa ta'atapa 2. tapa ha'i'olisi, to exchange 
 
 words, to converse. 
 tapa 3. prefix of condition, tapa'oli, tapausu. 
 Mota tava, Lau taba. 
 
 tapaa a tree of soft wood used for making food 
 
 bowls, the milk tree of North Queens- 
 land. 
 tapaika tobacco (English); ngdu tapaika, to 
 
 smoke tobacco. 
 tapala'a U., adj., abounding, ha'atapala'a. 
 
 Wango tabarasi. 
 tapaliu V. i., to pass by, to pass across, to cross, 
 tapa'oli V. i., to exchange, to ransom. 
 
 tapa'olite (ku) v. n., tapa'oliteku, in 
 
 exchange for me. 
 tapa'olisi tr. 
 tapa'olisila-(ku) gerund. 
 tapausu V. i., to pierce, to go right through; 
 
 used with poss. 3. 
 tapi U., V. tr., to chop, to cut down, 'aitepi. 
 
 San Cristoval tabi. 
 tape V. i., to grab, to catch hold, to lay hands 
 
 on; tapo mae, to seize weapons; tapo 
 
 tdhisi, to grab and miss. 
 tapoli tr. 
 
 tapolila-(ku) gerund, 
 taqaosi S., to happen to, to do harm to. 
 taqaruru U., bronze-wing dove, 'aqa 1. 
 tara 1. v. i., to drift at sea, to be set by currents. 
 
 mataraha. 
 tara 2. adj., prefix, tararuru. 
 tara 3. v. i., to skim, to pass over the surfaceo 
 
 ta'atarawdi, to skim the water, dragon-fly. 
 tara'a adj., uunu tara'a huuilume, burn up the 
 
 village. 
 tara'asi continuously, straight on; lae tara'asi, 
 
 to go straight on. 
 tarakoni v. tr., to collect, to gather together, 
 tarapiu to be blistered (of hands or feet), 
 tararuru v. i., to be gathered together, to be 
 
 associated with, to be united with; hele 
 
 tararuru, take hold all together; saeda 
 
 ka'a tararuru pe'ie, their hearts were 
 
 not whole with him. Wango taruru. 
 tarasi v. tr., to skim along the surface of; 
 
 tarasie 'asi ana hole, feather the oar. 
 tarasi oko a bird, cuckoo. 
 
 tarasimwa'a adj., skinned, broken (of skin), 
 tarau, tatarau v. i., to go straight on, to con- 
 tinue; continuously, liii tarau, to go 
 
 straight ahead. Florida talau. 
 taraixhe'ini U., v. tr., to continue with, to 
 
 persevere in. talau. 2. to light a lamp, 
 taraure'i partic, continuously, continually; 
 
 to continue on, to go straight on. '-• :•< 
 taraure'ini U., v. tr., used as a preposition; 
 
 right on through, throughout. 
 tari, ta'iteri 1. v. tr., to gain, to obtain, tdri 
 
 olanga, U., tdri'e olanga, S., riches. 
 tari 2. v. i., to stick fast in a tree or a noose. 
 
 Mota tali, a rope; Maori tari, a noose, 
 tari 3. U., V. tr., to launch a canoe; moro tdria 
 
 paro 'iola i 'esi, you two launch the 
 
 canoe into the sea. 
 tari 4. tdri sa'o, to split the sides off sago-palm 
 
 leaves to make bird arrows (topa). 
 tarie'ini wala U., to commit fornication. 
 
 tarie'ini walanga v. n. 
 tariho v. tr., to watch for turtles coming up 
 
 to lay, tarihoa honu. 
 tariki U., to stride.
 
 I03 
 
 TAUTO'O 
 
 taro, tataro S., talo U., to spread (of news), to 
 
 proclaim. 
 taroha, tataroha (na) v. n., news; tarohana 
 
 e taro put, the news has reached here, 
 tataroha'i'e adj., used as n., news, 
 tarohi tr.. to come to one's ears, 
 taroha'ini tr., to proclaim. 
 tarohainila-(ku) gerund, 
 taro'iri S. cf. talo'ili, U. 
 taroisuli U., to add to. 
 tSsi 1. V. i., to slip, to slide, to glance off. 
 tasi 2. V. i., to strip off the outer skin; niu test, 
 
 a thin-skinned variety of coconut. 
 tata 1. adjectival prefix of condition, tata- 
 
 qeluqelu. Wango ta, Florida la, Viti ta. 
 tata 2. V. i., to scatter, dhutata, tataa'ini. 
 tataa S., to fade away, to wither. 
 tataa'ini v. tr., to scatter, to sow broadcast, to 
 
 shake out, to unfurl; tataa' i 'asi, to 
 
 shake off; ere tataa'ini, to curse. Wango 
 
 adaraini. 
 tata'ala adj., bad. ta'a 6, la 4. ha'atata'ala. 
 
 raramanga ana i'onga tata'ala, rebuke 
 
 because of lasciviousness; si'ohaakii e 
 
 tata'ala, I am in evil plight. 
 tata'alanga n., evil; mwaanie mu tata- 
 
 'alanga, from evil, 
 tata'alaha n., used with poss. 3. lala- 
 
 'alahaana mu i'e, the bad fish, lit., its 
 
 badness the fish. 
 tata'alasi with ddu, liele, to do harm to; 
 
 horo tata'alasi, to kill without mercy. 
 tatahana S., adv., in a little while, almost; 
 
 talahana 'oto muini ke'i helesie, some 
 
 almost did it. 
 tatahiohio to stagger about. » 
 tatahiruhiru headlong. 
 
 tataipeipe v. i., to wallow, to roll about in a fit. 
 tataisuisu to run along atop a wave (of a canoe) . 
 tataiteu S., lio tataiteu, to appear beautiful. 
 tataku S., to be effeminate; hele tatakii, to be a 
 
 novice, 
 tatalau 1. as talau 2. 2. U., in succession; hele 
 
 tatalau, to do in succession; 'iinii 
 
 tatalau ana, to rehearse in order. 
 tatahoradiU., adj., faUing, of a meteor, tata 1. 
 tatalauhe v. n., a means of crossing over, a 
 
 bridge, a log over a stream. 
 tatale U., v. tr., to go through or carry (of the 
 
 sound of a conch); walana 'dhuri e 
 
 tatalea ivalu tola i Tola, the sound of the 
 
 conch went through all the villages in 
 
 Tolo. 
 Tatamwane a Tatamwane, a proper name, lit., 
 
 scatter men. 
 tatanga n., used as v. i., to be scattered, dis- 
 persed. 
 tatangasi tr., to be scattered over; tata- 
 
 ngasie rnu ole, scattered over the low- 
 lands. 
 tatanga'ini tr., to scatter, to disperse. 
 
 ha'alalanga'ini. 
 tatanga'i partic. hd'itatanga'i. 
 tatangalungalu U., to be excited, 
 tataqeluqelu headlong, head over heels. 
 
 ha'atataqelu. 
 tatara S.. 'unu tatara, 7cala tatara, tradition. 
 
 tatara'a adj., straight, tara'a. 
 
 tataraaraa noronga lataraaraa, indiscriminate 
 slaughter. 
 
 tatarau 'unu tatarau, gossip. 
 
 tatarisi U., the monitor lizard (Varanua 
 indicus). 
 
 tataro v. i., to stumble, ha'atataro. 'aeku 
 e tataro ana, my foot stumbled thereon. 
 
 tatate'ete'e v. i., to bump, to collide. 
 
 tatau U., V. i., to hurry, to hasten; kira'elu 'asi 
 tateii weu, they then scurried away. 
 
 tatawero'a S., adj., for naught, in vain, 
 unprofitably. 
 
 tatawisi, tatawisiwisi v. i., to run along on the 
 top of a wave, to speed along. 
 
 tau U., dau S. 1. v. i., to do, to act, to make, to 
 be about to do, to endeavor, e Idu ni 
 lae, he made to go; Idu muni, to en- 
 deavor; tau ha'aro'i, to find; Idu 'ei, to 
 break firewood; tdu 'ae, to hurry; tdti 
 lakelake, to give oneself airs; Idu rarahi, 
 to urge, to incite; tdu rarahinga, impor- 
 tunity; lale'i ten. S., to act wantonly; 
 tale'i teunge, mischief; no'iteii, to delay; 
 'oniteu, to delay; hd'iteu, to hasten. 
 
 tau 2. V. i., 'ape e tdu, the net has fish enclosed 
 in it. 
 
 tau 3. tdu ta'a, to issue, to arrive at; used with 
 poss. 3. e tdu ta'a ana. it issued in; 
 raa tdu ta'a mala sato, shine out like the 
 sun; tdu taha, M. A., p. 136. 'an 4. 
 
 tau 4. ha'atau, v. i., to be far off, distant. 
 
 tauhe S., n., a feast. 
 
 taule'ini v. tr., to get ready things for a journey, 
 to make preparations, 
 taule'i v. i. 
 taule'inge v. n., preparation. 
 
 tauma'i, taume'i U., conjunction, used in sup- 
 posititious cases; if, supposing that. 
 a7ia kira 'a taume'i lae, supposing that 
 they go. 
 
 taumanga n., a pudding made of pounded taro 
 and coconut milk (ow/) cut up into little 
 squares; the taro is first roasted on the 
 coals, then pounded, then rolled fiat 
 and the coconut milk added, the squares 
 are then rolled in leaves and roasted; 
 tdumanga sususu, taro pudding not cut 
 into blocks but left whole. 
 
 tSunge'ini, tauteunge'ini v. tr., to persecute. 
 taunge'inila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 tauri, tauritaha, taurini U. 1. v. i., to speak thus, 
 to do thus; used of reported speech. 
 nge na'asi Iduri, then said I. 
 tauri, tauteuri 2. v. tr., to sew, to stitch; tduri 
 to'oni, to sew clothes; tduri to'oninge, 
 V. n. tdurilana, gerund, 
 tauteurite v. n., a seam, a sewing; maai 
 leuteurite, a seam, 
 ta'utepunge n., slander. 
 
 tauten S., adv., carelessly, wantonly, unguard- 
 edly, blasphemously. Wango tautau. 
 Tauto'o U., a Poro Tauto'o, a legendary person 
 belonging to Su'uholo and killed at San 
 Cristoval in a raid. His head is said to 
 have arrived back at Su'uho'o by 
 magic (sdru'a) and to have been found
 
 TAUTO'O 
 
 104 
 
 Tauto'o (continued). 
 
 on the beach. A representation of him 
 cut in coral formed one of the sacred 
 things at Su'uholo. 
 tawa an opening in the shore reef, used in the 
 names of landing-places, maalilawa, 
 malawa. Tawaodo, Tawaideu, Tawa 
 ni Mae, Tawa ni 'Ehi'e; names of har- 
 bors. Mao. awa. channel. 
 Tawaine an inlet in 'Olu Su'u, west of Cape 
 
 Zelee. 
 Tawana a small pass just south of Roasi Bay, 
 
 Little Malaita. 
 tawari v. i., to strike out with the hands in 
 
 swimming. 
 Tawasipua U., a landing-place at 'Olu Malau. 
 tawau n., a shrine, a sanctuary. San Cristoval 
 
 tawao. 
 te S., to speak, to say, to do; used of reported 
 speech, tduri. e teiiri, he said; e teiiri 
 taa, what did he say. nge nesi teuri, then 
 said I; neke teurine ta'ane, I shall cer- 
 tainly do thus, 
 tea 1. V. i., to make speeches, to cry out in a 
 loud voice, to declaim. Lau tea, to 
 speak. 2. to bark, of a dog. 
 teangi tr., to bark at, to bay. 
 teanga'i U., v. i., to offer prayers to a ghost. 
 teanga'inga v. n., prayer, worship, 
 teanga'ini tr. 
 tee, teetee 1. v. i., to tick, to tap, to smite, to 
 hammer, to throb. 
 teeli tr., teeli pelo, to ring the bell, 
 te'e, te'ete'e 2. adv., for good, completely; 
 te'ete'e huu, for good, finally, forever, 
 abiding; mango te'ete'e, finished for good 
 and all. 
 te'ela'i partic, mango te'ela'i, quite finished. 
 Lau tee fuu. 
 te'e 3. poo te'e, kire ka'a poo te'e ada, they did 
 not trouble about them; su'asti'ate'e, 
 to be anxious about. Lau tete, manata 
 tetea, to be an.xious. 
 te'e 4. hd'ite'e, with whole skin, unpeeled. 
 
 te'ete'e 2. 
 te'ela'i v. i., to set; 7nelu te'ela'i 'ae, our feet 
 stand; mala nga poo ko te'ela'i ana, even 
 if a beast come into contact with it. 
 te'ela'ini tr., ko susue'inie nimana te'ela'inie 
 ngidune, stretched out his hand and 
 touched his lips. 
 teetee 1. a sacred inclosure planted with dili 
 at the door of the dwelling-house or 
 toohi or an inclosure made round the 
 central pillar into which scraps of food 
 or fruit skins may be thrown without 
 fear of their being used for purposes of 
 witchcraft, 
 te'ete'e (ku) 2. n., skin, bark, husk, rind. 
 hd'ite'e. te'ete'ena sapeku, skin of my 
 body. 2. n., a marine shell. Fanta 
 Cruz be. 
 tehe n.. a bird, the chicken-hawk. San Cris- 
 toval tehe. 
 tei S. 1. n., the place where; with locative i, 
 itei. U., hei. itei ngeena, what place 
 is that? 'o 'ure itei, where are you from. 
 
 tei 1 (continued). 
 
 whence come you? 'oko lai tei, whither 
 
 are you going? hai tei, down where? 
 
 ynwala 'urei tei ni 'ie, from whence are 
 
 these people. Mota vea, Maori hea. 
 te'i 2. to draw water; te'i wei, to draw water; 
 
 te'i weinge, a drawing of water; te'ie 
 
 rata, to fill the bamboo water-carrier; 
 
 noH te'ie i 'Ei'ei, I drew water from the 
 
 spring 'Ei'ei. Mota tav. 
 te'i 3. n., the bonito hook, made of tdliuhi or 
 
 hapa or roa or 'ime. used with a rod in 
 
 the bow of the canoe, 
 teile'ini v. tr., to wag, to move from side to side. 
 
 e teile'inie qd'une, he wags his head, 
 te'inge'ini v. tr., to proffer, to call attention 
 
 to, to point out. 
 teitei mother, aunt; used in the vocative; used 
 
 in affectionate address by a parent to 
 
 female child, cf. mama'a. a teitei, 
 
 mother, when speaking of a particular 
 
 person; teitei ineu, my dear mother. 
 
 Mota veve, Efate tete, Alite tetelia, Lau 
 
 te. 
 teke V. i., to fall, to drop to the ground. 
 
 ha'aleke. tigdii teketeke, to drop crumbs 
 
 of food when eating, to eat like a 
 
 cockatoo. 
 tekela'ini tr., used with preceding verb, as 
 
 ddu, kite, tala, etc; to knock, to sweep 
 
 and lose; hu'e tekela'ini, to uproot and 
 
 destroy; tapa tekela'ini, to cut off and 
 
 destroy. 
 tekela'i partic, fallen and lost, misplaced 
 
 and lost. Florida taga, Wango tegeraini. 
 tekuruhi S., v. tr., to close in on a person. 
 temweri U., hele temiveri, to touch, 
 tengotengo v. i., to droop, to fall to one side, 
 
 to hang loose, ha'atengotengo. 
 teo V. i., to be humble, lowly, helpless; used 
 
 with poss. 3. muini e teo ada, the 
 
 humble; i'o 7ii teo, to be humble in 
 
 demeanor, 
 teqe n., a bamboo, hdi teqe. 
 tere 1. v. i., to peck; tere qa'asi, to peck and 
 
 break, 
 tere 2. to flap; tere 'apa'apa, to flap the wings. 
 
 terehi teterehi, tr., to fan. telere. 
 tereha'ini cf. mwakatereha'ini, to flout, to put 
 
 to scorn, 
 tero V. i., to hang down, to depend; to'oni e tero 
 
 i 'ano, robes hanging down to the 
 
 ground; tero ngidii, to pout the lip. 
 teroliu excessive, beyond what is fitting; qd'u 
 
 ieroliu, the second finger. 
 teru cf. suliteru, needle. 
 
 tete I. V. tr., to pull out the contents of a bag. 
 to rifle; tete 'asi, to empty out contents. 
 Florida tete. Mota sese. 
 tete 2. to give money, to make a subscription. 
 tete 3. to flutter; tete 'apa'apa. 
 tete 4. to be spilled; hena e tete 'uru'uru, the 
 
 lime is spilled. Fagani tete, loose, 
 tete 5. v. tr., to lead by the hand. 
 tete 6. a stone fence; so'o tete, to build a stone 
 fence; kumwesie tete, to take down a 
 stone wall.
 
 105 
 
 TOLI 
 
 tete 7. S., pili tele, to oppress, to tread douii. 
 
 tetela-(ku) gerund., with ku, mu, na. etc.. 
 
 pili tetelara. or pili letelada, oppress 
 
 them. 
 
 Tetele the ridge at the head of the ri%er 
 
 Wa'o'a'a. 
 tetelenga U.. a tabu, 
 tetere n., a fan. 
 
 tetewa'a S., adj., very long, very tall, teu-a. 
 teu n.. the half shell of a coconut, cf. siiukai. 
 teuri, teurine, teuritaa. cf. le, nge nesi teuri, then 
 said I ; 'oto nge a Dora esi leuri. then Dora 
 said; 'olo noil si teuri, then said I. 
 tewa to be long, tall; okolii tewa, twelfth day 
 of the moon, 
 tewanga v. n., length, height. Wango i«t'a. 
 tewatewa U., very tall, very long, 
 toha to rejoice. 
 
 toha'ini tr., to give oneself airs, to be proud, 
 
 to speak well of. ha'atohai'ni. 
 tohala'i partic, rejoicing in spirit. 
 tohala'inge v. n., rejoicing; i'o ni tohala inge, 
 to be rejoicing; tolaha ni tohala'inge, 
 exultation. 
 tohe, ha'itohe to dispute. Wango tohc, to 
 
 deny, to reject. 
 toho, totohoS., tohotoho i;., 1. to measure with a 
 rod, to measure. 
 tohola-(ku) gerund. 
 
 totohota S., tohotohota I'., v. n.. a measure; 
 (■ rdpHle'inie totohota, he laid the measure 
 along. Mota touv. 
 toho 2. V. i.. to quarrel, to scold, 
 tohu, to'utohu S., tohutohu U. 1. v. tr., to chop 
 down, to fell; tolm hiteli, to cleave 
 asunder, to rive. 
 tohula-(ku) gerund., ro maai tohulana, two 
 
 choppings. 
 tohule'ini tr., to chop down, to fell, 
 tohu 2. V. tr., to build a house; noko to'utohu 
 nume, I am housebuilding; noko tohue 
 Vi;a nume, I am building a house. 
 tohula-(ku) gerund, 
 tohu (ku) S. 3. used to express initiative in 
 action, of one's own accord, ha'alohu. 
 tohuku, of my own accord; e i'o lohune, 
 he lived free, under no restrictions, his 
 own master; 'lire tohune, to desire. 
 tohule'ini 1. v. tr., to chop down, to fell. 2. 
 
 V. tr., to point at, to accuse, 
 to'i V. tr., to suspend, to hang up; likisi lo'i, a 
 mouse. 
 to'inge V. n., something hung up. San 
 Cristoval loki. 
 toki IJ.. V. tr., to hold fast, to grasp tightly, 
 tola, totola 1. V. i., to carry, ha'alola. tola 
 Iii'f, to be heavy laden; tola siwe, to 
 kill and earn the blood-money; tola 
 mauri, with poss. 3, to carry captive; tola 
 ha'ileku, to carry in one piece; sidi tolai 
 hie, shoulder-blade; ka tola dliho'i ana, 
 to recover. 2. tola krni, to marry; tola 
 keninge, marriage; tola rue, tola 'olu, 
 to have two. three, wives. 3. to be in 
 the doing, in the making, being carried 
 out. 4. to obey, to give attention to; 
 used with poss. 3. tolai suli, to obey; 
 
 tola (continued). 
 
 tolai suli wala, to obey orders; lolola i 'ae, 
 to follow a master; tola koni, to receive; 
 tolai sulie ynanatana, according to his 
 nature. 5. to affect adverseh-; nunu e 
 tola, there was a famine; hi'olonga e tola, 
 there was a famine; e tola 'aela aku, it 
 was bad for me. 6. to set (of a current) ; 
 'ahe kosi tola, there is a strong current. 
 
 7. to act; tola mala pu'o, to behave like 
 a heathen; tola hti'o, to lay a snare; tola 
 lilisi, to walk about; tola lahani, to 
 proclaim; tola ahonga, with poss. 3, to 
 tempt; totola 'ohi, to search for; tola 
 suu'i, to importune; kire tola rorora 
 ana tahinge, they fled away precipitately. 
 
 8. tola 'akalo, to exorcise spirits; tola 
 ha'area. U., to send out an odor on all 
 sides; e tola liiiliu, it has become general. 
 
 9. to curdle (of coconut milk oni). 
 tolanga v. n., a burden, a carrying; tolanga 
 
 e poponga, a load hard to carry. 
 tolala-(ku) gerund., carrying. Wango tora. 
 
 tolaa'i V. tr., to entreat, to importune, to vex. 
 tola. 
 
 tolaha (ku) v. n., custom, way, manner, 
 example, kind, disposition; tolaha ni 
 tohala'inge, exultation. 
 
 tolaka a banana with the fruit bunch growing 
 erect, a plantain; httdi tolaka, a plan- 
 tain. 
 
 tolana S., tolani U., tolana'i, tolangani U., 
 adv., immediately, forthwith; precedes 
 verb. Wango tora. 
 
 tole, totole V. tr., to fetch, to carry, to bring, 
 with directives indi and wau; to affect, 
 to be the matter with; kire mwa'e tolea, 
 they consented to carry it; hi'olonga e 
 tolea hdniie, famine was over the land; 
 tole soinge, to raise a cry; tole mango, to 
 hold the breath. San Cristoval tore. 
 
 toli, to'itoli S., totoli U. 1. v. i., to sink, to go 
 to the bottom, hd'itoli. 2. to fish 
 with lines in deep sea; hinou ni toli, a 
 hook for deei>-sea fishing; i'e ni toli, 
 deep-water fish; lai toli, to be going to 
 fish out at sea. 3. to shed leaves; 
 'apalolo e toli, the banyan has shed its 
 leaves; toli sesu, to cast unripe fruit. 
 4. expresses downward motion; 5i7io 
 toli; lio toli mei, look down here; ooho 
 ioli, to fall headlong; qd'it toli, to be 
 going north or west. 5. to lay a snare; 
 toli hune, to set a snare; toli loosi, toli 
 loosinge, a charm set in the path; toli 
 sehu, a death charm prepared with lime 
 and set in the path; toli uraa'inge, to 
 otTer sacrifice; toli puri, used with poss. 
 3, to leave, to turn the back on; toli 
 'iola, with ana or », to steer for, to lay 
 a canoe on a course; toli reoreo, to inlay 
 with nautilus shell. 6. of enduring 
 state; i'o toli, to be quiescent; to'i 
 susule'i, to endure; toli maai, to allow; 
 ddu toli huni, ddu toli muaani, to be 
 subject to, to submit to; loli to'o, 
 to be patient; toli rako, patient; toli
 
 TOLI 
 
 1 06 
 
 toll (continued). 
 
 rakonga, patience; toH rohit, to cease 
 speaking; mango loli, to faint; toll ereere, 
 to cease speaking; ynoidoli, to cease. 
 7. ere toll, to revile. 8. to refrain from 
 certain foods in mourning; toll ola, toli 
 uhi, toli ngeulaa. 9. the bass drum in 
 Para ni 'o'o. 10. toli 'epu, to fast, to 
 observe a tabu; hanua e toli 'epu 
 isulira'elii, the village was fasting on 
 their account. 
 
 toliaa V. i., to leave off, to cease, to desist. 
 
 toli'asi V. tr., to yield, to renounce, to remit, 
 to grant, toli'asilatia, gerund. 
 
 tolimaa S., a mark, sign, proof. 
 
 tolinge (ku) a portion, a share (of food at a 
 feast); qd'ti ni tolinge, the chief portion 
 of food. 
 
 tolingi 1. v. tr., to assign a portion of food to 
 a person at a feast. 2. to permit, to 
 grant. 3. hele tolingi, to hold in sub- 
 jection. 4. to inlay with shell. 
 
 tolo (na) 1. a hill; the hiil country, mu toloi 
 henue, the hill folk; 'ure ta'i lolona hdnue, 
 from out of the hills; i Tolona Hdnue, 
 a district of Little Malaita; mit Tolona 
 Hdnue, the people of that district. 
 
 2. i Tolo, in strangers' country. Big 
 Malaita; mu Tolo, people of Su'u Rodo 
 or of Big Malaita; ra'e ni Tolo, a spear 
 covered with plaiting of colored grass. 
 
 3. to be a bushman, to be ignorant, 
 uncouth, nou tolo, nou tolona hanue. 
 
 4. the languages of Big Malaita, e mala 
 Tolo. Wango toro, hill; Maori loro- 
 puki, mound; Viti koro, heap of sand; 
 Mailu oro, hill; New Guinea lolo, lola, 
 kola; Florida tolo, to rise up. cf. totolo. 
 
 tolo 5. 'u'u tolo, a piece of bread. 
 
 Tolosi a district of Little Malaita above Mara 
 
 Masiki Channel, 
 tomwa, tomwatomwa v. i., to walk on tiptoe, 
 
 to limp. 
 tomwaso a shrub with large leaves which grows 
 
 in clearing; huui tomwaso, a thicket of 
 
 the shrub, 
 tone, totono U., v. i., to drink, to drown. 
 
 ha'atonohi, konokono. tono qaaqi'a, the 
 
 water tastes brackish; tonohaana a 
 
 Kalitaalu, Kalitaalu's drinking-place at 
 
 Lenga, Ulawa. 
 tononga v. n. 
 
 tonohl tr., to drink anything. 
 tonola-(ku) gerund. 
 tongo 1. v. i., to begin to rise, to turn (of tide); 
 
 e tongo 'oto, the tide has turned; 'esi kele 
 
 tongo, the tide is rising a little. 2. take 
 
 tongo, U., to sip. 
 tongolili V. i., to straggle, to be long drawn out, 
 
 one after another, irregular. Mota HI, 
 
 astray, fall away from. 
 too, tootoo 1. to be shallow (of the sea); mu 
 
 le'u e tootoo, shallows, shoals. 
 to'o, to'oto'o 2. to hit, to encounter, to succeed, 
 
 to have, to be rich, to heal up. ha'ato'o. 
 
 dau to'o, with poss. 3, to hit; sae to'o, 
 
 with poss. 3, to desire, to wish to have; 
 
 to'o 2 (continued). 
 
 to'o eleelena, its tip, the top; to'okaa, mu 
 to'ohaa, money; to'o hu'e, to have a 
 wife; to'o hu'anga, marriage (of a man); 
 e ka'a to'o kaona, bottomless; to'o 
 mango, to have breath; to'o ola, to'o 
 olanga, to have possessions, prosperity; 
 to'o poro, to have a husband; to'o 
 poronga, marriage (of a woman); to'o 
 qd'u, to carry on the head; to'o sape, to 
 have the shape, the appearance of; 
 e to'o talaku, room for me; kire to'oana 
 keni mwala ko holie, they own the girl 
 who is being bought. 3. to be, to be 
 fixed, to set (of colors in dyeing); i'o 
 to'o, to be fixed; i'o konilo'o, to remain, 
 to rest assured; e to'o mou, e to'o mou- 
 tana, to cease, to be broken off; toli 
 to'o, to be patient; ere to'o, to be correct 
 in statement; 'o ere to'o, verily; to'o 
 lelengana, not aroused from sleep; lio 
 to'o, to find; lio sae to'o, to favor; e to'o 
 i saena, it came into his mind; qongiku 
 e to'o mone 'oto, my time has come; 
 to'o ma'ume'utana, terrifying; to'o 
 nunii'e, spotted, speckled; to'o pulo- 
 pulo, specked. 4. to be related to; 
 vielu to'o ada, they are our relations. 
 5. to'o hili, with poss. 2, to'o hili nada, 
 they alone apart from others. San 
 Cristoval too. 
 to'ohi tr., to desire, to be set upon (of the 
 mind); saekii e to'ohie, my heart is set 
 upon it. 
 to'o 6. prefixed to numerals, at a time; to'o 
 ta'e ini, one at a time, singly; to'o ta'e 
 ola, objects singly; to'o ro ola, objects 
 by twos; to'o ro nime, with just one's 
 two hands, unarmed; to'o ta'e maholo, 
 sometimes; to'o 'enile 'oto, how many 
 altogether? Mota sogo, Samoa to'a. 
 to'o 7. 1,000 (of fish teeth), lo'oani i'e. Lau 
 
 too, 1,000. 
 to'o 8. to desire, sareto'o. 
 to'oa'i 1. V. i., to be desirous; sae to'oa'i ola, 
 avarice. 
 to'oa'ila-(ku) gerund., sae to'oa'ilana, 
 coveting. 
 to'oa'i 2. hd'u to'oa'i he'iliu, wandering stars, 
 
 planets. 
 to'ohaa money, whether shell or teeth of dogs 
 or porpoises, mu to'ohaa. 'olisi to'ohaa, 
 to exchange money for goods, to buy. 
 to'oha'i to'oha'i qe'u ana, to be entangled in, 
 
 to be mixed up in. 
 toohe'o small hooks of shell iroa) used without 
 bait for catching sardines {asaunge); 
 the fishing is conducted from a stage 
 built out in the water (Jiaa) ; kala toohe'o, 
 to cut the hooks. 
 toohi men's club-house in the village; the 
 unmarried men sleep and eat there, 
 strangers are entertained in it and the 
 married men foregather there, cf. 
 para'ita. 
 to'ohi'uhi'ula'a adj., spotted, variegated in 
 color.
 
 I07 
 
 TOTONGA 
 
 o'ohuu 1. V. i., to be true, real; mti ola 'olo 
 
 to'ohuu, real true things; e to'ohuu 'oto, 
 
 it is a fact. 2. S., exclamation, truly. 
 
 to'ohuunge (ku) S., n., being true; lo'ohuu- 
 
 ngemu, your very self; to'ohunftgana 
 
 me'i ola, the real thing. 
 
 to'ohuunge'i S. 1. adv., e.xpresses certainty, 
 
 precedes the verb, nou to'ohuunge'i 
 
 lae, I surely went; nou ka'a to'ohuunge'i 
 
 leesie, I surely did not see it. 2. adj., 
 
 real, to'ohuunge'i lemi, full moon; 
 
 to'ohuunge'i oku, third day after full 
 
 moon; to'ohuunge'i salana, his real name. 
 
 to'ola-(ku), to'oto'ola-(ku) n., property; 
 
 to'olamu no'one ada, thine they are; 
 
 to'olana 'oto, his property; meaka'elu 
 
 to'ola ka'elu, our tongues are our own; 
 
 noko koni'o ana lo'olaku, I endow thee 
 
 with my property; huni ngolie lo'oto- 
 
 'olana.to destroy his property after death. 
 
 to'oliu U., V. i., to exceed, exceedingly. 
 
 to'olupu U., with poss. 3, to hit, to come into 
 
 contact with. lupu. 
 to'oma'i v. i., to gaze at, to stare. 
 
 to'oma'ila-(ku) gerund, 
 to'oni 1. to clothe, to put on, to wear; to'oni 
 haahi sape, to clothe the body; to'o7ii 
 ana mu to'oni, to clothe with clothes. 
 2. to pack, to stow. 3. n., clothes, 
 vestiture. hideli to'oni, to wash clothes 
 by pounding; mu lehu ni to'oni, worn- 
 out clothes, rags; to'oni pono maa, 
 patched clothes; to'oni 'o'omae, mourn- 
 ing clothes; roro to'oni, a clothes belt; 
 tduri to'oni, to sew clothes, tduri 
 to'oninge, v. n. Mota sogon, Fagani 
 togoni, Florida hogoni. 
 to'oni 4. V. i., to plant taro, to'oni hui. 
 to'onunu'e adj.. spotted, speckled, 
 toonga U., n., mark, seal, tabu mark, 
 to'onga'i to'onga'i onto, to draw an arrow on a 
 
 bow. 
 to'onga'ini v. tr., to dip, to insert, 
 to'ongi v. tr., to dip, to dye. 
 to'oqa'u with poss. 3. to carry on the head. 
 to'ora-(na, ni) U., laa e to'orana, a rich man. 
 
 to'ola. 
 to'ora'ini U., v. tr., to appease, 
 toorao S., toowao U., a pigeon with crest and 
 long tail (Turacaena crassirostris) which 
 cries in the morning and the evening, 
 to'orodo U., blue, black, dark in color, redo. 
 to'osu'a U., with poss. 3, to stumble, to be 
 
 offended, ha'alo'osu'a. 
 to'ota'e one at a time; to'oia'e ola, one thing 
 
 here and there, 
 to'ote'e S., to be careful, anxious; ne'isae 
 
 to'ote'e, to be worried, 
 tootoo 1. a small shell hook used for whiffing 
 
 sardines. 
 to'oto'o 2. v. i., to be rich, to'o 2. 
 to'oto'oa'i S., mu to'olo'oa'i wala, real words, 
 
 fit and proper words. 
 topa 1. n., a bird arrow made from the midrib 
 of the sago-palm leaf. cf. tdri sa'o. 
 topa 2. v. tr., to cut into slices; topa uhi, to 
 slice yams for planting. 
 
 topo v. tr., to appoint, to assign; e topoa 
 
 hd'idinge, to appoint a day. 
 topo'i U., v. i., to omit, to fail to do; e topo'i 
 
 'unua, to fail to say. 
 
 torangi v. tr., to urge on, to incite, hd'itorangi. 
 
 toretore U., ha'atoretore maa, to act stealthily. 
 
 tori 1. v. i., to cut the end off, to earmark pigs; 
 
 to circumcise (late use) ; tori poo, to 
 
 earmark pigs; poo tori, an earmarked 
 
 pig. Maori tori. 
 
 tori 2. n., a stick with which to carry burdens, 
 
 a yoke; tori ineu e hala, my yoke is easy. 
 
 tori 3. V. tr., to wear over the left shoulder as 
 
 a bandolier. 
 toro 1. n., the daughter of a chief; tore i'emelu, 
 our chief's daughter; keni toro, the lady. 
 tore 2. V. tr., to exalt, cf. tolo. 
 
 torola-(ku) gerund. 
 toro 3. V. i., to thrust; toro wawa, to shoot out 
 
 the lips. Maori toro. 
 toro, totoro 4. to transfix with a spear. 
 toromi tr. 
 
 toromila-(ku) gerund. 
 Toro 'a the hill at the head of the river Walo'a'a. 
 Torokou the village on the hill above Sa'a. 
 torokou'e, totorokou'e n., a hill, eminence, kott. 
 toteu V. i., to cackle (of fowls). 
 toto 1. V. tr., to pay a fine, to pay a fine to a 
 husband's relatives when his wife leaves 
 him; hu'ena kire totoa, they paid the 
 fine for the woman; tolo epa hdnue, a 
 sacrifice on behalf of a sick person. 
 M. A., p. 137. toto 'akalo, to exorcise 
 a ghost; toto dhu'i, to pay a fine on 
 behalf of; yii'i tolo, to make a free gift; 
 hele toto, to get for nothing, 
 totonga V. n., a fine, a ransom. Niue totongi. 
 toto 2. V. i., to be lacking; nga me'i ola e toto 
 
 'amiu, lacked ye anything? 
 toto 3. to dry up, to soak into; mu wei e toto 
 mango 'oto, the water has dried right 
 up; toto oaoa, to permeate; toto aropu, 
 S., to sip. Motu dodo, to subside; 
 Viti toto, to saturate. 
 toto 4. V. i., fitting, proper; maholo e toto, the 
 
 proper time, 
 toto 5. maa toto, to expect, to await. 
 
 totori U., tr., maa totori, to await, ha'ilotori. 
 totorila-(ku) gerund. Wango totori. 
 toto 6. prefix of condition, tototala, totoweru'e. 
 toto'ala adj., resinous, glutinous. Polynesian 
 
 toto, blood, 
 toto'atala S., adv., in vain, tala 2. 
 totohi 1. to sink into, be absorbed in, of liquids. 
 toto 3. 2. U., tr., to sip. cf. toto aropu. 
 totohoa n., noise, sound. 
 
 totola specific numeral, 400, of dogs' teeth; 
 totola ni 'usu, 400 dogs' teeth; totola 
 mwana hai, 440 dogs' teeth, 
 totolo V. i., to cry aloud. 
 
 totolonga'ini tr., to cry to a person, 
 totolonga'i tr. Wango totoro. 
 totoniho n., a tree, its yellow berries are eaten 
 
 by pigeons, 
 totonga (na, ni) 1. n., resin, sap, glue, toto'ala, 
 
 Polynesian toto, blood, 
 totonga 2. a fine, ransom, toto 1.
 
 TOTONGA'ALA 
 
 I08 
 
 totonga'ala adj., resinous, gummy, loto'ala. 
 
 totongisu 1. V. i., to water at the mouth, ngisu. 
 2. U., to sip. 
 
 totongo V. i., to smart; saeku e lolongo, I have 
 heartburn. 
 
 totopulu n., the black ground-lizard (Nanno- 
 scincus fuscus). pulii 1. 
 
 totoqini U., v. i., to soak into, to soak up. qini. 
 
 totori L'., V. tr., to expect, to await, cf. tolo 5. 
 
 totoro 1. a fish spear, a goad. 2. the crest, the 
 comb, wattles, of birds, toro 2. 
 
 tototala adv., in vain, to no purpose, toto- 
 'atalai S. 
 
 totowa'e wasted, lost, toto 6. 
 totowa'enga n., waste, futility. 
 
 totoweru'e holaa totowerii'e, flat calm. 
 
 tou 1. n.. a bird, the bittern. 
 
 Tou 2. the name of a ghost at Sa'a, "the 
 pecker"; a piece of wood carved in 
 the likeness of the head and neck of 
 a bittern; it is reputed to have the 
 power of causing death; it is never 
 carelessly pointed at any one, but car- 
 ried over the shoulder with the beak 
 to the rear; when laid down the head 
 is faced away. 
 
 to'u ?>. V. i., to be lame, to be crippled in the 
 feet, unable to bend the limbs. 
 
 to'u 4. qa'uto'u, to bow the head; rahiio'u, 
 downcast; 'uruto'u. to bend the knee. 
 
 to'u 5. i to'ulana 'dsi, on the surface of the sea. 
 
 toutou n., the prow of a canoe, tied with cane 
 to the hull; qiili toutou, canoe-shaped 
 drawings cut on la'o. 
 
 ua U. cf. ue. 
 
 ualapoa U., v. i., to crack with a loud noise. 
 
 udi, udiudi v. i., to be rotting, wasting; iidiiidi 
 'asi'a, rotting away. 
 
 udi S., specific numeral, 100,000, of coconuts, 
 udi ni niu. 
 
 •udu, 'udu'udu to drip, ha'a'uduhi. 
 
 'udu'uduhe v. n., a drop, drippings; 
 ' udu' uduha ana, droppings from. Flor- 
 ida ludu, Borneo tudo. 
 
 ue S., ua U. 1. adv., yet, as yet, still, to spare. 
 ha'ike ue, not yet; e lae ue, not returned 
 yet; e ro 'ata ini ue, as yet only two; 
 kire ue, some left; e niou ue ena, still in 
 desuetude; wdi e lama haahi ue kolune 
 mwakano, water still covered the face 
 of the earth; mangona ue ana, he is still 
 alive; ngeitei ue ena, that's just it; 
 Florida tua, already, again, in addition; 
 Mota tuai; possibly pronounced ue and 
 not 'ue to distinguish it from 'ue 4. 
 cf. hau 1. 
 
 ue S., ua U. 2. of price in bargaining; ue ta'a. 
 for how much? uaana nga taa, for what? 
 ue holi, for sale. 
 
 ue S., ua U. 3. rattan cane; 'atoni ue, to dye 
 strips of cane; hikei ue, a roll of cane, 
 dyed red for plaiting into bracelets; 
 hinui ue, the bark of cane, dyed red; 
 ho'i ue, to roll dyed cane into bundles. 
 
 'ue S., 'ua U. 4. how, why; used with 'e 4. 
 'e 'ue, how; 'e 'ue 'olona, how is it; molu 
 'uara. what did you do to them; mwane 
 'e 'ue, why not; 'e 'ua ata, exclamation of 
 disapproval; ke 'ue 'oto, how shall it be 
 done; muni 'ua, why, what for; nge ke 
 'ue kd'u ne, how shall it be. 
 
 'ue S., 'ua U. 5. of course; ana ngaini ka'a 
 ha'ara'i 'emelu 'e 'ue, why, because no 
 one has summoned us; ta'ata'a me'iolana 
 'e 'ue, why, it's just that very thing; nge 
 itei 'ue ena, that's just it. Lau ula, 
 Florida giia, Wango iiai Efate gua, how. 
 
 'u'e S., kuka U. 6. the mud crab 
 
 uhi 1. me'i uhi, S., houhi, U., a yam (Dioscorea 
 sp.) ; muuhi, ynwauhi, plural, coalescent 
 vowels; uhi ni kalona, upland yams, 
 of good quality; uhi leoleo, a variety 
 of yam; tihi nialeu, April; uhi mwaka, 
 January, lit., yams unripe; uhi opuopu, 
 U., February, lit., yams rounded in 
 shape; uhi ni qe'u, yams from near the 
 beach, inferior in quality; kara uhi, to 
 grate yams; molai uhi, 10,000 yams; 
 mwadi ni uhi. the mother yam; nga 
 nao ni uhi, 100 yams; nini uhi, a yam; 
 olopa'i, U., a yam with fruit on the 
 vine; e'a sikihia qd'una uhi, she takes 
 off the heads of yams; sinaa uhi, to 
 clean the rootlets off yams newly dug; 
 sinolai uhi, 100 yams; sulaa mu uhi, to 
 roast yams; susuhaa'i, to plant a yam 
 garden; Idkume, a yam with fruit on 
 the vine; topa uhi, to slice yams for 
 planting; walona mu uhi, yam vines. 
 Florida uvi, Niue ufi, Mao. uhi. 
 
 uhi 2. warts on the hands. 
 
 'uhi, 'uhi'uhi 3. v. tr., to blow with the mouth, 
 to shoot with a gun, to buzz; mu 
 matawa 'uhi'uhi, white men: lit., men 
 of the sea who blow with their mouths, 
 owing to the idea that guns were blown 
 in order to discharge them, 
 'uhinge v. n. 
 'uhila-(ku) gerund. 
 
 'uhile'ini tr., to breathe on. Wango uhi, 
 Viti uvu, Mota pupus, vuv; Maori puhi, 
 Maisin vuvu. 
 
 uhu (ku) S., ihuU. 1. haiT;uhu mae, awig; uhune 
 e lai mere, his hair is white. Motu hut. 
 
 uhu 2. to husk coconuts, 
 uhu'i tr. 
 
 Uhu 3. the cape on Big Malaita northwest of 
 Pwaulimwaa, ngorangora i Uhu, the 
 lagoon shoreward is also called Uhu. 
 
 'u'i, 'u'i'u'i V. tr., to throw (of a spear, a 
 stone, etc.). 
 'u'inge V. n. 
 
 'u'ile'ini tr., mala e 'u'ile'inie nga hoi heu, 
 about a stone's throw. Florida tupi, 
 Mota vivir. 
 
 Uki Ugi, an island off the east coast of San 
 Cristoval. 
 
 uku n., a row, a laj^er; ukui heu, a layer of 
 stones; uku ni ta'alaha, a channel in 
 the reef, a chasm; uku ni ta'alala, a 
 row, a line. Wango uku, a generation.
 
 109 
 
 'UPDTANA 
 
 'uku 2. ha'a'uku, to lower, to lot d(j\vn. 
 
 ulao harlot, keni ulao. 'aheulao, heidao, 
 
 ha'atilao. kale ni ulao, bastard. 
 ulapo U., V. i., used with poss. 3; to be ignorant 
 
 of. 
 Ulawa i sapena i Ulawa e rara, apostrophe 
 
 addressed to Ulawa. ha'addhi. 
 'ule-(ku) U., n., brother, sister. Florida kula. 
 'ulehu a fish (Olij^oriis gigas). 
 uleule S., ulaula U.. n., sinew, tendon, vein; 
 uleuleni 'ei, U.. twigs. Maori uaua, 
 sinew. 
 uli 1. n., a tret" (Spondias dulcis); hou uli, its 
 
 fruit. Mota us, ur; Oceanic uri. 
 uli 2. U., koukou ni uli, ankle; poupoii ni uli, 
 
 heel. 
 uli 3. V. tr., to rub, to massage; ulie sapena ani 
 hen, to apply hot stones to the body as 
 a foment. 
 uli 4. uli 'ei, a wooden mortar for braying yams, 
 
 etc. 
 ulo, uloulo 1. to lament; ngara uloulo, to weep 
 bitterly; noko pu'ota'i ulo 'oto, I forgot 
 to cry; noko lapata'i ulo 'oto, I complain 
 with lamentation, 
 uloulonga v. n. 
 
 ulola-(ku) gerund., ulolada mdilale, the cry 
 of the poor, 
 ulo 2. V. tr.. to wrap up, to make a parcel of. 
 uloulo'ite (na) v. n., a wrapper, cover, husk, 
 chaff. 
 *ulu 1. to be blind, ha'a'ulu: a 'ulu, the blind 
 man; saai 'ulu, to recite by heart; hunie 
 esi hute 'ulu 'ie, that he should be born 
 blind thus; kakalo 'ulu'ulu, to grope 
 blindly with the hands; 'ulu susuhono, 
 stone blind. 
 'ulu 2. V. tr., to close the eyes; 'okc 'ulue maamu, 
 you close your eyes; 'ulu mu-aani, 'ulu 
 haahi, to overlook. Wango kuru. 
 ulu 3. V. tr., to carry in the arms. 
 ulu 4. V. tr., to wade; ulu holo, to wade across; 
 ulu la'a. to emerge, 
 'uluhe'ini tr., to wade and carry a person 
 across the water. Wango uru. 
 uluone a sandy tract above the beach, 
 ulunge 1. V. tr., to serve as a pillow; ulungaa 
 qd'u, to pillow the head; 'dsi ko ulunt-aa 
 hdnue, the sea under the earth; helc 
 ulunge, to uplift; ewe e ulungaa mduri- 
 haaku, the floods have covered my soul. 
 2. a pillow, 
 ulunge'ini tr., to serve as a pillow. Mota 
 ulunga. 
 ulunge'ini tr., to sell; ko ulunge'inie lo'olo'olana, 
 he .=;old his goods. 
 ulunge'i v. i. 
 'ulu'tilu 1. a full-grown coconut, hoi 'ulu'ulu, mu 
 
 'ulu'ulu. kuru. 
 'ulu'ulu 2. U., 'ulu'ulu ni 'ei, twigs, leaves, 
 
 branches. 
 uluulu'a U., adj., leafy. 
 uma U-. incisor teeth. 
 
 umu 1. U., native oven; a fire is made inside a 
 ring of stones level with floor of house. 
 Mota Mm, Motu amu. 
 umu 2. to gather; umu i 'ae, to gather round 
 the feet of. 
 
 umu 3. V. i., to weed, 
 umu 4. umu kuru, to mutter, 
 unehi (na) n., the scales of fish; v., to scale a 
 fish. The final hi was probably a 
 verbal suflix originally. Motu una, 
 unahi; Gilbert Islands ina; Samoa una, 
 unafi; Maori unahi. 
 'unu, 'unu'unu 1. v. tr., to say, to bid, to tell, 
 to assign, to suppose, to reckon, noii 
 'unue uri, I thought that; nau 'unua 
 uri tnuni ne'e mae 'olo, I thought I was 
 done for; nou hola'i 'unue, I first said 
 it; 'olo kire kosi 'unue, thereupon they 
 said it; topo'i 'unu, to neglect to say; 
 'umi lalaunge'i, to tell beforehand; 
 'unu lelengana, to speak clearly; 'unu 
 lete, to afiirm; a mama'a e 'uni e, father 
 said so; 'uyiu mengini, to tell even,-thing 
 out; muni ne'e loosia, ta'anc na'a 'unua, 
 if I see him I shall tell it; ana muni 
 kir'e 'unua, if they say it; e 'unu orela 
 ana mu wala, he spoke and finished 
 his words; 'unu ta'alara, to relate in 
 order; 'unu la'alaha, to pronounce 
 aloud; 'unu lahanie saemu, lay bare 
 vour mind; 'unu tatalau ana, to re- 
 hearse in order; 'unu latara, tradition; 
 'unu talarau, gossip. 
 'unula-(ku) gerund. Wango unu. 
 unu 2. n., the fibrous spathe of a coconut 
 frond used (sasali, U.) for straining 
 milk (oni) from grated coconut. Samoa 
 unu, to strain. 
 unu 3. sale unu, to overlap; dere unu, U., to 
 get in between; dere unu ana para, 
 between the pickets of the fence; 'ui 
 dere unu, to pierce with a blow; laha- 
 unutara, through from one side to the 
 other, 
 unume'i partic, frequently, experienced; hele 
 tinume'i ana, to do a thing in a masterly 
 fashion; sapcsdlu unume'i, to suffer 
 many things. 
 u'o 1. n., the green lizard. 
 u'o 2. n., fishing-float for flying-fish. Mota 
 
 ulo, Maori pouto. M. A., p. 317. 
 upe U.. n., a hole in a tree where water lodges 
 
 in the rains, 
 upeta U., ipata S., a wallowing-place for swine. 
 
 upcta ni poo. 
 'upu, 'upu'upu 1. to swell; ngora 'upu, Ida 
 ngora 'upu muni, to hate; ngidu 'upu, 
 to hate; qeru 'upu, lio qeru 'upu. to 
 grudge, to hate. 2. the center, middle. 
 take 'upu'upu, to be half way over in a 
 journey; 'upui lue, high tide; i'upu'upui 
 dango, among the trees; i 'upuderu'e. 
 midway between the two; maraau i 
 'upu'upu, the east wind. Maori tupu, 
 to grow; Viti tumbu.to swell; Motu tubu, 
 to swell; Mota tou, to grow. 
 'upu'e adj., used as n.; a swelling, a boil. 
 
 qdlusu 'upu'e, a wood-pigeon, 
 'upuni adv., some time ago, long ago; precedes 
 the verb, melu 'upunilae, we went long ago. 
 'uputana with locative i; i 'upulana hdnue, in 
 the center of the land.
 
 UQE 
 
 IIO 
 
 uqe, uqeuqe v. i., to complain, to have ill 
 feeling toward; ere uqe, to talk enviously; 
 ere uqanga, malicious talk. 
 uqanga v. n., envy, 
 uqesi tr. hd'iuqeuqeni. Wango uqa. 
 
 ura U., 1. crayfish, prawn, ore 3. Mota ura, 
 Maori koiira. 
 
 ura U., 2. ura maasilima, the second day of 
 the moon. 
 
 uraa'i S., v. i., to make an offering to 'akalo or 
 li'oa; uraa'i ola, uraa'i olanga, making 
 offerings; uraa'i saana mu 'akalo. 
 uraa'inge v. n., an offering, a sacrifice; 
 toll uraa'inge, to offer sacrifice. San 
 Cristoval urai. 
 
 urate uratei ola, a piece, a crumb. 
 
 'ure S., 'lira U., 'ure'ure 1. v. i., to stand up. 
 ha'a'ure. 'ure honosi, to oppose; e 
 'ure'ure ko rarangi, he stood warming 
 himself; ko 'ure para'ilana walumalau, 
 defends the earth; 'ure sun'i, to attend 
 on, to serve. Mota tiir, Viti tu, tura. 
 
 'lire 2. used of motion from and equivalent 
 to place whence, 'urei Sa'a, from 
 Sa'a; 'urei tei, where from, whence; 
 melu 'uraana, we are his offspring; 
 'otnti ka'a 'ure ike ana pulitaa ineu, ye 
 are not of my flock; 'oto 'ure mai, up 
 till now, henceforth; nou 'ure ani 'eta 
 hdnue, I am a stranger; 'ure tohune, to 
 desire; 'ure ta'i lolona hdnue, from out 
 of the hills; 'ure 'oto mdi i 'aehotalana, 
 from the beginning up till now; 'oko 
 lae mdi 'ure itei, where are you from, 
 whence come you; nou 'ure mdi i ola, 
 I am from such-and-such a place; 
 mwala 'urei tei ni 'ie, from whence are 
 these people. 
 
 *ure 3. mwimwidi 'ure, S., mudimudi 'ura, 
 U., to drip. 
 
 *ure 4. to come into leaf; mu 'ure'urei dango, 
 shootsof a tree; 'ure'urena, its top shoots. 
 
 Urehi S., a local spirit. M. A., p. 124. 
 
 'ureipesi first fruits, betrothal money. 
 
 •urenga'ini v. tr., to accompany a person on 
 a journey, to set him on his way. 
 ha'a'ureytga'ini. 
 
 'ureruru S., to be in accord, concord, ha'a'ure- 
 ruru. 
 
 uretohu (na) S., nou sa'a urelohune nga ola, I 
 shall not desire anything. 
 
 'uri, 'uri'uri 1. v. tr., to tread on, to pace, to 
 measure, to stamp on; 'urie maonga, 
 to tread the dance, 
 'uri'urite v. n., a pace, a foothold. 
 'urila-(ku) gerund. Florida turi. 
 
 uri 2. adv., thus; used also of reported speech; 
 na, ni, are added, e te uritaa, uri 'oke 
 lae, what did he say? that you were to 
 go? 7ia uri, I mean, that is; nau 'unua 
 uri muni ne'e ntae 'oto, I thought I was 
 done for; uri qd'une nge mwane, I mean 
 that the male is the head; uri ana, if, 
 that is (in explanation); paro uri, over 
 there; wa uri, of an objection advanced; 
 na'o uri, to go on this course; uri mala, 
 as if. 
 
 uri 3. ha'auri, v. tr., to save, to make alive. 
 mduri. 
 
 uriha-(mu, na, da) like, as if; urihana, like 
 him, just his way; e urihana nga one, 
 like the sands; urihada, their style. 
 
 urine S., urina U., urini U., adv., thus, ha'a- 
 urine, ha'aurini. ko urine, that being 
 so; ko urine ta'ane na, even supposing 
 it were so; ke su'uri urine, God forbid. 
 
 urinena S., adv., therefore, thus, on that 
 account; isulie e urinena, wherefore. 
 
 uritaa S., uritaha U., interrog. adv., how, what 
 sort of. e te uritaa, what said he; He 
 uritaha, what one; e lae uritaa, how 
 did it go? 
 
 urou S., a wood-pigeon with large wattles 
 (Carpophaga rufigula). qdlusu 'upu'e. 
 
 'uru 1. V. i., to collect, to wipe, 'uru sane, to 
 gather ants as burly for sea-breara; 
 'uru'uru mwado, an anklet of shell 
 money, etc., strung on a cord, lit., 
 collect dirt; 'uru'uru pote, to clear the 
 head of lice; 'uru qango, to wipe off 
 mucus, to clear the nose; a Poro 'uru 
 matawa, the man who tours the sea, 
 a legendary ghost said to moke ana 
 piisu 'esi, catch whales in a hand net. 
 Mota surung, Mao. muru. 
 
 uru 2. qd'uni uru, U., a phase of the moon. 
 
 uru 3. white fleecy clouds; evening clouds 
 painted in wavy lines on the prow of a 
 canoe. 
 
 'uru 4. 'uru'uru (ku), knee. 
 
 'uruto'u to stoop, to bend the knee, to kneel. 
 San Cristoval ruru, Viti duru, Florida 
 tuluru, Samoa tuli. 
 
 'uru'uru tete 'uru'uru, to spill, to dribble out, 
 as lime from a gourd. Fagani tete, 
 Mota sur-mata, tear; Tonga, tulu; Borneo 
 turu, to drip; sulu, liquid. 
 
 use, useuse v. i., to plait, to weave; use qaso, to 
 plait armlets of dyed cane; use sa'o, 
 to stitch sago leaves on a reed for 
 thatch. 
 useli tr., uselie moke, to make a hand net. 
 uselie 'ae, to plait an anklet of dyed 
 cane {ue) on the leg. 
 
 usi, usiusi v. tr., to barter, to hold a market. 
 usinge v. n., bartering, marketing; herai 
 
 usinge, market-place. 
 usi'e adj., used as n., hera i usi'e, market- 
 place. 
 
 usu, usuusu 1. v. tr., to push, tapausu, 
 usutaha. molu usu, push; usu 'asi 
 mwakule ana, to reject him ignomin- 
 iously. 2. to write. 3. n., a writing, 
 a letter, mu usuusu; mu maai usuusu, 
 alphabetic characters. 
 usuusue'ini tr., to pole, to shove, to push, 
 
 to compel. 
 usue'ini tr., to send, to dispatch, 
 usunge'i v. i. usunge'i 'asi, to dispatch. 
 
 hd'iusunge'i. 
 usunge'inge v. n., a commandment, 
 
 ordinance, 
 usunge'ini tr., to send, dispatch. 
 usunge'iiiila-(ku) gerund.
 
 Ill 
 
 DWOLAINI 
 
 U8U 4. U., one; kd'u met nga usu, give me one; 
 
 usu indu, mine. 
 usu 5. S., usu 'ei, a firestick. 
 *U8U, 'usu'usu 6. V. i., to rub, to daub, to 
 scrape, to wipe, to grate; 'usu kara, 
 to grate yams; 'usu hui, to grate taro. 
 7. ag rater; 'usuri, tr., to wipe. VVango 
 usu, Lau usu, Florida guduri. 
 'usu, 'usu'usu 8. V. i., to point, to accuse; to 
 point at the rainbow brings bad luck. 
 'usu henue, the first finger; 'usu meuta'a, 
 to affirm; 'usu ilengine ngaini, to accuse 
 any one; 'usu rnaa (few), to accuse. 
 'usu'i tr., to point at; suisui, M. A., p. 192, 
 should be 'usu'usu'i. 
 'usu 9. n., a dog; 'usu qaqa, a slut; 'usu e kueu, 
 , the dog barked at me. Mota kurut, 
 Maori kiiri. 
 'usu 10. n., a dog tooth; the two teeth in the 
 upper jaw immediately behind the 
 canines are used as money. M. A., 
 p. 325. qd'ui 'usu, 4 dogs' teeth; 
 tolola ni 'usu, 400 dogs' teeth; piru ni 
 'usu, a necklace of dogs' teeth; e pirue 
 mu 'usu ineu, he made my dogs' teeth 
 into a necklace. 
 'usu 11. V. i., to fall down; in Sa'a not used of 
 persons, in which sense it is replaced 
 by domu. ha'a'usu, Ita'a'usuli. Florida 
 kulu. 
 'usu 12. U., to wipe off mucus, 'usu qango. uru. 
 
 Mota surung. 
 'usule adj., possessing dogs. 
 usuli^tr., to copy, to follow, to succeed to. 
 ha'ausidi. kira 'asi usuli one, they went 
 along the beach; e usulie 'amana, like 
 his father. San Cristoval, usuri, follow; 
 Malekula usiiri, to go along the coast; 
 Mota usur, to pass on. 
 usutaha U., to emerge. 
 
 usuusu S. 1. usuusu ana, because of, through, 
 owing to. 2. handiwork; usuusuana 
 nimeku, my handiwork; nsuusii ana 
 dhutana manatanga a God, all the powers 
 of the godhead. 
 utakora U., v. i., to burst. 
 ute 1. V. tr., to rub, to polish; malo ute, beads 
 
 rubbed down to size, 
 ute 2. ute pit, heavy rain. Lau uta, Viti udha, 
 
 Polynesian uha. 
 ute'i to gut fish, ro ute'i seu. M. A., p. 48. 
 
 ute'ini tr. 
 uto-(na) n., pith, core. Mota utoi; Maori uho, 
 heart of a tree; Motu udo, navel; vSamoa 
 uso, pith, heart of a tree, umbilical 
 cord. 
 'u'u S., kuku U. 1. to hang down, to depend; 
 siri 'ti'u, a lory that hangs upside 
 down. 
 'u'u (na) 2. a round object, a lump in pounded 
 food; 'u'u tolo, a piece of fish; 'u'ui one, 
 S., 'u'una one, U., a grain of sand; 'u'ui 
 he'll, S., 'u'u ni he'u, U., a star; 'u'ui 
 sehu, U., a lump in the lime of betel 
 chewing; 'u'ui rnaa, eyeball; ro 'u'u 
 maana siena a Ta'a Pea, his two eye- 
 balls to Ta'a Pea (an imprecation) ; 'u'u 
 
 u'u' (continued). 
 
 maai dehi, a pearl; 'u'u ni mae, heavy 
 rain. Florida ptigu ni pari, dust; 
 Maori puku, knob. 
 'u'u-(na) 3. real; 'u'une hdnue, the real land. 
 4. beginning, source, inge'i ni 'oto 
 'u'une, he is the source. Florida puku, 
 real. 
 'u'uhesi S., to stand firm. 
 'u'u'i-(na) n., tail of an animal. Viti mbui. 
 
 Maori liiku, Malo uine, Samoa i'u. 
 'u'ule n., a tree of hard wood. Florida gugula. 
 'u'ulou U., loulou S., to thunder, 
 'u'umwado U., dust. 
 
 uunu, uunuunu 1. v. tr.. to burn in the fire, 
 to roast on the embers; used with saa, 
 sie, to sacrifice, uunu hena, uunu keu, 
 uunu sdhu, to burn lime; ora ni uunu, 
 altar of burnt offering; uunu poo saana 
 mu 'akalo, offer burnt offerings of pigs 
 to the ghosts, tiunu rae. M. A., 
 p. 263, to cremate a corpse. Only one 
 case known, that of Taramaesipue 
 is the one mentioned, 
 uununge v. n., burnt sacrifice; uununge 
 
 siiu, whole burnt offering, 
 uunuhi tr. 
 
 uunuhila-(ku) gerund, 
 uunu 2. to raise cicatrices on the arms by 
 burning. Maori tunu, roast; Lamanak 
 (Borneo) tunu. 
 uunu 3. a large tree-lizard (Corucia zebrata). 
 uunuhi V. tr., to envy, to grudge, to vex, to 
 grieve; sae uunuhi, to bear a grudge, to 
 be spiteful to. 
 uunuhinge v. n., a grudge, sae uunuhinge. 
 'u'usi 1. v. tr., to detach the betel vine from 
 the stem of a tree by pulling it all down. 
 hu'usi. 2. V. i., to slip off, to become 
 detached, 
 uwatohuna U., air, atmosphere. 
 uwe S., uwa U. 1. v. tr., to lift up; uwaa qd'u, 
 lift up the head; uwe 'alinge, to give ear 
 to, to prick up the ears; uwe 'alenga, 
 to look up. 2. to brandish a spear; 
 uwa ma'e, U., a measure, a yard and 
 three-quarters, 
 uwe 3. to inclose (of a net), uwe haahi. kire 
 ko uwaa 'olo ta'eta'ena nga i'e, they 
 inclosed every kind of fish. 
 uwe 4. inve dalo, to clear the throat, 
 uwe 5. U., uwe raka, to break with a loud noise, 
 uwe 6. uweli osa cerumen, wax in the ear. 
 uweha a fishing-rod; qa'aqa'a uweha, U., a 
 
 phase of the moon, 
 uweli (ku) U., well S. 1. maternal uncle. 
 
 hd'iuweline, mauweline. 
 uweli 2. v. tr., to castrate. 
 uwerikahite tatters, rags, kakahiie. 
 uwesi to curse, hd'iuwesi. 
 uwo 1. a ridge of hills; melu susuli uwo, we kept 
 
 along the ridge. 
 uwo-(na) 2. pith. ulo. Xiue uho. 
 uwota V. i., to appear on the horizon; mu loloi 
 henue 'esi uwota, the hills appear on 
 the horizon. Mota wot a. 
 uwola'ini tr., to rear up on high, to uplift. 
 uwo 1.
 
 WA 
 
 112 
 
 W 
 
 wa adversative conjunction, or; used at the 
 
 end of sentence to express doubt or 
 
 ignorance; used with uri to denote an 
 
 objection raised; in correlation with the 
 
 negative particles ka'a and ka'a in the 
 
 sense of neither — nor. 'ohe ke'i lae 
 
 mdi wa, will he come do you think? 
 
 wa uri 'o 'unite, but you said; kire ka'a 
 
 manata'inie wa kire ke leesie, neitherknow 
 
 him nor have seen him; wa 'ohe, unless. 
 
 waa, waawaa 1. to be empty, hollow, to have 
 
 open doors, to have a hole in; lalona 
 
 e waawaa, nothing inside it, to be open 
 
 (of a door) , to be desolate (of a place) ; 
 
 qalusune e waawaa, his nostril is pierced. 
 
 wa'a 2. to be split, to be cut into sections; to 
 
 split, wa'a tihi, to cut up yams for 
 
 planting; 7nu wa'a, sections of yams for 
 
 planting. 
 
 wa'ali tr. 
 
 wa*alila-(na) gerund. San Cristoval 7vaa: 
 Maori mawawa cracked; Mota waka, 
 open, 
 wa'a 3. to be profaned. 
 wa'a 4. 'ahewa'a, to vanish, ha'awa'a. 
 wa'ahite v. i., to be cracked, to split (of 
 timber); n., a crack, 
 wa'ahiteli tr., to spUt, to divide. 
 wa'ahitelila-(ku) gerund. 
 waa'i, waawaa'i v. tr., to reward, to hire; 7vaa'i 
 'iola, to hire a canoe. 
 waa'ite (ku) n., reward. 
 wa'ali'e adj., to be daybreak; n., daybreak, 
 dawn; i wa'ali'e, at dawn. Wango 
 waaria. wa'a 2. 
 wa'alinga U., to give attention, to turn the 
 
 ear to. 'alinga. 
 wa'araa to appear (of a vision) ; a^toa e wa'araa 
 
 mdi, an apparition came into view, 
 wa'arao a very strong creeper used in lashing 
 
 canoe planks; wire nails. 
 wa'arara U. 1. to be timid, nervous. 
 wa'arara 2. to be cold, chilly (of weather). 
 wa'arau'a U., cold (of the body). 
 wa'ariri S., to flash (of lightning); n., lightning. 
 
 mangali'a. 
 waaro around, about, of position; kdri waaro, 
 to go a roundabout way; roro waaro, to 
 be diffused (of coloring matter in water) ; 
 maana e waaro, goggle-eyed. 
 waarowaaro 1. the moon. 2. a month. 3. a 
 biscuit, waarowaaro e ranga'a, the 
 moon is up; waarowaaro e qa'a 'olo, the 
 moon has risen; waaroivaaro e mdnu 
 'a a mdi ilengi, the moon floated clear in 
 the sky; mdi ana waarowaaro e qa'a, ebh 
 tide when the moon rises; mdi ana 
 waarowaaro e suu, ebb tide when the 
 moon sets. 
 
 The names of the months in Sa'a 
 beginning from July, the harvest 
 season, are: ngdli maelo, hiire i lade; 
 aau; okti lade; oku mwaa; oku denu; 
 oku peine {cj. Viti mbalolo levu); raa; 
 'dsi rodo; lo'a wdi mweimwei; lo'a wdi 
 
 waarowaaro 1 (continued.) 
 
 peine; lo'a mali'e; lo'a madala; hntohulo. 
 In Ulawa, beginning from August, 
 they are: ngdli maelo; pola nguru; 
 jnadamada sulu; oku i lade; oku denu; 
 oku peina; uhi mwaka; uhi opuopu; 
 ha'asusu uhi; uhi repo; uhi maleu; 
 'elinga; aau maraiua. 
 
 The phases of the moon in Sa'a are 
 designated: waarowaaro e ranga'a; hudi; 
 alanga'i roa; alanga'i i'ola ni tolo; 
 helehele mwdimwei; helehele pdine; okolii 
 tewa'a; hara pole; ruru'e hule; qa'ileni; 
 to'ohuunge'i lemi; rara talau {hulaaholaa, 
 full); pa'ewa ko 'ala lala; qd'i oku; 
 to'ohuunge'i oku. 
 
 In Ulawa they are: waarowaaro e 
 ranga'a; hika halo; 'ura maasilima; 
 rua 'apala; dahi; alanga'i hapa; hapa 
 ni na'o; saro pole; hdu ni lemi, lemi 
 mwaa (full); hdu ni mwela awara; 
 ruana hdu; qa'uni 'uru; danu oku; 
 demudemutoloria; qa'aqa'a nivfha;rarasi. 
 waato n., a digging-stick used in making holes 
 
 for yam planting. Wango riwaalo. 
 waawaata 1. an opening, hole, aperture, 
 waawaata 2. U., waawaatani i'a, pieces of fish. 
 
 Maori wawata, small lumps, 
 wadi, wa'iwedi -S., wadiwadi U., to whistle. 
 wadu-(na, ni) n., point, tip. 
 wa'e 1. to waste, wa'e 'ahe. 2. to do in vain, 
 to ruin oneself; used with poss. 3. 
 toiowa'e. kire wa'e ada, they ruin 
 themselves. 
 wa'eta'ini tr., to waste. 
 wa'eta'i partic, wasted, put to no good use. 
 wa'eli tr., to do damage to; to pull up 
 growing coconuts that have rooted 
 themselves after falling from the tree. 
 wa'ewa'e U., adv., excessive, very, much; 
 follows the verb, wala'a wa'ewa'e ana 
 ngaile, to upbraid anyone excessively, 
 Wango waewae. 
 waha to be foggy, dim, to darken; n., fog, 
 vapor, mist, waha haahie ynaada, make 
 their eyes dim. 
 wahawaha U., wahawaha ni mwado, dust. 
 wahawaha'a adj., dim. 
 wai 1. water, me'i wei, mdsi wei. 2. fluid, urine. 
 3. bamboo water-carrier, nga wdi; 
 coconut or bamboo water-bottle, glass 
 bottle, hou wei. 4. tears, wdi ni 'akalo; 
 wdi hulahula, a spring, a fountain; wdi 
 e hiiuhuu 'olo, water gushed forth; wdi 
 ko kone, the river is in spate; wdi ni 
 qe'unge, strong drink; wdi e taha, the 
 river mouth is open; Wdi ni Tehulu, 
 the Ngorangora lagoon, Ulawa; mu wei 
 e lolo mango 'olo, the streams are all 
 dried up; ddu wei, to catch fish in low 
 water pools; hulaa ni wei, a spring, a 
 fountain; huuna wdi, U., fountain head; 
 i kekena wdi, beside the stream; kilu 
 ni wei, a well; koukou wei, to gargle 
 sweet water; lo'a wdi mweimwei, Feb- 
 ruary; lo'a wai peine, March; Mamala
 
 113 
 
 V/ALENGA'I 
 
 wai (continued). 
 
 Wdi, the Milky Way; mwakana wdi, 
 moist ground; wdi wawai, cold water; 
 wai e mahuro, the water is muddied, i 
 raona wdi, i reiine wdi, beside the stream ; 
 ro rdui wci, the two banks of the stream; 
 s&sii ana wdi, steam; siholiwei, the south 
 wind; ta'alara wai, a dragon-fly; tdluhi, 
 to draw water at a well; te'i wei, to draw 
 water. Lau qai, Polynesian wai. M. 
 L., p. 96, kuai should be qai. 
 wSi 5. contracted form of wdu i; wdi r,Hme, in 
 the house; maraan wei liata, qini; wdi 
 la'ona, within, inside; 'oto wdi lalo, in the 
 heart; 'oto wdi na'ona, right before his 
 face. Tanna wei, to fare into the house. 
 wM'i, wa'iwe'i 6. to drag, to pull, to draw, to 
 pain; wd'i liaahie ana hu'o, to draw a 
 net about; wd'i oda'i, U., to quarrel, 
 to fight. 
 wS'ini tr. 
 
 wa'inge v. n., pain. 
 wa'inila-(ku) gerund. 
 wS'i 7. tetanus; h.uliu la'ola'o ana wd'i, to be 
 
 contorted with tetanus spasms. 
 waieu U., n., a bonito; honi weieu, one bonito; 
 rerehana wdieii, a school of bonito; 
 pepe ni weieu, a butterfly (Ornithoptera 
 Cassandra). San Cristoval waiaii. 
 Waili a creek in Mara Masiki Channel used 
 for the ordeals by swimming. M. A., 
 p. 213. 
 Waingile a rocky promontory near Mwarada, 
 
 Ulawa. 
 wa'ini'ini S., with diligence; hele wa'ini'ini, 
 
 to do diligently. 
 wairo-(na) U., n., a brim. 
 waite S., 1. adv., of old, a long time ago, some 
 
 days ago; 'oto waite, long ago. 
 wa'ite S., waUta U., 2. adv., the day before 
 yesterday; t we' He, two days ago; wd'ite 
 wati, three days ago. 
 waiteu, waiweiteu v. i., to quarrel, ha'awditeu. 
 
 waiteunge v. n. 
 wjiiwei 1. to wave to and fro (of a fire-stick), 
 
 wdiwei dunge. 
 wiliwei 2. to collect; wdiwei to'o ro me'i lo'ohaa, 
 collect the two pieces of money from 
 everyone, 
 waiwei'a'a adj., watery, with too much water, 
 
 thin (of soup). 
 wakala'i v. i., to appear above the horizon (of 
 
 a canoe coming into sight). 
 wSki, wa'iweki v. i., to hang up in festoons 
 (of skulls hung up in taoha); used with 
 poss. 3. e wa'iweki ana, he hung it up 
 as a decoration, 
 wakio a bird, the gray osprey; a Poro Wakio 
 
 Mali, a legendary person. 
 wala (ku) 1. a word, speech, voice, language; 
 mc'i wala, S., hdi wala, U., nga hdiwala, 
 U., a word, the word; a me'i Wala, S., 
 the Word; walaku, my word, hire 
 saea wala, they talked about; qd'ti ni 
 wala pe'i, to consult with; walana e lola, 
 his word is great; hatonga'i wala haahi, 
 to accuse; ko kokoho haahi wala, deceitful 
 
 wala (continued). 
 
 in speech; laeli wala, to make an oration; 
 laeli walanga, oratory, address; lalani 
 wala, to make an oration; lopo'i wala, 
 to feign; madou ni wala, a phrase; muni 
 wala, S., to take counsel; a Poro Matou 
 ni Wala. a ghost in folklore; mu odo- 
 haana wala, words to the point; qelu 
 wala ilengine ngaini, to accuse any one; 
 ruru wala, to make an agreement; mu, 
 sihoa'i wala, mere words, just a tale; 
 sulu walanga, gossip; mu tale'i sulu 
 walanga, mere gossip; sulu walanga 
 la'etate, babbling words; mu wala 
 ta'alara, tradition; mu wala la'alarau, 
 gossip; talania'i wala, to act as mediator; 
 tarie'ini wala, to commit fornication; 
 walana dhuri, the sound of the conch; 
 wala tatara, tradition; tolai suli wala, to 
 obey commands; lo'oto'oa'i wala, fit 
 and proper words. 2. v. i., to speak, 
 used with qualifying words; mdni wala, 
 to consult, to take counsel ; wala odoodo, 
 S., to speak in one's own defence, to deny; 
 with poss. 3. 3. ddu wala, to be at 
 fault, to transgress; noii deu walaku, 
 I transgressed. Wango hara, mouth; 
 Mota valai, mouth; Tubetube, N. G., 
 wala, word. 
 
 wala 4. V. i., to be scared, to be on the alert, 
 to have learned a lesson, kire wala 'oto. 
 
 wala'a, wala'awala'a U., adj., used as verb; 
 to speak, mwai keni e'asi qale wala'a- 
 wala'a mware'a, what drawling women; 
 wala'a wa'eiva'e ana ngaile, to upbraid 
 excessively any one. 
 wala'anga U., v. n., speech; wala'anga 
 m^vainwasu, upbraiding words. 
 
 walanga v. n., words, speaking; ' i' He' i walanga, 
 strife about words; qaola'i walanga, 
 deceit, lying. 
 
 wala'asi to speak. 
 
 walaha (da, ni) n., speech, sound of. 
 
 walahalinge n., dispute, strife, hdli. 
 
 wala'imoli, to be true (Ht., to speak true); 
 exclamation of assent, verily; hiiwala- 
 'imoli, to beUeve. 
 wala'imolinge n., truth. Niue molt, true; 
 Efate ta-moli, real man. 
 
 walamango prepared, ready; hele walamango, 
 to get ready, to perfect; i'o walamango, 
 to be ready. 
 
 walangi U., v. tr., to address with words; e 
 walangia ani seru'a, spoke an incanta- 
 tion over it. 
 
 walawala U. 1. adv., in excess, too much. 
 
 walawala 2. v. i., to have the tongue hanging out 
 by reason of the heat (of dogs), wana- 
 wana. 
 
 wale 1. du wale, a reed flute. 2. a thomlesa 
 cane, the bark used to sew the leaves 
 of thatch on to reeds or to fasten the 
 layers of thatch on to the bamboo 
 rafters; tdli wale, to strip the bark of 
 the cane. 
 
 walenga'i to carry burdens; walenga'i heu, to 
 carry stones.
 
 WALI 
 
 114 
 
 wall a space of time, long ago. ha'awali. 'oto 
 'ure wait, from of old. 
 
 wWta U., wa'ite S., day after tomorrow, with 
 locative i; i welita, two days hence; 
 i welita po'o wau, three days hence. 
 Florida valiha, Samoa alivu, Maori 
 kareha, Malay lusu. 
 
 walo 1. a creeper, rope, string, line, vine. 
 ha'iwalo. walona mu uhi, yam vines; 
 hahai walo, a thicket; nga walo e hikusie, 
 the creepers twined round it; walo 
 kiiukeu, a thorny creeper; walo ni 
 pa'asafm, a fishing-line for pa'asahu; 
 walo ni 'u'i, a sling; ta'e walo 'ie ke su'uri, 
 save for these bonds; walo roto, match- 
 box bean. 2. ten strings of shell money. 
 3. ten coconuts made into copra and 
 strung together in halves. Florida gala, 
 Wango waro, Motu varo. 
 
 walo 4. susu walo, an abscess; to suffer from 
 abscesses. 
 
 Walo'a'a the river that discharges into 
 R.oasi Bay, Little Malaita; Tetele, the 
 ridge on which it rises; Toro'a, the hill 
 at its head. 
 
 walokaukeu a thorny creeper. 
 
 waloliu, walowaloliu to travel about, to make 
 excursions. 
 
 walopasa ten flying-fish. 
 
 walowalo walowaloi 'ehuri, the sound of the 
 conch shell. 
 
 walu numeral, eight; used also to express an 
 
 indefinite number, waluola, everything; 
 
 walu mola ni ola, all things; walu tala 
 
 ni Tolo, all the villages of Tolo. 
 
 waluta-(na, ni) walutana nga ola, S., 
 
 waltiteni ola, U., everything, 
 walune eighth, the eighth time. Lau qalu, 
 Florida alu, Viti walu. 
 
 walumalau the world, all the islands, malau. 
 ko 'ure para'ilana walumalau, defends 
 the earth. 
 
 wana, wanawana v. i., to sparkle, to shine, to 
 be incensed; saeku e la 'otoi wana, my 
 heart was hot. Lau qanga, lightning. 
 
 wanawana 1. v. i., to scrape and clean, to file; 
 wanawana hinou, to make shell hooks. 
 
 wanawana 2. S., same as walawala 2. 
 
 wanga U., to have fever, malaria, 
 wangaha n., an attack of malaria. 
 
 wangawanga S., to be bright, to sparkle. 
 wanawana. 
 
 wa'o, wao'wa'o U. 1. to catch fish, to go 
 afishing. 
 
 wa'o U. 2. a mast, hou wa'o. 
 
 wa'oni'a U., adj., damp, dew. 
 
 waowao 1. n., a shrub growing on the beach, 
 has white flowers, grows best on rocky 
 soil; the sticks are used as seat of plat- 
 forms. 
 
 waowao 2. (na, ni) tentacles, feelers. 
 
 waowaolu wild dog. 
 
 wapa forest land which may be cleared for 
 gardens and thus becomes the property 
 of him who clears it. tahangie wapu, 
 to clear forest country, met., of difficult 
 work just started. 
 
 wara to be very large, kira wara. 
 Warahunukaa Warahtinuka Rd'i I' a, a legend- 
 ary person. 
 
 waraihu, U.. ihu S., hair, feathers. San Cristoval 
 waraihii. 
 
 warauku U., hair, feathers. 
 
 warawara'a adj., ere warawara'a, clamorous. 
 
 ware U. 1. v. tr., to destroy, to be mischievous, 
 to pull up self-rooting coconuts. 
 
 ware U. 2. adv., nearly, almost; precedes the 
 verb. 
 
 ware 3. warei keu, ware ni haii, a short club 
 used in central Malaita on the west 
 coast; it is carried on the back, depending 
 from the neck; its stone head is lashed 
 to the haft with cane and the haft is 
 inlaid; this is the club mentioned by 
 the Spanish discoverers, see the Journal 
 of Gallego in Guppy's Solomon Islands, 
 p. 219; the port m.entioned in the note 
 is probably Waisisi. 
 
 wariha (na, ni) S., 'tmu zvcriheni, to tell clearly. 
 
 warihiteli v. tr., to burst open. hite. 
 
 waru L v. i., to be scorched, to burn, to get 
 burnt; mu nume e waru 'oto, the houses 
 are burned down; mwado waru, U., red 
 earth; niu waru, a coconut with short 
 stem, yellowish fronds, and reddish- 
 skinned nut; i'e waru, a fish of red 
 color caught in shore reef, 
 waruhi tr., to bum. 
 waruhila-(ku) gerund. Lau saru. 
 
 waru 2. v. i., waru ta'a, to emerge, to show up 
 clear, to reach a place; tala ko weruta'a 
 i Sa'a, the path emerges at Sa'a; 'Spu 
 e warnta'a ana qalusuku, blood gushed 
 from my nose. Lau qalu. 
 
 waruna U., adv., as if. 
 
 warupe U., to be stringy, of hana. 
 
 waruweru'a U., adj., red. 
 
 wasawasa'a adj., indistinct, blurred; lio 
 wasawasa'a, to see indistinctly. 
 
 wasi 1. v. i., to be wild, not tame; n., a wild 
 animal, ha'awasi. wasi ni poo, U., a 
 wild pig; nga wiisi, mu wesi, a wild pig 
 in contradistinction to nga poo ni nume, 
 the domesticated swine. Florida asi. 
 
 wasi, wa'iwesi 2. v. tr., to wash clothes, wasi 
 lo'oninge (English wash). 
 
 wasi, wa'iwesi 3. wa'iwesi hemie, to visit the 
 villages. 
 
 wasu, wa'uwesu L v. i., to smell, to smell of; 
 wasu 'aela, to stink; nimeku e wasu i'e, 
 my hand smells of fish; wdsti mangoni, 
 to emit a rich savor; nonowdsu, to sniff 
 at, to smell, 
 wiisuli tr., to smell too strong for. 
 wasulana its smell. 
 
 wasu 2. saewasu, to be angry, to sulk. 
 
 watamea U., to crackle (of fire), mea. 
 
 Wate a proper name very common on Little 
 Malaita. 
 
 wate, wa'ewate to distribute food at a feast 
 after making an oration, 
 watenga'ini tr. 
 
 watenga'i v. i. Wango wate, donate; Lau 
 lali qate, to make an oration.
 
 II 
 
 WOWALA'A 
 
 ■wau 1. adverb of place, there; m or ni may be 
 added; when followed by the locative t, 
 wdti i contracts to wdi. a mwane wiiune, 
 S., that person; wdi nume, in the house; 
 i we'ite wau, three daj's ago; » welita 
 Poo wau, three days hence; e liolai na'o 
 'oto wau, he has gone on some time ago; 
 nonola wdu, day before yesterday; 
 nonola 'oto wan, three days ago; talo wdu 
 i 'esi, to follow the coast by sea. Wango 
 wou, Lau go, Dobu wa. 
 
 wft'u 2. to be excessive (of pain, work, plague) ; 
 ko esu we'u, me'i esunge we'u, strenuous 
 work. 
 
 wauru U., to fall, to stumble and fall; a Poro 
 Wauru i 'Esi, a legendary person, 
 Mr. Fall-at-Sea. 
 
 ■wauwe (ku) grandfather, grandchild; ngddi 
 weuwe, a stone axe (grandfather's axe). 
 wauwana n., used with wjt he'i; rnu he'i 
 weuwana, grandfather and grandchild. 
 wauwananga n., mu he'i weuwananga, de- 
 scendants (double noun ending). 
 
 vauwau U., to dispute, to squabble. 
 
 wawa (ku) n., mouth; in Sa'a ngidu is used of 
 the mouth of persons, wawa eJioeho, 
 to boast; hele ponosic wawana, keep his 
 mouth shut; toro wawa, to shoot out 
 the hps. Mota vava, to speak; Maori 
 waha, mouth; Lau/aga, Maisin kawa. 
 
 wawae tobe empty; o/awau'aemoZa, only a shell. 
 
 wawai to be cold; to be cool, of water, wdi 
 wawai; sapeku e wawai, my body is cool; 
 e wawai osiosi, lukewarm. 
 wawainge v. n., moisture. 
 
 Wawake Manu a ghost of the open sea, 'akalo 
 ni matawa. M. A., p. 197. inge'i i 
 sapena rihiie i Qe'ulo, hole sa'a hole wa 
 nga me'i ola erele'a ke i'o i sapeka, he is 
 near the cliffs at Qa'ulo; paddles must 
 not rattle nor anything white be on 
 our bodies. 
 
 wawala v. i., to carry, to act as porter. 
 
 wawanu'e adj., sharp (of edge). 
 
 wawe froth from the mouth, to slobber; wawe 
 ko la'ero ana, the spittle dribbles down. 
 
 waweta'a adj., vexed, fashed, ha'awaweta'ai. 
 
 wede to take out the midrib of the sago leaf 
 before sewing the leaves for thatch, 
 wede'i tr. 
 
 weesi, weeweesi v. i., to fish, to catch a fish, 
 to get shellfish at low spring tides 
 
 weesi (continued). 
 
 (mdi rara); noko lai weesi, I am going 
 
 fishing. 
 weesinge S., v. n., fish caught; ngiu 
 
 weesinge, to eat things caught (fish or 
 
 flesh), as a relish with vegetables, 
 weesingaha U.. v. n., double noun ending; 
 
 as weesinge. 
 wee wee S., a baby, infant, mu weewee. a Wee 
 
 contraction of a Dora weewee. 
 welewele a rod, a stick, maai wele^vele, S., hii 
 
 welewele, U. 
 welewele'a adj., ngara welewele'a, to have a 
 
 firm, solid sound; to ring solid. 
 well (ku) S., uweli U., n., maternal uncle; 
 
 a weli, my uncle. 
 we'o, we'owe'o v. i., to be tired, ha'awe'o. 
 
 sape we'o, to be bodily tired, 
 we'onga v. n., weariness; sape we'onga, 
 
 physical weariness, 
 werewere small (of children), cf. weewee. 
 
 mwela werewere, an infant. Mota were, 
 
 to make an inarticulate sound, 
 wete 1. v. i., to hit; e wcte i sapeku, it struck ray 
 
 body. 2. to reach; wete i ola, reach 
 
 such-and-such a place. Wango wete- 
 
 wete, firm, 
 weweu U., v. i., to squabble, ha'aweweu. 
 
 Maori wawan. 
 will 1. V. tr., to give tribute, to contribute 
 
 money to a chief at a feast; haa ni wili, 
 
 tribute money; wili to'ohaa, wili to'oha- 
 
 anga, contributing money, 
 wilinge v. n., a giving of tribute, 
 wililana gerund, 
 wili 2. to string, to thread; wili dududu, to 
 
 string beads; wili haa, to string shell 
 
 money, 
 wili 3. to chip, to flake, to break off chips of 
 
 flint. 
 winiwini 1. v. tr., to handle shamefully, to 
 
 maltreat. 
 wmiwiiiila-(ku) gerund, 
 winiwini U. 2. carefully; hele winiwini ana. 
 
 deal carefully with it. 
 wiro a steering-paddle, a rudder. 
 wisi a small gray bird, observed as an omen. 
 
 wisi ko area, the wisi chatters. M. A., 
 
 p. 221. 
 wowo (ku) the shinbone. 
 wouwou a wooden ear-plug, 
 wowala'a S., mwala e wowala'a, glorious.
 
 \
 
 INDEX. 
 
 a hai 4., raasi, me'i. nga, ta'a 3., ta'ata'a, ta'e 1. 
 
 abandon lae mwaani, qaqaitengili, toli'asi. 
 
 abhor ha'ileledi, leledi. 
 
 abide naku, i'o, i'o konito'o. i'o susu, 'o'o 3. 
 
 able mwadausi, nanama, saka. 
 
 aboard la'o 'iola, ni'i 'ae ila'ona 'iola, ta'e ana 
 
 haka, ta'eli 'iola. 
 abode leu tala, leu talahuli. 
 abound ahurara, alielimui, hunge, takara, 
 
 tapala'a. 
 about ana, haahi, i maana, ra'arangana; kali. 
 above haho, i haho, i lengi; liuta'a, liutaha. 
 abraded aho, dalao. 
 abreast hora, i odoha, sama. 
 abroad kali, lilikeli. 
 abscess epa 1., likita'a, mwaa 2., oropa, osa, 
 
 qaqahinu, sususu, susu walo, 'upu'e. 
 absorb totohi, totoqini. 
 abundant 'a'a 3., lolo, mwaera, tahe 2. 
 abuse ere leledi, ere mama'ila'a, ere mama'ingi, 
 
 ha'asa'eri; n., raaleledinge. 
 accident dau (tau) pele. 
 accompany ha'ipulonga'ini, haku, hata, 'uren- 
 
 ga'ini. 
 accomplish ha'aahu, ha'aoa'i, ha'ato'o. 
 according ha'idadanga ana, isuli, sada ana. 
 accumulate koni, si'okoni, tarakoni. 
 accurate diana, hahuroto, mangine, warihana. 
 accuse qelu, tohule'ini, 'usu 8, 'usu maa. 
 accustom ha'anina, husingi, manata'i, nanoa'i. 
 ache hi'ito'o, salu 1., wa'i. 
 acid ahaa. 
 
 acktiowledge 'alaraa'ini. 
 across ha'aholo. 
 
 act arikosi, dada, dau, hele, qao, tau. taa 2. 
 active dau sakasaka'a. 
 add maai 1., pe'i, sape'i, taroisuli. 
 admire ane. 
 
 adopt koine, koni, opa, ri'l, sangoni, sulu'i. 
 adorn ha'alauni, launi. 
 adornments liiuni, iSunihe. 
 adrift ahesi, hatara, kone, tara; mataraha. 
 advance ara 2., dudu, nanauhi, 'o'ohi, susungi. 
 adversary maeloonga. 
 adult rato, repo. 
 
 adultery 'aino'amo, masi 1., tarie'iniwala. 
 adze dahe, v.; kaumota, hau. 
 afar 'aho'a, ha'atau. 
 affirtn une lete. 
 affix lakoma'ini, rakoma'ini. 
 afflicted ha'alete, ha'amotahi, si'ohaa. 
 affright ha'amamakine, ha'amausi. 
 afloat raanumenu. 
 afoot liu i henue, liu i tala. 
 afraid maa'u, mii'ume'u, popolo'u, qi'llulu. 
 cifresh hii 8. 'i lo'u 5., iilioh'i. 
 after huni, 'ohi, i puri, isuli, po'o puri, qa'i puri. 
 afternoon apau, apai sato. 
 afterwards mango ena, mango urina. 
 again aliho'i, lo'u 5. 
 against hatare, honosi, parasi, suli. 
 aged lasu, repo. 
 
 ago ina'o, 'oto, 'oto di. 
 
 agree loko, ruru wala, sama diena. 
 
 aground ape 1 . 
 
 ague mata'i, wanga. 
 
 aid liiuhi, maai 1., pe'i. 
 
 aim hana 2. 
 
 air maalau, mango, ooru, uwatohuna. 
 
 akin takihe-. 
 
 alarm ha'aasire'i, ha'aparasi. 
 
 alight 'o'a 5., puu. 
 
 alight adj., akau, eao. 
 
 alike ha'idadanga, ha'isada, sada. 
 
 alive mauri, maumeuri'e, mamaurita'a. 
 
 all ahuta-, hauni. miini, mango. 
 
 allot 'alali, ha'aado, ni'i, wate. 
 
 allow lio maai, maai 1., toll 'asi, tolimaai. 
 
 almost hini'i, kara'i. 
 
 aloft 'ala'a, 'alenga, la'a, ilengi, ta'e. 
 
 alone hale'ite, hali'ite, hahaitell. 
 
 along i epine, i suli, suli. 
 
 aloof 'aho'a. 
 
 aloud ha'ada'i, ha'ata'i, ilengi, piine, toto- 
 
 longa'ini. 
 already 'oto, qani, 'upuni. 
 also lo'u 5. 
 
 alter hele aopa, hi'une, hi'usi, hu'isi. 
 altercate ere ha'isuru, ha'aere, waiteu, weuweu. 
 alternate ha'iolisi. 
 altogether ha'ahuu'ani, ha'ahuu'ei, hauni, mini, 
 
 mangomango, to'uhuungana, to'ohuu- 
 
 nge'i. 
 always 'oni'onl, suli he'idinge. 
 amidst i denume, i matola-. 
 amiss pele, tala 4., tototala. 
 among hike, i matola, i saa-, i sie-. 
 amulet mangite. 
 ancestor wauwe. 
 anchor hau ni hune, hunata. 
 and na, mana, pe'i, mwana. 
 anew ha'alu 2., ha'olu, lo'u 5., ruana. 
 anger ha'iore, saewasu. 
 angle suusuu 1. 
 ankle koukou li 'ae, 
 anklet 'uru mwado. 
 annoy aite'ini, ha'asauni, kotaahi. 
 anoint nue, su. 
 another nga'eta, ngaite. 
 answer 'ala, 'alama'ini, 'alarai. 
 ant duidui, hulihuli, lolo, sane. 
 antennae kakawe, waowao 2. 
 anticipate kokela'ini, rorahi. 
 anxious adoma'i su'asu'ate'e, ikule'i, ne'isae 
 
 to'ote'e. 
 any ngaile, ngaini, nga mwaile, nga muini, 
 
 ta'ana, ta'ena, iteitana. 
 apart 'aho'a, auhora, hoka, siki 1. 
 apiece ado, oa 1. 
 apparition anoa, haeta. 
 appear haata'i, haeta, manumenu, suu ta'a, 
 
 uwota. 
 appease ha'arako, to'ora'ini. 
 apply raoha'ini. 
 
 117
 
 APPOINT 
 
 Il8 
 
 appoint ha'a'uresi, holosi, holota'ini, topo. 
 apportion 'alali. ha'ado, ni'i, opa, wate. 
 approach aori 2., duduhi, nanauhi, 'o'oha'ini, 
 
 'o'ohi, susuhi. 
 art'ca 'e'e, kuru, mauta'a, pile, pua. 
 arm nima, nimanima, nime, ninime. 
 armlet hato, kakamuni, kokome, ngaungeu 
 
 nime, pore, qaro haa. 
 armpit qaeqae. 
 
 around haahi, honota-, kali, kalikeli, parasi. 
 arrange koni, ne'i, samanga'ini, si'o koni. 
 arrive arapuu, hule 1. 
 
 arrow dede qalu, omo, oa 4., suulehu, topa 1. 
 05 domana, mala 1., urihana, waruna. 
 ascend hane, haneta'a, tahela'i. 
 ashamed mamakine, masa. 
 ashes ora 2., qasaora. 
 aside 'e'eli, liu aopa, palili. 
 ask dolosi, ha'atohu, hari, soi, suke. 
 assault arisi, polahi, puuli, siholi. 
 assemble ahelidu, loko, rum. 
 assent 'alama'ini, 'alaqa'u, mvva'emwa'e. 
 assert unu lete, usu meuta'a. 
 assig7t ha'aado, holosi 3. 
 assist maai, pe'i, pe'ini. 
 asthma malo. 
 
 astray 'e'eli, takalo. 
 
 astride ta'e odoodo, ta'e ha'aholo. 
 
 asunder makaka. 
 
 at hai 2., i 1., ta'i 2., wai 5. 
 
 at all ha'aisi, ike, 'oto 'o'o. 
 
 atonement hiri, tapa olisi, uraa'i. 
 
 attach raoha'ini, lakoma'ini, rakoma'ini. 
 
 attack mama'ingi, polahi. 
 
 attain hulaana, su'aana, tau taha, usu ta'a. 
 
 attempt dau adonga, dau ni, hala. 
 
 aunt nike, teitei. 
 
 avenge horo i tala, suu ola. 
 
 avoid peinuhi. 
 
 awake ha'alio, ha'atalisi, liolio, talisi. 
 
 away mwaani, wau. 
 
 awe maute'i ra'aranga-. 
 
 awhile ha'awali, ka'u 4. 
 
 awkward maumeuli'e. 
 
 axe hau 2., 'ile 4., ngadi. 
 
 babble ro'irori. 
 
 baby 'elekale, mwela werewere, weewee. 
 
 back kolu, puri; adv., aliho'i, 'oli, 'olie'i, ha'i'oli; 
 
 taalenga 
 backbone suli odo, suli qeri i ngae. 
 bad 'aela, tata'ala; kasu, mapusu, osa. 
 bag anga, mwa'i. 
 bait paa, pasa; 'alata'ini, v. 
 bake hahi, haali. 
 bale pute; v., danu. 
 baler idenu. 
 bald halai. 
 ball hou meme. 
 
 bamboo iiu. dana, qirei eu, rata. 
 banana hudi, piei hudi. 
 band walo. 
 
 bang kokohu, makulu; n., koukouhe. 
 bank 'akere, keke, rao. 
 barb, nanga. 
 
 bare mwakule, qala. 
 
 barefaced raramaa. 
 
 barely asa, asa'i, hini'i, ili 1., kara'i, ore! 2. 
 
 bargain hohoro, 'olisi, usi. 
 
 bark te'ete'e «.; ku, leko'i. 
 
 barren amara, qala. 
 
 barter ha'aholi, hohoro, holi, usi. 
 
 bashful masa, mamasa'a. 
 
 bask ha'araa. 
 
 basket anga, ite, lu'alu'a, lu'e 3., mwa'i, tangi 1. 
 
 bat ninginingi, sawalo. 
 
 bathe loto. 
 
 battlefield paonga. 
 
 bawl arai, awara, kakau, tea. 
 
 be i'o, la 1., lae, 'o'o 3. 
 
 beach i kule, i one, one, qa'une hau. 
 
 beak qalusu, wawa. 
 
 bear anga'i, hele, karu, walenga'i; ha'ahute, 
 
 hungu. 
 beat daro, hide, horo, rapu, sauni; lili qana. 
 beating daro'ilana, maai repusilana. 
 beautiful hinoli'a, kohi, mwane diana, rara'i. 
 because ana 7., 'aehotalana, i tehulaana, i nunu- 
 
 haana, tala'aehana. 
 beckon 'ala qa'u, salohi. 
 
 become ne'i, no'i; malisi. 
 
 beetle manu, orooro'a. 
 
 before hola'i na'o, i na'o. 
 
 beforehand kokela'i, rorahi. 
 
 beg 'a'ada'ini, aitana'i ha'atohu. 
 
 beget 'aehota, ha'ahute. 
 
 begin 'aehota, tala'ae; adv. si 1. 
 
 beginning 'aehotalana, tala'aehana. 
 
 beguile ero, kae. 
 
 behave i'o, naku, 'o'o 3., tola. 
 
 behavior i'ola-, i'onga. 
 
 behind i puri. 
 
 belch ora lulu. 
 
 believe hiiwala'imoli. 
 
 belly 'aqa 2., i'e 3., 'oqa. 
 
 belong ana 3., to'oana, to'ola-. 
 
 below haha 1., i'ano, i haha, i oroha-, i ka'o. 
 
 belt lokoqaio, roro to'oni. 
 
 bend lolo 1., lo'u 4., lo'une, oroha'i, oroma'l; 
 n., 'alo'u, lo'u'e. 
 
 beneath i 'ano, i haha, i kao. 
 
 bent 'amaoro, malo'u, matou, mwahiohio, 
 mwaoroha'i. 
 
 beseech aitana'i, tola suu'i. 
 
 beset 'aqata'ini. 
 
 beside i epine, i keke, i raona, i reune, isuli. 
 
 besom korekore, tala 5. 
 
 betel oha, oha ni me'esu. 
 
 betray qelo. 
 
 betroth aharo, ngau ni sulanga, rongo keni. 
 
 between i matola. 
 
 beware lio tala. 
 
 bewilder lole, pangara'ini, pu'o. 
 
 bewitch si'ohi. 
 
 beyond li'ite, likite, 'oto wau, po'o wau, qa'u 
 ni paro, qa'u wau. 
 
 bid ha'atola, ha'iusunge'i, 'unu. 
 
 big paine, paipeina'a, pangupangu raha, loa 1. 
 
 bill qalusu. 
 
 bind hiri, hoo, qasu. 
 
 bird mjinu. 
 
 birth ha'ahutanga, hutela.
 
 119 
 
 CATCH 
 
 bit iihuhue'i ola, clodongo, 'ele, kiirikeri, kele 
 
 me'i, ko'ukohui poo. maapou, masi 2., 
 
 me'l, musii 'elili, 'u'u tolo, waawaatani 
 
 i'a. 
 bite 'ala 3., sapo. 
 bitter ahaa. 
 
 black lo'ilohi'e, pulu, pulupulu'e, sawaoli'e. 
 bladder mimi. 
 blade maa 4. 
 blame 'i'ite 2., 'i'ite'ini. 
 blast esoesoha, inawaha. 
 blaze eso, ngangau, talau. 
 bliss diihi, da'idehi'e, ha'adahi, ha'adiana. 
 blind ha'a'ulu, 'ulu. 
 blister qa'arcte, tarapiu. 
 block hiiu 3., hai 4., ape bono. 
 blood apu. 
 
 bloody apule, lili 'epule. 
 blossom taka. 
 
 blow mawa, ooru, 'uhi 3.; n. maai repusilana. 
 blue melumelu'a'a, pulupulu'e, to'orodo. 
 blunt kumu, ngo'a. 
 boar ora 4. 
 
 board hapa, nii dango, rai 'ei, rai hapa, raureu. 
 boast ere ani leu honu, ha'atoha'ini, wawa 
 
 ehoeho. 
 body sape. 
 
 boil ha'aohu. koo, ohu 1., pii; v., 'upu'e. 
 bond walo. 
 bone su'isuli, susuli. 
 boom hiiu lili qana. 
 border 'akerena, i keke, i ngoongoo, i raona, 
 
 i reune. 
 bore halo, hoto'i. 
 born hute. 
 
 borrow lihue'ini, suke. 
 bosom roro 2., roroma'i sae, saro. 
 both ahutana ro ola. 
 bottle hou 'atea, hou wei. 
 bottom kao. 
 bough sasara. 
 
 bound pola liliki, reke; ho'o. 
 boundary honohonota, nisita, ta'itelihana. 
 bow n., pasi; v., qa'utou, 'o'onuto. 
 bowels 'oqa, sae. 
 
 bowl nime 2., nime sarasara, maraohu; v., 'a'a 5. 
 bowstring ilolo, pulo 2. 
 boy 'elemwane, mwane, mwau, mwela, mwela 
 
 mwane, mwemwela, plural, 
 boyhood haoraha-, mwiiimweiha. 
 brace rape'i, roro'i; «., ro. 
 brackish 'iisile, maraohu'e, qaaqi'a. 
 brain qango 3. 
 
 branch liiluhu, sasara, 'ulu'ulu 2. 
 breadfruit pa'ale'o. 
 break aaro, 'ala 4., ha'alede, ha'amousi, 
 
 ha'aqa'ali, hiili, hite, lede, makasi, 
 
 niousi, nisi, papali, papata'ini, pota, 
 
 qa'ali, qa'asi. radu. 
 breast susu, roroma'i sae. 
 breath mango 2., mangoi ola. 
 breathe mamango, mangomango 2., malo 2., 
 
 poepoe. 
 breed ha'ahute. 
 
 bride hu'e ha'alu, keni ha'alu (ha'olu). 
 bridegroom poro ha'alu (ha'olu). 
 bridge tatalauhe, huruhuru. 
 
 bright marariro'a, raa, rere'a, wana, wanga- 
 
 wanga. 
 brilliant huhurere'a, marare'a, nuenuala, rara- 
 
 nga'a. 
 brim maa 4., wairona. 
 bring tola, tole. 
 
 brink qa'asulilana, i raona, i reune. 
 bristle n., uhu, waraihu, warauhu. 
 broad 'ahola, lalo'a. 
 broil susungi 2., su'isungi, uunu 1. 
 broken 'a'o'i, ma'o'i, niari'iri'i, langu holo, 
 
 madou 2., makaka, makaka'a. 
 brood v., aro 2. 
 broom korekore, tala s. 
 brother 'asi-2., 'ule-. 
 
 brother-in-law 'asi-, ihe-, ro aihana, ro mwaihana. 
 brow dara, na'ona dara. 
 bruised hudihudi'e, maelupu'e, maputaputa. 
 brush kore, tala 5. 
 bubble hutohuto, ohu 1. 
 bud 'ure 4. 
 buffet hideli, lomosi. 
 build dau nime, tiiu nima, ha'auresi, tohu nime; 
 
 soo tete. 
 bulge suule'i. 
 bmnp lupunge'ini, taate'e, tatate'ete'e, to'o- 
 
 lupu. 
 bunch adai, hungu, hunguha, hunguta, huu. 
 bundle lokota, ihoo, putaputa, pute. 
 burden ludaa, ludanga. 
 burn eso, ha'amamu'i, niamu, raahi, talau, 
 
 uunu 1., waru. 
 burrow 'eli. hai 5. 
 burst qa'a, utakora. 
 bury 'anomi, aori, 'eli tala, ha'itoli, ha'itoli- 
 
 nge'ini. 
 bush 'ai 1., dango, ma'usu, me'esu, mou, tolona 
 
 hanue. 
 busy hiru, hirunga'a. 
 busybody polahiwasa. 
 but ta'a 7., ta'e 6., ta'e pe'ini. 
 butterfly pepe. 
 
 buttock moro 3., popo 2., qote. 
 buy holi, holoholo 3., hohoro, usi. 
 by ana 2., ani 2., i keke, i raona, i reune, i saa. 
 
 i sie, i suli. 
 
 cackle tatarao, toteu. 
 
 call arai, awara, ha'ara'i, soi. 
 
 calm holaa. 
 
 can mwadausi. 
 
 cane 'ohu 3., ue 3., wale. 
 
 canoe 'iola, 'iola sara, lusuinume, ta'a ta'e, 
 
 ta'e hai. ta'e 'olu. 
 capsize 'akeu. kausi, oha'i, qaoha'ini. 
 careful ha'akenjta'i, hii'ikeneta'i. keneta'i, 
 
 kineta'i. raerae. 
 careless tiiutcu, ta'ewau. 
 cargo ludaa, ludanga. 
 carry anga'i, anga'ini, 'apala, hu'e 3., lude, 
 
 poonga'ini, tola, to'o qS'u, walenga'ini, 
 
 wawala. 
 carve adu, adumi. diu 2., didi. 
 cast 'a'a 5., 'asi 3., daro, dere, 'u'i, 'uUe'ini, 
 
 sikera'ini. 
 castrate uweli. 
 catch kiiusi, talaahu'e. tapoli.
 
 CATERPILLAR 
 
 I 20 
 
 caterpillar muno. 
 
 cave hahale, liwe. 
 
 caulk pulu'i. 
 
 cause, v., dau 1., ha'aola, tau; «., 'ae'aena, 
 
 'aehotalana, tala'aehana. 
 cease mou, moutoli, noto, rohu, toll ereere, 
 
 to'o moutana, toli rohu, suu 1. 
 cement pulu 3. 
 centipede aliha, aluhe. 
 chafe harasi, rotoa'ini, sataa'i, uli 3. 
 chamber ahi, 'atohono. 
 champ kokolu, sapoli. 
 
 change alu, ha'alili, hi'usi, ho'itana, ho'ite'i, 
 hu'isi, hu'itana, hu'ite'i, lapi, lie 2., 
 'oli, 'olisi. 
 channel ta'ataha, taha, tahalaa, ukui ta'ataha. 
 charcoal lo'ilohi. 
 charge ha'atolanga'ini, 'usu ilengi, 'usu maa; 
 
 rori. 
 charm n., mangite, sahu 2., si'onga; v., saru'i, 
 
 toli loosi, walangi. 
 chase pai 1., piini. pee 1. 
 chatter 'e'engo, diodioru, kotaa, orea, rongo 
 
 'aela. 
 cheat ero, kae. 
 cheek papali. 
 cheer ha'aape, ilenimwa'e, rike, ruke, sae dodo, 
 
 sae rukeruke. 
 chest duru, toitoi; mango 2., sae. 
 chew daweri, koikoi, kokolu, ngasi, ngero'i, 
 
 sapoli. 
 chief alaha, inemauri, rato. 
 child 'elekale, 'elekale werewere, kale, mwela, 
 
 mwela werewere, weewee. 
 child-bearing ha'ahute mwela, kale'a. 
 chin sasate. 
 chink waavvaata. 
 
 chip dahe, didi, diu, tere, wili; w., masi 'ei, 
 ngangai dango, ngangani 'ei, sikitani 
 'ei, sikitei dango. 
 chipped 'apasu. 
 
 choose hili, 'ilisi. Ho hilisi, lio huni. 
 chop huule'ini, kohu 2., tapa, tiipi, tohu 1. 
 chorus ha'ioangi. 
 cinnamon madou. 
 circuit kiili, kari waaro. 
 clam 'ime. 
 clap hide. 
 clasp ako. 
 clatter kole. 
 claw ki'iki'i. 
 
 clay 'ano mola, mwado waru. 
 clean rere'a; v., ha'arere'a. 
 cleanse hoda. 
 
 clear ahureha, dingadinga, hahuroto, haha'iteli, 
 langalanga'a, manola, mataqa, tam- 
 waodo; v., rai, sale. 
 cleave hite, hite pewa'ali, tangi, tohu 1., tohu 
 
 hiteli, wa'ali; hataa'iai, rauhe'i. 
 cleft ta'ataha, tahalaa. 
 clench lokune, rete hau. 
 clever saai ola, salema'i. 
 cliff haneta'anga, hanetahanga, osani karekare, 
 
 qa'asulilana. 
 climb hane, hane'i, hanenga'ini. 
 cling lalako, nanako, rSuhe'ini. 
 clip olo 3. 
 
 close iihu'i 2., dau keli, ha'apuli, hohono, para 
 ahu'i, ponosi; mumu, adj., kara'ini, 
 puru, purupuru'a'a. 
 close-cut kou. 
 cloth mi sala, sala. 
 clo2(d mamala wai, rorodo, rorodo'a, salo, 
 
 uru 3. 
 clouded kokohono, rorodo, rorodo'a. 
 club ahui 1., die, kiakia, mata, pa'uwa'ata, 
 
 supi, taroiri. 
 club-foot qa'i 4. 
 clump huu 1., lolo'a ni 'ei. 
 coarse wara. 
 
 coast v., hatale; n., hatale'a. 
 cobweb lawa. 
 cockatoo eke. 
 
 cockle hadonga, henu, mengo, hangoda. 
 cockroach mwaidi. 
 coconut niu; kokolu, madeli, opu, poupou 1.. 
 
 'ulu'ulu 1. 
 coil ere 2. 
 
 collect sio 1., sio koni, sio maani. 
 color sape. 
 comb arapa. 
 combine loko. 
 
 come dudu, hule, lae, susuhi, su'u 6. 
 co7tie out au ta'a, mau, tau ta'a. usu taha. 
 command ha'atolanga'ini, usunge'ini. 
 cofnmon ta'ewau, tauteu. 
 compact sa'oha'ini. 
 
 companion dama, maila-, oa 2., pe'ile-. 
 company alidanga, alidangaha, herahonu, 
 
 puUtaa, koruhe, laeha. 
 compassion 'amasi, ha'i'amasi. 
 compensate hiri 2., toto 1. 
 complain uqe, ngara tahela'i. 
 compete ahu 1., mango 1., mangomango, 
 
 mouqeli. 
 conceal mumuni. 
 conceive 'aehota, lodo. 
 concerned poi 2., po'ote'e. 
 concerning ana, haahi, ra'arangana. 
 conch 'ahuri. 
 condition tolaha. 
 condemn 'i'i 1., lei. 
 
 conduct v., ha'apulonga'ini, na'o, tole, 'ure- 
 nga'ini; n., tolaha. 
 
 confess ha'ahou, unu tahanga'ini. 
 
 confident sae moute'i, sae susu. 
 
 confirm ha'asusu, ha'ato'o, rape'i. 
 
 co7ifused lole, pu'o, qa'ulunge'i, wasawasa'a. 
 
 consent 'alama'ini, mwa'emwa'e. 
 
 conspicuous langa'a, langalanga'a. 
 
 constantly 'oni'oni, tarau, taraure'i. 
 
 consult mani wala, qa'u ni wala. 
 
 contend ha'itohe, ha'ipani'i, haukama. 
 
 contiiiue konito'o, susu 4., suusuu, taraasi, 
 tarao, tarau, tarauhe'ini. 
 
 contort huhu laolao ana wa'i. 
 
 contract rarasi, ruusi. 
 
 contradict ere ha'itohe. 
 
 contribute tete, wili. 
 
 convey ha'apulonga'ini, tole, 'urenga'ini. 
 
 cook ha'ali'e, ha'aopo, hahi, koo, sule, susungi; 
 su'isungi, uunu. 
 
 cooked mali'a, madoo. 
 
 cool wa'arara, wa'arau'a.
 
 121 
 
 DIFFER 
 
 copy ha'amaani, ha'imaani, ha'amala, maani, 
 
 malamala 3. 
 coral hau haa, kau 2. 
 cord 'ali 3., i'eli, walo. 
 core nini, uto. 
 cork qaito. 
 
 corner suraa'i, suusuu. 
 corpse lalamoa, qa'u 'apula, rae. 
 correct ha'aodo, odo. 
 cough hu'u 5. 
 counsel loo'inge. 
 count idu 1. 
 country hanue. 
 
 courtyard 'amaa, lolata, mara nume. 
 covenant n., ha'alunge, ha'iholota'inge; v.. 
 
 ha'alu. 
 cover v., aluhi, mwana 1., ponosi, qaoha'i; n., 
 
 maa, ponopono. 
 covet sae hanali, sae to'oa'i ola. 
 covetous malalahu'e. 
 cower 'aqa 1. 
 coury puli 1.. puli 'ehi'e. 
 crab ao 2., 'ahe 3., kuka, qS'i ao, 'u'e 6. 
 crack kokohu, makulu, ngaangaa 2., qa'a 1., 
 
 qa'arakau, ualapoa. 
 cracked lo'a 3., qa'a, wa'ahite. 
 crackle watamea, sii. 
 crafty raoinaenga. 
 
 cram poe 3., susu harehare, to'oni 2. 
 crash makulu, ngara loulou. 
 crawfish ore ni 'esi, ura. 
 crawl 'ango 1., lidu. 
 creak awaleo, ngangadi. 
 crease hirori 1. 
 create ha'ahola. 
 creep ango, huto 2. 
 creeper walo. 
 cripple lilidu, to'u 3. 
 crocodile huasa. 
 
 crook ikeu, mudi 2., tangatanga. 
 crooked mwa'elu, mwahi, mwaketo. 
 crop v., 'ini 5. 
 cross v., holosi, la'oni, la'ongi, likisi, tapaliu, 
 
 ulu holo; adv., ha'aholo; n., ailipo'u, 
 
 po'upo'u. 
 crotch tanga. 
 croton alaala. 
 
 crouch adaoro, 'ahihi, 'aqa 1., hihi. 
 crow kokorako, tatarao. 
 crcnvd ha'apuli, ruungi, takuruhi; n., honulaa, 
 
 mwala, pulitaa. 
 crown halaitana, ho'odara, rorodara, 'ure'urena. 
 crumb ahuhu'e, nganga, urate. 
 crush hite menasi, pili. 
 
 crushed malelede, mamenamena, ma'o'i'o'i. 
 cry arai, awara, kakau, ngara, ulo. 
 cuckoo tarasioko. 
 cull hu'usi, 'ini. 
 cup kaokao. 
 cupboard duru. 
 cure kure 1. 
 curl ali, lolosi. 
 
 curse ere hii'ihonoa'i, hSdi. isi, uwesi. 
 curve repa. 
 cuscus huto 1. 
 cut aha 2., hoa 1., huri, kala, kohu 2., lisi, nisi, 
 
 topa, tori 1. 
 
 cuttlefish tnonaki. 
 
 daily suli haudinga, suli he'idinge. 
 
 dam n., koho; v., ponosi. 
 
 damage mala masi, wa'eli, ware. 
 
 damp makina'a, qesa'a, qini'a, waoni'a. 
 
 dance mao 1. 
 
 danger maelaa, siohaa'i maelaa. 
 
 dare adoma'i mousi, ne'isae moute'i. 
 
 dark rodo, rodohono; rodoha'i, rodoraa'i, 
 
 rorodo'a. 
 darken ha'arodo. 
 darkish marawa, maramarawa'a. 
 dash papata'ini, pola. 
 daub mole, 'usuri. 
 
 daughter 'elekeni, kele keni, pule, teitei. 
 daughter-in-law hungao-, keni. 
 dawn ha'ihora'i, mahu'ohu'o, wa'ali'e. 
 day atowa, diini, diingi, ha'idinge, haudinga. 
 daybreak marawani deni, mahu'ohu'o, wa'ali'e. 
 dazzle marare'a. 
 dead mae. 
 deaf pungu. 
 
 deal hohoro, holi; 'alali, ha'aado, ni'ini'i, wate. 
 dear diena, maa'i 2., madu. 
 dearth hi'olonga, talenga. 
 death maenga, maeta. 
 debt roro'a, roro'anga. 
 decay kasu, osa. 
 
 deceit eronga, kaenga. raomaenga. 
 deceive ero, kae, lopo'i, qali. 
 deck ma'emahe; n., mwanamwana. 
 declare ha'ahou, ha'ata'ini, hou 4., 'unu 1. 
 decorate ha'alauni, launi, murau. 
 decoy ha'atanauhi, ha'amamu. 
 deep asa, dodo, kokoro, lade mae. 
 defecate he'a 1. 
 defend ere talihe, lau haahi, para'ite-, talohi, 
 
 'ure ahu'i, 'ura parasi. 
 deficient ore 1., tale. 
 
 defile ha'awa'a, lo'u 3.. louhanga'a, maha. 
 defy parangasi, haukama. 
 degrees duuduu, raqaraqa'a. 
 delay ha'ahiru, ha'awali, hirusi, 'oniteu; n., 
 
 hirunga'a. 
 delirious 'oe'oe. 
 
 deliver ha'i'a'auhi, ha'iteuhi, luhelolo. 
 dense pono, rerepono. 
 deny ere talihe, taate'inge'ini, ulapo, wala'a 
 
 odoodo. 
 descend siho, sihola'i, siho toli. 
 descendant wauwe. 
 desert n., hanue sala, hanua sasala, maana'o. 
 
 na'onga; v., pola mwaani, tahi. 
 desire ha'ihuni, harihuni. 
 desist noto, rohu, toli 6., toliaa. 
 desolate i'o ni leu qala, maana'o, na'onga, sala 
 
 4., si'ohaa, waa 1. 
 despise adairi, hii'aela, mama'ila'a, mama'ingi, 
 
 mwaka 1. 
 destroy duuhe'ini, ngoli, suuhe'ini, ware. 
 detach sikile'ini. 
 device loo'inge, loona'inge. 
 dew ara 1., waoni'a. 
 diarrhea tao. 
 die ai suu, mae, suu 1. 
 differ aopa.
 
 DIFFICULT 
 
 122 
 
 dificult asa. 
 
 diffident marara. 
 
 dig ahure, 'eli, 'elihe'i. 
 
 diligent ha'airara, mwa'emwa'e, rara 1. 
 
 dim wahawaha'a, wasawasa'a. 
 
 diminish kurawe, lueli, luengi. 
 
 din 'e'engo, kotaa, rongo 'aela. 
 
 dip ha'adodo, loloma'ini, suu 1., toongi; n., 
 
 aliholo, ririholo. 
 dirt 'ano, mwado, mwakana, mwakano, qiqi. 
 dirty mada'a, mwadola, mwakano'a, qiqi'e. 
 dish nima, nime. 
 
 disobey alalu, ha'itohe, lalawa, sare'i. 
 disorderly mvva'uu, teroliu. 
 disposiiioti manata, manatanga. 
 dispute ha'aere, haore, ha'isuru, waiteu, wala- 
 
 hali, wauwau. 
 distant 'aho'a, ha'atau. j 
 
 distinct maopaopa. 
 distinguish haha'iteli, hahiteli, ileli, Ho saai. 
 
 opa. 
 distress ha'aletehinga, motaahinge, si'ohaanga; 
 
 v., motaahi, kotaahi, hasi kokosi. 
 distribute ha'aado. ha'aohusi, ni'i, wate. 
 disturb hurosi, ikule'i, iolaha, sasae; adj., 
 
 mahuro. 
 dive suu 1. 
 
 diverge aliu, 'e'eli, liu aopa. 
 divide hiteli, opa, nisi. 
 divine dau dunge, diuiga ni hau, hahuto'o, 
 
 ilala. 
 dizzy ta'iere. 
 
 do arikosi, da, dau, hele, palo, qao, ta, tau. 
 docile manata, rako. 
 dodge talohi. 
 dog 'usu 9. 
 door hohono, maa. 
 dot pulu maai seu. 
 double lo'u 4., kalitei'a, saoha'ini. 
 doubt adoma'i ruarua'a, ne'isae ruerua'a. sae 
 
 rucrua'a. 
 dove heheoku, hiroiku, taqaruru. 
 down hao, hou, i'ano, qa'i 'ano, siho. 
 down n., ta'atakai rate. 
 drag oke, panile'ini, wa'i. 
 dragon-fly ta'atara wai. 
 draw oke; kere; talubi. 
 dread niniko'a. 
 
 dream ma'ahu pole, ma'jihu qole. 
 dregs hero, pali kao. 
 drift hatara, kosola'ini, tara. 
 drill halo; n., halo, idu 3. 
 drink ilu, inu. 
 drip ha'auduhi, mudimudi *ura, mwimwidi 
 
 'ure, 'udu; n., 'udu'uduhe. 
 drive pani, panitora, pee. 
 drizzle nemo ra'arara. 
 droop ahuhu, mara'i heutaa, tengotengo. 
 drop domu, ha'ausuli 1., teke, tete. toll, toli 
 
 sesu, 'usu 11. 
 dropsy pule, pura. 
 drought 'iro ni sato. 
 drown ha'adodo, ha'a'o'oni, ha'ainuhi, ha'ato- 
 
 nohi. 
 drowsy mamauru'e. 
 
 drum 'o'o 2., para ni 'o'o, ri'i, taha 'o'o. toli 9.; 
 v., 'iki 2. 
 
 drumstick kokoi sa'o. 
 
 dry adj., 'a'ate, 'ate'ate, rango, rara 2.; v.^ 
 
 ha'alanga; ha'amaa, ha'araa, rarasi. 
 duck n., aranga. 
 duck v., ha'adodo, qa'uto'u. 
 dull kumu, rorodo'a. 
 dumb 'amumu, panguu, qe'u ereere. 
 dun 'a'ada'ini. 
 dung 'ae, oraora 2. 
 
 duration di, ha'awali, qani, wa'ite; n., maholo. 
 dusk saulehi melumelu. 
 dust mwakano loho, mwamwatekola, 'u'u- 
 
 mwado, wahawaha ni mwado. 
 dusty v., ahuora. 
 dwarf didi 1., ki'iki'i ni 'inoni, masi 3., ride nl 
 
 'inoni. 
 dwell naku, i'o. i'o ni deunge, 'o'o 3. 
 dwindle kumwe. 
 dye 'atoni, to'ongi. 
 dy sentry 'apu. 
 
 each ta'ena, ta'ana, iteitana. 
 
 eagle hada. 
 
 ear 'alinge. 
 
 ear ornament au susu, eho, wouwou. 
 
 early ha'ahu'o, mahu'ohu'o 
 
 earnest w., ha'a i mwe'i; ha'irara. 
 
 earth 'ano, mwado, mwakana, mwakano. 
 
 earthquake nunu 1. 
 
 east i matawa, i qa'alana sato, ta'au, ta'e. 
 
 easy mwadau. 
 
 eat 'amadi, ngaa, ngangau, ngau, oka. 
 
 eaves pipisi, riridi. 
 
 ebb kumwe, mai 2. 
 
 echo qa' alinge. 
 
 eddy 'ahe hiru, ali lo'a. 
 
 edge api, keke, maa 4., rau 2., wairona. 
 
 eel hauho. 
 
 egg apota, hoi kue, hoi menu, mwaopu, saolu. 
 
 eject 'asi 3., dere, 'u'ile'ini. 
 
 elastic mwaeroero, mwaohe; n., walo lala'i, 
 
 walo dududu. 
 elbow suusuu 1. 
 
 eloquent ere taha'iraa, saai ere. 
 elsewhere ana nga'eta le'u, ana ngaite lehu. 
 embark ni'i 'ae, ta'e 4., ta'eli 'iola. 
 ember lo'ilohi. 
 embrace ako'i, 'apala 4. 
 emerge au ta'a. 
 
 empty oreorei ola, qala, waawaa, wawae. 
 enable nanama'ini, sakaahi. 
 enclose dau keli, hono sisinge'i, para ahu'i, tau 
 
 kali. 
 encounter dau to'o, ha'iodo'i, ha'isu'esu'e, soda. 
 encourage ha'aape sae. ha'amauta'a sae, 
 
 ha'asusu sae. 
 end ha'amangolana, ngoongoo. to'o raoutana; 
 
 v., ha'amango, nisi, talimaa; ha'a'uresi. 
 endeavor dau ni, hala ni, tau muni. 
 endure i'o susu, i'o susule'i, toli sesu. 
 enemy maeloonga, 'apani mae. 
 energy v., ha'irara, hele winiwini; n., sakanga. 
 engaged hiru. 
 enlighten ha'amataqali, ha'amataqasi, raangi,. 
 
 sineli. 
 enlightenment mataqanga ni sae. 
 enough adona, ha'idadanga, hunge. sada.
 
 123 
 
 FIT 
 
 enquire dolosi, soi, soi Iieri. 
 
 entangled 'aiwalo'a, ta'ipupu'e; i'., hikusi. tiiri 
 
 2., to'oha'i qe'u. 
 enter sili. 
 entice ha'amamu, ha'ariro, ha'atanauhi, 
 
 mamu. 
 entire ha'ileku, laku, mangomango. pupupu. 
 entrails 'oqa. 
 
 entreat aitana'i, tolaa'i, tola suu'i. 
 envelope v., iihu'i, ulo; n., hulchule, uloulo- 
 
 'itana. 
 envy lio i kekeni maa, Ho i ngaei maa, sae 
 
 unuhi. 
 equal n., dama; adv., ha'idadanga, sada. 
 err aopa, 'e'eli, pele, takalo. 
 error dau pelenga, takaloha. 
 establish ha'a'ure'si. 
 eternal huu 2., 'oto di. 
 even ha'idadanga, sada; noone. 
 evening siiulehi. 
 
 ever huu 2., 'oni'oni, 'oto di, 'oto 'o'o. 
 every ahuta-, ta'ana, ta'ena. 
 everything ahutana mu ola, ta'ana nga ola, 
 ta'ena nga ola, walumolani ola, walu- 
 tana nga ola. 
 everywhere ilhusie mu le'u. 
 ci>il 'aela, da'ita'a, tata'ala. 
 exact odohana, odohaana. 
 exalt tahela'ini, toro 2. 
 example 'ae, peapea, tolaha. 
 exceedingly]aopa.. hi'ito'o, liu, liuta'a, oraha'a, 
 / 1., to'oliu, wa'ewa'e, walawala, 
 excessive J wa'u, hunge. 
 exchange hii'ilu'u, 'olisi. 
 excite 'akolu, ikule'i, iolaha, ta'ela'i, tatanga- 
 
 lungalu. 
 excrement 'ae, huui 'ae. 
 excuse ha'a'inoni, lopo'i ere, lopo'i kae, lopo'i 
 
 wala'a. 
 exhort ha'itorangi, torangi. 
 expect totori, maa toto, ma'ohi. 
 expire mango suu, toli'asi mango. 
 explain hatonga'ini, lado diena, 'unu taha- 
 
 nga'ini. 
 extend ahusi, lala'ini. 
 exult manawa, tahola'i mata. 
 eye maa; v., ha'akale, ha'amaesi 2. 
 eyelid hinuhinui maa, hiruhiru ana maa. 
 eyebrow maranga i maa. 
 
 face maa, na'o; v., na'o, saro. 
 
 fade ahuhu. 
 
 faggot iho'oi dango, iho'oi 'ei. 
 
 fail huutala, pele, mwamwasu'i, tala, tototala. 
 
 faint mango toli, olo ana hi'olo, ta'iere. 
 
 fair eke, erete'a, sasangota'a; odo. 
 
 faith hiiwala'imolinge. 
 
 fall 'aihu, 'auru, anguru, domu, lada. mara- 
 
 pute'i, rapute'i, teke, toli, 'usu 11., 
 
 wa'uru. 
 false ero, ha'akae, ha'amenamena, kae, rao- 
 
 maenga. 
 falsehood eronga, kaenga. 
 fame houla-, taloha, taroha. 
 family komu. 
 
 famine hi'olonga, talenga, talengaha. 
 famish mae su'esu'ela'i. 
 
 famous hou keli, hou lilikeli, manikulu'e. 
 fan n., tetere; v., terehi. 
 far 'aho'a, ha'atau. 
 
 fast liiuleu, lauleu'a, nanamu, tatawisiwisi; 
 miiuta'a, papau, pa'ipesi, pasipasi; v., 
 ha'ahili, ma'ahu mala 'iola, ma'ahu 
 (lalawala, olo ngau, toli ola, toli ngeulaa. 
 fat mangoni, mwomwona, qi'e; n., rakuhe. 
 father 'ama-, ma'a, mama'a. 
 fathom tahanga. 
 fatigue rahe, we'o. 
 fault diiu wala, roro'a. 
 
 favor lio maai, lio nanama'ini, lio sac to'o. 
 favorite kale madu, mwane diena, mwane 
 
 maa'i. 
 fear maa'u, mii'u, ma'u ra'aranga. 
 feast houlaa, ngauhe, tauhe. 
 feather ihu, waraihu. 
 
 feeble mamaela'a, peto, qeto, qake mware'a. 
 feed ha'angau, ni'i, sangoni. 
 feel hii. 
 
 feign lopo'i deu, lopo'i teu. 
 fellow dama, oa 2. 
 female keni, qaqa 2. 
 fence liliheu, para, sasa, suluheu, tete 6., r., 
 
 para, sese, sio tete. 
 ferment hane 3. 
 
 fern dimwe, laqa, sunge luuluu. 
 fester oropa, osa. 
 festoon 'ama'ama, mahe, waki. 
 fetch lae 'ohi, 'ohi 1., tola, tole. 
 fever daohanga madoro, maenga mamadali, 
 
 madoronga, mata'i, wanga. 
 few mwamwanga, mwanganga. 
 fiber mwarite, saisemu, samu, su'e. walo. 
 fierce mama'ingi, mamakola, melaha. 
 fight ha'ihoro'i, ha'iseuni, oho, wa'i oda'i. 
 figure sape. 
 fill dede'i, ha'ahonu. 
 film ahoaho. 
 filth mada'anga. 
 fin nangananga. 
 final ha'amangolana. 
 find odo'i, ha'aro'i, soohi. 
 fine hiritaa; sato. 
 
 finger ki'iki'i, ri'iri'i; 1st. 'ini bite; 2nd, 'usu 
 henue; 3rd, qii'u teroliu; 4th, au rarcihi; 
 5th, kiiu lomolomo. 
 finish ha'amango. mango 1. 
 fire dunge; hana 2. 
 firebrand potoi, usu 'ei. 
 firefly pulupulu. 
 firewood 'ai, dango. 
 
 firm halahala, mauta'a, nga'ingedi, papau, 
 sulahita, susu 4.; r., ha'amauta'a, 
 ha'asusu 1. 
 first 'etana, hola'i, holai na'o; v., ha'ana'ola'ini, 
 
 na'ola'ini. 
 first born hola'i hute, na'ohai kale, na'ohana kale. 
 first fruit ha'ana'o, horahora'apu'i. 
 first lime aani, hola'i, si 2. 
 fish i'e 2.; v., 'aholo, 'a'o, dciro 2., hunu 3., 
 kalu, lilie'i, lou 2., ma'ae, moke, samu, 
 toli 2., wa'o, weesi. 
 fist lokunaa nime. 
 
 fit adj., ha'idadanga, hatonga. malisi, sada; 
 r., daraha'ini, sa'oha'ini.
 
 FLAKE 
 
 124 
 
 fiake sikite; v., didi. wili. 
 
 flame esohaana dunge, meameahana dunge. 
 
 melahai dunge; v., eso, mea 2., ora 3., 
 
 talau. 
 flank parapara, rahoraho. 
 flap hideli, lopalopa. 
 flare eso, sii 2. 
 flash nangali'a, nangariro'a. 
 flat dadada'a, hu'idada; ape dao, ape sada; 
 
 sada. 
 flatten ha'adada, ha'asada, penasi, taalengasi. 
 flatter apu'i, ha'arako. 
 flay simwe. 
 flea pote 3. 
 flee tahi. 
 
 flesh hasi'o, hinesu, ta'itesi. 
 fleshy hasi'ola. 
 flick kopi. 
 
 flinch marara, niniko'a. 
 fling 'asi 3.. dere, 'u'i 
 float manu 2.; n., u'o. 
 
 flock 'alaa, haka 4., koruhe, korutaa, pulitaa. 
 flog daro, rapusi. 
 flood kone, luelue. 
 flotsam mataraha, ramarama. 
 flow 'aha 1., kone, lue 2., oraa, ramarama, 
 
 tahe 3. 
 flower taka 1. 
 fluid rumu, sulu 5., wai 1. 
 flutter loho, tere 'apa'apa, tete 'apa'apa. 
 fly n., lango, lango ni rae. 
 fly v., loho. 
 foam hutohuto. 
 fold lulungi, nukumi. 
 foUo7o 'ahe isuli, lulu isuli, sulu isuli, susuli, 
 
 'usuli, totola i 'ae. 
 food ngauha, ngaulaa. 
 fool herohero, karu oe, papaku'a, qe'u 1. 
 foot 'a'ae, 'ae, peapea. 
 foothold 'uriurite. 
 footprint 'a'ae, peapea. 
 forbid ere 1., ere luu'i, ha'a'apu, hadi. 
 forefather wauwe-. 
 forefinger 'usu henue. 
 forehead dara, na'ona dara. 
 foreign haka 3., matawa. 
 forerun hurulaa, na'ona'o. 
 forest ma'usu, me'esu, mou 2. 
 forget pulongo, sae rorodo. 
 forgive ne'isae 'asi, sae 'asi. 
 fork matanga, tangatanga. 
 form lioha-, liota-, sape. 
 former holai na'o. 
 formerly hola'i, i na'o, 'oto di, 'oto qani, 'oto 
 
 waite, waite. 
 fornication 'ae'aeniolanga, tarie'i ni wala. 
 forsake lae mwaani, tahi mwaani, toli'asi. 
 forth kei ana, ta'a 4., taha 1., 'ure ana. 
 fortieth haine nga awala. 
 forty hai awala ha'ahuu. 
 forward ada wau, ata wau, odo, paro, ta'au, 
 
 taraasi, tarao, taraure'i. 
 foster sangoni. 
 
 foundation, poopoota, qooqoota. 
 fount hulaa, hulahula, huuna wai. 
 four hai 1., 
 fourth haine. 
 fowl kue. 
 
 fragment aliuhu'ei ola, ngangai ola, maapou, 
 
 maholo. 
 free i'o tohu, mamaware, sapemawa; v., 
 
 luhelolo, luhesi, toH'asi. 
 freely mola'a, ni'i suu, ni'i toto. 
 freight ludaa, ludanga. 
 frequent ha'ahunga'a, ha'ahunge, hungehunga'a, 
 
 purupuru'a'a, rarapuupuu. 
 fresh ha'alu, ha'olu. 
 friend ha'imalahu-. malahu-. 
 frighten ha'amalu, ha'amamakina, ha'ama'usi. 
 fringe mwirimwiri, ngoongoo. 
 from i 1., kei 2., mai 1., mwaani, 'ure. 
 frond akeake. 
 front maa, na'o. 
 froth hutohuto. 
 frown 'ala ngingita. 
 fruit hoi 1., huani 'ei, hue, huehuei dango; 
 
 v., hungu. 
 fuel 'ai, dango. 
 full-grown rato, repo. 
 fungus 'alinge 2. 
 furl lulungi. 
 further adv., tarao, taraasi, taraure'i. 
 
 gain tari 1. 
 
 gall loka, pulu 2. 
 
 gapped makere, pilomo. 
 
 gape awanganga, kakahite. 
 
 garden hohola, lalo 4., qainaa, qa'u 4., kalona. 
 
 gargle koukou 2. 
 
 garland mahe. 
 
 gasp ilele malo, mango asa, poepoe. 
 
 gate maai para. 
 
 gather ahelidu, loko, rum, s'io 1. 
 
 gaze aonga'i, lio hahuroto, maakahi, to'oma'i. 
 
 gentle mahuru, malumu, rako. 
 
 gently anene. 
 
 ghost 'akalo, esi, urehi. 
 
 giddy ta'iere. 
 
 gift ni'inge. 
 
 gills langasi-. 
 
 ginger aro 1., lie. 
 
 gird ho'o, roro'i. 
 
 girdle lokoqaio, roro to'oni. 
 
 girl 'ele keni, kele keni, keni, pule. 
 
 give da, ni'i, ta, toli'asi. 
 
 glad ilenimwa'e, sae diena, sae diana, sae rike, 
 
 sae ruke. 
 glance tasi. 
 glide nanamu. 
 
 glisten huhurere'a, raarare'a, nuenuala. 
 globe hoi 1. 
 glorious manikulu'e. 
 glory manikulu'anga. 
 glue pulu 3., totonga 1. 
 glutinous toto'ala, totonga'ala. 
 gnaw kolu 4., ngero'i. 
 gnash ngangadi, rete hau. 
 go ha'iteu, la, lae, lau'ae, tau'ae. 
 go-between ha'a'ureruru, talama'i wala. 
 good diana, diena. 
 gourd hena, hena hoto, sahu. 
 graft lado. 
 
 grandchild qa'aqa, wauwe. 
 grant lua, ni'i, toli'asi. 
 grasp hele, tapo, toki.
 
 125 
 
 HUMP-BACKED 
 
 grass hahalisi, h^lisi. 
 
 grasshopper oru. 
 
 grater 'usu kara. 
 
 gratis mola'a, mwakule, qalaqala. 
 
 grave v., didi; n., kalinge, kilu, kiliqe'u, pa'u 3; 
 
 adj., macnoto. 
 gray erete'a, palapala. 
 gray hair qa'u palapala. 
 grease rakuhe. riimu. 
 greasy madali, rumu'e, rumula. 
 great piiine, paipeina'a, piiipeilesu'a, raka. 
 green arawa, araarawa'a, kohu; marawa, 
 
 maramarawa'a. 
 grief sae huunge. 
 grin sisi niho. 
 grip puuhara, rodi, toki. 
 groan awasirahe, la'alapa, ngunguru. 
 groin tanga. 
 grope kakalo. 
 grove huu 1., lolo'a ni 'ei. 
 ground 'ano, hanue, mwado, mwakano. 
 grow paine, pasu, pito, po'e 6., qito. 
 growl ngora i lue. 
 
 grudge sae haahi, saeni, sae unuhi. 
 grumble papangurunguru, uqe. 
 grunt ngongora. 
 guard kakali, noko 1., rara 1. 
 guest avvata'a. 
 guide na'ohi. 
 gullet konokono. 
 gully da'ideri'e. 
 gum hale 2.; pulu 3., saie. 
 gulp 'ono pola. 
 gush hure'i, pusu. 
 
 habit ha'anina, nanoa'i, manata 2. 
 
 hades hiinue ni 'akalo; Mzilapa, 'Olu Malau, 
 
 hair ihu, uhu, waraihu. 
 
 hairy hulumota'a, poso. 
 
 half 'apa 1., 'apolo, po'o 4., ratawaari, teu. 
 
 ham 'apahee. 
 
 hammer tee 1. 
 
 hand nima, nime. 
 
 handful rau 4. 
 
 handiwork talana nime, usuusuana nime. 
 
 handle kakata, ki'iki'i; v., helesi. 
 
 handsome hinoli'a, kohi. 
 
 hang 'aroro, ha'akuku, kuku 1., li'o 2., repo 3., 
 
 to'i, 'u'u 1. 
 hanker sae hanali. 
 happen taqaosi, tole, to'o. 
 happy dahi 4., sae rike, sae ruke. 
 harass ha'aahala'ini, kotaahi, sae ahala'i. 
 harbor su'u 5., lade 2., namo. 
 hard hasipe'ule, mauta'a, nga'ingedi, ngSsi, 
 
 papau. 
 hardly asa, asaasa'a. 
 harm dau hu'isi, ha'atata'alasi, mala masi, 
 
 raroni, si'o hu'isi. 
 harmless manata, maneko, nanakumae. 
 haste ha'iteu, lau'ae, koke, kokela'ini, rorahi, 
 
 rorora, tau'ae. 
 hat para'imaa. 
 hatchet hau 2., 'ile 4.. mSsi ngedi, ngadi, nini 
 
 ngcdi, hama. 
 hate lio qcru ngidu, ngidu 'upu, ngora 'upu, sae 
 
 tata'ala. 
 
 have akauri, akaurisi, manata'ini, to'o 2. 
 
 hawk arakau, kiito, qaohi, tehe, wakio. 
 
 haze laho'a, waha. 
 
 he inge'ie, nge'ie, nge'i, nge, e. 
 
 head qa'u, rarata. 
 
 headlong ladama'i, marapute'i, tataqeluqelu. 
 
 heal ha'auri, mola 1., susu 4., to'o 2. 
 
 heap koru; n., koruha, korute. 
 
 hear rongo, kawa'i. 
 
 hearken qa'arongo. 
 
 heart opu 2., sae. 
 
 heat madoronga. 
 
 heaven apai lea taa'u, i lengi, maalau, sale. 
 
 heavy hi'e. 
 
 heedless iilunge'i. 
 
 heel huui sata, kolune 'ae, poupou ni 'ae'ae. 
 
 heir oliolite. 
 
 help lauhi, maai 1., pe'i 2. 
 
 helpless i'o ni tco, i'o ni leu qala. 
 
 helve halo 3. 
 
 hence keikei ilehu, mwaani ilehu, 'ure ile'u. 
 
 her inge'ie, nge'ie, nge'i, a 4. 
 
 herd haka 4.; v., kakali. 
 
 here 'ie 1., ilehu, ile'u, inihou. 
 
 hesitate 'i'iloha, marara. 
 
 he^v adu, didi 2., diu 2., karu 4., tangi. 
 
 hibiscus leo, reko, tii'iteli. 
 
 hiccough ikule 2. 
 
 hide mumuni, peinuhi; n., te'ete'e. 
 
 high tetewa'a, tewa, uwola'ini. 
 
 hill hoiliwo, houliwo, toloi henue, tolona hanue. 
 
 hillock hungehunga'a, kokoho'a, su'isungi'e. 
 
 torokou'e. 
 him inge'ie, nge'ie, nge'i, a 4. 
 hinder ape hono, ha'ahirusi, hirusi. 
 hinder adj., i puri. 
 hinder part i puri, kolu- 2. 
 hire sahali. 
 
 his inge'ie, ana, 'ana, to'oto'olana. 
 hit dau to'o, horo, kumu'i, sauni, to'o. 
 hitch maai qaro; v., qaro. 
 hither mai 1. 
 hoarse susu 4. 
 hoary palapala. 
 hoist hele 'ala'a, ha'a'uresi, sulu la'a, tahela'ini, 
 
 wa'i ilengi. 
 hold ako'i, hele, rao 2., tape. 
 hole kalinge, kilu, kiliqe'u. maa, waawaata, 
 
 poposane'a, malamalau. 
 holUnv karu'i, waawaa; n., da'ideri'e, upe. 
 holy 'apu, kookoo, maa'i, maea, ola ni mwane. 
 hook aroro, hinou, pasa, te'i, toohe'o, tootoo 1. 
 hop tomwa. 
 
 hope hji'itotori, susuto'o, ma'ohi susuto'o. 
 hospitable takuhi 'inoni, tola koni. 
 hot madoro, raka, sae ni pelupelu, wana; r., 
 ha'adoro, ha'amadoro, ha'aopo, mea 2. 
 house hale, nima, nume, taoha. toohi. 
 household 'aeinume, auhenue, jiungani nima. 
 hover aro 2., ha'adau. 
 hcnu e 'ue. 
 how many nite. 
 howl ku 4., tea, ulo. 
 hug ako i lue. 
 hum rou. 
 
 humble masi 2., me'i; i'o ni teo, ra'u 8., raute'i. 
 hump-backed kosu.
 
 HUNDRED 
 
 126 
 
 hundred 'alo, nao, tangalau. 
 
 hunger hi'olonga, mae su'asu'ala'i. 
 
 hunt ha'awasi. 
 
 hurry ha'iteu, koke, rorahi, rorora, tau'ae, 
 
 torangi. 
 hurt hi'ito'o. salu 1., sauni, wa'i 7., wa'eli, 
 
 ware i. 
 husband poro. 
 
 husk te'ete'e; v., tasi 2.. uhu 2. 
 hut apaapa 2., hale. 
 
 I ineu, nou, no, ne; inaii, nau, na, ne. 
 
 idle akohe, ka'alawa, lalawa. 
 
 t/ana 7., mune'i, taume'i. 
 
 ignorant pu'o, ulapo. 
 
 ignore rohute'ini. 
 
 iguana ihei 3., tatcirisi. 
 
 ill daoha, mae, mamaela'a, sape 'aela. 
 
 illness daohanga, maelaa, maenga. 
 
 image nunu 3. 
 
 imitate ha'amaani, ha'imaani, maani, usuli. 
 
 importune 'a'ada'ini, dau suu'i. 
 
 impudent raramaa. 
 
 in hai 2.. i 1.. ilalona. ila'ona, la'ona, wai 5. 
 
 indistinctly qa'ulunge'ini, wasawasa'a. 
 
 infecl sikihi. 
 
 inferior ta'ewau, tauteu, tale'i. 
 
 inhabit i'osi. 
 
 inherit hele huu, 'oli. 
 
 initiate ha'araalaohu, ha'ananau. 
 
 injure ha'atata'alasi, mala masi, wa'eli. ware. 
 
 inland i henue, ilengi, ta'e 2.. ta'i henue. wai 
 
 henue. 
 inlay toll reoreo. 
 inlet 'aqa'aqa. 
 innocent mwadalo. 
 insect manu 1. 
 
 insert dereha'ini, deresi, silihe'ini. 
 inside i lalo; hai nume, wai nume. 
 insipid qaaqi'a. 
 interchange ha'ihe'i'oli. 
 interrupt ha'apona, sio honosi. 
 interval 'apolo, duuduu, holoholo, maholo. 
 intervene liu hono, talama'i wala. 
 intoxicated mahiri. 
 intricate ta'ipupu'e. 
 introduce silihe'ini. 
 involucre uloulo'ite. 
 involved tatahiruhiru. 
 inward hoi sae, i lalo, i sae, paro i sae. wai lalo 
 
 wai sae. 
 iron hau 2. 
 
 irregular holoholo, talo li'isi. tangolili. 
 irritate 'a'ada'ini, ha'aahala'ini, kotaahi. 
 island malau, malau mou. 
 it inge'ie, e, a 4. 
 itch aramu, kakamu. 
 
 jab ladami, totoro, uhu'i. 
 jagged 'alopi, malopi. 
 jaw 'aena papali, sasate. 
 jealous heota'ini. rara haahi. 
 jeer ku 3. 
 jest ha'aero, koe. 
 join hataa'ini, lado 1. 
 
 joint ladoha; out of joint 'iidiu, 'ahisu, duuna, 
 hisuhisu, li'i 2. 
 
 joke ha'aero, koe. 
 
 journey aratoto, 'ato 1.. lai henue; n., laeha, 
 
 laenga. 
 joy ilenimwa'e, rikanga, rukenga, sae diananga. 
 judge 'i'i, leilei. 
 juice sulu, totonga 1. 
 jump pola, reke. 
 just ado, odo, odota'i; adv., aani, 'ele, kele, si 1. 
 
 keep keneta'ini, kineta'ini. koni. 
 
 kernel nini. 
 
 kick koma. 
 
 kidney hoi dango, hou 'ei, huesi dango. 
 
 kill ha'amaesi 1., horo, sauni. 
 
 kind sae diana, manata; tolaha. 
 
 kindred takihe-. 
 
 kinked hirori. 
 
 kiss nono, nono'i. 
 
 kite sa'o ni 'aholo. 
 
 knee 'uru'uru. 
 
 kneel po'uru'uru, qo'uru'uru. 
 
 knife nahi, naihi. 
 
 knob qaqasu, uhi 2. 
 
 kyiock hide, 'iki, papa. 
 
 knot qaqasu. qa'uroro; v., qaro. 
 
 know manata'ini, saai. sae, saumaatana. 
 
 ladder huruhuru. 
 
 lagoon haho 2., lama, namo. 
 
 lame to'u. 
 
 land n., hanue; v., sulu. 
 
 landing-place maalitawa, suluha. 
 
 landslip ma'o'i, rerede. 
 
 large loa 1., paine. paipeilesu'a. raka. 
 
 lash qaro, qasu, rapusi. 
 
 last alipuri, ha'amangolana, ha'ipuri. oreta. 
 
 late ha'ahiru, ha'ipuri. 
 
 latrine pusu 2. 
 
 laugh mwasi. 
 
 launch tari 3., oke 1., sulu 1. 
 
 lay ha'aqaha'ini, koni, no'i, qela 2. 
 
 layer saoha'i, saosaoha'i'a, uku. 
 
 law ha'atolanga. 
 
 lazy akohe, lalawa. 
 
 lead ha'alaelae, mau 1., na'ona'o. 
 
 leaf 'apa'apa 1. 
 
 leafy lumwe. 
 
 leak huhu 1.. tete 'uru'uru. 
 
 lean 'akeu, hatara. nooru, malingi, malakeke. 
 malakeu, oroma'i, orooro. 
 
 leap pola, reke. 
 
 leave lae mwaani, toli'asi. 
 
 lee ra'irehi, purine hanue. 
 
 left maumeuli; ore. 
 
 leg 'a'ae, 'ae, 'ae'ae. 
 
 lend ni'i haawali, lihue'ini. 
 
 lengthen donga 2. 
 
 lest mwane 4. 
 
 let maai 1., toli'asi, toUmaai, toliaa. 
 
 level apedao, apesada, dadada'a, ha'idada, 
 ha'isada, hu'idada. manu odo, manu 
 sad a. 
 
 lever apo 3., qa'i 1. 
 
 lick meali. 
 
 lid maa, ponopono. 
 
 lie 'aqa 1., eno. 
 
 lie ero, kae.
 
 127 
 
 MOTH 
 
 life maurihe, mauringe. 
 
 lift hele langa'a, sulu 1., tahela'ini, totolo- 
 
 nga'ini. 
 light n., dani, dangi; v., ereha'ini, ha'aakauni, 
 
 koru dunge, tarauhe'iui; adv., mwala- 
 
 mwalaohe, mwamvvate, mwamwa- 
 
 kaula'a. 
 lighten sineli 1. 
 lightning nangali'a, wa'ariri. 
 like ha'idadanga, domana, mala, sada, sadanga, 
 
 urihana, waruna. 
 like v., saeni, sae to'o. 
 
 liken alahuunge'ini, alahuute'ini, ha'amala. 
 limb sasara. 
 
 limp adj., akoako; v., tomwa. 
 line ta'atala, uku, walo; adi'o, samu. 
 linger ha'ahiru, no'iteu, 'oniteu. 
 liritel qa'une maa. 
 lip ngidu, ngora, qeruqeru. 
 liquid sulu 5., %vai 1.; v., ewe; adj., wSiwei'a'a. 
 listen qaarongo. 
 listless akohe, ka'alawa, mode. 
 little haora, mwaimwei. 
 live miiuri; i'o, niiku, 'o'o. 
 liter sae. 
 living 'amauri-. 
 
 load n., ludaa, ludanga; v., lude. 
 loathe lalawasi, sare'ini. 
 locust mapo 1. 
 lodge sulaapoe, tari 2. 
 lofty langilengi'e, tetewa'a, tewatewa. 
 log hai datigo, hai pou, hau 3., pou ni 'ei. 
 loin karokaro, parapara, rahoraho. 
 lone inaraa-, qaqaitengili. 
 long tewa. 
 look aonga'i, ha'iade'i, 'iro, lio 1., loosi, 
 
 to'oma'i. 
 loom wakala'i. 
 loop maai qaro; v., qaro. 
 loose alo'i, iinuenu. amwada, iingire'i, asuesu, 
 
 asuoloolo, kulekule, luheta'i, ponga- 
 
 ponga; :., luhesi, siki, toli'asi. 
 lop iuhusi. 
 
 lopsided 'akeu, malakeke, malakeu. 
 lose 'ai'aa, ha'atakalo, takalo, tale, tekela'i, 
 
 talahi. 
 lot hahuto'o, ilala. 
 loud 'i'ile'i. pSine. 
 lotise pote 3. 
 
 love manata diana, sae paina. 
 low lai 'ano. wai 'ano. 
 lourr v., ha'asiholi, ha'a'uku, oohosi; i 'ano, 
 
 i haha, i orohana. 
 lump 'u'u 2., onanala. 
 lungs sae ngisu. 
 
 tnad herohero, 'oe'oe, qe'u 1. 
 
 ■madrepore hiiu haa, kau 2. 
 
 maggot mwaamwaa. 
 
 maiden 'ini'iniqaa, raori'i. 
 
 mainland hiinue huu. 
 
 maimed ko'u 2., to'u 3. 
 
 jtiaintain susule'ini, toli susule'i. 
 
 make da, dau 1., qao, ta, tau 1. 
 
 male mwane 1. 
 
 malice maapala, sae'aela, sae ngora'upu. 
 
 mati 'inoni, mwane 1. 
 
 manifest ha'ata'lni, te'inge'ini. 
 
 manner tolaha-. 
 
 many ha'a 4., nite, ta'e S., to'o 6. 
 
 mark ha'ara, hahuilala, tolimaa. 
 
 marriage feast aharota. 
 
 marrow lalawa 3. 
 
 marry tola keni, to'o poro. 
 
 marvel ane; n., anoa, anoaraa. 
 
 mash iihuqa'i, ha'apoe, kara 5.; v., sau 1. 
 
 mast hunu 2., wao. 
 
 master alaha, aunge-; v., pau 2. 
 
 masticate memela'ini, mwadamwadamu, sapoli. 
 
 mat ni'e. qana, rara; v., ha'u 7. 
 
 match ha'idadanga, sada; maai dunge. 
 
 7nale dama-, oa 2. 
 
 matter aqalau; holoholo 1., ola, maholo. 
 
 mature mena, qi'e, repo. 
 
 mawkish qaaqi'a. 
 
 me inau, ineu, iiku 1., au. 
 
 mealy makahu. 
 
 measure tohotoho, 'uri 1. 
 
 mediator ha'a'ureruru, talama'i wala. 
 
 medicine wai ni maelaa. 
 
 meddle polahiroa. 
 
 7neek mamaeko'a, mwaadalo, sae mamae. 
 
 7neet ha'iodo'i, ha'isu'esu'e, odo'i, ruru. 
 
 melt 'ahe 2., rakahi. 
 
 member sasara. 
 
 mend ponosi, saumaa. 
 
 merciful 'amasi, ha'i'amasi. 
 
 mere hale'ite, hali'ite, ili 1., mola 4.. mwakule. 
 
 mesh maa, tau 2. 
 
 messenger ha'atola, hurulaa. 
 
 middle diinume, 'upu'upu 2. 
 
 midrib mudi; wede sa'o. 
 
 midnight rodohono pupulu, upui rodo. 
 
 midst matola-. 
 
 mildew kauwa'a, sahuru. 
 
 mind adoma'ini, keneta'ini, kineta'ini, ne'isae; 
 
 M., sae. 
 mingle aroqa'i, qa'i, roro w£iaro. 
 mirror 'iro'iro. 
 mischief lede ola, malamala. 
 miserable ha'a'amasi, si'ohaa. 
 mislead ha'atakalo. 
 miss tala 4. 
 
 missing 'ai'aa, takalo, tekela'i. 
 mist laho'a, waha. 
 mistake diiu pele, pele, takalo. 
 mix aroqa'i, qa'i. 
 mixed dodola. 
 moan la'alapa. 
 mock ku 3. 
 molest taunge'ini. 
 money haa 1. 
 
 month moon, waarowaaro. 
 moonlight sineli. 
 
 moreover ta'a 7.. ta'e 6., ta'e pe'ini. 
 morning dani, diingi, wa'ali'e. 
 morrow dani ha'ahulee, dangi hoowa. hSudinga 
 
 po'odanita'i, i deni, i dengi. 
 morsel ko'ukohu, masi 2., me'i. 
 mortar hohoto, pei 1., mota. uli 'ei. 
 mosquito sime, sume. tahule. 
 mossy lumu, lumu'e. 
 mote ngaangaa. 
 moth pepe.
 
 MOTHER 
 
 128 
 
 mother nike, teitei. 
 
 mould mwado, mwakano; sahuru, kauwa'a. 
 
 mountain hoiliwo, houliwo, toloi henue, tolona 
 
 hanue. 
 mourn ha'ahili, tako, toli ngeulaa. 
 mouth dawa, ngidu, wawa. 
 move adaada, ara, arana, dudu, duu, ha'itale 2., 
 
 lae, ngiili 2., nanamu, su'u 6. 
 much hi'ito'o, liuta'a, paine, wa'ewa'e, wala- 
 
 wala. 
 mucus qango 1., uru (usu) qango. 
 mud lolongo, mwado, mvvakita'a, qiqi. 
 muddy lolongo'a, qiqi'e. 
 multiply ha'ahunge, mwaera, mwaora. 
 multitude mwala, pulitaa, ruruha. 
 mumble ngunguru. 
 murder horo mwakule, horo ta'ewau, tale'i 
 
 horo. 
 murmur ha'itohe, papangurunguru, uqe. 
 muscles uleule. 
 
 m,y inau, ineu, aku 1., 'aku 2., niiku'e, naku'i. 
 mysterious asa, anoa, anoaraa. 
 
 nail musi, misi; wa'arao. 
 
 naked mwakule, qalaqala. 
 
 navie sata; a ola; v., ha'ara'ini, haora'ini. 
 
 namesake malahu-. 
 
 narrow koko, koko'ie'i, kokohisi. 
 
 nature raanata 2. 
 
 nautilus reoreo. 
 
 navel poo 2. 
 
 neap ta'i 'esi. 
 
 near duduhi, du'u mei, kara'ini, su'u mei. 
 
 neck lue 1. 
 
 needle raapea, suliteru. 
 
 neglect 'aelulu, akoheta'ini. 
 
 neighbor auhenue. 
 
 nephew uweli, weli. 
 
 nest niui. 
 
 net 'ape 2., hu'o, kalu, moke. 
 
 nettle apune wai, nunula'o. 
 
 new ha'alu, ha'olu. 
 
 newcomer mahoo. 
 
 news tataloha, tataroha. 
 
 nibble ngero'i. 
 
 night ha'irodo, rodo. 
 
 nine siwe 1. 
 
 ninth siwana. 
 
 nip 'ini. 
 
 no ha'ike, qaake, qa'ike. 
 
 nod 'ala qa'u. 
 
 noise awaawatana, koukouhe; v., awa 2., uwe 
 
 raka, mangulungulu. 
 noisy 'e'engo, hata koula'a. 
 none ka'a, qale; ka'a iteitana, 'oto 'o'o. 
 noon 'upui atowa. 
 noose qanu, qaro. 
 nose qalusu. 
 nostril maana qalusu. 
 not ka'a, qa'ike, qa'i, qake, qale; sa'a, si'e. 
 notch ahasi, kere. 
 
 nothing ha'ike, qa'ike; ka'a ola, qale ola. 
 nourish ha'angau, sangoni. 
 novice mahoo, tataku. 
 now 'ie 1., inihou, nihou, hou; 'oto 'ie, 'oto 
 
 inihou. 
 numb 'ai 2., mae 1. 
 
 number idu 1. 
 
 nut hoi 1., 'aitepi, 'alite 1., 'e'e, niu, ngali, pue. 
 
 oar bote. 
 
 oath ha'a'apunge, hoasinge. 
 
 obey 'ala 1., lulu isuli, tolai suli. 
 
 obsidian ngadi. 
 
 obstinate ha'itohe, hehesi. 
 
 obstruct ape hono, dau sisinge'i. 
 
 ocean 'asi matawa, matawa. 
 
 occupy launga'i. 
 
 occur to'o 2. 
 
 odd 'a'atasi. 
 
 o/ni 1., i 2., li 1., si 4. 
 
 o^ha'atau, horana, mwaani; i odohaana. 
 
 offend dau wala, ha'amau'o, ha'atataro; mau'o, 
 
 tataro. 
 offer ha'iare, supungi, teinge'ini, uraa'i. 
 offering uraa'inge. 
 
 often ha'ahunge, hungehunga'a, rarapuupuu. 
 oh ai 7., ai'aa 2., hai 3. 
 oil rumu, sulu. 
 
 ointjuent laqi ni suu, rumu ni nue maa. 
 old ina'o, lahu, lasu, moka, qara. 
 omen hahuto'o, palapala 1., manu poo, hada, 
 
 wisi. 
 omit dau haahi. 
 
 071 ilengi, taraasi, tarau, taraure'i. 
 once hautaa'i, hauta'e. 
 one 'eta, hue 1., ngaile, ngaini, maa 7., ta'ata'a, 
 
 ta'e. 
 (ynly hale'ite, hali'ite, hahaiteli. 
 onward tarau, taraure'i, susule'i. 
 open awangi, lakata'ini, mawa ta'a, suhu, 
 
 taha 1., wa'awa'a. 
 opening maa, wa'awa'ata, maalitawa, tahalaa. 
 operculum musi. 
 opinion sae. 
 
 opossum huto 1. 
 
 oppose haukama. 
 
 opposite i odohaana, sisinge'i. 
 
 oppress pili tete, taunge'ini. 
 
 or wa. 
 
 orate laelae ni wala, laeli wala, saai ere, tea. 
 
 oration laeli walanga. 
 
 orchid ito. 
 
 ordain ha'atolanga'ini, qao, qaona. 
 
 ordeal atoato, hau, dau dunga, dau heu. 
 
 order ha'atola; in order huni, ta'atara 1. 
 
 ordinary ta'ewau, tauteu; mola. 
 
 ordure 'ae 4., he'a 1. 
 
 ornament launihe. 
 
 orphan inemae, ra'inge. 
 
 osprrcy wakio. 
 
 our ka, ka'elu, iki'e, 'aka 2. 
 
 ours 'aka, 'aka'elu. 
 
 ourselves i'emi maraamami, iki'e maraaka. 
 
 out kei ana, mwaani, ta'a, taha 1., 'ura ana. 
 
 outlet maa, man 1., usu taha. 
 
 outright 'o'o 4. 
 
 outsail talo li'isi. 
 
 outside kolu- 2., 'amaa, i su'e. 
 
 outstretched lala'i. 
 
 oven ha'ahite, laqitaa, ora 1., umu 1. 
 
 over haho, la'ongi, likite-, li'ite-, po'o pare, 
 po'o wau. 
 
 overcome a'aila'asi, hulesi.
 
 129 
 
 PREGNANT 
 
 overflow honu makcato, kone, malingi. 
 
 overlap dania diu, madiu, sate unu, teroliu. 
 
 overlook lio haahi. 
 
 overmuch hi'ito'o, liuta'a. 
 
 overthrow hu'e 'asi, hu'e tekela'ini. 
 
 overturn kiiusi, qaoha'ini. 
 
 owe roro'a. 
 
 owl 'ahu'o. 
 
 ovnt v., to'o 2. 
 
 oyster ile, roma. 
 
 Pardon ne'isae 'asi, sae 'asi. 
 
 pare ori. 
 
 parent ro ha'i mauana. 
 
 parrot 'a'a 2., iloilo'a, kilekile 1., kirori, siri. 
 
 parry talohi. 
 
 part M., 'apa 1., 'apolo, holoholo, niaholo, pu'o 
 
 5., roto; v., ha'apiho. hiteli, wa'ahiteli. 
 Partake ado, oa 1 . 
 particularize haha'itelinge'ini. 
 partition 'atohono. 
 partner dama-, oa-. 
 
 party iilidanga, laeha, mae 5., pulitaa. 
 pass li'isi, liu, mahoro, taro; n., iiliholo 1., 
 
 ririholo. 
 past liu, mango 1., waite 1. 
 Pastern popo. 
 patch loamena, pono. 
 Path tala. 
 Paience toli rako. 
 patrol v., kiili; n., kakalihe. 
 Patttern nunu 3.. ha'amalalana. 
 pay hiri, holi, waai. 
 peace dailama, hanuelama. 
 peaceable ha'amanola. 
 peak toloi henue. 
 pearl 'u'u maai dehi. 
 pebble hoi heu, 'u'u 2. 
 peck tere. 
 peel ori. 
 peep maakahi. 
 peer aonga'i. 
 pelt 'ato. u'i. 
 Peninsula ngorangora. 
 penitent adoma'i oli, 'onisae. 
 people apolo'a, hanua, mwala. 
 perceive lio saai, lio sae. 
 perch 'o'a 5. 
 
 perfect ahu 1., ha'aahu, manire'i, menanga'i. 
 perfume haarana. 
 perhaps 'ohe. 'ohi'a. 
 peril maelaa. inaenga. 
 perish ai suu, sun 1. 
 permanent ha'ahuu'e, huu 2. 
 permit maai 1., toli'asi. 
 persecute ha'aletchi. tiiunge'ini. 
 person ile, ini, 'inoni. laa. 
 perspire madara'a. 
 persuade ere ha'aola, ta'irara. 
 pervade roro waaro. 
 pet koni, ra'i. 
 photograph talo nunu. 
 pick hili, 'ini, karo 2., soohi. 
 piece 'apolo. le'u. maholo, musii 'elili, polo. 
 
 qii'u ulunga. roto. waawaata 2; makaka, 
 
 mamenaniena, mari'iri'i; i'., tahui. 
 pierce halo, mwakoli, toromi. 
 
 pig poo 1., wasi; ora 4., qaqa. 
 
 pigeon kolokolo, kurukuru, pine ni o'u, toorao, 
 
 uoru. 
 pile v., koru; korulia. korute. 
 pillar qil'u ulunge, ulunge. 
 pinch 'ini. 
 
 pioneer hola'i, tahangi. 
 pip lite. 
 
 pipe ipeipa, simouke. 
 pish akuu. 
 piss mi mi. 
 pit kalinge, kilu. 
 pitch pulu 3., totonga 1. 
 pitchy totonga'ala. 
 pith uto. 
 pitted pilomo. 
 pity 'amasi. 
 place lehu, le'u. 
 plague liunge. 
 plain apedao, apesada; ha'ada'i, ha'ata'i, 
 
 mwakule. 
 plait i'eli, pao, sikeri, use. 
 plan 'alaa'ini. 
 plane didi 2., susuru. 
 plank hapa, riiu 3., raureu. 
 plant hiisi, susu'i, to'oni 4.; n., 'iii. dango. 
 platform ha'a 3., tahe 1. 
 play qani'o, qarero, tala'aela'a. 
 pleasant rako diana. 
 pledge haa i mwe'i. 
 Pleiades 'apurunge. 
 plentiful hunge, hungehunga'a, mwaera, mwa- 
 
 ora, takara. 
 pliable mwadau, mwaohe, mwaeroero. 
 plot toli loosi. 
 pluck do, hisu, 'ini, liingu. 
 plug qaito, suhu; v., ponosi. 
 plump qi'e. 
 plunder liiu 1. 
 plunge dio. 
 ply liu. 
 
 pocket mwii'i 3. 
 
 point ngoongoo, wadu; v., teinge'ini, usu 8. 
 poison hunu 3. 
 poke toromi. 
 pole usue'ini. 
 polish ute. 
 pond iqe, lama 2. 
 pool lopo. 
 poor maitale. 
 porpoise 'iri'o. 
 port su'u 5. 
 possess akauri, to'o 2. 
 possible mwadau, 'ura mwarohi. 
 pounce polahi, puuli. 
 pound ha'amae, siiu 1. 
 pour lingi. ute pii. 
 pout tcro ngidu. 
 po'd'der wahawaha. 
 pcnvcr nanamanga, sakanga. 
 practise oho. 
 praise ha'amanikulu'e. 
 prawn ore 3. 
 pray are, qao ola. 
 preach laeli wala. tea. 
 precipice hauheu'e. pie. 
 pregnant hi'e, qiilu.
 
 PREMATURE 
 
 130 
 
 premature kokela'i, rorora. 
 
 prepare akau, mwali, talama'ini, taule'ini. 
 
 present 'ie 1., 'ienini, inihou. 
 
 press momo, pili, roro. 
 
 pretence dau hahota, lopo'i, luqe'i. 
 
 pretty kohi, mwane diana, rara'i. 
 
 prevent ape bono, dau sisinge'i, hadi. 
 
 price hoUte. 
 
 prick mwakoli, sipengi, susu'i. 
 
 prickle sike 2. 
 
 prize apo 3. 
 
 proceed isi ta'a, 'ure 2., tSu 3., usu taha. 
 
 proclaim ha'ahou, hou 4., talo 6., taro. 
 
 profane ha'awa'a, wa'a. 
 
 proffer ha'iare, teinge'ini. 
 
 promise ha'alu 1., ha'iholota'i, holota'i. 
 
 prop mudi 2., poo 3., tangatanga. 
 
 proper adona, hii'idadanga. 
 
 propitiate tapa'oli. 
 
 prosper takara. 
 
 prostrate ladama'i. 
 
 prostitute heulao, keni qaqahe, ulao. 
 
 protect lio ahu'i, rakapau, sese ahu'i, talaahu'e. 
 
 proud ale, toha'ini. 
 
 proverb alahuu. 
 
 provide ha'aakaurisi, ne'ikoni, talama'ini. 
 
 provoke ha'ahala'ini, ha'atala'i. 
 
 prow haku 2., na'o. toutou. 
 
 puddle ipata, upeta. 
 
 puff ha'arangasi, uhi 3. 
 
 pull aka 1., oke 1., wa'i 6.; bote. 
 
 pulp memeso'a. 
 
 pumice hau menu. 
 
 punch kumu. 
 
 punish ha'aletehi, ha'aloo'i, ha'ananau. 
 
 pupil qa'arongosuli. 
 
 pure manola, manomanola'a. 
 
 purge ha'amanola, laeli. 
 
 purlin suli 'ei. 
 
 purple melumelu'a'a. 
 
 pursue pee, ohe 1. 
 
 pus 'aqalao. 
 
 push usu 1. 
 
 put alu, konl, ne'i, no'i, to'oni. 
 
 quake asoso. 
 
 quarrel ha'isa'iri, ha'aweweu, halinge, waiteu. 
 
 quench kumuri, mwaasi. 
 
 question dolosi, ha'iohi, hari, ledi, soi. 
 
 quick ha'iteu, lau'ae, lauleu. 
 
 quicken ha'auri, lau'ae, tau'ae. 
 
 quiet malumu, mwamwadoleta, mwamwanoto, 
 
 no to, rako 2. 
 quite 'o'o, te'ela'i, to'ohuungana. 
 quiver n., pupute. 
 
 race ha'ipani'i, ohera. 
 
 raft aqaqoi sa'o. 
 
 rafter 'ato 2. 
 
 rage sae maleledi, saewasu. 
 
 rail v., ere maleledi; n., raporapo. 
 
 rain nemo, nimo. 
 
 rainbow huuraro. 
 
 raise hele 'ala'a, sulu la'a, tahela'ini. 
 
 rake kara 4. 
 
 ram rori 1., sauni. 
 
 ramrod rori 1. 
 
 rank damaa. 
 
 rap 'iki. 
 
 rasp n., usu kara; v., usu 4. 
 
 rat 'asuhe, likisi to'i. 
 
 rather 'ele, kele. 
 
 rattan ue 3. 
 
 rattle 'ikingi, kole. 
 
 rave herohero, o'e. 
 
 ravel qeli. ta'ipupu'e. 
 
 raw aravva. 
 
 ray hali 3. 
 
 razor apo 2. 
 
 reach arapuu, hule, tero. 
 
 read sae, saai. 
 
 ready akau, mouqeli. 
 
 real ha'ahuu'ana, huu 2., to'ohuungana. 
 
 really ha'ahuu'ei, to'ohuunge'i. 
 
 rear puri. 
 
 reap tapa, siokoni. 
 
 rebound pola, posiki. 
 
 recede aha 3., mapipi. 
 
 receive hele, taku. 
 
 reckon idu 1., 'unu 1. 
 
 recognize hahaitelinge'ini, lio saai. 
 
 recoil posiki. 
 
 recollect amasito'o. 
 
 reconcile ha'a'ureruru. 
 
 recover awaa, mauri. 
 
 red noro, warn, waruweru'a, awalaa'i 'epule. 
 
 redeem tapa 'oli. 
 
 reed rade. 
 
 reef haho 2., mwalo; lulungi. 
 
 reel 'olo'oloa'i. 
 
 reflect alusae, ne'isae; nunu 3. 
 
 refrain nihisi. 
 
 refresh ha'araango. 
 
 refuge le'u ni su'e puri ana, su'u 5. 
 
 refuse v., lalawa, sare'i, saeni. 
 
 refuse n., alitehu, hero, mamatekola, oraora. 
 
 reject lalawasi, sike. 
 
 rejoice ilenimwa'e, rike, ruke. 
 
 relapse 'oli, toliaa. 
 
 relate lado. 'unu 1. 
 
 relish 'amadi. 
 
 remain i'o, naku, 'o'o 3. 
 
 remember alusae, amasito'o. 
 
 remnant oretai ola. 
 
 remove ha'isuu. sulu, ta'asi, ta'ela'i. 
 
 rend 'a'ari, haka 1. 
 
 renew ha'aha'alu, ha'aha'olu. 
 
 repair dau diana. 
 
 repeat ha'amaani, ha'imaani, 'oni. 
 
 repent adoma'i 'oli, 'onisae. 
 
 reply 'ala 1., ta 1., te. 
 
 report talo, taro. 
 
 reproach isi 1., keta. 
 
 reprove 'i'ite 2. 
 
 reserve adi. 
 
 resist haukama, 'ure honosi. 
 
 resolve sae susu. 
 
 resound mwakulu, ngara loulou. 
 
 respond 'ala 1., nguu. 
 
 rest mamalo; ore. 
 
 restrain hele haahi, nihisi. 
 
 result au ta'a. 
 
 retire duu'e, ru'u, su'e S. 
 
 return aliho'i, ha'apu'o, 'oli, pu'o 2.
 
 131 
 
 SHELTER 
 
 reveal ha'ata'inl. 
 
 revenge suraa'i, 3uu ola. 
 
 reverse aliho'isi, iilihu'isi, aliu, hi'usi, hu'isi, 
 
 liuliune, qaoha'ini. 
 revive ha'i meuri. 
 revolve hiro, pu'opu'o. 
 reward waaite. 
 rheumatism lili'e. 
 rib lusu. 
 
 rich mwa'i, toora-. 
 ridge uwo. 
 
 ridge-pole qaoha, suli 'ei i qaoha. 
 right odo, qaloqalo. 
 rigid halasi, sulahita. 
 rim keke, kerekere, wairo-. 
 rind te'ete'e. 
 
 ringworm huni 2., kiru 3. 
 ripe maelo, rara 2. 
 rise ta'e, ta'ela'i, suu ta'a. 
 river wai peine. 
 road tala. 
 
 roar awa, mwakulu, ngunguru. 
 roast hahi, su'isungi, sule, susungi, uunu. 
 rob peli. 
 
 rock hau, hau mou. 
 rod 'ai nehunehu, hau welewele. 
 roe pile. 
 roll 'akeu, malakeke, malakeu, tataqelu; ere 2., 
 
 ho'i 3., penasi, qelusi; ereerea'ile, 
 
 ereereta'a; n., hike. 
 roof koluhe, qaoha, saroha. 
 room 'atohono, duru. 
 root imiimi; ine 1., sude. 
 rope 'ali, i'eli. 
 
 rot hou 3.. kasu, mapusu, osa, sane'a. 
 rough haule. 
 round ereerea'ile, ereereta'a, hotohotomolita'a; 
 
 ahu'i, haahi. 
 rouse ahala'i, ha'alio, lio. 
 row hote, hotela'ini; n., ta'atala, uku. 
 rub nanala'i, rotoa'ini, usuri, ute. 
 rubbish iilitehu, mamatekola, potaa. 
 rudder wiro- 
 
 ruin maana'o, na'onga; suuhe'ini, wa'eli, ware. 
 rule alaha haahi. 
 rump moro- 2. 
 run huru. 
 
 rush pola, nanamu, tatahiruhiru. 
 rust he'a, kauwa'a. 
 
 sack 'anga, mwa'i. 
 
 sacred maa'i, maea, mwane. 
 
 sad 'ala ngingite, rahito'u. sae huu. 
 
 safe liiku, mamanuto'o, mamaware, pupupu, 
 
 sa'esape'a, sapelaku, sapemawa. 
 safeguard keneta'ini, kineta'ini. 
 sag makuku. 
 sago sa'o. 
 
 sake 'aena, i nooruhaana. 
 saliva ngisu. 
 salt 'asi 1., hu'i 'esi. 
 salty 'asile. 
 sand one. 
 
 sandbank rere, saisai rere. 
 sandfly nono 'asi. 
 sandstone hau hana. 
 sap totonga. 
 
 satisfy ha'aahu, mangoa'ini, pote 1., saedami. 
 savage mama'ingi, mamakola. 
 save ha'auri, loloha'ini, ne'i koni. 
 say ere 1.. ta 1., te, 'unu, wala'a. 
 scab rau 5. 
 scaffold ha'ano. 
 scales unehi. 
 scared lete, loo, wala 4. 
 scatter ha'atatanga'ini, koetana'a, tatanga. 
 scent nono wasu. 
 scoff mwasie'ini. 
 scold ere, haa'ere, ha'ore. 
 score aha 2. 
 
 scorpion hiiriheri, ha'awarasi kale. 
 scrape 'arasi, karasi, ole. 
 scratch hai 5., karu 2. 
 scream awara, ulo. 
 screw hiro. 
 scum hutohuto. 
 sea 'asi 1., matawa. 
 seam tauteurite. 
 search ha'itale, totola ohi. 
 ''seaside i one. 
 season halisi 2. 
 seat i'oi'oha, na'unekume. 
 second ruana. 
 secret mumuni. 
 secure daidiena, maramarape'a, sa'esape'a; 
 
 mauta'a, papau. 
 see aade, leesi, lio, loo 1. 
 seed lite. 
 
 seek ha'itale, loohi. 
 
 seem lio 1., loo 1., domana, mala, urihana. 
 seine hu'o. 
 select hili. 
 self maraa-. 
 
 sell ha'aholi, hohoro, holi, taho. 
 send usunge'ini. 
 sensation hii. 
 
 separate opa, ohu 2., sio aopa. 
 serve rareta'ini. 
 
 set ha'ai'osi, ne'i, no'i, suu 1., tola 6. 
 settle i'osi, 'o'a 5. 
 seventy hiu awala. 
 sever holosi, mousi, tapali. 
 sew susu 3., tiiuri. 
 shade mamalu. 
 
 shade malu, para'imaa, mamalute. 
 shadow nunu 3. 
 shaft kakata, ki'iki'i. 
 shake asoso. asuoloolo, hotohoto'i, kulekule, 
 
 mwaolaola, olooloa'i, tata'ini. 
 shallow too 1. 
 
 sham dau hahota, lopo'i kae. 
 shame masa; ha'amasa. 
 shape sape. 
 share ado, oa 1. 
 shark pa'ewa. 
 sharp 'ala 1.. rere'a. 
 sharpen rere 1. 
 shatter memeso, morumoru. 
 shave apo 1., suhi. 
 
 sheathe daraha'ini. dereha'ini, saini. silihe'ini. 
 shed hale, taoha, toohi. 
 shed v., toli. 
 shell hinu, te'ete'e. 
 shelter i'o ra'irehi.
 
 SHEW 
 
 132 
 
 sheiv 'ae 5., ha'ata'ini, hatonga'ini. 
 
 shield talo, talaahu'e. 
 
 shift 'olisi, sikile'i. 
 
 shin wowo. 
 
 shine raa, wanawana. 
 
 ship haka 3. 
 
 shipureck ape 1., qa'ata'ini. 
 
 shiver iiriri. 
 
 shoal taalu, tootoo. 
 
 shoot hana 2. 
 
 j/iore i kule. i one, saini one. 
 
 short koukoule, 'o'oni'e, pulo sa'asala. 
 
 shorten ape hite. kumwesi, onu. 
 
 shoulder huui lue, qa'uli 'apala. 
 
 shout kakau, tea, totolo. 
 
 shove usu 1. 
 
 shower hoi nemo, hoi nimo. 
 
 shrink 'amasi meuri, niniko'a, rarasi. 
 
 shrivel nuku, rara 2., ruusi. 
 
 shun peinuhi. 
 
 shut hohono. 
 
 shy masa. 
 
 sick dacha, mae, maemae'a, mamaela'a. 
 
 sickness maela, maenga. 
 
 side parapara, rahoraho. 
 
 sigh ahimawa, mamango, poepoe. 
 
 sight Honga. 
 
 sign ha'aluelu, ha'ara, hahuilala. 
 
 silent amute. 
 
 sill 'aena maa. 
 
 silly qe'uqe'u'a'a. 
 
 similar ha'idada, sada. 
 
 similarly aitana, alihana. 
 
 simple qe'u, teo. 
 
 sin oraha'a. 
 
 since kei ana, mwaani, 'ura ana. 
 
 sinew uleule. 
 
 sing kana. 
 
 single to'ota'e. 
 
 sink dodo, 'o'oni. 
 
 sinker ha'asihopulu. 
 
 sinnet mwaritei niu. 
 
 sip tahe tongo, toto aropu, totohi 1. 
 
 sister 'asi- 2., inie-. 
 
 sister-in-law ihe-. 
 
 51/ dodonga'i, i'o, naku. 
 
 six ono. 
 
 size painaha, painanga. 
 
 skilful saai ola, salema'i. 
 
 skim tarasi. 
 
 skin v., simwe, tasi 2., uhu 2. 
 
 skin n., te'ete'e. 
 
 skip pola, reke. 
 
 skirt kakamu, ngoongoo. 
 
 sky apai loa, i lengi, maalau. 
 
 slab qa'ahida, wa'ahite. 
 
 slack mwakuku. 
 
 slander heota'ini, ta'utepunge. 
 
 slap daro, hide. 
 
 slay horo, suuhe'ini. 
 
 sleep ma'ahu, ma'aru, ma'uru. 
 
 sleepiness mama'uru'anga. 
 
 slice nisi, wa'a. 
 
 slide rerede, tasi. 
 
 slip awa tahu, dile, rerede. 
 
 slippery mamauwa'a. 
 
 slit hakasi. 
 
 slope haneta'anga. 
 
 slough ruusi. 
 
 slow ha'ahiru. 
 
 slumber ma'ahunge alisuu. 
 
 small haora, hatonga, momoru, nivvaimvvel» 
 
 vverewere. 
 smart totongo. 
 
 smash makaka'a, makasi, potali, qa'a. 
 smear punipuni, raimaa. 
 smell nono vvasu, tola haarea, wasu. 
 smile mwiisi. 
 smile horo, rapu. 
 smoke ha'asasu, sasu; omi. 
 smooth dadada'a, maumau'a'a. 
 snail aropu, qaateru. 
 snake mvvaa 1. 
 snap mousi. 
 
 snare hune, lolohuna, qanu, qaro. 
 snatch liiu 1. 
 sneeze asihe, asinge. 
 snore ngora 3. 
 snout qalusu. 
 snuff nono vvasu. 
 so uri 2., urine. 
 soak to'ongi, totohi, totoqini. 
 soar aro 2. 
 sober maenoto. 
 soever ta'ana, ta'ena. 
 soft malumu, mwadau. 
 soften ha'amvvadausi. 
 soil 'ano, mwado, mwakana, mvvakano. 
 sole penatana 'ae. 
 
 solid ngara welevvele'a; hai pou, susu 4. 
 some halu, muini, mwaile, mwaite. 
 somehow uritaa. 
 
 something holoholo, le'u, masi ola. me'i ola. 
 sometimes halui maholo, to'ota'e maholo. 
 son 'elekale, kale, mwela mwane. 
 song kana. 
 
 soon lauleu, lauleu'a, molana. 
 soothe apu'i, ha'arako. 
 5orc apite'i, hi'ito'o, ini 2., malaka'a, oropa, 
 
 osa, salu. 
 sorrow saehuunge. 
 sort uritaa; komu, manata 2., ta'ana, ta'ena, 
 
 walute-. 
 soul maurihaa'i. 
 sound ha'ileku, laku; awaawatana, koukouhe, 
 
 lolou. 
 soup piinge. 
 sour maladi, tola 9. 
 south po'i lengi, qa'i lengi, taa'u, ta'e. 
 sow hasi 1. 
 sow 71., poo qaqa. 
 space ahowa, maalau, maholo. 
 spade waato. 
 span tangaa. 
 spare ore, ue 1. 
 spare 'amasi, saeni. 
 spark sii dunge. 
 sparkle rangariro'a, wana. 
 spatter qisi. 
 spatula idemu. 
 spawn pile. 
 
 speak ere, ta 1., te, wala, wala'a. 
 spear lula, noma, qa'uli "inoni, ra'ei tolo, su'e 4.. 
 speckled to'o hi'uhi'ule.
 
 133 
 
 SURROUND 
 
 speech erenga, wala'anga. 
 
 speed nanamu. 
 
 spew 'a'ana, moa. 
 
 spider lawa, pe'u. 
 
 spill huhu, malakekesi. inalingi. 
 
 spin hirohiro. 
 
 spine suli odo. 
 
 spirit 'akalo, lii'ona, li'oa, urehi. 
 
 spit ngisu. 
 
 spite sae ngora. 
 
 splash kilokilo, qisi. 
 
 splice donga 2. 
 
 split hite, tangi, wa'a. 
 
 spoil wa'eta'ini, ware. 
 
 sponge hulo 1. 
 
 spontaneous maraa-, tohu-. 
 
 spotted pulu nunu'e, to'o hi'uhi'ule, to'o nunu'e. 
 
 spout pusu. 
 
 sprain duuna, li'ite'i. 
 
 spray 'asi 1., naho. 
 
 spread 'a'ala'i, epasi, holasi, ngaangaa, nga- 
 
 ngau, takara, talau. 
 spring hulehule, hulaa; pola liliki. 
 spring tide lue qera. 
 sprinkle tata'ini. 
 sprout pito, qito. 
 spurt pusu. 
 
 squabble hii'isa'iri, waiteu. 
 squall dionga'i, hoi nemo. 
 square popopo'a. 
 
 squash makaka'a, pili memeso. 
 
 squat 'o'a 5. 
 
 squeak ngangadi. 
 
 squeeze losi, momo. ni'i losi. 
 
 squint lele. 
 
 stab toromi. 
 
 staff 'aili'apaa, 'apaa. 
 
 stage tahe. 
 
 stagger 'olo'oloa'i, tatahiohio. 
 
 stain maua, o'a'i. 
 
 stair huruhuru. 
 
 stalk mwaramwara. 
 
 slammer same. 
 
 stamp puu. 'uri 1. 
 
 stand 'ure. 
 
 star hoi he'u, 'u'ui he'u, 'u'u ni he'u. 
 
 stare aonga'i, to'oma'i. 
 
 start 'aehota. ta'e 5., ta'ela'i. tala'ae. 
 
 startle apara'i. asire'i, ha'aapara'ini, ha'asire'ini. 
 
 starve hi'olo. maesi hi'olonga, mae su'esu'ela'i. 
 
 stay i'o, naku, riiuhe'i; ha'asusu. rape'i. 
 
 stead 'olite-. 
 
 steadfast halahala, mauta'a, nga'ingedi, papau. 
 
 steal peli. 
 
 stealthy ha'atoretore maa. 
 
 steam sasu ana wai. 
 
 steer na'ohi. 
 
 stem kakata. ki'iki'i. 
 
 step 'uri'urite. 
 
 stern puri. 
 
 stick 'ai nchunehu. 'apaa. dango welewele, 
 qire; pau 1, rao 2. 
 
 sticky totonga'ala. 
 
 stiff "ai 2.. halasi, hasipeule. pasie'ili. 
 
 still maneko. nolo, rako; ue 1. 
 
 sting 'ala 3.. nunuli. 
 
 stingy ha'ahehe. 
 
 stink wiisu, wSsu 'aela. 
 
 stir aroqa'i. ngalingfli, qii'i 2. 
 
 stitch susu 3.. tiiuri 2. 
 
 stock iihu'ine. 
 
 stomach 'ie 3., 'oqa. 
 
 stone hau 1. 
 
 slony haule. 
 
 stoop mwaoroha'i, oro. 
 
 stop noto, rohu, toli; diiu 2., i'o, i'o konito'o, 
 
 'o'o 3., susule'i. 
 store duru, haangi, loha'ini, ne'i koni, no'i 
 
 koni, 'onime'ini. 
 storm mawa, mawasidengi. 
 story laladonga, 'oni'oninge. 
 straggle tongolili. 
 straight odo- 
 
 strain pii, sasali, wa'i halahala. 
 strait tahalaa. 
 
 strand akeake, kalite'i'a, kawe. 
 strange aopa, ha'akolo, kolokolo. 
 stranger awata'a, miihuara. 
 strangle ha'ali'o, li'o 2. 
 stray 'e'eli, liu aopa, takalo. 
 strength 'a'aila'anga, nanamanga, sakanga. 
 stretch aheta, kalu 3., lala'ini, raradu, susue'ini. 
 
 tawari. 
 strike daro, hide, horo. lupu, rapu, siiuni, 
 
 to'olupu. wete. 
 string walo, wili. 
 strip 'aeli, hu'csi, ta'asi. 
 stripe hudidudi. 
 stroll awe, qaqahe. 
 
 strong 'a'aila'a, malapau'a'a, mauta'a, ramo. 
 
 stubborn hii'itohe. 
 
 stuff susu harehare. 
 
 stumble halidu'u'a, mau'o, tataro. 
 
 stump ahu'ine, ruuqe'u, uruqe'i dango. 
 
 stumpy koukoule. 
 
 stupid papaku'a qe'u. 
 
 stutter samo. 
 
 subdue ha'aooni, hele tolingl. 
 
 subside kumwe, mapipi, sasa hetela. 
 
 succeed 'oli, 'olisi. 
 
 succor anahi, liiu 2. 
 
 such uri 2., urine, urinena. 
 
 suck omi, susu 2. 
 
 sucker pi'e 3. 
 
 suckle ha'asusu. 
 
 successive ta'atara. 
 
 sudden lauleu, maarusi maa. 
 
 suffer sape hi'ito, sape salu. 
 
 suffice ado, ha'idadanga. 
 
 sugar-cane 'ohu 3. 
 
 suit ado, hatonga. 
 
 sulk saewasu. 
 
 summer oku 3. 
 
 summerset su'ai honu, su'esu'e ni honu. 
 
 summon ha'ara'i, ha'arongo. 
 
 sun sato. 
 
 sunrise qa'alana sato. 
 
 sup ilu, inu. 
 
 supple qilo'a. 
 
 support poongi, poopoota. 
 
 sure susu 4. 
 
 surf 'a'aronga, naho, qa'aqa'ali naho. 
 
 surprise ha'aapara'ini, ha'akakahuru. 
 
 surround dau keli, kiili, piru keli.
 
 SUSPECT 
 
 134 
 
 suspect hi'inge'ini, sum 1. 
 
 suspend repo 3., to'i. 
 
 swallow 'ono 2. 
 
 swamp lololo, lolongo. 
 
 swarm huto 2. 
 
 swaying mwahiohio. 
 
 swear ha'aasa, ha'a'apu, ha'iuwesi, hoasi. 
 
 sweat madara'a. 
 
 sweet malimeli. 
 
 swell 'upu. 
 
 swelling epa, likitaa, qaqahinu, 'upu'e. 
 
 swift lauleu; «., 'i'i 2. 
 
 swim olo. 
 
 swoop dio. 
 
 taboo adi, tetelenga. 
 
 /acA; lili qana. 
 
 tackle raisinge. 
 
 tail 'u'u'i-. 
 
 take da. dau 1., hele, ooho, rau 4., ta, tete, 
 
 tola, tole. 
 tale laladonga, 'oni'oninge. 
 talk ere, wala'a. 
 tall tetewa'a, tewa. 
 tally ha'aawala. 
 tame koni, ra'i. 
 
 tangled hiku, ta'ihikuhiku, tari. 
 tap siki 2., tee 1. 
 tarry i'o ni deunge. 
 taste mami, meali, nameli. 
 tattoo rapu. 
 
 teach ha'aloo'i, ha'ananau, ha'ausuli. 
 tear v., haka 1. 
 tear wai ni 'akalo. 
 tease ha'aero, ha'atalaa'i, koe. 
 teem alielimui. 
 
 tell ha'ahou, houle'ini, lado 2., siho, 'unu 1. 
 tempest mawa, mawasidengi. 
 temple poopoo. 
 
 tempt mala ahonga, mala ohonga. 
 temptation mala ohonganga. 
 ten awala, tangahulu; aideri, S'ulu, walo, 
 
 walo pasa. 
 tendril kakawe, waowao 2. 
 tenth tangahulu ana. 
 terrible to'o maumeutana. 
 terrify ha'ama'usi. 
 tetanus wa'i 7. 
 tether qaro, qasu. 
 than mwaani. 
 
 thank ha'adahi, ha'asaediena, paalahe. 
 that holoholoni, ine 3., le'une, olana, maholoni, 
 
 ngeena. 
 thatch daure'ini, tahera'ini; raho. 
 the a 1., hai 4., hoi 1., hou 1., masi 2., me'i, mui, 
 
 mwai, nga 1. 
 theft peliha, pelinge. 
 their ada 1., 'ada 2., ada'elu, adaru'e, 'adaru'e 
 
 ikire, ikira'elu, ikireru'e. 
 them ikire, ikira'elu, ra'elu, ra; dual, raru'e, 
 
 raru'i. 
 then maholoni, si 1. 
 thence mwaanie ile'une, 'urei ile'une. 
 there ilehuna, ile'une, wau 1. 
 thereby ana 2., ani 2. 
 therefore *aena le'une, 'aena ngeena. 
 therein hai la'ona, hai le'une, ilalona. 
 
 thereupon hara, haro, r£iro, saro; mango urine. 
 
 these ikira inihou, muini 'ie. 
 
 they ikire, ikireru'e, kire, kireru'e, koro'i. 
 
 thick ioqo, piola, poso; pono. 
 
 thicket lolo'a ni 'ei. 
 
 thieve peli. 
 
 thigh sasaha. 
 
 thin mwarau, mwine. 
 
 thine i'oe, namu'e, namu'i. 
 
 thing ola, le'u, holoholo, maholo. 
 
 think adoma'ini, ne'isae. 
 
 third 'olune. 
 
 thirst marou. 
 
 thirteen awala mwana 'olu. 
 
 thirty 'olu awala. 
 
 this 'ie 1., inihou, mai 1., maine. 
 
 thither ileune. 
 
 thorn sike 2., walo kakaru. 
 
 thorny kakau'e, mwakomwako'a. 
 
 those muini ngeena, mwaileni. 
 
 thou i'oe. 
 
 though maala, mala 1. 
 
 thought adoma'inga, ne'isaenga. 
 
 thousand alo, mola 3., qela 1., sinola, to'o 7. 
 
 thread walo; v., lii 1., wili. 
 
 threaten ha'apasuli, marara'i. 
 
 three 'olu. 
 
 thresh mwamwada. 
 
 threshold 'aena maa. 
 
 thrice ha'a'olu. 
 
 throat lue 1., hauliu. 
 
 throb tee 1. 
 
 through tahaunutara, tapausu, taraure'ini. 
 
 throw 'a'a 5., dere, 'u'i. 
 
 thrust lada, toro 3. 
 
 thumb 'ini hite. 
 
 thump kumu. 
 
 thus uri 2., urine. 
 
 thwart hapa, lusu. 
 
 thy amu'e, i'oe, namu'e, namu'i. 
 
 tick tee 1. 
 
 tide kumwe, lue 2., mai 2., tongo; lue qera, 
 
 mai rara. 
 tie ho'o, qaro, taheri. 
 tight hanga, koko, popo. 
 till hulaana. 
 tilt kausi. 
 timber 'ai, dango. 
 
 time maholo; takarurume'ini, to'o 6. 
 time-to-time duuduu. 
 tip noonoo, ngoongoo, to'o eleele, wadu. 
 tiptoe mwaiki. 
 tired ha'awe'o, we'o. 
 
 to huni, muni, i 1., ni 1., saa-, sie-, tako'i, tale. 
 tobacco saho; hasie'ie'i, hiohio, kori. 
 together ruru, ta'ingelute, takarurume'ini. 
 tongs ireki. 
 tongue mea. 
 too lo'u 5. 
 
 tooth niho, to'o na'o. 
 toothless dawa 2. 
 top lengi, qango 2. 
 torch sine. 
 
 torment ha'aletehi, kotaahi, motaahi. 
 torrent dari mwaa. 
 tortoise-shell hapa 2. 
 totter 'olo'oloa'i.
 
 135 
 
 WANT 
 
 toucan pine awa. 
 
 touch hele temweri, kopi. 
 
 lough ngasi 1. 
 
 low oke 1. 
 
 toward isuli, tako'i, tale. 
 
 town hanue, huuilurae, poona. 
 
 toy qanionga roaroa. 
 
 track si'o isuli. 
 
 traitor qelo. 
 
 train ha'aango. 
 
 trample 'ure puuli. 
 
 translate 'olisi wala. 
 
 travel Slide, laehi, lai henue, llu. 
 
 tread puuli, 'uri. 
 
 tree 'ai, dango. 
 
 tree fern diniwe. 
 
 tremble ariri, asoso, nunurete. 
 
 trench aliholo. 
 
 irepang mwamwaa puri. 
 
 trickle mudimudi 'ura, mwimwdi 'ure. 
 
 trouble hu'ihu'i, kotaha, mohinge, rako 
 
 'aela, su'ehi. 
 true to'ohuu, wala'imoli. 
 trumpet 'Shuri. 
 trust noruto'o, puuto'o. 
 truth wala'imolinge. 
 try ahonga, dau adonga, dau ahonga, oho 1., 
 
 ohongi. 
 tub nime 2. 
 tug oke 1., wa'i 6. 
 tumble a'oho, domu, 'usu 11- 
 tumult ha'ipolanga, kotaha, 
 turn alihu'isi, alihu'ite'ini, 'Sliu, 'atomaa, 
 
 'atopuri, hiro, hi'usi, 'oli; ha'i'oli, 
 
 pulo, pu'o 3., saro 1.; lapi. ha'alili. 
 turn mena, ne'i. 
 turtle honu 1. 
 tusk niho. 
 
 twelve awala mwana me, awala mana rua. 
 twenty ro awala. 
 twice ha'aru'e. 
 twig akeake, 'ulu'ulu ni 'ei. 
 twilight saulehi, melumelu. 
 twin iu. 
 
 twine ha'a'angohi hiku, lolo 3., ta'ihikuhiku. 
 twinkling ma'aru talahi. 
 twirl hiro. 
 
 twist 'ango 2., kalite'i'a, pulosi. 
 two me. 
 
 ugly lio mamataku, loo mama'u. 
 
 ulcer oropa, osa. 
 
 umbrella ha'u 7. 
 
 unarmed to'o ro nime. 
 
 unawakened to'o lelengana. 
 
 unbind luhesi. 
 
 uncle ama-, uweli-, well-. 
 
 unclean lo'u 3 ; mada'a, maipo. 
 
 uncoiled awa tahu. 
 
 uncover 'ae 5., hu'esi. 
 
 under haha. oroha-. 
 
 understand rongo saai, rongo sae. 
 
 undo luhe. tahu'i. 
 
 undone 'aela, akera'i, luheta'i. 
 
 unfasten sikite'ini. 
 
 unfold 'aroka, rokasi. 
 
 unfurl tata'ini. 
 
 unhitch siki 1., takarara. 
 
 unhurt sapemawa. 
 
 unlace takarasi. 
 
 unless 'ai'aana, wa 'ohe. 
 
 unload salenga'ini, sangile'ini. 
 
 unmarried raori'i, saanau. 
 
 unravel matakara. 
 
 unripe kohu, mwaka. 
 
 unruly teroliu. 
 
 unskilful maumeuli. 
 
 untie 'aluhe, luhe. 
 
 until hulaana, lai teli. 
 
 untoward po'opo'oli'ili'i. 
 
 unwilling lalawa, sare'ini. 
 
 up 'ala'a, la'a, i haho, i lengi, ta'e, t&limaa, 
 
 ta'au. 
 upbraid ere, wala mwamwasu. 
 uplift ha'a'ure, sulu 1., tahela'ini; adj., langi- 
 
 lengi'e. 
 upon haho-, lengi-. 
 upright odo, odota'i. 
 uprooted aihu, 'a'uru. 
 upset kiiusi, qaoha'ini. 
 urge torangi. 
 urine mimi, wai. 
 us ka'elu, kolu; aka. aka'elu. 
 use helesi. 
 useless tototala. 
 utterly 'o'o 4. 
 
 vainly mwakule, tototala. 
 
 valley da'ideri'e. 
 
 vanish ahutata, wa'a 4. 
 
 vanity 'ai'aa, 'ahewa'a. 
 
 vapor laho'a, waha. 
 
 various dodola, ha'iaopa'i, ngelute. 
 
 vary aopa, hu'ite'i. 
 
 verge apiepi. 
 
 verse 'alo'u, lo'u'e. 
 
 very ha'ahuu'ei, ha'ahuu'ana, raka, to'ohuu- 
 
 ngana, to'ohuunge'i. 
 vex 'a'ada'ini, ha'aaauni, kotaahi, waweta'a. 
 village huuilume, outeni nima, poona; m«/.,'iola. 
 vine walo. 
 violate maha. 
 virgin keni raori'i. 
 visit maakali, maatoli, inaatoto. 
 voice wala. 
 void qala, waawaa. 
 vomit 'a'ana, moa. 
 vow ha'a'apu. 
 voyage alidanga. 
 
 wade ulu 4. 
 
 wag hi'ute'ini, teile'ini. 
 wages holite, waaite. 
 
 wagtail hi'uhi'u kape, hi'uhi'u qote, kiuklu rape. 
 wail ngarasi, ulo 1. 
 wait i'o loosi, ma'ohi, totori. 
 wake ha'alio, lio 1. 
 walk awe, qaqahe. 
 wall liliheu, para, tete. 
 wallow sude, tataipeipe. 
 wander lae ha'iliu, takalo. 
 wane kumwe. 
 
 want 'ai'aa, meiraeile'ini,|tale; sae to'o, sare 
 to'o.
 
 WANTON 
 
 136 
 
 wanton mwamwaki, tale'i. 
 
 war ipelunga, ohotaa. 
 
 ward talaahu'e, talohi. 
 
 warm madoro, wawai, osiosl. 
 
 warn aha tahani, ha'apasu. 
 
 wart uhi 2. 
 
 wary loo 2. 
 
 wash hoda, loto. 
 
 wasp niniho, puu 2. 
 
 waste totowa'e. wa'e 1., wa'eta'ini, ware; sala. 
 
 watch ha'akale, ha'amaesi 2., lio isuli, kakali. 
 
 water wai 1.; v., hu'i 3., korukoru, mimi. 
 
 waterfall pie 1. 
 
 waterhole kakalu, kilu. 
 
 waterspout saisesu, sa'usesu. 
 
 wave 'a'aronga, hai naho, hiiu ni 'esi. 
 
 wave v., sale 2., waiwei 1. 
 
 waver sae ruerua'a. 
 
 way tala 1. 
 
 waylay 'aqata'ini, toli loosi. 
 
 we i'emelu. ika'elu, ikolu; i'emere'i, ikara, ikure. 
 
 weak maleqeleqe, mamaela'a, qeto. 
 
 weapon raae 7., raisinge. 
 
 wear to'oni 1. 
 
 weary ha'awe'o, we'o. 
 
 weave ha'u 9. 
 
 web lawa. 
 
 wed tola keni. 
 
 wedding aharota. 
 
 weed amu 4., ta'ahu. 
 
 weep ngara, ulo 1. 
 
 7uell awaa, mware'a. 
 
 west hao, i 'ano, suulana sato. 
 
 wet ha'amedo, ha'aqini; medo, qesa'a, qini'a. 
 
 whale pusu 'esi. 
 
 what taa 2., taha. 
 
 when i nganite, maholona. 
 
 whence kei hei, 'urei tei. 
 
 where ihei, itei, lehuna, le'une. 
 
 whet danuhi. 
 
 whether 'ohe, 'ohi'a. 
 
 which ihei, itei. 
 
 while ha'awali, maholo. 
 
 whip rapu. 
 
 whisper sawaru. 
 
 whistle wadi. 
 
 7vhite erete'a, mero, rere'a; haka, poro ni haka 
 
 who atei. 
 
 whole ha'ileku, laku, pupupu. 
 
 whose atei, 'ana atei, nana atei. 
 
 why ana e 'ue, e 'ue, uritaa. 
 
 wick sikeri. 
 
 wicked 'aela, tata'ala, talili. 
 
 wickedness oraha'a, talilinge. 
 
 wide 'aroka, atalawa. 
 
 widow na'o 6. 
 
 wife hu'e 2., keni. 
 
 wig uhumae. 
 
 wild loo 2., looloo'a. 
 
 wile makemaketa, raomae. 
 wilful talili, raramaa. 
 7vill sae. 
 
 willing mwa'emwa'e. 
 uince niniko'a. 
 ivind dani, dangi, ooru. 
 windbound noruhono. 
 wing 'apa'apa. 
 wink ma'aru. 
 winter aau, rata 4. 
 wipe 'usuri. 
 
 wise saai ola, sae nanau, salema'i. 
 wish sae to'o, sare to'o. 
 witchcraft saru'e, si'onga. 
 wither heko, nunulu, rara 3., rarasi. 
 with ana 2., ani 2.; mai 3., pe'i 2. 
 within hai 2., i lalo, ta'i, vviii. 
 without i 'amaa, i su'e; 'aho'a. 
 withstand dau honosi, haukama, 'are honosi. 
 wizard mvvane kurekure. 
 woman hu'e 2., keni. 
 womb i'e 3. 
 
 wonder ane, pangata'ini; n., anoa, hu'ihu'ite. 
 wood 'ai, dango. 
 word wala. 
 work asu, daumwa. 
 world walumalau. 
 worm niwaamwaa, mwaadule. 
 worn lahu. 
 
 worship palo, qao ola. 
 worry 'a'ada'ini, tolaa'i. 
 wound halata, hilehile, malaka. 
 wrap aluhi, dele, inehu'i, ulo. 
 wreath mahe. 
 wrestle ako. 
 wreck qa'ata'ini. 
 wring losi, ni'i losi. 
 wrinkle nuku. 
 write usu 2. 
 writhe huhu laolao. 
 
 urong dau hu'isi, diiu pele, dau wala; aopa, 
 takalo. 
 
 yam hana 1., olopa'i, uhi 1. 
 
 yard qii'uli 'apala; lolata; i 'amaa. 
 
 yawn ahimawa. 
 
 yaws alo'a. 
 
 year halisi. 
 
 yellow saosaola. 
 
 yes 'a'u, i'au, 'o si'u'e, si'ola. 
 
 yesterday nonola; day before nonola wau. 
 
 yet ue 1. 
 
 yoke tori. 
 
 yonder paro, wau 1. 
 
 you i'oe, i'amu, i'omu, i'omolu; dual, i'omoro'i, 
 
 i'omoru'e. 
 youth saanau. 
 
 zigzag saro ni mwaa.
 
 APPENDICES 
 
 A BRIEF GRAMMAR OF SA'A AND ULAWA. 
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 HISTORICAL NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 
 
 "YACHTING" IN MELANESIA. 
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 137
 
 A BRIEF GRAMMAR OF SA'A AND ULAWA. 
 
 THE ALPHABET. 
 
 No letters are used in this dictionary with arbitrarily assigned values. 
 In all the books printed in the two languages for the use of native 
 readers two italic letters are used, n and m; n is printed for ng the palatal 
 nasal to which n frequently mutates, and w is printed for mw which 
 represents a lightly vocalized m. In this grammar and in the dictionary 
 these two letters are given in full as ng andmw which are to be under- 
 stood as representing those sounds of which the value has hitherto been 
 represented in Sa*a and Ulawa texts by the italic letters n and m. 
 
 The vowels are a, e, i, o, u, with the Italian sounds. All of these 
 vowels may be long or short, the long sound being represented by 
 doubling the vowel. Both Sa*a and Ulawa are fond of vowel sounds; 
 many words consist only of vowels. The habit of dropping certain 
 consonants is largely responsible for this excess of vowel sounds. 
 Closed syllables do not exist and every word ends with a vowel. 
 
 In Sa'a the vowel a in certain words changes to e when i or u or the 
 verbal particle ko precedes it; the vowel following this a is always 
 either i or «, this a is marked in the grammar and in the dictionary by 
 the employment of the dieresis, a. In many words where the differ- 
 ence between the Sa'a and Ulawa forms consists only of the change of 
 this a to e the Sa'a form is the only one recorded. This change of 
 vowel is known to the people of Ulawa, but they are not so careful 
 about its observance as are the people of Sa'a; in certain words they 
 change a to e where there is no preceding i or u, thus mat hither, Sa'a 
 po'o mat on this side, Ulawa po^o met. The change of vowel may be 
 made in Ulawa at the beginning of a word, but the genius of the lan- 
 guage is to refuse to make it at the end of the word; U. hdnua village, 
 i henua in the village, S. i henue, but in Ulawa the addition of the 
 demonstrative ni causes the final a to change to e, i henueni in that 
 village. The suffixed pronouns au of the first singular and a of the third 
 singular change in Sa'a to eu and e respectively after i or w, but Ulawa 
 does not observe this rule. In some words where Sa'a changes final e 
 to a Ulawa keeps to e; nike mother, S. nikana his mother, U. nikena. 
 
 The diphthongs are ae, ai, ao, au, ei, ou, as in sae^ maiy haOy rauy meiy 
 houy pronounced respectively as in the English words eye, iron, hour, 
 how, hey, oh. 
 
 The consonants are h; k; d, t; p, q; w; 1, r; s; m, mw, n, ng. 
 
 The k is hard and there is no g; where the Melanesian g occurs in 
 other languages, there is a decided break in the pronunciation of the 
 cognate word in Sa'a and Ulawa; e. g., Mota iga fish, Sa'a iV, Ulawa i'a. 
 
 Note. — ^This grammar has been compiled from the larger separate grammars published by 
 the present writer. 
 
 139
 
 140 GRAMMAR OF SA A AND ULAWA. 
 
 There is no preface of n in the sound of d, which holds of all the lan- 
 guages of Malaita and is in contrast with the principle of prefacing the 
 mutes with the nasal of their proper series which extends in Melanesia 
 as far as Fiji. The nearest English equivalent to the sound of d in 
 Sa'a and Ulawa is dr; before i d is sounded as ch in church. 
 
 To pronounce the t the tongue is pressed against the teeth and the 
 breath forced outward, the teeth being kept fairly close together, then 
 the tongue is relaxed and dropped and the breath escapes with an 
 explosive sound. Sa'a often prefers d where Ulawa has t. 
 
 The sound represented by q is pzv and p and q are interchangeable in 
 certain words, e. g., pongi, qongi to promise. In some words Ulawa has 
 p where Sa'a prefers q, e. g., U. pito, S. qito sprout. 
 
 The sounds of 1 and r are distinct, and both are trilled. There is a 
 change of I ton in Ulawa, i daluma for i danuma in the middle, and Ulawa 
 at times has 1 where Sa'a has r, U. tataloha, S. tataroha news, report. 
 
 In addition to the three nasals ng, n, m there is a variant upon the 
 labial nasal, mw a semivocalization of the clear m. The pronunciation 
 of the palatal nasal ng is that of ng in sing. 
 
 Beside the loss of the Melanesian g, as shown before, the t, 1, k and 
 h are likewise dropped in many words and the loss of the letter is shown 
 by a break in the pronunciation and indicated to the eye by the employ- 
 ment of inverted comma *; 'o'f to break, Fl. goti; *aa green parrot, San 
 Cr. kaka. This break has not been marked in the books used by the 
 natives, but because of its importance in comparison of the languages it 
 has been indicated in this dictionary. In the reduplication of verbs 
 the inner consonant is often dropped in the former member of the dupli- 
 cated form and there is a corresponding break in the pronunciation; 
 Florida also drops the inner consonant in reduplication ,but one does 
 not hear any such break in the sound as in Sa'a and Ulawa. 
 
 Contractions are common, especially when the locative i is used; 
 
 lai for lae i, tai for tae i, ke'i for ke'u i, pe'e for pe'ie, sdune for sdunie 
 
 kill him. 
 
 ARTICLES. 
 
 Sa'a {a) Demonstrative Sing, nga, me'i, mi, hoi, hou, hdi. 
 
 Plur. viui, mu, mo. 
 
 (b) Personal a. 
 
 Ulawa {a) Demonstrative Sing, nga, mdsi, hoi, hou, hdi. 
 
 Plur. mwai, mzva, mo. 
 
 (b) Personal a. 
 
 I . In Sa'a nouns in the singular are used without an article, in Ulawa 
 there is a more frequent use of nga in the singular, and parts of the body 
 are preceded by nga, which is not the case in Sa'a. In Sa'a nga signi- 
 fies a or any and is used only in this sense. This detail is characteristic 
 of the language as a whole, Sa'a is far more particular in its usages and 
 is more highly specialized than Ulawa. Nga is used with the inter- 
 rogative taa, taha what, with ikei U. where, ngaihei who? The nouns 
 ini S., He U., both meaning one, are used with nga; ta'ena ngaini S. 
 ta'ana ngaile U. every one; laa U., a person, is preceded by nga.
 
 GRAMMAR OK Sa'a AND ULAWA. I4I 
 
 2. me^i and mdsi denote a part, a piece; both also serve as diminu- 
 tives in either a depreciatory or an endearing sense, me'i keni reu a 
 handmaid, mdsi mzvane inau dear hid. I he form mesi may be used even 
 when the preceding vowel is not i or u, mesi kaleku my child. Nga 
 and wwfli may precede mdsi; nga mdsi taha what thing is it, mwai mesi 
 sae different minds. 
 
 3. mi is found with sala, mi sala a piece of cloth. 
 
 4. hoi is used of things spherical in shape, hoi niu a coconut, hoi hue 
 a hen's egg, 7iga hoi tahani what fruit is that? Also in connection with 
 other substantives naming objects not globular, hoi le a fish, hoi nemo 
 a rain squall. 
 
 hou is used more commonly in Ulawa, hoi hudi S., hou hudi U. a 
 banana; houhi a yam, hou piia an areca nut; but Sa'a has hou 'atea a 
 coconut water bottle, hou wei a bamboo water-carrier. 
 
 5. hdimtht sense of a, an, one, is used with certain words; A^/j^w/^/ii 
 an evening, hdidinge a day, hdi lama a pool, nga hdizvala a word, hdi 
 holaa a calm. In some places where Sa'a has hdi Ulawa uses hau; 
 hdidinge S., haudinga U. a day; and this hdi may be a contraction of hau 
 iy where i is the genitive and hau denotes a period of time. 
 
 6. maa eye or point is used with nga to indicate one, of sticks or 
 matches; also with the genitive z S.or wiU., maai laenga, a going (Ulawa 
 generally has nga preceding maa); 'olu maai qaoolanga three prayings. 
 
 7. muiy mu, mwai, mwa all show plurality; nga may be prefixed; ynu 
 is the form commonly used in Sa'a, and, as is true of mzva, is always 
 used before a vowel or h; mo is used with words beginning with the 
 vowel 0, and is more commonly used in Sa'a than in Ulawa. 
 
 8. The personal article is a. This is used with all proper names, male 
 or female, native or foreign, and also with nouns expressing relationship 
 or kindred. Any common noun becomes by the use of the personal 
 article a a proper noun; a palopalo the priest, a me'i zvala the Word, a 
 porona the person, so-and-so. After the usage common to the Oceanic 
 family the employment of the personal article with the common noun 
 meaning thing supplies the locution for an indefinite personality, a ola 
 so-and-so. 
 
 NOUNS. 
 
 I. Nouns with possessive suffixes: Certain nouns take the suffixed 
 pronouns denoting the possessor. These are nouns denoting: 
 
 a. Parts of the body: maa eye, maamu your eye; nime hand, nimana 
 his hand; qd^u head, qd^uku my head. 
 
 h. Certain states or doings of men, life, death, speech, custom, goings : 
 mae to die, maetana his death; zvala word, walaku my word; lae to go, 
 laehana his journey, 
 
 c. Position, end, middle, top: ngengedena its end, danumeku my 
 waist, i hahona on top of it.
 
 142 GRAMMAR OF Sa'a AND ULAWA. 
 
 d. All the words expressing relationship or kindred except those for 
 wife and husband and also mwela S. 'elekale U. child. 
 
 These nouns are marked in the dictionary with {ku). Certain of 
 this class are marked with {na, ni) which denotes that the pronoun is 
 suffixed only in the third person, and in the case of ni is used of things 
 only. In the case of the remaining nouns possession is denoted by the 
 addition of the ordinary personal pronouns. 
 
 2. Formation of nouns: Nouns which have a special termination 
 showing them to be nouns substantive are {a) verbal nouns, and {h) 
 independent nouns. 
 
 a. Verbal nouns are formed from verbs by the terminations nga^ td, 
 lay laa, hd, haa^ a: mae to die, maenga death, maeta death feast, maelaa 
 S. maeha U. sickness; si'o to harm, siohaa evil plight; hatale to go along 
 the beach, hatalea, shore, coast. 
 
 The form Id generally denotes the gerundive and always has the 
 suffixed pronoun attached. Similarly hd generally denotes a gerundive 
 and is seldom used without the suffixed pronoun. In the dictionary 
 words ending in hd, Id, td, which are never used without a suffixed pro- 
 noun, have the hyphen attached. 
 
 There are certain adjectives to which the termination nga is attached, 
 diana good, diananga goodness; *aela bad, 'aelanga badness, pdine 
 pdinanga badness; but it is probable that these adjectives are really 
 verbs. (See diana.) 
 
 h. Independent nouns: The only termination is na, and this is 
 (i) added to nouns which express relationship or kindred, and (2) 
 appears also to be attached to cardinal numerals to form ordinals. 
 
 1. Nouns so formed are always preceded by certain prefixes which 
 mark reciprocity of relationship or of kindred, ma, mzua, hdH, the nu- 
 meral ro two, or the plural articles mu and mwa: nike mother, ro hdH 
 nikena mother and child, ro hd^i nikana ineu my wife and child; mu 
 mwa 'asine brethren. 
 
 2. Numerals: *o/w three, *o/wn<f third. 
 
 As stated before, gerundives are formed by the addition of the suf- 
 fixed pronouns to forms in Id, hd. Tala'ae to begin, tala'aehana its 
 beginning; ha'auri to save, ha' aurileku my savior. The third person 
 possessive is added to noun forms in hd: repo ripe, repohaana its old 
 age, maturity. To neuter verbs the suffix ni or H is added : horo to 
 kill, horo'i v. tr., horo'ilana the killing of him, sdu to kill, sduni v. tr., 
 sdunilada the killing of them. 
 
 In Ulav^a certain nouns have double noun termination: weesi to 
 catch fish, zveesingaha fishing; alida to travel by sea, alidangaha a voy- 
 age; tale to be short of, talengaha a shortage. 
 
 3. Genitive relation: The genitive relation of nouns one to another 
 is effected by the use of the preposition ni or the shorter form i, the 
 latter being used more commonly in Sa'a, mzvane ni Sa'a a Sa*a man, 
 zualo ni 'a'a'o a fishing-line, poloi haa a piece of money, *uui he'u a star.
 
 GRAMMAR OF SA*A AND ULAWA. I43 
 
 Both of these forms are also used to denote purpose: noko deu ni lae 
 I am making to go, 'oke lae zvai {tvau i) leesie, go and see it. 
 
 Other forms of the genitive are li, si: hdulihane, maaliholo, qd^usi 
 henuej tangisi hudi. 
 
 A genitive relation is also shown by the use of the suffixed pronoun 
 of the third person singular or plural in agreement with the idea 
 expressed in the second noun of the pair; i reune tala by the side of the 
 way, ulolada mditale the cry of the poor. The suffixed pronoun may be 
 used in the singular when the idea is collective or the second noun car- 
 ries the sense of totality, ilengine mu nume on the tops of the houses. 
 
 The ordinary possessive idea is shown by simple juxtaposition: 
 nima inau my house, 'usu ingeHe his dog. 
 
 The instrumental prefix i is common: kdu to hook, ikeu z hook for 
 gathering fruit; ddnu to bale, idenu a baler. 
 
 4. Plural: Definite plurality is marked by the presence of the arti- 
 cles mui, mu, mzvai, mwa, used of both persons and things; nga may be 
 prefixed to these and the word htinge, many, may be added: mu 'inoni, 
 nga mu 'inoniy men, mwa hdnua hunga the crowd, everybody. 
 
 The numeral walu eight is used to express an indefinite number: 
 walu henue all the lands, walu malau all the islands, the world, walu- 
 tana ola S., waluteni ola U. every thing. 
 
 To a noun dhuta- denoting totality {dhu to be complete) the pro- 
 noun of the third person singular and of all persons in the plural is 
 suffixed in agreement with the noun: dhutana sapeku my whole body, 
 dhutana sapeda all their bodies, sapeda dhutada the bodies of them all, 
 dhutakara'i both of us, dhutamelu all of us. 
 
 To to'ohuu S. real, nga is suffixed and the personal pronoun na is 
 added: to'ohuungana nga ola, the real thing, mu to'ohuunge'i ola real 
 things. 
 
 To itei S. which, ta is suffixed and the personal pronoun na is added: 
 iteitana one, any. This is used only with the negative particles ka'a, 
 sa'a, and thus comes to mean, no one, nothing: e ka'a iteitana nga meH 
 ola there is nothing at all. With this may be compared the use of 
 isei in Mota as the indefinite pronoun, some one. 
 
 A noun hike is used with the suffixed pronoun to express of, from 
 among: e ro ini hikada two men of them. 
 
 Two nouns, mwai U. mzvei S. and kei, are used with the adjective 
 tata'ala or with its short form ta'a to express an endearing or a commis- 
 erating sense; mwai, mwei being used of men, kei of women: mwai 
 tata'ala inau my poor fellow, kei ta'a pdine dear lady. 
 
 Sa'a has a plural in maeni which is generally used in the vocative: 
 viaeni Hnoni sirs, maeni mwela children. 
 
 In mwela child the plural is formed by reduplication, mwemzvela S. 
 children. 
 
 A unit is expressed in Sa'a by 'ata: 'enite *ata how many, 'e ro 'ata 
 two.
 
 144 
 
 GRAMMAR OF SA A AND ULAWA. 
 
 Certain nouns meaning one, ite U., He U., 'eta S., ini S., are used with 
 or without ngay and with 7iga mil or nga mzva: ngaite ola a different 
 thing, ta mdi ngaile give me one, nga mzvaite 'inoni certain persons, nga 
 mzvaile some, nga' eta 'inoni another, a different man, nga 7nuini some. 
 
 Alai U., ala U., alei S. is used as a noun of multitude: alai Mwado'a 
 you people of Mwado'a, alaile inati my people, ala mzvane you men, 
 alei 'inoni you people, alei ola the persons, alei saanau the young men. 
 
 The word ngdu is used familiarly to children of each sex as a voca- 
 tive: ro ngdu you two children. 
 
 5. There is no grammatical gender: The words mzvane male, keni and 
 qaqa female, are added when the noun does not carry a sex distinction. 
 
 6. Relationship or kindred: With the two exceptions of mama' a, 
 ma'a father and nike mother in vocative employment, the nouns of 
 relationship are always used: 
 
 a. With a suffixed pronoun, 'asikii my brother, never 'asi\ 
 
 b. With the termination nd and with a reciprocal prefix hd'i or mzva: 
 ro hd'i nikana mother and child, ro mzva 'adine brethren, mu mzua'asine 
 brothers. 
 
 The terms mama' a father and teitei in the vocative are addressed by 
 the parent hypocoristically to the boy or girl. 
 
 The word denoting friend is always used with the suffixed pronoun, 
 malahuku my friend, ro hd'i malahune the two friends. 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 According as they are employed, pronouns may be classified as, 
 (a) those used as the subject or object of a verb; (b) those suffixed to 
 a verb or to a preposition as objects; (c) those suffixed to nouns 
 substantive. 
 
 A. PRONOUNS USED AS SUBJECT OR OBJECT OF A VERB. 
 
 Singular: 
 
 Sa'a. 
 
 1. tneu, nou, no, ne. 
 
 2. i*oe, ' 0. 
 
 3. inge'ie, nge'ie, inge'i, nge' {, 
 
 nge, e. 
 Dual: 
 
 Inclusive: i. ikure, kure. 
 
 Exclusive: l. i' emere' i, ' emere' i, ' emeru' e, 
 
 meru' e, mere' i, mere. 
 
 2. i'omoro'i, ' omoro' i, mora' i, 
 
 moro, i' omoru' e, ' omoru e, 
 moru' e. 
 
 3. ikireru'e, kireru'e, kereru'e. 
 Plural: 
 
 Inclusive 
 
 Singular: 
 
 Dual: 
 
 Inclusive: 
 Exclusive: 
 
 I. iki'e, ki'e, ikolu, kolu. 
 Exclusive: l. i'emi, 'emi, lemelu, 'emelu, 
 melu. 
 i'omu, 'omu, i'omolu, 'omolu, 
 
 molu. 
 ikire, kire, ikira'elu, kira'elu. 
 
 Plural: 
 Inclusive: 
 Exclusive: 
 
 Ulawa. 
 
 1. inau, nau, na, ne. 
 
 2. i'oe, '0. 
 
 3. inge'ia, nge'ia, nge, e. 
 
 I. ikara'i, karat, ikara, kara. 
 
 1. V emere' i, 'emere'i, mere'i, mere. 
 
 2. i'omoro'i, 'omoro'i, moro'i, 
 
 moro. 
 
 3. ikoro'i, koro'i, koro. 
 
 2. 
 
 1. iki'a, ki'a, ika'elu, ka'elu. 
 
 1. i'ami, 'ami, i' emelu, 'emelu, 
 melu. 
 
 2. i'amu, 'amu, i'omolu, 'omolu, 
 molu. 
 
 3. ikire'i, ikira, kira, ikira'elu, 
 kira'elu, kelu, kilu. 
 
 I. The use of the initial i gives distinctness and force. The forms 
 beginning with i are never used by themselves as the subject, but are
 
 i 
 
 GRAMMAR OF SA A AND ULAWA. I45 
 
 always accompanied by the shorter forms without i, these latter are 
 used as subject. Similarly inge'ie is always followed by e. 
 
 2. The forms in the singular are never used as the object of a verb or 
 of a preposition with the single exceptionof 'o. Forms without / are used 
 in the dual and plural first and second persons as the object of a verb. 
 
 3. The forms no and 7ie are used with the verbal particles of the same 
 vowel facies, no with ko of general time, ne with ke and ke'i of future 
 time, na with *« of general time, and ne with V future. 
 
 4. Nge is used before proper names, and the personal article a 
 coalesces, ngea Awao e lae Awao has gone. It is also used in phrases: 
 so nge well then, nge ni 'oto that is it, e mae nge he is done for now. 
 
 5. E is used as the subject of a verb. It is also used following the 
 longer forms for the sake of emphasis: inge'ie nge'ie e 'unue he said it. 
 It is equivalent also to there is, it is: ^ niadoro it is hot, e qale ola there 
 is nothing. It follows a noun as a secondary subject: nemo e nemo 
 the rain rains, mwa hmiua e ruru the people came together; similarly 
 it may follow a pronoun, kiratei e lae who went? 
 
 6. The forms in -lu denote a more restricted number of persons, 
 but they are not used to form a trinal number. Sa'a is more careful 
 than Ulawa in the proper use of these different forms. 
 
 7. The pronouns of the third person singular and plural may be used 
 of impersonal or of inanimate objects. Kire is used to form a passive: 
 kire 'unue it has been said, lit. they have said it, mu i'e kire hahi'i 'oto 
 have the fish been cooked.'' Kire followed by the personal article a 
 and ola thing or a proper name is used also to denote a company or 
 party: kiraa ola, So-and-so's party, kiraa Dora Dora's people. 
 
 8. The forms in i are used to denote possession: poo ineu my pig, 
 *elekale lemere'i the child of us two, poro inge'ie her husband, hu'e i'oe 
 thy wife. 
 
 9. A chief or person of importance is always addressed in the dual, 
 moro or molu; and a mother, either by herself or with her child, is 
 addressed as moro. 
 
 B. PRONOUNS SUFFIXED TO VERBS OR TO PREPOSITIONS AS OBJECT. 
 
 Sa'a. Ulawa. 
 
 Singular: Singular: 
 
 1. au. 
 
 2. 'o. 
 
 3. a. 
 Dual: 
 
 Inclusive: l. kara'i, kara. 
 Exclusive: i. 'emere'i, mere'i, mere. 
 
 2. 'omoro'i, moro't, moro. 
 
 3. raru'a, raru'i. 
 Plural: 
 
 Inclusive: i. ki'a, ka'elu. 
 
 Exclusive: i. 'ami, melu. 
 
 2. amu, 'omolv, molu, 
 
 3. ra, ra'elu, 'i. 
 
 Examples of usage are: noko leesi'o I see thee, e 'unue hunieu he told 
 me. When the verb ends in a and au is suffixed only one a is sounded. 
 
 
 I. 
 2. 
 
 au. 
 '0. 
 
 Dual: 
 
 Inclusive: 
 
 3- 
 I. 
 
 a. 
 
 kure. 
 
 Exclusive: 
 
 I. 
 
 'emere'i, 'emeru'e, mere'i, mere. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 'omoro'i, moro'i, moro. 
 
 Plural: 
 Inclusive: 
 Exclusive: 
 
 3- 
 
 I. 
 I. 
 
 2. 
 
 rdru'e, raru'i. 
 
 ki'e, kolu. 
 
 'emi, melu. 
 
 'oviu, 'oviolu, molu. 
 
 
 3- 
 
 rd, ra'elu, 'i.
 
 146 
 
 GRAMMAR OF SA*A AND ULAWA. 
 
 The form a is suffixed to a transitive verb as an anticipatory object: 
 nou kaa leesie nga 'inoni I did not see-him a person, melu helesie 'oto 
 mu ola we have done-it the things. 
 
 The forms a, rd may be used of inanimate or impersonal objects. 
 
 The form 'i is used in place of rd when things and not persons are 
 the object of the verb: lae wau hunii go and fetch them. 
 
 C. PRONOUNS SUFFIXED TO NOUNS OR TO VERBAL NOUNS USED AS PREP- 
 OSITIONS, OR TO GERUNDIVES. 
 
 Singular: 
 
 Sa'a. 
 
 1. ku. 
 
 2. mu. 
 
 3. nd. 
 
 Ulawa. 
 
 Singular: 
 
 Dual: 
 
 Inclusive: i. karat. 
 Exclusive: i. mere'i. 
 
 Plural: 
 Inclusive: 
 
 2. moro I, vioro. 
 
 3. ddru'e. 
 
 1. ka, ka'elu. 
 Exclusive: i. mdmi, melu. 
 
 2. miu, molu. 
 
 3. ddy da'elu; ni. 
 
 1. ku. 
 
 2. mu. 
 
 3. na. 
 Dual: 
 
 Inclusive: I. kara'i, kara. 
 Exclusive: l. mere'i, mere. 
 
 2. moro'i, moro. 
 
 3. daru'i. 
 Plural: 
 
 Inclusive: i. ka, ka'elu. 
 Exclusive: i. mdmi, melu. 
 
 2. miu, molu. 
 
 3. da, da'elu; ni. 
 
 1. These are the pronouns denoting possession and they are suffixds 
 to a certain class of nouns only, those which denote the names of paret 
 of the body, or of family relationships, or of things in close relation- 
 ship to the possessor; in all other cases possession is denoted by the use 
 of the ordinary personal pronouns. 
 
 2. Of the plural forms those ending in lu denote a restriction in the 
 number of the persons concerned. 
 
 3. When things are in question ni is used in place of dd: lai ne'i i 
 talani put the things in their places. 
 
 4. Verbal nouns used as prepositions: honotaku opposite me, to 
 meet me, honota is in form a verbal noun but it is not in independent 
 
 use as a word. 
 
 5. In words like sieku at my house, saadaelu at their house, 
 maraamu by yourself, sisingana over against it, the roots are evidently 
 nouns but they do not occur in independent use. In the dictionary 
 all such words are followed by a hyphen, e. g., saa-. 
 
 D. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 These are 'zV, 'ienini, ni S., inihou, nihou, ni U., this. 
 
 ngeeiia, waune S.; iniwau^ niwaUy wau7ii U., that. 
 
 1. 'ienini is more forcible than He; ni is used suffixed to nouns, to 
 personal pronouns, to uri thus, and to siiri today, in Ulawa it is also 
 suffixed to adjectives and adverbs. 
 
 2. ena is used by itself in Sa'a as a demonstrative, nge nou lae mdi 
 ena that is why I came; wau is the adverb meaning there. In certain 
 villages in Ulawa a dem.onstrative ini is used in the sense of "that is it."
 
 GRAMMAR OF Sa'a AND ULAWA. I47 
 
 3. nd is suffixed to nouns and pronouns and to certain adverbs to 
 give point and directness, its use is more common in Sa'a than inlllawa; 
 mtvalana the people; a mwaend that person, mo ola 'oko qao'i ne the 
 things that thou doest; taaune over there, urine^ urinena thus, in that 
 manner. 
 
 A'^a is also used after the negatives ha ike, qa'ikey ha'ike na, ha ike ena 
 no, not that; and after ^oto^ inge'i *oto na that is it. 
 
 E. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The words used are tei who; taa S., taha U., what. The personal 
 article a makes atei who (singular) kiratei plural. Both of these words 
 are nouns. 
 
 1 . atei is used for whose, ola atei whose thing, atei ola He to whom does 
 this belong? Tei stands for the name of the person and atei means, 
 what is the name ? atei moro lae mdi who came with you ? The demon- 
 strative ni may be added: atei ni satamu what (who) is your nam.e.^ 
 
 In Sa'a atei has an indefinite use, atei e manata'inie who knows! 
 
 2. With taa, taha, the definite article nga is used; nga taa, nga ola 
 taa, 7iga taha w^hat? The demonstrative ni may be added; nga taa ni 
 e 'mine what said he? Taa, taha, may mean of what sort? hoi la 
 iaha7ii what sort offish? With the adverb uri thus taa, taha, make 
 uritaa, uritaha of what sort? how? in what way? In Ulawa assent is 
 shown by taha with ^oto, a particle denoting completed action; inge'ia 
 tahato '0 'unueni it is as you have said. 
 
 3. In Ulawa the interrogative adverb ihei is used as a pronoun: 
 nga mzvane ihei ni what man ? ngaihei niweu who is that there ? When 
 the question is which or where of two things Sa'a uses itei and Ulawa 
 ihei: 'oko sare ngdu itei what (where) will you eat? In Sa'a nge is 
 prefixed to itei: ngeitei mzvane what man? ngeitei lioa what spirit? 
 
 F. INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 
 
 The uses of ini, 'eta S., He, ite U., one, have been dealt with under 
 nouns. With the exception of He these words prefixed by nga, nga mu, 
 nga mzvai, are used as signifying some, other, different. 
 
 1. Hdlu means some. In Sa'a the genitive i is suffixed: nga mu 
 helui 'inoni S., 7iga mzva hdlu 'inoni U., some men. The pronoun na 
 may be suffixed: hdluna ngaini, hdluna ngaile one here and there. 
 
 2. /^nirt^ifl is used in Sa'a with the negative particle ka'a as meaning 
 no one: e ka'a iteitana ngaini there is no one. 
 
 3. Ta'ena, ta' eta' ena S., ta'ana, ta'ata'ana U., mean every: taena 
 ngaini every person. Ola thing and le'u S. lehu U. are used in the 
 sense of any: nou kaa to'oana nga le'u I have not anything, e ta nga 
 lehu ana he took some of it. 
 
 4. Mzvamzuanga S. manganga U. are used with ini. He, to express the 
 sense of a few: 7nzvam:cangaini e saaie only a few know it.
 
 148 GRAMMAR OF SA A AND ULAWA. 
 
 G. RELATIVE PRONOUNS. 
 
 There are no relative pronouns. Their place is supplied by various 
 locutions. 
 
 1. The suffixed pronoun: ineu 'ie kire usunge'inieu mei I am he whom 
 they sent. The addition of the demonstratives na S. ni U. serves to 
 make the meaning clearer: inge'te a porona kire ko 'unue he is the person 
 whom they speak of. 
 
 2. By the use of a coordinate clause : lemi 'ie mzvala e tahangie 'asi we 
 are the people who came through the sea. 
 
 H. POSSESSIVES. 
 
 There are three possessives in Sa*a and Ulawa. 
 
 I. The first is used only of things to eat and drink, with the stem 'a 
 to which the pronouns are suffixed. In the first and second person 
 singular V S. 'a U. is added, and this V or *a is replaced by 'i when 
 several things are in view for one person to eat. 
 
 Sa'a. Ulawa. 
 
 Singular: Singular: 
 
 
 I. 
 
 'dku'e, 'aku'L^ 
 
 
 2. 
 
 'dmu'e, 'amu'i. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 'ana. 
 
 Dual: 
 
 
 
 Inclusive: 
 
 I. 
 
 'akara'i, 'akani'e. 
 
 Exclusive: 
 
 I. 
 
 'amere'i, 'ameru'e. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 'amoro'i, 'amoro. 
 
 
 3. 
 
 'adaru'e, 'adaru'i. 
 
 Plural: 
 
 
 
 Inclusive: 
 
 I. 
 
 'aka, 'aka'elu. 
 
 Exclusive: 
 
 I. 
 
 'amami, 'amelu. 
 
 
 2. 
 
 'dmiuy 'amolu. 
 
 1. 'aku'a, 'aku'i. 
 
 2. 'amu'a, 'amu'i. 
 
 3. 'ana. 
 
 Dual: 
 
 Inclusive: i. 'akara'i. 
 Exclusive: l. 'amere'i. 
 
 2. 'amoro'i, 'amoro. 
 
 3. 'adaru'a, 'adaru'i. 
 Plural: 
 
 Inclusive: l. 'aka, 'aka'elu. 
 Exclusive: l. 'amami, 'amelu. 
 2. 'amiu, 'amolu, 
 3. 'ada, 'ada'elu. 3. 'ada, 'ada'elu. 
 
 Examples: hoi niu 'eku'e a coconut for me to eat, *o ta * amu'i take 
 them to eat. 
 
 In Ulawa the change of 'a to V after i or u in the first and second 
 singular is optional. 
 
 When the sense relates to food in general and not to a particular meal 
 the ordinary personal pronouns are employed: mu ngeulaa i'emelu our 
 food. 
 
 2. The second possessive is nd with which a suffixed pronoun is used 
 only as meaning mine, or, for me, and never with a noun, as e. g.y Maori 
 toku^ toku rima my hand. It is declined in the same way as the pre- 
 ceding: moola nana atei things for whom? moola namu'i things for you, 
 da nakarai take for you and me, dsu nemue work for you. In the 
 third person plural an additional form nani is used. 
 
 3. The third possessive is similar in form to the first, but is used 
 without the final a in the first and second persons singular, and the 
 stem is d and not 'd; likewise dni is found in place of ada in the third 
 person plural when the reference is to things and not to persons. The 
 meaning is belonging to, with, at: nga naihi emu have you a knife with
 
 GRAMMAR OF SA A AND ULAWA. I49 
 
 (on) you? '0 ta ana atei from whom did you get it? e tono ana wdi 
 inihou he drank of this water. This possessive is also used — 
 
 a. as the object of certain verbs to which the pronoun is not suffixed: 
 noii hiizvala'imoli ana I believed him. 
 
 h. when the object is separated from a transitive verb: e ha'ara'i 
 mumuni ana he called him secretly. In cases where a verb has been 
 rendered transitive by the addition of a suffix this suffix is omitted when 
 the third possessive is used, owing to the object being separated from 
 the verb: horo to beat, horo^i transitive, kire ko horo tata'ala aku they 
 beat me unmercifully. Certain verbs also employ this possessive as 
 the object instead of using the suffixed pronoun. Cf. to'o 2. 
 
 c. to show certain differences of meaning: e ere aku he forbade me, 
 e ere naku^e he spoke for my benefit; e dolosieu he asked my name, e 
 dolosie aku he asked me about it; also idiomatically ha'ata'inie aku show 
 it to me. The adjective 'aho'a^ apart from, is followed by this posses- 
 sive, *aho'a aku apart from me. So also is the preposition liuta'a S. 
 liutaha U. beyond: e lae liuta'aku he went beyond me. 
 
 d. in the third person plural dni is used of things: mu maholo dni the 
 times for them, ne'isae pdinadni think much of them. Cf. dni 2. 
 
 ADJECTIVES. 
 
 1. Words which are qualifying terms may also be used in the form of 
 verbs, but some may be used without verbal particles, following the 
 qualified word: poro pdine big man, 'elekale haora small child. 
 
 2. Some words have a form which is only used of adjectives, either of 
 termination or of prefix. 
 
 a. Adjectival terminations are '<3, Idy la*a, tdy ta'ay of which 'd and 
 Id are suffixed to nouns as well as to verbs but the others are suffixed to 
 verbs only. 
 
 'd: sane white ant sane'd infested with ants. An intensification of 
 meaning is given to certain adjectives by doubling the first syllable or 
 the first two syllables and by suffixing 'd: manola pure, manomanola'd 
 very pure, diena good, didiena'd very good. 
 
 'ala: sasu to smoke, sasuala smoky. 
 
 Id: 'usii a Aog^'usule possessing dogs, kohi to be beautiful, kohikohild 
 beautiful. 
 
 td: ta'ingelu with one accord, taingelute all together. 
 
 la* a: mae to be sick, mamaela'a weakly, sickly. 
 
 ta'a: repa to be curved, rerepata'a curved. 
 
 b. Adjectival prefixes are ma, viwa, mala, taka, tata, toto. 
 
 The prefixes 7na and mzva are common in words which may fairly be 
 called adjectives; like mala they show condition and are prefixed to 
 verbs: *o'i to break, ma'o'i broken, hiohto to bend, mzvahiohio swayed by 
 the wind, keke side, vialakeke on one side. 
 
 *a is prefixed to verbs and forms participles : Idngu to pluck up, *aldngu 
 detached, hdli to break, 'ahdli broken off.
 
 150 GRAMMAR OF SA A AND ULAWA. 
 
 iaka denotes spontaneity: hihe to loose, takaluhe come adrift. 
 
 tata^ toto denote condition: qelu to roll, tataqeluqelu headlong, qini wety 
 totoqini soaked. 
 
 3. Comparison: Degrees of comparison are shown by the use of 
 prepositions or adverbs, or by a simple positive statement. The prepo- 
 sitions used are mzvaani from, which always has the suffixed pronoun, 
 and liutaa S. liutaha U. beyond, in excess, which is followed by the 
 third possessive. 
 
 The adverbs emplo^'ed are kele S., 'ele U., walazvala U., waewae U., 
 hiito'o S., haahuuei S., haahuu'mii U. 
 
 A positive statement carries comparison by implication: He nihou e 
 diena^ He nizveu e 'aela this is good, that is bad, i. e.y this is better than 
 that; inihou e diena this is best. 
 
 VERBS. 
 
 Almost any word may be used as a verb by prefixing the verbal par- 
 ticles, but some words are naturally verbs as being the names of actions 
 and not things. There are also verbs which have special forms as such 
 by means of a prefix or termination. Verbal particles precede the verb, 
 they have a temporal force. 
 
 1. The verbal particles are koy key ke'i S.; 'a, V, 'anai U. The par- 
 ticles are written apart from the verb, but the speakers like to join them 
 to the governing pronouns of the first and second persons singular, and 
 the 'a of 'anai is joined in the same way. 
 
 a. The use of ko S. 'a U. marks the time as present, but only in so far 
 as the action is not regarded as past or future. The time having been 
 shown to be past ko and 'a take up the narrative, and the illative si may 
 be added. After ko the vowel a in certain words changes to e as it does 
 after a preceding i or u. The illative si may replace ko. 
 
 b. ke expresses a certain amount of futurity in the action, ke'i is used 
 of the definite future; V conveys the sense of let, as also does ke; 'e and 
 ke are also used following a negative, e kaa ola neke manata'inie I know 
 nothing. 
 
 The adverb muni U. to, in order that, is used as a subjunctive or 
 optative and is followed by V; mu7ii V contracts to wwnV, and similar 
 contractions occur with the pronouns kira and kaelu when followed 
 byV. 
 
 c. 'anai U. denotes the time as more or less future, the illative si 
 may be added. 
 
 No particle is used when the time is past, but 'oto and kd'u follow the 
 verb to denote a preterite. For the imperative no particle is employed. 
 
 2. Times and moods: A subjunctive is formed by ana if, when, used 
 in Sa'a with ko or key in Ulawa with 'a. Kosi by itself also denotes the 
 subjunctive. 
 
 Conditional affirmation is expressed by ha'alaa S. tdume'iy mune'i U.
 
 GRAMMAR OF Sa'a AND ULAWA. I5I 
 
 Mune'i U. and haro S. denote subsequence of action, the particles 'a 
 or ko precede them. 
 
 The illative is si and means then, thereupon, in that case, following 
 on, for the first time; the verbal particles ko, ke^ '<2, 'anai may precede it. 
 
 The particle kau follows the verb: {a) it denotes a preterite, ih) it 
 gives a sense of incompleteness to the action described, {c) it mitigates 
 the directness or harshness of a request or of a command. 
 
 3. Negative particles: The foregoing particles are not used in nega- 
 tive sentences. The negative particles are kaa, saa S.; qa'ike, qakcy 
 qa'i, qaUy si'e, si U. 
 
 a. Of these ka'a, qa'ike, qake, qaiy qale may be used either of present 
 or past time. 
 
 h. sauy sie are used of future time, and si*e and si are used as strong 
 dehortatives. 
 
 c. A negative imperative is used with mzvane lest, and with the dehor- 
 tative suuri don't. In Ulawa the particle V may be added after the 
 subject. Both suuri S. and si'e U. are used in negative conditional 
 sentences. In Sa'a the particle ke is used preceding suuri^ but it is not 
 used before mzvane. 
 
 d. The genitives nz, 2, are used to denote purpose. 
 
 4. Suffixes to verbs: There are certain terminations which, when 
 suffixed to neuter verbs or to verbs active in only a general way, make 
 them definitely transitive, or determine their action upon some object. 
 These are of two forms : 
 
 a. A consonant with i: hi^ lij mi, ni, ngi, siy or 'i by itself; e. g., 
 tonohiy potali, ddumi, raangi, maesi^ hoai. 
 
 A less common suffix is na: ara, arana; this suffix may possibly be 
 the ending of the word diana good or of pdina big, to each of which 
 words the suffix is added. 
 
 b. The termination dH which is suffixed by itself to nouns to convert 
 them into verbs, sato satod'i. The forms in 'i and d'i are also used 
 intransitively: pele by mischance, pele'i by mischance, 'olo'oloai to 
 stagger. When d'i is suffixed to verbs the genitive ni is also added; 
 su'u, sti'ue'ini; and d'ini forms a transitive suffix. To this form d'ini 
 the consonants h, /, m, n, 7ig, r, t are prefixed; e. g., 'urihe'iniy taheld'iniy 
 onomd'inif loond'iniy hi'inge'iniy sikerdHni^ papatdHni. 
 
 c. When the object is separated from the verb the suffixes '/, hi, etc., 
 are omitted and the third possessive is used as the object. 
 
 d. When the verb is used intransitively the ni of the compound 
 suffix is dropped. 
 
 e. Certain participles are formed from verbs by the addition of the 
 compound suffixes, ni being omitted; e. g., oromaiy rdpute'i, luheta'iy 
 moute'i. The compound suffix without ni is used intransitively, tae^ 
 taelai. 
 
 Some verbs take both forms of the suffix: rdpu, rdpusi, rdptite'ini; 
 *ala, 'alamiy 'alamd'ini; sikiy sikihiy sikihe'ini.
 
 152 GRAMMAR OF Sa'A AND ULAWA. 
 
 /. The syllabic suffix haini is used with certain verbs as meaning 
 with: olo to swim, olohaini to swim with a thing. 
 
 5. Prefixes to verbs: These are causative and reciprocal. 
 
 The causative is ha a; it may be prefixed to almost any word, and it 
 may be used with verbs which have a transitive suffix. 
 
 The reciprocal is hai. This sometimes denotes repetition or contin- 
 uance of an action. With the addition of the adverb /o'w again, hd^i 
 denotes a change or an addition. In haiamasi to have compassionate 
 feelings hai is comparable to Florida vei in veiarovi to take pity on. 
 
 6. Passive: The passive is expressed by the use of the third personal 
 pronoun plural hire S. kira U. as subject with the verb and the adverb 
 'oto already; kirey kira, are also used impersonally. 
 
 The gerundive is used with the verb lae, to go, in expression of the 
 passive: sdunilana e lae 'oto his being killed. This usage is more com- 
 mon in Sa'a. The force of the gerundive is either active or passive. 
 
 7. Reflexive verbs: The word mar aa- With suffixed pronouns denotes 
 reflexive action: e sdunie maraana he killed himself. 
 
 8. Reduplication: Verbs are reduplicated in three ways. There is no 
 diff"erence among the various forms beyond an intensification. In the dic- 
 tionary the reduplicated form is presented under the entry of the stem. 
 
 a. By repetition of the first syllable or of the first two syllables: 
 sulu, susulu; qdnio, qdniqenio. 
 
 h. By repetition of the whole word : dsu, dsuesu. 
 
 c. By repetition of the whole word with the omission in the former 
 member of the inner consonant: domu, do'udomu. This is found only 
 in Sa'a. In Ulawa there is also a repetition of the first syllable with 
 the addition of euphonic i: sdsu, sdisesu. 
 
 ADVERBS. 
 
 There are pure adverbs in Sa'a and Ulawa, but many words used as 
 adverbs are truly nouns and others are verbs, adjectives also may be 
 used in this employment. 
 
 The locative i is used with adverbs of place and time and it precedes 
 every place name. The demonstrative nd S. ni U. is suffixed. 
 
 Place where is regarded as place whence, after the habit of the usual 
 Melanesian idiom; 'urei standing at, has the force of from. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 I. Simple prepositions: 
 
 Locative, 1". Instrumental, ana, dni, eni S. 
 
 Causation, haahi. Relation, ana, dni, eni S., pe'i S., mdi U., hike, sie-, saa- S. 
 
 Motion to, tako'i S., tale U., isuli, 'ohi. Genitive, ni, i. 
 
 Motion from, mwaani. Position, parasi, U., sisinge S., hora U., honosi, dhu'i. 
 
 Dative, huni S., muni U. 
 
 The locative i is seen compounded in itei^ ihei where. 
 With the exception of the locative, the instrumental, and the geni- 
 tive all the foregoing prepositions are used with a suffixed pronoun.
 
 GRAMMAR OF Sa'a AND ULAWA. I53 
 
 Of the two instrumental prepositions aiia is the ordinary one, denot- 
 ing with. When the noun denoting the instrument is not preceded by 
 an article, or when the noun is used in a general sense, dni is used in the 
 place of ana: lae dni i'ola to go by canoe, dni eu with music, ana nga 
 taa why, dni iaa with what things. Ana also denotes at, in, place 
 where, from among; dni is also used as neuter plural, from among, da 
 nga muini eni take some of them. Ana denotes the actual instru- 
 ment, drii denotes the method of action: sdunie dyii noma kill him 
 spear-wise. In Sa'a dni is used in the composition of nouns, supi 
 eni heu a stone club. 
 
 From meaning at saa-y sie- comes to have the meaning of motion to. 
 Cf. 'ure. 
 
 2. Compound: These are mostly nouns used with the locative; the 
 pronoun is suffixed as the actual object, or as anticipatory object when 
 a noun follows: i haho above; i haha S., i oroha- U., below; i lengi 
 on top, above; i keke U., by the side of, beside; i la'o-, i lalo within. 
 
 Some are constructed from verbal nouns to which the suffixed pro- 
 noun is always added: 'oliteku in my place, in place of me; honotana 
 on his behalf. 
 
 Certain verbs are used as prepositions: loosi to await, kara'ini near 
 to, ha'atatdi far from. 
 
 CONJUNCTIONS. 
 
 Copulative, na. Disjunctive, tva. 
 
 Adversative ta'e, ta'e pe'ini S., ta'a. Conditional, ana. 
 
 na ta'a U. Illative, si. 
 Connective, 'oto. 
 
 A mark of quotation is uri. Neither .... nor is expressed by a 
 negative followed by wa. The reason for an objection is introduced 
 by wa uri. Until is hula ana or lai hula ana. Saro shows consecu- 
 tiveness of action. 
 
 NUMERALSr 
 
 The numerical system is decimal, all numbers above the tens are 
 expressed in tens. 
 
 The cardinals are: 
 
 I. 'eta, ia'ata'a S., ta'e U. 
 
 5- 
 
 'e lime S., 
 
 'e lima U. 
 
 9. V siwe S., V fizva U. 
 
 2. 'e rue, *e rua U. 
 
 6. 
 
 'e ono. 
 
 
 10. 'e tangahulu, awala. 
 
 3. V 'olu. 
 
 7- 
 
 V kiu. 
 
 
 
 4. V hai. 
 
 8. 
 
 V walu. 
 
 
 
 In numbers other than 'eta one the V is omitted in quick counting; 
 V is also omitted as a general rule with ro. 
 
 In composition one is taataa^ two is ro. 
 
 The prefix to''o forms distributives, to'otae ola one thing at a time. 
 
 Walu eight is used also as an indefinite number, as also azvala the 
 tally of ten. Tangahulu is the tenth of a series.
 
 154 GRAMMAR OF SA^A AMD ULAWA. 
 
 To express units above ten mzvana S., mana U., is employed: four- 
 teen azvala 7nwana hat. An incomplete tally is expressed by daadala. 
 
 Special words are used as nouns for tens of different things: aulu lo 
 coconuts, dideri lo parrot-fish, hike lo garfish, walo pasa lo flying-fish, 
 zcalo lO native moneys. 
 
 Tangalau is loo. The sum above the hundred is expressed by 
 mwana S., mana U.; tangalau e hai azvala mzvana hat 144, A word peH 
 S., mdi U., with, in addition to, may be used following tangalau. 
 Occasionally^ the tens over one hundred are expressed simply as units: 
 tangalau mzvana ^eta may mean one hundred and ten. 
 
 Special words are used for hundreds of various things: nao 100 
 yams, alo 100 taro, le 100 porpoise teeth, suli hata 40 dogs' teeth, 
 totola 400 dogs' teeth. 
 
 Sinola is 1,000; this is used correctly of yams; qela 1,000 coconuts. 
 
 Mola signifies a countless number when used of men, molai uhi 
 10,000 yams, molai hui 10,000 taro, raui helu S., 'apai niu U., 10,000 
 coconuts. 
 
 2. Ordinals: The cardinals with a substantival termination nd form 
 ordinals. 
 
 First, 'etana. Fourth, haine S., haina U. Seventh, hiune S., hiuna U. 
 
 Second, ruana. Fifth, limana. Eighth, walune S., waluna U. 
 
 Third, 'olune S., 'oluna U. Sixth, onona. Ninth, siwana. 
 
 Ordinals precede the noun: ruana nga mzvane the second man. 
 
 Ordinals are used to express the number of times: ruana kira 'asi 
 soea they asked him a second time. 
 
 Tenth is expressed by tangahulu ana; the twelfth day azvalai he'idinge 
 mzvana ruana; one hundred and twenty-first tangalau V ro azvala mzvana 
 'etana. 
 
 'Enite how many is used with the substantival termination na: 
 'enitana what number, howmanyeth. 
 
 3. Multiplicatives are formed with the causative ha' a: ha'arue 
 twice, ha'atangalau a hundred times; hduta'a'i S., hduta'e U., once. 
 
 The word ta'e is used as a kind of descriptive prefix with the cardinals 
 ta'e^ 'olu, hai) and with 'enite, when the holding capacity of a canoe is 
 in question.
 
 THE LORD'S PRAYER. 
 
 In Twenty Languages, as used in the Diocese of Melanesia among the 
 
 Islands of the South Pacific. 
 
 ENQLISW. 
 
 OUR Father, which nrt in heaven, HHlloweii lif> 
 thy Namo. Tliy kingdom come. Tiiy will In; 
 ilono In earth, Af? it is in heaven. Give us this day 
 our daily bread. And fOrgivo ii.s onr f respasBSB, As 
 we forgive them that trespass aijainst us. And lead 
 ns not into temptation ; But deliver us from evil : 
 For thine is the kingdom, tho power, and the 
 glory. For ever and ever. Amen. 
 
 RAGA, New Hebrides. 
 
 TATA amare, ihsvma na sahiiga. Num nte na 
 mai. Noni doron na duni ataa kun aniaro. 
 Lai parig lalai kamai fjinaganiana vi dadariha hnri 
 B^rigi. Goi binihi kabui-ai viiromai, kun kanisi 
 gam binihi kabnrai vnrora. Gftvav Hii te kamai Ifl 
 kalkaliana ; gov lai kamai nin qatitroro. Hnri noni 
 nte, i roro?io, i saribari vi togo vai tuai. Amen. 
 
 LAKONA, Bank* Island 
 
 ]7^M.\^f niiiken, Ihilia'i ni run. Mou vitiga ni 
 -J vail ma. Mou mares ni wcsis vaan mere . 
 maken. fiC ma qirig mun game en siuag ga ta eho 
 qirip. Ke tretremwuto popeme, mere game pa 
 tcetremwute en pogo. Sao nkukrag game le gal- 
 palve ; Ke la game tren eu gasgasa. En mou eu 
 vitiga, sa eu man, ea cu hex he/', ti ti tie. Amen. 
 
 TORRES ISLANDS. 
 
 MA raina, Nt- Ic ni luar. Nc gamili ni ven nif. 
 Nc dotme ni mena na dawii na raina. Ola 
 me do7/ie hi kcmam ne hinega ta hinc dome. Ke 
 duamvitii ne heme kcniem dawa kemcm v«n dnam- 
 vitti ne hemehc. Tat:' vaiivana'Ke kcmem li dagare 
 k'.mem ; "Wola kemam da ne hiwhiw. Ne gamili, 
 ni mena meke, mi nc hcii ni toga ni toga, Ameu. 
 
 OPA, New Hebrides. 
 
 MAMA enln, Nahemn vi gogona. Nomn nle 
 vi himei. Nomn tarani vin lei lolovavagi 
 mere enln. Lai himei gaqarigi a hi'naga vi eno 
 hnri gaqarigi. Gon ladovohopi nabngnmei, mere 
 gamai gam ladovohogi nabngure. Go mese sirepi 
 gamai lolo galepaleasi ; gon lai pamni dena ginea esi. 
 Nomn a nte ko nomn a mnremnre ko uomu a vara- 
 vara, vi eno vi eno. Amen. 
 
 SANTA CRUr. 
 
 MELEllZGE niako wnn, Nep ka Tc. Maboicl'-n 
 na om Ma tnti d-'tni.m naxida maka in na 
 apule wun. Tnam abunaga ba^c dakanano na 
 taplete ma abaiiaga. Ava aipteo alue^c apnle nije 
 aipteo a'.nedc, Baku vele bame ni;/e mana vaika ; 
 Amilua nije mana vaioajal. Mabonielen, ie malct, 
 if rile, ti io ti io. Amen, 
 
 MAEWO, New Hebrides. 
 
 TATA a wonana, Nasasana na ro»orono. "Sana, 
 tnnnqe na snmai. No?ia tarani na lai le veina 
 merea wonana. Lai snmai qariki min kami na sinaga 
 n tarisa be qariki. Go tigi gina bnpun>i, mere kami 
 mo tigi gina bngura. Go kare tektekerag kami tea 
 ale galeana ; Go lar kami dani na ansescta. Ano/ia 
 a tnnnqe, ti a eori, ti n siuara, na toga na toga. 
 Amen. 
 
 VANIKOLO. 
 
 AIIA «an. Neucjioo tapn. femie mare jairoa. 
 lemie warne;io ipiaiue ino lenu nerfe wan. 
 Knma neii damoida icmio tore nane pe damoida. 
 A;/o knlamena f/amitu, t«karoai)li imetore neno 
 <;amitn nnpe pinnoa tckaraaoli iedietore. Igai 
 knreknre f/amitu nka bo;;ila ; a^/o kula yamitn mena 
 mamane fisale. lemie mare, j/a anka, 'jo, iremare 
 ilu ilu. Amea. 
 
 MOTA, Banks Island 
 
 MAMA avnnana, Nasasam% ni roj/O. Nom o 
 marana ni mule ma. Nom o maros ni lai 
 alala«ana tama avnnana. Le ma qarig mun kamam 
 o sinjga. we tira ape qarig. Ka nomvitag napuga- 
 mam; tama ikamam we nomvitag napngara. Nipea 
 nkeukeg kamam ilo galeva; Ka lav kamam nan o 
 ganganor. Anoma o marana, wa o mana, wa o loias 
 ti toga ti toga. Amen. 
 
 RUMATARI, S. Crtstoval. 
 
 MAMA hahalia, Naatamn ni apnna. Narahaua 
 mn ni rao mai. Nahaoqaniamn ni matakn 
 mai iano mana haha tanwa mai rikini ta;ia pami na 
 /iioro ni nan ni arari rikini. Kalo ka-sia uapinomi, 
 mana i gami me kato kasia naginota. Kasiana 
 watea gami ohoni gami; go teua gami tenia na 
 oraorapa. Pasimn narahaamn, mana meuaamn, 
 maua togatcgaamu tare tare. Ameu. 
 
 WAMO, S. Cristoval. 
 
 A MA jnami noai aro, Naatamn na maaea. Na- 
 honramn ai boi. Nahciirisiamn ai iiiadan noai 
 ano i bahai oua noai aro ; Hamai deiui tanaami ta 
 hereho inan ai orana i deini ; Oi adoniai nngasia ni 
 inomami, oua iami mi adomai nngasia ni inoda; Oi 
 abni wateami ini ohouiami ; Oi waiami bania i 
 oraoraa. Na honramn, mana meuaamn, mana i-ara- 
 hamn, ai taro orea orea. Amen, 
 
 M 
 
 FlU, Mala. 
 
 AA kami ila/ii, na satamn e aabn. Na taloa 
 oe leka mai. Kami sasii rn O ko oyai, iano 
 diin kira sa.sii ilaxi. qatia nini taena faamia faua 
 ki bolo fairiia taena. O luje niauia sasii taana kami 
 ki, diia kami luye uiania sasii taana kira ki. Alna 
 daita ani kami eaeua oiia. tialia olitai kami fasia 
 ra taa. Amen. 
 
 155
 
 is6 
 
 THE LORD S PRAYER. 
 
 FAOANI, S. Cristoval. 
 
 IV ,f AM A ami afaafa ; ^a. atama ni apuiia. Ara- 
 JjJL faiia amu ai rago mai. Faigirisii ama ai 
 matakn nogai siora niai-a afaafa. Tar.a mai itaini 
 tanasrami na marego iii»au ai goraiia itaiui. Go 
 katomagi kasia na ginomi,-niai-a igaini mi katomagi 
 kasia na ginota. Apuna go wategami agi ofo/iigami ; 
 Go tan gami bania na oraoraga. Faginigo arafaya 
 mana mena, mana i-arafamu, tewasia tewasia. 
 Amco. 
 
 ULAWA. 
 
 AMAMAMI ilcni, ve. Satamu mnnl tnaoa. Na, 
 Alahai-a ice muni lae mai. Na haihmiilama 
 mnni madau oto, mai i orohana mala oto ilpjii. O 
 ta mai siii-i muniami n/ai iianlaa ea haidadajia ana 
 eiirini. O sae asia na ixai roroa.ia iami, mala iami 
 a sae asia »a i«ai rOroana alaile ami haaroroaira ani. 
 O eunri totoliasiami ilaona malahojiana ; O tole ami 
 iiiaania /la laa ni oi-ahaa. Ana o tooana na alahajja, 
 na u& nanamana, na na manikuluana, ua esie majio 
 oto 00. Amen. 
 
 SAA, Mala. 
 
 AMAMAMI ilewi, Satamu ke maai. Alahana 
 ice ke lae mai. Mu ola saemn eiu denleni ke 
 madan oto, iano ilelm mala oto ilei/i. Da mai siiri 
 huniemi mn nenla ke adona siiri. Oke sae asie mui 
 roroana iemi mala emi ko sai asie mn roroa»a hauie 
 tiiala emi haaroroaire ani. 3/aanie o toliasiemi laona 
 malahojiana ; Toleiemi waania orahaala. Ana o 
 tooana alahajia na nanamaita na raraa, oto di oto di, 
 Ames. 
 
 LAU, Mala. 
 
 MAA igami ilai.i. na Satamu ka abn. Na ata- 
 falaa- 08 ka lea mai. Na doo ragemu ani 
 adealana ka utaluda na, iauo ise iliwia ilani. Falea 
 mai taraina faagami na fauala e bobola fai taraiiia. 
 O manata asia na /lalilaiia gami iliiti gami mi manata 
 asia na ,mliln)/a gera. Fasia lugasi gami laona 
 ilitoola ; lafua gami fasia f uala/iaa. Ana do oe 
 na alafalaa, ma na mamana, me na rara, ka too ka 
 taa. Amen. 
 
 VATURA/VA, Gaudalcanar. 
 
 MAMA ihotu, ke ba tabu Nasoamii. Ke mai 
 natotuinu. Kc mana na zajahamu i vavana 
 ekoaza ihotu. Ko tusu vanihami mai ke lieni. Ko 
 molotaliani na kibomami e koaza iliami ami molota- 
 haui na kibodira. Ko jika na mololuani hami tana 
 na gngure. Ko taho taliani Lami tani na taootobo. 
 Animn na tototu, ma na paua, ma na totora ke ba 
 baa. Ameu, 
 
 LOGU, Guadalcanal*. 
 
 MAMA i Larii, eabu na thatamn. Ge \a,g& mai 
 na ilo amu. Ge tanonama na uaoarau i vna 
 elivana i lani. Vnwatea mai i none na vawa ge tha- 
 danana i nene. Go nai vatau na mola; palumami 
 elivana i amiami nai vatau na raolai paluda. Goge 
 In^ataini ami tana tovotovo, go ade ami vatau tana 
 kiboa. Namoa na vule'raana nanama, mana lada, 
 gQ lae me lae. Amen. 
 
 FLORIDA. 
 
 MAMA i kokou, ke tabu na abamu. Ke tona 
 mai nimua na kinakabu. Ke tanomana na 
 liomn i pari te vaga i Jcokon. He gami mai taeni 
 na vana te manana i taeni. Mo ko talukehai na lei 
 palumami ke vaga igami kai talukebai na lei palu- 
 dira. Ko bei lubatigami ta na tabotabo, mo ko lavi 
 gami ta na tanotawedika. Nimua na haba, ma na 
 mana, ma na lada, ke vaa me vaa. Ameu. 
 
 BUGOTU. 
 
 MAMA, Ko mono i popo ; Keda tabu na Ahamn ; 
 Keda mai na hngutamn ; Keda legna na 
 hehemn i thepa ke vagagna i popo ; Hegami mai 
 legnmagavu na vana ke nabamami ikea;/aicni ; Ko 
 talntavoga na palnliamami ke vagagna igami kifi 
 talntavoga na paluhadia ; Ko sagoi lubatigami kcri 
 piapilan, mo Ko hati au gami kori koakoa ; eigna 
 na nimua na hugnta, ma na thaba, ma na silada, ke 
 hau me ban. Ameu. 
 
 MiLANESUN Mission Press, Norkolk Isla.np. V.ni.
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 The native peoples of the western Pacific (exchiding the Australian 
 aboriginals) are classified ethnologically in four divisions: Polynesian, 
 Micronesian, Melanesian, Papuan. The languages of the first two 
 divisions may be regarded practically as one and may be called, roughly, 
 Polynesian. In Melanesia there are certain communities who do not 
 speak Melanesian and whose language is reported to be allied closely 
 to the language of Tonga, and who in consequence belong to the Poly- 
 nesian division of speech. With the exception of these communities, 
 all the other peoples in Melanesia use one type of spech. In Papua, 
 at any rate on the south and north coasts, two completely different 
 types of language exist — the one closely allied to Melanesian, the other 
 separate and distinct and but slightly akin, if at all, to the languages 
 even of the peoples in the neighboring islands of Torres Straits. 
 This latter type Mr. S. H. Ray has named Papuan. 
 
 In Polynesia proper there is but one type of language, and the 
 Polynesian peoples inhabit the following group of islands: Hawaii, 
 Marquesas, Tahiti, Paumotu, Mangareva, Niue, Samoa, Rarotonga, 
 Tonga, New Zealand (Maori), Futuna and Uvea (Horn and WalUs 
 Island), Tokelau (EUice Group). In Melanesia, Polynesian-speaking 
 peoples are found at Mele and Fila in Sandwich Island and on Fotuna 
 and Aniwa in the southern New Hebrides; on Uea in the Loyalties; 
 on Tikopia and Anuda; on Matema, Pileni, and Nukapu in the Reef 
 Islands off Santa Cruz; on Rennell and Bellona south of San Cristoval; 
 on Sikaiana north of Ulawa; on the coral atoll Ongtong Java north of 
 Ysabel, and on Nukuoro in the Carolines. 
 
 Mr. Ray reckons the number of separate forms of Polynesian speech 
 as 19 or 20. With the Polynesians each group or each separate island 
 has practically only one language, and the languages of all the Poly- 
 nesian peoples (with the exception of those in Melanesia) have been 
 reduced to writing and grammars and dictionaries of them have 
 been published. The Presbyterian missionaries in the New Hebrides 
 have made certain studies of the four Polynesian languages in their 
 sphere, but no linguistic w^ork has been done on the other Polynesian 
 languages in Melanesia and there is no way of knowing what peculiar 
 characteristics they present, if any. 
 
 It would be of considerable interest linguistically to know whether, 
 in the case of the languages of Matema, Pileni, and Nukapu, the influ- 
 ence of the neighboring Melanesian peoples has in any way altered the 
 characteristic Polynesian features of speech, and whether there is any 
 sign of a mingling of Melanesian peculiarities of speech with the radical 
 characteristics of the Polynesian stock — any cross, so to speak, such 
 as was effected in English by the introduction, e. g., of the romance 
 prefixes and suffixes. 
 
 15-
 
 158 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 However, since the Melanesian language in the neighboring island of 
 Nitilole shows no sign of Polynesian influence at work, and since the 
 tendency always is for the later and the more decayed types of speech 
 to affect adversely the older and more complicated types, it can hardly 
 be expected that the Polynesian languages in Melanesia shall have 
 been affected by the Polynesian. 
 
 Certain Papuan languages in New Guinea show very distinct signs 
 of such a cross. Thus, Mr. Ray writes of Maisin (Cambridge Expedi- 
 tion to Torres Straits, vol. ill) that it appears to be a Papuan language 
 which has adopted an abnormal number of Melanesian words. ^ "It 
 has also adopted some Melanesian particles, the verbal auxiliaries 
 entirely, and the use of possessives w^ith post-positions; but in other 
 respects its grammar is Papuan." The language of Mailu on the south 
 coast is in the same mixed condition as regards its vocabulary. Maisin 
 may represent a survival of a former Papuan population in Eastern 
 Papua. 
 
 Micronesia has six groups of islands, Carolines, Ebon-Marshall, 
 Gilberts, Nauru, Palau, Tobi, and with the single exception of the 
 Carolines each group has only one language. Mr. Ray states that in 
 the Carolines there are at least five distinct languages, Ponape, Kusaie, 
 Mortlock and Ruk, Yap, and Uluthi. In certain parts of Micronesia 
 a jargon called Chamorro is spoken, presumably a mixture of Spanish 
 and Micronesian. 
 
 While reckoning the approximate number of Polynesian languages 
 as 19 and of Micronesian as 15, Mr. Ray says that Melanesia has 180 
 and New Guinea (Papua) certainly 150, with many others still un- 
 named. He states also that in many of the Papuan or non-Melane- 
 sian languages of New Guinea "the extraordinary difficulty of the 
 grammar and the limited area in which the language is spoken make it 
 extremely impossible that any one will ever take the trouble to learn 
 one." As an example of a difficult language Mr. Ray quotes the 
 Kiwai of the Fly River, the grammar of which he says is "awful," 
 thus, e. g., supposing that three people share a coconut between them 
 and one of them says "we three are eating a coconut," nimo-ibi nao oi 
 n-oruso-ihi-duru-7no ; the literal translation of this is "we three one 
 coconut we-eat-three-now-we." If a man eats three coconuts he says 
 mo netowa naobi oi potoro n-iriso-ibi, i. e., "I two one coconut three I- 
 eat-three." 
 
 As to the New Guinea languages, it is enough for our present pur- 
 pose to state that they seem to be of two types, viz. Melanesian and 
 Papuan, i. e., non-Melanesian. The Anglican Mission in New Guinea 
 has to deal with both types of these languages. The language used at 
 Wedau, the headquarters of the Mission, is of the usual Melanesian 
 type, and Mr. Copland King, the original investigator of Wedauan, 
 has also published a translation of the Gospel according to St. Luke in
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 1 59 
 
 Binandere, an extremely difficult non-Melanesian language spoken on 
 the Mamba River. Mr. King has stated recently that on the coast of 
 German New Guinea both Melanesian and non-Melanesian languages 
 occur. Both types also occur in the sphere of the London Missionary 
 Society. 
 
 Melanesian languages are spoken in Fiji, Rotuma, the Loyalties, New 
 Caledonia, New Hebrides, Banks, Torres, Santa Cruz, Swallow Group, 
 Solomons, New Britain and New Ireland, Admiralties, in the islands 
 lying off New Guinea to the eastward, and in New Guinea itself. With 
 the single exception of Savo in the Solomons, all of the Melanesian 
 languages are practically of the same type and the grammars of all of 
 them may be made up on the same framework. Santa Cruz contains 
 the greatest number of exceptions to the regular type and is confessedly 
 the most difficult of the Melanesian languages. Savo is regarded by 
 Dr. Codrington as Melanesian, but of a more archaic type than the rest, 
 as is shown by the absence of prepositions in it and by its failure to 
 distinguish between parts of speech and also by its use of demonstra- 
 tives as both pronouns and adverbs. 
 
 PROMINENT LINGUISTIC PECULIARITIES. 
 
 It will be of use to summarize here the most prominent linguistic 
 peculiarities common both to Melanesian and Polynesian languages 
 and to add further some special marks whereby the differences between 
 these two types of the Oceanic languages may be readily recognized. 
 
 1. POSSESS! VES. 
 
 Possession is shown in the Melanesian languages by suffixing pro- 
 nominal forms in ku, mu, na, to the noun: Mota qatuk, my head; Sa'a 
 nimemiiy thy hand; Florida tinaiia, his mother; and also to radicals no 
 (na), moy thus forming an expression answering to my, thy, his, in 
 English, while another pair of radicals ga, ma, with the pronouns 
 suffixed, represent, respectively, a thing belonging more closely to a 
 person, and a thing for a person to drink. 
 
 In Melanesia these pronominal forms are suffixed only to nouns of 
 a certain class; those, namely, which signify parts of the body and 
 degrees of relationship or a man's belongings. In Malay these pro- 
 nouns are suffixed to nouns without any distinction of class, while in 
 Maori they appear added to the vowels o and a or to these vowels sup- 
 plemented by 11 or 7n: no, na, mo, ma, and are used preceding the noun. 
 In Maori the differences in meaning of these possessives are shown by 
 the changes between a and o, a signifying that the thing referred to is 
 regarded as acted upon by the person with whom it is in relation, o that 
 the action is from the thing on the person. "What the Polynesians do 
 by the changes of a and o the Melanesians do by the use of four dis- 
 tinct words, and in these it is the consonant and not the vowel which
 
 l6o LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 gives the particular difference in signification. But both Polynesian 
 and Melanesian have a stem, a noun, to which identical pronouns are 
 suffixed to give a possessive sense." (Mel. Lang., p. 133.) 
 
 2. PRONOUNS. 
 
 All the Oceanic languages have inclusive and exclusive forms in the 
 first person plural of the personal pronoun; in one case the person or 
 persons addressed are included with the speaker, in the other they are 
 excluded. Polynesian languages have no trinal number as apart from 
 the plural; indeed, the Polynesian plural is practically composed of a 
 plural to which the numeral /o/w, three, has been added, and the so- 
 called trinals in Melanesia have the same explanation. All Polynesian 
 and Melanesian languages use a dual. 
 
 3. VERBS. 
 
 Verbal particles are used in all the families of Oceanic language. It 
 is by means of these particles (which precede the verb) that a word 
 expresses itself as a verb and also that the verb exercises its power of 
 expressing tense and mood. Madagascar, Polynesia, and Melanesia 
 all show the presence of these verbal particles in their languages. 
 
 (a) In Melanesia the pronoun when used as object is suffixed to the 
 verb, certain shortened forms of the pronoun being used; and in some 
 languages in the Solomons the regular object is preceded by an antici- 
 patory object consisting of this suffixed pronoun in the third person. 
 Thus in Sa'a, I paddle a canoe, ?wko hotela ' inie ^ iola, i. e., I paddle it 
 canoe. With this may be compared the "pidgin" English use "How 
 many boy you catch 'im?" — where 'im seems reminiscent of the native 
 idiom. 
 
 {h) The Melanesian languages freely add consonantal and syllabic 
 suffixes to verbs in order to make them transitive or to give them a 
 more definitely transitive force. These verbal suffixes can be found 
 present in all the Oceanic languages with the possible exception of 
 Malagasy. Their use is seen in fullest force in Melanesia. Many 
 words in the Polynesian and Micronesian dictionaries show their 
 presence, but Samoan is the only Polynesian language which uses them 
 with anything like the fullness and freedom that obtains in Melanesia. 
 
 (c) In all the Oceanic families of language a causative is used when 
 a verb comes to signify the making to do or be. In Melanesia the 
 causative prefix is va, pa, fa, either alone or with a second syllable 
 ka, ga. In Polynesia the causative is whaka, faka, and this is plainly 
 the same as the Melanesian forms. Identically the same forms appear 
 in Malagasy, but Malay does not possess them. 
 
 (d) Reciprocity of relationship or of action is marked in the Mela- 
 nesian languages by a prefix to the verb. This prefix has two forms, 
 var, and ha'i (vag) or fe ive), and the latter form appears in Samoan, 
 but nowhere else in Polynesia.
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. l6l 
 
 (e) The adjectival prefixes showing condition ma, ta, are almost 
 universal in Melanesia, and the dictionaries show them as appearing 
 also in Fiji, in Polynesia, in Malagasy, and in the languages of the 
 Malay Archipelago, though the grammars of the various languages 
 
 do not recognize them. 
 
 4. NOUNS. 
 
 In the Oceanic languages generally, Malagasy, Malay, Melanesian, 
 Polynesian, there is a common practice of forming nouns by the 
 addition of certain suffixes: nga, iia, an, ana; ha, la, a; and in Mela- 
 nesia nouns are formed also by prefixing i to the verb; Fiji sele to cut, 
 isele a knife. Sa'a damn to eat areca nut, idemu a lime spatula. The 
 only noun suffix regularly employed in Polynesia is nga, but several 
 of the Polynesian languages show examples of verbal nouns formed by 
 adding a or fa or la to the verb. Melanesia regularly employs all the 
 noun suffixes stated above. 
 
 5. ADJECTIVES. 
 
 Melanesia also makes an extensive use of adjectival suffixes; these 
 
 are added both to nouns and verbs. The forms are ga, g, a, ra, la, 
 
 la^a, li, ta, na, ina. Malagasy has forms in na, ana, ina, but Malay 
 
 shows no sign of them, nor does the Maori of Polynesia. Tongan 
 
 and Samoan both show the use of a as an adjectival suffix and odd 
 
 instances occur in Polynesia of the use of na, and Maori has a few 
 
 instances of « thus used. 
 
 6. GENITIVE. 
 
 The Melanesian languages employ a genitive preposition to convey 
 the idea of possession when two nouns are in apposition, e. g., Ulawa 
 * apa ni menu wing of bird, or else they suffix the pronoun in the third 
 person to the first noun: Ulawa ' apa' apana manu its wing bird, i. e., 
 bird's wing. 
 
 The common genitive used throughout Melanesia is ni; in certain 
 parts of Melanesia ni changes to li and si appears there also as a 
 genitive. In Melanesia the juxtaposition of two nouns also conveys 
 a genitive force: Sa'a nime hau house (of) stone, and in certain 
 languages a genitive relation is conveyed by modification of the final 
 vowel when two nouns are in juxtaposition: Mota i7na house, ime 
 vui house of the spirit. In Lau, Malaita, Solomons, an e is added to 
 the first of two such nouns giving a genitive force: tola hill, toloe fera 
 heights of the land. In the Polynesian languages genitive relation is 
 expressed by nouns in apposition or by the use of the possessive as 
 above (i), and there is no special genitive preposition. 
 
 The Polynesian languages on their side have a large and varied use 
 of prepositions and there is much nicety in the use of them; this is 
 partly owing to the distinction in the sense of a and o already men- 
 tioned, a being used as active and o as passive.
 
 l62 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 7. PASSIVE FORMS. 
 
 In Melanesia no passives are found, whereas all the Polynesian 
 languages have regular passive endings to their verbs. In a pamphlet 
 entitled "Certain suffixes in Oceanic languages" the present writer 
 has shown that these passive suffixes are composed of adjectival suf- 
 fixes {na, ina, a) added to transitive suffixes. 
 
 CERTAIN DIFFERENCES BETWEEN THE FORMS OF SPEECH. 
 
 From the following note, supplied by Mr. Ray, it will be seen how 
 great is the difference between the Polynesian and the Melanesian 
 forms of speech and the Papuan or non-Melanesian of New Guinea. 
 In the Papuan languages: Nouns and pronouns are defined by means 
 of suffixed particles, e. g., "my hand" is not "hand my," as in Mela- 
 nesia, but "me of hand"; "bird's wing" is not "wing of bird" or "bird 
 its wing," as in the Melanesian examples above, but "bird of wing." 
 
 Similarly, nouns have various case suffixes instead of prepositions: 
 house-to, house-of, house-at, house-from. 
 
 Adjectives usually precede the noun. 
 
 Tenses of the verb are expressed by means of suffixes, not as in 
 Melanesia or Polynesia by a variation in a preceding particle. 
 
 Number and person in the verb are expressed by: (a) a prefix, (b) 
 a change in the suffix, or (c) shown only by the pronoun. 
 
 Number and person of the subject or object are indicated sometimes 
 by a compound prefix. 
 
 METHOD OF LEARNING A MELANESIAN LANGUAGE. 
 
 To learn Mota is easy enough, since both a dictionary and a grammar 
 have been compiled by Dr. Codrington. Ulawa and Sa' a are the only 
 other languages in the sphere of the Melanesian Mission which have 
 full grammars, and probably they are thus the easiest to learn after 
 Mota, since good material exists for study in the shape of translations, 
 etc. In learning any of these three languages, which may be regarded 
 as typical Melanesian languages, the special points to be studied are: 
 
 PRONOUNS. 
 
 The personal pronouns should be written out and learned by heart; 
 the inclusive and exclusive forms should be carefully noted in the first 
 person plural. It is quite easy to make a blunder over these forms and 
 to say, e. g., inina in Mota for ikamam, and the story is told of a 
 certain missionary who on describing his experiences in England to a 
 class at Norfolk Island kept on saying inina when he meant either 
 ikamam or possibly ikara, i. e.^ presumably, his wife and himself. ^ His 
 hearers protested sotto voce, inina tagai aniaia "we were not with him." 
 The suffixed pronouns and their uses must be carefully studied.
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 163 
 
 THE VERB. 
 
 Under this heading come verbal and negative particles, transitive 
 suffixes, the native view of time, etc. 
 
 PREPOSITIONS. 
 
 A list of these should be made in Mota according to whether they can 
 be followed or not by the demonstrative na before the noun. 
 
 GENERAL DIRECTIONS. 
 
 Many missionaries have to learn new Melanesian tongues and have 
 to commit them to writing for the first time. It is always important 
 to remember that practically one grammatical framework will serve 
 for all the Melanesian languages; the style of the languages is the same 
 throughout. 
 
 One system of orthography will avail throughout and special pro- 
 vision can be made for rare or exceptional sounds. Generally it will 
 be found that the sounds in the Melanesian languages are not very 
 different from the sounds in the well-known European languages, and 
 in representing them it will be sufficient to take the ordinary sounds 
 of the English alphabet and by the additional use of italic letters 
 make provision for nasal or guttural variations of well-known sounds. 
 Modifications of the vowels can be shown by the use of the diaeresis. 
 The points noted above are the main points to be kept in view in the 
 endeavor to acquire any new Melanesian language. 
 
 As will be noticed farther on, familiarity w^th Mota was a decided 
 help in linguistic study in Melanesia, but a man would be very apt to 
 be led astray if he made Mota a rigid standard. 
 
 Too much stress can not possibly be laid on the value of learning 
 lists of words by heart: "Let each object bring some native sound 
 ringing in your ears, so that the sound brings the object before your 
 eyes. Do not be content to speak as a European. The real and most 
 stringent test of the knowledge of a language is whether you can under- 
 stand the natives speaking among themselves. To know thoroughly 
 by book is a different thing from knowing by ear. I believe we must 
 learn like children, through the ear, not by books much." (Pilking- 
 ton, of Uganda.) 
 
 TRANSLATION OF SCRIPTURE. 
 
 The use of Melanesian languages by a missionary is confessedly only 
 the preliminary to his using them as a vehicle for conveying the divine 
 message of salvation. To the mind of the missionary the end and 
 object of a native language, the very reason for its existence, is that it 
 should be used for the worship of God and for the dissemination of 
 religious ideas among the people who use it, and to the mind of the 
 churchman a language has attained to the height of its glory when it
 
 164 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 has been used as a medium for the performance of the highest act of 
 worship, the celebration of the holy mysteries. 
 
 It may be predicated of all Melanesian languages that they are in 
 themselves fit and proper instruments for use in God's work. The 
 researches of scholars go to show that all languages are marvels of 
 perfection, and the so-called jargons of savages are in their degree as 
 perfect a creation as the language of the most highly civilized people. 
 To question whether the Gospels can be translated, e. g.^ into one of the 
 languages of Malaita because of the alleged absence from it of certain 
 words and ideas which are the equivalent of or which correspond to 
 certain words and ideas in the original Greek is, among other things, to 
 forget the history of our own language. One has only to look at 
 Coverdale's Bible, to say nothing of the Douai Bible, to see the immense 
 number of foreign words expressive of religious ideas that have been 
 imported bodily into English from the classical languages. In some 
 cases it may be that the idea required did not exist in English; in other 
 cases, though the idea and word might be present, yet the foreign word 
 prevailed, e. g., conscience, where the English equivalent inwit survived 
 until quite recently. Are we, then, to belittle the English language 
 because either it lacked certain ideas or because it preferred to import 
 bodily foreign words expressive of certain religious terms instead of 
 using its own words or of making up words on existing lines? 
 
 It can not be doubted that the actual foundation exists in every 
 language whereon can be laid the superstructure of words necessary 
 to convey the message of the Gospel. Nor can any existing language, 
 Latin or English, be considered as the sacred language. The Blessed 
 Saviour himself spoke in Aramaic, and yet the knowledge of His words 
 and acts and the story of the carrying out of man's salvation, both by 
 His words and also by His life, have come to the world not through 
 Aramaic, but through another language, Greek. To-day the Roman 
 Catholic Church looks upon Latin as the sacred language, and the 
 English Church for its part is apt to regard English as the one and only 
 language, whereas the message of Pentecost is that no one language is 
 above another in this respect, and that every man has a right to look 
 on his own language as God-inspired and as existing for the purpose of 
 conveying to him and his the divine message of salvation. 
 
 To doubt that the languages of so-called savages contain sufficient 
 words and ideas to use in promulgating the Christian religion is surely 
 tantamount to denying that man was made originally in the image of 
 God and was intended to seek God if haply he might feel after Him and 
 find Him. 
 
 Wherever translations of the Bible, etc., have been made in Mela- 
 nesia it has always been found that it was possible to provide from the 
 native tongue words and terms corresponding to the root ideas of the
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 165 
 
 original; thus, in the Solomons it is easy to render salvation, i. e., 
 health, Sa*a mauri to be alive, inauringe health, rnaurihe life; truth, 
 Sa'a walaimolinge; faith, Sa'a hii-zualaimolinge, i. e., feeling to be true; 
 atonement, Sa'a ha'aureruru, i. e., cause to have friendly relations 
 with. Similarly, renderings are available for such words as spirit, 
 way, light, and for repent, redemption, i. e., purchase, grace, i. e., gift, 
 though this latter rendering is confessedly imperfect. The idea of 
 love is difficult to render into Melanesian; the word used in Mota, 
 tapeva, denotes propitiation and gift as well as love; the Sa'a word used 
 means kindly-natured; the root of the Polynesian aroha, which is 
 rendered as love, is aro, which appears in Florida, Solomon Islands, as 
 arovi to pity, and in the Mota ma-garo-sa compassionate. The Maori 
 of New Zealand uses the quasi-English ripeneta for repent, but no 
 doubt a native equivalent could have been found corresponding to 
 the radical notion of change of mind. In Mota and in many Mela- 
 nesian languages the word used as a translation of pray is tataro, which 
 really implies the invocation of a dead person and which was used 
 as a preliminary utterance before the real words of invocation. In 
 the Solomons tataro appears in San Cristoval and in Sa'a 'ataro or 
 *akalo a ghost, and in Polynesia Hawaiian kalokalo prayer; Samoan 
 tatalo, prayer. 
 
 Some difficulty was experienced in Sa'a and Ulawa in finding a word 
 to express pray. At first rihungai, a San Cristoval imported word, was 
 used; then a word was found, are to invoke a spirit, arengai he'u to 
 perform an ordeal with hot stones, calling on the name of certain 
 ghosts or spirits, but no verbal noun formed from this arenga or 
 arengainga met with approval. Eventually recourse was had to a 
 verbal noun qao olanga formed from qao ola to worship, hold communi- 
 cation with the ghosts, as an equivalent for prayer. In Sa'a there is 
 also a word, palo which means to act officially, to worship, and its verbal 
 noun palonga is either an act or worship. The word used so largely in 
 Polynesia as an equivalent both for prayer and also worship, loUty has 
 been imported into southern Melanesia and also into New Guinea by 
 the missionaries. Dr. Codrington considers that the Sa*a word lo'u, to 
 contract ceremonial defilement, is the same as this word lotu. The 
 word lotu is said to mean bowing down as in prayer, and Dr. Codring- 
 ton makes the Sa'a lo'ii mean to fall from a ceremonial standard, be 
 brought low. (Mel. Anthrop., p. 233.) Maori uses the quasi-English 
 kororia for glory, where Mota has lengas bright radiance, and Sa'a has 
 manikuhi anga fame, prestige, and a similar word might have been 
 found in Maori. 
 
 The translation used in Sa'a for sin is orahaa, the root idea of which 
 is "excess," acting contrary to the accepted standard of morality of the 
 place. The word conscience is extremely difficult to render into Mel-
 
 l66 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 anesian, and in Sa'a it was done by a periphrasis, the knowledge one 
 has in oneself. But possibly the most difficult thing to translate into 
 Melanesian is the Lord's Pra3'er. The very first phrase, "Our Father, " 
 presents considerable difficulty, and in the Mota rendering the word 
 "our" has been omitted altogether, and the word Mama (vocative) is 
 used by itself. Dr. Codrington defended Mama as the correct voca- 
 tive for both numbers, but nevertheless tamamam our father, father of 
 us, does actually occur elsewhere (Isaiah 63, 16) as a vocative. The 
 Melanesian is not accustomed to addressing or even to thinking of any 
 person as father in a corporate relation to a number of people (beyond 
 the more immediate family relationships); to his mind fatherhood is a 
 personal and individual thing; nor again is he accustomed to think of 
 the spiritual beings whom he worships as the fathers and protectors of 
 their worshippers. Even in English the phrase "Our Father" occurs 
 rarely as a vocative except in the biblical use or rarely in a poetic sense. 
 Kingdom and will are both difficult words to find renderings for. A 
 Melanesian knows nothing of a king, but chiefs occur everywhere 
 and in Sa'a a word alahajiga was adopted from alaha chief. For will 
 the usual rendering is by a word equivalent to heart (breast) or by a 
 periphrasis, what the heart is fixed on. A word for debt is common 
 enough everywhere. In southern Melanesia there was a regular prac- 
 tice of money-lending or usury. Forgive is generally rendered by the 
 equivalent for think away, sae 'asi in Sa'a, nom vitag in Mota. 
 
 Mr. Copland King has published a pamphlet entitled "Theological 
 terms in native languages," which deals with this whole question in the 
 sphere of the Pacific. 
 
 In an old catechism in the Mota language, printed by the Mission in 
 the very early days, several things of interest occur, and light is thrown 
 thereby on the development and evolution of the method of transla- 
 tion now in use. The catechism uses two English words for which 
 native equivalents have since been found: papataiso for baptism, now 
 rendered in Mota vasug rongo holy washing; glori for glory, now ren- 
 dered lengas radiance. Evidently no equivalent for kingdom had as yet 
 been found; in the Lord's Prayer, in the first instance where the word 
 occurs, "Thy kingdom come," the Mota renders it by a periphrasis, 
 "Cause men to become Thy people"; in the second by the equivalent 
 for "Thine are all things." 
 
 Also, curiously enough, in the Lord's Prayer there is a rendering of 
 the opening word Our, taman kamam, i. e.y Father-our, where the later 
 books have only Mama Father; the relative pronoun "which" has been 
 rendered iniko Thou, whereas the later books in Mota do not attempt 
 to translate it, but have simply Mama avunana^ O Father in heaven. 
 In the Apostles' Creed the word now used as equivalent to believe, 
 nomtupy had not come into use at the time of this catechism (nomtup = 
 bring thought to a point, cease to have doubt, believe), nom to think
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 167 
 
 being used alone. In the modern Mota books the words "from thence" 
 in the Creed have no equivalent, but in this old catechism a perfectly 
 correct rendering nafi ia is given. 
 
 It is quite clear that in the teaching of religion among the peoples of 
 the western Pacific many foreign words and terms must necessarily be 
 employed. Thus, in early days Bishop Patteson used in Mota the 
 Greek word basileia as an equivalent for kingdom, there being no 
 native word available; and just lately Mr. King has used the same 
 word in the Binandere (Papuan) Gospel translation. But when intro- 
 ducing this word what need is there for a translator to disguise it 
 in the form pasideia, as is done in one London Missionary Society 
 translation? 
 
 The Melanesian Mission, when importing classical words and New 
 Testament words for which there is no equivalent, has preferred to 
 write them in their English rather than their classical form, but the 
 London Missionary Society in New Guinea and Torres Straits has used 
 imported words in more or less of their classical form: areto^ bread; 
 karite, barley; saiavro, cross; also the Hebrew kohena for priest. As a 
 rendering for church. Bishop Patteson used log~lue in Mota, /. e., called 
 out; and similar w^ords obtain throughout the Melanesian Mission. 
 The London Missionary Society has used ekalesia for church. 
 
 It is very difficult to render the word god. The Polynesian missions 
 have all used the word atua, and this has also been imported by the 
 Presbyterians into southern Melanesia among Melanesian peoples. 
 This word atua seems to be on a level, possibly, with the Mota vui, as 
 meaning a being that never was a man; or it may be that just as 
 Fijian kalou, which once was supposed to mean god but now has been 
 degraded from its high place — so perhaps, though one says it with 
 fear and trembling, atua may in time be shown to be equivalent in a 
 measure to the Fijian kalou or to the Mota tamate, and may mean a 
 ghost of the dead, the disembodied spirit of a person. The mission- 
 aries of the eastern Pacific all spoke of the spiritual beings whom the 
 people worshipped as gods, just as in the same way they found idols 
 everyw^here; but however this may be, it is safe to say that in the 
 western Pacific there are neither gods nor idols. Even in Melanesian 
 Fiji it was the custom to call the objects of the old worship gods, but 
 Dr. Codrington wrote that Mr. Fison was "inclined to think all the 
 spiritual beings of Fiji, including the gods, kalou, simply the Mota 
 tamate, ghosts." Mr. Hocart has shown the truth of this conjecture 
 in a paper in the Journal of the Royal Anthropological Institute, vol. 
 XLII, 191 2. The Presbyterians of the New Hebrides also spoke of the 
 spirits of the dead t-mat, Mota tamate, worshiped by the natives, as 
 gods. 
 
 In the islands of Torres Straits the word god was translated as ady 
 the meaning of which was "something about which a tale was told,"
 
 l68 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 or as augady which meant totem. One translation in New Guinea has 
 adopted the word god, but has disguised it as "kot." In Nguna, 
 New Hebrides, the word used for god is suqe, which in the Banks 
 Islands is the well-known secret society. When the stories about Qat 
 in Mota first became known, it was supposed that the peoples of that 
 part of the Banks Islands regarded Qat as creator and god. The 
 Polynesian atiia is given as meaning god in the dictionaries of the 
 eastern Pacific, and Hazelwood gives god for kalou in Fijian, and doubt- 
 less suqe and t-mat are rendered as god in the dictionaries of the New 
 Hebrides. Even if the suqe of the New Hebrides (Codrington, Mel. 
 Anthrop., p. 102) has no connection with the suqe club of the Banks 
 Group, yet the meaning is at any rate spirit rather than god. The 
 Melanesian Mission, following the lead of Bishop Patteson, has used 
 everywhere the EngUsh word god and has written it in its ordinary 
 English spelling. 
 
 In every case where nothing is found akin to the idea required, and 
 in consequence an English word is introduced, it seems better to intro- 
 duce a foreign word whose meaning is above suspicion; the spelUng of 
 such word is a matter of lesser moment; but where such varieties of 
 pronunciation prevail, and among such widely different languages, it 
 seems better to write the word in its original form and then let each 
 set of people pronounce it in their own way. 
 
 There is no need to make a concession to the peculiarities of the 
 native alphabet in each place, for it will generally be found that the 
 peoples can make a sufficiently good attempt at the new sound to 
 justify the retention of the old speUing, and God, e. g., to our eyes at 
 least, looks better than Kot, and sheep than sipu. Once a concession 
 is made to native orthography in such matters, the missionary finds 
 himself writing, e. g., in Florida in the Solomons Guilikokusi for Wilcox, 
 and Pulaneti for Plant. Santa Cruz is actually the only place in the 
 sphere of the Melanesian Mission where the people find a real difficulty 
 in pronouncing certain letters foreign to their alphabet. 
 
 The possession of the two forms of the personal pronoun, first person 
 plural or dual, the inclusive and the exclusive, enables some finer 
 shades of meaning to be set forth with greater clearness than is possible 
 in languages which have not those forms. Thus in St. Luke 7, 5, the 
 difference between the two words our and us which is understood only in 
 English, is clearly expressed in Melanesian, the inclusive form being 
 used in the first case, since He to whom they spoke was also a Jew, and 
 the exclusive in the second case, since the synagogue had been built 
 for themselves, the people of Capernaum. A similar case occurs in 
 St. Luke 24, 20, where the v/ord "our" applies to the people of Judea 
 only, the two speakers evidently regarding Him to whom they were 
 speaking as a stranger.
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 169 
 
 THE QUESTION OF STANDARD LANGUAGES. 
 
 In Melanesia every island has its own distinct speech. These can 
 all be shown by the grammarian to be kindred and allied, but for all 
 practical purposes they are separate and distinct. A Mota man going 
 to Motalava, 8 miles away, unless he had some previous knowledge of 
 the language, would find himself unable to understand the speech of 
 the people there. Many words, doubtless, would be the same, but the 
 intonation is entirely different, the consonants and vowels are strangely 
 at variance, and the Motalava words are clipped and chopped about 
 almost beyond recognition. With more frequent communication 
 bilingualism is getting more common, but it is a curious thing that 
 when natives from various islands or places meet communication is 
 held by each person or group of persons speaking in his or in their own 
 tongue. Thus, a party from Malaita landing on Ulawa will speak Sa' a 
 or Lau or Tolo and will be answered in Ulawan, and the general drift 
 of the conversation seems to be understood quite readily. In a large 
 measure this is doubtless due to that quickness of understanding 
 which is characteristic of the Melanesian peoples generally. 
 
 Whereas smaller differences of dialect exist on every island, an 
 island of quite moderate size, like Santa Maria, in the Banks Group, 
 has two separate languages which vary considerably and which cause 
 the tw^o peoples practically to be unintelligible to one another. This 
 sort of thing is multiplied several times over in a large island like 
 Malaita. The language at the south end of Malaita is the same as 
 that spoken at the village of Sa'a; in the Mara Masiki Channel, which 
 divides Malaita in two, the language is that known at Sa'a as Tolo, and 
 to this belongs the language spoken at Oroha near Sa*a, the sketch 
 of which made by Bishop Patteson appears in Von der Gabelentz's 
 "Melanesischen Sprachen." The language round the coast at the 
 north end is known as Lau, and a knowledge of Lau will carry one 
 from Sinerago, Diamond Harbor, on the northeast coast, to Langa- 
 langa, Alite Harbor, on the northwest coast. In the interior, at the 
 north end, the people speak a language much like Lau but having 
 distinct peculiarities. Along the coast there wnll be found variations 
 of these three main types, such variations amounting almost to sep- 
 arate languages. Sa'a shows marked affinities to the Wango and 
 Heuru languages in San Cristoval, whereas Lau has many points of 
 similarity to the language of Florida, and the inland speech of the 
 north end has likenesses to the language of Bugotu. All of the three 
 main languages of Malaita have very decided resemblances to one 
 another and all are certainly of a common stock, so that Sa'a, e. g., 
 is more like Tolo than it is like Wango or Heuru. 
 
 L'p to the present time the missionaries in the Melanesian Mission 
 and in the Anglican Mission in New Guinea have been allowed to 
 prepare translations of the Bible and prayer book, etc., in whatever
 
 170 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 might be the language of their particular part, without any regard as 
 to whether the language was or was not the language of a dominant 
 people and as such likely to survive. This no doubt is very convenient 
 for the people concerned and is also advantageous for the comparative 
 philologist, who thus has valuable material provided for his studies, 
 but where languages abound and translators are scarce it does not seem 
 wise to let men labor at a language unless there is some chance of that 
 language surviving or being of use in more than its own limited sphere. 
 It can not be doubted that if the native peoples survive the shock of 
 civilization certain factors will cause some languages to be used in the 
 future more extensively than others; such factors are (i) the use of a 
 language by government or by traders, or (2) the dissemination of any 
 language by reason of the vigor or the numbers of the people using it. 
 
 If the government of New Guinea were to adopt certain languages 
 for use in specified areas, say, Motuan and Wedauan, to the exclusion 
 of all others (at present the government officials use a jargon), then, 
 although a certain amount of hardship would be imposed on the native 
 peoples at the outset, the gain to the missions from having fixed 
 languages for their educational work would ultimately more than com- 
 pensate for any temporal hardships in that all Hnguistic work could be 
 focussed on given languages and an ample literature could be created, 
 and so far as the people themselves were concerned the children in 
 one generation would have adapted themselves to the new conditions. 
 One calls to mind that in England the standard Bible fixed the language 
 just as Luther's Bible set the standard in Germany, and in France the 
 language of the King's court became the standard language for the 
 literature of the whole country. 
 
 The language of the island of Florida, where the seat of government 
 of the Solomons is situated and where there is a vigorous and a Chris- 
 tian population, if taken up by the Government might be made to 
 serve for all the eastern islands. The spread of such a standard literary 
 language would be slow, and pending the establishment of such a literary 
 language it is clearly the duty of the missionaries to reduce to writing 
 the languages of the various parts and to use them for the purpose of 
 teaching, though at the same time languages likely to be serviceable by 
 virtue of their more extended use should be carefully selected. Failing 
 the appointment of some one language for a group or district, the missions 
 should develop various types of language in each island or sphere of 
 work; thus for the greater part of San Cristoval the Heuru and Fagani 
 languages might be made to serve, while Sa'a, Tolo, and Lau are also 
 worthy of surviving on Malaita. 
 
 Up till the year 1917 the Melanesian Mission used Mota as the edu- 
 cational language in all its central schools. There was a time when 
 owing to the congregating of all the members of the staff at Norfolk 
 Island during the summer, and to the exclusive use of Mota in the 
 school, all the other languages of the Mission came almost to be
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. I7I 
 
 neglected. Mota was in a fair way to being regarded as the sacred 
 language of the Mission, and indeed it furnished popularly the standard 
 by which all the other languages were supposed to be measured, and the 
 fact that these languages were able to show words or usages that 
 corresponded to those of Mota was apt to be construed philologically 
 much in the same way as if the presence in the other Aryan tongues of 
 words similar to Latin were held as proving that Latin was the root 
 language of them all and not itself a branch language. 
 
 When native teachers speaking various languages have an education 
 in a language like Mota, which is foreign to most of them, much care 
 must be exercised in order that the ideas given in the course of teaching 
 may be made quite clear to the minds of the pupils. Dr. Codrington 
 used to get his pupils to write down the gist of the lesson in their own 
 tongues that he might test thereby their understanding of it. 
 
 At the conference held in 1916 the staff of the Mission decided to 
 make a change in the language used as the medium of instruction in the 
 central schools; Mota was to be abolished and English substituted in its 
 place. Effect has already been given to this determination. The 
 reasons advanced publicly for the change from Mota to English were: 
 
 (1) Mota is not well known by the English staff in the Solomons and 
 the languages spoken by the boys at the two central schools there do 
 not bear any very great superficial likeness to Mota, so that Mota may 
 be said to be practically a foreign tongue to all concerned. 
 
 (2) Only a small literature is available in Mota, and the learning of 
 English would open the way for the provision of a larger literature. 
 
 (3) English is likely to become the language of general communica- 
 tion. 
 
 (4) The trained teachers ought to be able to act as interpreters for 
 any whites who might visit their villages. 
 
 Now, there is undoubtedly every reason why English should be 
 taught as a part of the curriculum in the central schools (and also in the 
 village schools if possible), but to do this is surely a different thing from 
 making it the only means of communication at the central schools. 
 While not contending for the continuance of Mota in the schools of the 
 Solomons, one does contend strongly for the principle that the Mela- 
 nesian should be taught Christianity through the medium of one of his 
 own languages. English is a foreign language, but when all is said and 
 done Mota can not possibly be classed as foreign. Outwardly it may 
 present many dissimilarities from the Solomon Island languages, yet it 
 is thoroughly and typically Melanesian, and any Melanesian can learn 
 it or be taught it without any trouble whatever. 
 
 Mota has hitherto been of quite extraordinary value for purposes of 
 translation; most of our translations into the other Melanesian lan- 
 guages were made in the first instance from Mota as a basis, and in 
 many places it was quite possible thereby for a teacher of average
 
 172 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 ability to make a fair rendering of psalms, canticles, and hymns for the 
 beginnings of his work. 
 
 Bishop G. A. SeKvyn advocated the teaching of the Melanesians at 
 St. John's, Auckland, in English, but this was before Patteson came on 
 the scene. Selwyn was a scholar, but it is doubtful whether he could 
 be characterized as a linguist, nor had he the time to give to linguistic 
 studies as Patteson had. His Maoris he taught in Maori, and one 
 hears nothing of any proposal of his to abolish Maori as a medium of 
 communication. He had perforce to adopt English for his Melanesians, 
 just as he had to bring them away from their own country in order to 
 teach them. What one feels about the substitution of English for a 
 native language now in the Mission is that a veritable cardinal principle 
 is in danger of being abandoned thereby, viz., the principle that every 
 man should "hear the Gospel" in his own language. 
 
 THE NEED FOR A POLICY IN TRANSLATIONAL WORK. 
 
 The whole Bible has been translated into almost every Polynesian 
 language. In Melanesia no complete Bible exists as yet, though the 
 Mota Bible is practically complete. Certain small sections of the 
 earlier books of the Old Testament were omitted purposely from it. 
 In Papua no complete Bible exists, but some of the languages have a 
 complete New Testament. In setting out to translate the Bible, what 
 portion is the missionary to start on? How much of the Bible, or 
 rather, how much of the Old Testament, is really required? These 
 two questions must have occurred to the minds of all missionaries, 
 yet it would seem that no one mission has ever formulated a definite 
 scheme in the matter of directing or controlling biblical transla- 
 tions. With regard to the first question, as to what part of the Bible 
 one should begin on, the Rev. Dr. Macfarlane, of the London Mis- 
 sionary Society in Torres Straits, wrote asking this question of Dr. 
 Codrington, and the answer given was that it seemed best to make a 
 beginning with the Gospel according to St. Luke. In the Melanesian 
 Mission St. Luke and the Acts were the first translations made by 
 Bishop Patteson. Dr. Codrington states: "I wrote the middle of St. 
 Matthew and St. Mark, the Passion being old. Bishop Patteson 
 wrote St. John. I did almost all the Epistles." 
 
 Even apart from the necessity for translating the Psalms for use in 
 the daily services, there can be no doubt that a translation of the 
 Psalms should be made as soon as possible in order to encourage the 
 devotional life of the people. The metrical version of the Psalms in 
 the Indian language of Massachusetts was the first part of the Bible 
 which John Eliot, the apostle of the American Indians, published, and 
 in the singing of the Psalms he found the readiest means of arresting 
 attention and the simplest expression for the religious feelings of his 
 child-natured people.
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THK WESTERN PACIFIC. 173 
 
 No choice could be made in the Epistles as to which should be trans- 
 lated in preference to others, but the translator will naturally make 
 what progress he can with them all. If a people is to receive the 
 honor of having the Gospel message written in its own tongue the four 
 Gospels and the Acts must surely be the minimum amount of trans- 
 lation done, and it is hard to see how practical religion can be developed 
 at all among a people unless they have a copy of the Epistles, the 
 application of the Gospels, ready to their hands. 
 
 In very few cases will it be possible for much of the Old Testament 
 to be translated, either in the languages in the sphere of the Mela- 
 nesian Mission or in those of New Guinea, owing to the multiplicity 
 of languages and co the comparative dearth of missionaries and 
 to the need of working in the first place on the New Testament. More- 
 over, if the people have a New Testament it is hard to see what need 
 there is to undertake any systematic translation of the whole of the 
 Old Testament. 
 
 A list of the translations and of books published for use in the 
 Melanesian Mission is as follows: 
 
 (i) New Hebrides. . , _ . „ , 
 
 Raga: Prayer Book, St. Luke, Genesis, Harmonized Scripture Uospel 
 
 Lessons, Hymns. 
 Omba: Prayer Book, Harmonized Scripture Gospel Lessons, Hymns. 
 Maewo: Prayer Book (small), Harmonized Scripture Gospel Lessons, 
 
 Hymns. 
 
 (2) Banks Islands. 
 
 Lakona: Prayer Book (small). . 
 
 Mota: Prayer Book, New Testament, Old Testament, Harmonized 
 Scripture Gospel Lessons, Commentary on St. Matthews Instruc- 
 tions for Catechumens, English Lesson Book, Codrington on the 
 Miracles and Parables, Hymns. 
 
 (3) Torres Islands. 
 
 Vava: Prayer Book, Canonical Gospels and Epistles, Hymns. 
 
 (4) Santa Cruz. 
 
 Ndeni: Prayer Book, Canonical Gospels, Hymns. 
 
 (5) Solomon Islands. , /^, •, j r 
 
 Ulawa: Prayer Book, New Testament, Catechism for the Children ot 
 
 the Church, Hymns. , ^, •, , r 
 
 Sa'a: Prayer Book, New Testament, Catechism for the Children ot 
 the Church, Hymns. 
 
 Lau: Prayer Book (small). Gospels, Hymns (few). 
 
 Fiu: Pravers and Hvmns (small). 
 
 Wango: Prayer Book (small) and Hymns, St. Luke, Harmonized 
 Scripture Gospel Lessons. 
 
 Guadalcanar: Prayer Book (small), St. Luke, Hymns. 
 
 Florida: Prayer Book, Gospels, Canonical Epistles, Harmonized Scrip- 
 ture Gospel Lessons, Catechism for the Children of the Church, 
 Hvmns. 
 
 Bugotu: Prayer Book, Book of Psalms, New Testament, Portions ot 
 the Books of the Prophets, Hymns.
 
 iy4 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 From this table it will be seen that much translation yet remains to 
 be done. Florida, which is by far the most important language in the 
 Solomons, has no complete New Testament. Dr. Codrington has 
 included a small grammar of the Florida language in his "Melanesian 
 Languages," but naturally he was not able to do for it what he did for 
 Mota and we still await a full grammar of the language. 
 
 After sixty years of life, the Mission has only three complete New 
 Testaments and only two dictionaries, including the present dictionary 
 of Ulawa and Sa*a. A grammar of Wango exists in manuscript. 
 The paucity of grammars is much to be deplored. Sketches made by 
 Dr. Codrington might conceivably have been filled up even if no new 
 ones were made independently, but the grammars of Sa'a, Ulawa, and 
 Lau are the only ones that have been printed since Dr. Codrington's 
 great work containing grammars of 38 Melanesian languages was 
 published in 1884. 
 
 It would certainly be desirable to get native teachers to make 
 initial translations of the Gospels through the medium of Mota or 
 otherwise. The Mota New Testament, however, needs revising. It 
 was reprinted a year or two ago from stereotype plates and a few 
 of the printers' errors were corrected, but the Society for the Promotion 
 of Christian Knowledge would not allow any alterations that ran 
 over two lines. 
 
 Any translations made by natives would serve as a basis for future 
 work by the missionaries themselves and would also provide gram- 
 marians with valuable material for comparative study. Thus there 
 seems to be no reason why in the case of the Tolo language, e. g., in 
 Malaita, some of the teachers at Tawani'ahi'a on the west coast who 
 know both Tolo and Sa*a should not use the Sa'a translation of the 
 Gospels for work in their own language. Since Bishop Patteson's 
 time no further investigation has been made of the Tolo language, 
 though it is an important language both on Malaita and also at Marau 
 Sound on the south end of Guadalcanar. 
 
 THE VALUE OF THE STUDY OF MELANESIAN LANGUAGES. 
 
 The study of Melanesian languages is an absolute necessity for the 
 elucidation of problems of language in the western Pacific, and one 
 might go further and say that light had been thrown on languages so 
 far away from Melanesia as Madagascar and Malay by the working 
 out of the details of the grammars of the Melanesian languages. What 
 a flood of interest is created by Dr. Codrington's discovery of the 
 identity of the Omba, New Hebrides, word heno and the Florida hanu 
 with the Malagasy ano! In these three languages this word stands 
 in place of a personal name, and the personal article is prefixed, so that 
 i heno, a hanu, i ano, are identical and mean "so-and-so." The two 
 great Melanesian scholars. Bishop Patteson and Dr. Codrington, by
 
 LINGUISTICS IN THE WESTERN PACIFIC. I75 
 
 their analysis of words and by comparative studies, have shown that 
 the structure of the Polynesian and Melanesian languages is prac- 
 tically the same. They have shown that in both types the following 
 features occur: 
 
 Adjectives are formed by prefix or suffix. Time particles are used 
 with verbs. Transitive suffixes are added to verbs. Pronouns are 
 suffixed to nouns to denote possession. The personal pronouns are 
 preceded by the personal article (Mota i-nauy I, Maori a-hau, Malay 
 a-ku). 
 
 In "Melanesian Languages" it has been proved conclusively, by 
 evidence produced from languages of Melanesian stock, that the per- 
 sonal pronouns are the same in all the Oceanic languages, also that the 
 interrogatives are radically the same throughout and have similar uses. 
 Polynesian scholars generally have paid little attention to Melanesia, 
 yet the evidence of language is all conclusive of the close relationship 
 which exists between Polynesian and Melanesian. The failure on the 
 part of Polynesian scholars to study Melanesian languages has caused 
 them to make considerable mistakes in etymology and also to overlook 
 several very patent grammatical characteristics of the Polynesian lan- 
 guages. A good many of the derivations in Tregear's "Maori Com- 
 parative Dictionary" are shown to be incorrect on comparison with the 
 kindred forms in Melanesia. Also, one can not but think that the 
 tendency to philosophize about the religion of the Polynesian and his 
 consequent outlook on life would have been kept within more moderate 
 bounds had the investigators been a little more content to do spade 
 work and dig into the matter after the practical fashion of Dr. Cod- 
 rington in his book on Melanesian anthropology. 
 
 It has been maintained that the Melanesians had adopted Polyne- 
 sian forms of speech; that in fact the Polynesians were like the Romans 
 of old and had imposed their speech upon the peoples with whom they 
 mixed; but the facts of the case seem to be that, so far at least as lan- 
 guage is concerned, the two peoples belong to one family, and also that 
 of the two types the Melanesian is the older and is less worn and stands 
 to Polynesian somewhat as Anglo-Saxon does to modern English; 
 also that the explanation of many Polynesian peculiarities of speech is 
 to be found in the typical Melanesian usages. 
 
 Thus with regard to the use of the passive in PoKiiesian, a use which 
 has no counterpart whatever in Melanesian, the present writer, owing 
 to his knowledge of Melanesian, has been able to show elsewhere that 
 the Polynesian passive is compounded of adjectival suffixes added to 
 verbal suffixes, and that the gerundives, so common in Polynesia but 
 hardly appearing at all in Melanesia, are composed of the verbal 
 suffixes and noun endings. These verbal suffixes are among the 
 commonest features of the Melanesian languages, but with the single 
 exception of Samoan they can not be said to appear at all prominently
 
 176 LINGUISTICS IN THK WESTERN PACIFIC. 
 
 in Polynesia, though on Melanesian analogies their presence may be 
 detected in the words in the dictionaries. Also, curiously enough, one 
 of the Melanesian adjectival suffixes, na (which is a passive ending in 
 Polynesia), has been noticed in only one Polynesian language in that 
 capacity, and that only by deduction from a Melanesian example: 
 'Niuetavafia clear, open; Mota wazvanaw'ide and flat; Dyak papan plank; 
 Omba ivawa open sea; Sa'a taha to be open, clear; Maori tazvha chasm 
 (Sa'a tahalaa chasm), tazvhai to stretch forth the arms. 
 
 Also in Malay, another example of a late language with much decayed 
 forms of speech, Melanesia again supplies a means whereby correct 
 deductions may be made as to the construction of various words and 
 possibly also of various forms of speech, e. g., the presence of verbal 
 suffixes and of noun suffixes. 
 
 Apart from Dr. Codrington's study of the Melanesian forms, who 
 would have known that apa in siapa, the interrogative pronoun in 
 Malay, apa what? siapa who? is a form of the word which in Mela- 
 nesia appears as sava, hava, etc., and that the si in siapa is really the 
 personal article which appears in Javanese before the names of persons ? 
 Since in many words which are common to Malay and Javanese the 
 Malagasy suppresses the initial s, this Javanese si, the personal article, 
 is shown by Dr. Codrington to be in all probability the Malagasy i, 
 which is a personal article placed before the proper names of persons. 
 Thus siapa who, in Malay is shown to correspond to the Mota i sava 
 who? and sa mate, the deceased, in Malay is / mate in Mota. 
 
 In this way, through the study of Melanesian linguistics, "the use of 
 a personal article — a remarkable feature in a language — is found to 
 prevail in Melanesia, in Polynesia, in Madagascar, and in the Malay 
 Archipelago." This discovery alone is surely sufficient to establish the 
 importance of the study of the Melanesian languages.
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 Melanesia is the geographical name given to various groups of islands 
 in the Southwest Pacific. These are the nearest of the Pacific Islands 
 to Australia and they lie in a semicircle off the northeast coast of that 
 continent. New Caledonia, the southern end of the arc, is the nearest 
 to Australia, and New Britain and New^ Ireland, lately acquired hy 
 the Australian Expeditionary Forces, form the northern end of the arc. 
 The groups in the arc are five in number, the Bismarck Archipelago 
 and the Solomons in the North, Santa Cruz in the center, the New 
 Hebrides and New Caledonia in the South. The Admiralty Islands 
 are included under the Bismarck Archipelago; the New Hebrides 
 include the subgroups of Banks and Torres, and the Loyalties are asso- 
 ciated with New Caledonia. The term Melanesia belongs properly 
 to all of these groups of islands. Certain other groups lie outside the 
 arc, but rank as Melanesian, to wit, Fiji and the islands which lie 
 off the southeast coast of New Guinea, the Trobriands, D'Entre- 
 casteaux, Woodlark, and the Louisiades. 
 
 Etymologically, Melanesia ought to mean "black islands," just as 
 Polynesia means **many islands" and Micronesia "small islands," 
 but considering the wonderful verdure and greenness of the Melanesian 
 islands one can only infer that those who named them originally had 
 in their minds the comparatively dark skins of the inhabitants and 
 that this distinguishing feature of the people was used as a means of 
 designating the islands where they dwelt. Doubtless to the eye of any 
 one accustomed to the lighter-skinned peoples of Polynesia these 
 islands of the Southwest Pacific would seem to be "islands of the 
 blacks." 
 
 Several external characteristics of the Melanesian peoples serve to 
 distinguish them from the Polynesians: (i) Shortness of stature, the 
 average height of the males being possibly 5 feet 4 inches and of the 
 females 4 feet io>2 inches; (2) a chocolate-colored skin; (3) bushy 
 hair, frizzed and tangled and standing erect, owing probably to the 
 incessant teasing of it by the native combs. 
 
 The languages spoken in Melanesia vary considerably among them- 
 selves, but on examination they are shown to possess common features 
 and to have a very large underlying sameness. The external resem- 
 blances, however, between the Melanesian languages are much less 
 than those between the languages of Polynesia; e. g., the external 
 resemblances between Maori and Samoan are far greater than those 
 between Mota and Florida. The witness of language would enable 
 us to decide at once that Fiji belongs to Melanesia, though its prox- 
 imity to Polynesia has largely affected the customs and habits and 
 probably also the religion of its people. Similarly the peoples of the 
 
 177
 
 lyS MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 islands to the east of New Guinea can be shown to be Melanesian by 
 reason of their languages, and if Melanesia be taken as a starting- 
 point for nomenclature, the Malagasy language of Madagascar might 
 even be classed as Melanesian. The peoples of New Guinea have the 
 same three distinguishing physical characteristics that we have noted 
 above, and the languages of a very considerable proportion of at least 
 the coast peoples there can certainly be classed as Melanesian. 
 
 Dr. Codrington has shown in "Melanesian Anthropology" that there 
 is a large general resemblance in the religious beliefs and practices, 
 the customs and ways of life, which prevail in Melanesia proper, and 
 further research on the lines indicated by him will probably reveal the 
 presence of similar beliefs and conditions of life among the Melanesian 
 peoples of New Guinea and the neighboring islands. 
 
 A distinguishing social condition of Melanesia is the complete ab- 
 sence of tribes, if the word tribe is to be applied as it is to the Maori 
 people of New Zealand, or as used in Fiji. Descent in nearly every 
 part of Melanesia is counted through the m_other and the people are 
 everywhere divided into two classes which are exogamous. This 
 division of the people is the foundation on which the fabric of native 
 societ}' is built up. 
 
 THE GOVERNMENT OF MELANESIA. 
 
 Previous to 1914 Germany held an important part of Melanesia, 
 viz., the Bismarck Archipelago, which comprises the two large islands 
 known prior to their annexation by Germany as New Britain and New 
 Ireland, with many smaller islands in the group, notably the Duke of 
 York, and also with two large islands in the Solom.ons, Bougainville 
 and Choiseul, and the small island Buka. France holds New Cale- 
 donia and the Loyalties, and a joint British and French protectorate, 
 known :\s the Condominium, prevails in the case of the New Hebrides, 
 Banks, and Torres groups, v/ith the center of government at Vila, 
 Sandwich Island. The Solomons and Santa Cruz are a British pro- 
 tectorate with a resident commissioner stationed at Tulagi, Florida, 
 Solomon Islands, and under the orders of the governor of Fiji, who is 
 high commissioner for the Pacific. 
 
 THE PROGRESS OF THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 
 
 The nominal field of work of the Melanesian Mission is all the Mel- 
 anesian islands from and including the Solomon Islands to the three 
 northern New Hebrides, Raga, Omba, and Maewo, but excluding 
 Fiji. All of the islands in this sphere as far north as Ysabel (with a 
 few exceptions noted below) are more or less occupied by the Mission. 
 The total number in its schools in 1914 was 15,000, of whom 9,000 are 
 baptized. Many of the smaller islands are now completely Christian, 
 but even on islands of moderate size, like Ulawa in the Solomons or
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 179 
 
 Santa Maria in the Banks, a certain number are still Heathen, while in 
 the large islands practically 85 per cent are still outside the Mission's 
 influence. 
 
 The total population of the islands in the sphere of the Mission 
 numbers anything between 100,000 and 150,000, and the large islands, 
 Malaita, San Cristoval, and Guadalcanar, contain on a moderate 
 estimate 70,000 of the total. It is not surprising that on an island 
 like Malaita, which is 100 miles long and contains a scattered popu- 
 lation of 30,000 or 40,000 people, comparatively little progress has been 
 made, but it is especially regrettable that there are still three Heathen 
 villages on a small island like Ulawa, and that tiny places like Sikaiana, 
 Rennell and Bellona, and Santa Anna are still unworked. However, 
 it must be understood that the evangelizing of Melanesia is a pecul- 
 iarly difficult task, as is shown by the fact that in Tanna in the New 
 Hebrides, where the attack on Heathenism has been incessant and 
 where the Presbyterian missionaries have been in actual residence 
 from the very start of the work, a portion of the island is still Heathen. 
 Nevertheless, better results might have been obtained in our own 
 sphere. 
 
 OTHER MISSIONARY AGENCIES IN MELANESIA. 
 
 The Melanesian Mission is not the only evangelizing body in its 
 sphere of work. Roman Catholic missionaries settled in the Solomons 
 about 1897 and made their headquarters at a little island called Rua 
 Sura, off" the east coast of Guadalcanar and fairly close to the trading 
 station at Aola. A good deal of their work has been done on the west 
 coast of Guadalcanar near Mole. One of their methods of progress has 
 been to adopt children from the Heathen parts and to rear them in 
 Christian surroundings. They made settlements also along the north 
 end of the island, often in the villages belonging to the Melanesian Mis- 
 sion, and have begun work on the southeast coast of San Cristoval and 
 on the west coast of Big Malaita. They have stations also at the south 
 end of Raga, New Hebrides. 
 
 The Kanaka labor trade was responsible for the advent of certain 
 missionaries of Protestant bodies into the Solomons. Most of the 
 Melanesians in Queensland who attended school and church were 
 cared for by the Queensland Kanaka Mission, a Protestant body. 
 At Malu, a place at the north end of Big Malaita, some returned Chris- 
 tians who had been converted by the agency of these schools of the 
 Queensland Kanaka Mission and some devoted white missionaries 
 came to the Solomons in a labor vessel and settled at Malu. But the 
 malarial conditions of the place and lack of proper equipment brought 
 about their removal and two of them eventually died of malaria. 
 When the Kanakas were all deported the Queensland Kanaka Mission 
 followed their old pupils and made regular stations on Malaita. Their
 
 l8o MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 mission is now known as the South Sea EvangeHcal Mission. Its 
 operations are confined mainly to Malaita. 
 
 In 1902 the veteran Dr. George Brow^n visited the western Solomons 
 and made preparation for beginning a mission of the Methodist body 
 in New Georgia. This mission is now" well established and has extended 
 its operations in New Georgia and Vella Lavella, and opened a school 
 on Liuaniua (Ongtong Java, Lord Howe Island), an atoll north of 
 Ysabel inhabited by Polynesians. 
 
 In the New Hebrides, on Raga and Omba in the sphere of the Mel- 
 anesian Mission, mission work is being done by missionaries of the 
 Church of Christ. 
 
 No delimitation of territory in the case of the various missions has 
 been attempted by the governments concerned, such as has been done 
 in New Guinea, and undoubtedly the clashing of the various interests 
 is not the best thing for the natives. The marking out of a sphere of 
 operations, with possibly a time limit for the effective occupying of 
 them, would be the fairest for all concerned. 
 
 SOME PHYSICAL FEATURES OF THE ISLANDS. 
 
 All the islands in the sphere of the Mission have a certain similarity 
 of appearance from the sea in that they are all covered with dense 
 forest. Florida and the east coast of Guadalcanar have wide, open 
 spaces covered with high, rank grass and with a few trees, but in all 
 the other islands dense bush covers the face of the country from high- 
 water mark to the tops of the hills miles away in the interior. In the 
 islands in the south giant creepers twine over all the trees and form a 
 perfect network, almost blotting out the tops of the individual trees, 
 and when seen from the sea the huge banyans seem to tower like 
 observation posts above the flattened tops of the forest. In most of 
 the islands the land rises abruptly from the beach and access to the 
 interior is by narrow forest tracks which the frequent heavy rainfalls 
 have converted into deep ruts. Tree roots cover everything and 
 walking is extremely difllicult in consequence. The paths are never 
 kept clear and open and the trees that fall across them are allowed to 
 lie there, and a new track is made round or under or over the obstacle. 
 
 Dr. Guppy, in his book, "The Solomon Islands," has a graphic 
 description of the experiences of the white man when travelling ashore 
 in Melanesia: 
 
 "Bush walking where there is no native track is a very tedious process. 
 In districts of coral limestone such traverses are exceedingly trying to the 
 soles of one's boots and to the measure of one's temper. After being pro- 
 vokingly entangled in a thicket for some minutes, the persevering traveller 
 walks briskly along through a comparatively clear space, when a creeper 
 suddenly trips up his feet and over he goes to the ground. Picking him- 
 self up, he no sooner starts again when he finds his face in the middle of a
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. l8l 
 
 Strong web which some huge-bodied spider has been laboriously construct- 
 ing. He proceeds on his way when he feels an uncomfortable sensation 
 inside his helmet, in which he finds his friend the spider, with a body as big 
 as a filbert, quite at his ease. Going down a steep slope, he clasps a stout- 
 looking areca palm to prevent himself falling, when down comes the rotten 
 palm, and the long-suffering traveller finds himself once more on the ground. 
 To these inconveniences must be added the oppressive heat of a tropical 
 forest and the continual perspiration in which the skin is bathed." 
 
 A Melanesian is always careful to turn his toes in as he walks, and 
 the narrowness of the bush tracks causes him no inconvenience, but 
 the white man is not so careful how he plants his feet and is constantly 
 striking the numerous objects which lie by the side of the track or on 
 its surface. Moreover, a native person keeps his hands by his side as 
 he walks, whereas the white man does not know the necessity for care 
 in the matter and he frequently hits the numerous obstacles with his 
 hands, and some of the leaves on the edge of the track are studded with 
 sharp thorns! Every Melanesian carries a "scrub" knife, and with 
 it he cuts away the limbs that fall over the path, but he cuts them at 
 his own height and in an immediate line with the path; this suits him 
 well, but proves awkward for any person who is taller or less careful 
 about his method of progression. 
 
 It can hardly be said that the Melanesian islands as a whole are 
 beautiful, for the prevailing colors of the forest are too somber and dull; 
 brilliant-colored shrubs grow round the houses, but none of the forest 
 trees bear such flowers as one sees on the trees in North Queensland, 
 and the ground is a tangled mass of undergrowth and creepers. Wide, 
 open views, panoramic scenes, outlooks over mountain or glen or sea 
 are impossible to obtain, since the bush closes in everything. But 
 there is something peculiarly exhilarating, both to mind and body, 
 when, after struggling along through the numerous obstructions 
 of the paths and sweltering under the oppressive heat, one suddenly 
 emerges from the trees on the weather coast of an island and feels the 
 invigorating blast of the trade wind, and the eye rests with complete 
 satisfaction on the wonderful blue of the sea and the red of the shore 
 reef, and the creamy whiteness of the breakers as they beat against it. 
 
 Certain places in the Solomons, however, may quite easily rank as 
 beauty spots. The Ututha Channel, which divides the two eastern 
 islands in the Floridas; the channel in the Rubiana Lagoon; and the 
 western end of the Mara Masiki Channel, which divides Malaita in 
 two — all have delightful vistas and charm one with their tortuous 
 and sharp windings opening out on here an island, there a cascade; 
 the giant growths of the coral under the boat fascinate one's gaze; 
 beautifully colored fishes of vivid greens and reds dart about in the 
 shallows, while up in the trees, on the side of the steep hills, innumer- 
 able cockatoos rend the air with their harsh cries, or the big wood
 
 l82 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 pigeons boom out their melancholy note, reminding one of a cow lowing 
 for its calf. Often, again, the course of a river (like that at Mwadoa, 
 Ulawa), with its succession of cascades and its deep, clear pools, con- 
 strains our admiration. 
 
 The islands of the Floridas more especially appeal to the eye. They 
 have more open spaces, the coast line is more indented, and beautiful 
 bays abound; there are more islands lying off the coast, the beaches 
 are more numerous, and the landing on them is easy. The villages 
 in Florida nestle under the shade of innumerable coconut trees just 
 above high-water mark. The beaches are lined with the feathery 
 casuarina and here and there are coral trees {Erythrina indica) with 
 their brilliant red flowers, or the gorgeous red leaves of the salite 
 {Catappa terminalis) light up the whole beach with the glow of their 
 dying splendor. The huge masses of the vutu {Barringtonia speciosa) 
 spring right out of the salt water and their biretta-shaped fruits may be 
 seen floating on every tide. Going north from Norfolk Island, the 
 sight of a floating fruit of the vutu was generally the first sign of our 
 entrance into the tropics. Similarly the mighty limbs of the dalo 
 (Fiji dilo, Calophylluvi inophyllum) are washed by every wave and its 
 small ball-like fruit is found lying on every beach. The smell of the 
 sweet-scented white flowers of the dalo reminds one of nothing so much 
 as of an orange grove in flower. 
 
 But the real attraction and charm of Melanesia lie in the mystery 
 of the people, their unwritten past, the strangeness of their languages, 
 their views of life, their habits and customs, the strange flora of the 
 country, the birds and butterflies, some of these latter measuring 8 or 
 9 inches across, the excitement of a landing among the Heathen, the 
 yearnings of soul, the longing to do them good, to lead them out of 
 their darkness into light, to give them som.ething more satisfying than 
 the tobacco or calico or knife which they are clamoring for — these 
 are the things that grip the heart of the m.issionary and constitute for 
 him at least the charm of Melanesia. One stands on a beach of the 
 great island Malaita, and all the fibers of one's being are sarred by 
 the sight of hill rising upon hill, cape stretching out beyond cape, and 
 by the knowledge that scattered all up and down the land are souls 
 awaiting the enlightenment of the spirit of God. 
 
 THE FOOD-STUFFS OF MELANESIA. 
 
 The Melanesians may be called an agricultural people and a great 
 deal of their time is given up to cultivation. Their two main crops 
 are yams and taro, of both of which there are numerous varieties. The 
 best yams are grown in the southern part of Melanesia; the Solomon 
 Islanders never have enough yams to carry them through the summer 
 months till harvest time in April, all the yams having been used for 
 planting. But in the larger islands there is extensive cultivation of
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 183 
 
 taro in the districts on the hills, and this food carries the people over 
 the hunger times of the summer months. A yam garden is a sight 
 worth seeing; the ground is kept perfectly clear of weeds (this is the 
 women's share of the work), the yam vines are trained up long poles 
 and then run along strings which are tied from pole to pole. The vines 
 are of various shades of green, and when the leaves are dying they turn 
 red in color and are very beautiful to look on. 
 
 Breadfruit grows readily, and the trees have two crops a year, one 
 coming opportunely during the summer. The canarium (almond) 
 bears during the winter months, July and August. The nuts are put 
 into cane baskets and are smoked ready for storing. The coconut 
 is in bearing all the year through. The tree is at its best at the 
 coast and just above high-water mark. The large islands of the 
 eastern Solomons — Malaita,Guadalcanar, SanCristoval, and Ysabel — 
 have comparatively few coconuts, and the only extensive coconut 
 plantation on Malaita is along the coast at Sa*a, at the southeast end 
 of the island. The scarcity of coconuts is largely owing to the fact 
 that the trees thrive best near the sea, but owing to fear of raids the 
 majority of the people on these large islands live away from the coast 
 and so can not grow the trees in any quantity. 
 
 Of so-called tropical fruits Melanesia has but few indigenous vari- 
 eties. Of the common native fruits by far the most important is the 
 coconut, and one is inclined to question whether any more wonderful 
 fruit than the coconut grows on this earth! The fruit is obtainable 
 all the year round; it is nutritious whether eaten in the green stage 
 or when it has begun to sprout and is ready for planting. The ripe 
 nut is generall}'^ scraped and strained, and the resultant white juice, 
 the only real coconut milk, is boiled in the half shell and mixed as a 
 paste with grated yams or taro. What is commonly known as coconut 
 milk, the fluid in the dry nut so dear to the hearts of children in Euro- 
 pean countries, is never drunk by Melanesians, but if opportunity 
 oflfers is poured into a basin and put by for the animals to drink. 
 
 The oil of the coconut is extracted by the old-time process of stone 
 boiling. Needless to say, dried or smoked coconut (copra) is by far 
 the greatest article of export from Melanesia to-day. Ceylon used to 
 be reckoned the planters' paradise so far as growing coconuts was 
 concerned, but coconut plantations in the islands of the Solomons 
 come into bearing quicker than in any other part of the world; the 
 nuts are as good as the big Samoan nuts (indeed seed nuts have been 
 imported from Samoa), the rainfall is abundant, and hurricanes are 
 almost unknown. The oil is extracted from the copra and goes to make 
 some of our best soaps. The shell of the nut is used by the natives 
 to make cups and bottles, and since it contains oil it burns fiercely in 
 the fire. From the outer covering of the nut both ropes and mats are 
 made — the coir of commerce (coir, like copra, is a Singhalese word);
 
 184 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 and the natives themselves make sennit and string from it. The dry 
 sheath, the covering of the new bunch of fruit, serves the natives both as 
 tinder and as a torch. The leaves of the tree make the very strongest 
 baskets, and in some islands are used to make the walls of the 
 houses. In the equatorial Pacific toddy is distilled from the growing 
 tree and the topmost shoots form a veritable king's banquet, but the 
 cutting of them destroys the tree. 
 
 Other fruits are the vi-apple {Spondias dulcis, commonly known as 
 nil or tiri), the canarium nut (ngali), the nut of the salite tree, which is 
 found oftenest growing at the mouths of the streams, the banana, and 
 the breadfruit. Both the banana and breadfruit are always cooked. 
 The indigenous banana needs cooking to make it eatable, but the com- 
 mon varieties, Musa cavendishii or gros michel, or the sugar banana of 
 Queensland, have been introduced and flourish. Many other tropical 
 and subtropical fruits have also been introduced- — oranges, mandarins, 
 lemons, limes, granadilla, soursop, papaya, pineapples, mangoes, cocoa, 
 coffee; most of these need careful cultivation, and with the exception 
 of limes and papayas they all tend to die out if allowed to run wild. 
 
 Animal food is but rarely partaken of by Melanesians. Pigs they 
 all have, but they keep them for great events, for death feasts or for 
 wedding banquets. Opossums (cuscus) and the large fruit-eating bats 
 and wood pigeons and the monitor lizard are often eaten as relishes 
 with the vegetable food. The coast people get large quantities of 
 shellfish at the low spring tides, and on an island like Ulawa a great 
 deal of fishing is done both from the rocks and also out of canoes. The 
 people make all their own fishing-lines out of home-made string or out 
 of strong creepers found in the forest, and in old days their hooks were 
 cut out of tortoise-shell or out of black pearl-shell. Even to-day the 
 hooks for the bonito fishing are of native manufacture and the tiny 
 hooks for whiffing sardines are exquisitely made. 
 
 Fishing with nets is followed extensively by the Lau-speaking 
 peoples who live on the artificial islets off the northeast coast of Ma- 
 laita. These peoples and the people of the Reef Islands at Santa Cruz 
 live almost entirely on a fish diet. The flesh of the porpoise is much 
 prized by the peoples of Malaita and regular drives of porpoises are 
 held, the animals being surrounded and forced ashore into muddy 
 creeks, where they are captured. The main value of the porpoise lies 
 in the teeth, which form one of the native currencies. On the lee side 
 of the large islands in the Solomons there is a great deal of fishing 
 with hand nets; men stand in the water at the mouth of the 
 streams, holding a pole to which two bent sticks are attached with a 
 net tied to the four ends of the sticks, and lowered to the bottom. 
 The small fish (sardines and others) are chased inshore by large 
 kingfish, and pass over the net, which is promptly pulled up by the 
 fisherman. The fish are transferred by a deft movement to a bag 
 hanging on the man's back and suspended from his head.
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 185 
 
 Bonito and flying-fish are esteemed as the greatest dehcacies. The 
 former is coarse, but the latter is indeed a dainty. The bonito is a 
 very sacred fish to the mind of the southern Solomon Islander, and the 
 catching of it was intimately connected with his religion. The bonito 
 is caught from canoes, either by a hook trailed aft, no bait being used, 
 or by a hook played up and down in a jerky fashion and attached to a 
 strong rod and line. The flying-fish are caught on a gorge made of 
 tortoise-shell or of the midrib of the rachis of the sago palm. The best 
 bait is the claw of the robber crab {Birgus latro). The hook and line are 
 made fast to a fishing float called ii'o in Ulawa (Maori uto fish-float). 
 Numbers of these are thrown out in places frequented bv the flving-fish 
 and the owner stands by in his canoe and watches them. 
 
 Sea bream are the most delicate fish in Melanesia. They are caught 
 with hook and line, and live white ants are thrown out as burly. The 
 bait is a worm found in the sand at high-water mark. The white ant 
 used is not the destructive white ant, which is capable of giving a sharp 
 bite, but is of a brownish color. The ignorant bushmen are popularly 
 supposed to use the wrong ant, with the result that the bream will 
 disappear. 
 
 THE HOUSES OF THE MELANESIANS. 
 
 The houses are mainly of one t^pe, one-roomed buildings, to which 
 annexes may easily be added. Some of these houses are large enough 
 to accommodate a chief and his twenty wives, small chambers being 
 built within the main building. The commoners have their own 
 houses, one house to each family, and it is rarely that two families 
 live together. The roof is the first part of the house that is built. 
 Three rows of posts are erected and ridge poles are set on them. The 
 poles may rest in a groove or the tops of the posts may be forked. 
 Bamboo rafters are tied from the center pole to the side, and thatch 
 is laid on them longitudinally. The thatch is made of leaves, sago 
 palm or nipa palm, or the leaves of sugar cane (this latter is only used 
 in the south) sewn on to reeds or laths of bamboos and then tied in 
 position. The people of Florida and of Ysabel put their thatch on 
 in very close layers, and consequently the roof lasts very well, but in 
 the other islands the thatch needs a good deal of repair after the second 
 year. The smoke ot the wood fires used in cooking hardens the thatch 
 and tends to preserve it; but schools and churches, buildings where 
 fires are not lighted, need constant repairs to the thatch. The sides 
 are built in with lattice-work of thin bamboo, and a small doorway is 
 left in the front which can be covered by a shutter of leaves. Orna- 
 mental ridges are made on the ground and are hoisted up into position, 
 and then made fast with creepers. 
 
 The Malaita and San Cristoval houses have a platform in front, 
 where the people sit in the evenings. To get into the house one has
 
 l86 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 to mount this platform and then drop through the tiny doorway. The 
 Florida house is generally built upon piles and the floor is covered 
 with split bamboos. The bed place may be raised or, as in Malaita, 
 the people may sleep on the earth with no better mattress than one 
 of the huge coconut leaves plaited. For the women and small children 
 a platform is built to serve as a bed. Pillows as such are not much in 
 use except in Santa Cruz, and a log or billet of wood makes an accept- 
 able pillow for the Melanesian. 
 
 The men and boys in the Solomons have club-houses, both in the 
 villages and also down at the beach. In the club-house on the beach 
 the canoes for bonito fishing are kept. Strangers are entertained in 
 these club houses; the relics of the dead are kept in them and religious 
 rites are performed in them. Women are excluded from the club 
 houses. 
 
 The cooking is all done at a fireplace of earth set inside a ring of 
 stones on the floor. On a stand over the fire are the household cooking 
 utensils, wooden bowls, and stores of smoked almonds. Yams are kept 
 on stages built in the rear part of the house and generally screened off". 
 Every house has its inner chamber that serves as a bedroom if required. 
 Life is lived very much in public, and privacy is a thing not understood 
 or desired. To be allowed to go behind the partition in any house is 
 significant as a mark of close acquaintanceship. 
 
 CLOTHING. 
 
 Bark cloth (tapa) is made in Melanesia, but it never figured as an 
 article of clothing and its main use was to form a kind of shawl in which 
 the baby was slung whencarried from the shoulder. Before the coming 
 of the white man clothing of any sort was very little worn by Mela- 
 nesians. The people of Santa Cruz, both men and women, were indeed 
 clad sufficiently to satisfy our European notions of decency, and in 
 the southern New Hebrides and in Florida and Ysabel the women 
 wore petticoats made of mats or of grass, but in very many of the 
 islands the women's dress was of the scantiest, and the men wore 
 nothing but a section of a leaf of a large pandanus. In the southeast 
 Solomons the men commonly were quite naked and the women wore 
 but a scanty fringe, while on Big Malaita not even the traditional 
 fig leaf was worn. In Santa Cruz, where all women and girls are 
 swathed in mats and are kept in strict seclusion, there is more immoral- 
 ity, and that of a gross and shocking sort, than in the Lau-speaking 
 districts of Malaita, where the women wear no clothing of any sort 
 whatever. Once the mind gets over the shock experienced at the idea 
 of the unclothed body, it will be obvious to the unprejudiced person 
 that the absence of clothing does not necessarily imply immodesty 
 either of thought or action. A Heathen woman on Malaita knows no 
 shame at the fact that her body is unclothed.
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. iSj 
 
 Another point as to which incorrect ideas exist is the question of 
 cannibalism. Doubtless cases of anthropophagy occurred in many 
 of the Melanesian islands, but it was never characteristic of the people 
 as a whole, and the man-eating propensities of the Fijian people could 
 never be predicated of the whole people of any single group in the 
 sphere of the Mission. So local and confined is the practice that, 
 while portions of one island regularly follow it, other portions of the 
 same island hold it in abhorrence, as is the case on Malaita. Joseph 
 Wate, of Sa'a, a reliable witness, assured me that the Tolo peoples of 
 Malaita were cannibals, but his own peoples were not, nor were the 
 shore peoples of Big Malaita. The latter were fish-eaters, and those 
 who lived on a fish diet did not practice as a regular thing the eating 
 of human flesh. Cannibalism is the regular practice on San Cristoval, 
 but is held in abhorrence on Ulawa. Yet the belief in cannibalism is 
 so firmly fixed that one reads in the reports and books of the Mission 
 that the two Reef Islanders who were held captive at Port Adam in 
 Bishop John Selwyn's time were being fattened up and kept for eating, 
 whereas in all probability they were regarded as "live heads" {lalavioa 
 mori) and kept for killing, should any necessity arise when a victim 
 would be demanded, as, e. g., at the death of any important person 
 in the place, or they might be sold to anyone looking for a person to 
 kill. The bodies after death would be buried. 
 
 THE CLEANLINESS OF NATIVES. 
 
 To bathe daily is the common practice of most Melanesians, but the 
 bath is taken in the afternoon and usually after the day's work in the 
 garden is over. The Melanesian never dreams of having a dip in the 
 morning, as we whites do, and to the unthinking his failure to do so 
 might seem to argue want of proper cleanliness. But, as Dr. Guppy 
 says, these people are far more susceptible to a rise or fall in the tem- 
 perature than we are, and he quotes Darwin as noticing that the 
 Patagonians when over a fire were streaming w^ith perspiration, whereas 
 the white men with thick clothes on were enjoying the pleasant 
 warmth. So a Melanesian likes to bathe when the day is warm; on 
 days when the south wind is blowing — a strong wind with cloudy 
 days — bathing is not much indulged in. 
 
 Since these people wear no clothes and have no seat but the ground 
 and take their rest on mats laid either on or just above the floor, and 
 always with a fire going beside them, their bodies soon show the dirt, but 
 it is a great mistake to imagine that they allow their bodies to go dirty 
 or are slack about bathing. A man or woman with fever will abstain 
 from washing (even in cases of strong fever it never occurs to anyone 
 to sponge the patient) and to bathe is a sign of convalescence. If a 
 person stays about a house and is evidently unwashed, one may take 
 it for granted that he or she is indisposed.
 
 l88 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 THE CHILDREN. 
 
 Great care is expended in bathing small children and shielding them 
 from the rays of the sun. A young mother is excused from all work 
 and she has the best time in all her life when her first baby is born. 
 Her whole time is given up to the child, and it is seldom out of her 
 arms. Owing to the lack of nourishing foods children are suckled 
 till they are quite large. The Melanesian baby seems to have no 
 natural liking for water and one often hears the shrill cries of small 
 children being bathed in the streams or being washed in the houses. 
 In the latter case water is poured from a bamiboo into one of the wooden 
 bowls and the child is then washed by hand. 
 
 The children at a very early stage of their existence are freed from 
 the authority of their parents. They have no household duties to 
 perform; there is no set time for meals; in the morning they may be 
 given something cold left over from the night before, or the mother 
 may roast a yam on the fire, but as a rule there is no cooking done till 
 the late afternoon, when the women return from their gardens. During 
 the day, if the children are hungry they can get a coconut or a bread- 
 fruit, or shell-fish, or they can roast a yam or a taro, and a fire can be 
 made an\^vhere. The boys can get themselves an opossum or an 
 iguana and in the hill districts they even find grasshoppers to eat. 
 One and all they use large quantities of areca nut and pepper leaf and 
 lime. These seem to be as necessary to the Melanesians of the north- 
 ern islands as is a pipe to a confirmed smoker. 
 
 One would expect that children freed thus early from any depend- 
 ence on their elders would run riot and learn licentious ways and 
 habits, but such does not seem to be the case. There is but little 
 individuality in Melanesians, and they are not "inventors of evil 
 things." They are bound by traditional customs, by the laws of the 
 elders, by those social restrictions that the people have evolved for 
 themselves as a safeguard against the breaking up of their society, 
 and free agents though the children may be, and lacking parental 
 control from our point of view, yet there is no such thing among them 
 as the organized following or doing of evil, and the ruling moral ideas 
 of the people are found as the guide also of their children. 
 
 EVANGELIZATION. 
 
 Apart from the duty and privilege which every Christian feels of 
 winning the peoples of the earth for Christ, apart also from the prompt- 
 ings of the Holy Spirit to bring the peoples of Melanesia to a knowl- 
 edge of the power of Christ, there can be no conceivable reason for 
 holding that Melanesians have no need of the Christian religion or 
 could fail to grasp it when presented to them. In the first place, they 
 certainly lose nothing by renouncing their old Heathen religion, which 
 was the worship of their ancestors. The spirits of these ancestors
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 189 
 
 provoke tear rather than love, and are invoked from a desire that their 
 influence should be used to stave off any possible evil that might hap- 
 pen rather than because they are conceived of as kindly dispositioned 
 beings who love and want to do good to their worshippers. To a 
 people with such a religion the knowledge of the Great Spirit God as 
 a loving Father comes with the utmost force and power. 
 
 Melanesians on the one hand are more or less incapable of individual 
 and separate action; each one is just a copy of his neighbor, and every- 
 thing is done by concerted agreement among the whole people; on the 
 other hand, they have no means of preserving the welfare of themselves 
 as a whole. They have no tribes, no kingdoms, no laws beyond the 
 unwritten social laws relating to marriage, etc.; life is insecure, accu- 
 sations of witchcraft are easily made, and death follows as a matter of 
 course; infanticide is a common practice, big families are almost un- 
 known, polygamy is a recognized thing. So Christianity comes to 
 them as a means of insuring both individual and social vigor and only 
 in so far as they become Christian will they be saved from extinction. 
 If only from a humanitarian point of view, it were a charity to enlighten 
 the darkness of these benighted people and to give them something to 
 strive for, to set before them some spiritual end, to give them a higher 
 standard of existence than their present one. 
 
 There can, however, be no question of leaving them alone now, what- 
 ever may have been the case in past years; civilization, i. e., trade, is 
 coming in fast and the inevitable consequence will be that the white 
 man's view of life will alter the old style of things. Experience has 
 taught us that wherever a people without a settled state and a kingdom 
 and the external power of law is invaded by any of our western peoples, 
 with their vigor and personality, the less-developed people lose all their 
 pristine distinctiveness, all bonds are loosed, and inevitable decay sets 
 in; in other w^ords, the white man destroys the black. Benjamin 
 Kidd shows this most conclusively in his book "Social Evolution." 
 In the case of Melanesia the process may take time, but that the 
 result is certain in the end is proved by the disappearance of the nomad 
 Australian aboriginal, and with a people of a higher culture by the story 
 of the capable Maori people of New Zealand under modern conditions. 
 
 Drink and idleness are two of the main factors that have tended 
 to the downfall of both the Maori and the Australian aboriginal; low- 
 class whites have done much to ruin the latter, nor has the Maori 
 been free from their influence. There is no fear of a large influx of 
 whites into Melanesia, and the governments have it in their power to 
 deport any undesirable person, but in the south of Melanesia, e. g., 
 on Omba, unscrupulous traders have done incalculable harm. Under 
 the Condominium of the New Hebrides, drink and firearms can still 
 be obtained by natives, but the Solomon Island government entirely 
 prohibits the sale of both.
 
 190 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 In the more settled islands and districts provision can be made quite 
 easily for the due employment of the people at regular and systematic 
 work, so as to guard against the danger of idleness. There is ample 
 land available everywhere for use either in growing the crops oi food or 
 for planting in coconuts. Hunger ought to be a thing of the past; the 
 islands hardly know what a drought is; the foodstuffs, both indigenous 
 and introduced, are many and varied, and it needs only sufficient 
 land to be kept under cultivation to insure a plentiful and regular 
 supply of food. This is clear in our experience, for in our own garden 
 at Ulawa, which was under the care of Elwin Dume, a man of Mera- 
 lava, there was always a supply of food, sweet potatoes, yamxS, pana, 
 pumpkins, tapioca (cassava), and even taro (which the people of the 
 place said would not grow in Ulawa), bananas, and pineapples. It 
 often was the case that when our garden was bearing well others were 
 searching for food. Elwin used to return home through the village 
 unconcernedly smoking his pipe and with the tip of a yam showing 
 out of his bag. "Oh! look at these white men {mzua haka)," the 
 people would exclaim as he passed, "they have yams while w^e have 
 to go and scratch in the forest for food!" 
 
 The exercise of due control both by the Mission and by government 
 ought to obviate the dangers both of idleness and of hunger. As more 
 and more traders come in, the danger will be that pressure is put on 
 the government to acquire suitable land for planting, and great care 
 will have to be taken that sufficient land is left in the neighborhood 
 of the centers of population for the use of the people. On an island 
 like Ugi in the Solomons very large tracts have been alienated, the 
 original owners are but few, and possession is the more easily acquired. 
 It is recalled that in the case of the sale of one large tract near the orig- 
 inal trading station at Selv^n Bay the land was said to have been sold 
 by a man who had only the very flimsiest right to it, since he was not 
 an Ugi man at all but an adopted person. 
 
 The cure for the existing evils and the means of staving off the 
 threatened extinction of the people do not lie in their employment on 
 plantations, as some hold. The moral elevation of the people and 
 their advance in civilization used to be held up as valid reasons for 
 their being recruited to work in Queensland, but from internal evidence 
 one would say that the main influence which the labor trade has had 
 on Melanesia is that it has sadly depopulated the islands. There has 
 been no social elevation through the trade; the want of cohesion among 
 the natives, apart from all other considerations, would have been 
 sufficient to prevent it. The thousands of men who, throughout the 
 years the trade was in existence, returned from civilization did nothing 
 to better the conditions of life among their neighbors; they dissem- 
 inated no knowledge, they started no spiritual movement for the 
 uplifting of their people, they stirred up no divine discontent with
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. I9I 
 
 the old-time conditions. They brought buck in a measure the outer 
 trappings of civiHzation, but were ignorant of its power. While their 
 axes lasted they made it easier for someone else to work; their pur- 
 chases gave them for the time being a certain amount of importance; 
 but once their stock was finished their influence was at an end. 
 
 One of the cures for the present state of things in Melanesia is un- 
 doubtedly work, but work on plantations for wages is not necessarily 
 an agency that makes either for the setting up of the influences that 
 have made nations great or insures the end which all desire who 
 have the w^elfare of these child races at heart, viz, the ultimate sur- 
 vival of these peoples. 
 
 The comparative scantiness of the population is the real difficulty 
 in the evangelization of Melanesia. There must be an assembling 
 of the scattered units of population in the islands, and since one of 
 the first results of the propagation of Christianity in Melanesia is 
 the gathering together of the people in a community where hitherto 
 they have been living as scattered units all over the face of the land, 
 it seems obvious that the initiative in the program of work will lie 
 with the missions. Once Christianity spreads, and, as a result of its 
 spreading, peace is established, and old feuds die down and murder 
 and bloodshed cease and villages are formed in these large islands 
 with their scattered peoples, then the place of the government is to 
 see that oflf"enses against life and moral law and order are punished 
 in order that the people may be given a chance to grow up and become 
 settled and organized. How else shall it come to pass that "that 
 which is no nation" shall become a nation? There can be no ofi^ense 
 felt by the missionaries at the government thus guarding what is won; 
 already cases of witchcraft among the Heathen are cognizable by the 
 government authorities, and they punish breaches of the moral law 
 among Christians when such are brought under their notice. The 
 missions can still exercise their own discipline and the secular author- 
 ities will not interfere with the spiritual side of the work. On the other 
 hand, since the missions are the bringers of peace, the government 
 can feel no oflPense in serving them and following them up and con- 
 solidating the results of their work. The missions have the first and 
 best opportunity in the matter; they are thoroughly in touch with 
 the natives and have, or ought to have, an abundance of first-class 
 material ready to their hands for compelling men to come in from the 
 highways and hedges and fill the House of God. Nevertheless the 
 government itself is doing much for the ultimate salvation of the 
 peoples; head hunting has been stopped completely, and wild places 
 like the north end of Malaita are being brought into order by the 
 establishment of government stations. So far as the Melanesian Mis- 
 sion is concerned it would seem obvious that the future demands a 
 large increase of native clergy if the ground is to be won.
 
 1^2 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 NATIVES OF MELANESIA. 
 
 Bishop G. A. Selwyn evidently had a very high opinion of the value 
 of the work likely to be done by natives in the propagation of the Gos- 
 pel in Melanesia, when he referred to them as the "black net," the 
 white priests at the same time forming the "corks" of the gospel net. 
 The Bishop's idea has been followed faithfully enough, so far as the 
 mere manning of the Mission with native teachers goes, and the work 
 of these native teachers occupies a very large place in the Melanesian 
 Mission to-day; nor can there be any doubt whatever of their ability, 
 under proper circumstances, to do what the founder of the Mission 
 planned that they should do. Still, it can not be questioned that up to 
 the present time the native Christians, teachers and people alike, fall 
 short in the performance of their part in the casting of the Gospel net. 
 The truth of the matter would seem to be that the native church has 
 not yet risen to a sense of its duty in the work of evangelization; Chris- 
 tianity has seemed to the converts to be more a thing brought from 
 outside and to be accepted along with the rest of the white man's 
 things than a matter vitally concerning themselves and depending on 
 their cooperation. 
 
 If the white teachers were removed from Melanesia to-day the prob- 
 ability is that, though the daily services and daily school would still 
 be held in most of the villages, yet there would be no advance and no 
 enlargement of the work, no widening of the borders, and in such places 
 as were manned by less able teachers it is doubtful whether the past 
 gains of the Mission would be consolidated. The church life of the 
 villages depends almost entirely on the teacher alone; the native church 
 has not been trained in methods of self-government and no legislative 
 machinery exists; there is no village council to advise or strengthen the 
 hands of the teacher, and should he fail the whole work would probably 
 come to an end. Nor is there anything in the way of self-support in 
 the native church. The Mission supplies the teacher's pay and the 
 people have no duties incumbent on them in connection with the 
 upkeep of religion. 
 
 It was thought originally that the withdrawal of the white mission- 
 ary for four or six months every year would tend to encourage habits 
 of self-reliance among the native teachers and would strengthen their 
 characters and would foster the idea that eventually the native church 
 must stand alone. But it certainly seemed as if the time when one 
 was away was more fruitful in cases of wrong-doing than when one was 
 actually present among the people. The Mission priest on returning 
 to his work in the islands is apt to be faced with a sad account of what 
 has happened "behind his back." He may notice the absence here 
 and there, from church and school, of certain persons, and inquiry may 
 elicit the information that they were "outside the inclosure," the
 
 MELANESIA AM) ITS PEOPLE. 193 
 
 victims of sin, mainly of impuiit\-, and though not formally excom- 
 municated yet self-judged, as their absence proved. Or he would 
 hear of family quarrels, or of the petulancy of the chief and his arbi- 
 trary tabu of certain things and of a consequent staying away from 
 church and school. Or a Christian girl or a catechumen may have 
 been given in marriage to a Heathen and so lost to the church, or 
 perchance a Christian man had taken a heathen woman to wife and 
 was living with her unmarried or even had taken a second wife and 
 was living with two women. Or it might be that some promising 
 Christian lad had gone off to live with heathen relatives. Or he 
 might hear of cases of exorcism, of approaches made to the spirits 
 of the dead, or of trials by hre or of adjuration of the spirits of the dead 
 on the part of the Christians. At times he would find a village pre- 
 paring to go and avenge the cruel murder of some Christian or school- 
 man wantonly murdered by the heathen. In addition to the moral 
 failures which occurred in his absence, he might Hnd that the school 
 and church required roofing, that the fences were down, and that the 
 village pigs had made a shelter inside the buildings and that his own 
 "prophet's chamber" was uninhabitable. 
 
 What would happen were the white missionaries removed is made 
 plain by the history of what has occurred in places that have had to 
 do without the services of a white man for any length of time. Left 
 to themselves and without the help of a native deacon or priest, the 
 people tend to become very slack in church attendance and in the per- 
 formance of their Christian duties, and the recent struggle that Bishop 
 Wilson had against the secret societies in the northern Banks Group 
 shows that Christianity there failed to alter fundamentally the original 
 native view of life. 
 
 The Banks Islands in particular have lacked for many years past the 
 services of a white priest and with a few notable exceptions it may be 
 said of this particular group that wherever the native teachers have 
 been left to themselves the work has languished. Since Mr. Adams 
 went to Vureas the Banks Islands have seen ver}^ little of the presence 
 of a white missionary. Of the work at the Torres Group, once so 
 promising, but little is heard now, and there can be no doubt that the 
 continued absence of a white man or of a native priest has had a dele- 
 terious eflect on the work there. 
 
 Where the people are strong in character and community life is more 
 developed, as in the northern Banks Group, a native teacher alone can 
 not make much headway, but a man in orders exercises a great deal 
 more powder and will be listened to. When the white man is present 
 matters that had been wrong right themselves very quickly and there 
 seem to be far fewer cases of wrong-doing. This is doubtless due 
 partly to respect for his presence. Ihe ordinary native teacher does 
 not inspire this respect, and unless he were a man of strong moral fiber
 
 194 
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 (as some of them are) and with his position well assured he could hardly 
 venture to rebuke an act which he knew to be wrong. The teacher 
 is in most cases a man of the place, and village and home associations 
 and family relationships would prevent him uttering his protest 
 against a meditated wrong. 
 
 There is very little that goes on in a native village that is not known 
 to most of the people, and things are very well discussed before any 
 action is taken, and generally the whole village knows the doings and 
 the intentions of every inhabitant. If the teacher did know before- 
 hand the chances are that he could not prevent the wrong. Individual 
 action is rare among Melanesians. A man would hardly dream of 
 interfering if he saw another doing a thing which was inconsistent 
 with his Christian calling and no one thinks of the necessity of setting 
 a standard. Correction or direction or friendly advice is scarcely ever 
 administered by one Pvlelanesian to another. Even parents whose 
 children are disobedient will bring them to a teacher or a missionary for 
 reproof or correction rather than administer the correction themselves. 
 The last thing that a Melanesian thinks of doing is the preventing 
 of harm or interfering in a matter in order to right it. 
 
 In the absence of the white missionary, if the knowledge of a medi- 
 tated wrong came to the teacher's ears the existence of a village council 
 or of a combined council of all the neighboring villages would avail in 
 all probability to prevent the wrong being done. The nearest thing 
 to such a council is the Vaukolu of Florida, a yearly gathering of all 
 the chiefs and head teachers to discuss social, ecclesiastical, and educa- 
 tional matters. But these gatherings have been held very irregularly 
 and their decisions have been of Httle force since there were no sub- 
 sidiary councils in the villages to assist the teachers in carrying them 
 
 out. 
 
 The isolation of the peoples in most of the Melanesian islands has 
 in all probability been largely responsible for the lack of concerted 
 action hitherto among the Christians. Social life as such was not 
 known in Melanesia before the advent of Christianity. In their pre- 
 Christian days these natives do not live in villages or hamlets, but in 
 isolated groups with two or three houses or huts in a group. With the 
 exception of certain places in Florida and also of the artificial islets off 
 the northeast coast of Malaita, where hundreds of people live on tiny 
 rookeries of stone just raised above the level of the tide, there was 
 nothing that was worthy of the name of a village in the whole of the 
 Mission's area in the Solomons. Consultative or joint action in a 
 matter was practically unknown. Each subdistrict had its own petty 
 chief with a following of half a dozen men in some cases. Every man 
 knew who his own chief was and would support him when called 
 upon. Each main district had also its head chief and to hirn tribute 
 was paid whensoever he demanded it. Even these head chiefs had
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. I95 
 
 no State or surroundings. Thus at Roasi, on Little Malaita, Horo- 
 hanue was the alaha paine, the main chief, but he had no immediate 
 retinue and lived alone with his two wives, the guardian of his ances- 
 tral spirits, *akalo, and with the skulls of his dead in the house along 
 with him. 
 
 Roasi was composed of two parts. Upper and Lower, Roasi i hahoy 
 Roasi i *ano. A teacher, Johnson Telegsem, was accepted by the peo- 
 ple of Lower Roasi, acting quite independently of Horohanue, as they 
 had every right to do. After two moves they made a final settlement 
 at Salenga just above the bay. Then two years later Horohanue 
 himself also asked for a teacher and gathered his own particular people 
 together and had a school-house built. 
 
 The two Christian villages of Roasi were only half a mile apart, with 
 a ravine in between, and yet separate teachers had to be found for them, 
 owing to their unwillingness to move to some one central spot where a 
 permanent church and school could be built. The Mission went so far 
 as to buy a site down on the beach large enough to accommodate both 
 sections of the people, who numbered something over 200, but after 
 Horohanue's death petty jealousies and squabbles completely pre- 
 vented any concerted action. 
 
 At Sa'a, an important place at the southeast end of Malaita, the 
 titular chief Sinehanue was the direct descendant, twelve generations 
 removed, of the chiefs who had shared in the original migration from 
 the hills of Little Malaita (Codrington, Mel. Anthrop., p. 49), He 
 lived apart from the majority of the people with just his own immediate 
 relatives and dependents around him. Four separate villages, hmi i 
 lume, collections of houses, formed what was known to the neighboring 
 peoples as Sa'a, though no one village bore the name as such, and in 
 each of these there was at least one person who was reckoned as alaha 
 chief. 
 
 The greatest possible difficulty was experienced in inducing the peo- 
 ples of these four villages to act in concert and assign one place as the 
 site for the church and school. We had journeys all over the neigh- 
 borhood looking for a neutral place and houses were begun tentatively 
 in several directions in order to accelerate union. 
 
 With very few exceptions the people inhabiting any particular dis- 
 trict are always a mere handful. At Sa'a the inhabitants of all the 
 four villages numbered a little over 200, and the population of an aver- 
 age Christian village in any of the large islands of the Solomons when 
 all of the available people had been gathered in would seldom be much 
 over 60. These villages, moreover, are several miles apart, and there 
 is nothing in the nature of roads joining them, so it is plain that there 
 must necessarily be a great deal of unavoidable isolation between the 
 villages, and concerted action and corporate life will not be acquired 
 easily.
 
 1^6 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 CL1.TIVATI0N OF RESPONSIBILITY AND INDEPENDENCE IN THE 
 
 NATIVE CHURCH. 
 
 The native church in Melanesia has never really been asked as yet 
 to undertake the support of its own clergy and teachers. Bishop 
 Wood's charge in 191 5 was the first official acknowledgment of the 
 need for the Melanesians to look to themselves rather than to the 
 Mission for funds to pay the teachers. In 191 4 the amount contributed 
 for the support of the Mission by the native church was £31. This 
 amount certainly seems out of all proportion, since at the same time 
 the island stations cost £1,300 and most of this was for teachers' pay. 
 Nor is it that an excessive wage is paid to the teachers. No native 
 priest receives more than £25 a year, and some of the junior teachers 
 are rated at only £1 a year. In old days these salaries w^ere always 
 paid in kind, with now and then a demand for a little cash, but nowa- 
 days a good deal of payment is done in cash, since traders and stores are 
 found in almost every place. 
 
 There has never been any attempt made to organize a system of local 
 contributions. If a village wanted to buy timber or iron for the build- 
 ing of its church, copra was made and was sold for the purpose, the 
 Mission ship occasionally carrying the copra to market, or curios were 
 made and were sold abroad. At various times during Bishop Wilson's 
 episcopate several villages gave contributions in curios and these were 
 taken and were sold for the benefit of the Mission. But this never 
 became a regular thing. There seems to be no reason why the support 
 of the native teachers in the w^ell-established Christian villages should 
 not be laid as a duty on the native church, with moreover the certainty 
 of success. Until the time of Bishop Wilson no such thing was thought 
 of, and one looks in vain for any hint of it in the lives of the first two 
 bishops. In their time the making of copra was far from being estab- 
 lished as an industry in Melanesia, and with the exception of food 
 and curios there was practically nothing that could serve as a means of 
 raising money. The native money (shell money or the teeth of por- 
 poises or dogs) was valueless, since there was no means of changing it, 
 as no traders would take it as a means of exchange. 
 
 THE QUESTION OF MAKING A RETURN FOR SPIRITUAL GIFTS. 
 
 In himself the Melanesian knows but little, if anything at all, of 
 gratitude, and he sees nothing incongruous in allowing the Mission to 
 pay his teachers. Bishop Wilson tried to inculcate the idea that it 
 was the duty of the natives to convey their Mission priests about in 
 boats, acting as crews for them and receiving no pay. The missionaries 
 are often at heavy expense in obtaining boats' crews (every man pays 
 his own travelling expenses), and in the Banks Group Mr. Cullwick con- 
 stantly had a crew of six men with him for three months at a stretch.
 
 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 197 
 
 The various villages, even if they provide any food at all for the crews 
 (and most of them will do a little to that end), soon tire of feeding 
 strangers, and so the missionary has to buy food for his crew and carry 
 it about with him in addition to paying them. 
 
 In Malaita and San Cristoval there never was any difficulty in ob- 
 taining crews, nor was there any bargaining about price (but this was 
 before the return of the Kanakas from Queensland and the consequent 
 introduction of a very different set of ideas), whereas in Florida the 
 missionary has had regularly to hire his crew and appoint a fixed rate 
 of wages before leaving. In places other than Florida half a crown a 
 week was reckoned very good pay. A man would gaily leave on a six 
 weeks' tour with no luggage beyond his pipe, shoulder-bag, and one 
 loin-cloth. On the morning of departure our yard would be thronged 
 with men and a spokesman from among them would approach and ask: 
 **Are many going with you?" "Why.^" "Oh, I did not know whether 
 you had enough." Our own experience was that men had to be turned 
 away at such times, and a double crew could always be got. But 
 though they were content with their pay, no one of them would have 
 been willing to go for nothing, while at the same time the home duties of 
 them all were practically nil. They and their people were being bene- 
 fited very materially by the presence of the missionary, but it was per- 
 haps too much to expect them to give their services free in carrying 
 him about; moreover, they viewed the work as a chance of earning a 
 little, and such chances w^ere rare. 
 
 The Melanesian attitude with regard to presents is peculiar. A 
 number of women would come with yams in baskets for sale; one special 
 basket would be reported as "not for sale," its contents (often inferior 
 yams) were a gift — but it would have been the height of foolishness to 
 accept such a gift without making a corresponding return. On being 
 discharged from hospital a man would ask for a present in that he had 
 been cured! Where there is no sense of debt there can be no showing 
 of gratitude, gratitude being a spiritual and not a natural gift, a sense 
 of the need to try to make a return for favors rendered. A Melanesian 
 knows nothing of social duties; his life is lived apart from that of his 
 fellows; he has no social sense, no dependence on his fellows, no common 
 bonds of union such as spring up in community life; he asks nothing 
 from his fellows nor they anything from him; he owes them nothing, 
 and in consequence his circumstances have never been such as would 
 be likely to encourage the growth of gratitude. He has never received 
 anything; he has nothing to return. 
 
 The average Melanesian is a person of few worldly possessions; his 
 house furniture consists of a few wooden bowls, a mortar for pounding 
 yams or taro, a supply of vegetables smaller or larger according to his 
 energy, an axe or a cane-knife; also a little stock of native money and 
 perhaps a canoe. Of clothes he has practically none and the mis-
 
 198 MELANESIA AND ITS PEOPLE. 
 
 sionaty's simple wardrobe seems to him to be lavish in the extreme; 
 he therefore has no compunction in asking for what he knows the white 
 man to possess. If a person has practically never owned anything at 
 all and if all his fellows are in the same condition too it is almost impos- 
 sible to get him to understand that he should feel gratitude towards 
 those who give him anything, since from his point of view they have so 
 much in that they have anything at all. 
 
 RELATIONS OF NATIVES WITH WHITES. 
 
 The question of treachery follows on that of gratitude. It is a matter 
 of common belief amongst Europeans that natives are treacherous. 
 This idea of treachery is generally founded on ignorance of the point of 
 view of the natives. It is generally supposed that one can not trust 
 oneself to them; that their attitude is uncertain and that they are 
 liable to turn and rend one without any provocation. While granting 
 that the native is a person of moods, it is just as possible to foretell 
 what action he is likely to take in a given case as it is with Europeans. 
 In his actions he follows a line of reasoning quite as much as the white 
 man does. Many attacks on and murders of white men have been 
 ascribed to treachery on the part of the natives, but it is only fair to 
 call to remembrance the awful indignities and atrocities perpetrated on 
 them by the whites and to put these in the scale over against the accu- 
 sations of treachery. The native certainly at times acts wickedly either 
 on the impulse of the moment or for a wicked end, but in most cases of 
 wrong done to whites in Melanesia there has been some antecedent 
 cause, some evil associated with a white person somewhere. The occa- 
 sion may have been remote and the connection faulty from our point 
 of view, but in the mind of the native the provocation was there. With 
 our notions of direct justice and of the necessity for the punishment of 
 the actual wrong-doer himself we can not understand the point of view 
 of the native, which is that justice is satisfied so long as some one of the 
 same people who did the real or fancied wrong is made to suffer.
 
 IVEN";^ 
 
 PLATE 1 
 
 N 
 
 D 
 
 c 
 
 4-1 
 CO 
 
 «3 
 
 o 
 
 c 
 <u 
 
 _c 
 
 J-> 
 3 
 o 
 
 CO 
 
 <u
 
 SOME HISTORICAL NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN 
 
 MISSION. 
 
 The founding of the Melanesian Mission was due to the vigorous 
 bodily energy and the apostolic fervor of Bishop George Augustus 
 Selwyn. The fact that the founder was a Bishop, and as such pos- 
 sessed the power and authority to insure the success of his plans and 
 ideas, and had in addition a certain assured sum of money at his 
 back, caused the Mission to be stamped from the outset with a definite 
 style and imprinted upon it a traditional method of work. In consid- 
 ering this style and tradition, we must remember that the founder 
 of the Mission was Bishop of New Zealand and was thus debarred 
 from settling in Melanesia and leading the attack on its Heathenism 
 from within. Since his home and his main interests and his more 
 regular sphere of work lay outside Melanesia, and since also the carry- 
 ing out of the work at all seemed to depend on himself, it is obvious that 
 the only way for him to begin the evangelization of Melanesia was 
 by taking boys from it to some place where he could have them trained 
 with a view to their becoming the future missionaries of Melanesia. 
 
 Quite apart, however, from the fact of the foundation of the Mission 
 by a bishop and from its receiving thereby a definite and a fixed char- 
 acter at the outset, and apart also from the difficulty of changing a 
 practice once firmly established, those who know the influence which 
 Bishop Selwyn exercised in the matter of fixing the constitution of the 
 Church of New Zealand would naturally expect to find something of 
 the same rigidity and fixedness in the traditional methods and style of 
 work in the Melanesian Mission. It must also be borne in mind, when 
 reviewing the style and methods of work adopted in the Mission, that 
 its policy herein has not been the result of the deliberations of the 
 missionaries themselves and has not stood in the definite following of 
 the teachings of the experience of the many, with alterations from time 
 to time to suit the varying needs, but has been in eflPect the regular and 
 one may say almost the mechanical following of the lines laid down by 
 the founder. For all that, the Melanesian diocese was an ofl^shoot of 
 the Church of New Zealand and as such might have been expected to 
 show the same spirit of cooperation in religious matters between clergy 
 and chosen lay representatives consulting together, yet the Mission 
 never had a synod (though every diocese in New Zealand has one), and 
 the conference of whites and natives held in 191 1 was the first instance 
 of any attempt made during the whole history of the Mission to gather 
 the workers together and to take deliberative measures for the better 
 carrying on of the work. 
 
 Until the time, about 12 years ago, when the missionaries first 
 tended to become permanent residents in the spheres of work in the 
 
 199
 
 200 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 
 
 islands, practically the only changes made in the original plan of work 
 in the Mission were: (i) the substitution of Mota for English as the 
 language of the central school; (2) the removal of headquarters to 
 Norfolk Island from Auckland. The hand of the founder seemed ever 
 to lie on the Mission which his strong and vigorous nature and powerful 
 personality had called into being and directed along its path of life. 
 
 In the Melanesian Mission the bishop theoretically is the Mission; 
 the clergy simply are the bishop's chaplains, and till fairly late in the 
 episcopate of Bishop Wilson no license was issued to them, and so long 
 as it was the tradition that the}' should return every summer to Nor- 
 folk Island it is evident that they could not be instituted to any cure 
 of souls. It is quite plain, moreover, that with only a small staff and 
 with frequent absences or departures or losses entailing a considerable 
 moving round of the men, nothing approaching the conditions neces- 
 sary for the holding of a synod of the Australasian type is likely to 
 occur, and it does not seem that the Mission is likely to grow quickly 
 into a church which shall be self-governing unless (in order to com- 
 pensate for the fewness of the white priests) a large number of native 
 priests are ordained. 
 
 SUPPORT. 
 
 The bishop's chief intention in regard to the support of the Mission 
 seems to have been that it should be a first charge on the Church of 
 New Zealand, and he evidently regarded the Mission in Melanesia 
 as part and parcel of the work of the Church of New Zealand. He 
 also looked forward to the native Maori church as a source whence 
 missionaries to Melanesia would be obtained. With the division of 
 the original diocese of New^ Zealand into six and the consequent 
 necessity, owing to influx of population, of providing for its own in- 
 ternal needs, the Church of New Zealand rather failed for many years 
 to fulfill its obligations to Melanesia. A resolution of General Synod 
 was passed to the effect that the various dioceses be asked to appoint 
 a missionary Sunday and to give their alms on that day to Melanesia. 
 Four out of the six dioceses have now fallen into line with this reso- 
 lution by appointing such a Sunday. 
 
 The Christian Maoris have not realized as yet the hope that Bishop 
 Selwyn entertained of them, viz, that they should become missionaries 
 to Melanesia and that the Maori church should support its own foreign 
 missionaries; but now, with the coming of the Marsden Centenary, a 
 definite movement has been set on foot to send Maori missionaries to 
 the Polynesian-speaking peoples in Melanesia. 
 
 In Australia the Melanesian Mission was accepted through the Board 
 of Missions as one of the activities of the church, yet in 1894 Australia's 
 contribution to Melanesia was only £1,600, whereas in the same year 
 New Zealand gave £2,750 and England £3,800. The revival of the
 
 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 20I 
 
 Australian Board of Missions' interest in Australia six years ago caused 
 a great improvement in the local contributions to the Melanesian Mis- 
 sion, and in 191 3 these amounted to £2,928 as against £5,122 from 
 New Zealand. 
 
 In England, up till the time of the episcopate of Hishop Wilson, all 
 interest in Melanesia was confined to the Eton Association and to the 
 actual friends of the Mission — /. <?., those in close touch with particular 
 missionaries. The Rev. Prebendary Selwyn had discharged all duties 
 connected with the raising of the English income of the Mission, but 
 in 1899 a paid secretary was appointed and an office was taken in 
 the Church House, Westminster. The Rev. L. P. Robin was the first 
 secretary and he was succeeded in 1905 by the Rev. A. E. Corner, 
 who still occupies the position and who acts in an honorary capacity. 
 For the last twelve years the Mission has had a regular lecturer touring 
 in England and in 1913 the English income was £8,800. 
 
 THE LOG. 
 
 Up till 1895 the Mission had no way of making its needs known and 
 ot spreading the knowledge of its work, except by its annual reports or 
 by quarterly papers published by Bishop J. R. Selwyn in England. 
 The first number of the "Southern Cross Log" appeared in 1895, and 
 now for twenty years the "Log" has been published monthly, and an 
 edition is also published in England. Undoubtedly the "Log" has 
 helped greatly in the augmentation of interest in the Mission, and the 
 fact that the Mission has at last emerged into full view and has taken 
 its place as one of the missions of the whole church is owing largely to 
 services rendered by the "Log." We may now say that whereas the 
 Melanesian Mission started its life as the creation of the apostolic zeal 
 of one man and was practically a private mission for many years, it 
 has become at length the possession of the whole English Church. 
 
 Before the episcopate of Bishop Wilson the leaders of the Mission 
 contributed largely to its funds. In the building of the ships a large 
 amount of private money was thus expended and the present Southern 
 Cross is the only one built by public subscriptions. Bishop Wilson 
 saw the necessity of bringing the needs of the Mission to the minds of 
 the people of the Church at large and he greatly extended the already 
 existing policy of apportioning native scholars to various schools and 
 parishes; he also inaugurated the "Island" scheme, whereby a person 
 or parish guarantees the upkeep of a mission school in a certain place; 
 by this means he practically insured regular yearly contributions. 
 
 The head office of the Mission is in Auckland. This is owing to old- 
 time associations and also to the presence there of Archdeacon Dudley, 
 who was for so many years the treasurer of the Mission. Latterly the 
 organizing secretary for New Zealand has also had his headquarters in 
 Auckland. Bishop Wilson appointed a committee of business men in
 
 202 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 
 
 Auckland to advise on monetary matters and to look after the Mis- 
 sion's interest in the matter of repairs to the ship and the ordering of 
 stores for the islands. Doubtless much money was saved by this step. 
 
 NORFOLK ISLAND. 
 
 It is in the matter of Norfolk Island that the lingai of the Mission— 
 i. e., its adherence to tradition — has been most marked. Bishop G. A. 
 Selwyn was forced at the outset of the work to choose a base of oper- 
 ations outside Melanesia itself. His policy was to keep the work of 
 the Mission under his own eye rather than to call for workers to go 
 and settle in the islands and develop the mission work from within. 
 It was assumed that for the development of the Mission the base of 
 operations must necessarily be elsewhere than in the field to be devel- 
 oped, and while the question of climate has always been supposed 
 popularly to have been the main determining factor in the course which 
 was pursued, yet in all probability the matter was settled by other 
 considerations than those of climate. The climate of Melanesia is 
 bad enough, but when Bishop Selwyn began his work in the islands 
 white missionaries of the London Missionary Society and also Presby- 
 terian missionaries were settled already in the New Hebrides, the 
 French were in New Caledonia, and the Methodists were in New 
 Britain. The climate of the New Hebrides is but little better, if at 
 all, than that of the Banks Islands, where most of the early work of 
 the Mission was done, and New Britain has almost the same climate 
 as the Solomons, so it is evident that missionaries of the Melanesian 
 Mission, or the Northern Mission as it was called at the outset, could 
 have settled in their own sphere of work had the policy allowed. 
 
 The report of 1857, written probably by Mr. Patteson, puts the 
 matter very clearly from the standpoint of that time. Speaking of 
 the Melanesians in the school at St. John's, Auckland, he writes: 
 
 "They are delicate subjects and require careful handling, morally and 
 physically. The strength of passion and weakness of constitution which 
 belongs to their tropical nature require careful training. But if they can be 
 acclimatized mentally as well as physically, and taught to unite the energy 
 and perseverance of the inhabitants of a temperate region with their own 
 fervor and impetuosity of character, there can be little reason to doubt but 
 that they will prove most efficient teachers and missionaries to their own 
 people, when once the grace of God's spirit shall have shined in their hearts. 
 The pupil will probably, by the mere force of association, have received 
 impressions and experienced a change of character which will prove very 
 beneficial to him and which may induce him, on mixing once more with his 
 own friends, to contrast their customs with ours. He will feel the sense of a 
 want now created in him of something better than his own land supplies; 
 he will desire to return again to New Zealand, and by degrees be borne along 
 from one point to another till, under God's blessing, he emerges from his old 
 dark Heathen state of mind into a state of conscious apprehension and accept-
 
 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 203 
 
 ance of that religion which has presented itself to him as modifying every 
 part of his life and character, social, moral and spiritual. 
 
 "It is useless to suppose that the 78 islands already visited by the Bishop of 
 'New Zealand can be permanently supplied with English missionaries. It is 
 indeed beyond the bounds of all probability to suppose that even the twenty- 
 one islands which have already yielded scholars to the Mission can be pro- 
 vided with resident English teachers. While India, China, and Africa are 
 now at length opened to us, and need every help which Christian zeal and 
 love in England may supply, we can not expect any large number of mission- 
 aries from home for the work in Melanesia. The only method now open, as 
 we have said, is to avail ourselves of the strange curiosity which induces 
 native men and lads to trust themselves with us, and to hope and believe 
 that out of these some will be led to return again and again to New Zealand 
 to receive direct Christian teaching. 
 
 "In every case the attempt would be made to raise up a staff of teachers 
 for each island from among the inhabitants of each island, and the English 
 missionary, or any native teacher qualified for the work who might be asso- 
 ciated with him, would not be regarded as permanently attached to the 
 particular island with which they were at any given time brought into relation, 
 but only until such time as the teachers trained up by them in the island 
 during a part of the year, and in New Zealand during the remainder of it, 
 could be taught to carry on the work under the superintendence of the 
 Bishop making his rounds in the mission vessel. If each group of islands 
 should be hereafter placed in charge of an English missionary, whose duty 
 it would be in his small boat to be watching over the native clergy in each 
 part of his district, and the Melanesian Bishop should be for six months 
 visiting the islands, bringing back and taking aw^ay teachers and scholars, 
 and for the remaining six superintending the missionary college in New Zea- 
 land; some five or six active working men would constitute the whole of the 
 necessary English staff." 
 
 It was really Bishop Selwyn's strong personality and his vigor of 
 mind and body that caused this new and hitherto untried method of 
 evangelization to be adopted. The Bishop's method was a new one 
 m the history of modern missions, though in a measure it might be 
 regarded as an adaptation of the method adopted by St. Boniface 
 in founding monasteries and in using them to educate missionaries 
 gathered from the neighborhood. The ordinary way of starting and of 
 carrying on the work to be done in Melanesia, viz., by residential 
 missionaries, was difficult enough at that time owing to (i) the short- 
 age of men, (2) the lack of regular communication other than by the 
 Mission ship, (3) the difficulty of climate, (4) the multiplicity of lan- 
 guages. But it must not be forgotten that the other missions in Mela- 
 nesia, by their policy of settling residential missionaries from the ver}^ 
 inception of their work, have proved that (i) men will offer for the 
 work and (2) climatic conditions can be overcome. Of the other two 
 difficulties, that of communication has already been solved and the 
 language difficulty has not been found to be insuperable. 
 
 The native teachers of the Melanesian Mission trained in a fairly 
 cool climate at Norfolk Island and surrounded by the things of civil-
 
 204 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 
 
 ization, have certainly not proved any more useful as propagandists 
 than the native teachers of other Missionary bodies in the Pacific 
 who were trained in or near their own homes. 
 
 It was during the episcopate of Bishop Wilson that those changes 
 began which not only considerably altered the original plan of the 
 Mission, but which also bid fair to change its character altogether. 
 The Rev. H. Welchman was actually the first to make a change in the 
 original plan of the Mission by settling with his wife at Siota, Florida. 
 Dr. Comins bought Siota with the idea of establishing a preparatory 
 school there for teachers, and he and Mr. Welchman had undertaken 
 to conduct it in turn, Mr. Welchman taking the summer months and 
 Dr. Comins returning from Norfolk Island during the southeastern 
 trade season, w^hen Mr. Welchman went back to his own work in 
 Bugotu, Previous to this, however, Mr. Forrest had been living 
 continuously at Santa Cruz all the year through, but the rest of the staff 
 regularly spent the summer months at Norfolk Island. Bishop J. 
 SelwA-n, moreover, had long been desirous of doing something to aid the 
 Christian life of the converts, because he recognized the necessity of 
 building them up in their Christianity. He also wished to give them 
 something to do in order to replace the misdirected efforts of the old 
 Heathenism with some form of regular employment. His idea was to 
 furnish a small vessel for trading purposes and to start a trading com- 
 pany, thus providing an outlet for the energies of his people, now that 
 the old avenues of their Heathen life w^ere closed. 
 
 FURTHER CHANGES. 
 
 During Bishop Wilson's episcopate there were many new^ develop- 
 ments of work. Preparatory schools were built at Bongana in Florida, 
 at Pamua on San Cristoval, and at Vureas in the Banks Group. The 
 missionaries began to reside permanently among their people and mis- 
 sion houses were built in all the groups. Men took their wives to the 
 islands and women workers were placed in pairs in various places. 
 Still, so long as Norfolk Island remained the Bishop's headquarters it 
 could not reasonably be said that these doings amounted to a radical 
 change of front; they were only what might be expected, owing to 
 the changes in the circumstances of the islands caused by the advent of 
 trade and by the presence of other missionary bodies in the Mission's 
 area. These two factors, viz., trade and opposition, have worked such 
 a change in the Mission's plan that it may be said that practically 
 all the missionaries are residential in the islands, i. e., they no longer 
 return to Norfolk Island during the summer. 
 
 The growing importance of the work in the islands so impressed the 
 authorities that when Bishop Wilson resigned it was felt that his suc- 
 cessor must be prepared to have his headquarters in the islands. Nor-
 
 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 205 
 
 folk Island, however, was to continue, hut was to take in only senior 
 boys and no p;irls whatever; its numbers would thus be reduced consid- 
 erably and special attention could then be given to individuals and 
 special facilities afforded for the training of ordinands. Under these 
 conditions it is obvious that the Bishop would have to intrust the head 
 of the Norfolk Island school with considerable powers. But a prece- 
 dent might have been found for this in the fact that Bishop Patteson 
 had previously entertained the idea of locating himself in Fiji in order 
 to conduct work among the Melanesian laborers there and of intrusting 
 to others the care of St. Barnabas; Bishop J. R. Selwyn, also, proposed 
 leaving Dr. Codrington in charge at St. Barnabas, so that he himself 
 might be free to build up the lives of the Christians in the islands. 
 
 The intention at the beginning of the episcopate of Bishop W ood was 
 to modify the original plan of work by providing that the missionaries 
 and the Bishop look upon the islands as their main field of operations 
 and should definitely make their home in the islands, but that the chief 
 training-school should be away from the islands, i. e., that the original 
 plan should still stand in part. But in the light both of the failure of 
 the situation of the school (in a temperate climate) to affect materially 
 the mental or spiritual vigor of the scholars as was hoped, and also 
 having in consideration the undoubted fact that a school to serve the 
 same purposes could easily be established in these days in the Solo- 
 mons or in the New Hebrides, one can but think that the Norfolk 
 Island school might well be closed altogether. The Presbyterians have 
 their college on Tangoa in the New Hebrides and the Anglicans m 
 Papua have theirs at Dogura, and both of these colleges can turn out 
 teachers every bit as capable of doing their work as the Melanesian 
 teachers from Norfolk Island are for doing theirs. 
 
 Possibly it was thought that to close St. Barnabas altogether would 
 entail the running counter to a vast amount of sentiment, and even if 
 the closing of it could be shown to be likely to effect a saving financially 
 considerations of sentiment seemed likely to rule out the project as 
 impossible or as unwise. One remembers that there was some talk a 
 few years ago of making Sydney the headquarters for the ship, but inas- 
 much as the doing of this would have involved the changing ot the 
 business headquarters also (and these have been in Auckland from the 
 start), it was deemed inadvisable to make any change. Sydney, how- 
 ever, is the metropolis for the Pacific and caters specially tor the island 
 trade, and there is no doubt that the trade requirements of the Mission 
 would have been more easily satisfied and a saving in price would also 
 have been effected by dealing in Sydney; but old associations carried 
 the day. The history of the monetary contributions to the mission in 
 New Zealand shows, however, that propinquity to and constant asso- 
 ciation with the Mission and its work are not the all-important factors 
 in determining the amount of money likely to be subscribed in a place. 
 The Auckland diocese used to be far ahead of all the other dioceses
 
 206 NOTES CONCERNING THE MELANESIAN MISSION. 
 
 in New Zealand in its support of the Melanesian Mission, but of late 
 years Christchurch has been a considerable rival to it. Possibly even 
 a change of the headquarters of the ship to Sydney would not have 
 affected New Zealand contributions over much. 
 
 It can hardly be said that the Mission has any explicit or definite 
 policy with regard to the requirements of the life of its missionaries in 
 the islands, i. e., in the matter of food, diet, care of the body, medicine, 
 clothing, housing, learning of the local language, treatment of natives, 
 method of propagation of Christianity. In the old days the newcomer 
 did certainly get impregnated with the atmosphere of the Mission by 
 living at Norfolk Island; he learned the lingai (a Mota word meaning 
 *'use") of the Mission, but nowadays newcomers go straight to their 
 work in the islands and have to learn the lingai of the Mission as best 
 they can. It would seem that there never has been any definite policy 
 with regard to these matters; a man on being put down in the old days 
 in charge of a particular place was left there quite alone and presumably 
 was expected to know how to live his life without warning or direction. 
 When Bishop Wilson at the outset of his work directed attention to 
 the need of a set of directions and instructions for managing a whale- 
 boat the opinion which found favor among the staff was that it was best 
 to let a man learn by experience. And the question of linguistics was 
 treated much in the same way — every man was supposed to pick up the 
 language spoken in his particular district. The learning of Mota was a 
 fairly simple problem, owing to the many books that were translated 
 into it (the Mota dictionary was not published till 1896), but it was 
 quite a different matter when faced with an unknown tongue which one 
 was supposed to learn, while at the same time no help or directions 
 w^ere provided towards enabling one to set about the study of it. 
 
 The common use of Mota tended, moreover, to cause a depreciation 
 in the estimate of the value of the other languages of the Mission. 
 Mota was the language and the enlightenment or the importance of a 
 place was measured at times by the ability or otherwise of its people to 
 speak Mota. The unquestioned usefulness and the predominance of 
 Mota tended to put all the other languages into the background and 
 had a prejudicial effect on the study of them. Britishers as a rule are 
 inclined possibly to treat sets of instructions as unnecessary and grand- 
 motherly, and the non-provision of the missionaries of the Melanesian 
 Mission with the best wisdom of the day with regard to the needs of 
 their life was due in the first place to this dislike of being ordered about 
 and of having to live according to rule and of assimilating their ideas 
 to a set of formal conditions, and in the second place was the direct con- 
 sequence of the old view that the life of the missionaries in the islands 
 was an incidental break in the regular round of duties at Norfolk Island.
 
 IVENS 
 
 PLATE 2 
 
 I'hoto by Bcallic, llohart. 
 
 A. Recruiting Boat at a Market in Malaita. The Women in the Canoes are waiting 
 
 to exchange their Fish for Garden Produce. 
 
 B. Women Traders, etc., Malaita.
 
 i
 
 '♦YACHTING" IN MELANESIA. 
 
 It did not need the mistake of a clerk in drawing out the letters 
 patent of Bishop G. A. Selwyn's commission to act as bishop from lat. 
 50° S. to 34° N. (2. e.^ from the Auckland Islands to the Carolines) to 
 direct the Bishop's attention to the islands of Melanesia. In 1847, 
 when Selwyn first went to Melanesia, Fiji had already been partially 
 Christianized, Tonga and Samoa were practically Christian, the French 
 were beginning to occupy New Caledonia, and the London Missionary 
 Society had Rarotongan teachers in the southern New Hebrides and 
 the Loyalties; John Williams had been murdered in Erromango, and 
 a French Roman Catholic bishop had been killed at Ysabel, Solomon 
 Islands. Selwyn wrote in 1849: 
 
 "While I have been sleeping in my bed in New Zealand, these islands, 
 the Isle of Pines, New Caledonia, New Hebrides, New Ireland, New Britain, 
 New Guinea, the Loyalty Islands, the Kingsmilis, etc., have been riddled 
 through and through by the whale-fishers and traders of the South Sea. 
 That odious black slug the beche-de-mer has been dragged out of its hole 
 in every coral reef to make black broth for Chinese mandarins, while I, 
 like a worse black slug as I am, have left the world all its field of mischief 
 to itself. The same daring men have robbed every one of these islands of 
 its sandalwood to furnish incense for the idolatrous worship of the Chinese 
 temples, before I have taught a single islander to offer up his sacrifice of 
 prayer to the true and only God. Even a mere Sydney speculator could 
 induce nearly a hundred men to sail in his ships to Sydney to keep his flocks 
 and herds, before I, to whom the Chief Shepherd has given commandment 
 to seek out His sheep that are scattered over a thousand isles, have sought 
 out or found out so much as one of those which have strayed or are lost." 
 
 Selwyn first reached New Zealand in 1842 and five years later his 
 great mind and his godly strength and endurance prompted him to 
 join H. M. S. Dido as acting chaplain on a voyage to Tonga and Samoa 
 and to the southern New Hebrides and the Isle of Pines. It was at 
 this last place that he saw a sandalwood trader, Captain Paddon, 
 living in perfect security among a people credited with every evil 
 passion and with a name for extreme treachery and cunning. Cap- 
 tain Paddon ascribed his safety to just and straight dealing, and the 
 Bishop at once saw the value of this lesson and called Paddon his 
 tutor. Just dealing seldom fails to commend itself to natives, but 
 the Melanesian Mission had sad cause later on to know that disin- 
 terested conduct and the best of motives will not avail against out- 
 raged feelings or superstitious beliefs or even against the involuntary 
 breaking of a tabu or a going contrary to some established practice 
 of native etiquette. 
 
 On August I, 1849, Selwyn sailed from Auckland in his own college 
 schooner, the Undine^ for New Caledonia and the New Hebrides, and 
 
 207
 
 20S 
 
 "yachting" in MELANESIA. 
 
 thus began what his detractors in New Zealand called his "yachting 
 cruises." The Undine was a fore-and-aft schooner of 21 tons, and a 
 square sail could be hoisted on the foremast when t-he wind was aft. 
 The Bishop had already made several trips round New Zealand in this 
 little vessel with Champion as master. In his later years Champion 
 lived on Norfolk Island, and during my occupation of the chaplaincy 
 of the island I had many opportunities of converse with the old man. 
 He was naturally full of stories about the Bishop and his prowess. One 
 story was told to his own detriment. On one occasion, when about to 
 leave Auckland for Wellington, the Bishop on coming aboard found his 
 captain drunk. He promptly put him below, shut the hatch, got sails 
 
 The Undine. 
 
 set, and then took the wheel all night and navigated the ship past the 
 many islets into open water. In the morning the Bishop opened the 
 hatch and called out, "Champion, are you sober?" "Yes, my lord!'' 
 replied Champion. "Then come up and take the wheel while I sleep." 
 On Selwyn's first voyage to Melanesia he had, of course, no modern 
 charts to go by; all that he had were some old Russian and Spanish 
 charts, the latter being 300 years old. Champion, at m.y request, made 
 a model of the Undine and presented it to the Mission; it is now m the 
 museum at Norfolk Island. The discomforts of life on a 20-ton schooner 
 in the tropics must have been very great, and in addition the Bishop s 
 cabin was often occupied with sick and ailing natives. I he fare on 
 board was doubtless composed mainly of "bulk " beef nnd hard bis-
 
 "yachting" in MELANESIA. ICX) 
 
 cuits, but one is inclined to think that the following story, if true, shows 
 hardness run to the death. The Bishop had called in at Norfolk 
 Island and on Sunday a roast turkey appeared on the table. The cook 
 was called and was asked by the Bishop where he got the turkey. 
 "Norfolk Island, my lord," he replied. Then said the Bishop, "Have 
 you got no salt beef on board? Heave that thing over the side." 
 
 Perhaps the most marvelous feat of endurance on the part of 
 Bishop Selwyn was the compilation, while at sea in the Undine on the 
 Melanesian trips, of his "Verbal Analysis of the Bible," which was 
 intended to facilitate the translation of the Scriptures into foreign 
 languages. Of this work it may be said that the scope of it is as 
 yet too great for our present standards of scholarship. We are too 
 parochial and confined in our thoughts, our efforts are too small and 
 insignificant, our horizon is always so limited, and our efforts are too 
 puny to allow us to work on such broad and comprehensive lines as 
 the Bishop suggests. The greatness of his ideas fairly makes us stagger, 
 so accustomed are we to puddling along in our own little corners. 
 
 The book had a twofold object; it was intended to act as a manu- 
 script note-book to assist in the translations of the Scriptures, and also 
 to provide a complete course of annual instruction on the whole subject- 
 matter of the Bible. All the words of the Bible can be classified under 
 less than 250 heads, and these are arranged alphabetically in the 
 analysis, and provision is made for 60 subheadings in each case. Ref- 
 erences are given showing where each word occurs, either in the Old 
 or in the New Testament. The book is so arranged as to supply a 
 course of annual lessons on the Bible for every Sunday in the year and 
 two or more of a less strictly religious character for every week. These 
 are to be used for spelling and reading lessons, then with the references 
 as lessons on the words of the Bible, then as the heads of catechetical 
 instruction. The missionary is to write down in one of the columns 
 the native equivalents for the various English words, thus enabling him 
 to gain an accurate knowledge of the language of the people among 
 whom he isworking, so that the translations may be idiomatic and accu- 
 rate, and so that as full and complete a list of words may be compiled 
 as the language affords. With the assistance of others the Bishop 
 hoped to expand the book into a complete polyglot dictionary of all 
 languages and a universal cipher for international communication. 
 And all the manuscript was prepared in the cabin of a 20-ton schooner 
 in the tropics! A veritable triumph of mind and spirit over matter! 
 
 Bishop Selwyn's powers of body were equally on as large a scale as 
 those of his mind. His feat of diving and examining the copper sheath- 
 ing on the bottom of the Undine^ after she had been aground on a reef 
 at Noumea, well merited the generous applause of the British and 
 French men-of-war's men anchored near by.
 
 2IO ''yachting" in MELANESIA. 
 
 The mission carpenter at Norfolk Island told rne a story illustrating 
 the general opinion held in Auckland as to the Bishop's ability to box. 
 During the time of the Maori war a man-of-war's man and a marine 
 were fighting in Queen Street when the Bishop happened to be passing 
 by. An onlooker said to Kendall, the carpenter, "Do you see those 
 two fellows fighting? Well, there goes someone who could take it out 
 of the two of them with one hand ! " Kendall pretended ignorance and 
 asked who was meant, "Why, the Bishop of course," said the other. 
 Champion, of the Undine, used to recount how at Tanna, where the 
 Bishop went first in 1849, a native came off and proceeded to air his 
 knowledge of English, which was mostly of a blasphemous and filthy 
 nature. The Bishop ordered the man to leave the ship and on his 
 refusal bundled him over the side into the water. The man swam 
 ashore and joined a group on the beach, and then the Bishop told 
 Champion to lower the dinghy. " But, my lord," protested Champion, 
 "surely you are not going to venture on shore." "Lower the dinghy" 
 was the order. The Bishop then got into it and sculled himself to 
 
 shore. 
 
 Selwyn's lack of conventionality and his indifference to what is 
 generally regarded as the convenances of his position and his desire to 
 get on with what he had in hand are well exemplified by the story of his 
 carrying ashore from the ship the boxes of his chaplain, who had just 
 arrived from England, and in later years we read of Selwyn himself 
 superintending the recoppering of tlie mission ship at Kawau. 
 
 One result of Bishop Selwyn's first voyage to Melanesia in the 
 Undine was that he obtained five native boys whom he took up to 
 Auckland and thus practically started the Melanesian Mission. In the 
 following year a voyage was made to the same islands again and Tanna 
 also was visited. Some Anaiteum people were returned from Tanna 
 and owing to heavy weather the crossing took two days, and the 
 Undine had 35 people on board all that time. 
 
 In 1 85 1 the Undine was replaced by the Border Maid, a schooner 
 of 100 tons and costing £1,200, the money being subscribed in Sydney 
 and Newcastle. The support of the ship was guaranteed in Sydney 
 and by the Eton Association for helping the Melanesian Mission, and 
 ever since then Eton has nobly done its duty by the Mission year after 
 year. The founding of the Australian Board of Missions was another 
 of the results of Selwyn's visit to Sydney that year. The Bishop 
 lamented the passing of the little Undine, which had carried him so 
 well over 24,000 miles of sea. 
 
 In company with Bishop Tyrrell of Newcastle, a voyage was made 
 in the Border Maid to the southern New Hebrides, to New Caledonia, 
 to Santa Cruz, and to the Solomons. At Malekula in the New Hebrides 
 the whole ship's company were in serious peril of their lives. Bishop
 
 "yachting" in MELANESIA. 211 
 
 Selwyn being on shore filling water-casks and Bishop Tyrrell minding 
 the ship. Stones were thrown and arrows were shot, but the calmness 
 of the whole party undoubtedly saved them from being massacred. 
 
 The Border Maid was found to be defective in gear and sails and 
 was sold the next year. The natives who had been brought up to 
 Auckland in her were taken to Sydney and were returned to their 
 homes in a chartered brig named Gratitude. A voyage was made in 
 the brig Victoria in 1853 as far as Norfolk Island and the Loyalties, 
 the Bishop being accompanied by the governor of New Zealand, Sir 
 George Gray. Thus Bishop Selwyn completed seven voyages to Mel- 
 anesia. Anyone who has visited the islands of Melanesia and has 
 had experience with the tropical heat and the wet and muggy atmos- 
 phere, would hardly say that he had been on a "yachting cruise"; 
 and when one considers the smallness of the Undine and the confined 
 space in which the Bishop and his passengers lived, and their sen- 
 sations in being hove-to in the tropics for 48 hours during a hurricane, 
 their food salt beef or pork and biscuits, one marvels at the courage 
 and determination and endurance of this great hero. There were not 
 wanting those who viewed with great disfavor the Bishop's missionary 
 voyages; he was frequently told that he had plenty to do at home 
 without taking up this new work; but who can dictate to a St. Paul? 
 The fruit of the Bishop's devoted labor is seen to-day in the great 
 missionary diocese of Melanesia. 
 
 When Selwyn visited a strange place his habit was to jump out from 
 his whaleboat when 10 to 20 yards from the shore, and then to wade or 
 swim to the beach; on his shoulders he strapped numerous presents, 
 consisting of tomahawks, fish-hooks, handkerchiefs, prints, red tape. 
 To the people who stood awaiting him on the beach he gave presents; 
 he wrote down any names of people that he could obtain (how did he 
 keep his notebook dry?), and made lists of words for future use. He 
 bought their yams or coconuts and established friendly relations 
 with them. In some places he produced one of the native boys who 
 accompanied him and used him as a tame decoy, hoping to get a lad to 
 accompany him. The Sydney Bulletin pictures to-day of missionaries 
 in top hats and frock coats are at least 50 years behind the times. It 
 was a common report in the Mission and it is an indisputable fact that 
 both Selwyn and Patteson often went ashore in such regimentals, 
 though we of to-day wonder how they managed to endure them. In 
 my missionary play "Darkness and Dawn" I had represented Bishop 
 Patteson as thus attired, but rather than seem to give countenance to 
 the Bulletin idea I changed the dress. Bishop Wilson, on looking up 
 his diary, wrote me that George Sarawia, Bishop Patteson's deacon, 
 had informed him that he recollected the Bishop so dressed when he 
 first saw him in the islands. The London Missionary Society also
 
 212 'VaCHTINg" in MELANESIA. 
 
 has pictures showing John Williams at Eromanga clad in silk hat and 
 frock coat. The modern missionary's dress is of a peculiarly non- 
 descript character. One remembers visiting a man-of-war in the 
 Solomons and looking rather like a beachcomber than a mission priest, 
 a battered straw hat, no coat, shirt torn, skin burned as brown as any 
 native's, white trousers the worse for wear, and no boots on simply 
 because there were none to put on; all were worn out with the rough 
 travelling. We had just returned from a trip round Malaita (240 
 miles) in a whaleboat. 
 
 Some of the most pleasant natives one has known have been pro- 
 fessional murderers, men who made their money by killing; they quite 
 appreciate the value of Christian work among their neighbors. Most 
 of the popular ideas as to cannibalism take their origin from descrip- 
 tions of old Fijian habits or in a measure from the present-day prac- 
 tices of certain African peoples, but cannibalism was never universal 
 in Melanesia; in many of the islands, and even in parts of islands where 
 it is known to be practiced, it is regarded with great abhorrence. Those 
 of them who do eat human flesh eat it as a matter of course, associate 
 it with no superstitious rites or ceremonies, and simply eat it because 
 they learned the practice from their forefathers. The good old idea 
 of the lurking savage going about with his chops watering, seeking whom 
 he may devour, has no foundation in fact, and all writers of fiction have 
 in the main abandoned it now under the light of ethnological research 
 and with a better knowledge of the habits and customs of people. It 
 may safely be said that the natives in Melanesia do not kill men purely 
 for the sake of eating their flesh. Stories of ogres are common enough 
 in the islands, men and women who have developed an inordinate taste 
 for human flesh, but the ordinary native in a cannibalistic district makes 
 no distinction between human flesh and pork; it is simply flesh meat. 
 
 The first Southern Cross of the Mission was built at Blackwall by 
 Wigram's. She was a schooner of 65 tons. Miss Yonge had sug- 
 gested, when Bishop Selwyn visited England in 1853, that funds should 
 be raised for a ship among the readers of **The Heir of RedclyflFe," 
 then just published. Mrs. Keble and some friends raised the required 
 sum and gave it to the Bishop. The Southern Cross sailed in 1854 
 from London on the same day that Selwyn and Patteson left England 
 in the Duke of Portland. On arrival in New Zealand the ship was 
 utilized for a trip to the South Island, and in 1856 Patteson made his 
 first voyage to Melanesia in company with the Bishop. After the 
 wreck of this vessel in i860 on the Hen and Chickens, the schooner 
 Zillah was chartered for the Melanesian voyages. She was slow and 
 unsuitable, after the smart and speedy and comfort able(?) Southern 
 Cross, and Patteson said that she was guiltless of making 2 miles an 
 hour to windward in a wind.
 
 "yachting" in MELANESIA. 2I3 
 
 The year of Bishop Patteson's consecration the Dunediuy a vessel of 
 60 tons, was chartered. She was characterized as slow but sound. On 
 all these ships the missionaries' practice was to have classes for the 
 natives, and as in Patteson's time these classes were conducted in 
 several languages which he alone knew, his time must have been well 
 occupied. The principle on which he worked was that "to teach 
 Christianity a man must know the language well." Certainly it is 
 easy enough to acquire a few words and phrases, but in order to teach 
 and to drive truths home a good, solid, idiomatic knowledge of a lan- 
 guage is required. During this same year Patteson made a voyage to 
 the Solomons in H. M. S. Cordelia and greatly appreciated the comfort 
 of his new surroundings. He made a landing on Ysabel, where he 
 acquired a list of 200 words and phrases. The Bishop's practice 
 ever was to leave his boat's crew and go ashore wading or swimming. 
 Patteson and Selwyn were both good swimmers, and it surely requires 
 some skill to swim with a bundle of hatchets and adzes tied to one's 
 shoulders. We read of Bishop Selwyn swimming out in a surf at 
 Omba and of Patteson spending two days and a night in the Banks 
 Group in an open boat in rain and wind riding to an anchor. If 
 sailors do things of this sort we marvel at their intrepid behavior, 
 but how much greater is it when men delicately reared act thus in the 
 performance of their duty for Christ's sake ! We heard also of a mission 
 priest last year in the Solomons who left an island at daybreak and after 
 continuous rowing against wind and tide reached his destination the 
 following night. And what shall we say of Dr. Welchman journeying 
 across from Bugotu to Guadalcanar, 60 miles in an open boat, to visit 
 the sick, and then returning the same way? **The noble love of Jesus 
 impels a man to do great things." 
 
 While waiting for the second Southern Cross the schooner Sea 
 Breeze was chartered in 1862, and the following year the new Mission 
 ship arrived under the charge of Captain Tilly, who had been navigat- 
 ing lieutenant on the Cordelia and had volunteered to join Patteson. 
 In later years we remember Captain Tilly as the Mission's secretary in 
 Auckland. The second Southern Cross was a yawl-rigged brigantine 
 of 93 tons and was also built at Wigram's. Her cost was £3,000, a large 
 portion of which was contributed by Mr. Keble. Surely if Keble Col- 
 lege realized the part Mr. Keble played in forwarding the work of the 
 Melanesian Mission, some of their men would consider it their duty to 
 volunteer for service in that Mission. 
 
 No steward was carried on the Mission ship and the missionaries 
 waited on themselves until some of the native boys volunteered to 
 help. This was ever Patteson's way, and Selwyn's too; they were 
 quite ready to do all the work and rather preferred to stir up and 
 quicken their boys into helpfulness by letting the idea sink into their
 
 "yachting" in MELANESIA. 
 
 214 
 
 minds than to cause them to help through being commanded to do 
 so; but this, of course, presupposes the working of a good deal of 
 spiritual force in the mind of the natives, and one has to remember that 
 a bishop or a person in high authority will often get attention shown 
 him when an ordinary person may easily be passed over. A judicious 
 mingling of the power of example and of the assertion of authority 
 would seem to meet the case. If anything, the Mission, in following the 
 practice of its great leaders, has somewhat failed to exercise the rights 
 of its position, in trusting that the natives would themselves see and 
 realize their duty by their spiritual fathers. 
 
 Before Tilly's time the Bishop used to see to all the provisioning of 
 the ship for the voyages, hired the seamen, kept all the accounts, and 
 frequently was responsible for the navigation. temporal moresl 
 We latter-day missionaries, when clearing from Norfolk Island, so far 
 from attending to navigation, cared little in our agony which way the 
 ship's head was pointed. What lively times we used to have: a ship 
 full of natives, boys and girls, the decks cumbered with livestock, the 
 hold, the cabins, the natives' quarters filled with stores and with lug- 
 gage. There was often no available space for the boys to lie down in; 
 the 'tween decks was littered up with boxes, tables, furniture, packages, 
 all piled one on top of the other. Lucky was the boy who could curl up 
 on the underside of a table stowed upside down. Some people seem 
 to fancy that Melanesians never suffer from the same ailments that 
 Europeans do, are never seasick, never get malaria, etc. There is an 
 equally prevalent belief that natives do not mind the sun's rays at sea, 
 and also that they have no objection to getting wet with salt water, 
 whereas when a spray comes on board they instinctively try to dodge it; 
 possibly this is owing to their objection to having the salt dry on the 
 bare skin; and also they will always congregate when possible_ under 
 the shadow of the sail to avoid the sun. In rain natives start shivering 
 and their teeth begin to chatter long before a white man shows any 
 signs of feeling cold. 
 
 Between Norfolk Island and the tropic one generally expected to 
 have a bad time on the Southern Cross. The weather was often very 
 rough, with a cross sea running, and then everything started rolling 
 about. The 8-pound tins of meat stored in the lockers in the cabin 
 would often be shot violently from one side to the other; the book- 
 case door would threaten to break loose from its hinges, tumblers fell 
 off the stand and were broken to pieces, lamps and doors swung wildly 
 about with the rolling of the vessel, an occasional wave would dash 
 into the side cabins, and to shut the doors meant suffocation. The 
 bunks were arranged on both sides of the cabin, and where the ship 
 was over full some luckless wight had to camp on the settee, and his 
 experiences at night in a gale were somewhat exciting. As often as not
 
 ''yachting" in MELANESIA. 21 
 
 one of the bunks was occupied by some boy who was being taken home 
 ill. But the crown of it all was making up the teachers' pay in the 
 store-room, commonly known as "the sweat-box," the temperature 
 between 95° and 100°, no air, a rolling ship, and the smell of the bilge 
 water over all. 
 
 The old Southern Cross had no bath and we hailed with delight a 
 chance -^f standing under the rush of water that came off the deck- 
 house in a shower. Tradition says that Bishop John Selwyn used to 
 get them to turn the salt-water hose on him when they were washing 
 down the decks. 
 
 Captain Tilly resigned in 1870 and Captain Jacob succeeded him 
 and was in charge of the ship at the time of the Bishop's murder. The 
 third Southern Cross was built in 1874 and Bongard was her captain 
 from 1875 till she was sold. Bongard was the mate who took in the 
 boat at Nukapu and picked up the Bishop's body. He had previously 
 been mate on Henry Kingsley's yacht. The new ship was built in 
 Auckland, a noted place for building good schooners. She was a three- 
 masted topsail schooner of 180 tons, with a 24 horse-power auxiliary 
 engine; her cost was about £5,000, of which £2,000 came from the Pat- 
 teson Memorial Fund of the Society for the Propagation of the Gospel. 
 After she was sold she was renamed Ysahel and was noted for her fast 
 sailing. 
 
 The fourth Southern Cross served from 1891 to 1903. She was 
 built at Wyvenhoe in Essex by a noted yacht-builder, a friend of 
 Bishop Selwyn's. Her cost was £9,000 and Bishop Selwyn and his 
 friends contributed the money. In rig she was a three-masted fore- 
 and-aft schooner with yards on the foremast, and still bearing her old 
 name she is in the timber trade from Hobart to Melbourne and may 
 often be seen in the Yarra just below Queen's Bridge. Her present 
 owner speaks well of her sailing powers, but oh, when on her how one 
 longed to be elsewhere! Her sail area was much reduced after she 
 reached New Zealand, owing to a fear that the hull would not stand 
 the strain, and this reduction in driving force, together with the drag 
 of the propeller, made it very difficult to keep her well up when tacking. 
 In 1901 the Bishop asked me to go to Tikopia in the ship from Mota, a 
 distance of about 100 miles. On a previous voyage we had done the 
 same journey in 17 hours; this second time we left on Monday about 
 noon in a heavy swell; when Tuesday dawned we sighted the island 
 a long way to windward and at noon we were 20 miles to leeward of it, 
 and it was 10 a. m. the next day before we landed. It was always a 
 struggle to get from the Solomons to Santa Cruz, and sometimes it 
 took the better part of a week, but the last stretch of 600 miles from 
 Vila to Norfolk Island was a veritable sea of growls. It was generally 
 a case of making less than 100 miles a day tacking against the south-
 
 2l6 "yachting" in MELANESIA. 
 
 east trade-wind, and on one occasion we actually made a minus quantity 
 in the 24 hours' run, so far as actual mileage was concerned, though we 
 were in a better strategic position for getting south. Coming from the 
 hot tropics, we felt the cold; our blood was thin and malaria insistent; 
 supplies were apt to run short and we were perchance but poor expo- 
 nents of Christian or even of Spartan fortitude. Captain Bongard 
 remained in charge of the ship till 1897, and then he was succeeded by 
 the mate, Mr. Huggett, a very old servant of the Mission, whom Mr. 
 Hammond eventually succeeded. 
 
 The present Southern Cross arrived in 1903. Originally she had sail 
 power as well as steam, but the sails were taken off and the masts 
 reduced in number and size. Her tonnage is 500, her speed 12 knots, 
 and she cost £21,000. Captain Sinker commanded her for nearly 
 ten years and wrote a descriptive account of his first voyage to the 
 islands, which is entitled, "By Reef and Shoal."
 
 IVENS 
 
 PLATE 3 
 
 rhoto by Fentlie. Ilohart. 
 
 A. Sea-going Canoe, Malaita. 
 
 B. Model of Canoe used for Bonito Fishing, Ulawa. 
 
 C. Matema, Reef Group.
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 The first laborers imported into Queensland from the Pacific Islands 
 arrived there in the year 1864. They were imported by Captain 
 Towns, of Brisbane, for work on the cotton plantations. In 1847 
 certain pastoralists of New South Wales had requisitioned ships to 
 procure natives from the islands for employment as shepherds and 
 drovers. Two ships were employed, the brig Portania and the schooner 
 Felocity, and their object was described as "trading for cannibals," 
 and when the so-called cannibals could not be obtained by fair means 
 they were to be taken by force. These two ships called first at the 
 Loyalties and obtained 30 men, who were far from being cannibals 
 and who certainly had not the least idea of the agreement under which 
 they were supposed to serve, but thought they were out on a pleasure 
 trip to see the world. They next procured men from the Gilberts and 
 Kingsmills and then made for Rotuma, where the Loyalty Islanders 
 absconded. An affray followed, during which the whites fired on the 
 natives, and one native was killed and two whites. Thus early was 
 that traffic begun which was to lead to the death of so many men, 
 both white and brown. 
 
 In 1867 there were taken to Queensland, for a period of three years, 
 382 natives, but only 78 of them returned. From this year till the 
 end of 1890 there was a constant stream of native laborers flowing to 
 Queensland from the islands. Then for a few months the trade ceased, 
 owing to legislation passed in 1885, but it was revived in the following 
 year for a period of ten years. In 1901 provision was made for its 
 complete suppression and all the natives were ordered to be deported 
 by December 1906. 
 
 The trade has generally been called the "Polynesian labor trade" 
 or the "Pacific Islands labor trade," and the laborers have been 
 known as Polynesians or Kanakas, or occasionally as Papuans, but 
 never once by their real name of Melanesians. The western Pacific 
 has suffered from the fact of its late development and from the inhos- 
 pitable character of its natives. The eastern Pacific, Polynesia 
 proper, was well known to white people early in the nineteenth century 
 and the hospitality of its natives was proverbial, whereas New Guinea 
 and the islands of Melanesia, though close to Australia, long remained 
 unexplored and unknown, the ferocity of the people being in a measure 
 responsible for this. Accordingly everything was measured in white 
 men's minds by Polynesia. Thus Dr. Codrington had a long fight to 
 gain a hearing for the Melanesian languages and to convince people 
 that they were real independent languages and not mere offshoots of 
 Maori on the one side or of Samoan on the other. In effect he has 
 triumphantly proved that Melanesian languages are really older than 
 
 217
 
 2i8 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 Pol3'nesian and represent a much more primitive method of speech, 
 and that the Polynesian languages might possibly be described as much- 
 worn specimens of Melanesian rather than the Melanesian as crude 
 forms of Polynesian, and one would not be in error in saying that the 
 key to the study of the Polynesian languages etymologically is found 
 in the Melanesian languages. 
 
 It is curious, however, that these Melanesians in Queensland should 
 have been described as Kanakas. Kanaka is an Hawaiian word mean- 
 ing man, and is identical with the Maori tangata, so the Kanaka labor 
 trade means really the trade in men. Possibly the use of the word is 
 reminiscent of the labor trade carried on by the Spaniards from Lima 
 for laborers in the mines. Numbers of their ships went kidnapping 
 at the Sandwich Islands and at Samoa, and just as in Melanesia in 
 later days the labor vessels were known as "men-buying" or "men- 
 stealing" ships, so the Hawaiians probably named them "kanaka- 
 stealers," but it is not certain how the Hawaiian word first came to 
 be used in the trade in the western Pacific. 
 
 Polynesians as such were but little recruited for Queensland or Fiji. 
 In 1894 Bishop Wilson reported on a number of Gilbert Islanders 
 (Micronesians) w^ho had just been recruited, and in the early years 
 raids were made on the Polynesians of Uvea in the Loyalties and on 
 the Micronesians of the Line Islands. The Rotuma people included 
 in that early raid are Polynesians in geographical situation, but speak 
 a Melanesian language. Beyond these instances Polynesians as such 
 seem not to have been recruited at all. However, a few were recruited 
 from Rennell, an outlying island in the Solomons, and likewise from 
 Ongtong Java (Lord Howe Island), north of the Solomons, and from 
 Tikopia. Most of these recruits died and the survivors were returned 
 to their homes before completing their three years. 
 
 To call these Melanesians Papuans, as some of the labor-vessel 
 captains did, or worse still, as some of the Presbyterian missionaries 
 in the southern New Hebrides did, is really inexcusable from a lin- 
 guistic point of view. Everyone in this part of the Pacific ought to 
 know that the term Papuan is used to describe the peoples of New 
 Guinea. The word Papua in itself is said to be a Malay word meaning 
 frizzly or fuzzy and was applied by sea-going Malays to the frizzly- 
 headed natives of New Guinea, they themselves of course having 
 straight, long hair. So far, however, as the character of the hair goes, 
 Melanesians might well be called Papuans. The Melanesian teachers 
 in the Anglican Mission in Papua to-day are always called South Sea 
 Islanders — a name imported from Queensland, whence they were 
 obtained. All the legislation concerning the imported laborers in 
 Queensland was under the heading of Pacific Islanders or Pacific 
 island laborers.
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR IRADE. 2ig 
 
 The labor trade may be summed up as having had three stages of 
 development: (i) open kidnapping; (2) recruiting under conditions 
 somewhat improved; (3) legitimate recruiting. \ essels of various 
 sorts had been sailing in the Melancsian islands from about 1840 — 
 sandalwood traders, whalers, beche-de-mer curers. Of these the 
 whalers had perhaps been the least unsatisfactory, in that they at any 
 rate did not murder the natives, though they certainly left terrible 
 diseases behind them. The crews of two ships engaged in the sandal- 
 wood trade in 1842 shot down 26 men in one of the southern New 
 Hebrides and suffocated others with smoke in a cave. 
 
 The regular and systematic exploitation of Melanesians as laborers 
 in Queensland and Fiji did not begin before 1866-67. In the latter 
 year Bishop Patteson wrote: 
 
 "Reports are rife of a semi-legalized slave-trading between the South 
 Sea Islands and New Caledonia and Fiji. I am told that the government 
 sanctions natives being brought upon agreement to work for pay, etc., and 
 passage home in two years. We know the impossibility of making contracts 
 with New Hebrides or Solomon Island natives. It is a mere sham, an 
 evasion of some law passed, I dare say, without any dishonorable intention 
 to procure colonial labor. I saw a letter in a Sydney paper which spoke 
 strongly and properly of the necessity of the most stringent rules to pre- 
 vent the white settlers from injuring the colored men." 
 
 In 1868 Bishop Patteson speaks of the recruiting from Tanna for 
 Fiji and expresses his fears that natives were being taken under false 
 pretences owing to the impossibility of the recruiters understanding 
 the Tanna language, while to talk of making a contract with them was 
 absurd. 
 
 In 1869 it was found that the Noumea and Fiji vessels were using 
 the Bishop's name in the Banks Group in order to entice people on 
 board, pretending that they were his emissaries and accounting for 
 his absence by saying that his ship had been wrecked, or that he had 
 broken his leg, or had gone to England and had sent them to fetch 
 natives to him. As yet no force had been used, but the people feared 
 the recruiters. Certain English-speaking natives w^ere employed as 
 recruiting agents, and some of these had learned their English with 
 the Bishop. In regard to this the Bishop wrote: 
 
 "In most places where any of our young people happened to be on shore, 
 they warned their companions against these men, but not always with 
 success. This is a sad business, and very discreditable to the persons 
 employed in it, for they must know that they can not control the masters 
 of the vessels engaged in the trade. They may pass laws as to the treatment 
 the natives are to receive on the plantations, but they know that the whole 
 thing is dishonest. The natives don't intend or know anytiiing about any 
 service or labor; they don't know that they will have to work hard. They 
 are brought away under false pretences, else why tell lies to induce them to 
 go on board."* I dare say that many young fellows go on board without
 
 220 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 much persuasion. Many causes may be at work to induce thern to do so, 
 e. g., sickness in the island, quarrels, love of excitement, the spirit of enter- 
 prise, but if they knew what they were taken for I don'tthink they would go." 
 
 The premium offered by the planters, £io to £12 per head, was 
 quite sufficient to tempt some shipmasters to obtain colored labor by- 
 foul means, if fair proved impossible. Accordingly in 1869 and 1870 
 we begin to read of wholesale kidnapping and of outrageous acts of 
 violence. Two cases were reported and the captains of naval vessels 
 seized the schooners Daphne and Challenge on charges of slavery. 
 However, their zeal for righteousness cost them dearly; the courts 
 acquitted the accused, and the naval commanders were indicted by 
 the owners of the vessels for detention and unlawful seizure, and a bill 
 of £900 for damages was sent to one of them. It is recorded of the 
 Challenge that she decoyed natives of the Torres Islands into the hold 
 by means of gifts, beads, and trinkets; then the hatches were put on 
 and a boat placed over the hatchway. The natives began to cut a 
 hole in the ship's side and eventually were allowed to jump overboard 
 when the ship was 7 miles off the shore. Later on, the schooner 
 Helen was boarded by officers and was found to have no clearance and 
 no license, but the fear of the courts had made the naval captains 
 careful and, though the illegality was plain, all that was done was to 
 make the master of the Helen sign a statement of the illegality of the 
 proceedings and then the vessel was allowed to proceed. At Vanua 
 Lava, in the Banks Group, two natives were knocked down into the 
 hold and were carried to Fiji, and the captain was convicted on a 
 charge of assault and sentenced to three years' imprisonment, but the 
 charge of slavery failed. 
 
 The most notorious case, however, was that of the brig Carly which 
 left Melbourne in 1871 to recruit for Fiji. When in the New Hebrides 
 she was overhauled by H. M. S. Rosario and everything seemed to 
 be quite in order and all straightforward, whereas an awful tragedy 
 had happened on her a few days previously. In addition to the 
 English crew there were a number of "passengers" on board, and one 
 of these, a Melbourne doctor, was part ovmer of the ship. At Paama 
 they dressed up one man as a missionary and endeavored to obtain 
 recruits on the plea that they represented the Bishop. As canoes came 
 round the ship the captain and crew threw pig iron into them and sank 
 them; then the "passengers" lowered the boats and picked up the 
 struggling natives; those who resisted were hit with clubs or with pieces 
 of iron. In other places they lowered a boat on top of the canoes and 
 sank them and then picked up the swimmers. The slaves were all 
 stowed under hatches and an armed guard placed over them. The 
 murder-lust seems to have maddened the white men and (inflamed 
 probably with drink) they imagined that the slaves were about to 
 mutiny and overpower them. Someone fired a shot at the crowd
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 221 
 
 below and then the madness broke forth and everyone on deck started 
 shooting and kept it up all night long. In the morning they made an 
 armed reconnaissance and found that the whole place was a shambles; 
 some 50 had been killed outright and blood was flowing everywhere; 
 16 were badly wounded and 10 slightly. The dead were thrown over- 
 board and the legs and arms of the badly wounded were tied and they 
 too went overboard. The doctor is described as a "monster in human 
 shape," the instigator and ringleader of the atrocities; however, he 
 turned Queen's evidence and so got oflf" scot-free, while the master and 
 one of the crew were sentenced to death, but the sentence was com- 
 muted. 
 
 In the same year a ship called the Marion Rennie was the scene of 
 a terrible massacre. She had kidnapped men all over Melanesia, 
 among them being Itei of Sa*a, who had paddled out to the ship and 
 was captured, and Amasia of Fuaga near Ataa Ba}^ north Malaita. 
 Itei was baptized by me in 1896 and Amasia after returning from Fiji 
 with a Fijian wife and a son Inia, now a teacher in the Melanesian 
 Mission, settled at Qai near Cape Astrolabe and shortly afterwards 
 was killed at Ngore Fou on a trumped-up charge of witchcraft. 1 he 
 natives on the Marion Rennie mutinied and killed their white captors 
 and then were left drifting helplessly about at sea. The Tanna men 
 on board fraternized with the Solomon Islanders and killed and ate 
 the natives of the other islands. Eventually a man-of-war fell in 
 with the ship and conveyed her to Fiji. 
 
 Four Fijians who had been crew on another ship returned without 
 their white masters, and told a story of how they had been attacked 
 by natives of Anuda, Cherry Island, near Tikopia, and the white men 
 murdered. The Rosario investigated the case and decided that there 
 was no truth in it; probably the crew had themselves murdered the 
 whites. 
 
 At the island of Florida, in the Solomons, canoes were decoyed under 
 the stern of the recruiting ship and then boats were lowered on top of 
 them and the struggling natives captured in the water; those who 
 resisted had their heads chopped off' with a long knife. The ships 
 that did this sort of thing were purchasing tortoise-shell and were in 
 league with the head-hunters of the western Solomons. Desire for 
 trade caused the canoes to put out to the ships, which fairly swarmed 
 in these years, brigs, schooners, ketches, recruiting mainly for Fiji. 
 Some of them had no oflficial license to recruit, some had painted out 
 their names, others had no customs clearance from their last port. 
 In some cases the men in the canoes were lassoed round the neck from 
 the ship and were then hauled on board. In other cases the ship was 
 painted to resemble the Southern Cross and a man in a black coat went 
 on shore and invited the natives to go on board and see the Bishop. 
 Four or five years of this recruiting had practically depopulated some
 
 222 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 of the Banks Islands, and to make it worse women had been taken 
 as well as men, thus opening up an infinite possibility of wrong-doing 
 and confusion. 
 
 Queensland had legislated in 1868, by the "Polynesian laborers act," 
 with a view to prevent kidnapping, and the shipmasters had to enter 
 into a bond of £500 that they would observe the provisions of the act. 
 Also, the employers of labor entered into a bond of £10 per laborer to 
 provide for return passages; this amount was afterwards lowered to £5. 
 The act of 1868 also provided a form which was to be read in the pres- 
 ence of any natives who desired to recruit and was to be signed by the 
 resident missionary of the place, or by a European resident or a chief 
 interpreter, to the effect that the native was recruited for a term of 
 3 years or 39 moons with wages at £6 per annum and with clothes and 
 rations provided, and with supervision by the Queensland government 
 in his sphere of labor. Nothing is stated in this act about the official 
 government agent who accompanied the ship to supervise the recruit- 
 ing, although both the Queensland and the Fijian ships seem to have 
 carried them then. The Queensland act of 1880 provides for the due 
 appointment of fit and proper persons to be government agents to 
 accompany the recruiting vessels. 
 
 The Imperial Government, in the "Pacific Islanders protection 
 act" of 1872, definitely provided against any repetition of the Daphne 
 case, wherein naval officers had been sued for damages, by ordering 
 that no officer or local authority should be held responsible, either 
 civilly or criminally, in respect of the seizure or detention of any vessel 
 suspected of kidnapping, and the act of 1875 provided for the appoint- 
 ment of a high commissioner for the Pacific. 
 
 In the act of 1884 a set of regulations was laid down for the trade 
 which might be regarded as ideal; firearms and drink were not to be 
 supplied to the natives; only such firearms were to be carried as were 
 required for the ship's use; the ships were to be painted a distinguishing 
 color, light slate with a black streak 6 inches wide running fore and aft, 
 and were to carry a black ball at the masthead when recruiting. All 
 laborers were to be recruited in the presence of the government agent, 
 and two Europeans, not counting the agent, were to accompany every 
 boat when ashore recruiting. If an islander deserted after being 
 recruited he was not to be taken by force or intimidated. Women 
 were not to be taken without their husbands or without the consent 
 of their chiefs. All interpreters employed in the trade were to be paid 
 fixed wages and all bonuses and commissions thus ceased. All laborers 
 returned were to be landed at their own "passages" unless they them- 
 selves expressly desired to be landed elsewhere. The government 
 agent was given very summary powers, and if the regulations were 
 faithfully carried out the recruiting would be unexceptionable.
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 223 
 
 The Stopping of the practice of giving commissions and the paying 
 of fixed wages to all concerned must have had a very salutary effect, 
 but like the rest of the regulations it was easily evaded, as was shown 
 in the case of the William Manson. This vessel in 1894 entered into 
 an agreement with Qaisulia, the chief of Adagege, one of the artificial 
 islets off the northeast coast of Malaita, whereby he was to receive 
 a boat in payment for ten men recruited. Qaisulia and his braves 
 violently seized a number of bush natives for his masters on the 
 William Manson. The evidence as to the kidnapping was conclusive, 
 but the white men concerned in it were acquitted and the judges 
 characterized the acquittal as a miscarriage of justice. The value of 
 the regulation ordering the government agent to supervise the recruit- 
 ing and of the stipulation that at least two white men accompany the 
 boats is seen in the contrast presented by the recruiting for Noumea, 
 where one hears even now of the French boats going ashore manned 
 by natives only and of cases of violence continually recurring. 
 
 The recruiting of women was always a source of trouble in the islands. 
 Any native for the nonce might pose as a chief and give his permission 
 for a woman to leave, provided it were made worth his while, and in 
 most of the Melanesian islands it is difficult to find out who is the 
 chief, since there are practically no paramount chiefs. However, the 
 spirit of the regulation was honest enough, for white men always 
 regard it as a sine qua non that there must be of necessity regular 
 chiefs in every place. One has frequently known cases where a man 
 has persuaded a woman to recruit with him, posing as his wife, or vice 
 versa, and no one in authority on shore was questioned as to their real 
 status. On returning the pair were in difficulties and violence and 
 bloodshed ensued. Their only chance of safety would be to land in 
 a foreign place on the plea of visiting relations. 
 
 Before English was well known in the Pacific the spirit of the regu- 
 lations as to making recruits understand the terms of their engage- 
 ment was undoubtedly difficult to carry out. Indeed, even the very 
 letter of it was at times completely evaded. Pacific Islanders have 
 no term corresponding to our word year, and cases are known where 
 recruits were carefully schooled to hold up three fingers and say "three 
 yam," i. e.y three harvests, yams being planted only once a year. 
 
 In 1884 certain Queensland ships went recruiting in the islands off 
 New Guinea, and several cases of actual kidnapping occurred, and 
 many gross and violent murders of natives took place. The inter- 
 preters acted as unscrupulous and uncontrolled recruiting agents and 
 were rewarded according to, or were promised compensations corre- 
 sponding with, the number of recruits obtained. According to the 
 evidence given, men were recruited by these ships in complete ignorance 
 of what was expected of them; some thought they were going for "three 
 moons," others "to go to white men's country and walk about, '
 
 224 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 Others "to go and work on the ship," or *'to sail about." And doubt- 
 less, even in Melanesia itself, the actual signing of the recruits was 
 in many cases a mere farce. Men filed by the government agent and 
 merely touched the tip of the pen he held in his hand, thus in the par- 
 lance of the trade "marking paper," and often with no explanation 
 whatever as to the matters involved. However, in time these abuses 
 came to an end, owing to an extended knowledge among the natives 
 of what were the processes involved. 
 
 In later years the regulation that interpreters must be carried on the 
 ships involved a good deal of heart-burning among the islanders, and 
 also necessarily entailed the production of a set of first-rate humbugs 
 as interpreters, men who were cordially detested by the shore people 
 and who by virtue of their position on the ship gave themselves tre- 
 mendous airs when ashore, and who were in consequence a menace 
 to their various neighborhoods. In the later days of the trade, apart 
 from the special provisions of the act, there was really no need for 
 the employment of these interpreters, as there were people in every 
 part who understood English. 
 
 The practice grew up of recruits being obtained by means of a present 
 given to their friends. This was thoroughly in accord with native 
 ideas and was known in the native tongue everywhere as buying. 
 Even Bishop Patteson had to do the same thing when he wanted to 
 obtain boys as scholars, and the Mission has always followed his 
 practice when dealing with people in Heathen districts. 
 
 Recruiting ships were said by the natives to buy their men and in 
 the Solomons were always known as the "ships that buy men," but 
 in the New Hebrides and Banks Group, where deeds of violence had 
 been more common, they were known as "thief ships." The giving 
 of a present when recruiting was connived at by the authorities, 
 though in itself it would probably have been held to be contrary to 
 the spirit of the regulations. So long as this present consisted of harm- 
 less things like tobacco and pipes and fish-hooks and print and axes 
 and knives, no exception could possibly have been taken to the prac- 
 tice. In later years gold was frequently given, even as much as £2 
 or £3 being paid for a recruit. So firmly established was the practice 
 that if the pay were not given for a recruit, or if it were reserved to 
 be handed over to him in Queensland, or if a man ran away and got 
 on board by stealth, and no pay were sent on shore for him, he was said 
 by the people to have been stolen, and angry feelings were aroused and 
 reprisals were sure to be made later on. (The English words sell and 
 pay and even huy are frequently rendered by a single word in the 
 Melanesian tongues.) Before the annexation of the Solomon Islands 
 men were frequently bought with rifles. This of course was contrary 
 to the regulations, but undoubtedly cases of gun-running were con- 
 stantly occurring in the Solomons and in the New Hebrides.
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 225 
 
 Many a native went to Queensland w ith the express determination to 
 get a rifle on the expiration of his agreement. No one in Queensland 
 was allowed to sell rifles to a Kanaka, and yet they purchased them 
 by the thousands. Snider carbines and Tower rifles abounded in the 
 islands. The Samoan vessels were reputed to be the worst offenders 
 with regard to the furnishing of rifles, one being given for every recruit, 
 and another being brought back by the recruit on his return. All 
 vessels leaving Queensland for the islands were examined by the 
 customs officials and were searched for contraband goods, and the 
 returning laborers were forced to adopt devious means of secreting 
 their guns and ammunition. 
 
 The regulation box given to returns when they were paid oflF was a 
 huge affair, 36 by 18 inches, and sometimes these were fitted with false 
 bottoms and carbines were stowed in them, the barrel being cut short 
 or the stock being taken off. Innocent-looking boxes of Queensland 
 plants were found to have earth on the top and a layer of cartridges 
 underneath. During the Government inspection rifles were sunk in 
 the water butts or stowed away in the sheep pens or even lowered over 
 the side into the sea. The native crews would always stow away the 
 rifles for a fee, concealing them on the ship or up aloft, or even under 
 the ballast. These crews were mostly Tanna men or Loyalty Islanders, 
 hardened ruffians, most of them grown old in the trade. 
 
 When the Ivanhoe was wrecked in Florida the commissioner had 
 reason to think that the returns had a number of rifles on board, but 
 a search of the ship revealed nothing. He then went ashore and after 
 digging about in various places on the beach came across a whole 
 consignment of rifles buried in the sand. Should the ship's company 
 be likely to refuse to allow a return to land his rifle in public, a friend 
 would come out in a canoe by night and the rifle would be lowered 
 over the side. It was a common practice for returns to bring back 
 charges of dynamite with fuse and cap all fixed ready for firing. 
 These were used for dynamiting shoals of fish. Such charges of d\Tia- 
 mite have been found stowed away under the ballast next to the ves- 
 sel's skin. What wonder, then, that vessels like the Sybil and others 
 have been lost at sea when carrying returned laborers. 
 
 All boats gomg ashore to recruit were armed. The native crew had 
 rifles slung under canvas covers on the sides of the boat and the white 
 men carried revolvers and had rifles also. The regulations were that 
 no boat should go ashore to recruit unless accompanied by a covering 
 boat. The recruiting boat contained the white recruiter, who was 
 generally the ship's boatswain or second mate, and two natives; the 
 covering boat had two white men, one of them the government agent, 
 and three natives. In the recruiter's boat was the trade box, and at 
 times murderous attacks were made by the shore people to gain pos- 
 session of this box. These boats always landed stern first, so as to
 
 226 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 be able to get away quickly in the event of a quarrel on shore. They 
 turned round just outside the breakers and then backed in. This is 
 an operation requiring considerable skill, but most of the native 
 crews had served a long apprenticeship and were very skilful boatmen. 
 The boats were double-ended and were steered with a long steer-oar 
 run through a strop. 
 
 The governor-in-council reserved the right of forbidding recruitmg 
 in any certain part. For many years but little recruiting was done 
 at Santa Cruz; the kidnapping there in the early years had been the 
 direct cause of the murder of Bishop Patteson, and his death and the 
 death of Commodore Goodenough, coupled with the known hostile 
 character of the people, caused the labor ships to give Santa Cruz a 
 wide berth. Moreover, in the other islands men were comparatively 
 easy to obtain. However, one or two adventurous spirits tried 
 recruiting at Santa Cruz and obtained men from the neighborhood of 
 Graciosa Bay and also in considerable numbers from the Reef Islands. 
 In the year 1888 there was an abnormal mortality among these Santa 
 Cruz recruits in Queensland and it was decided to forbid recruiting 
 there altogether. "" The poor things frequently died of nostalgia on 
 their way to Queensland; they never learned enough English to enable 
 them to communicate their needs, either to the whites or to men of 
 their own color. No one besides themselves could talk their language, 
 so that their lot in Queensland was indeed a hard one. Yet these 
 laborers were so profitable to the state that in 1893 the regulation for- 
 bidding recruiting at Santa Cruz was rescinded and more of the people 
 were taken to the plantations, but with the same sad result. In one 
 special case, the island of Tongoa in the New Hebrides, the native 
 chiefs requested that their island be exempt; this was done, but their 
 young men paddled over to the next island and recruited there. 
 
 There can be no question that the labor trade has contributed very 
 largely to the depopulation of the islands. We have the witness of 
 Bishop Patteson, in 1871, that all the Banks Islands, with the exception 
 of Mota and part of Vanua Lava, were depopulated. Of Mae, in the 
 New Hebrides, he wrote: 
 
 "Nothing can be more deplorable than the state of the island — I counted 
 in all about 48 people in the village where of old certainly 300 were to be 
 seen. Noumea, Fiji, Brisbane, Tanna, is in everybody's mouth, muskets 
 in everyone's hand, and many more in the houses." 
 
 A very small percentage of these men ever returned home and many 
 who did return brought contagious diseases. The possession of rifles 
 also was an important factor in hastening the decrease of the popu- 
 lation everywhere. Doubtless in most cases a spear is a far more 
 deadly weapon in the hands of a Melanesian than a Snider carbine, for 
 any shot at a moderate distance, but as a rule a native seldom risks a 
 shot from far off and prefers fairly to scorch his enemy with the powder 
 of the cartridge, sticking the barrel right up against him.
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 227 
 
 Stories are told of men of Malaita wrappinj^; up old pin-fire rifle 
 cartridges in a bamboo, binding tbe whole with string, and exploding 
 the cartridge by striking the pin with a stone or a billet of wood. It 
 had got to such a pass on Malaita in later years that for a man to be 
 without a rifle was certain death; every able-bodied man carried a gun. 
 Ramofolo, the chief of Fuaga, an artificial islet by Ataa Cove, Malaita, 
 had a Winchester which he informed me he had taken from a bush 
 chief after he had stalked and killed him in order to obtain it. At 
 Su'u Malou, near Aio, on the east coast of Malaita, we landed once in the 
 presence of a great crowd of armed men, and it was only after they had 
 searched our boat and seen for themselves that there was no weapon 
 on board that they believed our statement that we did not carry fire- 
 arms. Their test of being a man was the possession of a rifle. 
 
 Queensland was a veritable refuge for wrong-doers in the islands; 
 murderers, sorcerers, adulterers, wife-stealers, thieves, discontented 
 wives, rebellious children, all hailed the coming of a labor-vessel as a 
 chance to be freed from the likelihood of punishment or from the irk- 
 someness of home restrictions. However, even a residence of 30 years 
 did not always avail to protect against home vengeance for wrong- 
 doing, either actual or imaginary, as was seen in the case of Amasia of 
 Qai, Malaita, who was shot on a charge (probably false) of witchcraft 
 committed many long years before. Amasia was quite the Fijian 
 when he returned; he wore his hair and his sulu in the Fijian style and 
 had notices posted up in his house in Fijian forbidding people to eat 
 areca nut there, and none of the people of the place could read. One 
 used to hear of cases where men w^ere landed elsewhere than at their own 
 homes, owing to a fear of reprisals for some act of wrong-doing which 
 they had committed and which had led to their recruiting. In due 
 time the news of their return reached their home and their friends 
 paid them a visit which would result in a request that they return home, 
 and all would be overlooked. If the man were persuaded he and the 
 woman he had stolen would return w4th the party and probably the 
 two would be murdered on the road or at the landing-place. 
 
 The acquiring of possessions abroad seldom proved of any benefit 
 to the native on his return. The native law everywhere in the Pacific 
 is that on returning a voyager shares with his neighbors all that he has 
 acquired. This is absolutely de rigueur and the man quite expects it 
 and thinks it natural, and w^hen his turn comes will claim a share 
 in someone else's things. In Sa'a a return was not allowed to open 
 his boxes till the chief gave him permission; then so much was stipulated 
 as the chiefs share and had to be given before any apportioning was 
 done. In one case the chief claimed the boxes after they were emptied. 
 
 The trade in later years was carried on under respectable conditions, 
 and might seem to have justified the claims of those who extolled it 
 as a great instrument of moral and physical good to the natives. 1 he 
 laborers were employed under good conditions in Queensland, were well
 
 228 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TIL\DE. 
 
 fed, weW housed, and well protected from exploitation; their hours of 
 labor were not too long, they were well cared for when they were sick, 
 and practically it was their labor that built up the sugar industry of 
 Queensland. Their value as laborers is evinced by the fact that in 
 later years the planters paid the shipowners £20 to £25 per head for 
 all laborers recruited, and also paid the Government a capitation fee 
 of £3 per head, and deposited £5 per head to cover the cost of the 
 return passage. Regular food and regular employment under decent 
 conditions made fine men of them physically, and the returns always 
 compared favorably in physical appearance with the home men. But 
 there is no question that the Queensland return, except those who 
 had been at some mission school, was as a rule a person to be avoided; 
 he had learned something of the white man's ways and had a certain 
 amount of the externals of civilization, but the old-time respect for 
 authority had all vanished and its place w^as taken by a bold, rough 
 style of address which did not differentiate between a high commis- 
 sioner or a bishop and a recruiter of a labor vessel. All alike were 
 hailed by him as mate and all would be asked for tobacco. In effect 
 he had lost the charm of the natural state. 
 
 Bishop Patteson stated in 1871 that these returns bore a bad char- 
 acter among their own people and were the ringleaders in wrong-doing. 
 The general average of morality among the natives seems to have been 
 lowered by their Queensland experiences. Those who went away 
 undoubtedly improved in their physical condition, yet this was a poor 
 compensation for the loss of their old Heathen surroundings with the 
 air of mystery, and the time-honored etiquette and good manners 
 belonging to them, and with nothing whatever to replace the loss, no 
 new set of rules learned, no new motive provided for their Uves, no new 
 code of morals taught, no new outlook given, no new measure of man- 
 kind impressed upon them by their residence in Queensland other 
 than that of physical prowess and the mere gaining of money or the 
 eating of food of a different character. The returns from Fiji were 
 often improved by their stay in civilization, and this was mainly owing 
 to the fact that they had either been employed as house servants in 
 good families or had merely changed one set of native conditions for 
 another — living on a plantation and learning Fijian or mixing almost 
 entirely with natives and learning but little English. Practically they 
 still were natives instead of being bad copies of a certain class of whites. 
 
 A very great number of lives have been lost in and owing to the 
 labor trade. The death of Bishop Patteson is an instance of the 
 terrible result that may follow when men are determined to make 
 money by acts of treachery to humanity or in defiance of the ordinary 
 laws of hospitality. Peaceful traders have been assaulted, mission- 
 aries have been killed, the boats of labor vessels have been attacked 
 and the men in them killed. All these facts can be directly traced to
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 229 
 
 some connection with the labor trade, to wrongs done to natives in 
 Queensland, to judicial punishment for crime committed, to the 
 abduction or the recruiting of a man's relations, to their deaths or 
 prolonged absences away from home and in the white man's country. 
 In addition to these a desire to gain glory and reputation, the death of 
 a chief or of some favorite child, any one of these may be the motive 
 that leads to an attack upon a white man; many sudden and seemingly 
 unprovoked attacks on a labor vessel's boats were caused by the mere 
 fact of their recruiting women. 
 
 Bishop Patteson was quite of the opinion that Melanesian natives 
 as a general rule would respect whites and would not treacherously 
 make attacks on them, but allowances have to be made for the require- 
 ments of the Heathen superstition and for the peculiar workings of the 
 native mind and to the feelings of revenge. But Alelanesians generally 
 give short shrift to shipwrecked people and to strangers who come among 
 them in a helpless plight. In 1867 a crew of English sailors from a 
 whaleboat landed at Maanaoba, an island on the northeast coast of 
 Malaita. They had deserted from their ship in the Kingsmill Islands 
 and had been drifting for weeks. Only one of the crew, a boy named 
 Renton, was allowed to survive; the rest were killed. A chief called 
 Kabau saved Renton and took him across to the mainland, where he 
 lived for eight years. Ships passed inthe interval, but he could not com- 
 municate with them; however, a labor vessel, the Bobtail Nag, anchored 
 near and he was able to send off to her a message scrawled on a board, 
 a fragment of a canoe. This piece of wood is preserved in the Brisbane 
 Museum. Large presents were given and Renton was rescued. 
 
 The accusation of treachery so often brought against Melanesians 
 has a certain amount of foundation from our point of view. Attacks 
 have been made by natives on white men merely to satisfy a blood lust 
 or for purposes of robbery, as in the case of the massacre on board of the 
 Young Dick at Singerango, Malaita; but it is indisputable that the 
 white man's behavior to natives in Melanesia has tended to cause an 
 atmosphere of distrust and dislike, and in most cases is at the bottom 
 of every attack by the natives. The man Rade, who chopped the 
 recruiter of the Young Dick at Mapo, southeast Malaita, is reported to 
 have done so with a view to killing him in revenge for the death of the 
 Mapo chief in Fiji, but Rade informed me that the man was making 
 indecent proposals to women; possibly both versions of the matter are 
 correct. The massacre of the crew of the Dancing Jf'ave, in Florida, in 
 1876, was probably caused by a feeling of anger on the part of natives 
 who had been sent home without any payment of their wages, owing to 
 the estate on which they were working having passed into the hands of 
 mortgagees. When due regard is had to the circumstances connected 
 with the inception of the trade, one can not wonder at the amount of 
 bloodshed and crime which it produced.
 
 230 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 Before the establishment of local government in the Solomons 
 British ships of war were employed in punishing any attacks made upon 
 whites. After the death of Bishop Patteson, H. M. S. Rosario went to 
 Nukapu to inquire into the causes of his murder. The natives fired 
 on the ship's boats and the fire was returned both b}^ rifles and by the 
 ship's guns, but without intending to kill anyone. A party was landed 
 and the native village was burned to teach the savages to respect white 
 men. A sailor who was wounded by an arrow afterwards died of 
 tetanus. The whole incident was unfortunate in that it embittered 
 the people and made the reopening of Santa Cruz all the harder for the 
 Mission. The natives of course thought the shooting was connected 
 with punishment for the death of the Bishop. At Raga, New Hebrides, 
 the paymaster of the Rosario was attacked and twice clubbed. Shots 
 were fired from the ship in revenge and four villages were burned, the 
 idea being that a salutary lesson was being taught to the natives, and in 
 that the innocent suffered along with the guilty the commander argued 
 that owners of the burned property would have to get their compensa- 
 tion out of the guilty ones, as if the act would not have incensed them 
 all, and a hatred for the w'hites as a w^hole would result in consequence 
 of their burned homes, while they themselves rejoiced over the fact that 
 no life had been taken among them! 
 
 The indiscriminate shooting of shells and burning of villages never 
 impressed the natives; the only thing they understand in the way of 
 reprisals is the actual taking of life. Time and again ships of war 
 fired shells into the bush, some of them entering the very houses, but 
 due notice had been given and everybody had decamped. At Mapo 
 one of the shells fired into the bush on the hills was dug out of the earth 
 and was let into the ground and used as a seat. To fire shells thus into 
 the bush was certainly an exhibition of power, but the native measured 
 matters otherwise, and it w^as not long before the power of naval ships 
 was despised, since they never actually killed anyone as a punishment 
 for these attacks on the labor-trade vessels. 
 
 The last legislation on the labor trade to Queensland was the com- 
 monwealth act called the ''Pacific Island laborers' act, 1901." No 
 Melanesians were to enter Queensland after March 31, 1904, and on 
 December 31, 1906, all agreements were to end and the final deporta- 
 tion was to begin. Exemptions were granted to any who had been five 
 years in Queensland before September i, 1884, or who had been in 
 Australia before September i, 1879, or who had resided in Australia for 
 20 years previous to December 31, 1906. Also, exemption was granted 
 to natives who were registered owners of freehold in Queensland or were 
 married to women not natives of the Pacific Islands, or were suffering 
 from bodily infirmity or were of extreme age. 
 
 The Melanesian Mission never felt it its duty to follow the natives of 
 these islands to Queensland. Bishop Patteson in 1871 was planning a
 
 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 23 1 
 
 visit to Fiji for the express purpose of devotinp; himself to the laborers 
 there; but his death quite put Fiji out of the Mission's thoughts. In 
 1876 Rev. Edward \\ ogale went to Fiji and started teachinp; there, but 
 stayed only a year or two and no one succeeded him. Bishop John 
 Selwyn visited Fiji in 1880 and made arrangements for teaching some 
 of the laborers on Sundays. Dr. Comins and Luke Masuraa visited 
 Fiji in 1894 and obtained some excellent teachers who eventually were 
 responsible for the opening of mission work in the Lau district of north 
 Malaita. It was not until the first year of Bishop Wilson's episcopate 
 that any of the authorities visited Queensland with the definite idea of 
 seeing to the Christian teaching of the Melanesians there. The church 
 in Queensland as a whole did practically nothing for them, and with the 
 exception of Mrs. Robinson's excellent school at Mackay and xMrs. 
 Clayton's at Bundaberg, whatever teaching was given to the Melane- 
 sian laborers was undenominational and much of it was in the hands of 
 the Queensland Kanaka Mission, the officials of which were Plymouth 
 Brethren. In 1896 Rev. P. T. Williams went to Queensland to organize 
 work there for the Melanesian Mission among the laborers on the Isis, 
 and Mr. Pritt was also at work on the Herbert River (called by the 
 Melanesians the Albert River). 
 
 The return from Queensland of so great a number of Kanakas, 9,000 
 in all, was likely to have varied results. The actual Christian element 
 among them would be sure to affect the Christian life in the Mission 
 villages. The Heathen element was likely to be a cause of ferment and 
 excitement and to give considerable trouble, both to their fellows and 
 also to the whites. There w^ere some who, in their ignorance of native 
 life, looked for a great material advance in the status of the people of 
 the islands, owing to the return of so many thousands of men who had 
 been taught regular habits of industry; others feared that a great out- 
 break of crime might follow and that endless feuds and desolating 
 hatreds would be stirred up, and that murders would be rife. The 
 missionaries themselves were glad that the trade had ceased, but knew 
 that a great unsettlement of conditions would follow the repatriation. 
 
 The work of landing the returns was very well done and all were 
 landed at their own proper "passages," as the landing-places were 
 termed. Where possible they were encouraged to attend the Christian 
 schools. The government station at Tulagi was open to any who feared 
 to return to their own homes. However, the leavening effect on the 
 island people as a whole has been practically nil. Even those who 
 had been most industrious in Queensland made but little attempt to 
 improve the agricultural methods of their countrymen. For months 
 after landing none of them, of course, did any work. The condi- 
 tions were so totally different, the restraint of the plantation life was 
 relaxed, all competition had ceased, and all that was now required was 
 to get enough food for the day's needs. Besides, to a man who had
 
 232 THE QUEENSLAND LABOR TRADE. 
 
 been accustomed for years to a regular diet of beef and bread or 
 biscuit and sweet potatoes three times a day, the haphazard style of 
 feeding which the islanders follow was certain to prove upsetting. 
 If work was to be done in Queensland style, then a great deal more food 
 must be forthcoming; of yams and taro for planting there never is 
 an abundance, and though a man might have returned with a good 
 round sum in gold, yet this would profit him but little if he wanted to 
 use it to give himself a start in buying stuff to plant. The large colony 
 of returns at Fiu on Malaita had the greatest difficulty for years to get 
 enough food to supply their bodily needs. 
 
 Sewing-machines and gramophones might have been bought up 
 cheaply a week or two after the returns had landed. In some cases 
 sewing-machines were actually abandoned on the beach, for no one 
 cared to carry them slung on a pole into the interior over razor-back 
 ridges and up the bed of swollen mountain torrents. Brown boots 
 and bowler hats and starched shirts and collars and ties were seen 
 adorning the persons of all and sundry in the neighborhood when the 
 trade boxes of the returns had been opened. Babies that were brought 
 ashore in all the glory of woolen socks and bonnets and white clothes 
 were rolling about naked by nightfall. 
 
 The pure Heathen amongst the returns proved generally a menace 
 to their neighborhoods by opening up old feuds and awakening feelings 
 of malice and wickedness. Some of them in fact rejoiced in their 
 reputation as "bad fellow alonga Queensland" and boasted of their 
 proficiency in evil ways and stated their determination to cause trouble. 
 The Christians among them, in proportion to their zeal and earnest- 
 ness, aided the mission work, but in many cases they felt completely 
 at sea, owing to their having learned their Christianity through the 
 medium of English and not through their own tongue, and unless they 
 were sincere and well instructed, their tendency was to hold aloof 
 or gradually to absent themselves from the services of the Church. 
 
 On the whole it may be said that the results of the repatriation have 
 caused unrest and lawlessness and increased difficulty in carrying on 
 any work whatever. The returns expected to buy goods in the traders' 
 stores at Queensland prices; they demanded Queensland rates of pay, 
 and both traders and missionaries were faced with labor troubles, and 
 crude socialistic ideas circulated freely everywhere. In fine, while 
 as a result of the repatriation, but few murders, comparatively speaking, 
 were committed and but little suffering or hardship was entailed, yet 
 the main result was unrest and disturbance, difficulty and confusion.
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 The grave Spaniard Mendana, the discoverer of the Santa Cruz 
 group, Httle knew how prophetic was this name of Holv Cross, which, 
 in his rehgious zeal, he had bestowed on the ishmd of Xdeni. lo-dav 
 memorial crosses stand in Carlisle Bay and in Graciosa Bay on Ndeni, 
 and on the beach at Nukapu, facing the setting sun. 
 
 What a host of memories the name Santa Cruz calls up to the 
 student of Melanesian history! The ill-fated Spanish admiral Don 
 Alvaro de Mendafia, after sailing twice across the Pacific, found his 
 last home in the bay which he had named Graciosa, on the island of 
 Ndeni. Three hundred years later the noble-hearted James Good- 
 enough, commodore of Her Britannic Majesty's squadron on the 
 Australian Station, met his death at the hands of the natives of Ndeni. 
 " Poor Santa Cruz! poor people!" was the exclamation of Edwin Nobbs 
 and Fisher Young, the faithful Norfolk Island lads in the company of 
 Bishop Patteson, as they writhed in the agonies of tetanus brought 
 on by wounds from those terrible Santa Cruz arrows. Mano Wad- 
 rokal, the native deacon from the Loyalty Islands, the first missionary 
 to Santa Cruz, braved the fury of these excitable people time and 
 again in his efforts to win them for Christ and for peace. Mr. Lister 
 Kaye's name will go down to posterity as that of the first white man 
 to live on Santa Cruz after Mendana and his company. Mr. Forrest 
 was the next white man to live there and for the whole of his time his 
 life was constantly in danger. Dr. John Williams was content to 
 sacrifice his worldly prospects and to devote himself to the healing of 
 ulcers and the curing of ringworm on Santa Cruz bodies. Mr. O'Fer- 
 rall and Mr. Nind endured innumerable dangers and perils by waters, 
 visiting the islands in their whaleboats. The last victim claimed by 
 Santa Cruz was the mission priest Guy Bury, who died in 191 1 after 
 a short residence of a few months, the victim not of poisonous arrows, 
 but of malignant island ulcers. 
 
 Forty miles north of Santa Cruz lies the Swallow Group, commonly 
 called the Reef Islands, and on the smallest of these, Nukapu, there 
 perished the great mission hero Bishop Patteson. On the island of 
 Vanikolo, 60 miles south of Santa Cruz, the famous French explorer 
 La Perouse, who just failed of annexing Australia to the French crown, 
 was ingloriously cast away. 
 
 A brilliant galaxy of names — explorers, sailors, missionaries, admirals, 
 bishops, priests, deacons — and still to-day Santa Cruz and its neigh- 
 boring islands are mainly Heathen. 
 
 Santa Cruz was discovered and named by Mendafia in 1595, sailing 
 from Callao in his endeavor to reach again and colonize the isles of 
 Solomon, which he had himself discovered on a previous voyage in 
 
 233
 
 
 234 
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 1566. The night before the expedition sighted land the Almirantay 
 the fourth ship of the squadron, disappeared, being wrecked possibly 
 on one of the Reef Islands or on the DufF Group, 95 miles northeast 
 of Santa Cruz. Mendana made a settlement in a bay at the north- 
 east end of the island, which he named Graciosa Bay. Here the expe- 
 dition stayed for two months, their ranks being gradually thinned by 
 disease and by the arrows of the natives. Mendafia died and v/as 
 buried at Santa Cruz. The rest of the company abandoned their 
 ideas of colonization and set out for Manila, just failing to sight the 
 Solomons when two days' sail from Santa Cruz. 
 
 The Swallow Group was discovered and named b}' Carteret in 1766 
 after his ship, the Swallow. The DufF Group, Taumako, was named 
 after the mission ship of the London Missionary Society, the Duffy 
 w^hich sighted them when on a voyage returning from Tahiti in 1797. 
 The fate of La Perouse w^as discovered by Dillon, who landed at Van- 
 ikolo in 1826. 
 
 The Santa Cruz Group lies to the east of the Solomons, and the 
 large island Ndeni, which Mendana named Santa Cruz, is 200 miles 
 from Ulawa and a little less from Santa Anna, the small island at the 
 southern extremity of San Cristoval. Ndeni is 22 miles long and 10 
 or 12 miles broad. Like most of the Melanesian islands, there is but 
 little flat land on it; the center ridge rises to a height of 2,000 feet and 
 the ridges which offset from it terminate right on the coast. The whole 
 island is covered with the usual dense vegetation. The climate is 
 wet and steamy and very trying to Europeans. The average number 
 of days on which rain falls is probably in excess of the number of rainy 
 days in the Solomons, which Dr. Guppy reckons as about 180. There 
 seem to be hardly any bush villages at all, the population living in 
 large villages on the shore. Graciosa Bay in particular, a deep inden- 
 tation at the north end, has a large number of populous villages. The 
 total population may be 8,000, but numbers died of dysentery in 191 5. 
 
 Agriculture is followed to some extent, yams, and what are known 
 in the Solomons as "pana," being grown. The "pana" is a yam that 
 has a prickly vine. Coconuts are comparatively few in number, but 
 Santa Cruz is renowned for its large canarium nut (almond). These 
 are smoked and preserved in leg-of-mutton-shaped baskets plaited 
 out of a coconut leaf. These baskets of nuts are brought off to the 
 ships for trade, but the Cruzians are quite capable of filling them with 
 rubbish and then palming them oflF on the unwary. 
 
 The weapons of the peoples in all the islands of the group are bows 
 and arrows. The bow is made of very tough wood, is of great 
 length, and exceedingly hard to bend. The bowstring is twisted out 
 of fiber made from the bark of a garden tree which in Ulawa is called 
 su a. The su a tree has berries of the size and appearance of coffee 
 berries. These are boiled in wooden bowls by means of placing hot
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 235 
 
 Stones in the bowls and are esteemed a great relish. The young shoots 
 of the su' a are eaten as spinach, and so are the catkins of the male 
 tree. Fishing-lines are made from the same bark, and some of the 
 lines are strong enough to hold a shark. They are coated with a 
 preparation made from the inner skin of the casuarina. 
 
 The arrows of Santa Cruz are much to be dreaded. Dr. Codrington 
 writes that they are uniformly 4 feet long and weigh about 2 ounces. 
 The bone point is 7 inches long and the foreshaft (of hardwood curi- 
 ously carved and colored) is 16 inches long. The bone head (human 
 bone) is covered with a preparation of vegetable ashes which is 
 supposed to give great supernatural power. The common result of a 
 wound from any of these arrows is certainly tetanus. However, it 
 is quite certain that no vegetable poisons are consciously used in the 
 preparation of the arrows, but all the preparation is done while charms 
 are being said to fasten supernatural qualities on the arrow. What 
 the native seeks for is an arrow which shall have 7nana to hurt. The 
 truth of the matter seems to be that while the arrows are poisonous, 
 they are not deliberately poisoned. A punctured wound in the tropics 
 may easily be followed by tetanus, especially if dirt be adhering to 
 whatever caused the puncture; and the breaking off of a fine point of 
 bone in a wound is sure to be dangerous and likely to be fatal. The 
 introduction into the wound of an acrid or burning substance will 
 increase the inflammation in it. In the case of natives, it is always 
 expected that tetanus will surely follow- and the expectation may go 
 a long way to cause the symptoms. One would think that the rigidity 
 of the bows and the weight of the arrows would militate considerably 
 against the accuracy of the shooting; the Malaita bow is much more 
 easily bent and the arrow is lighter, though a little longer. 
 
 The men in the whole of the group wear a turtle-shell ring hanging 
 from the septum of the nose. These rings are made out of the tail- 
 piece of the turtle shell, which is of considerable thickness and has an 
 aperture where it fits on to the carapace. This particular piece of 
 the shell, called popo (stern) in Ulawa, is much sought after. When 
 the man wishes to eat he has to lift up his nose ring. Numbers of 
 rings made of strips of turtle shell are hung in the ears, the lobe of 
 which becomes much distended, and it is a common thing for the rings 
 to touch the shoulder. Great heavy discs of pure white clam-shell 
 are suspended from the neck. The best of these are said to be made 
 from clam shells of immemorial antiquity found inland in the bush 
 and dating back to the time when the land was upheaved. On these 
 discs (called te ma, moon) a piece of turtle shell is tied, cut into the 
 conventional shape of the man-of-war hawk. Some of the discs are 
 10 inches in diameter. 
 
 The boys are clad in a native mat after attaining a certain age and 
 the men all wear the native mat as a loin-cloth. The women also
 
 236 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 wear the native mat. In the Melanesian islands of the group the 
 women are kept much in seclusion and do not mingle freely with the 
 men, and in all the islands alike there is not as much freedom of 
 intimacy between the sexes as one sees in the Solomons. Yellow 
 ocher is much used and everything gets stained by it. The men plaster 
 their hair with lime, thus bleaching it, and one often sees the hair done 
 up by wrapping a piece of paper mulberry bark round it. The women's 
 heads are shaven. 
 
 Some 20 miles north of Graciosa Bay, and in full view, there towers 
 the active volcanic cone called Tamami by the Ndeni people and 
 Tinakula by the Reef Islanders. This volcano is about 2,000 feet 
 high and rises straight out of the sea. Its top is generally covered 
 with a cloud which is half mist and half steam, and at nights the red 
 lava is often seen coursing down the steep face to the sea on the north- 
 west side of the island. On his last voyage, as he lay becalmed near 
 the volcano, Bishop Patteson noticed that it was in action, and Bishop 
 John Selwyn saw pumice and gravel descending the sides. The 
 earthquakes which are so common in the neighborhood, and which are 
 felt so frequently at Ulawa in the Solomons, are probably caused by 
 disturbances at this volcanic center. The weather coast of Ulawa 
 is frequently covered with pumice-stone carried there by the southeast 
 winds. Tinakula is uninhabited, but coconuts appear round the 
 coast and the neighboring peoples of Nupani are said to be in the habit 
 of visiting it to collect what food it offers. There is a striking Hkeness 
 between Tinakula and Meralava in the Banks Group, and were Tina- 
 kula to cease its activity the fertility of its soil would doubtless equal 
 that of Meralava. 
 
 The Swallow Group, or Reef Islands, lie about 40 miles northeast of 
 Graciosa Bay. These islands are all small and low-lying, the largest 
 of them, Fenua Loa, is 6 or 8 miles in length and very narrow, while 
 others (like Pileni and Nukapu) are tiny places which one could walk 
 round in half an hour. There is a deep-water passage on the east 
 side of Fenua Loa, between it and the cluster of islands marked Lomlom 
 on the chart. Lomlom is really the name of a village on Fenua Loa, 
 and, so far from the Lomlom of the chart being one island, it is really 
 a group of five clustered round a lagoon. The largest of these is named 
 Ngailo, and the entrance to the lagoon is by a passage facing Fenua 
 Loa. The lagoon is dotted with villages and the people of each island 
 maintain their separate lives, often being at war with their next-door 
 neighbors. There is a passage through to the south, but owing to 
 the prevailing southeast wind this is negotiable only in calm weather. 
 Two small islands lie off Ngailo, called Bange Netepa and BangeNinde. 
 These differ from the rest of the group in having no encircling reef and 
 rise precipitously to 150 feet, with no beach and with bad landings.
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 237 
 
 Fenua Loa is separated only at hif!;h water from its northern neighbor 
 Nifilole. Hup;e reefs stretch out west in a great arm from Fenua Loa, 
 and inside the encircHng reef Hes Matema. \\ hen journeying from 
 Ndeni by whaleboat to the Reef Islands the missionaries made for an 
 opening in the reef opposite Matema and then sailed or rowed up in 
 the quiet water under the lee of Fenua Loa. \he little island Pileni 
 lies 3 miles away from Nifilole, and there is a deep-water passage 
 between the two; Pileni, like Nifilole, Nukapu, and Nupani, is raised 
 only a few feet above sea-level, but it differs from them in having no 
 encircling coral reef. Nukapu is 15 miles west of Pileni and Nupani 
 20 miles still farther west. All the islands are covered with dense 
 forest. 
 
 The population of the Reefs is probably now not much more than 
 500 all told, and two distinct types of language are spoken — Mela- 
 nesian and Polynesian — each type being split up again into what 
 almost amounts to local dialects. On Fenua Loa and Nifilole and the 
 islands to the eastward the language is Melanesian and is akin to that 
 spoken on Ndeni; on Matema, Pileni, Nukapu, and Nupani the 
 language is a much-decayed form of a Polynesian language. It is 
 probable that these four Polynesian-speaking islands do not differ to 
 any very great extent in language, but that the differences in the Mela- 
 nesian-speaking islands of the group are far more noticeable. It is 
 worthy of note that of the Melanesian islands Fenua Loa (Long Island) 
 has a distinctly Polynesian name, and Nifilole is almost certainly of 
 the same language stock. 
 
 On the Reef Islands there is but little food and no good fresh water. 
 The people live largely on fish, coconuts, and breadfruit. Frequent 
 journeys are made to Ndeni in the sailing canoes to get food, which is 
 bartered for fish, dried breadfruit, and woven mats. The breadfruit 
 is dried and made up in little plaited packets of cane or is kept in a 
 silo in the ground and eaten when required. The smell of the bread- 
 fruit thus preserved is too much for European nostrils. Fish abound 
 in the shallow waters of the lagoons and are shot with arrows or caught 
 with nets or hooks. The shells found in these waters are particularly 
 numerous and beautiful. 
 
 The Santa Cruz group claims particular notice for three reasons: 
 its languages, its looms, its canoes. There has never been any attempt 
 made to learn the Polynesian language spoken in the Reefs. Bishop 
 G. A. Selwyn and Bishop Patteson were both Maori scholars and were 
 able to hold converse with the Nukapu people. Dr. Codrington has 
 published a small grammar of the Nifilole language and one a little 
 fuller of the Ndeni language. 
 
 The eating of areca nut with pepper leaf and quicklime, which is 
 characteristic of all the groups from the Solomons westward to India, 
 proceeds no farther eastward than Santa Cruz and Tikopia. In the
 
 238 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 rest of Melanesia, the New Hebrides, Banks, Torres, Fiji, and in the 
 whole of Polynesia there is no eating of areca nut, but kava-drinking 
 is found instead. In the Solomons and in New Guinea the lime is 
 conveyed to the mouth from the lime gourd or the bamboo by means 
 of a spatula or a stick, but the Cruzian scorns such delicate ways 
 and, wetting his first finger, plunges it into the lime and thence into 
 his mouth. As a result of this excessive use of Hme the lips of the 
 elders are caked quite hard and distinct articulation becomes impos- 
 sible, so that it is from the lips of the children that the languages 
 must be learned. 
 
 The Melanesian languages of the group have vowels which in cer- 
 tain parts of speech are inconstant, being attracted to the sound of 
 the neighboring vowels. Thus a certain preposition may be 7na, me, 
 moy according to the vowel in the word which it governs. All the vowels 
 except i have a secondary or modified sound. The consonants also 
 vary greatly; k and g constantly interchange, also k and ng, and d and t; 
 p, b, and v are used indifferently in the sam.e word; / and n also inter- 
 change. The personal pronouns differ materially from those in ordi- 
 nary use in Melanesia, there being only one set (instead of two or three) 
 which is suffixed to nouns as possessive, to verbs as objects, to a stem 
 ni as subjects. With the verbs the same use prevails as in the Solo- 
 mons, the personal pronouns being suffixed as objects, the sense con- 
 veyed being, however, rather participial or gerundival. The tran- 
 sitive termination of verbs so common elsewhere in Melanesia does not 
 seem to appear in Santa Cruz. 
 
 But very little of the Bible has ever been translated into any of the 
 Santa Cruz tongues. Parts of the Prayer Book were rendered by Mr. 
 Forrest into the language of Ndeni, but the translation is reported to 
 be very faulty and has practically been set aside. There is a great 
 and honorable work awaiting someone who shall set himself to learn 
 one of these tongues, to use it for the dissemination of Christian 
 truths, to ascertain its rules and methods of speech, to produce its 
 grammar and dictionary. Dr. Codrington has laid the foundations 
 for such study in his specimen grammars of Ndeni and Nifilole. The 
 main requisites for learning a native language are a good ear to catch 
 the sounds and a good memory to be able to repeat the words and 
 phrases, and a sympathetic mind that can put itself en rapport with 
 the minds of the natives. 
 
 In view of the special difficulty of the languages spoken in the Santa 
 Cruz islands, the Melanesian Mission would be well advised to set 
 one of its scholars to work on some one particular language in order 
 to impart the information thus gained to others not so well qualified 
 to work on a new language. The Rev. H. N. Drummond was of the 
 opinion that one of the Polynesian tongues, say that of Pileni or 
 Matema, should be made the standard tongue for the Reef Islands,
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 239 
 
 and that it should be used as the basis for all lirifiuistic work. The 
 peoples speaking Polynesian never learn the Melanesian tongues, 
 whereas those who speak Melanesian are nearly always bilingual. 
 It would be advisable to take the language of some one island and 
 definitely adopt it as the standard language for all translational work. 
 To learn one language well and to make that the lingua franca seems 
 a feasible project. 
 
 Undoubtedly one of the chief reasons for the present religious stag- 
 nation in Santa Cruz is the Mission's failure to learn any one of the 
 languages and to make translations. Many boys have been taken 
 from the neighborhood to Norfolk Island and have returned home in 
 order to impart to their fellows what they had learned of Christianity. 
 They might have done much even without assistance from the whites 
 had they been provided with books, but with the exception of good 
 Henry Leambi hardly one of them has risen to a sense of the duties 
 of his high calling and has kept to his post. A Matema bov, Ben 
 Teilo, has done excellent work on Vanikolo and Utupua, and has 
 lately been ordained deacon. 
 
 The Santa Cruz boys never throve when taken to Norfolk Island. 
 As a whole they failed to show much sign of intellectuality, though 
 some of them were sharp enough; they were always the first to fall ill, 
 and during any epidemic they were a constant source of anxiety. It 
 is reported that during one epidemic of meningitis five Cruzians 
 died within a few days of one another, some sickening and dying within 
 the day. In former years vessels endeavored to recruit laborers at 
 Santa Cruz for Queensland, but the recruiting was stopped owing to 
 the heavy mortality which occurred through nostalgia, men simply 
 giving up the ghost in their homesickness. In later years the Mission 
 has been taking Santa Cruz boys for training as teachers to the central 
 school at Vureas, Banks Islands. There they seem to have kept in 
 better health, but nevertheless they have been a source of great anxiety 
 and some have died. 
 
 Santa Cruz can also claim distinction as being the only place in 
 Melanesia where the people use a hand loom. Looms do not appear 
 in Polynesia at all, but the one used at Santa Cruz has great likeness 
 to those used in the Carolines. Looms also appear in the Philippines 
 and in Borneo. The Spaniards in 1595 remarked on the presence of 
 these looms. The fiber used in the weaving is derived from the stem of 
 a certain banana and is made into mats for wearing as dresses and into 
 kits for men's use to carry their lime-boxes, etc. The weaving is done 
 by the men. 
 
 The wonderful sailing canoe of the Cruzians is called loju ovtepukei. 
 These are made principally in the Duff Group, Taumako. The foun- 
 dation of the canoe is a large hollowed-out log, the aperture being 
 covered eventually to keep out the water. On this log a big stage is
 
 240 
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 built up with cross-timbers projecting on both sides, the timbers being 
 tied with sennit. To keep the log upright there is a float of light wood 
 into which strong stakes are driven; these are then fastened with sennit 
 lashings and the other ends are made fast to the timbers of the stage. 
 On the outrigger side of the stage there is a little apartment with walls 
 and roof of sago palm, where a fire can be made, and on the opposite 
 side is a sloping platform where the steersman stands holding his long 
 paddle and where the merchandise is carried. 
 
 The sail of these canoes is shaped like that of the New Guinea sailing 
 canoes, a swallow tail, and is made of sago-palm leaf. The canoes sail 
 either end first. The Cruzians make great voyages in these canoes, 
 the Matema people journeying to Vanikolo, the better part of 100 
 miles away. At times the sailing canoes are driven out of their course 
 and reach the Solomon Islands. In one of the schools at Ulawa a 
 large, wide plank, which was part of the well of one of these canoes, 
 served as a table in the school-house. The wood was that beautiful 
 rosewood known in Ulawa as liki and had been cut from the big flanges 
 of the tree; it was a rich red in color and the graining was beautiful. 
 The plank was sawed up to make the credence in the Mwadoa Church, 
 Ulawa. 
 
 The voyagers in these canoes experience great hardship at times 
 when driven out of their course by rough winds. The Southern Cross 
 rescued recently some natives out of a tepukei far out of sight of land. 
 They had been at sea for a fortnight. A case is reported of a canoe 
 with Christians on board returning from Taumako. The wind proved 
 unfavorable and for ten days they were out of sight of land. Then 
 water gave out and in their despair they prayed for rain. The next 
 day a favorable wind sprang up accompanied by heavy showers, and 
 they were able to catch some water, and then, marvellous to relate, 
 they knew their position and steered for home. 
 
 Ulawa has frequently received these tempest-driven canoes. In 
 former days the crews were killed, but during Christian times their 
 lives have been preserved. Some of them have married and settled 
 down in Ulawa; Ngorangora village had a Reef Island woman who 
 had married there. Some of these castaways have built small out- 
 rigger canoes and set ofl?" for home paddling. At night they steered by 
 the stars and they generally managed to reach home. Bishop Selwyn 
 in 1878 wrote of a Nupani man who had paddled his way back from 
 Ulawa. Some years ago, on the weather coast of Ulawa, just as the 
 darkness was coming on, we sighted two Cruzians in one of their small 
 canoes. Fires w^ere lighted and every attempt was made to induce 
 them to land, but they evidently were afraid of the reception which 
 might be awaiting them and they paddled away into the darkness. 
 Their power of locating their position is w^onderful. Captain Bon- 
 gard, of the old Southern Cross, used to tell the story of Te Fonu, one
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 241 
 
 of the two Nifilole men driven away from Nupanl, whom Bishop 
 Selwyn rescued from Port Adam on Malaita in 1877 and returned to 
 their homes and thus opened up the way again to Santa Cruz. In 
 order to test Te Fonu's knowledge of the direction of Santa Cruz the 
 captain used to call him up at night as they were saiHng and ask him 
 where Santa Cruz lay. Te Fonu would look at the stars and then 
 would point unerringly in the direction of his home, no matter on 
 what course the ship was lying. Santa Anna, one of the two small 
 islands at the east end of San Cristoval, has a considerable number of 
 Cruzians, who after being shipwrecked made their home there. 
 
 The smaller paddling canoe of Santa Cruz is well worthy of mention; 
 it is called jaolo in Ndeni. It is built in the same way as the sailing 
 canoe, a hollow log with an outrigger and with a platform joining the 
 two parts. The aperture in the log is very narrow and the paddlers 
 sit on the lip and have their legs crossed. Both the small canoes and 
 the sailing ones are coated with lime. The paddles have a large, heavy 
 blade and a long handle, and look very clumsy in comparison with the 
 long, tapering blades used in the eastern Solomons. :.?^. 
 
 When the coming of the ships was somewhat of a rare event, it was 
 a great sight to see the numbers of canoes that came flocking out to 
 barter their goods at the ship's side. Two men sat in each canoe, 
 one on each side of the platform, and often a boy would be squatting 
 on the platform among the goods brought for barter. These goods 
 consisted of bows and bundles of arrows, paddles, dancing clubs, mats, 
 kits, looms, fishing nets and lines, lassoes for shark catching, flying- 
 fish floats, shell armlets, shells and shell spoons for scraping coconut, 
 bundles of smoked canarium nuts, coconuts, dried and green bread- 
 fruit, a few yams and pana, areca nuts and pepper leaves, wild wood 
 pigeons, parrots, and native fowls. The scene alongside the ship was 
 one of the wildest excitement, the men all shouting their loudest, some 
 holding up various articles of barter and hissing to attract the atten- 
 tion of the people on the ship, some maneuvering for place alongside, 
 canoes getting foul of one another and occasionally one filling. To 
 be capsized is no hardship for a Cruzian; his canoe may even turn turtle, 
 but owing to the outrigger it will never sink. They are quite able to 
 right an overturned canoe; then, catching hold of the end, they pull 
 the canoe backward and forward, jerking the water out, and finalh', 
 jumping on board, they bail furiously till the craft is afloat again. 
 
 To allow the Cruzians to come on board is fatal to the peace of the 
 ship. They pester everyone to buy, thrusting their wares into one's 
 face and muttering tamhaika (tobacco). The price is arranged by the 
 buyer holding up as many fingers as he thinks the article to be worth 
 in sticks of tobacco, whereupon the Cruzian says monduy i. e., more, 
 and the buyer airs his knowledge of the language by saying t'ege kalinge, 
 "no, my friend," and so the process goes on. Great hands are laid
 
 242 
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 on one's arm; huge mouths red with areca nut and Hme are thrust in 
 one's face; the scent of strong-smelUng herbs worn in the shell armlets 
 almost overpowers one; clothes are marked with stains of yellow ocher; 
 an unmistakable odor of natives pervades everything, and keen eyes 
 follow every movement; great heads bleached with lime or wrapped up 
 in bark cloth are thrust into the windows; everything movable has to 
 be put out of reach, and portholes have to be shut. Captain Bongard 
 told the story of a Cruzian who endeavored to purloin one of the iron 
 ringbolts fastened to the deck, returning time and again to have a pull 
 at it. Cats are much prized by these peoples, and the ship's cat has 
 to be guarded carefully when the}' are on board. 
 
 As soon as the ship begins to move ahead and the decks are cleared 
 the confusion becomes appalling. Men hang over the ship's side 
 waiting for their canoes and expostulating furiously with the ship's 
 company; others have to be forced to leave, offering their wares all 
 the time. The ship's people throw tobacco into the water alongside 
 the canoes and instantly men dive over (the white soles of their feet 
 showing up plainly), seize the tobacco, and come up shaking the water 
 out of their mops of hair and wiping the salt off their faces; then, leap- 
 ing aboard and grasping their paddles, they start off after the rest of 
 the flotilla. Tobacco wet with salt water would not tempt a white 
 man, but the Nupani men are reported to have smoked tobacco mixed 
 with dried shark fins! It requires skill to extricate the legs from the 
 narrow openings in the canoe, and occasionally as the man goes to leap 
 overboard his leg is caught and broken bones are the result. 
 
 Those who are the last to leave the ship calmly drop into the water 
 over the side, holding their wares extended in the left hand. So quietly 
 do they slip into the water that the left hand is seldom submerged; 
 then, swimming with the right, they make their way to their friends. 
 
 The catching of sharks by the Cruzians deserves a word of notice. 
 Each canoe carries a number of half coconut shells strung on a length 
 of rattan cane. On arriving at a place frequented by sharks this hoop 
 of cane is jerked up and down in the water and a kind of gurgling 
 noise is produced by the shells which certainly attracts the sharks. 
 The noise is popularly supposed to imitate the sound made by a shoal 
 of bonito leaping out of the water, and sharks are always found where 
 there are bonito. As soon as a shark is seen, a bait (usually consisting 
 of a fish) is thrown out; this is tied to a string and is pulled in towards 
 the canoe. The shark becoming bold follows the bait until (after a 
 few throws) he gets right alongside the canoe. A man is sitting ready 
 holding a noose in his hand and, as the shark passes him, the end of 
 the noose is slipped over the shark's nose. The noose gradually 
 tightens as the shark turns and then the battle begins. Eventually 
 the shark is pulled alongside the canoe and is dispatched with blows on 
 the head from a heavy club. The shark lines are twisted out of fiber
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 243 
 
 made from the bark of the tree sn' a, described previously. Shark 
 is esteemed a great deHcacy, but Europeans would be well advised 
 if they refrained from visiting the villages where the flesh or the fins 
 are being prepared, for the odor is almost unbearable. 
 
 Mr. O'Ferrall noted that the Pileni men were sorry for themselves 
 in that no sharks were left round their island! 
 
 In 1906 Rev. H. Hawkins, now archdeacon in charge of the Maoris 
 in the diocese of Auckland, w^ent on the Southern Cross with a Maori 
 priest round the Polynesian-speaking islands of the Mission to inquire 
 into the prp rticability of sending Maori missionaries to work on these 
 islands. In addition to Matema, Pileni, Nukapu, and Nupani in the 
 Reefs, there is Tikopia to the southeast, and in the Solomons Rennell 
 and Bellona, west of San Cristoval, and Sikaiana, north of Ulawa, 
 islands all lying out of the ordinary track. They were able by talking 
 Maori to make themselves understood in all these islands, and were 
 quite confident that Maori missionaries would be able to get on there 
 from the very first w^ithout much hindrance. However, the isolation 
 in w^hich they would have been compelled to live their lives was felt 
 to be a complete barrier against the Maoris taking up the work. The 
 only chance of their being visited was during the biennial trips of the 
 Southern Cross. For white men thus to be isolated is hard enough, 
 but in the case of Maoris such isolation would be quite fatal. Never- 
 theless, several Maoris volunteered for the work, and now that the 
 Marsden Centenary has been celebrated the project is being revived 
 and Maoris of the diocese of Waiapu are raising funds to support some 
 of their own number as missionaries in Melanesia. 
 
 But it can not be said that the problem of frequent communication 
 with these islands has yet been solved. A small auxiliary schooner, 
 the Selzvyn, was built for the purpose of intercommunication between 
 the various stations in the Solomons, but so far she has not proved a 
 success and has spent a great deal of her time lying up in harbor, 
 owing to engine defects. A new engine has now been installed, and 
 better things are expected of the Selzvyn, but her small size would 
 militate against her making frequent and regular voyages to the out- 
 lying Polynesian islands in the Solomons, and it would be quite out 
 of the question to think of her visiting Santa Cruz. If the Maoris 
 are to go as missionaries, then they must be regularly visited, for 
 their health's sake as well as for the supervision of their work, and this 
 would demand the presence of a powerful auxiliary schooner stationed 
 possibly in the Solomons. 
 
 In any case, it is quite out of the question for the work at Santa Cruz, 
 when it is revived, to go on any longer without the missionaries being 
 provided with some better means of locomotion than a whaleboat. 
 Mr. Nind's breakdown in health was caused by prolonged journeys 
 bv boat. With their boats fitted with a small dipping lug-sail, when
 
 244 
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 crossing over to the Reefs from Ndeni they had to get up as far east as 
 possible, their sail being small and the westerly set very strong, and it 
 was often doubtful whether they could make Matema or not; if they 
 failed, they had to risk the reefs in the night and make for Nukapu. 
 On the return journey they were lucky if they could make land at the 
 west end of Ndeni, at Te Motu, and should the wind fail them or veer 
 round there was the prospect of a steady pull for hours, often with an 
 inferior crew, against wind and tide and current. With the settling 
 of white missionaries again in the group, it will be absolutely necessary 
 to provide a launch for the purpose of work round Ndeni itself, and in 
 order to insure regular and easy voyages to the Reefs, even if no Maoris 
 are sent. Utupua and Vanikolo lie too far away to be reached from 
 Santa Cruz in a launch, but were there a powerful auxiliary schooner 
 in the eastern Solomons regular visits could be paid to all these places. 
 
 The Heathen religion in the Santa Cruz group consists of the worship 
 of the dead. The people of importance become ghosts, duka, after 
 death, and a stock of wood is set up in their houses to represent them. 
 Offerings of pigs' flesh and of the first fruits of the crop are made to 
 the duka from time to time and are laid in front of the stock. These 
 offerings are not allowed to lie there long, and are soon eaten by the 
 ofi^erers on the plea that the duka having now eaten the immaterial 
 substance of the gifts, the offerers are free to eat the fleshy part. 
 
 The duka, when offended, causes sickness, and the doctor called in 
 is one who possesses spiritual power, malete, and who owns a duka him- 
 self. These wizards, mendeka, control the weather on a sea journey, 
 taking the stock of their duka with them and setting it up in the deck- 
 house; they also control the sunshine, the rain, and the wind. In the 
 large villages on Ndeni and in the island of Nupani a number of these 
 stocks are set up in one house, ma7iduka, and the ghost-house is often a 
 building showing some considerable artistic taste in the decoration of 
 the pillars or in the carvings. The fear of the duka controls every 
 department of life. 
 
 Feather money is peculiar to Santa Cruz; it is made of the red 
 breast-feathers of a small honey-eater, a bird of the glossiest black 
 plumage all over save for the breast-feathers; the bill is long and 
 curved. The birds are caught with birdlime, and they are sometimes 
 worn alive tied by the legs to a man's waist-belt. The red feathers 
 are gummed to pigeon's feathers, and these are bound on a prepared 
 foundation in rows, so that only the red is seen. A length of this money 
 is about 15 feet. 
 
 Bishop G. A. Selwyn visited Santa Cruz in 1852, but did not land. 
 Four years later he visited the place again and endeavored to make 
 friends with the people. Mr. Patteson and the Bishop in the same 
 year landed at Utupua, Vanikolo, and Nukapu. At the latter place 
 their knowledge of Maori stood them in good stead. In 1862 Bishop
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 245 
 
 Patteson went ashore in several places at Santa Cruz and was well 
 received. Two years later an attack was made upon his boat in 
 Graciosa Bay, and Edwin Nobbs and Fisher Young were shot with 
 arrows and died of tetanus. The reason for the attack was that they 
 probably were taken for ghosts, duka, and ghosts being really unsub- 
 stantial could not be harmed by arrows. The natives have short- 
 lived memories and are slow to receive impressions, and have no 
 power of making comparisons or of drawing inferences, and though 
 the news of the white men's coming must have been generally spread 
 abroad, yet it would be long before it got into the minds of the people 
 that these were real men like themselves, and came from a real country 
 in a real canoe like their own sailing canoes, loju, and were not merely 
 unsubstantial ghostly figures, embodied spirits of their ancestors. 
 
 In 1870 Bishop Patteson landed at Nukapu, and in the following 
 year he was killed there, Mr. Atkin and Stephen Taroaniaro being 
 shot at the same time and dying afterwards of tetanus. The reason 
 for the attack was to avenge the abduction and, to their mind, death, 
 of five natives who had been kidnapped by a labor vessel a few days 
 previously. In 1875 Commodore Goodenough was killed at Carlisle 
 Bay, on Ndeni, a few miles east of Nelua. The attack on him seems 
 to have been caused by jealousy between two villages, the attacking 
 party being unfriendly to his guides and resenting his approaching 
 them from the enemy's village, whereas had he not thus gone through 
 the villages no attack would have been made. 
 
 In 1877 communications were opened up again with the group after 
 these two murders. Bishop John Selwyn was rescued and returned 
 to Nupani with Te Fonu, one of two men who had been blown away 
 and who were being kept at Port Adam, Malaita, as "live heads," 
 ready for killing when needed. Mano Wadrokal, the native deacon 
 from Nengone, with his wife, Carrie, volunteered the next year to leave 
 Bugotu, where he had settled, and begin a school on Nifilole, Te Fonu's 
 home. Wadrokal reported that the population of Nukapu had been 
 greatly reduced by sickness; he himself was ill owing to want of food 
 and of good w^ater and was taken away from the Reefs. The follow- 
 ing year the Bishop took a party of men from Nifilole accompanied by 
 Wadrokal, and thus made friends with the people of Ndeni. While 
 Wadrokal was at Nifilole a number of people from the mainland crossed 
 over to the Reefs and visited him and made friends, and at his own 
 request he was set down at Nelua to endeavor to start a school. All 
 honor must be paid to the brave Wadrokal settling thus alone in the 
 midst of these excitable and warlike people. His own spirit seems to 
 have been a mettlesome one, and his white fathers found him hard to 
 control, but he was ever a pioneer, and he paved the way for gentler 
 and less fiery successors.
 
 246 
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 In 1 88 1 Mr. Lister Kaye joined Wadrokal at Nelua, and thus was 
 the first white man after Mendana's party to Hve on Santa Cruz. 
 Wadrokal had made friends with the people and they had built him 
 a good house, and a few of them were coming for instruction. The 
 natives were found to be hospitable and friendly, and the attitude 
 of suspicion and distrust with which they had been regarded owing to 
 their attacks on the whites now seemed likely to be dispelled. Wad- 
 rokal was withdrawn in 1883 owing to illness, and the Bishop lamented 
 that he had no native volunteer helper to place at Santa Cruz. One 
 or two attempted to stay, but the excitable character of the people 
 and the loneliness proved too much for them. Wadrokal returned in 
 1884, and was present at Nukapu when the Bishop and Mr. Kaye 
 erected Bishop Patteson's cross there. Boys w^ere taken the same year 
 to Norfolk Island from Santa Cruz for the first time, but some of them 
 died. Little progress was made with the mission work in these years, 
 and there were no baptisms except those of scholars at Norfolk Island. 
 
 The son of the chief of Nelua, Natei, and his affianced bride were 
 allowed to go up to Norfolk Island, where they were afterwards bap- 
 tized and given the names of James Goodenough and Monica. James 
 was named after the Commodore, and Mrs. Goodenough was respon- 
 sible for the cost of his education, but he never seemed to be satis- 
 factory, and eventually had to be disrated. His wife was a very good 
 woman and proved very helpful in keeping the women together. 
 Santa Cruz has all along suffered from a want of firm and reliable head 
 teachers, though Daniel Melamakaule did good work at Te Motu and 
 Henry Leambi was ever a gentle and quiet Christian gentleman. 
 
 In 1887 Mr. Forrest replaced Mr. Kaye, and the Bishop also spent a 
 short time ashore and visited the villages on the north coast. By this 
 time the school at Nelua was fairly well attended, but the teaching 
 had been intermittent. A small school was started on Nifilole by a 
 lad named Moses Tepukeia, who had been baptized at Norfolk Island. 
 
 In 1889 Mr. Forrest started a school at Te Motu, a village on the 
 island Guerta, at the west entrance to Graciosa Bay, and he had Dr. 
 Welchman to assist him. Mr. Forrest and Daniel Melamakaule 
 were shot at near Te Motu, on account of jealousy between two 
 villages, they having had occasion to cross from one village to another, 
 thus incurring the enmity of their attackers. Their courage and 
 firmness alone saved them. The first adult baptisms were also held 
 this year, six people being baptized at Nelua. The separation of the 
 sexes is very closely observed in Santa Cruz, and separate schools had 
 to be kept for the women; the one at Nelua was ably managed by 
 Monica and Fanny. At Nifilole the men and the women are never 
 together in public, not even in the gardens or in performing any house- 
 hold work, and the absence of capable women teachers in the Reefs 
 has proved a great hindrance.
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 247 
 
 Sixteen adults were baptized in 1890 at Nelua, and a small begin- 
 ning was made on Nukapu. Natei, the Heathen chief of Nelua, caused 
 a great deal of trouble by attempts to blackmail some of the teachers. 
 The following year baptisms were held both at Nelua and I e Motu, 
 and a beginning was made on Pileni. In 1894 Mr. Forrest made a 
 journey in a sailing canoe to the DufF Group, and George Domo con- 
 sented to stay and start a school there. In 1895 ^^^ baptized Christians 
 in the group numbered 116. Schools had been started at three places 
 on Ndeni and the Reef Islands had two struggling schools. 
 
 Dr. J. Williams was in charge during 1896 and he staid at Santa 
 Cruz for a while with Mr. O'Ferrall during the following year. Daniel 
 had done good work at Te Motu, and in 1896 Bishop Wilson conse- 
 crated a new church there. The first baptism in the Reef Islands was 
 held in 1897 at Nifilole; there were two candidates. The next year both 
 of the schools on Ndeni were closed, the one owing to the teacher's sin, 
 the other owing to the complete indifference and the practical lapse 
 into Heathenism of the male teachers. The two women, Monica and 
 Fanny, still persevered and saved the place from complete spiritual death. 
 
 The Te Motu school was reopened in 1898 on the teacher's repent- 
 ance, but nothing could be done at Nelua, and from then on till 
 about 191 5 Christianity practically ceased at Nelua. Te Motu has 
 somewhat relieved the darkness of the picture, but even there the work 
 proceeded but fitfully. School work in the Reef Islands was greatly 
 interrupted by the constant absences of the men on trading and fish- 
 ing expeditions; there was also a lack of good teachers, the boys who 
 were sent to Norfolk Island having to return before their time on 
 account of ill health. During this year the British Protectorate was 
 proclaimed over the group, but the resident commissioner was stationed 
 in the Solomons. Traders were now being established on Ndeni and 
 steamers were making occasional calls. The following year French 
 vessels recruited illegally, but were ordered to return the natives and 
 to pay a heavy fine. It does not appear that the punishment was 
 enforced, but all recruiting ceased. 
 
 In 1899 George Domo reopened the school on Pileni and a school 
 was begun in one of the villages on Fenua Loa. Nothing much ever 
 came of this, and the death of one of the school people brought the 
 work to an end. A boy, Govili, was sent from Nukapu to Norfolk 
 Island, but had to be returned owing to ill health. In 1900 there 
 were 120 baptized people in the group. In this year Mr. Nind arrived 
 to assist Mr. O'Ferrall. A new school was opened on Matema b\'' 
 Andrew Veleio, but the Reef Islands had no teachers for the women 
 and the men were forever travelling about. 
 
 In 1901 the first confirmation was held in Santa Cruz, at Te Motu, 
 there being 14 candidates. Nimbi, a village close to Te Motu, sent 
 four boys to Norfolk Island and new boys were obtained from Ngailo
 
 248 
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 
 
 in the Reefs. In 1904 Mr. Drummond was relieving at the Reefs, 
 Ben Teilo, a Matema boy, made good use of the trading connection 
 existing between his home and Vanikolo, visiting the latter place and 
 beginning a school there. George Domo also started a school on 
 Nukapu, but died soon after. By the end of 1905 the Christians 
 numbered 127. In 1906 a house was built for the missionaries in 
 Graciosa Bay, for the purpose of starting a central training school for 
 teachers. The site was easy of access, but proved to be too much on 
 the highway for canoes passing up and down to allow of any quiet. 
 
 A few small schools were opened on Ndeni, but the supply of teachers 
 was not sufficient. Henry Leambi was the only one of the past who 
 was still holding on. At Nifilole the people, never many in number, 
 were nearly all dead; Pileni was in an unsatisfactory state, and the two 
 teachers at Matema were making gallant efforts to hold their own. 
 Teilo opened a new school on Utupua in 1908, having several Reef 
 Island assistants, one of them being Govili of Nukapu. While home 
 for a holiday Teilo had done good work in preaching and exhorting in 
 Matema, Nukapu, and Pileni. A number of Reef Island boys were now 
 at Vureas. The statistics for 1908 show the Christians as numbering 
 only ']']. No white missionary was available now for the group. 
 
 The following year an attempt was made to work the group by 
 means of a brotherhood, consisting of Rev. H. N. Drummond, Rev. 
 C. Turner, and Mr. Blencowe; Mr. Drummond had left his work on 
 Raga for this purpose. Taumako, in the Duff Group, was visited 
 and a boy was obtained, and an attempt was made to start a school. 
 Nupani, which had asked in vain in former years for a teacher, was 
 now found closed against Christianity, owing to the devotion and 
 respect paid to the ghosts, who had given them great success in fishing. 
 Some catechumens on Nukapu were being instructed for baptism. 
 Meanwhile nothing much was doing at Ndeni, except at Te Motu; 
 the church at Nelua had fallen into ruins, and the people were content 
 to lapse into heathenism. At the end of the year Mr. Drummond 
 returned to Raga, and the next year Mr. Blencowe was the only mis- 
 sionary left. Rev. G. Bury had come to assist, but died after only 
 three months' work, the victim of malignant ulcers caused by scratches. 
 In his ignorance he had healed them over with iodoform and subse- 
 quently died of blood-poisoning. Despite the mission's long history, 
 and the fact that all the missionaries suffered more or less from these 
 ulcers on the legs, no certain means was known of preventing the 
 scratches caused by coral, etc., from festering and turning into these 
 ulcers. Corrosive sublimate, lysol, witch hazel, poulticing, iodoform, 
 carbolic acid, all these had been tried in vain. No satisfying treatment 
 was known, but the writer eventually found that antiphlogistine is a 
 remedy and safeguard in the event of the legs being scratched. 
 
 In 1910 the first baptisms were held on Nukapu, one of the persons 
 baptized being the sister of Bishop Patteson's murderer. Volunteers
 
 SANTA CRUZ. 249 
 
 from the Reef Islands offered for work in 1 ikopia, Utupua, \ anikolo, 
 Taumako, and Santa Cruz. Mr. Blencowe left for England to read for 
 holy orders, and the group was left in charge of a San Cristoval native 
 teacher, Ben Monongai. Ben Teilo was taken in 1913 to the Solomons 
 to read for deacon's orders, and Bishop Wood ordained him the same 
 year. 
 
 For the present all active mission work has ceased in Santa Cruz. 
 It is the intention of Bishop Wood to make an attempt to open up 
 things there again with Mr. Blencowe in charge, and with that object 
 in view he is asking all the friends of the Mission to unite in prayer 
 that the reproach of Santa Cruz may be wiped away. Already the 
 prayers are being answered. On the main island, Ndeni, school- 
 houses have been put in order and the people have shown themselves 
 desirous of returning to Christian ways. In the Reef Islands vol- 
 unteers have offered to go as teachers wherever they may be sent. 
 Up to the present, however, no white men are available to act as leaders. 
 Mr. Blencowe is serving as an army chaplain and the smallness of the 
 Mission's staff precludes the idea of anyone being delegated for this 
 special work. We can only wait in the certainty that our prayers will 
 be answered and that leaders will be forthcoming. 
 
 The difficulties to be overcome are undoubtedly great — climate, 
 language, isolation, indifference, instability on the part of the people. 
 However, the Christian influence of the past will have made itself felt, 
 and there will no longer be the fear of the missionaries' lives being 
 endangered by attacks from the natives. Volunteers are being called 
 for among the native Christians in other parts of the Mission, and if 
 picked men are sent and provision made for their instruction in the 
 various languages, and also for a regular visitation of the stations, then 
 it is quite certain that the success which has attended the work else- 
 where will also attend it in Santa Cruz. 
 
 Prayer for Santa Cruz. 
 
 *'0 God, our loving Father, we humbly ask Thee to 
 send priests and teachers full of the Holy Ghost and 
 of power to revive Thy Church in Santa Cruz; that the 
 faithful may be stre?igthened, the lapsed restored, and 
 the Heathen converted, through Jesus Christ our Lord.'' 
 Ameji.
 
 I YENS 
 
 PI.ATK A 
 
 B 
 
 A. Carved Food-bowls and Porpoise. 
 
 B. Food-bowls from Ulawa.
 
 IVENS 
 
 PLATE 5
 
 IVKN'S 
 
 I'l.ATE 6 
 
 ''^ ^ 
 
 A. Carvings from L Uiwa Man, Pig, and Dog. 
 
 B. Ulawa Hair-combs. 
 
 C C. Forehead Ornaments made of Clam and Turtle Shell. Florida.
 
 IVEN.S 
 
 PLATE 7 
 
 c 
 u 
 
 z 
 
 u 
 
 -o 
 
 c 
 
 u 
 
 a 
 
 tn 
 
 3 
 
 
 ~ -a 
 
 — o 
 
 ^ 
 
 Z cd 
 
 o S 
 
 "(5 
 
 > 
 o 
 o 
 
 >^ .:£ 
 
 ^ c 
 
 !— a 
 en 
 
 tfl 2 «3 
 
 "2 •- > 
 
 ^ "5) JO 
 
 ~ /-s i^ 
 
 J2 O 
 
 
 -a 
 
 c 
 
 so 
 
 O 
 CD 
 
 (0 
 
 2 "^ 
 
 3 
 O 
 
 o 
 
 £ 
 
 in 
 
 
 _2 — 
 
 < :c
 
 IVENS 
 
 PI.ATK H
 
 IVENS 
 
 PLATE 9
 
 IVENS 
 
 PLATE 10
 
 IVEX." 
 
 PI.ATF 11 
 
 
 (0 
 
 (0 
 
 
 3 
 
 a 
 
 D 
 
 z 
 
 c 
 
 00 
 
 c 
 
 3 
 O
 
 
 J 
 
 / 
 
 8748
 
 UNIVERSITY OF CALIFORNIA LIBRARY 
 
 Los Angeles 
 This book is DUE on the last date stamped below. 
 
 SEP 5 1956 
 
 " 1 3 '^fc'D URL-LO 
 
 yUL2 11967 
 
 REC'D 10- [JW 
 
 Nl/\R2 8 
 
 
 S 
 
 ib/b 
 
 -1 
 
 t^ri 
 
 ^ ^ 
 
 *''''L:'f-/fr.. 
 
 :^tCO ID- 
 
 
 Form Ly-50mll, '50 (2554)444 
 
 UNIVRRSITY of CALIFORNIA 
 
 r,KLES 
 
 . '?AKY
 
 f 
 
 3 1 i 58 00 1 55 5431 
 
 'O, 
 
 I 
 
 PLEACt DO NOT REMOVE 
 THIS BOOK CARD^ 
 
 _J 
 
 ^lUBRARYa/ 
 
 SOUTHERN REGIONAL LIBRAR]' ^ ^CILlTY 
 
 university Research Library 
 
 AA 000 694 041 5 
 
 J 
 
 iho I
 
 1:0 V 
 
 ■X., \ ' 
 
 
 •:^'-'r' 
 
 
 
 ?i:-' ,••-,' i::i! •'!, 
 
 .'■,■<)■':•, ■■■■•■•;'-^i.;;-'.;,ii(.'.-;v;:v; ':'. . ■ . 
 .'■■'■:' ,^' ':■':■.■;' i.'i';..;,-.' ;,''■),; '; ,.;■. ■ ;. ■■ 
 
 E'-' • ,^'ii' ■ i' J''; ,;'^"' '.;■•'•.■' ■."■'■' "■-'. ,"> • ■ 
 
 i; ■-. :.,',-( .•, 
 
 
 .■.,.!, -,^,,;f:;,i,;j;'r.f:',';:'vt'';'''. ■-■ ' 
 
 •■".}■!■ "'.' '■'•■ ' , '-,1. 
 
 '.JL' ;". '. .'■ 
 
 
 
 ••■J ■, /i !•( 
 
 ;■.(,< 'V; 
 
 :i'k^(:: 
 
 'f, 
 
 , ■<•/ i